* Ah Nah ae ene
Ate Ane Me HON Hie HY Be ee egee BOO tLe hgh: er enw»
eee eee
oe EES NN
Aen ee Hie He Ah Me ee
~ qe en ER Ae ER A ee A MTA EY ON
Fe nn ae? ig Bp ee Mee er i a a Ate ys At
mak ange ea tee Fm: pm SPA el . ~ . . oe
; , ve : ONY ay et bonny
we Meathe Mwrt in tne wth tewthg te met mm
1 yn AR A Qe at tee Metin A 00 Aawahamemennhetepiam sence M
Rare arma mernteymaniar meena ners
ole Nee se RE GI
Jar eae He? Botte ome te Lem Me
na t8 rem th ditty Me™ 0G A
malvern ae alae Nhe Mee Anan hn MA ener a
ae te tonne ag An en me el dr eo yh et
aan gh lo Can erate APS Ae annate thet ARN am AR eye Revenant afew .
ra tac tom teenth A atta OAL ta Bg deinen tintin frond am An Ae iy toe
tae tan Rectimaty Re Biodome oR ae lies RO I Neer LP I EI OO I
Sp Panett tno Hine he A ts ee AN
Sheba aye Aster AR she FAV Myo hat Ap de
ote —_
Qe ER Ee SH CO
heb en te
Led erm aA, Ng nO wh yee
Pte hy IR ah Be We Bee NOR oe
ae ee ee
22 tomers eos
> stem nth edna” gate tetera ee ste mot
aa reaterete « Rentn thy FP -capm tte. me teste tenant Cate ee Ar
anne ema we a np Ain Seen RE tngsate <meta ete ie: Memmi ei mre dn <tr
he pip nd tne s9eNate SMR Heng Mentenne hale HT eens a he se Mee #
= Fhe pint here WF att Ne Fie te smh Hehe aD hs He
Pe mecredi = han eo -MORreeL reete ae een Siete Wr Nine thee VN de
te Peet ene, eg APs A Wi I oe fn mabe ARO en ae ream ae
oe et Ie ein teat + rmgarer aie ate i Hm >
Le ae ah Meare mewn chet
ee ral utes, i ee ee a
ieee eee eerie ee ere ee ie ee
ee eee
te Dn a ene a een
oa RO Mt A te Rog Sony ~
Oh a eee eee ee en See
09 veyle he he
Mens evn actainat
steno tect v9 ntiem toy nth
ithe wie DAI ath. Det bentnn gH: ary ottelinny.
Ya Peed ie aay aT ee nyitelhmton tt ie MT atten IN paball oy apt Ae ttre a Marwan Ne Htagihe han! pete phe HreRirethry
fete ee Sc IE Mie tHe ng Heures tee et etn en tn tipel eae Patines
w tonnage natn Pn ime nae ts ie piston Bee Ae Arse eee repeats atin mea NT ED
~~ dete ea . =< - sap Bibe Ree AN AN te BW Teele SE tO ROMP Mar Nene ew nied Net dal Aca acini: a adl ps
Sn ty eecen e neee een gin fete este te Seth seth de tet fete Bote eras . a arte : -_ mer he Peet enna -fe-serer ee nee ie
Fe remover teeta tn th te ten edi rE: ne PR NOTION IE IO LOG ARE SA PN . Patches Roleiren ditty eeg/ Pal Pnesh a MT eel oetbnter sabre A eet ny Seat lig aN ern Son nen at oa Ne
NA IN Net Pe TOL LPO AION RT EPO AA EA AS OE AA RN IOE nlcrenoein
2 Re ee reer = hee
a eT Laine
sone tonite hg eee ne ba =m rtienae atte en}? hota tetas
te ma er en “et Aes hae I tern ln eh Nem a Ne hey Mente Prod
<e-Jan- dhe f> ayn: ersten beste aarti Ne in ie Caos MR A” Go NAA to ene tn
nokta A NI a tne de Wo iN Ni A Nae
ri
ee
es NN LRTI aM ale tend meee Digerati tet bah mt ge Fete He haere a by Mngt Apia ale pty TM Wire eD et ahem ert ah aha toMy tent aliie & Pen ee oA 9 er) hehe Pr the hey Regt
aren att > - athe to ere otvert = a
~e one dart peas Ge Sinn Bee me in ey FA, Soe ohh RIDA eset ly MEM is lm ta Ni Mm RI het te Oy AN SO ee ee a ee ee ea Taibo: ol we .
= ~ ee er ee eee tg AP gt mn ne fe as AN Pe se bony tenon aD WN DR ne Mam PPO ER eC nee NE A a ae
Pn po tetne au te tetietin arn wet tem ORR He Ae OTN LD tte Oe Ranke wee a Pe OE AN AE om tm an tN ae : ee Se OES ir a
ne dhenanaiita thgslteed a-shendi-dtetin tows Ae tin: aheitonatn sreteomtiionkny caterer aertn ste sede 3 plete er u t= alg ea ee a a AE
Sermon cee tpn earn ia tr Ser cnet Lien EL A CED AEN LAI I pin hancel a0 AGRA iene ia ton TIGA NP Reinga ASN SE AG OPP
sae Pn tne tha Tha Papen PN Note tdi Mt trite TINE: Ae As « fm hase neignesteng ental A AEP ON
aero {poder en dee peRaeseteae Naga MaRS etre fen ae At Le ae AE I Oy tt a PUM a
ae ean 7 Ap ae BNL eet mat he OAD Sth Be Pas PO Ag ION A A SCRAP ead Alka MAD ata a
Why <a ttnetne A ts AR Poy AN on aod enely VE i ah oe a I
ree alc heh ke ante teen ily ath SH Le AA dt SANLY ARAN AAD AN PM
Media thee enNae She RAN fit ~ ged NAMED Aa tiot nAees
HW AEN AG oh OP ooh OPT . , Where ahhh waged Mm ypohas Saw Se
Pe ee ee ee Oe ee fbn! heaton
1 IMA DA ety Marten d Waring Rie tothe = ere a ae nim
re et eee eee ee a Pe ee ke + atta tlnatinaitsiatithnsen -
en a ee en ee es ee dr oer, oe ee = ms
eee oe WOM yh ain Har Mingle = Ren Melty, Mra be My
pwns mint at atm my Yetion De their eeal «Mn ag tiie May
Oe ytiatoe mR 01 9 Min ptm Hw Gew antg hey the Mah
pete ee mee Ewe REE Pee Freee ©
a liialiahd -
ee
ree nn, Soe epattntigg toate Ane poems haces aS The ET in A
An pew Pav geet dena Pind a yeh ee OE OLE LET EN
. tan. hema hose imag em Hh yd thin om
ee ea ee
alanine then oe aARomy
Pie PE NON AE I
tans ow ya noe!
aye ete ae Pe Nn ane gt ee
atetaemanaantbdia abe anone I Se EOE ee
we genet Ra aetna ate tienen Od .
wt ine meet te the: marae eget reese tOn et ge at ne Hla > wean Pad fe TR at Ma Bre ihe sn FN Set
aan nr tani Se nebo nee ogy Mem Terk os Thane tw Ha
» pee oP# ho gunna penchant itn ian a atte 2% he
ere
ee ne eee
eet Se AD
Ae at ay Moet te Woe
Nea me Dm Nee
Steno ne ine Heres
—~
ee Me he
Ne rr ea
dtr mnie se Penh Ton
wee ee
Pg Be PIO et RR
ese nn ements
fap se een nm mtn in Nar et tm i ae
ogre eNO ae Oe (tng nate Altima ed
(etree epee a ae
+o i aC ne — . 5 Sma nage tone PaR Aes et he Marten BP Reith, Bi oe
een caetheFeaemtne sane trent Wartte. Dehte tin thede Me Oresin alin sa " ~ a On IE RIT SAS OR
dn dg tee ae ran rg ag Oe Am ~ re tthe Prorat hg ae ae NO tm ee NN ahs Aor tne ig das nN) ed NPE,
7 ve nnrn anisminsngintn. aim saneeie enn oP R ee tid Nentton hate esta etme SPAT
a a
eA
ent Tae tn Ateneo tne thes ed
noe PN anger” Aiea eed
See eRe ke we enlige Samre
ap eee a
: ea = = ie ire pee
hee ge mite wets Ce ete = m neon ves
ce = OAR ipa tmp Destiny ie im nT ane el atthe tart ln rey) Speke a Ben Ne RD Net Ai eta BR AY oan eter me wieras *
AAPe oe Rein are at ReeT aD aa te ia Ne Fine nt te he eR Saeeee
toe sem erO ate tap Rae ay Meee eo
ee ee we oe ee
ait ei mi Nar eat aa
eee cca atm Mate le tne tape Basted entigetie edad hha wana
ee neem ie gig ten Re He eee terete emake Math that
manne Pageden nner ta tears AA pd Mita the ew yt atnd
Te eee eee oe upsinnm cart elinanaiiestgiaralr?
a pa tee ate ReMi healt e tetany a foment in sen tinea Nd =
etree OS Fron eg te hae
ial
este ae thg Ye ette eaa ENE —a
itech Pane Ye SnD tT ea
= wy an ate thee pt t= ae
’ Pe ee ee ee ete pte eee ee te
ne he Rigen De = eth he i Nt St Tan ian OP
ep ta gener taht BTS en Mm ee an Ne yh am non ton ke rntin ms phn pert ol EC
ee en me entre ee Fe eG TAL Ep PEM POURS FE
ale eae
Sanh he tata Hieron 2 i> trem se PN 0 cA
Sn crete ta Rent edna tee Mt rn POA an fA TE
eran he Teste eae Tete Le SP et ew ea
ae =
Phd eT sai Maen er
NAPA ttn et AMY Ne
1 msm NN ent ANC
Thacher Vale ite ln Nt vneion Metal
ee een ee et eee
foe tte = > menepebuteee
eee vinAytA Ante ettecyealendn NS oath ah agier steal R AOS a Oey Ng Sneha ah Pate
oa tag tenn ag ge Re OEM
Fane walt en nein Me Ne iN ere ee Ode Pane en ‘ . Raed ee pn A AN nat N sn ASSP thet ate en A a Nm tN =
. “ re ee Se en re ee ee
weet
teen at A ad Fe Te PR
ee MEM cee
BNE E Ne on De Pt
a eg A ne taalty 2a AOE ee “nema lea TA
Went Seger TU ate nO aie tetas gibt vk afm
er eT, Se ee ne ee ee ee
nr ee ee Tiiee Mog!
Re er Se ee eee eee
ere ee es
2 » ee eee eee een ee
ee ne eee eee ee - .)
ae Riga Hn FH ee as
Ne Ste Tanta the mn A he en
ee wr ae oe mee
Ne sl A Sah in gen ie a Aa ear Ne te OA A
Satya I aT OL,
eS Se ee
A ecto Tm
Nonlin sentir t o
CAULEY MG
ee ee oe
Sot ge RT
pit ROTA Boke te gan eet
od NLL ORIG LL GLEE OP NEE
se Saran enti eten Mee NE IE Row
tee NE De Tite 2
tna ar
Saga Rae, Ae
PE a0 ge Demin
Ae Mem yey
Bs oe Oe
CO AI ANN I Mp A Om ei on eter?
rele Sp 0 eae gt Net RA ne LAePy
Ler nce Ra dete IP tg fehl PRES LR iteAN ac eRe
Petty een ee ae ee ee
Aan then RR Ath A SiO EES SM CARO A OM
a Ta ea
SON ite aeele # fom mat sth!
ost Fi Mn pet
ET aia
ate Si SOIT a ag Aen at
Gree
a
Lenin he gl na ieee eaten ante “a a mnt damning ae
re ea fe gt nt ee we
aE i a SNS ASS
oats Sn ane Ah Seeman mete eT OTE oh ELE
SO ene ae PNET PER
Pt aon mg oo Renner Plena Ne NE ,
NN edie ATR grea BM PN Oe
a Re Anat Nee fn Ainge Seti AM enh
tN wae
ne EME T He he nm
Dapeng
ne Ge hip BN EDS Em Uae fina Se to
Steere Doe Ney Pep Now el AEN pe
seen hn A me AM Nm
= abe 5a Rye nsniew nl Nonsnan nee sPm Mem
tigette nt Neen Sesto
ty Pn amtnoeNe
Rane (herent.
ae Ne one te Se RT mee Naw gee are ae Ane te AS
eee ee eve
ee ea ene
eee ee he 9 I ea RE ee
Sen tan Rn ie ene eta, Bethan mn an na ARP ee ena
—, Ce SN Or el le
ee
sal aN
ee oe
er
sem nae Sh the Be
ee Se ee
Ses . * Na meee
Set ee ee oe eaten ima «Selig!
ee ee ee eet ee ey
eee
monet M
ne ee ee ee
aay eh tinggi
maed AE Em Se Higa ante tn
ponent incctne aetna ant Rte fe an Sage
Ne ee eee =
ete Ne ASH I Ne me Nt tm Pe ee RR 80 ae
pnheonerecteinte tytn E27 on onl Be
Noes
ee ig Pant Me
Se Ra Re Ag tae
ett ON Ne ae Fa
treme te Dy ie nay
atin ina oinnans
ee hans ig tal = =
ofan nctarinnree
a ee ee ee eee
Se Pears
Neneh an At
Ly To ere
‘
yer ee ;
var {
f ne
f i 5
ie i A
i% 1 D
on
Aw
i
Rare }
ear
{
i
it (
'
|
i
F i
y eat
} me
y
)
;
j
'
era
‘
i
:
Zi
i
ify
han
‘7
i
iz j
r i
Tal
i
he
AY
ATR
i‘
= 4
|
te
Fin =
1
ees
Por i?
ty THIN
em
n
i q
D
—
ee
‘
bres
ai =
1th
<a 5
t
uf
'
JOURNAL
AND
PROCEEDINGS
OF, THE
ROYAL SOCIETY
OF
NEW SOUTH WALES
FOR
1917, [>
(INCORPORATED 1881.
Ce We eediiep Oe
THE HONORARY SECRETARIES.
‘Onal Muse
=
NET
me
THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS
MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN.
SYDNEY :
PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY.
LONDON AGENTS:
GEORGE ROBERTSON & Co., PROPRIETARY LIMITED,
17 Warwick SQuaRE, PATERNOSTER Row, Lonpon, E.C.
1917.
os
RE
ty pS “\
(RZ 4633T
a =" we Vee
yt er ek
$ — Pte
. * ‘ ;
ART,
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART,
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART,
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
ART.
CONTENTS.
VOLUME LI.
I.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By T. H. HouGHTON, M. Inst. CE.
Il.—Notes on Acacia, No. II.—Tropical Western Australia,
(Including Descriptions of New species). By J. H. Marpsn,
1.S.0., F.B.S., F.L.S. [With Plates I-IV. ] oes
III.—Tables to facilitate the location of the Cubic Pavanole
By C. J. MERFIELD, F.R.A.S. (Communicated by J. Nangle).
IV.—The problem of the Great Australian Artesian Basin.
By Avex. L. pu Toir, D.se., F.R.S. S.Afr . CRT a
J. E. Carne)...
V.—The Sydney ayer Sepia “By T. W. Renee M. Inst. CE.
ViI—On the Resin of the Outer Bark of Melaleuca uncinata.
By Henry G. SMITH, F.c.s.
VII.—Notes on Acacia, No. III. ve een al Wotton
Australia, (with descriptions of New Eee By J. H.
MAIDEN, I.S.0., F.R.S., F.L.S. ae 50
VIII.—Azurite Crystals from Mineral Hill, near Condobolin,
N.S.W. By C. ANDERSON, M.A., D.Sc. [With Plates V, VI.]
IX.—Notes on Topographical, Ecological and Taxonomic
Ocean Shoreline Vegetation of the Port Jackson District.
By A. A. Hamittron. [With Plates VII - XIII.[ aC
X.—Some Deterfninations of the Heat Conductivity of Selen-
ium by Epwa D. Saycs, B.sc. (Communicated by Acting
Professor O. U. VonwILLER) oak sat sg
XI.—Notes on the early stage of accept of Lysurus
Gardneri (L. australiensis). By J. B. CLELAND, M.D., and
Epwin CHeEeu. [With Plate XIV. } 580
XII.—A Fossil [sopod belonging to the Fresh- eae genus
Phreatoicus. By CHARLES CHILTON, M.A., D.Sc, F L.S., ete.
(Communicated by R. J. Trnuyarp). he 2
XTII.—Acacia Seedlings, Part III. By R. H. Gareaes F.L.S.
[With Plates XV - XIX] . Ps bey ae
XIV.—On some New South Wales Toubaekes By R. T.
BAKER, F.L.S. [With Plates XX — XXIV | ea
XV.—Description of T'wo Bora Grounds of the Kamilaroi
Tribe. By R. H. Maruews, us. m cee
XVI.—Note on the Great Australian netotian Base By
K. F. PirtMan, A.B.S8.M. ...
PAGE.
1
(pl
287
356
364
(iv.)
Paae.
Art. XVII.—On the occurrence of Crystals in some Australian
Timbers. By R.T. Baxer,F.u.s. [| With PlatesXXV - XXXIII| 435
Art. XVIII.—Notes on Eucalyptus (with a description of a new
species), No. V. By J. H. Maripen, F.8.8., 1.8.0. ‘as . 445.
Arr. XIX.—Cineol as a solvent in eee By C. E. Paukene
and CHRISTIAN FISCHER.. - . 467
Art. XX.—Notes on Australian ues, No. Lv. By J. B. Cudbiles
M.D., Ch.M., and EDWIN CHEEL. ... . 473
Art. XXI.—A novel application of BYoliiwe “Water in avitibati®
Organic Chemistry. By J. Ruap, m.a., ph.p., and MARGARET
Mary WILLIAMS, B.fc._... Le ii, a ae .. 008
Agsrract or PRocEspINGs NA dete be a . 1, xe.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION ... se a) Shh zh
PROCEEDINGS OF THE INDUSTRY SECTION ... a ... Xlvii. - lvi.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE AGRICULTURE SECTION we | ows =LVE —iee
PROCEEDINGS OF THE PuBLIC HEALTH AND KINDRED SCIENCES
SKCTION a ve As wee ane bot see DXATES
TiTLE Pace, CONTENTS, ‘Pust ees NotIcEs, ... -. (=a
OFFICERS FOR 1917-1918... Ps oe aa D Bae ied (VEEP
List or Members, &e. ... es Ae aa se He woe, ERD
INDEX To VotumE LI. ... as see te ae ae wai MES
SuppLemMENT.—A Check-list of the Marine Fauna of New South
Wales. Preface by CHarurs HEDLEY, F.L.S.., oft ve MEE
NOTICE.
THe Roya Society of New South Wales originated in 182] as.
the ‘ Philosophical Society of Australasia”; after an interval of
inactivity, it was resuscitated in 1850, under the name of the
“‘ Australian Philosophical Society,” by which title it was known
until 1856, when the name was changed to the “ Philosophical
~ Society of New South Wales”; in 1866, by the sanction of Her
Most Gracious Majesty Queen Victoria, it assumed its present
title, and was incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New
South Wales in 1881.
TO AUTHORS.
Authors of papers desiring illustrations, are advised to consult
the editors (Honorary Secretaries) before preparing their drawings.
Unless otherwise specially permitted, such drawings should be
carefully executed to a large scale on smooth white Bristol board
in intensely black Indian ink, so as to admit of the blocks being
prepared directly therefrom, in a form suitable for photographic
“process.” The size of a full page plate in the Journal is 4} in.
x6#in. The cost of all original drawings, and of colouring plates
must be borne by Authors. |
ERRATA.
Page 208, line 3, after loss of head, read = ae _
I ge
Page 208, line 5, after gravitation constant, read h = depth of
bore in feet.
Page 425, lines 4 and 5, for W. 10° N., read W. 10° S.
Page xviii, line 15, after with, read ‘contour planes.’
,, xxvii, line 15, for used, read ‘seems.’
», xxvii, line 9, for in, read ‘into.’
5» ,XXX, line 29, for not, read ‘no.’
55 XXxxi, line 26, after 750, read ‘lbs. per square inch.’
», XxXxu, lines 5 and 17, for 1 inch, read ‘lineal.’
», XXxill, line 15, delete whole line except the word ‘the’
The following publications of the Society, if in print, can be
obtained at the Society’s House in Elizabeth-street:— .
Transactions of the Philosophical Society, N.S. W., 1862-5, pp. 374, out of print.
Vol.
PUBLICATIONS.
O-
1. Transactions of the Royal Society, N.S. W., 1867, pp. 83,
10% .
III. “4
IV. 5
Vv. 99
VI. re)
VII. a
VIII. .
1X.
Xe
Xl: 35
XII. -
a He
XIV. o
XV. .
XVI. 35
XVII. Ss
XVIII. “
XK. 5
KEK, a
KOK y
XOX ws
XXIII. ms
XXIV. os
KOK. 3
XXVI. mA
XXVII. .
XXVIII. ie
20.08. es
0.0: 3
XXXI. .
MXXIT. Hi
60-400 ai
XXXIV. 5
200.0% x
LOOM <<
XXXVII. -
XXXVIII. -
KEXOXGDXG: 3
by,
XE, .
aot a
XLII. a
AGL Vs -
XLV. rs
XLVI. “
XLVII. s
XLVIII. M
EDX. as
L. 99
LI. oy
99
39
1868, ,, 120,
1869, ,, 173,
1870, ,, 106,
1871, ,, 72,
1872, ,, 128,
1873, ,, 182,
1874, ,, 116,
1875, ,, 235,
1876, ,, 333,
1877, ,, 305
1878, » 324, price 10s.6d.
1879, ,, 255,
1880, ,, 391,
1881, ,, 440,
1882, ,, 327,
1883, ,, 324,
1884, ,, 224,
1885, ,, 240,
1886, ,, 396,
1887, ,, 296,
1888, ,, 390
1889, ,, 534,
1890, ,, 290,
1891, ,, 348,
1892, ,, 426,
1893, ,, 530,
1894, ,, 368,
1895, ,, 600,
1896, ,, 568,
1897, ,, 626,
1898, ,, 476,
1899, ,, 400,
1900, ,, 484,
1901, ,, 581,
1902, ,, 531,
1903, ,, 663,
1904, ,, 604,
1905, ,, 274,
1906, ,, 368,
1907 ,, 377,
1908, ,, 593,
1909, ,, 466,
1910, ,, 719,
1911, ,, 611,
1912, ,, 275,
1913,<,, 06:
1914, .. 584,
1915, ,, 587,
1916, ,, 362,
T917 55) Efes
99
9?
Ropal Society of Hew South Wales.
OFPFICHRS FOR 1917-1918.
Patron:
HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONOURABLE SIR RONALD
CRAUFURD MUNRO FERGUSON, P.c., G.c.m.a.
Governor-General of the Commonwealth of Australia.
Vice-—Patron:
HIS EXCELLENCY SIR WALTER EDWARD DAVIDSON, xk.c.m.a..
Governor of the State of New South Wales.
President:
J. B. CLELAND, m.p., cn.mu.
Vice-Presidents;
HENRY G. SMITH, F.c.s. R. GREIG-SMITH, p.sc,
C. HEDLEY, rus. T. H. HOUGHTON, wu. rysv. cx.
Hon. Treasurer:
H. G, CHAPMAN, mp.
Hon. Secretaries:
Rh. H. CAMBAGE, us., rus. | J. H. MAIDEN, 15.0., F.r.s.
Members of Council:
C. ANDERSON, M.a<., D.Sc. J. NANGULE, F.pR.a.s.
E. C. ANDREWS, B.a., F.a.s. KF. H. QUAIFEH, m.a., u.v.
D. CARMENT, t.1.4., F.F.A. C. A. SUSSMILCH, rv.a.s.
W. S. DUN. H. D. WALSH, B.a.1., M. INST. C.E.
Prof. C. E. FAWSITT, p.sc., Ph.D. Prof. W.H. WARREN, .ut.p., wns,
FORM OF BEQUEST.
EE bequeath the sum of £ to the Roya, Society oF
New Soutn Watss, Incorporated by Act of the Parliament of
New South Wales in 1881, and I declare that the receipt of the
‘Treasurer for the time being of the said Corporation shall be an
-effectual discharge for the said Bequest, which I direct to be paid
within | calendar months after my decease, without
any reduction whatsoever, whether on account of Legacy Duty
thereon or otherwise, out of such part of my estate as may be
lawfully applied for that purpose. |
[Those persons who feel disposed to benefit the Royal Society of
New South Wales by Legacies, are recommended to instruct their
Solicitors to adopt the above Form of Bequest. |
TAVAVAVAVAVAVATACACACATATAYAVAVAYAYATAVACACAVAYLUAVAVAVAVATAUAVAVAYLVAVAVAVATAVATAVATAY ATA TATA TAvaAvAtATATATATAVATAVAYAVATAVAVATATATATATATAYAYATATAYAatatatALALAta AYA UAUA AAA TAYATATAUAUAYAVATATAVATATATAVAVATAYIVITIVATAVATATAUA VAAN IVIVAVAVAVAVAVAYAVAUAUAVAVAVAVA YA TA!
NOTICE.
Members are particularly requested to communicate any
change of address to the Hon. Secretaries, for which purpose
this slip is inserted. : .
Corrected Address:
Name..... ca CCE oe or OTE LOR OE Sma RIOR, ED Tero te ERR NE ER Cr te ee
TLE, GIB. oc ben botig tendo Se ek ee aR ge Re er ee cna
Ie TE ay rd Se Sh te te ENE, elm, slab acislaeivlan’e
e
DAVE ea ee, ete eee
To the
Hon. Secretaries,
The Royal Society of N. S. Wales.
5 Elizabeth Street, Sydney.
LIST OF THE MEMBERS
OF THE
opal Society of Mew South Cates.
OOOO eae
P Members who have contributed papers which have been published in the Society’s
Transactions or Journal. The numerals indicate the number of such contributions.
{~ Life Members.
Elected.
1908
1877
1904.
1916
1898
1916
1905
1909
1915
1878
1894
1894
1896
1908
1895
1906
1894
1877
1909
1916
1913
1915
1905
1888
1893
Pd
P2
PSs
me)
by
o
ie)
CO be
P2
Abbott, George Henry, B.A., M.B., chm., Macquarie-street; p.r.
‘Cooringa, 252 Liverpool Road, Summer Hill.
Abbott, W. E., ‘Abbotsford,’ Wingen.
Adams, William John, m. 1. mecH. E, 175 Clarence-street.
Allen, William John, ‘‘Oriel,’’ The Boulevard, Strathfield.
| Alexander, Frank Lee, c/o Messrs. Goodlet and Smith Ltd.,
Cement Works, Granville.
Alexander, James Maclean, m. INS1. c.£., 25 O’Connell-street.
Anderson, Charles, M.A., D.Sc. Hdin., Australian Museum, Col-
lege-street.
Andrews, EH. C., B.A., F.G.S., Geological Surveyor, Department
of Mines, Sydney.
| Armit, Henry William, m.r.c.s. Hng., u.R.c.P. Lond., 30 - 34
Elizabeth-street.
Backhouse, His Honour Judge A. P., m.a., ‘ Melita,’ Elizabeth
Bay.
3’, Baker, Richard Thomas, F.u.s., Curator, Technological Museum.
{Balsille, George, ‘ Lauderdale,’ N.E. Valley, Dunedin, N.Z.
Barff, H. E., m.a., Warden of the University of Sydney.
Barling, John, u.s., ‘St. Adrians,’ Raglan-street, Mosman.
Barraclough, 8S. Henry, B.E., M.M.E., ASSOC. M. INST. C.E., M. I.
MECH. E., Memb. Soc. Promotion Eng. Education ; Memb.
Internat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Professor of Mechanical
Engineering in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘ Marmion,’
Victoria-street, Lewisham.
Basnett, Nathaniel James, Punch-st., Mosman.
Baxter, William Howe, u.s., Chief Surveyor, Existing Lines
Office, Railway Department, Bridge-street.
Belfield, Algernon H., ‘ Eversleigh,’ Dumaresq.
Benson, William Noel, p.se. Syd., B.A. Cantab., F.c.s., Professor
of Geology, The University of Otago, Dunedin, N.Z.
Birrell, Septimus,‘ Florella,’’ Dunslaffnace-st., Hurlstone Park.
| Bishop, Joseph Eldred, Killarney-street, Mosman.
| Bishop, John, 24 Bond-street.
Blakemore, George Henry, 4 Bridge-street.
tBlaxland, Walter, F.R.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.P. Lond., No.4 A. G.
Hospital, Randwick.
_ Blomfield, Charles E., B.c.z. Melb., ‘ Woombi,’ Kangaroo Camp,
Guyra. ;
(x.)
Elected
1898 Blunno, Michele, Licentiate in Science (Rome), ‘Havilah,”
No. 1, Darlinghurst Road, Darlinghurst.
1907 Bogenrieder, Charles, u.a., No. 2 Little’s Avenue, Balmain.
1879 tBond, Albert, Wentworth Court, Flizabeth-street.
1917 Bond, Robert Henry, ‘Tiro-Tiro,’ Middleton-street, Stanmore.
1910 Bradley, Clement Henry Burton, m.B., chM., D.P.H., Depart-
ment of Public Health, Brisbane.
1876 Brady, Andrew John, u.K. and q.c.P. Irel., t.R.c.s. Trel., 175:
Macquarie-street, Sydney.
1916 Bragg, James Wood, B.A., c/o Gibson, Battle &Co. Ltd.,Kent-st.
1917 Breakwell, Ernest, B.A., Be, Government Agrostologist,
Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
1891 Brennand, Henry J. W., B.A., w.B., chm. Syd., c/o H.M.A.
_ Naval Establishments, Garden Island, Sydney; p.r. ‘Wo-
bun,’ 310 Miller-st., North Sydney.
1914 Broad, Edmund F., ‘Cobbam,’ Woolwich Road, Hunter’s Hill.
1878 { Brooks, Joseph, J.P. L.S.,F.R.A.S., F.B.G.S., * Hope Bank,’ Nelson-
street, Woollahra.
1913 | P1| Browne, William Rowan, B.sc., Assistant Lecturer and Demon-
strator in Geology in the University, Sydney.
1906 Brown, James B., Resident Master, ‘Technical School, Gran-
ville; p.r. ‘Aberdour,’ Daniel-street, Granville.
1898 {Burfitt, W. Fitzmaurice, B.A., B.Sc, M.B., Chm. Syd., ‘Wyom-
ing,’ 175 Macquarie-street, Sydney.
1890 Burne, Alfred, D.p.s., Buckland Chambers, 183 Liverpool-st.
1907 Burrows, Thomas Edward, M. INST. c.E., L.s., Metropolitan
Engineer, Public Works Department; p.r. ‘ Balboa,’ Fern-
street, Randwick.
1909 Calvert, Thomas Copley, assoc. m. rnsT. c.E., Department of
Public Works, Sydney.
1904 |P 10} Cambage, Richard Hind, L.s.,v.u.s., Under Secretary for Mines,
Department of Mines, Sydney; p.r. Park Road, Burwood.
(President 1912). Hon. Secretary.
1907 Campbell, Alfred W., u.D., Ch.m. Edin., 183 Macquarie-street.
1876 Cape, Alfred J., m.a. Syd., ‘Karoola,’ Edgecliff Road, Edgecliff.
1897 | P 4| Cardew, John Haydon, m. INST. ¢.E., L.s., Commercial Bank of
Australia Chambers, George and Margaret-streets.
1891 Carment, David, F.1.a. Grt. Brit. & Irel. ¥.F.a., Scot., 4 Whaling
Road, North Sydney.
1909 Carne, Joseph Edmund, r.a.s., Government Geologist,
Department of Mines, Sydney.
HOM Carpenter, Frederick Wm., u.a., Senior Science Master, Sydney
Grammar School, College-street.
1903 | P2| Carslaw, H. S., m.a., Sc.p., Professor of Mathematics in the
University of Sydney.
1913 | P 2| Challinor, Richard Westman, F.1.c., F.c.s., Lecturer in Chem-
istry, Sydney Technical College.
1909 | P 2} Chapman, Henry G., m.p., B.s., Professor of Pharmacology in
the University of Sydney. Hon. Treasurer.
1913 | P 7| Cheel, Edwin, Botanical Assistant,-Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
1909 |P 19) Cleland, John Burton, m.p., ch.m., Principal Assistant Micro-
| biologist, Department of Public Health, 93 Macquarie-st.
President. .
Elected
‘1918
1896
1904.
1913
1916
1876
1906
1882
1909
1892
1886
Pil
Pi2
P2
P2
PL
1912 |
1875
1890 |
1876
1910
1886
1909
1892
1885
1894
1915
1916
1906
1876
1913
1913
1908
P3
P 21
P41
P2
P3
(xi.)
Cooke, William Ernest, M.A.,¥F.R.A.s., Government Astronomer
and Professor of Astronomy in the University of Sydney,
The Observatory, Sydney.
Cook, W. E., u.c.e. Melb., M. inst. c.u., Water and Sewerage
Board, North Sydney.
Cooksey, Thomas, Ph.D., B.Sc, Lond., F.1.c., Government Analyst;
p.r. ‘Clissold,’ Calypso Avenue, Mosman.
Coombs, F. A., F.c.s., Instructor of Leather Dressing and
Tanning, Sydney ‘Technical College; p.r. 55 Willoughby
Road, North Sydney.
Coote, Edmund James, 492 George-street, Sydney.
Codrington, John Frederick, u.r.c.s. Eng., u.x.c.P. Lond, and
Edin , ‘Roseneath,’ 8 Wallis-street, Woollahra. :
Colley, David John K., Superintendent, Royal Mint, Sydney;
p.r. ‘Culwalla,’ Abbey- street, Leura.
Cornwell, Samuel, J.p., Brunswick Road, Tyagarah.
Cotton, Leo Arthur, m.a., B.Sc, Assistant Lecturer and Demon-
strator in Geology (Acting Professor) in the University
of Sydney.
Cowdery, George R., assoc. M. INST. ¢.E., Blashki Buildings,
Hunter-st.; p.r. ‘Glencoe,’ Torrington Road, Strathfield.
Crago, W. H., .R.c.s. Eng., L.R.c.P. Lond., 185 Macquarie-st.
Curtis, Louis Albert, L.s., ‘Redlands,’ Union-street, Mosman.
Dangar, Fred. H., c/o W. G. Deuchar, 12 and 14 Loftus-street.
Dare, Henry Harvey, M.£., M. INST. C.E., Commissioner, Water
Conservation and Irrigation Commission, Perpetual Trustee
Chambers, Hunter-street, Sydney.
Darley, Cecil West, m. Inst. c.z., Australian Club, Sydney,
‘Longheath,’ Little Bookham, Surrey, England.
Darnell-Smith, George Percy, B.Sc., F.1.c.,F.c.8., Department
of Agriculture, Sydney.
David, T. W. Edgeworth, c.M.G., D.S.0., B.A., D.Sc. F.B.S., F.G.S.,
Professor of Geology and Physical Geography in the
University of Sydney. (President 1895, 1910.)
Davidson, George Frederick. :
Davis, Joseph, u. INST. c.E., 25 O’Connell-street.
Deane, Henry, M.A., M. INST. C.E., F.L.S., F.R. MET. SOC., F.R.H.S.,
‘Campsie,’ 14 Mercer Road, Malvern, Victoria. (President
1897, 1907.)
Dick, James Adam, B.A. Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.B.C.S. Edin., ‘Catfoss,’
Belmore Road, Randwick.
Dick, Thomas, J.p., Port Macquarie.
Dixon, Jacob Robert Tio MR. C.8.5 0B. O2P., The University, Syd.
Diecow William, ‘ Merridong,’ Gordon Road: Killara.
Docker, His Honour Judge E. B., u.a., ‘Mostyn,’ Billyard
Avenue, Elizabeth Bay.
Dodd, Sydney, p.v.sc., F.R.c.v.s., Lecturer in Veterinary
Pathology in the University of Sydney.
Doherty, William M., Analyst, Department of Public Health,
Sydney.
Dun, William S., Paleontologist, Department of Mines, Sydney.
(xii.)
Elected
1916 | P2| Enright, Walter J., B.a., High-street, West Maitland, N.S.W.
1908 Esdaile, Edward William, 54 Hunter-street.
1879 | P 4| Etheridge, Robert, Junr., 3.P., Curator, Australian Museum ;
p.r. ‘Inglewood,’ Colo Vale, N.S.W. 2m
1896 Fairfax, Geoffrey E., S. M. Herald Office, Hunter-street.
1868 Fairfax, Sir James R., Knt., S. M. Herald Office, Hunter-st.
1887 Faithfull, R. L., u.p., New York, u.r.c.P., L.s.A. Lond., ‘ Wilga,”
18 Wylde-street, Potts Point.
1902 Faithfull, William Percy, Australian Club.
1910 Farrell, John, 683 Pitt-st.; p.r.20 Bayswater-rd., Darlinghurst.
1909 | P 2| Fawsitt, Charles Edward, p.sc, ph,p., Professor of Chemistry
in the University of Sydney.
1881 Fiaschi, Thos., M.D., M.ch, Pisa, 129 Phillip-street
1888 Fitzhardinge, His Honour Judge G. H., m.a., ‘Red Hill,”
Beecroft.
1879 {Foreman, Joseph, M.R.c.s. Eng. u.R.c.P. Edin., ‘ Wyoming,’
Macquarie-street.
1905 Foy, Mark, ‘Eumemering,’ Bellevue Hill, Woollahra.
1904, Fraser, James, M. INST. 0.E., Chief Commissioner for Railways,
Bridge-street ; p.r.‘Arnprior,’ Neutral Bay. WISwil;
1907 Freeman, William, ‘ Clodagh,’ Beresford Road, Rose Bay. ™
1899 French, J. Russell, General Manager, Bank of New South
Wales, George-street.
1881 Furber, T.F., F.R.4.s., c/o Dr. R. I. Furber, ‘Sunnyside,’ Stan-
more Road, Stantaore:
1917 Galbraith, Augustus Wm., Civil Engineer, Broken Hill, Pro-
prietory Co. Ltd., Box 196 P.O., Newcastle, N.S.W.
1906 Gosche, W. A. Hamilton, 243 Pitt-street, Sydney.
1897 Gould, Senator The Hon. Sir Albert John, K.B., v.p., ‘ Eynes-
bury,’ Edgecliff.
1916 Granger, James Darnell, pn. p., Manager of Chiswick Polish Co.
of Australia, Mitchell Road, Alexandria.
1916 Green, Victor Herbert, 7 Bent-street, Sydney.
1899 | P1| Greig-Smith, R., p.sc. Edin., M.se. Dun., Macleay Bacteriologist,
Linnean Society’s House, Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay.
(President 1915.) Vice-President.
1912 Grieve, Robert Henry, B.a., ‘ Langtoft,’ Llandaff-st., Waverley.
1912 Griffiths, F. Guy, B.a., M.D., chM., 185 Macquarie-st., Sydney.
1891 |P 16} Guthrie, Frederick B., F.1.c., F.c.s., Chemist, Department of
Agriculture, 137 George-street, Sydney. (President 1908).
1880 | P 4| Halligan, Gerald H., u.s.,¥.¢.8., ‘Riversleigh,’ Hunter’s Hill.
1912 Hallmann, E. F., B.sc,, Fort Street Boy’s High School, Peter-
sham.
1892 Halloran, Henry Ferdinand, L.s., 82 Pitt-street.
_ 1909 Hammond, Walter L., B.sc., Hurlstone Avenue, Summer Hill.
1916 |P 1} Hamilton, Arthur Andrew, Botanical Assistant, Botanic Gar-
dens, Syduey.
Elected
1912
1887 |P 8
1916
1912
1905 | P 2
1913 |P1
1884} P1
1900
1916
1914,
1891 |P3
1899
1916
1884 | P1
1905
1892
1916
1901
1905
1891 /|}P3
1906
1913
1917
1904
1905 |P 8
EO17
to; P 1
1907
1909 |P 13
1867 |
1911.
(xili.)
Hamilton, A. G., Lecturer on Nature Study, Teachers’ College,
Blackfriars.
Hamlet, William M., F.1.c., F.c.s., Member of the Society of
Public Analysts ; ‘Glendowan,’ Glenbrook, Blue Mountains.
(President 1899, 1908).
Hardy, Victor Lawson, ‘The Laurel,’ 43 Toxteth Rd., Glebe Pt-
Hare, Arthur J., Under Secretary for Lands, ‘ Booloorool,’
Monte Christo-street, Woolwich.
Harker, George, p.sc., Assistant Lecturer and Demonstrator
in Organic Chemistry in the University of Sydney.
Harper, Leslie F., r.a.s., Geological Surveyor, Department of
Mines, Sydney.
Haswell, William Aitcheson, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Emeritus Pro-
‘fessor of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy in the Uni-
versity of Sydney; p.r. ‘Mimihau,’ Woollahra Point.
Hawkins, W. E., 88 Pitt-street.
Hay Dalrymple-, Richard T., t.s.,Chief Commissioner of Forests,
N.S. Wales; p.r. Goodchap Road, Chatswood.
Hector, Alex. Burnet, 481 Kent-street.
Hedley, Charles, F.t.s., Assistant Curator, Australian Museum,
Sydney. Vice-President. (President 1914.)
Henderson, J., F.R.E.S., ‘ Wahnfried,’ Drummoyne.
Henderson, James, ‘ Dunsfold,’ Clanalpine-street, Mosman.
Henson, Joshua B., assoc. M. INST. c.E., Hunter District Water
Supply and Sewerage Board, Newcastle.
Hill, John Whitmore, ‘ Bondo,’ Western Road, Parramatta.
Hodgson, Charles George, 157 Macquarie-street.
‘| Hoggan, Henry James, Consulting Engineer, ‘Lincluden,’
Frederick-street, Rockdale.
| Holt, Thomas S., ‘Amalfi,’ Appian Way, Burwood.
Hooper, George, Assistant Superintendent, Sydney Technical
College; p.r. ‘ Branksome,’ Henson-street, Summer Hill.
Houghton, Thos. Harry, M. INST. C.E., M.I. MECH. E., 63 Pitt-st.
(President 1916), Vice-President,
Howle, Walter Cresswell, u.s.a. Lond., Bradley’s Head Road,
Mosman.
Hudson, G. Inglis, 3.P., ‘Gudvangen,’ Arden-street, Coogee.
_Hurse, Alfred Edward, a.m.1.c.z., ‘Llanfair,’ Robert-street,
Strathfield.
Jaquet, John Blockley, a.R.s.mu., F.a.s., Chief Inspector of Mines,
Department of Mines, Sydney.
Jensen, Harold Ingemann, D.sc, Treasury Chambers, George-
street, Brisbane.
Jenkins, Richard Ford, Engineer for Boring, Irrigation Com-
mission, 6 Union-street, Mosman.
Johnston, Stephen Jason, B.a., D.se., Professor of Zoology in the
University of Sydney.
Johnston, Thomas Harvey, m.a., D.sc, F.L.S., Lecturer in
Biology in the University of Queensland, Brisbane.
| Jones, Sir P. Sydney, Knt., m.p. Lond., F.R.c.s. Eng., ‘ Llandilo,’
Boulevarde, Strathfield.
Julius, George A., B.Sc., M.E., M.I. MECH. E., Culwulla Chambers,
Castlereagh-street, Sydney.
Elected
1907
1883
1873
1914
1887
1901
1896
1878
1881
1877
1911
1913
1916
1906
1909.
1883
1906
1884
1887
1878
1876
1912
1899
19038
1891
1906
1891
1880
1917
1901
P 4
P 23
P2
Pil
P2
P:9
Pl
(xiv.)
Kaleski, Robert, Holdsworthy, Liverpool.
Kater, The Hon. H. E., J.p., m.u.c., Australian Club.
Keele, Thomas William, L.s., Mm. INST. c.E., Commissioner, Sydney
Harbour Trust, Circular Quay; p.r. Llandaff-st., Waverley.
Kemp, William E., a.m. Inst. c.z., Public Works Department,
Coff’s Harbour Jetty.
Kent, Harry C., w.A., F.R.1.B.4., Dibbs’ Chambers, Pitt-street.
Kidd, Hector, M. INST. C.E., M. I. MECH. E., Cremorne Road,
Cremorne.
King, Kelso, 120 Pitt-street.
Knages, Samuel T., m.p. Aberdeen, F.R.c.s. Irel., ‘ Northcote,’
Sir Thomas Mitchell Road, Bondi.
Knibbs, G. H.,c.m.a.,F.8.S.,F.B.A.S.,L.S., Member Internat. Assoc.
Testing Materials; Memb. Brit. Sc. Guild; Commonwealth
Statistician, Melbourne; p.r. ‘Normanhurst,’ Denmark-st.,
Kew, Victoria. (President 1898.)
Knox, Edward W., ‘ Rona,’ Bellevue Hill, Double Bay.
Laseron, Charles Francis, Technological Museum.
Lawson, A, Anstruther, D.sc., F.R.S.E., F.L.s., Professor of Botany
in the University of Sydney.
L’Estrange, Walter William, 55 Albert Road, Homebush.
‘Lee, Alfred, ‘Glen Roona,’ Penkivil-street, Bondi.
Leverrier, Frank, B.A., B.Sc., K.c., 182 Phillip-street.
Lingen, J. T., m.a. Cantab., University Chambers, 167 Phillip-
street, Sydney.
Loney, Charles Augustus Luxton, M. AM. SOC. REFR. E., Equi-
table Building, George-street.
MacCormick, Sir Alexander, m.p., c.m. Edin., m.R.c.s. Hng., 185
Macquarie-street, North.
MacCulloch, Stanhope H., m.B., chm. Edin., 24 College-street.
MacDonald, Ebenezer, J.p., c/o Perpetual Trustee Co., Ld.,
Hunter-street, Sydney.
Mackellar, The Hon. Sir Charles Kinnaird, kK.c.M.G., M.L.C., M.B.,
c.m. Glas., Equitable Building, George-street.
MacKinnon, Ewen, B.sc., Agricultural Museum, George-st. N.
MacTagegart, J.N.C., m.z. Syd., assoc. M. INST. c.E., Water and
Sewerage Board District Office, Lyons Road, Drummoyne.
McDonald, Robert, J.p., u.s., Pastoral Chambers, O’Connell-st.;
p.r. ‘ Lowlands,’ William-street, Double Bay,
McDouall, Herbert Crichton, wmM.rR.c.s. Hng., .R.c.s. Lond.,
D.P.H. Cantab., Hospital for the Insane, Gladesville.
McIntosh, Arthur Marshall, ‘Glenbourne,’ Hill-st., Roseville.
McKay, R. T.,L.s., Assoc. M.INST.¢.E., Geelong Waterworks and
Sewerage Trusts Office, Geelong, Victoria.
McKinney, Hugh Giffin, m.z., Roy. Univ. Irel., M. INST. C.z.,
Sydney Safe Deposit, Paling’s Buildings, Ash-street.
McLean, Archibald Lang, m.p., cn M., B.A., c/o Bank of New
South Wales, 29 'Threadneedle-street, London, E.C.
McMaster, Colin J., u.s., Chief Commissioner of Western Lands;
p.r- Wyuna Road, Woollahra Point.
Elected
1894
1916
1909
1883 |P 32
1880 | P 1
1897
1908
1914
1875 |P 28
1903
1912
1905
1889 |P 8
1879
1879
1915
1876
1893 | P 3
1917
1891
1893
(xv.)
MeMillan, Sir William, x.c.m.a., ‘Althorne, Edgecliff Road,
Woollahra.
McQuiggin, Harold G., B.sc., Lecturer and Demonstrator in
Physiology in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘ Berolyn,’
Beaufort-street, Croydon.
Madsen, John Percival Vissing, D.sc., B.E., P. N. Russell Lec-
turer in Electrical Engineering in the University of Sydney.
Maiden, J. Henry, J.P., 1.8.0., F.B.S., F.L.S., F.R.H.S., Hon. Fellow
Roy. Soc. 8.A.; Hon. Memb. Roy. Soc, W.A.; Netherlands
Soc.for Promotion of Industry; Philadelphia College Pharm.
Southern Californian Academy of Sciences; Pharm. Soc.
N.S.W.; Brit. Pharm. Conf.; Corr. Fellow Therapeutical
Soc., Lond.; Corr. Memb. Pharm. Society Great Britain ;
Bot. Soc. Edin.; Soc. Nat. de Agricultura (Chile); Soc.
d’ Horticulture d’Alger; Union Agricole Calédonienne; Soc.
Nat. etc., de Chérbourg; Roy. Soc. Tas.; Roy. Soc. Queensl.;
Inst. Nat. Genévois; Hon. Vice-Pres. of the Forestry
Society of California; Diplomé of the Société Nationale
d’ Acclimatation de France; Linnean Medallist, Linnean
Society; N.S.W. Govt. Rep. of the ‘‘Commission Consulta-
tive pour la Protection Internat. de la Nature”; Govern-
ment Botanist and Director, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
Hon. Secretary. (President 1896, 1911.) ©
Manfred, Edmund C., Montague-street, Goulburn.
Marden, John, m.a., Lu.D., Principal, Presbyterian Ladies’
College, Croydon, Sydney.
Marshall, Frank, B.p.s. Syd., ‘Beanbah,’ 235 Macquarie-street.
Martin, A. H., ‘Ruthven,’ Eric-street, Artarmon.
Mathews, Robert Hamilton, t.s., Assoc. Etran. Soc. d’ Anthrop.
de Paris; Cor. Mem. Anthrop. Soc., Washington, U.S.A.;
Corr. Mem. Anthrop. Soc. Vienna; Corr. Mem. Roy. Geog.
Soc. Aust. Q’sland; Local Correspondent Roy. Anthrop.
Inst., Lond.; ‘ Carcuron,’ Hassall-st., Parramatta.
Meggitt, Loxley.
Meldrum, Henry John, p.r. ‘ Craig Roy,’ Sydney Rd., Manly.
Miller, James Edward, Broken Hill, New South Wales.
Mingaye, John C. H., F.1.¢., F.c.s., Assayer and Analyst to the
Department of Mines; p.r. Campbell-street, Parramatta.
Moore, Frederick H., Union Club, Sydney, c/o Dalgety’s Ltd.,
London.
Mullins, John Francis Lane, m.a. Syd., ‘ Killountan,’ Dar-
ling Point.
Murphy, R. K., Dr. Ing., Chem. Eng.; Consulting Chemical
Engineer and Lecturer in Chemistry, Technical College,
Sydney.
Myles, Charles Henry, ‘ Dingadee,’ Everton Rd., Strathfield.
Nangle, James, ¥.r.A.s., Superintendent of Technical Educa-
tion, The Technical College, Sydney; p.r. ‘St. Elmo,’
Tupper-street, Marrickville.
Nash, Norman C., Analytical Chemist, ‘Treleaven,’ Darling-
street, Balmain East.
tNoble, Edward George, t.s., 8 Louisa Road, Balmain.
Noyes, Edward, assoc. INST. C.E., ASSOC. I. MECH. £., c/o Messrs.
Noyes Bros., 115 Clarence-street, Sydney.
(xvi.)
Elected
1903 fOld, Richard, ‘ Waverton,’ Bay Road, North Sydney.
1913 Ollé, A. D., F.c.s., ‘Kareema,’ Charlotte-street, Ashfield.
1896 Onslow, Col. James William Macarthur, ‘Gilbulla,’ Menangle.
1875 O’Reilly, W. W. J., u.v., chm. Q. Univ. Irel., m.n.c.s. Eng.,.
171 Liverpool-street, Hyde Park.
1917 Ormsby, Irwin, ‘Caleula,’ Allison Road, Randwick.
1891 | Osborn, A. F., assoc. mM. INST. c.E., Water Supply Branch,.
Sydney, ‘ Uplands,’ Meadow Bank, N.S.W.
1880 Palmer, Joseph, 96 Pitt-st.; p.r. Kenneth-st., Willoughby.
1916 Parker, Philip 4 Morley, mM. INST. c E., M. AM. SOC. C.E., B.C.E.,.
B.A., Rawson Chambers, Pitt and Eddy-streets, Sydney.
1878 Paterson, Hugh, 183 Liverpool-street, Hyde Park.
1901 Peake, Algernon, M. INST. C.E., L.S., Prospect Rd., Summer Hill.
1899 Pearse, W., Union Club; p.r. ‘ Plashett,’ Jerry’s Plains, via
Singleton.
1877 Pedley, Perceval R., Lord Howe Island.
1899 Peterson, T. Tyndall, r.c.p.a., Remington Chambers, 86 Pitt-st.
1909 | P 2; Pigot, Rev. Edward F., s.J., B.a., M.B. Dub., Director of the-
Seismological Observatory, St. lznatius’College, Riverview.
1879 | P 8} Pittman, Edward F., assoc. &.s.M., L.s., ‘The Oaks,’ 65 Park-
street, South Yarra, Victoria.
1881 Poate, Frederick, L.s., ‘ Clanfield,’ 50 Penkivil-street, Bondi.
1879 Pockley, Thomas F. G., Union Club, Sydney. —
1887 |P 10) Pollock, J.A., D.sc,, F.R.S., Corr. Memb. Roy. Soc. Tasmania; Roy..
Soc. Queensland; Professor of Physics in the University
of Sydney.
1917 Poole, William, B.E., A.M. INST. C.E., L.s., 906 Culwulla Cham--
bers, Castlereagh-street.
1896 Pope, Roland James, B.A., Syd., M.D., C.M., F.R.C.S., Hdin.,
183 Macquarie-street.
1910 Potts, Henry William, r.u.s., F.c.s., Principal, Hawkesbury
Agricultural College, Richmond, 'N.S.W.
1914 Purdy, John Smith, pD.s.0., m.D.,c.m. Aberd., D.P.H. Camb., Metro--
politan Medical Officer of Health, Town Hall, Sydney.
18938 Purser, Cecil, B.A., M.B., Ch.M. Syd., 193 Macquarie-street.
1876 |P1/| Quaife, F. H., w.a., m.p., u.s, ‘ Yirrimbirri,’ Stanhope Road,.
Killara.
1912 | P2| Radcliff, Sidney, r.c.s., B.M.A. Building, 30 Elizabeth-street.
1890 | P 1| Rae, J. L. C., ‘ Lisgar,’ King-street, Newcastle.
iP
1916 Read, John, m.A., Pn.D., B.Sc, Professor of Organic Chemistry
in the University of Sydney.
1914 | Rhodes, Thomas, Civil Engineer, Box 109, Post Office, Broken
Hill.
1909 | Reid, David, ‘ Holmsdale,” Pymble. ;
1902 | Richards, él A., Mount Morgan Gold Mining Co., Mount.
Morgan, Q aeensland.
Elected
1906 |
1913 | P2
1915
1913 |
1884,
1895
1897
1893
1915
1917
1913
1892
1904.
1883
1917
1900
1910
1882
1891
1912
1893
1874
1916
1917
1892
1916
1914
1913
1900
1903
tT
rig
P3
(xvii. )
Richardson. H. G. V.
Robinson, Robert, D.sc., The University, Liverpool, England.
Ross, A. Clunies, B.sc., C. of E. Grammar School, North Sydney.
Roseby, Rev. Thomas, M.A., LL.D. Syd., F.R.A.S., ‘Tintern,’
Mosman.
Ross, Chisholm, u.p. Syd., M.B., c.m. Hdin., 151 Macquarie-st.
Ross, Herbert E., Equitable Building , George-street.
Russell, Harry Ambrose, B.A., C/O Messrs. Sly and Russell,
369 George-street; p.r. ‘Mahuru,’ Fairfax Road, Bellevue
Hill.
Rygate, Philip W., m.a., B.z. Syd., assoc. M. INST, C.E., L.S.,
City Bank Chambers, Pitt-street, Sydney.
Sach, A. J., v.c.s., ‘ Kelvedon,’ North Road, Ryde.
Sawkins, Dansie T., u.a., Trigonometrical Surveyor, ‘‘ Bry-
medura,’ Kissing Point Road, Turramurra.
Scammell, W.J., Mem. Pharm. Soc. Grt. Brit.,18 Middle Head
Road, Mosman.
Schofield, James Alexander, F.c.s., A.R.S.m., Assistant Pro-
fessor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney.
Sellors, Richard P., B.a. Syd., ‘Mayfield,’ Wentworthville.
Shellshear, Walter, m.1nsT.c.£,, Consulting Engineer for N.S.
Wales, 64 Victoria-street, Westminster, London.
Sibley, Samuel Edward, Chemist, ‘ Garnella,’ Blenheim-street,
Randwick.
Simpson, R. C., Technical College, Sydney.
Simpson, William Walker, ‘Abbotsford,’ Leichhardt-street,
Waverley.
Sinclair, Eric, m.p., c.m. Glas., Inspector-General of Insane,
9 Richmond Terrace, Domain; p.r. ‘ Broomage,’ Kangaroo-
street, Manly.
Smail, J. M., mu. inst. c.z., Chief Engineer, Metropolitan Board
of Water Supply and Sewerage, 341 Pitt-street.
Smart, Bertram James, B.sc., PublicWorks Department, Sydney
P 53) Smith, Henry G., r.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological
Museum, Sydney. Vice-President. (President 1913.)
P 1|tSmith, John McGarvie, 89 Denison-street, Woollahra.
EZ
Smith, Stephen Henry, Department of Education, Sydney.
Spruson, Wilfred Joseph, Consulting Engineer and Patent
Attorney, 91 Elizabeth-street.
Statham, Edwyn Joseph, assoc. M. INST. C.E., Cumberland
Heights, Parramatta.
Stephen, Alfred Ernest, Culwulla Chambers, 67 Castlereagh-
street, Sydney.
Stephens, Frederick G.N., F.R.c.s., M.B., ChM., ‘Gleneugie,’
New South Head Road, Rose Bay.
Stewart, Alex. Hay, B.z., Metallurgist, Technical College,
Sydney.
Stewart, J. Douglas, B.v.sc., u.R.c.v.s., Professor of Veterinary
Science in the University of Sydney; ‘ Berelle,’ Homebush
Road, Strathfield.
Stoddart, Rev. A. G., The Rectory, Manly.
(xviii.)
Hlected
1909 Stokes, Edward Sutherland, m.x. Syd., v.r.c.p. Irel., Medical
Officer, Metropolitan Board of Water Supply and Sewerage,
341 Pitt-street.
1916 | P 1] Stone, W.G., Assistant Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney.
1883 | P 4| Stuart, Sir Thomas P. Anderson, M.D., Ch.M., LL.D. Hdin., D.Sc.,
Professor of Physiology in the University of Sydney; p.r.
‘Lincluden,’ Fairfax Road, Double Bay. (President 1893,
1906.
1901|P 7 Shae. C. A., ¥.a.s., Technical College, Newcastle, N.S.W.
1912 Swain, E. H. F., Forestry Department, Brisbane.
NOU, Tate, Herbert, Bridge Road, Stanmore.
1915 | P 1) Taylor, Harold B., B.sc. Kenneth-street, Longueville.
1906; _ | Taylor, Horace, Registrar, Dental Board, 7 Richmond Terrace,
Domain,
1905 Taylor, John M., m.a., LL.B. Syd., ‘ Woonona,’ 43 East Crescent-
street, McMahon’ s Point, North Sydney.
1893 [Taylor, James, B.Sc, a.R.S.M. ‘ Cartref,’ Brierly- st., Mosman.
1899 Teece, R., F.1.4., F.F.A., Wolesly Road, Point Piper.
1878 Thomas, F. J; *Lovat,’ Nelson-street, Woollahra.
1879 Thomson, The Hon. Dugald, Carrabella-st., North Sydney.
1913 Thompson, Joseph, M.a., LL.B., Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-
street, Sydney.
1918 Tietkens, William Harry, ‘ Upna,’ Eastwood.
1916 Tilley, Cecil E., Demonstrator in Geology, The University,
Sydney.
1916 Tillyard, Robin John, M.A., B.Sc., F.E.S., ‘Kuranda,’ Mount
Errington. Hornsby, N.S.W.
1879 'Trebeck, P. C., Orange, N.S.W.
1900 Turner, Basil W., A.R.8.M., F.c.s., Victoria Chambers, 83 Pitt-st.
1913 Ullrich, Richard Emil, Accountant, 43 Bond-street, Mosman.
1916 Valder, George, y.p., Under Secretary and Director, Depart-
ment of Agriculture, Sydney.
1883 Vause, Arthur John, m.B., c.m. Edin., ‘Bay View House,’ Tempe.
1890 Vicars, James, M.E£., Memb. Intern. Assoc. Testing Materials;
Memb. B. S. Guild; Challis House, Martin Place.
1892 Vickery, George B., 78 Pitt-street.
1903 | P 3/ Vonwiller, Oscar U., B.sc., Assistant Professor of Physics in
the University of Sydney. (Acting Professor.)-
‘1879 Walker, H. O., Commercial Union Assurance Co., Pitt-street.
1899 tWalker, The Hon. J. T., r.x.c.1., Fellow of Institute of Bankers
Eng., ‘ Wallaroy,’ Edgecliff Road, Woollahra.
1910 Walker, Charles, ‘Lynwood,’ Terry Road, Ryde.
1910 Walker, Harold Hutchison, Major, C.M.F., Vickery’s Cham-
bers, 82 Pitt-street.
1901 Walkom, A. J., a.m.1.u.8., Electrical Branch, G.P.O., Sydney.
1917 Wallas, Thomas Irwin, Bacteriologist, 175 Macquarie-street. —
‘
at
~ |
ALS ;
‘<
Elected
1891
1903
(Six)
Walsh, Henry Deane, B.a.1. Dub., mM. INST. C.E., Commissioner
and Engineer-in-Chief, Harbour ‘Trust, Circular Quay.
(President 1909.)
Walsh, Fred,, J.P., Capt. C.M.F., Consul-General for Honduras
in Australia and New Zealand; For. Memb. Inst. Patent
Agents, London; Patent Attorney Regd. U.S.A.; Memb.
Patent Law Assoc., Washington; Regd. Patent Attorn.
Comm. of Aust; Memb. Patent Attorney Exam. Board
Aust.; George and Wynyard-streets; p.r. ‘ Walsholme,’
Centennial Park, Sydney.
Walton, R. H., r.c.s., ‘Flinders,’ Martin’s Avenue, Bondi.
Warden, Kobert Alexander, President, Government Savinys
Bank, N.S.W., Moore-street, Sydney.
P 4| Wardlaw, Hy. Sloane Halcro, D.sc. Syd., 87 Macpherson-street,
~ Waverley.
P 17| Warren, W. H., Lu.p., WH.SC., M. INST. C.E., M. AM. SOC. C.E.,
Member of Council of the International Assoc. for Testing
Materials, Professor of Engineering in the University of
Sydney. (President 1892, 1902.)
Watkins, John Leo, B.A. Cantab., u.a. Syd., Parliamentary
Draftsman, Attorney General’s Department, Macquarie-st.
Watson, James Frederick, m.8B., cn.m., Australian Club, Sydney,
p-r. ‘Midhurst,’ Woollahra.
Watt, R. D., m.a., B.sc., Professor of Agriculture in the Uni-
versity of Sydney.
Watts, Rev. W. Walter, ‘The Manse,’ Wycheproof, Victoria.
Wearne, Richard Arthur, B.a., Principal, Technical College,
Ipswich, Queensland.
Webb, Frederick William, c.m.a., J.p., ‘ Livadia,’ Manly.
Webster, James Philip, assoc. M. INST. C.E., L.S., New Zealand,
‘Tantallon, Middleton-street, Stanmore.
Welch, William, F.R.G.s., ‘ Roto-iti,’ Boyle-street, Mosman.
{Wesley, W. H., London.
White, Harold Pogson, F.c.s., Assistant Assayer and Analyst,
Department of Mines; p.r. ‘Quantox,’ Park Road, Auburn.
{White, Rev. W. Moore, Aa.m., LL.D. Dub.
White, Charles Josiah, B.se, Science Lecturer, Sydney T'rain-
ing College; p.r.‘ Byrntryird,’ Prospect Rd. Summer Hill.
Willington, William Thos., King-street, Arncliff.
P1| Willis, Charles Savill, u.p., chm. Syd., M.R.c.s. Eng., L.R.C.P.
Lond., v.p.u., Lond., Department of Public Instruction,
Bridge-street.
Wilson, James T., M.B., chm. Edin., ¥.R.S., Professor of Anatomy
in the University of Sydney.
Wood, Percy Moore, t.r.c.p. Lond., M.R.c.s. Eng., ‘ Redcliffe,”
Liverpool Road, Ashfield.
P
bo
ip
1906 | P 6| Woolnough, Walter George, D.sc., F.a.s., Professor of Geology
1916
1917
1916
|
in the University of Western Australia, Perth.
Wright, Gilbert, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Agricultural
Chemistry, Department of Agriculture, The University,
Sydney.
Wright, George, c/o Farmer & Company, Pitt-street.
Youll, John Gibson, Perpetual Trustee Chambers, Hunter-st.
Elected
1914
1900
1911
1914
1908
1908
1915
1912
1894
1900
1915
1875
1916
1903
1916
Po7,
(xx.)
HonorARY Mz#MBERS.
Limited to Twenty.
M.—Recipients of the Clarke Medal.
Bateson, W. H., m.A., F.R.S., Director of the John Innes Horti-
cultural Institution, England, The Manor House, Merton,
Surrey, England.
Crookes, Sir William, Kt., 0.M., LL.D., D.Sc, F.R.S., 7 Kensington ~
Park Gardens, London W.
Hemsley, W. Botting, tu.p. (Aberdeen), F.R.S., F.L.S., V.M.H.,
Formerly Keeper of the Herbarium, Royal Gardens, Kew;
Korresp. Mitgl. der Deutschen Bot. Gesellschaft; Hon.
Memb. Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural; New Zea-
land Institute; Roy. Hort. Soc. London; 5 Southview,
_ Henfield, Sussex, England.
Hill, J. P., pD.se, F.R.S., Professor of Zoology, University
College, London. :
Kennedy, Sir Alex. B. W., Kt., Lu.p., D. ENG., F.R.S.. Emeritus
Professor of Engineering in University College, London,
17 Victoria-street, Westminster, London S.W.
*Liversidge, Archibald, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor
of Chemistry in the University of Syduey, ‘ Fieldhead,’
George Road, Coombe Warren, Kingston, Surrey, England.
(President 1889, 1900.) °
Maitland, Andrew Gibb, F.a.s., Government Geologist of
Western Australia.
Martin, C. J., p.sce.. F.R.S., Director of the Lister Institute of
Preventive Medicine, Chelsea Gardens, Chelsea Bridge
Road, London. ’
Spencer, Sir W. Baldwin, K.c.M G., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Professor of
Biology in the University of Melbourne.
Thiselton-Dyer, Sir William Turner, K.C.M.G., C.I.E., M.A., LL.D.,
Sc.D., F.R.S., The Ferns, Witcombe, Gloucester, England.
Thomson, Sir J. J., 0.M., D.Sc., F.R.S., Nobel Laureate, Caven-
dish Professor of Experimental Physics in the University
Cambridge, Trinity College, Cambridge, England.
* Retains the rights of ordinary membership. Elected 1872.
OBITUARY 1917-18.
Ordinary Members.
Dixon, W. A.
Loubét, P. R.
McLaughlin, J.
Milne, E.
(XxX1.)
AWARDS OF THE CLARKE MEDAL.
Established in memory of
THe Revo. W. B. CLARKH, m.a., F.R.S., F.G.S., etc.,
Vice- President from 1866 to 1878.
To be awarded from time to time for meritorious contributions to the
Geology, Mineralogy, or Natural History of Australia. The prefix *
indicates the decease of the recipient.
Awarded
1878 *Professor Sir Richard Owen. K.c.B., F.R.S.
1879 *George Bentham, c.M.G., F.R.S.
1880 *Professor Thos. Huxley, F.R.s.
1881 *Professor F. M’Coy, F.R.8., F.G.S.
1882 *Professor James Dwight Dana, LL.D.
1883 *Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, K.c.M.G., M.D., Pn.D., F.R.S., F.L.S.
1884 *Alfred R. C. Selwyn, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1895
1895
1896
1900
1901
1902
1903
1907
1909
1912
1914
1915
1917
*Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, 0.M., @.C.s.1.,C.B., M.D., D.C.L., LL.D.,F.R.S.
*Professor L. G. De Koninck, m.p., University of Liége.
*Sir James Hector, K.c.M.G., M.D., F.R.S.
*Rev. Julian EK. Tenison- Woods, F.G.S., F.L.S.
*Robert Lewis John Ellery, F.R.s., F.R.A.S.
*George Bennett, m.D., F.R.c.S. Eng., F.L.S., F.Z.S.
*Captain Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.s., F.G.S.
Sir William Turner Thiselton Dyer, K.c.M.G.,C.1.B.,M.A., LL.D., Se. D.,
F.R.S., F.L.S., late Director, Royal Gardens, Kew.
*Professor Ralph Tate, F.L.s., F.G.S.
Robert Logan Jack, F.a.s., F.R.G.S., late Government Geologist,
Brisbane, Queensland.
Robert Etheridge, Junr., Curator of the Australian Museum, Sydney.
*The Hon. Augustus Charles Gregory, ¢.M.G., F.R.G.S.
*Sir John Murray, K.c.B., LUL.D., Sc. D., F-R.S.
*Kdward John Hyre.
*F, Manson Bailey, c.M.G.. F.L.S.
* Alfred William Howitt, p.sc., F.G.S.
Walter Howchin, F.a.s., University of Adelaide.
Dr. Walter E. Roth, B.a., Pomeroon River, British Guiana, South
America.
W. H. Twelvetrees, r.c.s., Government Geologist. Launceston,
Tasmania.
A. Smith Woodward, UL.D., F.R.s., Keeper of Geology, British
Museum (Natural History) London.
Professor W. A. Haswell, .a., D.8c., F.R.S., The University, Sydney.
Professor T. W. E. David, c.u.G., B.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., F.G.S., The
University, Sydney.
(xxii.)
AWARDS OF THE SOCIETY’S MEDAL AND MONEY PRIZE.
Money Prize of £25.
Awarded.
1882
1882
1884
1886
1887
1888
1889
1889
1891
1892
1894
1894
1895
1896
John Fraser, 8.a., West Maitland, for paper entitled ‘The Aborigines
of New South Wales.’
Andrew Ross, u.p., Molong, for paper entitled ‘ Influence of the
Australian climate and pastures upon the growth of wool.’
The Society’s Bronze Medal and £25.
W. E. Abbott, Wingen, for paper entitled ‘ Water supply in the
Interior of New South Wales.’
S. H. Cox, F.a.s., F.c.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Tin deposits
of New South Wales.’
Jonathan Seaver, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘Origin and
mode of occurrence of gold-bearing veins and of the associated
Minerals.’
Rev. J. E. Tenison-Woods, F.G.s., F.L.S., Sydney, for paper entitled
‘The Anatomy and Life-history of Mollusca peculiar to
Australia.’
Thomas Whitelegge, F.R.M.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘ List of
the Marine and Fresh-water Invertebrate Fauna of Port
Jackson and Neighbourhood.’
Rev. John Mathew, mu.a., Coburg, Victoria, fan paper entitled
‘The Australian Aborigines.’
Rev. J. Milne Curran, r.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘ The og
scopic Structure of Australian Rocks.’
Alexander G. Hamilton, Public School, Mount Kembla, for paper
entitled ‘The effect which settlement in hue has pro-
duced upon Indigenous Vegetation.’
J. V. De Coque, Sydney, for paper entitled the ‘ Timbers of New
South Wales.’
R. H. Mathews, t.s., Parramatta, for paper entitled ‘The Abori-
ginal Rock Carvings and Paintings in New South Wales.’
C. J. Martin, p.sc, m.B., F.R.S., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The
physiological action of the venom of the Australian black
snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus).’
Rev. J. Milne Curran, Sydney, for paper entitled ‘'The occurrence
of Precious Stones in New South Wales, with a description of
the Deposits in which they are found.’
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.
By T. H. HOUGHTON, m. mst. c.B.
[Delivered to the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, May 2, 1917.]
THE great war, which the Empire and our Allies are fight-
ing for the freedom of the world, has been raging for nearly
three years, and is now being conducted more fiercely than
ever, is uppermost in the thoughts of us all, and has been
brought very near to us by the losses of brave sons or
relatives which so many have suffered. Our sincerest
Sympathy is with them, and we look forward toa long
period of peace and freedom when science will be devoted,
not to devising the best means of destroying mankind, but
to the development of our natural resources and all that is
best in humanity. The cabled report of Mr. Bonar Law’s
speech in the House of Commons recently, in which he said
that. “‘he believed the long night of sorrow and anguish
which had desolated the world was drawing to a close,”’
has a special significance, and is, we trust, a forerunner of
the joyful announcement that a termination of fighting
is about to be reached.
Since the battle of the Falkland Islands and the destruc-
tion of the ‘‘Kmden,”’ Australia has not been in immediate
danger of attack, and the horrors of war have not been
brought home to us as vividly as to those nearer the scene
of battle, but now that our brave lads are returning broken
down in health and maimed, we begin to realise more
fully the sacrifice that so many have made at the call of
duty, and I am sure that it is not only the wish but the
determination of every Briton, whether in the Mother
Land or the Dominions beyond the Seas, that those who
have fought so bravely and so well, and have come back
A—May 2, 1917.
a T, H. HOUGHTON.
unable to earn their living, shall be well cared for since the
debt we owe to them is one we never can fully repay.
Few of our members are fit and free to go, but such as
could do so offered their services; two will not return,
Colonel Onslow Thompson and Colonel Flashman. Major
Professor David, although of an age that would in most
cases prevent a less determined man volunteering, did not
hesitate to offer his valuable services when he found that
they would be of use to his country; he has run great risks
and fora time was in a critical state, the result of an
accident which happened to him when carrying out his
duty, but I am pleased to say he has happily recovered and
is again at work.
Captain Professor Pollock is doing important work at
the front, and by last accounts was enjoying good health.
Notwithstanding the war, the Society has had a very
successful year; nine meetings have been held, at which
fourteen papers were read and discussed, the attendances
‘being fully up to the average.
The activities of the Society were very considerably
‘increased by the Sections dealing with special branches of
‘science. The Geological Section held six meetings during
‘the year, and that of Public Health and Kindred Sciences
four meetings; two other sections were formed at the
beginning of the session, viz. Agriculture, which has held
‘five meetings, and that of Industry, of which there have
been six meetings. To the efforts of the Chairmen, Hon.
‘Secretaries and Committees of these sections is due the
‘success which has attended them.
A popular lecture entitled ‘‘The Chemistry of Nitrogen
-and its value for food stuffs and explosives’’ was delivered
by Dr. Murphy, and one on ‘*The debt of Agriculture to
‘Science ’’ by Professor Watt. The Society is indebted to
|
.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. a
these gentlemen for the profitable and enjoyable informa-
tion imparted at them.
The Society had, on the 13th March, the pleasure of
entertaining Sir Ernest Shackleton on his return from the
Antarctic, after the rescue of those members of his
expedition who had been unavoidably left behind.
During the year I have, as your representative, attended
‘several meetings of the Board of Visitors of the Observatory;
one result of our recommendations has been that the
‘Government Astronomer is to be provided with a suitable
residence at the Observatory, it being evident that for
some time to come funds will not be available for the erec-
tion of the new Observatory on the site selected for it at
‘Wahroonga.
I am sure that in offering my thanks to the Hon. Secre-
taries, Mr. R. H. Cambage, L.s., F.L.S., and Mr. J. H.
Maiden, 1.8.0., F.R.S., aS well as to the Hon. Treasurer,
Dr. H. G. Chapman, for their constant and generous
services in the interests of the Society, Iam expressing
your feelings as well as my own.
It was with great pleasure that wereceived the announce-
ment that the “‘David Syme Prize for Scientific Research”’
had been awarded to Mr. C. Hedley, F.L.S., for his zoological .
work. This high distinction has only been awarded nine
times, and it is a source of satisfaction to us all that five
of the recipients are members of this Society.
On April 30th, 1916, there were 299 members on the roll,
of whom 28 were Honorary Members; during the year we
have lost by death and resignations 10, including one
Honorary member, and four names have been removed from
the rolls, 31 new members have been elected, the member-
ship now being 316, including 27 Honorary Members. The
dJosses by death are :-— ;
ic,
4 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Colonel Dr. JAMES FROUDE FLASHMAN, who was born at.
Braidwood in 1870, and educated at the Sydney High
School and Sydney University. For some years he held
the office of Senior Medical Officer and Pathologist, first
at Parramatta and afterwards at Callan Park Hospital
forthe Insane. He then became Pathologist and Lecturer
at the University, where he was much esteemed by all with
whom he came in contact, especially the young students,
for whom he always had much sympathy. All through his
life he was much attached to military matters, and was
the leader of the University Scout movement. Of late
years, after resigning his position at Callan Park, he
entered upon private practice, and succeeded in securing
a large practice, and was particularly successful in treat-
ing many complicated diseases. On the outbreak of war
he offered his services as medical officer and was immedi-
ately sent to Hngland, and placed in charge of No. 3
Hospital at Wandsworth, chiefly used for Australian
wounded. Afterwards he was transferred to France to
take charge of the hospital at Boulogne, where he con-
tracted pneumonia and died on 12th February, 1917. He
was elected a member of the Society in 1900.
Mr. WALTER GEORGE PYE was born in Hngland and
came out to New Zealand when quite young; he graduated
B.A. in 1893, M.A. in 1894, and B.Sc. in 1895 at the
University of New Zealand, taking high honours both in
languages and literature and science. On leaving the
University he was for some time engaged in educational
work in the secondary schools of the State and elsewhere,
but subsequently entered the profession of journalism in
which most of his life-work was done. He wrote the
‘‘Review’’ columns of the Sydney Morning Herald for
Many years, and endowed them with personality and dis-
tinction, the gift of epigram being peculiarly his own. He
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 5
died at the age of 46 years, on 12th March, 1917. He was
elected a member in 1908.
Dr. EDWARD PIERSON RAMSAY, born at Dobroyde, Ashfield,
in 1842, ason of Dr. David Ramsay one of the early settlers
in Australia, was educated at St. Mark’s School, Mac-
quarie Fields, and afterwards at Darling Point, under the
Rev. G. S. Macarthur. He followed in the footsteps of
his father and showed great interest in natural history
study. When Dr. Pittard was the Curator of the Aus-
tralian Museum in Sydney, Dr. Ramsay travelled in
New South Wales and Queensland in search of specimens
suitable for the Museum, and subsequently in 1874 was
appointed Curator, a post he filled with much success until
1895, when he was compelled to retire through ill-health.
He was then appointed Consulting Ornithologist to the
Museum, a position he held until his death. While natural
history was the chief branch of his scientific research, he
took akeen interest in the advancement of science generally.
His early love for botany found expression in the Dobroyde
new plant nursery, through which a large number of plants
were first introduced to Australia. Bird and animal life
also largely claimed his attention, and he worked in col-
laboration with the late Sir Richard Owen (England) on the
extinct animals of Australia, amon g which were discovered
the giant kangaroo and marsupial lion. On another occas-
jon Dr. Ramsay was requested by John Gould to guard his
Australian interests in his famous folio work “‘ Birds of
Australia.’’ In the work of furthering the advancement
of science in Australia Dr. Ramsay was, together with Sir
William Macleay, one of the founders of the Linnean
Society. He was elected a member of this Society in 1865,
and was also a Fellow of the Geological Society of Hngland,
a Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society, a Correspond-
ing Member of the Zoological Society of England, and a
* »
¢
6 T. H. HOUGHTON.
member of the Royal Irish Academy. He died on 16th
December 1916.
Rev. WILLIAM Scott, born at Hartland, North Devon, in
‘1825, took his B.A. degree at Cambridge University in 1848,
taking honours as Third Wrangler at the same time as the
late Isaac Todhunter, the well known mathematician. He
arrived in the State in 1856, having been selected by the
Astronomer Royal for the position of Government Astrono-
mer. Harly in 1862, Mr. Scott, for health reasons, sent in
his resignation as Astronomer, and shortly after took over
the old Cook’s River collegiate school from the Rev. W. H.
Savigny, and in 1865 he was appointed Warden of St. Paul’s.
College within the Sydney University. He was Hon.
Secretary of the Royal Society of New South Wales from
1867 to 1874, and Treasurer for several years. In 1878
Mr. Scott resigned the Wardenship of St. Paul’s and entered
into parish work in the Goulburn diocese, where he succes-
sively held the incumbencies of Gunning, Bungendore, and |
Queanbeyan, and was appointed a Canon of St. Saviour’s.
Cathedral, and examining Chaplain to the Bishop. After
resigning his parochial duties, Mr. Scott revisited England
with his wife. He died on 29th March, 1917, at the age
of ninety-one years. He was elected a member of the
Society in 1856, being before his death the oldest member.
Mr. JoHN TEBBUTT was born in Windsor, New South
Wales, on May 25th, 1834, and educated in private schools,
his early inclinations being towards mechanical pursuits.
His mind was first directed towards the science of
astronomy when he was nineteen years old, but it was not.
until eleven years later that he became possessed of instru-
ments with which he could practically test his knowledge,
which included a fair grounding in higher mathematics and
the theory of astronomical instruments. Mr. Tebbutt may
be said to have been the first great Australian born
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. T
astronomer; he was a native of the soil and entirely self
taught. Outside his own personal researches and studies,
the only experience he ever gained in any other observa-
tory than his own, was during three days he once spent in
the Sydney Observatory. Commencing as a mechanic, he
evidenced genius as a lad in the making of models. His
first taste for astronomy he used to say was acquired from
reading an article in the Illustrated London News. Hence-
forth he lived in an atmosphere of moving planets. The
science of astronomy became his ruling passion; all else to
him went by the board, and he had perpetually in his mind,
while pursuing his study of the starry heavens, a working
model of the universe, whose mysteries it was the purpose
of his life to unfathom. Towards the close of 1863 he
managed to erect on his father’s property a small obser-
vatory built of wood, which was entirely the work of his.
own hands. His first installation was a small transit
instrument and a 34 inch refractor, which he mounted
himself as an equatorial. From these small beginnings
Mr. Tebbutt’s zeal led him on until he possessed two sub-
stantial brick observatories, which accommodated one of
Cook and Sons’ 3 inch transit instruments, a 4$ inch equa-
torial by the same makers, and an 8 inch equatorial refractor
by Grubb. In 1862 Mr. Tebbutt was elected a member
of our Society. He was one of the few surviving
members of the Society then known as the Philosophical
Society of New South Wales. The first Government.
Astronomer for New South Wales (Rev. W. Scott) so far
recognised Mr. Tebbutt’s abilities in 1863 as to recommend
him as his successor, but he declined the office. Six years
later his work was considered of such importance that his
private observatory was placed in the list of principal
observatories in the British Nautical Almanac. It was
subsequently recognised in a similar way in the national
ephemerides of the United States, France, Germany, Brazil,
,
. 2
8 T. H. HOUGHTON.
and Mexico. For a paper written in 1867 for the Paris
Exhibition, on ‘The State and Progress of Astronomy in
New South Wales,’’ he was awarded a commemorative
silver medal. In 1873 Mr. Tebbutt was elected a Fellow
of the Royal Astronomical Society, though his contribu-
tions had been published by the Society for eleven years
preceding that date. He was the recognised discoverer of
two of the most remarkable comets of the last century, the
1861 comet having been observed by him six weeks before
it was discovered in Kurope; the other was the great comet
of 1881. His comet work finds a place in several well
known astronomical monographs. Concurrently, Mr.
Tebbutt conducted extensive meteorological observations.
His work in this connection from 1863 to 1896 has been
published, but at the close of 1897 Mr. Tebbutt discontinued
these observations, leaving himself free in his declining
years to continue his purely astronomical work. In 1895
Mr. Tebbutt was elected the first President of the New
South Wales branch of the British Astronomical Associa-
tion. He died on the 29th November, 1916, in his eighty-
third year.
Honorary Member.
Professor DANIEL OLIVER was born at Newcastle-upon-
Tyne, on February 6th, 1830, and was educated partly in
private schools. Attached from an early age to botanical
study, and a youthful member of a local scientific society,
we find him in 1847 contributing to the Phytologist a list
of rare plants from different geological formations, and in
1850 adding a new genus to the flora of the United Kingdom.
In 1851 he became a fellow of the Edinburgh Botanical
Society, and in 1853 of the Linnean Society. His reputa-
tion as a keen and critical worker, gained in the north of
England, was already such as to prompt Sir William Hooker
to invite him to assist his son in the heavy task of arrang-
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 9
ing and distributing the botanical collections accumulated
by the Hast India Company and to induce him in 1858 to
become an assistant in the Herbarium at Kew. On settling
there, Oliver instituted in 1859 a course of lectures on
Botany, which he continued to conduct until 1874, for the
benefit of the young gardeners. He proved so excellent a
teacher that in 1861 he was appointed to the Botanical
Chair which had been occupied by Lindley at University _
College, London, which he retained until 1888. He held
for twenty-six years the Keepership at Kew until he retired
from public service in 1890. After his retirement he
succeeded Sir Joseph Hooker as editor, on behalf of the
Bentham Trustees, of the Icones Plantarum. This duty
he fulfilled for five years, so that his connection with the
institution where he worked so long, and for which he did
so much, was not finally severed until 1895. In 1884 the
Royal Society, of which he had been a Fellow since 1863,
recommended him as the recipient of a Royal medal. In
1891 the University of Aberdeen conferred on him the
degree of LL.D: In 1893 the Linnean Society awarded
him its gold medal, and a number of friends arranged
for the painting of his portrait by Mr. J. Wilson Foster
for presentation to the Herbarium at Kew. On his
attaining his eightieth birthday in 1910, old colleagues
united with the existing Herbarium staff in offering him an
address of congratulation. He was elected an Honorary
Member of our Society in 1905, and died on 21st December,
1916, in his eighty-seventh year.
I have also to record the death of W. H. Wisp, for thirty-
six years a faithful officer of the Society; he was Assistant
Secretary for many years, and when, in consequence of
failing health, he had to relinquish that office, he was
appointed Assistant Librarian, and continued as_ such
until the date of his death, 29th August, 1916.
10 T. H. HOUGHTON.
The Geo-physical Observations at Burrinjuck reservoir,
which were described in the paper read by Acting Professor
Cotton in 1915, have been continued, but owing to pressure
of University business, he has not been able to work up the
results. However, sufficient observations have been made
to render it quite certain that movement of the earth’s
crust has been taking place at the site of each of the
pendulums; the records also show earthquakes and earth
tides.
The importance of molybdenum in the manufacture of
steel has been greatly increased as a result of the war.
This State is one of the principal sources of the supply of
molybdenite from which it is prepared, and recently the
Mines Department has issued a very important work on
the subject, prepared by Mr. H. C. Andrews, which deals.
very exhaustively with the occurrence and working of the
deposits in this State.
The Advisory Council of Science and Industry, established
about a year ago, has initiated many investigations on
subjects of considerable importance, the problems now
being dealt with, and for the solution of which special
committees have been appointed, are:—1. Ferro alloys;
2. Manufacture of chemicals; 3. Alunite; 4. Posidonia
fibre; 5. The laws governing the mode of occurrence of
gold in quartz; 6. The tick pest in cattle; 7. The nodule
disease in cattle; 8. Yeasts and bread making; 9. The
standardization of physical apparatus; 10. The cultivation
of cotton and the problem of a mechanical cotton picker;
11. The prickly pear; 12. The brown coal of Victoria; 13.
The sheep fly pest; 14. Wheat selection and breeding; 15.
Indigenous grasses and salt bushes; 16. The standard for
alcoholometry; 17. Forestry and timber industries.
Many members of the Society and other scientists of the
State are actively engaged in these investigations, and
'
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. lf
that on yeasts, now being carried out at the Technical
College by Dr. Chapman, will, it is anticipated, effect con-
siderable alterations in the present methods of bread
making, his endeavour being to produce a yeast that will
ferment earlier, and thus enable the dough used for bread
making to ripen more rapidly.
The Advisory Committee is collecting information and
establishing relations with other public and professional
bodies interested in scientific research and industries, and
I look forward to great advantages resulting from this.
attempt to co-ordinate research throughout the Common-
wealth.
During the past year the question of the organization of
chemists has come into prominence. At the suggestion of
Professor Orme Masson, chemists have met together in the
different States, and have elected committees to prepare a
constitution for an Australian Chemical Institute. Repre-
sentatives from the various States met together in Sydney
in January 1917, and drew up a constitution, which has
been accepted, with some alterations, by the committees
in all the States. It is hoped that the formation of this
professional organization will lead to a better recognition
of the value of chemical work. A Federal Institute should
command the confidence of those requiring chemical assist-
ance in mining, manufacture, and primary production.
I had a difficulty in finding a suitable subject for my
presidential address that would be of interest to members,
as the scope of the work carried out by engineers in private
practice in this State is not such as to enable me to describe
any great system of works such as my predecessors have
beenable todo. As it was twenty-five years from the date
of my election as a member until I had the honour of being
elected President, it occurred to me that a review of some
12 T. H. HOUGHTON.
of the developments of engineering in the State for that
period might prove interesting. The Society’s Proceedings
have been enriched with many valuable addresses and
papers on various aspects of engineering, and I must ask
your forgiveness if I repeat any of the information contained
in them. ;
Railways.
The largest expenditure of money on engineering works
has naturally been by the Government, nearly all works of
public utility having been carried out by them, the rail-
ways standing first in importance and expenditure. The
length of line in miles in operation was for the two periods
as follows:—
1891 1916
Five lines ... a sae sa 1
Four lines... He he, bd 33
Three lines... at a ie ‘. as
Double line ie 124 as 492
Single line ... we 2,058 Gs 3,604
Total... bat 2,182 ee 4,188
and the capital expended for construction and equipment,
which in 1891 was £31,768,617, had risen in 1916 to
£68,825,592, the costs per mile being £14,559 and £16,434.
Of the 2006 miles of new railway constructed within the
period under review, about 1,500 miles have been in the
area devoted to the cultivation of wheat, and are what may
be termed pioneer lines, that is of light construction with-
out ballast, 200 miles, viz: that comprising the completed
sections of the North Coast Railway, which will when
completed form the express route to Brisbane, have been
built to correspond with the other main lines carrying
heavy traffic. The engineering works on this line have
been heavy, the following rivers having to be spanned by
heavy steel bridges:—the Hunter, Paterson, Williams,
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESs. 13.
Manning, Hastings, Wilson, Macleay, Nambucca, and
Bellinger (south arm and north arm), besides a number of
smaller streams.
A new departure in the construction of the piers for
these bridges was introduced and successfully used by Mr.
W. Hutchinson, m. mst.c.z., the Chief Engineer for Railway
Construction; formerly it has been the practice to use cast.
iron cylinders for sinking in the river beds to carry the
superstructure, but he adopted concrete without reinforce-
ment, except on the curb or cutting edge. Many of the
piers were sunk under air pressure, but even in those cases
concrete was the only material composing the cylinders;
the saving in cost that resulted from this method over that.
hitherto adopted was considerable.
Not only have the large bridges on the North Coast line
been in excess of what is found on other lines in the State,
but the number of tunnels, mostly through solid rock, have
also been proportionately more numerous than on any por-
tion of the lines, except that from Hornsby to the Hawkes-
bury River, the ruling grade is 1 in 80 and the sharpest
eurves 15 chains, the whole being laid with steel rails:
weighing 80 ibs. per yard.
With this exception, the construction of the various lines.
has presented no engineering difficulties.
The new Sydney Terminal Station, opened for use in 1906,.
soon proved too small for the growing requirements of the
city, and it is to be hoped that the City Railway will be.
an accomplished fact as soon as conditions become such
that it can be constructed at reasonable cost.
Although the extensions of the railways have not, with
the exception stated, been difficult, yet the alterations.
that have been made to existing lines in consequence of
increase in traffic, or with a view to economy in working,
14 T. H. HOUGHTON.
have involved very considerable difficulties to carry them
on without interference with the daily traffic.
During the Eddy regime, which commenced in 1888, the
‘work of duplications and reducing grades and easing sharp
curves was taken inhand. In 1891 there were 124 miles
of double line, which length has in 1916 been extended to
534. The carrying capacity of double to single line being
as 4 to 1, some idea is obtained of the extra amount of
traffic which can be handled.
When the work of grade improvements commenced, there
were 25 miles of 1 in 30 and 1 in 33, and 185 miles of 1 in
40 and 1 in 42 gradients, while at the present time only
134 miles of 1 in 30 and 1 in 33, and 136 miles of 1 in 40
and 1in 42 remain. The balance have been replaced by 1
in 75 and 1 in 80 grades; the alterations for the mileage
treated, represent an increase in the capacity of 36,000,000
ton-miles per annum due to grade reduction alone, while
the improvements made in the haulage power of locomotives
have also greatly added to the capacity of the system.
Among the most important of the grade improvements
is the cutting out of the two Zig Zags on the Western line;
work at the small Zig Zag between EKmu Plains and Glen-
brook was commenced in 1891 and completed in 1893 by a
single line deviation.
The Gas Works at Eveleigh for the supply of oil gas were
constructed in 1892, and with necessary additions has
provided requirements for train lighting up to the present
time.
A deviation between Muswellbrook and Singleton to efiect
‘a grade improvement was carried out in 1893, and the same
year saw the completion of the quadruplication of the Main
Suburban line between Sydney and Flemington. In 1895,
grades on the Northern line were reduced and also on the
Western line. In the following year further grade improve-
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 15
ments were carried out on the Southern and Western lines.
The duplication of the line between Blackheath and Mount
Victoria was completed in 1898, and that between Glen-
brook and Katoomba, with important curve improvements,
involving practically the remodelling of the whole of the
station buildings in that section in 1902.
On the Western line, from Sydney to Mount Victoria,
there remained a gap of a single line between Penrith and
Glenbrook, the crossing of the Nepean River at Kmu Plains
being over a Single line bridge. To provide for the future
linking up of the double roads, a new steel truss bridge was
erected, comprising four spans of 200 feet, and one of 125
feet. The superstructure, weighing 1,300 tons, is supported
on brick piers and abutments, a feature in the erection
being the absence of false work owing to flood risk. Erec-
tion was commenced at the Penrith end, and the girders
built out over the piers on the cantilever principle, tem-
porary links being provided to take up the tension between
the ends of girders. This bridge and the duplication
between Penrith and Emu Plains were opened in 1907.
The opening of the new Sydney Railway Station in 1906
necessitated the complete remodelling of the whole yard,
and the cutting out of the old station building, and bring-
ing into use the new, with its various requirements; the
entire alteration of the signalling arrangements in the yard
was a necessary consequence, the whole of the work being
carried out so as to interfere as little as possible with the
running traffic. At this time the coal business at New-
castle required facilities to meet the increasing traffic,
gorting sidings were provided at Port Waratah to accom-
modate 5,000 waggons and an up-to-date Round House,
with coaling and watering arrangements, sufficient to deal
with forty engines was provided. To expedite the shipping
of coal a McMyler hoist was erected at the top end of the
16 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Dyke Wharf, and this, like all innovations, came in for a large
amount of adverse criticism. The prejudice has, however,
now almost disappeared, and the hoist has proved itself
equal to at least two cranes, when loading under ordinary
conditions. Records show that with large hatches a rate
of from 500 to 550 tons an hour can be maintained until
trimming commences.
A coal bandling plant at Pyrmont Jetty was provided in
1908 to deal with bunker coal, with a capacity of 200 tons
per hour. Inthe same year work was commenced at
Flemington in connection with the lines and platforms
required for the new Abattoirs now in course of completion,
and the ever increasing traffic called for further marshal-
ling facilities between Auburn and Clyde. The six and a
half miles of sidings provided at Clyde in 1892 became
inadequate, and separate sidings were required to deal with
down traffic, leaving up traffic to be handled at Clyde.
The duplication of the North Coast line between Hornsby
and the Hawkesbury was completed in 1909, and between
Lindfield and Hornsby in 1910, that between St. Leonards
and Lindfield having been opened in 1901, including the
remodelling of all intermediate station yards, and increased
accommodation at Hornsby. Beyond Hawkesbury, the
duplication towards Newcastle was extended to Wondabyne
in 1909, and linked up to Teralba in 1912, completing the
double line between Sydney and Newcastle. By this time
traffic throughout the lines had increased to such an extent
that long single line sections had to be divided, and cross-
ing loops provided at suitable sites. In all forty-seven
joops were laid in, and when designing them, care was taken
to ensure their linking in with the future duplication.
The Otford Tunnel on the South Coast line was for some
years an awkward spot for enginemen and uncomfortable
for passengers. This tunnel is nearly one mile long ona
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 17
1 in 40 grade falling from Sydney, and remained an obstruc-
tion to the South Coast traffic until recent years. With
the application of mechanical ventilation, consisting of a —
sirocco fan developing 170 H.P., and supplying air at the
rate of 250,000 cubic feet per minute, a beneficial change
has been effected, not only to the travelling public and the
enginemen, but owing to the rails being kept dry by the
air in motion, there is a noticeable increase in the load
hauled. The work of cutting out the Otford Tunnel by a
deviation between Otford Station and Coal Cliff is now well
in hand, and when complete, great relief will be spereneee
by all concerned.
The main difficulty on the Main Western line was the
descent into the Lithgow Valley which was negotiated by
the great Zig Zag, a fine work in its day, but not suitable
for the heavy traffic of later years. It became apparent.
that some better means must be provided, and many trial
surveys were made, the result being that a scheme was
prepared by the Engineer-in-Chief, and approved by the
Oommissioners.
This work, which was commenced in 1908, and opened for
traffic on 16th October, 1910, calls for special reference,
not only because there were eleven tunnels to be driven,
but also, owing to the great urgency for completion, special
methods had to be adopted in dealing with the supply of
material, and providing arrangements such as would allow
of as many tunnels as possible being dealt with simultane-
ously. A difficulty with regard to the provision of the
material for tunnel lining, platelaying etc., presented itself
owing to the fact that the No. 1 and No. 11 tunnels—the
longest—were at almost the extremities of the work. At
the Sydney end, connection was possible with the main line
at Clarence, and a suitable depot was formed there to deal
with the material required at No.1 tunnel end. A con- —
B—May 2, 1917.
18 T. H. HOUGHTON.
nection direct with the main line at the western end was
not practicable, but the difficulty was met by the provision
of a funicular railway connecting a material siding along-
side the main line and a point on the deviation between
Nos. 10 and 11 tunnels. This enabled a supply of material
to the tunnels between Nos. 1 and 11, and was effective in
greatly reducing the time occupied in the work. The
tunnels were driven through hard sandstone formation, and
timbering was only necessary in three places. Excavation
was expedited and cheapened by the installation of an
electrical power station, which provided current necessary
to drive the air compressors, lighting for tunnels, and fans
for ventilation. The amount of material excavated was
830,000 cubic yards, while 14,055 cubic yards of concrete,
and 7,500,000 bricks, were used in the construction of the
tunnels and culverts. The new grade was | in 90 as against
1 in 42 in the middle road of Zig Zag. In 1910, on com-
pletion of this work and the duplication of line between
Mount Victoria and Newnes Junction, the duplication of
the remaining section of single line between Emu Plains
and Glenbrook was commenced, and was opened for traffic
in 1913. The deviation begins about half a mile west of
HKmu Plains and ends at Blaxland, and includes one tunnel
and a large viaduct at Lapstone Hill. There were 1,463,000
cubic yards of excavation, and 12,000 cubic yards of con-
crete, and 6,000,000 bricks were used in the work. Near
Glenbrook Oreek and running parallel with it for about one
mile, the line is cut out of the face of the cliff, which is
700 feet above the creek bed; the work was of a most
dangerous nature, and unfortunately it was the scene of
several fatalities. In engineering difficulties the work
presented features more than equalling the great . Zig
Zag problem. With its opening on the 28th September,
1913, the last piece of single track between Granville and
Hskbank disappeared. On this work steam navvies were
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 19
first employed, the large bank between Emu Plains and
Lapstone Junction being constructed at the low cost of
1/83 per cubic yard.
In 1912 the new double line between Flemington and
Glebe Island, designed to relieve the main suburban lines of
goods traffic, was commenced, and was completed on 29th
May, 1916. The goods line leaves the suburban lines on
the up side at Lidcombe, junctions with the Abattoirs’
railway and the Northern line connections near Flemington,
passes beneath the main lines, and connects with the Banks-
town Railway near Campsie Station, runs parallel with
that line to a point between ~Hurlstone Park and Wardell
Road, where it branches off to the north, and passes under
the main suburban line at the Lewisham Viaduct, and
thence through Leichhardt to Glebe Island. At Wardell
Road connections are provided, and the goods lines extended
to junction with the South Coast line near Tempe Station.
Between Flemington and Campsie a large area of land has
been taken and extensive marshalling yards provided, also
provision for housing all goods locomotives, with the neces-
sary coaling and watering arrangements. On this work
steam navvies have been largely used, 1,250,000 cubic yards
of material, mostly hard shale and rock, having been exca-
vated and disposed of for 1/9d per cubic yard.
On the Southern line duplication work has been pushed
ahead, that between Marulan and Cullerin being com-
menced on each side of Goulburn in 1913; the crossings of
the Wollondilly River, Boxer’s Creek, and Mulwaree Ponds
Viaduct consist of fifty feet semi-arches in brickwork. That
portion between Bowral and Harden is now complete, and
the work of cutting out the remaining length of single line
between Picton and Bowral is well in hand.
On the South Coast, duplication work has also been in
hand. The section—Waterfall to Otford—has been opened
20 T. H. HOUGHTON.
since 30th May, 1915. This work consisted of a deviation,
commencing at the South end of Waterfall tunnel, which
is now cut out, and running on the up side of the old line,
crosses it at three places, and finally junctions at Lilyvale,
from whence ordinary duplication extends to Otford. On
the old line four tunnels were cut out, and three new
tunnels were built on the deviation, 1 in 80 grades replac-
ing 1 in 40. Duplication work has also been completed
between Scarborough and Bulli Junction, the gap between
Otford and Scarborough being now well in hand. In con-
nection with this section a large locomotive depot has been
completed at Thirroul, the old depot at Waterfall being
abandoned. o
A length of 73 miles of third road has been laid in for
goods traffic on the suburban lines, as well as a fifth road
from Newtown to Petersham.
The increase of traffic which necessitated the main line
improvements already referred to, also required extended
and additional facilities in other branches of the Depart-
ment. To expedite the handling of engines, up-to-date
housing and coaling arrangements have been completed at.
Port Waratah, Hnfield, Thirroul, Harden, and Werris Creek,
and a large depot to deal with eighty-four engines is well
in hand at South Goulburn. | 3 |
With the call for increased locomotive accommodation
came the accompanying demand for ample water supplies,
capable of meeting, during the time of drought, the maxi-
mum consumption of a busy season. These works alone
are of great magnitude, and with the dams, reservoirs,
pumping plant, mains, and yard details, including supply
tanks, cranes, etc., involve a large expenditure. Also the
locomotive workshops have been extended, and additional
erecting shops and a large up-to-date foundry at Hveleigh
completed. ) as |
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ZA
The faster the trains are moving with their loads to their
terminal stations, the greater the necessity for ample and
efficient means of handling the freight, and freeing the
rolling stock for the return journey. Hxtensive additions
have been provided for the handling of wheat, and the
facilities now in operation have so far been able to cope
with the demands made upon them. With a view to the
future, a large produce shed has been completed at Alex-
andria 1,000 feet by 200 feet, where most of the Sydney
produce business is transacted. A large double tier goods
shed is in course of erection at Darling Harbour, and when
complete, with electric cranes and menung; will ae of erent
assistance in the handling of freight.
- The progress in connection with interlocking and signal-
ling on the New South Wales Railways during the last
twenty-five years has taken place along three definite lines.
Prior to 1891, considerable progress had been made in the
interlocking of stations on the system, but a great deal
still remained to be done. The earliest interlocking
carried out in New South Wales was in the year 1883,
and by the year 1891, 250 places had been interlocked.
By the end of the year 1916, the total number of interlocked
places on the New South Wales railways amounted to 969.
A more accurate way of expressing the progress of inter-
locking is in terms of *‘ Points and Orossings”’’ rather than
**Places,’”’ and on this basis, at the end of the year 1916,
there were 82°4% of the points and crossings throughout
the system, on lines worked over by passenger trains, inter-
locked, leaving only 17°6, still unlocked. The installation
of interlocking at the remaining places is being pushed
forward as rapidly as possible, having regard to the funds
available, and it is hoped very shortly greatly to decrease
the number of places still to be dealt with. |
In the year 1891, a large portion of the interlocking
gear and fittings required were imported from England,
Ll
| ‘ 3}
» Bes
Ay T. H. HOUGHTON.
but since then it has become the practice to manufacture
most of these within the State in the Departmental Work-
shops, and, so far as ordinary interlocking gear is concerned,,
the Department may now be said to be quite independent.
of imported materials.
The second line of progress in regard to this matter has
taken place in respect of power interlocking. The first
installation to be brought into use was an electro-pneumatic
power plant in Sydney yard in 1910. This comprised two
signal boxes, containing 59 and 203 levers respectively;
since that time progress has been very rapid.
Additional electro-pneumatic installations have been
brought into use in Sydney yard and at Illawarra Junction,
and a large electric installation has been brought into use
at Flemington, in which no less than seven junctions are
operated from one signal box. A further plant of all
electric interlocking is now in progress of installation near
Sydenham, and from this four separate junctions will be
worked. The total number of power plants in operation
in the State is five, with a total of 600 levers.
The third line of development has been in connection
with automatic signalling, and this has taken place not.
only in the Sydney suburban area, but also on country
sections. At present the whole of the suburban line, from
Sydney to Sydenham, Belmore and Homebush, and the
Milson’s Point line as far as Bay Road, are signalled auto-
matically. Numerous long sections in the country have
been divided by means of automatic signals, thereby giving
increased traffic provisions without the equivalent of
additional staff.
The installation of automatic signalling is being rapidly
extended, and there is no doubt that there is a great future
for this form of signalling on the railways of this State.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.
Locomotives.
23
The additional length of railways in use would naturally
entail an increase in locomotive power, and in Tables I and
II, I have given particulars of the locomotives in use in
1891 and 1916, which show that in 1891 there were in use
Table I.— Particulars of Engines showing the number in Classes,
Tractive Power and Weight, on 15th September, 1891.
Class. ele
C 68
D255 6
D261 41
G 13
H 1Z
L304 10
L436 10
O 12
P 50
Ss 2
F 18
M 15
N 8
Q 6
R 6
A fi
B 95
J131 ital aes
J 483 20
K 10
aD 12
3 20
521
Z10
Z14
Z60
N N
= nw
“I Ne)
bo
rm 0 bo 1) TIO w —
N
ny
QO
ea)
j=)
Description.
REGULAR STOCK.
Passenger Tender engines
33 99 33
33 33 33
Goods Tank engines
Goods Saddle Tank engines
Total Regular Stock ...
DupuicatTE Stock.
Passenger Tender engines
LP 33 33
Pass. and Goods Tender’ eng.
Passenger Tank engines ...
39 33 339
Goods Tender engines
33 33 PB)
Ez) 33 33
Total Duplicate Stock ...
Tractive
Power
Each.
11,550
16,335
19,656
18,808
26,979
20,216
19,440
19,656
10,352
7,006
- 16,484
9,053
5,016
6,291
16,076
16,224
19,423
Total
Tractive
Power,
Ibs.
174;'724.
69,168
529,884
134,641
176,148
154,670
154,670
241,320
1,109,350
19,592
235,566
221,730
45,064:
68,244.
69,300
1,241,460
1,867,320
206,888
539,580
202,160
233,280
393,120
8,687,879
10,352
21,042
98,904
63,371
11,032
31,455
353,672
48,672
213,653
os
852,153
Weight
Each.
tons ewt.
47 4
48 1
14
Zi
22 16
In steam
38. 41
39 16
45 5
24 T. H. HOUGHTON.
and duplicate 581 locomotives having a total tractive
power of 9,540,032 Ibs., the heaviest passenger and goods
engines weighing about 66 tons and 71 tons respectively,
whereas in 1916 there were 1,236 locomotives, having a
total tractive power of 28,767,708 ibs., the weight of the
heaviest passenger engine having risen to 92 tons, and the
goods engines to 85 tons. This great increase in power,
three times, and the reduction of grades, duplication of
lines and other improvements enable the traffic, great as it
Table I1.—Statement of Locomotives and their Tractive Power on
the 31st December, 1916.
Class. | vee Description.
REGULAR STOCK.
D255 6 | Passenger Tender engine
D261; 41 5p of >
C 48 3° 39 3?
CG 13 99 33 99
H 12 ” » ”
L304 10 39 29 33
L436 10 39 99 23
P 185 33 3” 33
| Bad 6 39 33 399
O 12 33 99 993
N 5 ” oF) ”
NN 25 2” oy) ”
M 15 | Passenger Tank engine
CC 18 ” 29 i)
“|S 144, cy) oe) 99
R 6 3” 29 Ly)
J483 | 20 | Goods Tender engines
J131 8 33 39 33
T 205 33 3) 33
ee 75 33 39 39
TE 105t | _,, es »
TFt+ 60 39 33 33
B 95 do 3+” 3%
A 12 LB) 33 23
A 47 3° 39 ”
I 20 | Goods Tank engines
E 33 33 339 33 .
1236
* With Schmidt superheater. + Without superheater.
Tractive
18,144
19,440
21,060
19,440
Robinson superheater. ‘*P”’ class Six-wheeled tenders,
Total
Tractive
Powor.
628,608
161,746
176,148
154,670
154,670
4,104,595
139,122
241,320
119,645
648,575
236,505
252,276
2,752,704.
69,300
535,580
163,000
5,899,285
2,233,275
3,491,880
1,935,360
1,867,320
217,728
913,680
421,200
641,520
——a
28,767,708
t Includes one fitted with
§ Eight-wheeled tenders.
—
pan
WOARBAMBNOWRAHOOH
a a FO
PRESIDENTIAL. ADDRESS. . 25
now is, to be dealt with in a much more satisfactory man-
ner than formerly, and the many improvements introduced
by the present and former Chief Mechanical Engineers in
design, have brought the locomotives of this State to a
degree of perfection that can only be fully realised when
one of the express engines of 1891, good as it was and is,
is seen beside the new NN engines built at the Commiss-
ioners’ Workshops.
Tramways.
In 1891 there was a total length of 425 miles of street
tramways in use, made up of the following sections :—
Oity and Suburban... 335 miles, steam traction.
North Sydney el Pee CADIE re
Neweastle ... Def Mesias ay $n OLCAM. «rugs
the cost of construction and- equipment being £857,455,
£74,343 and £72,414 respectively, making a total of
£1,004,212.
Until the construction of the Ocean Street Cable Tram-
way in 1894, only small additions had been made to the
mileage, and it was not until after electricity was first
used as the motive power at the end of 1899, on the line
from Circular Quay to Pyrmont, that the large expansion
of the tramway system commenced, there being now 221
miles open for traffic in and about Sydney, Newcastle, and
Broken Hill. Table III shows how this is distributed, and
Table III.—Tramways in 1916.
Miles. Chains. Cost.
City and Suburban, Electric... _... i> 181 17 | £6,332,434
North Sydney, Electric oie ae sea tas 2) 31 659,501
Ashfield to Mortlake, Electric m3 -é 8 38 200,816
| Arncliffe to Bexley, Steam ... ae ney 2 50 21,752
Kogarah to Sans Souci, Steam __.... 5. 5 45 27,814
emeuette to Castle Hill, Steam ...° sis 6 55 38,446
anly to Spit
Manly to aes | Electric seg Beil ska) 58 320,459
Sutherland to Cronulla, Steam Ge ae 32 49,696
| Rockdale to Brighton, Steam _.... Mts <a 20 13,491
Newcastle and Suburban, Steam ... alt eee 69 374,789
| East to West Maitland, Steam ‘ie co 4. 47 38,941
| Broken Hill, Steam ... the ale hO 4, 88,284
26 T. H. HGUGHTON.
the capital, cost of construction and equipment being
£8,166,423; this has increased to eight times what it was
twenty-five years previously, although the length of line
operated has only increased about five times.
After the opening of the electric line to Pyrmont, great
progress was made in the reconstruction and electrification
of the existing steam lines, and extensions were made at @
rapid rate for many years, until now Sydney has a tram-
way system stretching its lines out into far distant suburbs,
the only drawback apparently being that it cannot at times
carry all who desire to travel by it without overcrowding;
that is, however, a failing of many suburban transport
systems.
The power house in which the electric current was
generated for the first tramway at Pyrmont, contained at
the commencement four 850 kilowatt 660 volt direct current
generators driven by compound engines. The conversion of
the lines from steam to electric soon made additional power
necessary, and in 1902 three 1500 kw. alternating current
generators, driven by compound vertical engines were
erected, in 1905 the first turbine driven alternator was
put to work; it was of comparatively small capacity, 1500
kw. and was soon followed by others. The plant now
comprises the following turbine driven alternators produc-
ing current at 6600 volts and 25 cycles per second: one
1500, four 5000, one 7000, and one 7500 kw., a total rated
capacity of 36000 kw., but capable, when required, of tem-
porarily carrying an overload up to 50000 kw.
Three of the direct current generators first installed have
been removed, one being retained for night work and light-
ing, the three vertical engines and the generators installed
in 1902 have also been disposed of.
At White Bay a new power house has been built to
supplement the one at Prymont; it contains three turbine
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Wf
driven alternators with a rated capacity of 21,500 kw., but
which can generate during an emergency about 30,000 kw.
At both stations the equipment of boilers and their
appurtenances, switch gear, indicators, meters, and other
electrical appliances are of the most modern type ensuring
safety and economy in working.
The current generated at these two stations is converted
into direct current by rotatory convertors at sixteen sub-
stations, and from them distributed to the overhead trolly
wires. When the system was first introduced large storage
batteries were provided, but the necessity for these has
disappeared, for it has been found cheaper to lay duplicate
mains and provide more convertors to obviate the risk of
interference with traffic in consequence of a breakdown
of a machine or cable.
The current for operating the lines on the northern side
of the harbour, is conveyed by cables laid in a tunnel under
the harbour, starting at Long Nose Point. The construction
of this involved some engineering difficulties, for although
it is 135 feet below the bottom of the harbour at that point,
silt and sand broke in through an unsuspected fissure, filling
the tunne]. It was subsequently cleaned out and the
fissure closed up.
In 1902 the “Thermit”’ welding of the tram-rails was
introduced; prior to that time, in order to obtain the proper
electrical and mechanical connection between the rails,
extra long fish plates, carefully planed and fitted to the
rail were used; this, after being in use for fourteen years,
has now been dispensed with in favour of electric welding,
which is both cheaper and more efficient. Instead of the
rails being welded at the ends they are carefully butted
end to end, and then fish plates are welded to the sides of
the rails, forming a mechanically good joint and an efficient.
conductor for the return current.
28 T. H. HOUGHTON.
A source of trouble and expense to the Commissioners,
and annoyance to the public, has been the rapid wear of
the crossings, especially at such busy centres as the inter-
section of King Street with Elizabeth, Castlereagh and
George Streets. Manganese steel crossings of the very
best materials were used at these places, but that did not
obviate the wear and bumping which resulted from it, and
the delay to traffic which when a large crossing is being
replaced is unavoidable. Now, however, by means of electric
welding, it is possible to deposit a surface of tool steel on
the face of the crossing as soon as it shows any signs of
wear, and the crossing is thus made practically everlasting.
Privately Owned Railways.
There are in the State 1431 miles of privately owned
railways, the most important of those recently constructed
being the 33 miles of line connecting the works of the
Commonwealth Oil Corporation with the Government
Railway at Newnes. This line is interesting owing to
the heavy grades and the type of locomotives used on it.
An interesting description of the difficulties overcome was
given by our past President, Mr. H. Deane, m. inst. c.E., in his
Presidential address in 1908.
Roads and Bridges.
On the passage of the Act conferring Local Government
on the country districts in 1906, the control of the roads
and bridges was transferred to local bodies, national works
still being retained by the Government, which also subsidised
the Shires to a considerable amount. So far there appears
to have been no material improvement in the main roads, but
the necessity for improvement is being forced on the public
in consequence of the great increase in fast motor traffic,
and although the outlay will be conte re the oats willbe ~~
more than commensurate.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 29
Few country bridges of any length, or possessing any
notable engineering features, have been constructed since
1891; the following five are the principal ones:—
Kempsey Bridge over Macleay River. Built in 1900 at
a cost of £22,345, consists of four timber trusses 153 feet
each, and nine approach spans, with length overall of 925.
feet, width of roadway 22 feet 6 inches.
Cobram Bridge over Murray River. Built in 1902 ata
cost of £20,000, consists of two composite trusses 104 feet.
span with a steel lift span of 58 feet, and nine approach
spans, having an overall length of 575 feet. The width of
deck on lift span is 16 feet 6 inches, and 19 feet 9 inches.
on other spans with a 3 feet 6 inches footway.
Luskintyre Bridge over Hunter -River near Lochinvar.
Built in 1903, at a cost of £19,700, consists of two steel
spans of 199 feet each, and 15 timber approach spans with
an overall length of 916 feet, the width of roadway being
18 feet.
Richmond Bridge over Hawkesbury River. Built in 1905
at a cost of £20,225. Oonsists of thirteen concrete arches,
54 feet each, length overall of 722 feet, with a 20 feet.
roadway.
Wakool Bridge over Wakool River. Built in 1913 ata
cost of £15,524, consists of one 104 feet composite truss,
steel bascule span 66 feet, steel track span 68 feet and seven
timber approach spans having an overall length of 452 feet.
The width of deck on the steel spans is 14 feet, and on the
other spans 18 feet. |
The most important bridges built within the period are
Pyrmont and Glebe Island swings spans, they are con-
structed throughout of steel and swing on central piers, all
operations being performed electrically. They were built
by the Public Works Department under the direction of
30 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Mr. P. Allan, m. mst.c.e. They are similar in design, the
leading dimensions being:
Pyrmont. Glebe Island.
Length over all ... sie ..220 ft. ... 195 ft. 4in.
Width of roadway as .» 40 ft. -... 408,
Width of footpaths each sisie ji pet plea mae D ft.
Width of clear waterways each, 80 ft. ... 60 ft.
Weight of swing Be .../98 tons... 650 tons.
As it has been decided to fill in that portion of Darling
Harbour above Bathurst, Street with spoil from the exca- —
vations being made for the City Railway, Pyrmont Bridge
will no doubt be removed, and the swing span utilised at
some other site, and no doubt in time, as the requirements
of the Port extend, Glebe Island bridge will have to be
removed, as it limits the dimensions of vessels which can
enter Blackwattle and Rozelle Bays, a tunnel from
Pyrmont to Glebe Island taking its place.
Ports and Harbours.
Although Railways and Roads are required for the
development of the greater portion of the State, yet along
the seaboard water carriage will always be the cheapest.
Much of the richest land of the Stateliesalong the numerous
rivers discharging into the Pacific, and as a consequence,
large towns and villages have grown up whose only means
of getting their produce to market is by water. In order
that this may be done, it is essential that the rivers be kept
open for navigation and the entrances made as safe as
possible.
Owing to the frequency of floods, which bring down large
quantities of silt, the mouths of the rivers become choked,
and frequently changes in the position of the outlets
occur. Another obstacle to safe navigation was the
great difficulty caused by the shifting and dangerous state
of the sand bars at the entrances, the only means by which
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ak
these drawbacks to trade could be overcome was by the
construction of costly improvements, which would create
sufficient scour to maintain a suitable depth of water on
the bar, and also permanently fix the position of the
entrance, leaving the silt to be dealt with by dredges.
Observations and soundings had been carried on for some
time at the principal rivers, in order that proper remedial
measures could be adopted, when a few years before the
period under review, the Government obtained the services
of Sir John Coode, ™. mst.c.n, who prepared improvement
schemes for a number of the bar harbours. Various modi-
fications have been introduced into his designs as more
extensive knowledge became available, and although at
none of the river entrances, with the exception of the
Richmond and the Hunter, is the work actually completed,
yet the benefit of the works carried out has been felt for
some time.
Over £3,000,000 had been expended on these improve-
ments up to the end of June 1916, exclusive of the large
sums spent on Sydney and Newcastle Harbours.
Table IV shows the distribution of this expenditure, and
the extent to which the depth of water has been increased,
and in Table V are given some detail statistics of the rivers
and their entrances.
At Port Kembla there has been provided a very effective
coal loading apparatus, which, by means of a travelling belt,
discharges coal tipped into a large hopper at the shore end
of the jetty, into the holds of steamers moored to it; 600
tons of coal an hour have been loaded by it into ocean
going steamers.
Newcastle was in 1891 a well equipped port, but the con-
stantly increasing trade, and the greater draught of the
ships using it, have made necessary many additions. The
Northern Breakwater has been extended by 420 feet at a
Table 1V.—Eapenditure on Ports along Coast of NV. S. Wales,
( eee Port Jackson ).
Babine to
Ports or Tributaries. Exclusive of
New South Wales River Entrances.
Cost per Annum. Mean over
30-6-1916, a Fourteen Year Period.
General Main- |
Dredging. Dredging. tavihnee
& e £
Tweed River ... ae eet 98,666 6,021 yt ae
Byron Bay eh fie | 38,054 65 20%
Richmond River “fee ..| 490,617 10,135 - 904
Clarence River... oA ...| 490,618 7,576 413
Woolgoolga ~... ide Le 16,799 ig. 480
Coff’s Harbour... Sec ee 72,979 - eg 488
Bellinger River Ase 955, 70,410 a 27
Nambucca River shay Oetoe 50,928 3,498 49
Macleay ... hae siike ae 100,440 4,257 3822
Trial Bay. ... as ee 95,376 ee DS 73
Hastings sal sk ot 29,659 1,979. 105
Camden Haven _.. He 53 065 2,491 94.
Manning iad ae | 121,355 6,382 241
Cape Hawke ... os & 16,642 2,379 35
Newcastle fas a, ..| 946,238 46,368 4,818
Lake Macquarie ae P 93,634 804 50
Botany Bay and Cook’s "River 210,043 1,723 — 170
Wollongong _... ue .| 180,476 152 312
Port Kembla ... ge ...| 552,786 38 1,205
Shell Harbour ... a ve 10,277 uae 4
Kiama ... ee aes aes 89,203 16 55
Shoalhaven fae we No 24,084: 201 103
Crookhaven {2 me ee 25,246 1,171 48
Ulladulla ee a ts 12,962 he * 90
Bateman’s Bay hd A 18,792 596 154
Moruya ... Ps ee aa 69,926 |. 1,187 73
Bermagui His ae ae 12,027 Be 57
Tathra.. athe er - 23,764 141
Merimbula a fs “ 13,857 119
Eden... sg ade 15,863 - 68
Depth on Kar L. W.S. T.
River Entrance. Prior tv com- |
mencement of 1916, |
Works.
it. . in. ft. \ ie
Tweed ... & Eh aed
Richmond 7 O if ee
Clarence... So) 1h cae
Bellinger Bis ak, 4 6
Nambucca 4 9 4° 2
Macleay .. 5 AO 7-730
Hastings — oe me reo te 6 6
Camden Haven 4 6 6.3.
Manning Ses eb 10. 5
Cape Hawke 2: 03 3. 0
Crookhaven 1 a8. 12 10
Bateman’s Bay... 4 0 ipa y
Moruya ... 610 Oo an
3d
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.
a
OT
8T
él
6
"ya0y
“amlayos
jo
Lncoy aks) (ol
-W09 110
yydap
paqjed
-tonuy
‘SU,SOID| “TVG |'su,sorp] ‘avg |*ou,so1p| “rea
ot
oo
1d by
© Or
Oo =
eo
i=)
kX
ler)
=_
i
e
Sylar ie) eS)
cf) 6
i)
qo
ld N
on
om AGS
wd =
FR
OOV
008
OO9T
0g9
004
00¢
00g
OOrT
OOOT
OOS
900T
Lo
=
ee
OO & 020 F210 HF 10 210
NO210 © 4 O20
at re OOO
= =
are
rt
_
oe |
rENrFONODUOMNDO NO YWONAN
a
re
HFROWOKR HAH OD
MOHNNWMMOWOS
DO—-OoOrwnouorr wor
ON O1010 Fee ke a Oo
4
Pods | UL “4g
HN S Oka KS SKS)
HS OGDSOSOCORDO OS
ADOMMODOMDO
ACESS) CRS Ss SS Le) SN PCR en
oo 0
=
.
ve)
Ce
a
~
et
ote:
ol
£5)
Ce
"1098
2 eee a MBO
“WUNWIIUL TA ‘OSBIOAV “UINMUIXCAT =| uaa.M99q
90uR1}Ue
TOATL
‘eply, sutadg JO UIPIM
I9}VWM AO'T 4B OT-GT6T Iv04 0Y} SULInp syydoq eee
gc
801
8
“STI Dg] *soaoy |STIT"OS|"Sit 9S) "STI “IS|STT Beg
O€6Ie
0089
OGL
O09
OSLe
O& LE
Orgel
OOO0TE
0089
000¢
VIG
VOIE
8&%
6861
I8SP
egg
6LP
g0S8
€89¢
SIP
VG
GG
LT
66
&T
61
6&
6
GT
L9
89
VS
‘quomyrvdmo00 |jo vary) syBog
T8PLL JO vory
OV
IPI
8ST
OIT
VIG
8g
9L
LVS
671
Siig
. GOO}
TOATSL UIMeIp
jo
TOF WOTY
em -BSIABU q
~YozBO yO
qroary
Sgt
6&1
661
TL
og
GZI
Gal
S6ST
RGUL
802
61Z
82S
163
8ZE
CLs
“IOATY |"oupsg
wLOTy
98ue'T jaouv4sip
TeqO, | Surpreg
‘savy, YInog many fo scowmuguy waaray fo 840)nI1940q —' A 9[A BI,
eee eee “** BGUOBY AA
soe eee tee ekndoyy
~ Lug s ueuieyeq
(19A1Y Ueaeyl[eoys
SUIPNIOUL) WeARByyooID
ae “-oruenboep, oye]
ne “* gymeyA odey
s@e eee eee SULUUB]L
ce “* WaABA, UepuED
cee eee eee SSUIISe HT
or eee see Aed[OVI
see sere ewoonquie Ny
ec eee eee 109 U1[[9q
see eee eee eoueIBI[—)
** puomryory
a DOO,
‘410g JO OUIUN
C—May 2, 1917.
34 T. H. HOUGHTON.
cost of £33,433; this reduced the inflow of sand, and con-
sequently the amount of dredging to maintain the requisite
depth at the entrance. In 1909 it was discovered that the
bar at the entrance consisted mostly of boulders, and not
solid rock as previously supposed. These have been dredged
up to the extent of 38,700 tons, with the result that an
additional three feet six inches of water has been obtained;
since this was achieved only ten vessels in four and a half
years have had to leave the port without a full cargo,
whereas in 1907 there were 45.
In the harbour improvements have been made. An up-to-
date cargo wharf with sheds complete, known as Lee Wharf
has been constructed, and a coal shipping wharf one-third
of a mile long has been built on the western side of the
Carrington Basin. Upon this have been installed six high
speed electrical travelling cranes with a lifting capacity of
{5 tons, at 55 feet radius, a hoisting speed of 100 feet,
slewing 300 feet, and traversing 100 feet per minute. It is
estimated with the improvement in the existing coal ship-
ping appliances, and the recent additions, that in every
day work, the appliances of the port at date could ship 94
million tons of coal per annum, as against the record ship-
ment in 1913 of 5$ million tons. With the removal of the
Old Carrington and Darval Street bridges, good progress
has been made with the dredging out ofa second still water
basin, by widening out Throsby’s Creek. Additional moor-
ing accommodation has been provided for loaded ships on
the Newcastle shore, and three additional coal shipping
berths have been provided between the two basins in con-
nection with a proposed Bin and Conveyor system of coal
shipment.
The expenditure on Newcastle harbour was, to the 30th
June 1916, £946,238, the average annual cost of dredging ~
and maintenance being over £50,000.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. a5
Sydney Harbour.
Twenty-five years ago practically the whole of the
wharfage of the port was under private ownership. The
State Government had built some wharfage at the head of
Woolloomooloo Bay and round Circular Quay. Besides this,
the next piece of Government wharfage was the iron whari
at the head of Darling Harbour. A start was about to be
made at Darling Island on a frontage quay which was
intended to connect it to the main land.
The private wharfage extended in an unbroken line from
the west side of Circular Quay to the head of Darling
Harbour. The majority of the wharves were jetties, nar-
row, without cover, and having from 80 to 90 feet of water-
way between. There was an absence of system in the lay-
out, many of them converging towards the outer ends so
that they could not be lengthened without blocking access.
The access from the shore was cramped and utterly inade-
quate; some of the wharves were reached by vehicular
lifts which caused great obstruction to traffic.
With the increase in the size of vessels an impossible
position was reached. Woolloomooloo and the Circular
Quay could not furnish sufficient berthage. In addition, the
private wharfage was in a gravely, insanitary condition,
owing to the cheap and unsuitable construction of the sea
wallsand wharf sheds. The water front was infested with
rats which became infected with plague introduced from
foreign parts.
The whole situation in connection with the shipping was
so bad, that in 1900 the Government decided to resume the
whole of the wharfage along the city front from Woolloo-
mooloo Bay to Darling Island. This was accomplished by
Act of Parliament in the same year, the value of the
properties resumed being £4,831,532. The resumption
extended well back from the water front between Dawes
36 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Point and the head of Darling Harbour to allow for a
complete remodelling of the approaches, as well as the
wharfage, and in 1901 the Sydney Harbour Trust was con-
stituted and given control of the port.
When the Harbour Trust assumed control, the concrete
sea wall at Darling Island was in course of construction,
the eastern wall having been completed; the western and
northern walls were carried out by them, and cargo sheds
constructed for over-sea service as speedily as possible.
A wharf at the north-eastern side of Woolloomooloo Bay,
which had been commenced by the Public Works Depart-
ment, was also finished. Plans were at once prepared for
the remodelling of the wharfage and a roadway for access
thereto, running along the foreshore from Circular Quay to
the Gas Works, Darling Harbour. This is ultimately to be
extended through the Gas Works to the head of Darling
Harbour.
A commencement was made by the Harbour Trust in
1901 at Miller’s Point, which then consisted of several
ramshackle wharves. The first portion of the frontage
roadway was opened up between Moore and Munn Streets
in 1905, and a wharf 1,080 feet in length constructed along
the shore.
_ The Trust next proceeded to demolish the old wharfage
to the south of Miller’s Point and north of the Gas Works,
and reconstruct it on up-to-date lines. The frontage road-
way was continued to the Gas Works boundary, and the
land to the rear of Kent Street entirely remodelled. The
wharfage in this vicinity now consists of five jetties, four
of which are 500 feet in length by 100 feet in width, and
one 600 feet long; four of them having double decked cargo
sheds. Further progress is at present blocked by the
Gas Works, but this property has been resumed by the
Government, and it is expected that the new frontage
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 37
roadway, called Hickson Road, after the first President of
the Trust, will be eG pEHeE through into Sussex Street this
year. |
Hast of Miller’s Point the old wharfage has been
demolished as far as Dawes’ Point, and eight new berths
have been completed. These consist of two frontage
wharves and three jetties. These berths range from 500
feet to 700 feetinlength. The water front at this locality
was the most inaccessible portion of the original wharfage,
the demolitions, necessary to open up the frontage roadway
(Hickson Road) were very considerable, anda great amount
of quarrying was necessary. Hickson Road was carried
by cutting through the hill to meet the portion constructed
earlier, north of the Gas Works; this entailed the removal
of an enormous quantity of solid rock and the construction
of three reinforced concrete over-bridges; at present the
road is open from Dawes’ Point to the Gas Works.
The wharfage at the eastern aide of: Flags sinetlee Bay,
which was comparatively new when the Trust took charge,
proved to be unsuitable for the accommodation of modern
vessels and had to be extended; the deck level was raised,
and large modern cargo sheds erected.
To make the most of the available space at this part of
the harbour, a jetty was built extending north from the
centre of the bay a distance of 1,160 feet, and 208 feet in
width. It is provided witha central roadway four feet
below the floors of the wharves, and double decked cargo
sheds in which electrical cargo handling eye? are
installed.
At Pout a jetty for the shipment of grain was built
1,000 feet in length and 150 feet wide. The structure of
this jetty is very heavy as it is frequently loaded with
wheat in bags stacked 27 feet in height above the deck.
38 . —, H, HOUGHTON.
An important group of wharves was recently commenced
at Jones Bay, Pyrmont, and is now nearing completion.
The eastern jetty of this group is of novel construction,
being built of a combination of timber, steel and concrete.
At Glebe Island a large amount of reclamation has been
carried out,, and 1,000 feet of timber wharf built in con-
nection with the grain trade of the port. This will, in all
probability, be incorporated in the proposed Bulk Grain
Handling Scheme later on.
The ferry jetties at the Circular Quay and Erskine
Street have been rebuilt to suit the ever increasing traffic.
The outlines of the Circular Quay have been greatly altered,
there now being fewer berths than of old, but of greater
length and superior cargo shed accommodation.
On the Trust’s property outside of the wharfage premises
a great deal of remodelling has been done. Numerous old
shops, residences, hotels, stores and workshops built by
private persons have been demolished. New streets and
lanes have been opened and old streets such as Sussex and
Argyle Streets widened.
Since its inception the Trust has spent £3,316,073 on the
improvements of the port, streets, buildings, etc., bringing
the total capital value up to £8,147,605.
The eastern channel at the entrance of the port has been
deepened from about 30 feet twenty-five years ago to 40
feet, for a width of 700 feet. The western channel has
also been cut through on one side, and work is proceeding
towards securing 40 feet init also for the same width;
soundings show that these channels do not tend to fill up
by silting after being dredged to the increased depth.
The use of reinforced concrete for the construction of
the large pontoons for the ferry wharves introduced a few,
years ago by the Hngineer-in-Chief, Mr. H. D.. Walsh,
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 39
M. Inst.0.B,, has been found most suitable, and the same
material was used for the protection of the piles for the
long jetty at Woolloomooloo Bay and the eastern jetty at
Jones Bay.
The lights connected with the navigation of the port.
have been rebuilt, those on land being with few exceptions
constructed of reinforced concrete, and all except a few
lighted with acetylene gas; the floating lights are also fitted
~ with occulting acetylene gas apparatus.
Gas Works.
The importance of gas in our daily life was fully realised
recently, when owing to a shortage in the supply of coal
its use had to be restricted, thus causing inconvenience to
thousands of householders. In this State the public supply
of gas dates back to 1842, when the Sydney works were
first put into operation; from then until 1891 the demand
for light and power had grown to such an extent that the
Australian Gas Light Company, who supply Sydney, had
found it necessay. to build works at Mortlake, which were
put into operation in 1886. They were fitted with all the
labour saving devices available, that being the first occas-
ion in Australia when the retorts were charged and drawn
by mechanical power, thus relieving the stokers of a portion
of their arduous labours, and so satisfactory were the
results, that the head station at Kent Street, was in 1896,
equipped with similar machinery at a cost of £40,000. By
1895, the 36 inch main from Mortlake into the city had
become too small. To increase its capacity the gas was
forced along it at high pressure, and to regulate the supply
to the various districts, governing stations were erected at
the points of offtake; a second main has since been laid.
Up to 1913, horizontal retorts had been used for the car-
bonization of coal, but at that date the vertical retorts
were first used in the State, the Newcastle Gas Company
40 - T, H. HOUGHTON.
abandoning entirely the old type; the Australian Gas Light
Company were, however, unable to discard the older type,
but their extensions at Mortlake in 1913 were of the ver-
tical type in which the coal is fed in at the top and the
coke discharged at the bottom. Further extension has
since been made, and now 507% of the gas produced at
Mortlake is made in vertical retorts.
The new works of the North Shore Gas Company, the
completion of which has been delayed by the war, will have
vertical retorts.
This type of retort requires the coal to be raised to
hoppers at the top, which is done by an extensive system
of electric telpherage, the coke discharged automatically
from the retorts is also handled by the same means; the
complete system was put into operation at Mortlake in 1915.
The company have at their various works and depots
Storage capacity for 20,000,000 cubic feet of gas; the holder:
recently constructed at Mortlake holds 12,000,000 cubic
feet and is the largest in the Empire, a larger one near
London having been destroyed during a Zeppelin raid.
The tar produced is distilled in accordance with the War
Precautions Act requirements, but up to the present no
attempt has been made on a UTS TF scale to go
beyond this.
_ Both at Mortlake and Kent Street the company have
installed plants for the manufacture of carburetted water
gas, the capacity being three million and one million cubic
feet of gas per day respectively.
The Australian Gas Light Company’s progress during the
last quarter of a century has been followed throughout the
State, the industry showing remarkable progress. Tables
VIand VI4 have been compiled from data in the Gas World
Year Book, and show that in the fourteen years from 1902 .
to 1916 the quantity of gas made has increased 300%.
Name of Town.
Armidale ...
Bathurst ...
Rega
Bowral
Cootamundra
Dubbo
Forbes
Glen Innes
Lismore
Lithgow
Liverpool
| Maitland, East
Molong ...
Muswellbrook
Nowra .
} Orange
| Parkes
Wagga Wagea
Waratah ..,
Wellington
| Yass 5
Table Vla.—Gas Works Owned by Companies.
Name of Town.
Albury
Bathurst ...
| Broken Hill
Camden
Casino.
Cowra
Goulburn ...
Grafton
Grenfell
Hay - hs
Katoomba...
Kiama ae
West Maitland
Manly .
Mudgee
| Newcastle ...
Singleton ..,
Sydney
North Sydney...
Tamworth .,
| Wallsend ...
Windsor
| Wollongong
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.
Table VI.—Gas Works Owned by Municipalities.
1916
Annual make Number of
1902
in millions of Gonsuiiers
1000 c.ft.
Annual make
in millions of
1000 c. ft.
Ow,
ao:
Annual make
in millions of
1000 ¢.ft.
" eee-
1902
Number of
Consumers.
570
2239
190
192
394.
530
395
358
880
1215
272
474,
160
340
205
1106 ©
255
760
1050
418
141
1916
Annual make
; ae Number of
rae eins mm uulliens of Consumers.
250 8 4.00
ake 9 250
492 4A, 2353
5 5 175
7°8 363
as 10 239
600 24, 716
as 14 392
fin 5°d 220
sae 4°5 461
000 30 1150
83 A, 135°
600 40 2700
Bee 95 3196
sa » +6 405
3430 262 10727 -
Fae 9 431
53000 4403 129440
4633 748 18140
456 1L. 520
ic 9 483
wes 3 136
260 19 672
/
49 T. H. HOUGHTON.
The recent resumption by the Government of the Kent
Street Works for harbour improvements, has compelled the
Gas Company to largely extend their Mortlake works and
very shortly the whole of the gas supplied by them will be
manufactured there.
‘Electric Lighting.
In 1891 the public supply of electricity was only in its
infancy, the plant installed having a total capacity of 600
kw., since then there have been wonderful developments,
not only in Sydney but throughout the State.
Table VII shows the towns in which works for the public
supply of electricity have been established.
Table VII.—Electric Light Stations in New South Wales 1916.
Under Municipal Control.
Albury Petersham Moss Vale Sydney
Broken Hill Goulburn Newcastle Tamworth
Cowra Inverell Penrith . Temora
Young.
Privately Owned.
Ballina Deniliquin Kempsey Narrandera
Balmain Dungog Lismore Parramatta
Bulli Holbrook Manilla Walla Walla
Cobar Gunnedah Manly Windsor
Culcairn Henty Moree Wingham
Coonamble Katoomba Mudgee Wollongong
Yanco and Leeton.
The greatest development has, however, taken place in
Sydney, where the City Council in 1904, established works.
for the supply of current for public and private lighting and
power. Sosuccessful was it from the first, that extensions.
were required almost at once, the growth has been con-
tinuous at an increased rate, and has only been checked by
the Council being unable to obtain the necessary pace
in consequence of the war.
The Power House, admirably situated for convenience of
the supply of fuel and condensing water, is at Pyrmont near
;
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 43
Darling Harbour, with the railway alongside, but the
demand for current has extended to such a distance from
the city proper that it is no longer central.
The generating plant first installed consisted of three
reciprocating steam engines driving three-phase alter-
nators of a total capacity of 1500 kw., generating a current
of 5000 volts 50 cycles per second. In 1906 additional
machinery of 1200 kw. capacity was installed, in 1907 a
steam turbine driven generator of 2000 kw. was started
and duplicated in 1908. This did not suffice for long, as in
1911 two similar plants, but each of 4000 kw., were found
necessary, and in 1914a 5000 kw. turbine driven generator
was added, this being of German make, and I am pleased
to be able to say that those of British make previously
supplied, have, I believe, proved themselves superior
machines.
Some of the earliest installed plant has been sold, being
too small to operate economically, the plant having thus
grown from a capacity of 1500 kw. in 1904 to 26200 kw. in
1914, when its growth was checked.
Steam is generated in boilers of large capacity fitted with
automatic chain grate stokers, and superheaters. |
The coal used is delivered by railway waggons into hop-
pers after having been weighed, and from there raised to
an oyerhead coal bunker from which it is delivered by
gravity to the automatic stokers, being weighed on its way,
so that the performance of each boiler on each shift can be
checked. |
The ashes are handled by conveyors and elevators and
delivered into overhead hoppers, from which they are dis-
charged by gravity into railway waggons.
_ The high tension switch gear is arranged in special
chambers under the engine-room floor, and is operated
44 T, H, HOUGHTON.
electrically from a platform in the engine room, the risk
of accident to the operator being practically done away
with, as he has not to handle the actual switch.
The 5000 volt three-phase current generated at the power
house is for the centre of the city proper, conveyed by lead
covered cables to substations, where it is converted by
motor generators to 480 volt direct current and supplied
to consumers either at 480 or 240 volts. For all outside this
area the current is transformed by static transformers to
415 volts, giving 240 volts to the neutral wire.
The extension of the area of supply was such that in 1910
it was found necessary to increase the pressure for the
more distant suburbs to 10,000 volts, and afterwards to
10,500 volts; this, however, was not sufficient, and the
pressure has been raised to 33,000 volts, current at that
voltage being supplied to works at Granville and the
Abattoirs,and will,as soon as material is available, be taken
across the Parramatta River to the ames = station
for North Sydney.
Besides the City of Sydney current is eupplied to the
following municipalities: Alexandria, Annandale, Auburn,
Botany, Burwood, Canterbury, Concord, Darlington, Drum-
moyne, Enfield, Erskineville, Glebe, Homebush, Lane Oove,
Lidcombe, Marrickville, Mascot, Mosman, North Sydney,
Paddington, Randwick, Redfern, St. Peters, Strathfield,
Vaucluse, Waterloo, Waverley, Willoughby, and Woollahra,
the relative number of consumers in the suburbs 8 being 19
to 10 in the city. :
The municipalities on the north of the tiarbode are at
present supplied through a submarine cable; theOity Council
have, however, erected on the banks of the Parramatta
River, at Abbotsford and Gladesville, steel towers about a
third of a mile apart, from which the ‘cables will be sus-
pended at a height of about 150 feet above the surface of
water.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 45,
The extension to the outlying suburbs has made necessary
a very considerable increase in the substations; in 1904
there were five, in 1907 eight, in 1910 seventeen, in 1913.
sixty-three, and at the present time about one hundred,
besides a large number of pole transformers. The capital
expenditure, which at the end of 1904 amounted to £151,894,
has grown until at the end of 1916 it was £2,860,000.
The Hlectric Light and Power Supply Corporation was.
formed in 1908, they built works on the water side near
the Iron Oove Bridge at Balmain, in order to carry out a
contract entered into with the Balmain Municipality to
supply electric current, and also destroy their garbage, the
waste heat from this being used for the generation of steam..
The supply which has been extended to the adjoining muni-
cipalities of Newtown, Petersham, Leichhardt and Ashfield,
commenced in September 1909, since which time the suc-
cess of the company must be most gratifying to its share-
holders and officials.
The power station is equipped with two reciprocating
triple expansion engines and three steam turbines driving
generators of 5050 kw. total capacity, supplying an alter-
nating three-phase current at 5000 volts which is conveyed.
to twenty-two different transformer substations by bare
overhead mains and from them supplied to consumers at.
415 volts.
The area within which the company has the sole right to.
supply electric light and power covers ten square miles
with a population of 146,000, the street mileage being 212,.
number of premises, including man y large factories, 29,762,
with a capital value of £17,620,741.
The expenditure to October 1916 amounted to £266,9513.
116 miles of streets being lighted, of which 98 miles are
reticulated for private lighting, the high pressure trunk
mains from the power house to the district substations.
amounting to 33 miles.
46 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Water Supply.
A plentiful supply of potable water is one of the neces-
sities of life, and as settlement increased, became one of the
most pressing problems of the State. In 1891 the require-
ments of only the larger towns of the State had received
attention, but the growth of population, the increase in the
standard of living, and above all the necessity for better |
Sanitation, have been the cause of a large extension of
public water supplies within the past twenty-five years.
The Country Towns Water Supply and Sewerage Act,
which was passed in 1880, and enabled the Government to
carry out works for country municipalities, has been taken
advantage of by fifty-five municipalities not including
Sydney, Newcastle, and Broken Hill. Of these, the works
of eight of the larger towns had been constructed prior to
1891, but have since that date been considerably extended.
The total expenditure on these works has been £1,201,547,
of which £258,630 was expended prior to 1891.
The population of the eight country municipalities with
water supplies constructed prior to 1891, was in 1890, 43,328
and in 1914, 55,750, an increase of only 1°2/ per annum.
The water supply of Sydney and the surrounding suburbs
was in 1891 only in process of development. From very
early days it had been a problem always facing those
responsible for the welfare of the State, and soon after a
new scheme or extension was completed, the need for an
additional supply arose.
In 1891 the storage capacity available to tide the city
over droughts was limited to that at Prospect Reservoir,
which when full covers 1,261 acres, and holds 10,812,313,000
gallons. In order to maintain the supply in Sydney and
the surrounding suburbs, service reservoirs had been built
in the various districts at such elevations as were necessary,
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Sec 47
the highest one being at Chatswood, 370 feet above sea
level; they had in 1891 a capacity of 15,710,000 gallons,
exclusive of Potts’ Hill balance reservoir, which holds
100,000,000 gallons, and is now being extended.
Only two of them, containing 3,400,000 gallons, are at a
sufficiently low elevation to be fed by gravity from Prospect,
the water having to be raised by pumps to the others.
In 1894 the large reservoir in Centennial Park, which
has a capacity of 17,000,000 gallons and a top water level
of 245 feet, was completed, and the Paddington reservoir
abandoned. The growth of population on the South Coast
line required additional storage capacity, and a steel tank
holding 1,000,000 gallons was erected at Penshurst, and
the rapid development along the Milson’s Point-Hornsby
railway line necessitated the construction of a tank holding
1,000,000 gallons at Wahroonga at a height of 720 feet
above high water mark.
The capacity of the service reservoirs is now over 58
million gallons, the highest one being 776 feet above sea
level.
The Metropolitan Board of Water Supply and Sewerage,
who control the supply to Sydney, had since their incorpor-
ation in 1888 been vigorously extending the area reticulated,
but no steps were taken to increase the supply until 1899,
when the low level of the water in Prospect Reservoir
caused them to make inquiries as to the facilities for the
storage of additional water, and surveys were made of the
catchment area to discover suitable sites for this purpose.
Early in 1902, the withdrawal of water from Prospect
Reservoir had lowered the level below that necessary for
gravitation to Sydney, and machinery had to be provided
for raising it into the supply channel. As a result of this
shortage, the Government determined to proceed with the
construction of adam on the Cataract River to supplement
48 T. H. HOUGHTON.
the storage in Prospect Reservoir; this was finished in
June 1908 and handed over to the Board.
This dam, one of the finest in the world, is built of
Oyclopean masonry, and has a height of 160 feet, impounds
2,411,000,000 gallons of water, and cost £325,000 to con-
struct; the full supply level is 950 feet above the sea.
The quantity of water contained in Cataract and Prospect
reservoirs was sufficient for some years, but increasing
demands and an absence of rain on the catchment area
recently caused a shortage of water, which is to be obviated
by the construction of adam on the Cordeaux River, and it
is to be hoped that its completion will temporarily provide
for the supply of the city and suburbs, which are growing so
rapidly, that any scheme of water supply to be satisfactory
must provide for frequent extensions; in fact nearly as soon
as one reservoir is completed investigations as to the site
of another one should be taken in hand.
Table VIII shows the length of mains, quantity of water
supplied, and population in 1891 and 1916.
Table VIII.— Water Supply.
Sydney. Newcastle.
1891 1916 1898 1916
Length of mains in miles... ae 640 2,345 171 412
Properties connected to mains ...| 76,093 | 183,598 7,315 | 22370
Population served ... a3 ...| 865,246 |918,000 | 36,600 | 112,000
Water delivered per annum in Lt)
million gallons Se ...| 38,482 | 14,374 285 1,283
Per'day > 2.6 scree) teal 99'B4 4, 189-36 owen 3°5
Per head, gallons ... felt, o2OneE 42°89 20°89 31:80
The Hunter River District Water Supply works were
completed in 1887, and handed over to the Board who now
control them in 1892; since that time no large works, except
the extension of mains and several service reservoirs, have
been constructed, but the increase in the population and
manufactures has for many years rendered the supply.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 49
inadequate during dry summers. However, a scheme which
will give the district a plentiful supply of soft water has
recently been commenced; the data as to mains etc., are
contained in Table VIII.
The Broken Hill Water Works were constructed by a
private company, who in 1893 commenced to supply water
obtained from a reservoir formed by an earthen dam in
Stephens Oreek, about ten miles from the town, from where
it was pumped to a service reservoir in Broken Hill. The
district has a small annual rainfall and is subject to heavy
storms, the result being that the water conserved becomes
turbid; to overcome this the company, in 1897, installed a
rapid filtration plant, the result being that the supply was
rendered satisfactory. .
The evaporation from the surface of the large reservoir
formed by the dam in Stephens Creek is very great. During
the fifteen years ending 1907,the total supply sold amounted
to about 2,300 million gallons, and the evaporation from
the surface to about 17,750 million gallons, nearly eight
times the quantity utilised.
A second works for the supply of Broken Hill has been
constructed by the Government, a concrete dam having
been built across Umberumberka Oreek near Silverton,
nineteen miles from Broken Hill, from there the water
is pumped to the town; this was completed in 1915 at a
cost of £462,511. On the completion of this work the
Government took over the works of the Stephens Oreek
Oompany, and now supply the town and mines from both
sources. |
Sewerage and Drainage Works.
The introduction of the biological system of treating
sewage, placed sewage works within the reach of many of
the country municipalities, and fifteen towns which had a
water supply, have been sewered by the Government on
D—May 2, 1917.
50 T, H. HOUGHTON.
a
behalf of the municipal councils; up to the end of the last
financial year £338,314 had been spent on this work; this
includes Parramatta, which cost £66,010, and has since
been transferred to the Metropolitan Board, but does not
include Sydney and Newcastle.
_ All these works have been carried out since 1901, besides
the fifteen country towns which already have sewerage
works. Progress has been made towards the completion
of the schemes in Orange, Goulburn, and Albury,
The City of Sydney in 1891 had a complete sewerage
works in operation, except in the low lying areas, but out-
side the city and the nearer suburbs very little had been
done with the reticulation, but the main sewers were in
_ progress. The number of properties liable for sewerage rates
at the end of that year were 31,807. By the end of June
1916, this number had increased to 129,650 houses, serving
an estimated population of 650,000. Naturally from this
great increase it follows that the length of main sewers
and reticulation has also increased; in 1891 the total length
of sewers under the Board’s jurisdiction was 149 miles, and
at the end of June 1916 the length had become 1,022 miles,
a much greater rate of increase than that of the population
served.
Until 1916, the sewage from the south side of the har-
bour was discharged, either into the ocean at Bondi, or
after treatment, at the Sewage Farm at Botany, which had
an area of 620 acres, into Botany Bay. For some years
previously, complaints had been made as to the nuisance
arising from this farm, and in 1907 a scheme for an ocean
outfall in substitution for the sewage farm, was submitted
to Parliament and approved. After exhaustive observations
of the coastal currents, the most favourable point for the
sewer outlet was found to be on the northern headland of
Long Bay, as the southerly current at that point would
sweep the sewage to sea clear of the land to the south.
q
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 51
The sewer, which is one of the largest in the world, is
six and a quarter miles long, its greatest width being twelve
feet three inches, and greatest height nine feet; it drains
an area of 38,000 acres, which includes some of the closest
settled suburban districts, with an estimated population of
300,000; the gradient of the sewer is very flat, being only
1 in 3650 from the manhole at the syphon under Cook’s
River to the outfall.
The wastes from the woolscouring works and tanneries
at Botany, which were formerly discharged into Cook’s
River, are now turned into the sewer, thus removing a
- source of pollution from the river which was causing trouble.
The sewer was completed in 1916 at a cost of £516,158.
Many engineering difficulties were met with in its con-
struction, especially where it passed through wet sand,
which was in the deepest part of the cutting, at a point
where the invert of the sewer is 68 feet below the surface.
A number of constructional difficulties were encountered
in forming the outlet channels to the ocean, special con-
trivances being required to prevent the waves rushing up
‘the sewer. A large air chamber with a shaft to the surface
was constructed a hundred feet back from the edge of the
ocean cliff. The bottom of the sewer at this air chamber
is two and a quarter feet below spring high-water level.
The sewer discharges into a basin constructed with wave
traps, from which two channels have been driven, diverging
like the sides of the letter “‘V,’’ and dipping so that they
run out into the ocean from the face of a submerged cliff
.300 feet from the shaft, at such depth as to give twenty-
three feet of water above the top of each outlet at spring
tide. The rock through which these channels were driven
proved sound and free from fissures, so that tunnelling was
carried on without difficulty within five feet of the ocean.
The tunnels having been lined with. concrete, a number of
52 T. H. HOUGHTON.
holes twelve inches apart were drilled in the rock round
the circumference of each tunnel face, to within eighteen
inches of the water. Two large centrally situated holes
were also drilled, and all the holes charged with gelignite.
Detonators with copper wires were inserted, and connected
with cables running to a battery above high-water level.
The water was then slowly admitted from a hole driven
through the face into the sea, until it rose in the tunnel to
the level of the ocean, and when the water pressure on
both faces of the rock partition became equal, the charges.
were fired. Weather conditions being favourable, a diver
descended from the end of the wall under which the tunnels —
were driven. In the case of one tunnel he found the outlet
clear, the rock having been cleanly cut out, and blown
outwards. The other tunnel, while the explosive had done
its work effectively, was blocked with large fragments of
rock, which remained lodged in the tunnel mouth. These
masses of rock had to be drilled under water and broken up.
with explosives before the tunnel mouth could be cleared.
The sewage on the northern side of the harbour is dealt.
with at Ohatswood, Balmoral, and Folly Point by septic
tanks and filters, the effluent being discharged into branches
of Middle Harbour. The Folly Point works were originally
constructed to treat sewage by lime precipitation and sub- .
sequent filtration; soon after completion the method was.
altered, the precipitation tanks being converted into septic
or liquifying tanks, and a portion of what were eee
sand filters converted into percolating filters.
Recently exhaustive experiments have been made with
a new method of sewage purification termed Sludge Activa-
tion, and I understand that the system is about to be used |
at Folly Point instead of the septic or liquifying tanks, as
the experiments have demonstrated thatitis more effective,
and possibly causes less annoyance to those Lee in the
immediate neighbourhood of the works,
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 53
Water Conservation and Irrigation.
The importance of water conservation is shown by the
number of valuable papers upon it to be found in the pro-
ceedings of our Society.
It is difficult to say when irrigation actually commenced
in New South Wales, for although dates can be given for
the passing of the various legislative enactments, such as
the ‘‘Water Rights Acts,’? the ‘‘Hay Irrigation Act,”’
“*Wentworth Irrigation Act,’’ and the “Irrigation Act,
1912,”’ constituting the Water Conservation and Irrigation
Commission, there were, previous to the passing of any of
these Acts, numbers of private individuals in the State who
were diverting or pumping water from the various streams _
and rivers in the State, and utilising it for irrigation pur-
poses in their private capacity. One of the main reasons
for passing the Water Rights Act of 1896 was to secure
jand holders in possession of duly authorised works. Prior
to that date any man considering himself aggrieved by the
existence of any such works could either bring a suit in
Equity or take the law into his own hands, and cut away
the dam or work of his neighbour. Under the Water Act
all works of this nature are licensed. The first of such
licenses was granted in 1897. Since that date upwards of
2,000 have been issued, of which 688 are for irrigation
purposes, no less than 219 new licenses having been applied
for last year. The whole of these licensed works are not
used for irrigation, but, on the other hand, there are many
instances where pumps have been licensed with a sufficient
capacity to irrigate several hundred acres, and it is esti-
mated that private irrigation areas amount to 30,000 acres.
Realising the importance of water conservation and
irrigation to develop agriculture in the semi-arid parts of
the State, the Government have taken active steps to
extend its benefits. The possibilities of the regions of
=
- . ”
‘
54 T. H. HOUGHTON.
limited rainfall, when artificially supplied with water, have
been known from the earliest times, but New South Wales,
and in fact, the whole Commonwealth, have until lately
lagged behind in making use of their arid and semi-arid
lands, but greater interest is now being taken in the subject.
The first attempt on the part of the Government of the
State to introduce a system of irrigation, was made in the
year 1890, when the Act constituting the Wentworth
Irrigation Area was assented to. This constituted a Trust.
under the control of the local Municipal Oouncil, embracing
an area of 10,600 acres, of which about 1,500 acres are
irrigable; it was, however, not successful, and in 1906 the
control of the area was vested in the Department of Agri-
culture, until the 1st July, 1913, when under the Irrigation
Act the Water conservation and Irrigation Commission
assumed control. It has beena pronounced success. Under
the original Trust a number of the blocks were taken up,
there being 27 settlers in 1906; three years later the number
had increased to 58, and at the present time there are
about 80 settlers holding the bulk of the irrigable and non
irrigable land available on the settlement. At the present
time they produce fruit and other agricultural produce to
the value of at least £20,000 per annum. The area under
irrigation is only about 1,200 acres, which would under
ordinary conditions in the Wentworth district maintain 400
to 500 sheep; it can readily be seen what a wonderful differ-
ence the application of water to this small patch of the
arid waste has made to the district.
The history of the Hay Irrigation Area, which was
established under a separate act in the year 1897, is some-
what different to that of the Wentworth scheme. The
Wentworth settlers having Mildura as an object lesson
almost at their door, devoted their attention largely to the
production of fruit, which is disposed of largely in the dried
condition. At Hay on the other hand the settlers have
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 5D
concentrated their attention upon the production of milk,
and other dairy produce for local consumption, the land
being of a type considered unsuitable for the growth of
fruit trees, although with irrigation, it can be made to
produce satisfactory fodder crops. The control of this area
was in 1913 handed over to the Water Conservation and
Irrigation Commission; it consists of only about 970 irrigable
acres with added dry areas, totalling slightly over 4,000
acres, on which are about 80 settlers.
Both the Hay and Wentworth areas, however, dwindle
into insignificance compared with the Murrumbidgee Irri-
gation Areas, which are at present passing through the
minor troubles incidental to such a scheme, but which at
the same time give promise of developing into prosperous
and contented settlements.
This scheme was talked of by politicians and discussed
in the public press for many years before it actually came
into being. It involved the erection of a storage dam in
the Murrumbidgee Gorge at Burrinjuck, capable of holding
upwards of 750,000 acre feet of water, and the development.
of a complete settlement to contain 100,000 people on the
plains of Narrandera, which were, practically speaking, |
uninhabited.
So much has been written of the great dam at Burrinjuck,
that it is perhaps unnecessary to refer to the matter at
length here, but the following figures as to its dimensions
will, no doubt, be of interest.
The length of the crest of the dam exclusive of curvature,
will be 752 feet. Its height from the lower level of the
foundations at R.L. 949°53 to the top of the parapet, will be
about 236 feet. Its greatest width at the base is 168 feet,
at the top 18 feet. On either side there will be two spill-
way weirs several hundred feet in length. The surface
area will be no less than 12,784 acres when the reservoir
a
a
is full, and it will then contain 33,612,671,000 cubic feet.
After being released from the dam, the water passes down
the Murrumbidgee River for upwards of 200 miles until
reaching Berembed, near Narrandera, where a portion of it
is diverted by a subsidiary weir, and works into the main
irrigation canal, and the balance allowed to flow down the
river to serve riparian interests. After passing for about
40 miles along the main canal on the north side of the river,
the water reaches the Murrumbidgee Irrigation Areas,
where itis distributed amongst the various settlers; large
pastoral holdings having been resumed by the Government
for that purpose. It is estimated that the water stored in
Burrinjuck will irrigate about 200,000 acres, which it is
proposed to subdivide into about 6,000 farms. At the
present time approximately 1,000 farms have been taken
up, and the amount of fruit produced is already a very con-
siderable item in the State’s production. It is estimated
that next season the production of the Murrumbidgee Irri-
gation Areas, in peaches alone, will amount to from 3,000 to
5,000 tons, and before very long the quantity of citrus fruits
and grapes will be of similarly large dimensions.
56 T. H. HOUGHTON.
The output of the Leeton Butter Factory is between
three and four tons per week. A large bacon factory has
been established, and a cheese factory is also in operation
at Mirrool, while to handle the large output anticipated in
the near future, several other factories are projected in
addition to the one already in operation at Leeton.
Iron and Steel Industry. —
No description of engineering progress in this State for
the last quarter of a century would be complete without a
reference to the iron industry. Started in a small way at
Mittagong in 1848, and meeting with many vicissitudes, it
is now well established, there being in regular operation
two large works, one at Lithgow belonging to Messrs. G.
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 57
and ©. Hoskins Ltd., and the other at Newcastle, ‘the
property of the Broken Hill Proprietary Co.
The materials required for the manufacture of pig iron
at Lithgow are all obtained from within the State, iron ore
from Oarcoar and Tallawang, distant 96 and 128 miles
respectively from Lithgow, limestone from Ben Bullen and
Havilah, 27 and 85 miles respectively from Lithgow, coke
from the South Coast and their own works at Lithgow,
whereas the Broken Hill Proprietary Company bring the
iron ore from South Australia, where they have an enorm-
-ous deposit of suitable ore containing a high percentage of
oxide of iron, the ships returning to Port Pirie io South -
Australia with coke for the silver lead smelters.
-Thesfirst blast furnace at Lithgow was put into operation
in 1875 and ceased work seven years later; in 1886 Mr.
Sandford took over the works and rolled bars made from
scrap and imported material. It was not, however, until
1906 that he erected the first of the two blast furnaces now
in operation, the iron work and machinery in connection
with it having been manufactured in England. It was blown
in in May 1906, and at the end of 1907 these works came
into the possession of their present owners, Messrs. G. and
C. Hoskins Ltd., who installed additional steel furnaces,
rolling mills etc., and greatly extended and remodelled the
plant. In 1913 they erected a second blast furnace with
all the necessary adjuncts of heating stoves etc.; the iron-
_ work for this addition, instead of being imported, was made
by themselves, chiefly at their Sydney works. These two
furnaces have each a capacity of 300 tons of pig iron per
week, part of which finds a ready sale to iron-founders
throughout Australia. A considerable portion is, however,
used by the firm at their own foundries in Sydney, and the
balance is made into steel by the open hearth process, and
rolled into rails, bars and sheets. The works also contain
58 T. H. HOUGHTON.
a plant for the manufacture of galvanized corrugated and
plain sheets.
Much of the machinery used at Lithgow has been con-
structed by the firm, and the remainder imported from
Kngland. Economy in working has been studied, with the
result that what was formerly a languishing industry is
now flourishing, and the source of employment to a large
body of men. |
The steel works of the Broken Hill Proprietary Consent
are at Newcastle on the bank of the river Hunter. The site
although most suitable, required very extensive piling to
carry the heavy weight of the furnaces and machinery,
225 piles being driven for the foundation of the blast furnace.
The works have been laid out so that they can be readily
extended, and still maintain the proper sequence from the
receipt of the raw material to the delivery of the finished
product.
To fully describe these works would require more time
than is at my disposal; in them is embodied every means to
economise labour and to perform by machinery those
laborious duties previously carried on by human exertion,
in close proximity to white hot metal. One of the most
interesting sights is to see huge machinery, requiring some
thousands of horse power to drive, it being instantly started,
Stopped and reversed in direction by the movement of a
small lever.
The molten iron from the blast furnace is not allowed to
cool, but delivered directly to the steel melting furnace, and
waste heat from the furnaces is used to heat the blast, and:
to raise steam in the boilers so that the cost of fuel is.
reduced as far as possible. :
The machinery was imported from America, and at the
present time comprises blast furnace with a daily capacity
of 500 to 600 tons, seven steel furnaces of 60 to 70 tons per
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 59
furnace, blooming mill 300 tons per shift, rail mill 150 tons
per shift, 18 inch mill 100 tons per shift, coke ovens, of
which 66 are in operation, producing 350 tons of coke per
day, and 3,600 gallons of tar and five tons of sulphate of
ammonia.
The steel produced is of an even quality and has been
found very suitable for shell making, large quantities having
been sent to England for that purpose during the war.
Portland Cement and Lime.
Of scarcely less importance in modern engineering works
than iron, is cement and lime. New South Wales is favoured
with inexhaustible supplies of high grade limestone suitable
for the manufacture of Portland cement and lime, together
with numerous and extensive deposits of marble, beautifully
coloured and figured, eminently suited for ornamental and
decorative uses, notably in the vicinity of the Mudgee rail-
way line, where supplies of limestone, shale and coal occur
in close proximity, and represent ideal sites for the manu-
facture of Portland cement.
Portland cement was first manufactured in New South
Wales at Portland about thirty-five years ago by the Cullen
Bullen Lime and Cement Company. Official figures as to
their production are not available, but the output was
limited.
At that time the mixture of limestone and shale was
burned in stationary kilns, and the clinker ground between
millstones. The progress of the industry since then has
been phenomenal, due chiefly to the improved methods of
manufacture and the increased demand for cement. The
successful improvements made in grinding machinery—the
old mill-stones being replaced by ball-mills, tube-mills,
comminuters, griffin-mills, etc., have been the means of
enormously increasing the capacity of a plant and lessening
the cost of production.
aa
:
60 T. H. HOUGHTON.
About 1889 Goodlet and Smith erected an up-to-date
plant at Granville, and in 1901 the Commonwealth Cement
Company, having taken over the Cullen Bullen property,
erected a 20,000 ton capacity plant at Portland. Since
then both companies have kept pace with modern require-
ments, replacing obsolete with the latest machinery, and
enlarging their plants to meet the ever increasing demand
for cement, until now their capacities aggregates nearly
200,000 tons per annum. The Commonwealth Company
produce 150,000 tons, and Goodlet and Smith’s 40,000 tons.
In 1916 the New South Wales Lime and Cement Company
erected a modern plant at Kandos, on the Mudgee line,
which has a capacity of 30,000 tons per annum, and this I
believe is to be increased to 60,000 tons.
Another company—The Vulcan Portland Cement Com-
pany—are about to erect a plant at Brogan’s Creek; war
conditions have, however, interfered with their arrange-
ments to have the machinery installed in 1915.
A certain amount of cement has been imported each
year, ranging from 5,500 tons in 1908 to 30,000 tons in 1912,
but with the erection of two new plants, and the enlarge-
ment of existing ones, the local production should cope
with the demand for some years to come.
The process of manufacture adopted is that known as the
**Dry Process,’’ in which the raw materials are roughly
crushed and dried separately, then mixed together in their
proper proportions, and after further grinding and mixing .
to reduce it to a very great degree of fineness, and
thoroughly mixing it so that the composition is homogene-
ous, it is calcined in rotary kilns at a temperature of about
3,000° Fah. and the resulting clinker ground to the requisite
fineness.
These rotary kilns, seven to eight feet in diameter, consist
of a steel jacket and firebrick lining, set at such an angle
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 6}
to the horizontal, and of such lengths, as the extent of the
output requires; the raw materials after the final mixing
are fed into the upper end, and coal ground to a fine dust is.
blown into the kiln at the lower end, the ground material
thus travelling in an opposite direction to the gases result-
ing from combustion.
The largest of the works, (that at Portland, erected in
1901), has a capacity of about 150,000 tons per annum; the
raw materials, limestone, clay and shale are obtained in
the immediate neighbourhood of the works, and coal from
collieries close by. The plant, which is most extensive, is
driven either directly, or by motors supplied with electric
current generated in the power house at the works by
steam engines totalling 6,500 horse power.
The rotary kilns vary in length, there being three 65 feet,
one 80 feet, one 100 feet, one 125 feet, and one 155 feet in
length, the kilis having been increased in number and length
as the business has expanded.
The works at Kandos are the most recently erected and
have a yearly capacity of 30,000 tons of cement; clay and
coal are obtained at the site of the works, and the lime-
stone from quarries about three miles away; the whole of
the machinery is electrically driven, the current being
generated by steam turbines.
Goodlet and Smith have recently discarded their steam
engines and boilers, and are using electric current supplied
by the Oity Council at 33,000 volts for driving all the
machinery. They are, I believe, the largest consumers of
power for any one industrial undertaking supplied by the
City Council.
Lime.
The progressive spirit so marked in the manufacture of
_ Portland cement is somewhat lacking in the lime industry,
probably due to the relatively small demand for lime enabl-
ing the antiquated methods to cope with it.
62 os T, H, HOUGHTON.
Most of the lime produced here is burned in ‘‘intermitt-
ent’’ kilns of the D type, which are somewhat primitive
when compared with the more modern type of kiln operating
in other countries. Recently, however, two modern pro-
ducer-gas continuous kilns have been erected, and probably
as the demand for lime increases the wasteful D kiln will
be replaced by others more up-to-date.
Up till 1914 each year showed a small progressive gain
in the amount of lime manufactured, increasing from 18,000
tons in 1908 to 36,207 tons in 1914. Since then, however,
owing to war conditions, building operations have been
considerably curtailed and the lime industry has suffered—
the production in 1916 totalling only 26,500 tons.
With a return to normal conditions, entailing an increased
demand for lime for building, agricultural and chemical
purposes, an increased production is assured.
Marble. ;
A display of New South Wales marbles was made at the
Hranco-British Exhibition in London in 1908, and was
awarded the Grand Prize, while at the Panama.- Pacific
International Exposition at San Francisco in 1915 a similar
exhibit was awarded ‘‘ Medal of Honour,”’’ in both cases the
juror speaking in the highest terms of our marbles.
While there is no question as to the general excellence
of our coloured marbles, including all shades of red, pink,
blue, grey, dove, ivory, black, etc., and handsome breccias,
unfortunately the deposits of white marble so far exploited
have been either too coarse or not sufficiently uniform in
texture for sculptural and monumental work, and do not
compare favourably with Carrara, Grecian or American
white marbles.
Although attention has been directed to these deposits
since the early days of the State, it is only within the
past few years that determined efforts have been made to
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 63
establish a local industry. The majority of our marble
quarries are worked spasmodically, and in most cases the
method of working is of a primitive and wasteful character.
A step, however, has been made in the right direction.
A recently opened quarry at Ponsonby, near Bathurst,
has installed modern machinery, wire-saws, channelling
machines, air-drills, etc., and probably others will soon
’ follow.
It is gratifying to see that local marbles are now being
extensively used for the decoration of buildings, and as
they become better known the demand for them is sure to
increase. ,
A detailed report on these industries is now in course of
preparation by the Department of Mines.
Had time permitted I would have liked to refer more
fully to the great advances made in the many industries
using machinery. The textile trade twenty-five years.
' ago hardly existed, whereas there are now a number of
works fitted with up-to-date machinery; the benefit of
these works has been shown since the outbreak of the war
by their ability to make much of the cloth and the blankets
required by the military authorities. The manufacture of
paper and cardboard is another industry which has made
great progress; in the chemical trade also works have been
established. The shale oil industry has not progressed as
rapidly as could be desired, although a large amount of
capital has been expended on it, much of which is at present —
bringing in no return, but I trust that the future holds
brighter prospects.
Thanks to scientific investigations, aided by practical
knowledge, the recovery of metals from the metalliferous
ores mined in the State has been so improved, that mines
which would not otherwise have been payable, are now
-guccessfully carried on.
64 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Shipbuilding, one of the oldest industries of the State,
has by the construction of the cruiser ‘‘Brisbane’’ and
the destroyers at Cockatoo Dockyard, been rapidly advanced
in importance, and the establishment by the State Govern-
ment of large engineering Works at Newcastle capable of
building vessels of considerable dimensions, will I hope,
ultimately lead to a greater number of vessels being con-
structed in the State.
The creation of the Small Arms factory at Lithgow by
the Federal Government, is a step towards making us more
self contained, and in addition, the training in the use of
tools of precision with which the works are equipped, will
have its good influence on future workmen.
In coal mining also, the introduction of machinery has
had a marked influence on its progress,
It would weary you were I to mention all the industries
in the advancement of which the engineer has played a
prominent part, but. I cannot leave this subject without
mentioning the great industry that has arisen as a result
of the wise determination of the Government to, as far as
possible, have all locomotives required for the State rail-
ways manufactured here. In 1905 a contract was let to
The Olyde Engineering Oo. for sixty locomotives, the aver-
age weight being 75 tons, delivery to be made at the rate
of ten per year, 750 tons a year, thus requiring six years
to complete the contract. The last engine of this contract
was finished within five years, together with an additional
order for a further fifteen engines, the output for the last
year being 1,425 tons. A second contract was then given
to the same firm for fifty engines of a heavier class weigh-
ing 82 tons each, to be delivered at the rate of two per
month, and in 1912 a third contract for 100 engines,
each weighing about 83% tons, thirty-six to be delivered
each year. So satisfied were the authorities with the work
‘
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 65
turned out, and realising the necessity of fostering such an.
important business, that the Government, through the Chief
Commissioner for Railways, placed with the Clyde Engineer-
ing Co. what is probably the largest order ever given for
locomotives either here or in any other part of the world,
when they last year gave them an order for 300 engines,
each weighing about 83} tons, the contract to be completed
in five years, that is at the rate of 5,000 tons per annum. -
At the date that the first contract was given, no works in
the State were properly equipped with machinery to have’
enabled it to be satisfactorily completed within the stipu- —
lated time, and the Company had to at once expend £15,000
in machinery; since then they have extended their work-
shops and purchased the most modern plant especially
suited for the work, the total outlay during the past six
years having amounted to nearly £100,000.
Another works, the proprietors of which have shown
their confidence in the continued prosperity of the State,
is Mort’s Dock and Hngineering Co., which realising that
Sydney will some day be a greater port than what it is now,
have expended large sums in extending the graving dock
accommodation ofthe port. The dockat Balmain, built many
years ago, originally had a length of 450 feet; it has been
lengthened and is now 640 feet long, and can be divided
into two by a middle caisson; the entrance is 69 feet wide
at the cope, and 59 feet on the floor, the depth of water
over the sill being 18 feet at spring tide. In 1901 they
opened a new graving dock at Woolwich on the Parramatta
River, which had a length of 500 feet, with a width of 83
feet at the entrance, 75 feet on the floor, and 28 feet of
water on the sill at spring tide; this dock has, since its con-
struction, been lengthened from time to time and is now
850 feet long. The company have found it necessary to
remodel much of their works to meet modern conditions,
E—May 2, 1917.
and they have expended large sums on buildings and -
machinery, notably on the foundry, and they can now cast
bronze propellers up to ten tons in weight.
66 T. H. HOUGHTON.
~ What has been the economic result of this large expendi-
ture that has been incurred? One need only look around
the city and evidence of its great prosperity meets one’s
view everywhere. Whether that prosperity was caused by
the increase in the public utilities to which I have referred,
or whether the extension and creation of new works was
the result of the demand caused by the growing prosperity
I cannot say: a consideration of what has resulted will,
however, be interesting. In 1891 the population of the
State was 1,132,234, at the end of 1916 it had grown to
1,846,736; the population of Sydney has grown at an
even greater rate, having increased from 387,434 in 1891
to 764,600 at the end of 1916. Unfortunately the rate of
increase in the country towns has not kept pace with the
city, with the exception of Newcastle.
Largely owing to the extension of railway lines, the area
cultivated for wheat has grown from 333,233 acres in 1891
to 4,235,074 acres in 1915; wheat growing now being one
of the important industries of the State.
The railways, which have within the time been nearly
doubled in length, and more than doubled in capacity,
carried 19,037,760 passengers in 1891, as against 92,850,838
in 1916, and the goods, mineral, and live stock traffic
increased proportionately:—
1891 1916
Coal, coke, and shale, tons 2,673,378 ... 6,109,029
Firewood, tons ... sk Li 6,430" 5 187,135
Grain and flour, tons... 198,491) 852,019
Wool, tons Po ¥ ld (oie 111,083
Hay, straw, and chaff, tone 64,967 =... 429,047
Live stock.. ie i 26.2 i ee 797,065
General iiertin duane eis 1,008,599 ... ~ S128.646
Total ... ... 4,362,233 ... Bipel4oee
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 67
Not only has the tonnage grown,but the average distance
it is conveyed has grown considerably, coal and coke now
being carried an average of 28°57 miles against 17°53 miles
in 1891; for grain and flour the average distance has
more than doubled, the gross revenue, which in 1891 was
£2,974,421 grew to £8,006,078 in 1916, but the net revenue
did not unfortunately increase in the same proportion.
The tramways in 1891 carried 62,676,636 passengers; this
increased to 292,021,774 by the end of June 1916, due to
the extended facilities provided and to the greater pros-
perity of the people.
Shipping has increased in a similar manner, and the large
wharf extension that has been carried out has been no more
than what has been necessary to meet the demands made
upon it at busy times. The net tonnage of vessels entering
the port of Sydney in the year ending June 30th 1914 was
9,437,310, and the number of vessels 10,142; since that date,
in consequence of the war, there has been a considerable
falling off; in 1902 the tonnage entered was only 4,100,000.
The advance in the supply of gas has been phenomenal,
the following figures supplied me by the Australian Gas
Light Company show the results as regards Sydney:—
1891 1916
Coal carbonised, tons... $25,952, (0.5 276,154
Coke made, tons... rea BS, 00D) faa 188,694
Coke used at works a 28, LOG os 69,223
Var made, gallons —— ... 1,373,583. ... 4,173,479
Sulphate of ammonia made, tons 1,323... 3,082
Coal gas made in 1000 c.ft. 1,387,858 ... 3,463,452
Water gas... Se ae a ... 1,054,968
Total gas made ... Wa Inaoisooo 94... 4,018,420
Mileage of mains ... be 496. ... 1,468
Number of consumers ... 795 15 0 135,487
This progress is an indication of what has taken place -
with the other companies and municipalities supplying the
68 T. H. HOUGHTON.
country towns, those having works under municipal control
having in 1914 realised a gross profit after paying manage-
ment expenses of £19,037 on a loan expenditure of about.
£122,000, ample to cover interest and depreciation.
The progress of the public supply of electricity has been
even greater than that of gas, the following figures supplied
by the General Manager of the City Oouncil’s works
showing :— | |
1904 1916
Capital expended .... w+» £151,894. ...... Sx Couoae
Gross revenue ea .. £4,060 ... £434,000
Units of electricity sold perannum 257,499 ... 63,593,900
Total load connected equivalent
to 60 Watt lamps se ee TO SOOT es 1,223,000
HP. of motors connected ... SO oa 44,100
Average revenue per unit soldin pence 3:06... 1:90
The Hlectric Light and Power Corporation’s returns are
on asimilar, but smaller scale, being :—
1910 1916
Gross revenue... a we 7 £5,589 ©... > SOIOaG:
Units of electricity sold per annum 400,000 ... 5,000,000:
HP. of motors ... z ase HOOT Is 6,000:
Total load connected, equivalent
to 60 Watt lamps ... ee 13,9002 ee 160,000
The electricity supply works controlled by Councils in
country towns made in 1914 an aggregate gross profit of
£13,835, the loan expenditure having been about £138,000.
The large expenditure on water supply and sewerage
amounting to £16,302,146, for works completed to June
30th, 1916 :—
Water. : Sewerage.
Sydney ... a w+ £73;192,472 35, Glass
Newcastle # By. 592,880 ... 400,351
Country Towns... sia 1,664,058 .. 338,313
9,449,410 6,852,736
PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 69
is the best investment that the State has made, the reduc-
tion in the death rate, and the diminution of sickness
throughout the area affected by this expenditure, is a
return on which no money value can be placed. The death
rate has fallen in Sydney to a half of what it was thirty
years ago, having been :—
Ratio per 1000.
Sydney. Country Districts.
1880 — 1884... Bie st 20" GO Bie 13:21
1885 — 1889 .. Se eel O24 7 Sucee LES
1890 — 1894... ae se L483 aes 12:05
Poi ie ae .. 10°26 x6 10-05
It cannot be claimed that this remarkable decrease is due
entirely to engineering works; many causes have con-
tributed to it, but without a plentiful supply of water and -
modern sewage systems, the results could not have been
obtained.
The increase in the quantity of water supplied per head
per day has been constantly increasing, but has not reached
anything like the dimensions that exist in America; no
doubt it will grow beyond the 43 gallons which is the present
rate for Sydney, in fact in many country towns where
inspection is not so rigid, the consumption is much larger.
The consumption per head given above includes water
supplied for manufacturing, street watering, and all other
purposes besides domestic supply; in the area supplied by
the Hunter District Water Board, the proportionate con-
sumption was for 1916 :— .
Manufactories des bo ... 46 per cent.
Street watering and other purposes 2 i
Charitable institutions “ae em fe
Domestic supply ... sat 75 Hol e
Mr. J. H. Cardew, m. Tnat. o.m., in 1903 read an interesting
paper before our Society on ‘“‘The Hconomic Effect of
70 T. H. HOUGHTON.
Sanitary Works,’’ in which he showed that the savings
resulting from judiciously constructed works of water
supply and sewerage, would in about ten years equal the
cost of the works; whether that is so or not, the health
and comfort of the people are so largely dependent upon
sanitary works, that every endeavour should be made to
extend the blessings of a constant supply of good water to
every township, and where conditions are in anyway
favourable, a sewage system should be constructed.
Ihave taken up much of your time with an address which
is probably too much made up of figures, but without figures
I could not express in concrete form, the great advances
that have taken place in twenty-five years in this State.
My thanks are due to heads of departments and many |
others, who have kindly supplied me with data.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 71
NOTES ON ACACIA, No. IIl.—TROPICAL WHSTERN
AUSTRALIA.
(INCLUDING DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.)*
By J. H. MAIDEN, I.S.0., F.R.S., F.L.S.
[Read before the Royal Society of NV. S. Wales, June 6, 1917.]
As this paper includes a contribution towards a botanical
_ bibliography of the Nor-West (North West), it is necessary
to point out that this short and euphonious title has a
technical meaning in Western Australia different to that
usually understood in other parts of Australia.
a. The Nor-West of local land administration may be
defined as extending from a little south of North West Cape
(near Point Oloates) north easterly to, say, Wolla. It lies
wholly within the tropics, almost touching the tropic of
Capricorn.
b. Jutson? defines a North West physiographic division
as extending along the coast from the mouth of the DeGrey
River (20° approx.) in the north, to the mouth of the Mur-
chison River (28° approx.) in the south. See Wig. 7, p. 32,
where it is called the North West Peneplain. See also
fie. 10,p.38. 7
On the north-east it is divided from the Kimberley Divis-
ion by that portion of the EHastern Division known as the
Great Sandy Desert. It-is a fairly natural division, and I
will refer to it on a future occasion when collectively
reviewing the botanical provinces of the continent. The
length of the present paper precludes this now.
ec. Isuggest that for present botanical purposes it will
be desirable to add to the previous division (a), the Kim-
* 3 by W. V. Fitzgerald; 3 by J. H. Maiden.
2 Bulletin No. 61, Geological Survey of W.A. (1914), p. 87.
2 J. H. MAIDEN.
berley Division (technically termed the Northern Division)
and the area joining the two. We thus have the continu-
ous coastal tropical districts of Western Australia as far
as their junction with the Northern Territory, into which
the western State insensibly merges, and there is no line
of botanical separation between them. Indeed, the flora of
the Nor-West cannot usefully be studied without taking
cognizance of that of the coastal tropical portion of the
Northern Territory. When more local floras have been
worked out, we shall be able to construct botanical pro-
vinces irrespective of the political divisions. In the ‘Flora
Australiensis’? and Mueller’s ‘‘Census,’’ the Nor-West is
sunk in the general term of North Australia.
So that we have three different Nor-Wests:—
a. Of local land administration.
b. From the DeGrey to the Murchison. ~
c. The Nor-West in its wide sense.
Jutson styles the Kimberley Division the Kimberley
Peneplain, (op. cit., p. 33) contrasts it with the HKastern
Division just to the south, and his remarks are well
worthy of reference. :
The only list of Western Australian plants known to me
is based on Mueller’s “‘Second Census of Australian Plants”
(1889); itis Mueller and Morrison’s ‘‘List of Hxtra-tropic
West Australian plants’’ (Vasculares), in the “‘W. A. Year-
book for 1900-1,’”’ by Malcolm A. C. Fraser, Vol. 1, p. 308.
This list is based on Mueller’s compilation for the 1896
Yearbook ; Dr. Morrison, then Government Botanist of
Western Australia, made a number of additions, and says
(p. 308, foot-note):—
“those recently recorded from within the tropical line have
not been excluded from the present list, in spite of the wording
of the®title; and it is hoped that the next edition will form
a complete*census of the native plants of the State, including also |
NOTES ON ACACIA. ((a)
many of those tropical species which have hitherto been recorded as
from Northern Australia,” (The italics are mine. —J.H.M.)
The list was reprinted unaltered in 1903, and not sub-
sequently differentiated, as the late Dr. Morrison hoped.
In other words, there is no list of North Western Austra-
lian plants published.
Following is a tentative bibliography, arranged in order
of date, of the plants of the Nor-West, which will assist in
the publication of such a list.
1. Dampier, William. He visited Cygnet Bay on the
North-west Coast in 1688. He made a second voyage to
the west and north-west coast in H.M.S. ‘*Roebuck’”’ in
1699. For some notes on Dampier see my “Records of
Western Australian botanists,’’ (Proc. W.A. Nat. Hist. Soc.
1909).
Dampier brought a number of plants back to England,
which are the oldest Australian plants known. About a
dozen are still in the herbarium of the University of Oxford
and figures (and notes) of them by Dr. W. Botting Hems-
ley, F.R.S., will be found in the ‘‘ Western Mail,’’ Perth,
W.A., Christmas Number, 1898. There is no Acacia
‘amongst them.
2. Baudin’s Expedition, 1800-4 went from Van Diemen’s
‘Gulf to Cape Leveque. Asa rule, the ships kept far from
jand, and hence few plants were collected. The natural
history results were chiefly zoological; Leschenault de la
Tour was botanist. Bentham records that the Expedition
collected (1)? A. bivenosa DO., which appears to be the
first Nor-West Acacia collected of which we have any
record.
* See my paper on the “ Earlier French Botanists as regards Australian
Plants.” This Journ. xtiv, p. 132.
* The first of the serial numbers of the Acacias enumerated in this
paper.
74 J. H. MAIDEN.
3. Cunningham, Allan. ‘‘Narrative of a survey of the
intertropical and western COoasts:of Australia,...1818 and
1822,’ by Captain Phillp P. King, R.N., F.R.S., 2 vols. 1827.
At vol. 11, 497, are “A few general remarks on the vege-
tation of certain coasts of Terra Australis, and more especi-
ally of its north-western shores,’? by Allan Cunningham.
Cunningham’s remarks, which are of course valuable, for
the most part consist of general sketches of the various
families. The collecting places are stated, (they were all
coastal) but it would appear that the plants, asa collection,
were not described until Bentham undertook that work for
the ‘‘Flora Australiensis.’’ See p. 76.
4. °‘ Beagle,” (H.M.S.). During 1838-1841, Captains
Wickham and Lort Stokes in H.M.S. ‘‘ Beagle’’ began and
completed an important series of coastal surveys on the
North-west coast, discovering the Fitzroy and Adelaide
Rivers.
The ‘‘Voyage of the Beagle’’ is quoted for a few speci-
mens in the ‘‘Flora Australiensis.’’ Oaptain Lort Stokes’
work, ‘Discoveries in Australia, with an account of the
coasts and rivers explored and surveyed during the voyage
of H.M.S. “‘ Beagle,’ in the years 1837 — 43.” (2 vols. 1846),
contains but few references to plants the Gouty-stemmed
tree, Adansonia, (11, 116) being an important exception.
Dr. Benjamin Bynoe, the Surgeon, (see my “‘ Records of
W.A. Botanists ’’) made some valuable collections, which
went to Kew and were seen by Bentham for the “Flora.
Australiensis.’’ Bentham sometimes gives the quotation
Bynoe. |
5. Grey, George. ‘Journals of two Expeditions of dis-
covery in North West and Western Australia, during the
years 1837, 38 and 39,” (2 vols. 1841), contain few incidental
references to plants, but the Natural History Appendices
NOTES ON ACACIA. 75
contain no descriptions of them. See my “Records of W.A.
Botanists.”
6. Gregory, F.T. ‘‘Hxpedition to the North West Coast
of Australia.’’ (Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. 1862, p. 372, with
amap). At p. 373, ‘Mr. P. (Pemberton) Walcott joined as
a volunteer for the collection of specimens of natural history
and botany.’’ There are a few botanical notes at pages
377, 382, 385, 389, 428. The plants collected are recorded
in the ‘Flora Australiensis”’ as ‘‘F. Gregory’s Expedition’’;
Walcott’s name was probably not given to Bentham. Fora
note on Walcott see my ‘* Records of W.A. Botanists.”’
Bentham records that Maitland Brown also collected
specimens in this expedition. See a brief note in the
Records just quoted. See also “‘A record of the plants
collected by Mr. Pemberton Walcott and Mr. Maitland
- Brown in the year 1861, during Mr. Gregory’s Exploratory
Hxpedition into North West Australia,’”’ by Ferd. Mueller,
Trans. Bot. Soc. Edin., vol. 1, pp. 479-500 (Paper read
February 1863).
See “‘W. A. Year-book, 1900-1,’’ Vol.1. At page 57 isa
brief account of F. Gregory’s results, and the whole chapter
on ‘‘ Exploration in Western Australia,’ beginning at p. 50,
is valuable. The chapter should be read for a statement
of Nor-West explorations.
A useful account of Tropical West Australian explora-
tions will be found at p. 16 of A. Despeissis’ ‘‘The Nor-
West and Tropical North,’’ being Bulletin No. 13 of the
Department of Agriculture, W.A. (1911). Mr. Despeissis
refers to Mr. F. T. Gregory’s report as the “‘origin and
foundation’’ of Nor-West settlement, so that special atten-
tion to the district has only taken place within the last
half-century, and its comparative inaccessibility, and the
moisture-laden atmosphere of a portion of it, both explain
the delay which has occurred in working out the plants.
76 J. H. MAIDEN.
7. Tenison-Woods, Julian EH. ‘‘ North Australia; its
physical geography and natural history,’’ 8vo. pp. 46, Govt.
Printer, Adelaide, 1864. Chapter viii, p. 38, Botany, gives
a very condensed summary, chiefly of Mueller’s then recent
Northern Territory results. (A. O. Gregory’s expedition of
1856). Father Tenison-Woods’ account of geographical
explorations to date, includes those of tropical Western
Australia, and has been well done.
8. Bentham, George. ‘* Flora Australiensis,’’ Vol. 11,
(1864). This is the work which contains by far the most
important account of Nor-West Acacias to date, and of
course other plants.
A. BOSSIZOIDES A. Cunn.
In Cunningham’s MS. Journal, Vol. 11, p. 60, under date
6th August, 1819, he says, “‘Liverpool River, North Ooast.
I gathered specimens, although without flower or fruit of
an Acacia (evidently) having the habit of a flat-stemmed
Bossicea.”’ He then gave a description in Latin.
Bentham (B.FI. ii, 320) ‘‘gives Liverpool River, North-
west Coast’; it is, however, in the Northern Territory,
and B. Gulliver, one of Mueller’s correspondents, collected
it in the same place. It remains to be proved that it isa
Nor-West plant.
Seemann, in “Die in Europa eingeftihrten Acacien”’
(Hanover, 1852), hasa figure of ‘‘A. bossiceoides’’ in flower
drawn by J. D. Hooker, but it is A. glaucoptera Benth.
2.1 A. PATENS F.v.M. :
Stony places, Hammersley Range, Nichol Bay. F.
Gregory’s Hxpedition.
3. A. BYNOEANA Benth. f
N.W. Coast, Bynoe. See a note by myself in this Journal,
XLIX, p. 501 (1915). See a note on petals and pod by W. V.
Fitzgerald in Journ. W.A. Nat. Hist. Soc., May, 1904, p. 46.
1 The second of the serial numbers of the Acacias enumerated in this
paper. Henceforward the numbers can be readily picked up.
NOTES ON ACACIA. . 77
4, A. LYCOPODIFOLIA A. OCunn.
Cambridge Gulf, N. W. Ooast, A. Cunningham; Ham-
mersley Range, Nichol Bay, F. Gregory’s. Expedition..
Cunningham’s MS. Journal, Vol. 11, p. 75, shows that he
collected it on 19th September, 1819. He speaks of it as.
*‘a rare shrub of divaricate growth’’ and gives a Latin
description of it. ;
[Mr. W. V. Fitzgerald thus describes a specimen col-
lected in the Nor-West. ‘‘Diffuse, to 3 feet high, and often
as much across; phyllodia frequently in whorls of 12, the
tips glabrous, usually viscid, otherwise the whole plant
slightly to densely hoary with spreading white hairs; corolla
lobes short, with incurved callous tips; pod viscid; seeds.
transverse, shining-black.’’ MSS. |
)..A. HIPPUROIDES Heward.
Usborne’s Harbour, N.W. Coast, ‘“Voyage of the Beagle.’”
See also a note “Diffuse, to 4 feet high; phyllodia with
yellow setaceous glabrous viscid points which are often as.
long as the balance of the phyllodia; flower-heads larger
than those of A. lycopodifolia; calyx at least two-thirds.
the length of the corolla, the lobes short and broad; corolla
lobed to above the middle, the lobes with callous incurved
- tips; pod viscid, flattened, straight or slightly falcate, to.
two and a-half inches long by three lines broad; seeds black,.
shining, oblique.’’ (W. V. Fitzgerald MSS.).
6, A. GREGORII F.v.M. |
Nickol Bay, N.W. Coast, F. Gregory’s Expedition.
7. A. SPATHULATA H.v.M.
Bay of Rest, N.W. Coast, A. Cunningham.
8, A. PYRIFOLIA DO.
Dampier’s Archipelago, A. Ounningham. Nickol Bay,
ff’. Gregory’s Expedition. 2
78 J. H. MAIDEN.
9. A. DELTOIDEA A. Ounn.
Greville Island, Montague Sound and Barren Islands,
Regent’s Inlet, N.W. Coast, A. Cunningham.
10. A. SETULIFERA Benth.
N.W. Coast, Bynoe.
11. A. TRANSLUCENS A. Cunn.
Montague Island and Bay of Rest, N.W. Coast, A.
Cunningham. ‘* Diffuse, one to two feet high or erect and
four to six feet; calyx much less than half the length of
- the corolla; pod sometimes two inches long by one-third
inch broad; seeds greyish, with a white arillus.”’ (W. V.
Fitzgerald MSS.).
A. translucens was described and figured in Hooker’s
‘**Tcones,”’ tab. CLx. The type comes from the North West
Coast, and it appears to be the common form there. Ben-
tham observed a form with narrow (curved linear) phyllodes,
and it would appear to be commonest in the Northern
Territory (Gulf of Carpentaria). From the quartzite ranges
on the west side of Blunder Bay, Victoria River, 1913 —
(R. T. Winters, comm. E. J. Dunn and G. F. Hill) I have
received a form with phyllodes much larger than the type..
1. A. BIVENOSA DOC. )
N.W. Coast, Admiralty Bay, Baudin’s Expedition; Bay
of Rest and Dampier’s Archipelago, A. Cunningham.
Depuech Island, Bynoe; Hearson Island, Nickol Bay, F.
Gregory’s Expedition.
‘**Hrect shrub, 5—8 feet; to a tree of 15—30 feet; trunk
to 10 feet; diam. to 1 foot; foliage glaucous; bark dark
grey, Somewhat rough; timber brownish, rather hard and
tough.’ (W. V. Fitzgerald. MSS..).
12. A. CORIACEA DC.
Bay of Rest, N.W. Coast, A. Cunningham; Depuech
Island, Bynoe; Nickol Bay, F. Gregory’s Expedition.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 79
13. A. HEMIGNOSTA F.v.M.
- Cambridge Gulf, A. Cunningham. -
“Tree of 25—30 feet; trunk to 10 feet, diam. 1 foot;
bark dark-coloured, rough, longitudinally fissured and often
corky; timber brownish, hard and tough.” (W. V. Fitz-
gerald MSS.). As regards North Queensland trees, see
R. H. Cambage, this Journal, xL1x, 389 (1915).
14. A. SERICATA A. Cunn.
Montagu and York Sounds, N.W. Coast, A. Cunningham.
**A tall glaucous shrub to a tree of 30 feet; trunk to 10
feet; diam. 9 inches; bark dark-grey, somewhat rough;
timber pale and tough; flowers pale-yellow, through leaf-
suppression terminally racemose; peduncles 2—3 together,
mostly 4 in. long, each bearing a globular head of 20—30
mostly five-merous flowers; sepals free nearly to the base,
broadly spathulate, half as long as the petals, finely hirsute;
petals free nearly to the base, slightly silky.’”? (W. V.
Fitzgerald, MSS.).
15. A. WICKHAMI Benth.
Swan Bay, N.W. Coast, Voyage of the Beagle.
“Sunday Island; May, Lennard and Oalder Rivers;
Mounts House, Clifton and Brennan. Rigid, diffuse, 3—4
feet high, and often as much across. Among sandstone
and quartzite rocks.”’ (W. V. Fitzgerald, MSS.).
16. A. STIGMATOPHYLLA A. Ounn.
Brunswick Bay, N.W. Coast, A. Cunningham.
“‘Lennard and Isdell Rivers. A spreading shrub of 5-8
feet high to a tree of 15-20 feet; trunk to 5 feet; diam.
6 in.; bark roughish, reddish-grey, sometimes curly; timber
dark brown, and moderately hard; the branchlets and
phyllodia slightly viscid; pod erect, linear, slightly falcate, ©
2—3 in. long, 3 lines broad, compressed but thick with
obliquely transverse septz between the seeds; valves rolling
_ . a
+
t
«
back from the apex on dehiscence, hard, the margins raised
and obliquely veined between; seeds obliquely oblong, dark
brown; funicle straight or slightly folded, gradually
thickened. upwards and terminating in a cupular, pale-
coloured basilar arillus.”” (W. V. Fitzgerald MSS..).
17. A. XYLOCARPA A, Cunn.
Dampier’s Archipelago and Water Island, N.W. Coast,
A. Cunningham. Nickol Bay, F. Gregory’s Expedition.
Cunningham (MS. Journal, Vol. 1, p. 72), collected it at
Lacrosse Island on 17th September, 1819, and says, “A
depressed bushy plant, and remarkable for the clear stark
verdure of the whole shrub; is also abundant among the
rocks, having old pods which are woody and cylindrical.’’
He gives a Latin description.
80 - J. H. MAIDEN.
‘Varies from a diffuse shrub of 3 feet to a tree of 30 feet;
trunk to 10 feet, diam. 8 in.; bark grey, somewhat rough;
timber dark brown, and very hard. In sandy soil among
sandstone and quartzite rocks.’’ (W. V. Fitzgerald MSS.)
‘Var. planifolia W. V. F., var. nov. Artesian Range.
A diffuse shrub, 3—4 feet high, the young shoots viscid ;
phyllodia compressed, elliptical to linear-oblanceolate,
straight or falcate, 1$ to 23 in. long; pod asintype. In
sandy soil.’’ (W. V. Fitzgerald MSS.).
18. A. ARIDA Benth.
Parched desert shores of Cambridge Gulf, N.W. Coast.
A. Cunningham.
19. A. DELIBRATA A. Ounn. :
So much uncertainty surrounds A. delibrata and so much |
depends on it, that it becomes desirable to examine the
evidence. |
Cunningham’s original description in Benth., Lond. Journ. .
Bot. 1, 374 (1842) may be translated as follows:— q
Glabrous, viscid, branchlets angular and finally terete, phyllodes .
narrowly falcate-lanceolate or linear, narrowed on both sides,
NOTES ON ACACIA. 81
somewhat obtuse at the apex, obliquely mucronate, immarginate,
finely striate, many nerved, spikes shortly pedunculate, pod linear,
smooth, coriaceous, glabrous, uniform within. -Phyllodes 4-5
ins., almost like A. julifera but less pointed. Flowers not seen.
Pod 4 — 5 ins. long, almost 4 lines broad, margin thickened, slightly
contracted between the seeds.
The type came from York Sound and Port Warrender
(North West Australia) Cunningham. The bark of the older
branches appears to peel off in small shreds, whence Cun-
ningham’s name (delibratus, Latin, having the bark peeled
off).
Then Mueller in Journ. Linn. Soc., 111, 138, (1859) re-
described the species in terms that may be translated as
follows:— | es
Arborescent, branchlets angular, glutinous, glabrous or velvet-
like, phyllodes somewhat sessile, linear-falcate or sword-shaped or
more rarely shortened, narrow-oblong, obliquely acuminate or
cuspidate-apiculate, prominently 1 - 3 nerved, glabrous or rarely
puberulous, densely parallel-veined, bearing a gland right at the
base, spikes short, solitary or two in the axils, dense, shortly
pedunculate, the corolla with five-divisions, being half as large
again as the dentate-ciliate calyx, pod stipitate, papery, narrow,
oblong, compressed, marginate, pale yellow, with undulate margin,
seeds shining-black, compressed-ovate, three times as long as the
white cymbiform arillus, (strophiole), distinctly marked on both
sides.
* Bentham recognised that these specimens were not altogether satis-
factory, for in a note in Journ. Linn. Soc. 111, 189, referring to A. delibrata,
he says “Cunningham’s (specimens) are out of flower with a loose fruit;
but, as far as these materials admit of identification,”...Fortunately the
phyllodes and pod are, with our later knowledge, quite sufficient to say
what the species is.
In the fuller description by Bentham of A. delibrata in B. Fl, 11, 405, he
supplements the original description as regards the tomentum, saying
“Branchlets...silky-pubescent when young. Phyllodia...sprinkled with
loose silky hairs.” This hairiness is important.
2 This does not agree with his figure of A. delibrata in “ Iconography.”
¥F—June 6, 1917.
82 J. H. MAIDEN.
A shrub, six to twelve feet high. Phyllodes six inches long or
shorter, seldom only an inch and a half long, 14 —3 lines broad.
Spikes 1 in. long or shorter, pods 1 — 3 inches long, about 4 lines
broad, shining, not undulate at the sutures. Seeds a line and a
half long, arillus (“‘strophiole”) with one fold.
It will be observed that flowers were not available when
the type was described, while the specimens available to —
Mueller were from the Northern Territory and Queensland,
and his description has been drawn up from mixed material.
The localities quoted by Mueller are ‘‘Arnhem’s Land,
No. 28; Head of Seven Emu River, No. 40; Upper Roper,
No. 25; Moreton Bay, Moore; Fitzmaurice River, No. 91;
Sturt’s Oreek, No. 92; Victoria River, No. 93.’”"* Some of
these numbers are referred to by Bentham in his footnote
to A. oligoneura (see p. 110). Mueller’s specimens do not
appear to be in Australia, at all events under their numbers,
while the specimen ‘‘Moreton Bay,’’ which often meant
Queensland, is not available.
When Bentham re-described the species in English in B.
Fl. 11, 404, he ignored Mueller’s description of the flowers,
presumably because he had some doubt about the matching.
{ do not know of any evidence that Mueller ever saw A.
delibrata.
At length A. delibrata has been rediscovered. Mr.
Fitzgerald collected it in North West Australia and wrote
out a description of it as a new species. I gave this the
most careful scrutiny and concurred, when the portion of
the type of A. delibrata arrived from Kew, and it was at
once seen that here we had the long lost species. Mr.
Fitzgerald’s description, which follows, is valuable as an
up to date account of A. delibrata, including the flowers,
which neither Cunningham nor Bentham saw. Some of
I
* Nos. 25 and 93 are not A. delibrata at all, but A. Hammondi n. sp.,
see p. 95. . '
NOTES ON ACACIA. 83
Mr. Fitzgerald’s pbyllodes are a little narrower than those
of the type.
A tree, the branchlets terete, or scarcely angular and along
with the foliage and rhachises finely pubescent and slightly viscid;
phyllodia linear to linear-lanceolate, straight or slightly falcate,
narrowed at both ends and terminating in obtuse or acute curved
or straight points, thinly coriaceous, striate with numerous fine
parallel nerves, the central one always and usually two lateral
ones very evident; spikes solitary or two together, very slender,
not dense, pedunculate; flowers small, mostly pentamerous; calyx
membranous, silky-pubescent, divided to below the middle, more
than half as long as the corolla, the lobes comparatively broad ;
petals obtuse, not ribbed or striate, connate to the middle, glabrous
or scantily pubescent; pod linear, much attenuated and stipes-like
at the base, resinous, hard and of a woody texture, the valves with
prominent raised longitudinal angles on each side of the sutures,
and contracted laterally between the seeds; seeds longitudinal,
ovate, dark brown; funicle with few folds and gradually thickened
into a pale-coloured turbinate basilar arillus.
Isdell River; eastern base of Mount Rason; Sunday Island
(W.V.F.). In stony spots overlying sandstone and quartzite.
Height 25 — 40 feet; trunk to 15 feet; diam. 9 —- 12 inches. Bark
reddish, rough and curly. Timber dark brown, hard, rather
heavy and tough. Phyllodia 2-6 inches long, 2 - 4 inches broad.
Spikes 1 inch or less. Pod 3-4 inches long, 4 inch broad.
Affinity to A. delibrata A. Cunn. (End of Mr. Fitzgerald’s
description).
Following are my notes:—F lowers pentamerous, in spikes,
recurving as they get old. Oalyx irregularly lobed, a few
hairs at the apex, very thin and frail. Petals glabrous,
divided partly down. Ovarium hoary.
A ffinties.
1. With A. gonocarpa F.v.M. The pods of A. gonocarpa
are six-angled, woody, obliquely divided inside; the seed
84 J. H. MAIDEN.
long and narrow, suspended by a conoid funicle-arillus. In
A. delibrata there are two folds in the funicle and it and
the arillus are not conoid.
2. With A. Kimberleyensis n. sp. A narrow phylloded
form of A. delibrata is strikingly similar in general appear-
ance to A. Kimberleyensis.
The stems of A. delibrata are terete nearly the whole
way up, and are covered with fine silky hair when young.
_ The phyllodes of A. delibrata are generally shorter and
broader, more finely striate and clothed in fine white silky
hair, especially when young. They have one gland at the
base; tips sharply acuminate but not rigid. The phyllodes.
thin. The calyx is deeply and irregularly lobed sometimes
half way down, or nearly to the base; tips hairy. The pod
is six-sided, viscid. The seed a short oblong. The funicle
twisted, small arillus, while the funicle and arillus of A.
Kimberleyensis together form a conoid mass.
A. ARMITII F.v.M. (ined.)
(Syn. A. delibrata F.v.M., ‘‘Iconography of Acacias”’ non |
A. Ounn.).
“Shrubby, branchlets glabrous, prominently angular; phyllodes.
almost straight, narrow-lanceolar, elongated, sessile, blunt or
slightly acute at the upper end, without any lustre; their primary
venules usually three, the middle one the strongest, secondary
venules numerous, all straight and closely approximated; glandule
anteriorly basal; spikes axillary, solitary, short-stalked, consider-
ably surpassed in length by the phyllodes; rhachis closely invested
with very short spreading hairlets; sepals narrow, disconnected,
fully half as long as the corolla, or even longer, as well as the
latter beset with a very short somewhat viscid vestiture; tube of
the corolla about as long as the semilanceolar-deltoid lobes; fruits
broad-linear, much compressed, somewhat flexuous, quite viscid, —
prominently margined ; ovules ellipsoid, on a straight gradually
upwards thickened funicle.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 85
“Near the Ennasleigh River. W, Armit.”
“Differs from A. conspersa already in compressed-angular
glabrous branchlets, in obliterated stipules, more than one primary
venule of the phyllodes, in very sticky less turgid fruits and in
untwisted funicles; from A. gonoclada in usually narrower phyl-
~ lodes, longer spikes, less crowded flowers, more velvet-like vestiture
of the rhachis, and unconnate sepals. From both it may further
differ in carpologic characteristics, but the ripe fruit remained |
hitherto unknown.” (Mueller, MSS. in Herb. Melb.).
After writing the description, Mueller refused to publish -
it, marking it “A. delibrata aff.”” A sight of the type shows
that A. delibrata is a very different plant, and I take the
responsibility of reversing Mueller’s decision, and publish-
ing his description. Its affinity is to A. plectocarpa, and
while I admit the material is incomplete, it seems to me
that it is in the interests of science to give this figured
form a name under the circumstances.
Named in honour of W. HK. Armit. Biographical notes on
Mr. Armit will be found in Proc. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Science,
xu, 374, (1909). Mr. Banfield of Dunk Island, North Queens-
land, kindly-tells me that his name was William Edington
Armit. He died in Papua. His son, Mr. L. P. B. Armit
is an official of that dependency.
Range. North Queensland only, so far as we know at
present.
Armit’s label says ‘‘ Ennasleigh,’’ Sands’ Queensland Map
of 1886 (New Atlas of Australia) ‘‘EHinasleigh,’’ and Whit-
worth’s Bailiere’s ‘SQueensland Gazetteer’? (1876) has
“Hinsleigh.”’ Mr. Allan A. Spowers, Surveyor General of
Queensland; says the official spelling is Hinasleigh. He
says that Frank Jardine named it in remembrance of a lady,
Annie, transposing the first two syllables.
“It is a large shallow river, from three quarters to a
mile wide, flowing about forty miles east of Georgetown in
86 J. H. MAIDEN.
to the Gilbert River in about 17°30'S. Lat. It rises in the
Ironbark ridges to the east of Gilberton, and flows N. and
W. through the pastoral and mineral country of the Oar-
-pentaria downs. It is fed by the Oopperfield, Stockman,
Blizabeth, Lagoon, Lee, and other small creeks. Granite
and porphyry.’’ (Whitworth, corrected by Mr. Spowers).
I give these particulars in the hope that better specimens
may be further searched for in this locality. Twigs bear-
ing ripe pods are particularly desired.
The interesting point about the specimens described is.
that they prove to be the specimens figured by Mueller in
his Iconography as A. delibrata, and it throws light on
Mueller’s view of that, (a very different) species in his later
years. Had Mueller stated the locality of the specimens.
depicted in the Iconography, he would have saved users of
the work much trouble as regards some of the plates.
The Hinasleigh specimens consist of a few twigs in early
fruit, with a few flowers almost in the last stage. Unfor-
tunately Mueller’s plate is, in some respects, unreliable.
The pods shown on the right hand twig are broader than
in the original, and are shaded to give the idea of maturity.
These pods, more than any other part of the plate, have
caused trouble. The original specimens are so immature
that one cannot be certain that the seeds will be oblique
at maturity, but the figure of the pods on the twig not only
leads one to assume that they are ripe, but figure 7 certainly
shows them so. There is no warrant for showing the
funicle and arillus asat7. Ripe seeds are shown at figures
8 etc., but they are the result of pictorial license. The
flowering specimen at the left of the plate cannot be found.
Fragments of flowers are persistent on the rhachis until
the young pods are as much as two inches long. This is
shown in the EHinasleigh specimens and also in the Icono-
graphy plate.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 87
Affinities.
1, With A. plectocarpa A.OCunn. A. Armitii appears to
be a more rigid plant than A. plectocarpa. The flowers of
A. Armitii have slenderer sepals and a more hairy corolla;
it isa matter of surmise whether the unripe pods of A.
Armitii will develop into a pod identical with that of
typical plectocarpa, which becomes markedly embossed
when fully ripe. The markedly resinous character in the
young pods of A. Armitii is noticeable, and the only young
pods of A. plectocarpa I have seen are resinous. The seed
of A. Armitii as figured is ovoid; that of A. plectocarpa is
nearly round, with an almost circular depression.
2. With A. Hemsleyi Maiden. The flowers of the two
species possess a very. close resemblance; the rhachis of
A. Hemsleyi is smoother. The pods of the two species are,
however, very different, those of A. Hemsleyi being narrow,
and having elongated seeds longitudinally arranged.
A. HEMSLEYI 0. sp.
Julifloree (Falcatze)
Frutex altus fere glabrus vel arbor parva, ramulis junioribus
angulatis. - Phyllodiis lineari-lanceolatis, paullo falcatis, basin —
versus angustatis, 9-12 cm. longis, 10-13 mm. latis, tenuibus,
3-5 nervis prominentibus. Spicis solitariis vel geminis axillari-
bus, tenuibus ad 4 cm. longis pedunculis 1 cm. vel longioribus.
Floribus dense confertis, calyce profunde lobato. Sepalis angustis
ca. dimidio corolla equilongis, ciliatis. Petalis secundum lineam
mediam ciliatis, dimidio longitudinis connatis. Pistillo hirsuto.
Legumine lineari, 7-11 cm. longo, 5 mm. lato, gracile. Valvis
tenuibus, marginibus incrassatis, planatiusculis, paullo monili-
formibus, seminibus longitudinaliter dispositis. Funiculo tenue
in arillum basilarem terminante.
A tall shrub or small tree, nearly glabrous, with branch-
lets angular. when young, but soon becoming terete.
88 J. H. MAIDEN.
Phyllodia linear-lanceolate, slightly falcate, with an
oblique sharp but not rigid point, the upper part of the
phyllode often dark coloured. Narrowed towards the base,
9-12 cm. (34—42 inches) long, 10-13 mm. broad, thin,
with 3 to 5 prominent nerves, and numerous very fine
parallel ones between them. An elongated gland at the
base. Stipules acute, brown, scarious.
Spikes solitary or in pairs in the axils, thin, up to 4 cm.
long on peduncles up to 1 cm. and more, flowers 5-merous,
closely packed on the spike. Floral bracts foliaceous and
ciliate. Calyx deeply lobed, the sepals narrow, about half
as long as the corolla, ciliate. Petals ciliate down the —
median line, united to about the middle. Pistil hairy. —
Pod linear, 7—11 cm. (or say 24 —44 inches) long, 5 mm.
broad, slender and with thin valves, with thickened mar-
gins, flattish, slightly moniliform, seeds longitudinally
arranged, black, shining, with a thin funicle which soon
becomes a ribbon-like mass, in two or more folds, and passes
into a small basilar arillus.
In honour of Dr. William Botting Hemsley, F.R.s., late.
of Kew, who for many years helped Bentham in the
elucidation of this genus, and indeed the Australian flora
generally, for the “Flora Australiensis,’’ I dedicate this
beautiful and interesting species.
Range. <A tropical species, extending from North West
Australia (Kimberley district) through the northern por-
tions of the Northern Tefritory, to Northern Queensland
(at no great distance from the Gulf of Carpentaria).
The following specimens have been examined by me:—
1. Fitzroy River, 8 miles above Hann River junction.
June,1905. In flower. (W. V. Fitzgerald, No. 1177; this I
constitute the type.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 89
2. Isdell River, 10 miles below Grace Knob, July, 1905.
In flower (W. V. Hitzgenald, No. 1235; received as A. toru-
losa Benth.).
3. Barker River, Kimberley, W. A., September, 19095.
In fruit (W. V. Fitzgerald, No. 1535; received as A. toru-
losa Benth.). |
4. In flower, April, 1916. Wandi, Northern Territory
(Dr. H. I. Jensen, No. 395). Not quite normal.
‘“‘Queensland Gulf Country.’ In fruit. (Dr. T. L.
Bancroft). Dr. Bancroft recently informed me that the
locality is a scrub on the Gregory Downs, Gregory River,
near Burketown. Labelled by the late F. M. Bailey,
** Nearly allied to A. delibrata.’”’ He sent precisely similar
specimens to Mueller, with the following result. He wrote
to Mueller, ‘‘Seed of Acacia near A. delibrata A. Cunn.,
Gulf Country, Queensland. From this shrub Dr. Thomas
L. Bancroft has obtained if not a valuable still a curious
property, an account of which is being prepared by the
doctor.! The specimen somewhat agrees with Bentham’s
description of A. Sebi A. Cunn., of which I have never
seen specimens.”’
Mueller endorsed these specimens (bark, phyllodes, ripe
pods and an old flower), ‘‘Acacia allied to A. sp. (from
Hinasleigh). The bark seems not to peel off in shreds.
Bentham (in Hook. Journ.) calls the legumes nearly four
lines broad. Stipules present as in A. conspersa; funicle
different from that species, so absence of toment on the
branchlets and absence of strong midnerve.”’
6. Dugald River, Granada, on bank of river, 10 feet high.
50 miles north of Cloncurry, Northern Queensland. 30th
August, 1913. In early fruit and just past flowering. (R. H.
Oambage, No. 4165). |
* Dr. T. L. Bancroft found saponin in the pods, being led to enquire
into their disagreeable, acrid taste. Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., rv, 10, (1887).
90 J. H. MAIDEN.
Affinities.
1. With A.delibrata A.Cunn. Both Bailey and Mueller
remark on the affinity of this species to A. delibrata, though
Mueller did not endorse the resemblance. As we now know
what A. delibrata is, we are in a position to make a com-
parison denied to these two botanists.
The phyllodes of the two species are sharply different,
those of A. delibrata being much narrower, less numerously
_veined, and with a fine silky tomentum. The flowers are
different, though not markedly so, but the pods are différent,,
those of A. Hemsleyi being longer and narrower, less
moniliform, and with thicker longitudinal angles at the
sutures.
2. With A. torulosa F.v.M. It would appear that A,
Hemsleyi is closely allied to this species, but it is sharply
separated from A. torulosa by the strongly moniliform pods
of the latter (the seeds also are different), and less em-
phatically by the more spathulate sepals and more coriace-
ous and longer phyllodes of the same species.
3. With A. plectocarpa A. Cunn. In flowers and phyllodes
A. Hemsleyi closely resembles A. plectocarpa, but it is
quite distinct in the pod.
4. With A. julifera Benth. This species has usually a
more falcate phyllode, and it is sharply separated from A.
Hemsleyi by its elongated, narrow, spirally twisted pod.
5. With A. leptocarpa A. Cunn. The two species are
much alike in the shape and venation of the phyllodes, but.
they are quite different in the attachment; those of A.
Hemsleyi are almost sessile.
20. A. PLECTOCARPA A. Cunn.
It is described from Cunningham’s MSS. by Bentham in
London Journ. of Bot., 1, 375 (1842), in words which may
be translated as follows:— |
NOTES ON ACACIA. , of
‘“‘Glabrous, subglaucescent, branchlets angular, sub-
triquetrous, phyllodes falcate-lanceolate, base and apex
tapering, finely striate, many nerved, spikes elongated-
cylindrical, interrupted, calyx sinuate-dentate, three or
four times shorter than the corolla,’ pod straight, linear,
smooth, marginate, coriaceous, glabrous, valves more often
bullate-flexuose. Phyllodes and flowers of A. leptocarpa.”
Spikes longer, rather interrupted. Pod 3—4 lines broad.
Oambridge Gulf and Sims’s Island, N.H. Coast. Cunning-
ham.”’
(Cambridge Gulf is N.W. Coast, and Sims’s Island is near
the Goulburn Islands, Northern Territory).
It is not referred to by Mueller in his paper on Northern
Territory Acacias in Journ. Linn. Soc., 11, 114 (1859), but
Bentbam, in B. Fl. 1, 408, in quoting some specimens
collected by Mueller, obviously refers to those collected at.
the same time as those described in the Linnean Society
paper, although numbers are not quoted. Of course, all of
the specimens examined by Bentham may not be typical.
Bentham redescribed the species in B. FI., 11, 408, and
what he says has enhanced value, because he edited Cun-
ningham’s original description. He says ‘Calyx short,
minutely toothed. Petals smooth.’’ Of A. leptocarpa he
says, (op. cit., 407), ‘‘calyx short, sinuate-toothed. Petals
smooth, united at the base,’’ making no reference to the
calyx of either species being ‘‘three or four times shorter
than the corolla.”’
Sir David Prain has had the kindness to present to the ~
National Herbarium, Sydney, portions of the co-types, viz.,
+ This seems to be overstated, as it appears to be always half the
length (and therefore twice shorter) of the corolla. See below, p. 92.
* At p. 376, Bentham describes those of A. leptocarpa as ‘‘ Phyllodes...
4—6 inches long, 4-5 lines broad, very much bowed, narrowed into
rather a long petiole. Spikes 1-14 inches long, flowers distinct.”? In
A. leptocarpa the spikes are “ somewhat interrupted,” and the calyx “many
times shorter than the corolla.”
92 J. H. MAIDEN.
phyllodes and portion of a valve of the Cambridge Gulf
specimen, and phyllodes, a pod and two seeds of the Sims’s
Island specimen.
The original speaks of the phyllodes as “finely striate
and many nerved.’’ Bentham (B. Fl.) speaks of them as
with “‘about three nerves.” The phyllodes of A. plecto-
carpa in the “‘Iconography’’are smaller, and have uniformly
two nerves. They are, in my opinion, a different species ;
see p. 96.
Mr. Fitzgerald collected specimens and considered them
to belong to a new species. His description follows, and
is worthy of publication although his plant is, in my view,
conspecific with A. plectocarpa.
Mr. Fitzgerald’s description begins here:—
A tall shrub to a tree; branchlets angular and along with the
phyllodia and rhachises viscid, otherwise glabrous or nearly so;
phyllodia lanceolate to narrow-lanceolate, slightly falcate, termin-
ating in a short oblique point, attenuated at the base, of thin
texture, with three conspicuous longitudinal nerves and numerous
finer ones closely packed between and slightly anastomosing; spikes
slender, dense, two together or the uppermost three together, and
forming a terminal leafy panicle; flowers small, 4-5-6- merous, the
calyx and often the corolla and rhachis closely invested with a
short golden-coloured pubescence; calyx lobed almost to the base,
the sepals linear, half as long as the corolla; petals broad, connate
to above the middle, not ribbed or striate; pod straight, linear, ?
viscid, compressed, the sutures narrow; valves thinly coriaceous,
very much undulate; seeds oblique, almost orbicular, dark brown;
funicle filiform and straight to near the base of the seed where it
forms several dilated folds which constitute an irregular cupular
pale coloured basilar arillus.
Lennard, Isdell, Hann, Fitzroy and Charnley Rivers, (W.V.F.)
1 The word linear is misleading, in view of the further statement that
the pod of 4-5 inches long is one-third inch broad. Such an expression
as ‘moderately broad” would be better.—J.H.M. ;
NOTES ON ACACIA. 93
Among sandstone and quartzite rocks and gravel.
Height 25 - 30 feet; trunk to 10 feet; diam. 9 inches. Bark
roughish, dark grey. Timber brown, moderately hard and heavy,
tough. Phyllodia 3 —6 inches long, 5-7 lines broad. Spikes 14
to above 23 inches long. Pod usually 4 —5 inches long, by one-
third inch broad.
_ Affinities to A. plectocarpa A. Cunn., and A. pachycarpa F.v.M.
(end of Mr. Fitzgerald’s words).
Range. We only know this species from North Western
Australia at present, with the single exception of the Sims’s
Island (Northern Territory) specimen. All Mr. Fitzgerald’s
specimens are from West Kimberley, roughly about 16° 30’
south latitude, and between the western boundary of the
Kimberley Gold-field and Collier Bay.
The following five specimens, all either in flower or early
fruit, correspond to Mr. Fitzgerald’s description, already
given:—
1. Isdell River, near Mount Barnett, West Kimberley,
June, 1905 (Type). In flower and early (viscid) fruit. (W.
V.F. No. 1015), | |
2. Base of Mount Rason. In half-grown fruit, viscid.
(W.V.F. No. 1293). :
3. Six miles north east of Mount Eliza. In flower (W.
V.F. No. 743).
4, Pandanus Creek. In flower (W.V.F. No. 1067).
5. Charnley River near F.B. (Camp F. Brockman) 33. In
early viscid fruit. (W.V.F. No. 1397).
Mr. Fitzgerald’s statement that his new species has
affinity with A. plectocarpa A. Cunn. and A. pachycarpa. -
F.v.M. is explained by the following specimens in fully
matured fruit, which, in my opinion, are all A. plectocarpa.
1. In ripe fruit. ‘‘ Erect, 10 feet high.’’ Cambridge
Gulf, North of Wyndham; East Kimberley (W.V.F. No.
94 J. H. MAIDEN.
1589, and labelled by him A. plectocarpa A. Ounn. Mr. |
Fitzgerald ‘“‘builded better than he knew.”’
2. Wyndhan, in ripe fruit (A. E.V. Woodroffe, September,
1903).
3. Shrub 20 feet high; in ripe fruit. Denham River,
East Kimberley. (W.V.F. without number, and labelled
by him A. plectocarpa). —
The seeds of all three specimens are nearly globular, and
the almost thread like funicle has two folds, and terminates
in a scarcely enlarged basilar arillus.
Specimen No. 3 containsa portion of a flower-spike. The
' flowers are so resinous that it is difficult to dissect them.
The calyx is nearly divided to the base, and the sepals are
narrow and tipped with hairs.
Affinities.
1. With 4. Hammondi n. sp. See p. 95.
2. With A. pachycarpa F.v.M.,a species that is imper-
fectly known, but I have certain direct evidence in regard
to it. A translation of the original description (Journ.
Linn. Soc., 111, 139, 1859) is as follows :—
Glabrous, branches angular on the upper side, phyllodes very
shortly petiolate, lanceolate or elongate-linear, more or less falcate,
recurved-apiculate, inclined to be three-nerved, with numerous
very fine parallel veins, having a gland at the base, spikes in short
terminal axils, solitary or two, dense and rather shortly peduncu-
late, calyx five-sinuate, glabrous, three times shorter than the
corolla, pod pale yellow, thick, elongated-oblong, flexuose, inde-
hiscent, torulose, marginate, obtuse at the apex, acute at the base,
almost straight at the sutures, seeds ovate-globose, opaque, dark,
somewhat compressed, with minute whitish strophioles.
At the bank of Sturt’s Creek, sub-central Australia, No. 89.
A tall tree, unless [am mistaken. Phyllodes 2 inches or almost
a foot long, about 3” broad. Corollas small. Pods 14 - 2" long,
‘
a he a
’
*
NOTES ON ACACIA. . 95
almost 4 inch broad. Seeds about 2”’ long, one side very often
convex, the other more flattened. The species resembles Acacias
drepanocarpa, julifera, and delibrata, in its phyllodes, in the pod
however, it is very different. (Description ends here).
The limits of length given for the phyllodes are remark-
able, and point to mixed material. They are up to a foot
long, and are not near to those of A. plectocarpa, but
rather resemble those of 4. coriacea and stenophylla,
members of the Plurinerves (Microneura). The specimen
in fruit in the plate of 4. pachycarpa in the ‘‘Iconography
of Acacias’’ is typical, and the differences between these
phyllodes and those of plectocarpa are at once observable.
The flowering twig of A. pachycarpa depicted has certainly
different phyllodes, and perhaps it may not be correct.
Coming to the fruits, Bentham says those of A. plectocarpa
may be “almost as broad and thick as in 4. pachycarpa.”’
It is desirable that A. pachycarpa be re-collected, before
we can fully indicate its affinities.
A. HAMMONDI n. sp.
(Julifloree—Falcatee.)
et plectocarpa F.v.M. of the ‘“‘Iconography of Australian
Acacias ’’ non A. Cunn.)
In addition to the type specimens of A. plectocarpa, Sir
David Prain had the goodness to give me fragments of A.
plectocarpa A. Ounn., written up by Bentham as var.” as
follows :—
a. Roper, Mueller, No. 25. Phyllodes and pods.
b. Lower Victoria River, Mueller, No. 93. Phyllodes
and flowers. Both are Northern Territory localities.
Reference to Journ. Linn. Soc., 11, 138, shows that
Mueller himself referred them to A. delibrata A. Ounn.,
which is additional evidence that he had either never seen
or had forgotten A. delibrata.
= ’
96 J. H. MAIDEN.
The phyllodes are much shorter and narrower than typical
plectocarpa and have only two nerves. It is obvious that
(a) and (b) were used by Mueller for the purpose of figuring
A. plectocarpa in the ‘‘Iconography,”’ as regards details in
addition to the phyllodes.
The pods have a translucent or waxy lustre, and speci-
mens closely approaching (a) and (b), though with some
slight variation in the venation, are available from
Etheridge River, North Queensland (W. E. Armit, No. 624),
and shrub of 8—10 feet, Cloncurry Road, Normanton, Gulf
of Carpentaria (R. H. Cambage, No. 3935).
No. 3935 has scanty remains of flowers which appear to
be identical with those of No. 93, about to be described.
We have, in my view, a new species, and it may be
_ described as follows :—
Frutex glabrus preter paucos pilos, ramulis acute angulatis.
Foliis lanceolatis v. angusto-lanceolatis, paullo falcatis, 5 — 7:5 cm.
longis et 5-7 mm. latis, venis duabis prominentibus longitudin-
alibus et numerosis tenuibus parallelibus. Spicis gracilibus non
densissimis longitudinem 4 cm. attinentibus. Floribus 5-meris.
Calyce latiusculo, semi-truncato, loborum marginibus ciliatis.
Petalis basi connatis vel liberis, glabris. Pistillo breve tomento
tecto.
Leguminibus tenuibus translucentibus rectis, 5 cm. longis, 6 —7
mm. latis, valvarum marginibus incrassatis, valvis bullatis, semin-
ibus fere transverse dispositis.
Funiculo filiforme secundum duas plicas in arillum paullo incrass-
atum terminante.
A shrub, glabrous except for a few hairs, with acutely
angular branchlets. Phyllodia lanceolate or narrow lanceo-
late, slightly falcate, narrowed at both ends, two to three
inches (5 — 7°5 cm.) long and 5 — 7 mm. broad, slightly curved
at the apex, with a rudimentary gland usually near the
apex and one always near the base, with two prominent
NOTES ON ACACIA. 97
longitudinal veins and numerous finer veins parallel theréto,
the whole phyllode covered with minute resinous dots.
Spikes slender, not very dense, attaining a length (as
measured by an almost glabrous rhachis) of 4 cm. (14 inch).
Flowers 5-merous. Oalyx broadish, semi-truncate, with
ciliate edges to the lobes. Petals united a little way up or
free, glabrous. Pistil covered with a short tomentum.
Pods (described from No. 25). Thin, translucent, straight,
5 cm. long, width 6—7 mm., abruptly and sharply pointed
at apex, somewhat abruptly tapering into a filiform pedicel
of about 5 mm. Margins of valves thickened, valves
embossed, the seeds arranged almost transversely. Funicle
filiform, terminating after two or three folds in a slightly
thickened arillus.
Mueller’s No. 93, Lower Victoria River, Northern Terri-
tory, is taken as the type, while Mueller’s No. 25, from the
Roper River, is taken as the co-type.
It is named in memory of my only son, Harrie Hammond
- Maiden, who for ‘years before his untimely death, was my
companion in the bush, and an assiduous observer and col-
lector of plants.
Range.—Northern Territory (Arnhem’s Land) and
Northern Queensland, extending across the tropical portions
of both political divisions. The Victoria River embouches
close to the Western Australian boundary, hence later I
expect to find the plant in tropical Western Australia; the
Roper runs into the western portion of the Gulf of Carpen-
taria. On the other (eastern) side of the Gulf, the Olon-
curry Road, Normanton, is towards the south-eastern angle
of the Gulf, while the Etheridge River is more to the east.
The Etheridge runs into the Hinasleigh which runs into the
Gilbert, which flows into the eastern side of the Gulf.
Georgetown is the chief settlement on the Htheridge.
G—June 6, 1917.
4 ij
+
ee
. 2
a
:
98 J. H. MAIDEN?
Affinities. .
1. With A. plectocarpa A. Ounn. The phyllodes of Aj.
Hammondi are much smaller, are usually two-nerved, while
those of A. plectocarpa are three or many nerved. The
flowers are different, those of A. plectocarpa having hairy,
linear sepals, while the calyx of A. Hammondi is broadish
and semi-truncate, with cilia. The fruits of A. plectocarpa
are coarser and more opaque, with the seeds more deeply
embossed and differently arranged in the pod.
I know no close relations of A. Hammondi, but that is
perhaps because our tropical Acacias have been so imper-
fectly worked out. We have several Acacias with straight,
flattish, embossed pods, but none small and of a waxy lustre.
| 21. A. TUMIDA F.v.M.
Isle Lacrosse, N.W. Coast. A. Cunningham.
‘““A tree to 30 feet; trunk to 10 feet; diam. 9 in.; bark
dark coloured, smooth; timber brownish, and rather hard;
phyllodia glaucous.”” (W. V. Fitzgerald, MSS.)
22. A. RETINERVIS Benth.
Cape Pond, N.W. Coast, A. Cunningham.
23. A. HOLOSERICEA -A,. Cunn.
Cambridge Gulf, N.W. Coast, A. Ounningham; Nickol
Bay, F. Gregory’s Expedition. Cunningham (M.S. Journal
Vol. 11, p. 78) collected it at Cambridge Gulf, 22nd eee
tember, 1819.
“Tall shrub to a tree of 30 feet; trunk to 8 feet; diam.
9in.; bark dark coloured, smooth; timber brown and
moderately hard.”’ (W. V. Fitzgerald, MSS.).
24. A. DIMIDIATA Benth.
‘Various parts of the N. Coast, A. Cunningham.”’ Most
of Ounningham’s collecting in Northern Australia was done
in the Nor-West. I admit this from the Nor-West, though
with some doubt.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 99
25. A. FARNESIANA Willd.
N.W. Ooast, A. Cunningham. Nickol Bay, F. Gregory’s
Expedition.
26. A. SUBEROSA A. Cunn.
Vansittart Bay and Careening Bay; A. Cunningham.
Glenelg Bay, J. Martin.
‘A tree of fir-like aspect, to 40 feet; trunk to 15 feet;
diam. 1 foot; bark dark grey, thick, rough and corky; timber
pale and rather tough; peduncles thick, bracteate, solitary,
axillary, shorter than the leaves; flowers 5-merous, usually
about six in a head which is subtended by a prominent
lobed cupular bracteole, each flower about 2 lines long,
slightly sericeous; calyx infunduliform, lobed to about one-
third of its length; corolla exceeding the calyx by line,
greenish, very shortly lobed, the lobes scarcely acute;
stamens pale yellow, 14-2 lines long; pod to 9 in. long, 4
in. broad. On grassy black soil plains, occasionally in sandy
loam. ‘Mimosa.’ A splendid forage plant.” (W. V. Fitz-
gerald, MSS.). |
9. Mueller. ‘‘Plants of North Western Australia,”’
enumerated by Baron Ferdinand von Mueller. fcp. Govt.
Printer, Perth, 1881. (Presented to the Legislative Council
1880). It contains two Parts :—
(1). ‘“EKnumerative notes on the plants collected during
Mr. John Forrest’s Trigonometrical survey of the Nickol
Bay district during the year 1878.’’ (pp. 3—18).
(2). “List of the plants collected during Mr. Alexander
fForrest’s Exploring Expedition in 1879 between Nickol
Bay and King’s Sound.”” (14-19).
i. In Part I we have:—
27. A. sentis F.v.M. Nickol River, A. Forrest.
13. A. hemignosta F.v.M. Yule River, J. Forrest.
28. A. gonocarpa F.v.M. var. lasiocalyx F.v.M. “A
variety (unless a distinct species) with more per-
ceptibly margined phyllodia, the calyces and base
of corolla beset with short yellow hair.’’ Yule and
Fortescue Rivers, Jones’ Creek and George’s
River. J. Forrest. (Prof. Ewart tells meit is no
longer in the Melbourne Herbarium).
100 J. H. MAIDEN.
In Part II, we have
). A. hippuroides Heward from three localities be-
tween 17 and 18° S, Lat. and 121 —123° E. Long.
A. sentis and A. gonocarpa are new records.
ii. Mueller. ‘‘Catalogue of plants collected during Mr.
Alexander Forrest’s geographical exploration of North
West Australia in 1879.”’ Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xiv, 81
(1880). These are King’s Sound to Darwin, and are there-
fore both Northern Territory and Nor-West. More specific.
localities are, however, given with each species. (In
Despeissis, p. 20, there is an account of the results to Nor-
West Settlement of A. Forrest’s Expedition).
Mueller refers to the circumstance that, when the Par-
liamentary Report’ was published, only the Nickol Bay to
King’s Sound specimens were available, and says that Mr,
James O. Carey also assisted in the collection. He also
adds some hitherto unrecorded data from the A. O. Gregory
Expedition of 1856, of which he was botanist and which
mainly traversed the Northern Territory.
The Nor-West Acacias recorded appear to be:—
29. A. retivenia F.v.M. Margaret River.
15. A. Wickhami Benth. Margaret River.
30. A. stipulosa F.v.M. Hast of the Oscar eo
Humbert River.
31. A. pallida F.v.M. Margaret River.
So that retivenia, stipulosa and pallida are new records.
32. A. sclerosperma F.v.M. in Wing’s Southern Science
Record, 11, 150 (1880), is recorded from the Nickol River, |
and probably from this Expedition. It is a new record.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 101
10. ‘“‘Report (s) on the Geology of the Kimberley district”’
by Edward T. Hardman, Government Geologist, Perth,
printed by order of the Legislative Oouncil ; 1884, pp. 22,
16 plates and a map; 1885, pp. 38, 26 plates and a map,
contain no botany, but the admirable lithographic views
are most helpful to the botanist.
11. King, H. S. (1885). Mr. F. S. Brockman, Surveyor-
General of Western Australia, informs me that ‘‘ Mr. King
conducted a triangulation and feature survey from the
North West bend of the Lyons River northward to the
Ashburton, and North-westward to the Fortescue Rivers,
during the middle six months of the year 1885. This survey
covered the country shown by flat blue wash on map at-
tached. (Not reproduced, but filed in the National Her-
barium, Sydney).
‘*This would be the occasion on which the plants referred
to by the Government Botanist, Sydney, were collected,
these plants though (I understand from Mr. King) having
been forwarded for classification to the late Baron von
Mueller.”’
They were described ina paper entitled ‘* Plants collected
in Capricornic Western Australia, by H. S. King Esq., and
recorded by Baron von Mueller” etc. (Proc. Roy. Soc.
Vict., xxi, 49-57 (1886). |
12. Mueller. ‘Descriptions of two hitherto unrecorded
West Australian plants.’’ Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., XIII,
162 (1888). Although it takes cognizance of some King’s
Sound plants, there are no Acacia records from the Nor-
West.
13. Mueller. In Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., x11, 1256 (1888),
Mr. J. J. Fletcher communicated to the Society a list of
plants collected by Mr. W. W. Froggatt (employed by Hon.
W. Macleay, M.L.c.) at King’s Sound. The determinations
were by Mueller.
102 7\: ‘J, H. MAIDEN.
The Acacias amongst them are:—
27. A. sentis F.v.M.
33. A. impressa F.v.M.
14. A. flavescens A. Ounn. (probably = A. sericata).
34. A. drepanocarpa F.v.M.
A. doratoxylon F.v.M, (probably A. proxima n. sp., see
No. 58).
A. impressa and drepanocarpa are new records.
14. Mueller. ‘‘Observations on plants collected during
Mr. Joseph Bradshaw’s Expedition to the Prince Regent’s
River.’’ Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xvi, 457 (1891).
This was a private expedition from Cambridge Gulf to
Prince Regent’s River, and the collection of plants, en-
trusted to Mr. William Tucker Allen, was well done.
The Acacias collected were :—
11. A. translucens A. Cunn. Roe’s River.
4, A. lycopodifolia A. Cunn. Woodhouse and Pente-
cost Rivers.
13. A. hemignosta F.v.M. Prince Regent’s River.
14. A. sericata A. Cunn. (recorded as A. flavescens—
a matter of opinion).
30. A. Kelleri n. sp. Durack River.
26. A. suberosa A. Cunn. Carson River.
31. A. pallida F.v.M. Carson River.
A. Kelleri is a new record.
15. Tepper, J.G.O. ‘The Flora of Roebuck Bay, West
Australia.’”’ Proc. Roy. Soc. 8.A., xvi1, 13 (1893).
The collections were made by the writer’s son (J. W. O. -
Tepper) 1889-91, and most of the determinations were made
by Mueller. The Specimens were collected ina very dry
season, at four localities. Most of them were col
near the modern Broome. San
NOTES ON ACACIA. 103
The Acacias enumerated are (with the original query
marks):—
4, A. lycopodifolia A, Cunn.
23. A. holosericea A. Cunn. 4—6 feet.
(?) 21. A. tumida F.v.M.
(?) A. acuminata Benth. (This is A. proxima n. sp.
See No. 55). |
1. A. bivenosa DC. 4-5 feet.
(?) A. signata F.v.M.
(?) 32. A. impressa F.v.M.
A. signata would be a new record, if confirmed.
Tepper, J.G.O. ‘‘Die Flora von Roebuck Bay, Nord-
West Australien.’’ Botan. Centralb. No. 22, (1893).
Practically the same as the preceding paper, but the
query marks are removed from the Acacias, doubtless
through inadvertence.
16. Tate, Prof. Ralph. ‘“‘A list of plants collected by
the Calvert Expedition.’’ Proc. Roy. Soc. S.A., xxi, 69
(1897). . : a
The collection was made by Mr. G. Keartland and is
supplemental to the collections abandoned at Joanna Springs
owing to the disaster. “‘It wasmade . . . while sta-
tioned at the junction of the Fitzroy River and Margaret
Creek, about 150 miles from Derby; and secondly, whilst
on the search for his missing colleagues, embracing 100
miles down the Fitzroy, thence south to near Joanna
Springs, and thence to Derby.”’
‘The facies is that of the Eremzan botanical province,
largely composed of Indo-Australian species such as prevails
over the tableland skirting the littoral tracts of North
Western Australia.”’
~ The Acacias enumerated are:—
06. A. dineura 37. A. stipuligera
21. A. tumida F.v.M. 26. A. suberosa
104 | J. H. MAIDEN.
' See also “Journal of the Calvert Scientific Exploring
Expedition, 1896-7,’ fep. pp. 62, maps and plans. Published
by the Western Australian Parliament, 1902. See also
“The Calvert Scientific Exploring Expedition,” by J. G.
Hill, sm. 4to. pp. 44 (1905) with map showing the route.
A. dineura and A. stipuligera are new records.
17. Helms, Richard. ‘* Kast Kimberley.’’ Journ. Bureau
Agric. W.A., 2nd, 16th, and 30th June, 1897. A valuable
paper, containing notes on the natural vegetation, absence
of forests, reforesting the country and list of trees and
other economic plants for introduction.
18. Brockman, F.S. ‘‘Report on Exploration of North-
West Kimberley, 1901, by Fred. S. Brockman, Chief Inspect-
ing Surveyor (Leader), with Appendices by Chas. Crossland
(Second in Command) and Dr. F. M. House (Naturalist and
Botanist). Fcp. pp. 1-19, 51—59, with 28 photos, chiefly
of ethnographical interest, and a map (Govt. Printer, Perth,
_W.A., 1902). The botanical references are few. At p. 10
it is stated that specimens of the principal grasses had been
forwarded to the Agricultural Department.
“In no part of the country did I find timber or any indi-
genous product (other than grass) of any commercial value.
The Cypress Pine is I believe, the same that is used in
Queensland for fencing and building, and, as it grows toa
fair size and length, it should be suitable for those purposes
locally.”’
Dr. House (p. 17) states that . . . ‘the duties of pack-
ing horses and attending toall my ‘personal wants left little
time for anything else in the intervals of travelling.”’ At
p. 18, he notes that the natives stupefy fish by using the
“root of a shrub which grows along the banks of all these
rivers,and which is known on the Fitzroy River as Majalla.”’
On p. 19 he states, ‘‘a number of botanical specimens were
NOTES ON ACACIA. 105
obtained, but the wild flowers of this region are very much
less numerous than in the southern part of the State. Ferns
of considerable beauty and growing in great profusion, were
found in some of the gorges. Unfortunately the grasses
of the basalt country were not in flower and the seed had
all dropped. The distribution of the curious baobab tree
is somewhat remarkable, the area over which it grows
being very restricted and apparently dependent to a great
extent on the nature of the soil.”’
The results of this Expedition were briefly described by
Mr. Fraser in the W. A. Yearbook for 1900-1, p. 72.
At p. 4 of his report, Mr. Fitzgerald referred to Dr.
House’s collection as “‘small,’’ and most, if not all the
species were collected later by him (Mr. Fitzgerald). At
p. 11 it is stated that Dr. House’s collection consists of
solitary specimens of less than 100 species, many of them
fragmentary.
19. Pritzel, E. EH. Pritzel in Diels and Pritzel, Engler’s
Bot., Jahrb. xxxv, (1905) collected
11. A. translucens A. Cunn. 39. A. xiphiophylla n. sp.
38. A. sphcerostachya n. sp. 40. A. trachycarpa n. sp.
A. camptoclada n..sp. All at or near Roeburne.
The name A. camptoclada being preoccupied, see below,
I have suggested No. 55, A. proxima for it.
oo. A. proxima Nn. sp.
Synonyms (1) A. camptoclada K. Pritzel in Engler’s
Bot. Jahrb., xxxiv, 309 (1905). This name is preoccupied
by A. camptoclada Andrews, Journ. W. A. Nat. Hist. Soc.
39 (May, 1904), a species aff. A. undulifolia A. Cunn.
(2) (2?) A. acuminata Mueller or Tepper non Benth. in
Proc. Roy. §.A., xvi, 17, (1893).
This has been looked upon by some observers as A. dora-
toxylon A. Cunn., but no pods are available in the case of
106 J. H. MAIDEN.
any Tropical West specimen known tome. We must there-
fore suspend our judgment. As it has been separately
described, and for other reasons, it will be convenient to
refer to it by name. I suggest that of A. proxima.
Pritzel, comparing it with A. doratoxylon, says that it
differs in having 1—3 nerved phyllodes, looser spikes, and
the slender peduncles longer. There isa gland at the base
of the phyllode, consisting of a small circular orifice, which
does not appear to be in normal A. doratoxylon A. Ounn.
Flowers 5-merous on a long spike, somewhat scattered.
Calyx roundly lobed, covered in hair. Petals divided partly
down, glabrous. Pistil very small, glabrous.
A specimen near to the above, from Meda, (Dr. H.
Basedow, No. 7, April, 1916), shows the following variation
from typical A. doratoxylon—flower spikes in clusters as
many as four in one group, not racemose asin A. dorat-
oxylon. Gland a circular orifice. Phyllodes somewhat
mealy, or less striate than A. doratoxylon.
20. Fitzgerald, W.V. ‘‘Reports on Portions of the
Kimberleys (1905-6),’’ fep. pp. 18 with a map. Perth,
Government Printer, 1907. The reports are two and were
addressed to the Surveyor-General.
(1) ‘‘Report on a portion of West Kimberley, (1905).”
Mr. Fitzgerald was attached to Mr. C. Crossland’s party,
and the report covers pp. 3-14. The first paragraph of p.
3 shows the route traversed. At pp. 11-13 is a useful
botanical resumé, and it is to be regretted that the lists of
the plants found, and here referred to, were not published.
At p.11 he makes the statement, ‘‘Prior to the deter-
mination of my data, within the ordinal limits already —
mentioned, there were recorded from tropical Western
Australia 985 species. These are now augmented by 268,
making a total to date of 1253 species, inclusive of 89 which
NOTES ON ACACIA. : 107
are new to science. Eleven species indigenous in India
are now recorded as Australian.’’ At the same page he
speaks of ‘‘Mimosa’’ (Acacia suberosa and A. Bidwilli)
occurring 6n the richer grassed plains, called ‘‘ Mimosa
plains,’’ and the foliage of both species is readily eaten by
stock.
(2). .“‘ Report on portions of the Kimberleys (1906).”
This occupies pp. 15—18 (in the second paragraph of p.
15 there is an account of the route), and there is a brief
botanical note at p. 16 in which the author says, ‘‘The
1905-1906 collections have added 319 spécies to our tropical |
flora, which now, from Dilleniacez to Filices inclusive,
comprise 113 Natural Orders to 1304 species.”’ |
These numbers are EF. and O. E. as accountants say, and
Mr. Fitzgerald’s are the only figures, of which Iam aware,
referring to tropical Western Australia in contradistinction
to the ‘‘N.A.’”’ of Bentham and Mueller, and to whichI |
have referred in my account of the Acacias of the Northern
Territory.
At p. 16 attention is drawn to small collections by Messrs.
Mayo Logue and J. P. Rogers. On the same page is an
account of Sunday Island (Hewin)? which really consists of
three islands at the entrance of King Sound. Brief notes
on the vegetation will be found at p. 18.
Some of Mr. Fitzgerald’s specimens came into my care
through purchase from a person into whose hands they had
passed, and some of the Hucalypts have been described by
me.? |
* The title of the work (in the press) is “The Flora of the Northern
Territory,” by Alfred J. Ewart, D.sc. Pn.p., etc., and Olive B. Davies, m.sc.
with the co-operation of J. H. Maiden, E. Cheel, and A. A. Hamilton.
? Sunday Island (Ewenu), King Sound, Kimberley is described by W.
D, Campbell and W. H. Bird, in Proc. Roy. Soc. W.A., 1,55. At p. 58 is
an account, with native names, of some of the most important plants,
but no botanical names are given.
$ This Journal, xuvir, p. 221; xirx, 317, 318.
108 J. H. MAIDEN.
Some of Mr. Fitzgerald’s Acacias from the herbarium of
the W.A. Department of Agriculture (received by me from
Dr. F. Stoward) are published in the present paper. Mr.
Fitzgerald’s manuscript quoted, was sent by him to me on
the eve of his departure on active service in April, 1916,
although I did not read the greater part of it until Decem-
ber, I hope that the rest of the manuscript, at all events
that which refers to new species, will soon be published.
It would appear that some of the corresponding specimens
have been very much dispersed, and no complete set of
them exists; this is to be regretted as the collection is the
most important tropical West Australian one ever made.
In the ‘‘ Western Mail’’ (Perth, W.A.), issues of 2nd, 9th |
and 16th June, 1906, Mr. Fitzgerald figured (small photo-
graphs) a number of new or rare species from the Kim-
berleys, some of the names being still apparently nomina
nuda. The only Acacia he figured was ‘‘The fir-like
Acacia’”’ (A. suberosa A. Cunn.).
Some of Mr. Fitzgerald’s manuscript has already been
recorded in this paper as supplementary to the observations
of Bentham in the Flora Australiensis; the species Mr.
Fitzgerald has recorded as new for the tropical west are
as follows:—
41. A. LUEHMANNI F.v.M.
Inglis’ Gap, King Leopold Ranges;. Packhorse Range.
Diffuse, 3—4 feet high, and as much across, more or less
viscid. In sandy soil (W.V.F.). -
42. A. LYSIPHL@A F.v.M.
Inglis’ Gap, King Leopold Ranges; Packhorse Range;
Hann River. Diffuse, 3—8 feet high; bark reddish, rather
rough and curly; phyllodia somewhat viscid; valves of the
pod hirsute. In sandy soil (W.V.F.).
43. A. LINARIOIDES Benth.
Bold Bluff; Isdell and Denham Rivers; Dillen’s Springs. .
Erect, 6 —10 feet; bark reddish, rough and curly; phyllodia
\ : See
NOTES ON ACACIA. 109
viscid, sometimes above 3 in. long; spikes to 2 in. long, on
slender peduncles of above 1 in., usually solitary; sepals.
very small, slightly ciliate; pod frequently 27 in. long, 2
lin. broad, very viscid, glabrous or scantily pilose. Among
sandstone and quartzite rocks (W.V.F.).
44, A. LIMBATA F.v.M.
Dillen’s Springs. Hrect,3-4 feet. Onstony flats (W.V.F.).. -
45, A. CONSPERSA F.v.M.
Peduncles solitary or several together, $ in. or more in
length, pubescent; spikes slender, about 1 in. long; flowers.
hirsute, mostly 5-merous; sepals linear, almost free, nearly
or quite as long as the corolla; petals connate to above the
middle, with scarcely evident midribs, the tips thickened,.
(no locality quoted). (W.V.F.)
46, A. OLIGONEURA F.v.M.
Edkins Range; Calder River. Erect, 6—8 feet. In
sandy soil. (W.V.F.)
What is A. oligoneura F.v.M. ?
It was described by Mueller in Journ. Linn. Soc. 11, 139:
(1859), in words, of which the following is a translation:—.
Glabrous, with graceful angular-compressed branches, with.
-phyllodes chartaceous, subsessile, elongated, narrow-lanceolate,
acuminate gradually towards the apex, and narrowed towards the.
base, slightly falcate, trinerved, reticulately veined, glandular at the
base, the veins close to the base confluent with the lower margin,
no marginal glands, rhachises axillary, solitary or fasciculate,
short, cylindrical, glabrous, peduncles slender, calyx broadish
membraneous, dentate, a third of the length of the corolla, pods—
(wanting). |
In Arnhem Land near MacAdam Range, No. 96; Victoria River,
No. 95.
Phyllodes mostly 4 — 6 inches long, half an inch broad. Flower-.
ing spike half an inch long or a little more.
110 ; J. H. MAIDEN.
Bentham, who edited Mueller’s paper, added, —‘‘ Acacia
delibrata All. Cunn. ex Benth. in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot.
I, 374, var.?’’ He also made the following note:—
_ [‘*The specimens Nos. 95 and 96 are in young seed, and
Cunningham’s are out of flower with a loose fruit; but, as
far as these materials admit of identification, they appear
to belong to the same species; the phyllodes are, it is true,
longer and not so coriaceous; but so they are in some of
Cunningham’s specimens. Dr. Mueller’s specimen No. 91'
from Fitzmaurice River, is exactly like one of Cunningham’s
except with rather more coriaceous phyllodia; it is in good
fruit, and the pod similar to Cunningham’s. The speci-
mens Nos. 71, 90, and 92° came from Sturt’s Oreek, No. 25°
from Roper, No. 40' from Seven Hmu River, and No. 93+
from Lower Victoria River, have still more coriaceous
phyllodia, and, in the case of the two last, considerably
shorter; but they probably all belong to one species.”’]
In the key in B. FI. 11, 317 Bentham contrasts A.delibrata
with A. oligoneura in the following words (I leave out
reference to the pods, as those of A. oligoneura are
unknown).
ee Phyllodia sprinkled with a few hairs.........delibrata .
Phyllodia very glabrous, the smaller veins
between the three principal nerves
SCArCely CONSPICUOUS........eseeeeeseeeeese OLIGONEUTA
At p. 405 he gives a description of A. oligoneura and
adds, “‘possibly the same as A. delibrata.’’ The original
descriptions tell us of the phyllodes, the remarkably short
spikes, and the calyx. The petals are not described, nor
was the pod seen.
remarks on these and other numbers, with some doubt, are made by
Bentham, Nos. 25 and 93 are, however, A. plectocarpa A. Cunn., var.
according to specimens in the Kew Herbarium (A. Hammondi n. sp., of
the present paper). See p. 95.
NOTES ON ACACIA. LE
Mueller’s ‘‘Iconography of Australian Acacias’’ does
not help us in regard to the position of A. oligonewra, for
he does not figure it, while his plate of A. delibrata is not
that species, see p. 86.
- The numbered specimens in the original description are
not available, and most of them are doubtfully attributed
to A. delibrata. When discovered, the material must be
closely compared with that of A.delibrata A.Cunn. Iam
of opinion that A. oligoneura is too uncertain a species to
deal with in the present state of our knowledge, and it
may perhaps have to be abandoned. I should be very
grateful for a sight of material attributed to A. oligoneura.
7 47, A. AULACOCARPA A. Cunn.
Goose Hill, near Ord River; Dillen’s Springs. . Tree to
30-40 feet, trunk 10—15 feet; diam. to above 1 foot; bark
dark grey, roughish; timber brown and tough. In sandy
‘loam. (W.V.F.)
_ 48. A. HUMIFUSA Benth.
Summits of Mounts Browne and Leake; Bold Bluff. Stems
depressed, 1 foot long. Among sandstone and quartzite
rocks. (W.V.F.) |
49, A. BIDWILLI Benth.
Near Wyndham; Ord, Denham, King, Isdell, Adcock,
Barnett, Hann and Oharnley Rivers. Shrub to tree of 30
feet; trunk to 10 feet, diam. 1 foot; bark dark coloured,
rough and corky; timber pale and rather soft; branchlets,
leaves and pods finely villous; a conspicuous gland above
the base of each petiole; flowers white, scented. In the
black soil of grassy plains. ‘‘Mimosa,’’ a splendid forage
plant. (W.V.F.)
50. A. SALICINA Lindl. var. VARIANS Benth.
*““Isdell, Adcock, Charnley, Fitzroy Rivers; northern
base of Mount Brennan. Tree of 30 feet; trunk to 10 feet;
112 J. H. MAIDEN.
diam. 1 foot; bark dark coloured, roughish; timber pale,
tough; flowers almost white, strongly scented. In sandy
loam.’”’ (W. V. Fitzgerald, MSS. as A. penninervis Sieb.).
See my “‘Forest Flora of New South Wales,’’ Part xxxix.
It occurs in the Northern Territory and Western Australia.
In addition, we have new species as follows:—
Julifloree (Stenophyllz).
51. A. KIMBERLEYENSIS W. V. F. n. sp.
Frutex erectus, glaber, paullo tomentosus, viscidus, ramulis
gracilibus, angulatis; phyllodiis angustis vel subulato-linearibus,
plerumque falcatis, prominenter 3-nervis; spicis in pedunculis
brevibus, gracilibus, solitariis vel geminis, gracilissimis, 5-meris;
sepalis lineari-spathulatis, liberis, corolla fere zequilongis, tenuibus;
petalis medio connatis, obtusis, tenuibus; legumine lineare, com-
presso sed crasso, glabro, viscido, inter semina oblique partito,
obtuse 6-angulato; seminibus paullo obliquis, angusto-oblongis; —
funiculo breve, a basi densato, breviter plicato; arillo lobato,
cupulare. (Mr. Fitzgerald is not responsible for this and other
Latin descriptions).
An erect shrub, with slender angular branches, glabrous
or slightly tomentose and more or less viscid; phyllodia
narrow- to subulate-linear, usually falcate, with a short
obtuse hooked point, much flattened, but rigid, prominently
d-nerved, with occasionally a fainter one between; spikes
on short slender peduncles, solitary or two together, very
Slender, the flowers closely approximated, small, mostly
S-merous; sepals linear-spathulate, quite free, nearly. or
quite as long as the corolla, thin; petals connate to the
middle, obtuse, thin; pod linear, compressed but thick,
shortly acuminate, glabrous and somewhat viscid, obliquely
partitioned between the seeds; valves dehiscing elastically
from the apex downwards, firm, with a slightly raised longi-
tudinal angle or rib on each side between the suture and
the centre of the valve, striate between, the whole pod —
NOTES ON ACACIA. LAS
obtusely 6-angled; seeds slightly oblique, narrow-oblong,
shining, greenish-black; funicle short, much thickened from
the base, shortly folded and terminating in a lobed cupular
pale coloured basilar arillus.
Packhorse Range, Kimberley district. Amongst sand-
stone. (W.V.F.)
Height 3—5 feet. Phyllodia 3—5 in. long, $ line broad.
Spikes 1 in. orless. Pod 3—4 in. long, nearly 2 lines across.
Seeds 3 lines long.
Affinities to A. oncinophylla Lindl. and A. gonocarpa
F.v.M.
Mr. Fitzgerald has written thus far; following are my
observations.
A graceful species. The young stems flattened and
strongly nerved on each side from the place of the inser-
tion of the phyllode, giving them the appearance, under a
lens, of phyllodes, especially when very young. Sometimes
they have three nerves, making them 3-sided (triquetrous).
Phyllodes up to 16 cm. (64 inches) long, with one main
nerve, two less strongly marked, and others less distinct
still giving the whole a deeply grooved appearance. The
attachment of the phyllodes short.
Flowers in spikes, usually in pairs. Flower 5-merous,
quite glabrous. Oalyx very narrow (linear), about half the
length of the corolla, united at the extreme base. (Mr.
Fitzgerald speaks of the sepals nearly or quite as long as
the corolla, but this is not the case in any specimen of this
species I have examined, nor have I seen this in any other
Acacia).
Petals divided about half way down and spreading.
Seed with an arillus as broad as the seed, and tapering
to the attachment to the funicle, thus forming a wrinkled,
H—June 6, 1917. ;
‘
. **
¥
¢
é
: -
.
114 J. H. MAIDEN.
conoid mass; the length of the seed equal to that of the
funicle and its arillus.
Affinities.
1. With A. gonocarpa F.v.M. I think the closest affinity
of this species is with A. gonocarpa. <A. Kimberleyensis
can be separated from A. gonocarpa by the more numerous
_and strongly nerved phyllodia, the shape and position of
the gland. The flowers are very much alike. The seed of
A. Kimberleyensis presents close resemblance to that of
A. gonocarpa, but the funicle of the former (from the
muterial available) appears to be a little more wrinkled
than that of the latter. The pod of A. Kimberleyensis is
narrower and less woody.
2. With A. arida Benth. This is another species with
somewhat similar flowers, but those of A. arida are rather
broader in the calyx-lobes, and the petals do not appear to
be recurved. The original description says that the calyx
is shortly lobed. According to a specimen seen by Bentham
and presented by Kew to Sydney, the lobes are divided to
the base. The phyllodes and stems of A. Kimberleyensis
and A. arida are quite different ; the phyllodes are shorter,
scarcely veined, and are covered with resinous dots (as
seen under a lens). The stems are terete, spotted and
hoary in appearance.
3. With A. oncinophylla Lindl. A. oncinophylla Lindl.
quoted by Mr. Fitzgerald, is a “‘heavier’’ looking plant
with pods of a different shape, covered with a vestiture of
golden hair, and is in other respects very much more remote
from A. Kimberleyensis than A. gonocarpa is.
Julifloree (Rigidule).
52. A. CURVICARPA W. V.F. n. sp.
Frutex diffusus, pruinosus, plus minus resinosus; phyllodiis
oblongis vel lanceolato-falcatis, obtusis, apicibus glandulosis sub-
NOTES ON ACACIA. VES
prominentibus, coriaceis; venis parallelis numerosissimis, 3 —5
prominentioribus; spicis solitariis, densis, brevissime pedunculatis,
5-meris; calyce truncato, viscido-pubescente, corolla fere equilongo,
petalis medio connatis; nervis mediis conspicuis, apicibus incur-
vatis; legumine curvato annulum formante, lineare, viscido-piloso;
seminibus longitudinalibus angusto-oblongis; funiculo breve, plicis
pluribus incrassatis, arillo cupulare.
A diffuse shrub, hoary and more or less resinous, the
branchlets rather stout and angular; phyllodia from oblong
to lanceolate-falcate, obtuse with rather prominent glan-
dular tips, of a leathery texture, the parallel veins very
numerous and closely packed, 3-5 more prominent than
the others, several confluent with the lower margin; spikes
solitary, very shortly pedunculate, dense; flowers mostly
5-merous; calyx viscid-pubescent, shortly and broadly lobed,
but little shorter or quite as long as the corolla; petals
connate to the middle, viscid, with conspicuous midribs
and incurved tips; pod curved so as to form one or more
rings, linear, viscid-pilose, the valves convex and coriace-
ous; seeds longitudinal, narrow-oblong, shining-black;
funicle short, with several thickened folds and terminating
in a cupular basilar arillus.
Near the junction of the Hann and Barnett Rivers (W.
V.F.). On quartzite hills.
Height 3—4 feet. Phyllodia mostly 3-4 in. long, 2 in.
or less broad. Spikes 1 in. or less. Pod 2—3 in. long,
about 2 lines broad. Affinity to A. acradenia F.v.M.
The above description is by Mr. Fitzgerald; the follow-
ing notes are by myself.
Calyx truncate-lobed, two thirds of length of corolla,
thick, covered in coarse short hair. The calyx is a bright
lemon yellow, the petals a pale yellowish salmon. Petals
united half way up but easily separating, thickened tips
116 J. H. MAIDEN.
with a few scattered hairs. Pistil glabrous except at the
top where it is crowned with a few hairs.
A ffinity—With A. wmbellata A. Ounn.‘ (A. acradenia
F.v.M.)
The phyllodes of A. umbellata are of a finer texture than
those of A. curvicarpa; the striate lines are edged with
short hairs and the gland at the base does not project; it.
does project in A. curvicarpa. Very resinous; glabrous in
A. curvicarpa. The flowers are very similar to those of
A. umbellata; pistil hoary.
The seeds of A. curvicarpa are placed longitudinally in
the thin, curved pods, filling them, are attached to the
outer curve; the broad arillus suddenly tapers off into a
thread-like funicle. The pod of A. umbellata is slightly
falcate, thick, and so resinous that it is very difficult to open
it. The seeds resemble those of A. curvicarpa, and are
disposed the same way in the pod, but are smaller.
Bipinnatze (Botryocephale).
53. A. PACHYPHLOIA W.V.F. n. sp.
Frutex altus vel arbor, ramulis fere teretibus, glabris. Foliis.
bipinnatis, pinnis 2 v. 3 paribus petiolo commune equilongis.
Foliolis 10-15 paribus, ovato-lanceolatis ad oblongis, cinereis,.
venis ascendentibus. Floribus in capitulis globosis, racemosis foliis
breviores formantibus. Legumine breviter stipitato, lato-lineare,
glabro, compresso. Walvis coriaceis, irregulariter striatis. Semin-
ibus longitudinalibus, ovatis, brunneis. Funiculo crasso, arillo
clavato sub basi.
A tall shrub or tree; branchlets almost or quite terete,
glabrous; leaves bipinnate, the pinnee in 2—3 distant pairs,
at least as long as the common petiole; leaflets 10—15
pairs, ovate-lanceolate to oblong, callous-pointed, somewhat
coriaceous, of a greyish hue, the veins ascending; flowers.
in globular heads and forming racemes shorter than the
NOTES ON ACACIA. Ll 7%
leaves; pod shortly stipitate, broad-linear, glabrous, com-
pressed; valves coriaceous, slightly convex and irregularly
striate; seeds longitudinal, ovate, brown; funicle thick and
terminating in almost clavate sub-basilar arillus.
Slopes of Bold Bluff; hills near O. 92, in proximity to the
Synnott Range; hills by the Oharnley and Calder Rivers
(W.V.F.). Always on andesite.
Height to 30 feet; trunk to 10 feet, diam. 6-9 in.; bark
dark or iron-grey, very thick, rugose, deeply longitudinally
fissured and corky. Timber pale, and not very hard. Pinnee
3-5 in. long, the common petiole 3—5 in. Leaflets $-2
inch long. Pod 3—5 inch long, 4 inch broad. Seeds fully
D lines long. Affinity to A. elata A. Cunn.
(Its closer affinity is, however, with A. pruinosa A. Cunn.
an eastern Australian species, closely resembling that
Species in the leaflets. The resemblance to A. elata is
moreremote. Its podsresemble those of A. Bidwilli Benth.
Its affinities cannot usefully be further investigated in the
absence of flowers. Mr. Fitzgerald apparently saw some,
for he describes them ‘‘in globular heads,’’ but he does not
describe their structure. I have only seen leaves and old
pods.—J.H.M.).
21. Domin, K. “Additions to the Flora of Western and
North-western Australia.’’ Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. xii, 245
{1912). This paper takes cognizance of some plants col-
lected by Dr. H. Clement between the Ashburton and
De Gray (Grey) Rivers. These are the ‘‘ North-western ”’
plants. The paper includes only Monocotyledons, Ferns,
and a Casuarina.
22. Cheel, E. ‘Records of West Kimberley Plants col-
lected by Dr. E. Mjoberg’s Scientific Expeditions to Aus-
tralia (1910-1913). K.Svenska Ventensk. Akad. Handl. Bd.
52, No. 10, Stockholm, 1916. I have not seen the paper.
It is quoted in ‘“‘Contributions to West Australian Botany”’
118 | J. H. MAIDEN.
by O. H. Ostenfeld (Dansk. Botanisk Arkiv. 1916). Follow-
ing are the Acacias:—
4. A. lycopodifolia A. Cunn. (a form near var. glabre-
scens), Broome.
32. A. impressa F.v.M., Broome; West Kimberley.
21. A. tumida ¥.v.M., Broome; West Kimberley.
23. A. holosericea A. Cunn. “Silver Wattle,” Broome;
West Kimberley; St. George’s River.
23. Basedow, Dr. H. In 1916 Dr. Basedow collected
plants in North West Australia between King Island and
Exmouth Gulf, and he has placed them in my hands.
The Acacias are:—
32. A. impressa F.v.M., Emmanuel Yards (No. 8).
45. A. oligoneura F.v.M., perhaps, in fruit only, Sunday
Island (No. 116).
5. A. hippuroides Hew., Raft Point (No. 140).
54. A. Simsii A. Cunn., Glenelg River District. Known
from Northern Territory; apparently new from
Nor-West (No. 148).
19. A. delibrata A. Cunn., (No. 130).
15. A. Wickhami Benth. Glenelg River District, (No.
152).
4, A. lycopodifolia A. Cunn. var. glabrescens Benth.,
(No. 122). Yampi.
A. Simsii is a new record.
Following is a list of Nor-West species referred to in the
foregoing :—
1. bivenosa 6. Gregorit
2. patens 7. spathulata
3. Bynoeana 8. pyrifolia
4. lycopodifolia 9. deltoidea
5. hippuroides 10. setulifera
NOTES ON ACACIA.
119
ll. ¢ranslucens 33. imnpressa
12. coriacea 34. drepanocarpa
13. hemignosta 35. Kellers
14. sericata 36. dinewra
15. Wickhama 37. stipuligera
16. sttgmatophylla 38. spherostachya
17. xylocarpa, and var. 39. xiphrophylla
planifolia 40. trachycarpa
18. arida 41. Luehmanni
19. delibrata 42. lysophlea
20. plectocarpa ; 43. linarioides
21. tumida 44. limbata
22. retinervis 45. conspersa
23. holosericea : 46. oligoneura (?)
24. dimidiata (?) 47. aulacocarpa
25. Farnesiana 48. humifusa
26. swberosa 49. Bidwilla
27. sentis 50. salicina
28. gonocarpa 51. Kumberleyensis n. sp.
29. retivenra : 52. curvicarpa n. sp.
30. stipulosa 53. pachyphloia n. sp.
31. pallida D4, Soamsie
32. sclerosperma 55. proxima n. sp.
In addition, it has been found necessary to describe A.
Armitii, Hammondi, Hemsleyi although not yet recorded
from the Nor-West.
Classification of the Species.
PUNGENTES (UNINERVES). UNINERVES (ARMAT2).
patens Gregori
CALAMIFORMES (PLURINERVES). UNINERVES (BREVIFOLI#).
Bynozana spathulata
BRUNONIOIDER. UNINERVES (ANGUSTIFOLIA)
lycopodtfolia , sentis
hippuroides
120 J. H. MAIDEN.
UNINERVES (RACEMOS#).
pyrifolia
salicona
sclerosperma
PLURINERVES (TRIANGULARIES).
deltoidea
stipulosa
Luehmanni
PLURINERVES (BREVIFOLIZ).
setulifera
translucens
impressa
PLURINERVES (OLIGONEURZ).
bivenosa
Simsit
PLURINERVES (MICRONEURA).
coriacea
PLURINERVES (NERVOS2).
hemignosta
PLURINERVES (DIMIDIAT#).
sericata J ULIFLOR (DIMIDIAT#).
retiventa holosericea
dineura dimidiata
JULIFLORE (RIGIDUL#), humifusa
Wickhama BIPINNATH (BoTRYOCEPHAL2).
stigmatophylla pachyphloia n. sp.
Kellera BIPINNATE (GUMMIFER2).
stipuligera Farnesiana
spherostachya suberosa
siphrophylla pallida
lysophleca Bidwilla
Northern Territory Species not yet recorded from
Nor-West.
aneura auriculiformis
amentifera brevifolia
JULIFLORH (RIGIDULA).
linarioides
curvicarpa Nn. sp.
JULIFLOREZ (STENOPHYLL#).
acylocarpa
arida
gonocarpa
drepanocarpa
trachycarpa
Kimberleyensis n. sp.
JULIFLORZ (FALCAT2). -
delibrata
Hemsleyi n. sp.
plectocarpa
tumida
retinervis
conspersa
oligoneura
aulacocarpa
proxima Nn. sp.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 121
Cambager
conjunctifolia
continua
Cowleana
crassicarpa
Cuthbertsont
cyperophylla
dictyophleba
difficilis
doratoxylon (?)
estrophiola ta
Srumentacea
galioides
Gilesiana
gonoclada
Hammondt
Kempeana
latescens
latifolia
leptophleba
megalantha
minutifolia
notabilis
oncinocarpa
Oswaldr
pachycarpa
phlebocarpa
prtyorides
polystachya
prelongata
ptychophylla
sessiliceps
sibirica
spondylophylla
stenophylla
subternata
Sutherland
Tanumbirinense
tetragonophylla
ulicina
Der beliate
List of Nor-West Species in Alphabetical Order.
N.T =Northern Territory; Q.= Queensland; W.A.= Western
Australia; S.A.=South Australia; O.S. = Other States.
arida N.T. (2)
aulacocarpa N.T. (#), Q.
Bidwilli N.T. (2), Q.
bivenosa N.T.(?) , W.A.
Bynoeana N.T., S.A.
conspersa N.T.
coriacea N.T., Q.
curvicarpa Nn. sp.
delibrata N.T., Q.
deltoidea N.T .(?)~
dimidiata N.T.
dineura N.T,
drepanocarpa N.T.
Farnesiana N.T., O.S8.
gonocarpa N.T.
Gregorit N.T. (?)
hemignosta N.T., Q.
hippuroides N.T.
holosericea N.T.
kumifusa N.T.
impressa N.T.
Kellert N.T.
122 J. H. MAIDEN.
Kumberleyensis n. sp. sentis N.T., O.S.
limbata N.T. sericata N.T., Q.
linarioides N.T. setulifera N.T. (1)
Luehmanni N.T. Simsii N.T., Q.
lycopodifolia N.Y. spathulata N.T. (4), W.A.
lysiphlea N.Y. spherostachya W.A.
oligoneura (4) N.T. stigmatophylla N.T.
~ pachyphlowa n. sp. stapuligera N.T., Q, OS.
pallida N.T. stipulosa N.T., W.A.
patens N.T. suberosa N.T.
plectocarpa N.T. trachycarpa W.A.
proxtma n. sp. , translucens N.T.
pyrifolia N.T. tumida N.T.
retnervis N.T. Wickhami N.T.
retivenia N.T. siphiophylla W.A.
salicina N.T., O.S. aylocarpa N.T.
sclerosperma W.A. Total 55.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
ACACIA DELIBRATA A. Cunn.
Plate I,
1. Phyllodes, covered with a fine silky tomentum; gland at base.
Dries a dull olive green.
2. Pod, with short hairs on the raised parts. 1 and 2 from the
type, Port Warrender, North West Australia, Allan Cun-
ningham, No. 486, October, 1819. Presented by Kew.
3. Twig, showing phyllodes and flowering spikes. =~
4 and 5. Flowers, showing minor differences, the latter with
recurved petals. ’
6. Pistil. ) |
7. Portion of pod, showing seed, funicle and arillus in situ. 3 to-
7 from Sunday Island, West Kimberley, (W. V. Fitzgerald).
NOTES ON ACACIA. 123
Acacia Hemstry!i Maiden, n. sp.
Plate II.
. Flowering twig from Fitzroy River, 8 miles above Hann River
Junction, West Kimberley, Nor-West. (W. V. Fitzgerald,
No.-1177, June, 1905).
. Flower.
eo Pistil. 3
. Floral bract.
Pods.
. Seed, am sate.
Nos. 2—6 from a scrub on the Gregory River, Gregory Downs
near Burketown, North Queensland (Dr. T. L. Bancroft). Note
the thickened margins of the valves.
Oo eB we
ACACIA PLECTOCARPA A. Cunn.
Plate III.
. Phyllode (with three main nerves) from type, Cambridge Gulf,
North West Australia. Allan Cunninghain, No. 482, Sep-
tember 1819.
. Phyllode, with three main nerves.
. Valve of pod.
. Seed, with arillus, natural size.
. Seed with arillus, enlarged. 2 to 5 from co-type, Sims’ Island,
Northern Territory, Allan Cunningham, No. 122, 1820.
Presented by Kew.
. An exceptionally long and rather narrow phyllode. Denham
River, East Kimberley, North West Australia (W. V. Fitz-
gerald).
. Three spikes of flowers.
8. Single flower, showing calyx and petals.
9. Single flower, showing petals and pistil.
124 J. H. MAIDEN.
10. Floral bract. 7 to 10 from Isdell River, Mount Barnett — .
homestead, West Kimberley, North West Australia. (W. V.
Fitzgerald). |
11. Pod.
12. Seed, with funicle and arillus. 11 and 12 from same locality
as 6.
Acacia Hammonp1 Maiden, n. sp.
Plate IV.
1. Twig, showing two veined phyllodes, an interrupted flowering
spike and a rhachis after flowering.
2. Flower.
3. Pistil. 1 to 3, Lower Victoria River, Northern Territory
(Mueller, No. 93).
4. Twig, showing phyllode and pods.
5. Larger phyllode. 4 and 5, Roper River, Northern Territory
(Mueller, No. 25). Bentham, when doing Acacia for the
Flora Australiensis, wrote up Mueller’s 93 and 25 as “A, —
plectocarpa var.” Presented by Kew.
6. Twig with phyllodes and pods.
7. Portion of pod, greatly enlarged, showing seed with funicle
and arillus. 6 and 7 from Etheridge River, Northern Queens-
land, W. E. Armit, No. 624.
I desire to acknowledge most valuable assistance I have
received from Miss Margaret Flockton and Mr. W. F. |
Blakely, my assistants, in the preparation of this paper.
Plate 1.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol LI, 1917.
See :
aan NNR RAN
sosengenitesonens SS eseaeaninne DRG enmansenneiononss Seaeocesco
Sear Se
\ Sct
71 FiceKfon.del.
Acacia delibrata A. Cunn.
Plate lI.
ty of N.S.W., Vol. LI., 1917.
yal Socie
Journal Ro
ai
A XK
den, n.sp.
al
yi
«
Acacia Hemsle1
Plate Il.
‘asian eaearcr ocea RTRONE SAEEIRE
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LL., 1917,
77-FlocHhfon, del.
Acacia plectocarpa A, Cunn.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LL, 1917. Plate IV.
Sa tes
i
i
j
i
{i
Z
oo
tore
wm Flore Kton. de |.
Acacia Hammondi Maiden, n.sp.
THE LOCATION OF THE CUBIC PARABOLA. 125
TABLES TO FACILITATE THE LOOATION OF THE
CUBIC PARABOLA.
By O. J. MERFIELD, F.R.A.S. etc.
(Communicated by J. NanGLE.)
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, June 6, 1917. |
Introduction.
In the Journal and Proceedings of this Society, Vol. xxiv,
there will be found a table, prepared by the writer, which
gives values of certain functions in connection with the
location of the cubic parabola. The argument to this table
being «/R, in which R equals p, the radius of curvature at
the point v. ye where the parabola forms contact with the
circular curve of radius R.
This table may be used in quite a number of ways to
solve such problems that arise in practice. To illustrate,
it may be desired to set out a cubic parabola when the
value of h/R is given, or again the point c may be fixed on
the circular curve, hence ¢, the angle between the axis «
and the tangent at the point c, becomes known, from these
values the remaining functions required are readily found
by the usual methods of interpolation.
To those who have a knowledge of interpolation, such
problems present no difficulty, as the argument of the table
is so arranged that only second differences need be taken
into account in the formule of interpolation. The table
could have been prepared so as to include values of the first.
derivatives for each respondent, but for the purpose for
which this table was prepared it was unnecessary.
Some time ago I received a request from an officer of the
Tramway Construction Department of New South Wales,
126 | C. J. MERFIELD. %
asking for solutions of certain problems in connection with
tramway location. These problems were not difficult, but
sufficiently so, perhaps, to cause annoyance to the practical
engineer not accustomed to questions of this nature.
As the replies to these questions may be useful to others
desiring similar information, it was thought advisable to
combine them in a short paper for future use. Similar
notation will be used here as in previous papers.*
Solution of Problems.
_ In tramway location, as practised in New South Wales,
it would seem for some reason, not necessary here to
explain, that the values of “‘h’’ and “‘R”’ form the data in»
the problem for setting out the cubic parabola to connect
the straight with the circular curve. With the value of
h/R we may find the several quantities usually required to
set out the parabola.
Let us take the equation
h/R = 2 sin? ¢ cos ¢ + cos ¢ — 1....... wl?
by a simple reduction this may be put into the form
Cos* p - feos +$(1+—7) = 0 ae 2
From this equation the angle ¢ may be readily determined.
Putting p= 2 (4 +4), cos 3a = — [9°81774186] B
then Cos ¢ = [0°26143938] cos 4.
| Kxample.
h = 0°025152, R = 2, h/R = 0°012576, 6 = 1°518864.
Log const = — 9°81774186 Log const = 0°26143938
cS = 0°18151888 55 Cos a = 9°71327467 ©
9» COS 3o= — 9°99926074 » Cosh = 9°97471405—
3a = 176 39 28°42 $ = 19 21 45°2
a= 58 53 9:47
1 This Journal, Vols. xxx, xxxI, xxxtv. 7 Vol. xxx, p. 59.
| 5.
NG
THE LOCATION OF THE CUBIC PARABOLA. 127
Table II appended to this paper, gives values of the angle
with the argument h/R between the limits 0°0000 and
0°01430. The maximum value of h/R equals
(250
\ 2438 i
and the angle ¢ must be within the limits 0° and cos”
, that is between 0° and 24° 5’ 41°°43...
— 1 = 0°01430103
For reasons, already explained in a previous paper, these
limits must be kept in view when dealing with the cubic
parabola as an easing curve.
It would also appear that the tramway practice in New
South Wales adopts the cubic parabola merely as a curve
to connect the straight with the circular arc, and not
necessarily to overcome the superelevation of the outer
rail on the curves. Under these circumstances it becomes
feasible to adopt a radius of curvature for the parabola
equal to or greater than that of the contact curve at the
point of contact Xe Ye,
In some cases a small length of circular are of larger
radius than the circular curve, has been introduced between
the parabola and the main curve, so that the curve leading
out of the straight would consist of the parabola, a small
length of circular arc of radius R, then the main curve of
radius R,. It would be much better to eliminate the small
length of arc of radius R. by simply finding a cubic para-
bola having a radius of curvature say R, at the point of
contact c the coordinates of which are X¢ Ye.
Under the conditions just formulated, there will be two
cases. Firstly, we may fix a point c on the circular curve,
hence ¢ and y. become known. Provided the point c is so
fixed, that the angle ¢ is within the limits already men-
tioned, then we may find a cubic parabola that will connect
the straight with the circular curve so that the tangent at
‘fs is
« a 7
3
128 C. J. MERFIELD.
c will be common to both. Secondly we may adopt a value
of p the radius of curvature of the cubic parabola at the
point of contact ec.
Thus
Ye
R, = (1+ p+) — cos $ aoa 3
in which h/R, corresponds to ¢ and may be found from the
tables and <
Yo = R, (1-cos ¢) + a@......... 4
R, Versin¢? + a
we also have
3 Ye
DS ee ae
2 2sin? ¢ cos $ 2
probably more useful than (3) as we avoid the calculation
of h/Ro.
Having determined R,. we may readily find
“= 2 BR, sin ? COS" 'G... 2.2 oe
x= R, sin ¢ |
h = ye — Ry, versin ¢
T K = (R,—R,) sin ¢
B 1
mi = 90h d cos*?.
or with the value «/R, the several quantities may be found
from the table given in Vol. xxxIv, page 285.
Let us now take the second case when we adopt a radius
of curvature p, equals R, at the point of contact ec.
From the theory explained in previous papers we may
readily deduce the following equation
Cos*¢— le =e ) cos # + ae ee
In this and previous formule the quantity “‘a’”’ represents
the distance between the parallel tangents, see Fig. When
in equation (6), R, equals R, and ‘“‘a’’ equals “‘h,’’ it
reduces to the form given in (2).
THE LOCATION OF THE CUBIC PARABOLA. 129
To determine the value of ¢ from the above equation let
us put
oP) 4 Bis iA a)
n= \4 (143% 2 R. ang 9° = SR Pe
Cos 38a = — 4 B/n*
then Cos ¢ = n Cos «a.
HKxample.
R=68 R,=165 a=3'14
Log B = 9°8107212 Log n = 0°1669830
», — 4 = —0°6020600 », COS @ = 9°8235023
| ere: ¥» cos } = 99904853
Log n*? = 0°5009490 |
,, COS3a= — 9°9118322 | = 11° 56’ 58°8
aa = 144° 42 46°°2
a= 48 14 15°4 |
Yo = = Ro sin? 6cos ¢ = R, versin¢? +a
from which we find yc, equals 4°61358, and from the equation
| io 4
(1 +p) = 008 # (1 + sin? 4) eres 7
we may find “h.’’ To simplify the numerical calculation
of this equation we may put
(1+ 5)= 2 cos ¢ cos? 4 ¥.
Cos ¥ = 2 sin’? -¢.
I—June 6, 1917.
130 Cc. J. MERFIELD.
From Table I appended to this paper we may determine
x/R? with the argument ¢, then h/R. can be found from
the table of Vol. xxxIv.
The arc TC = [8°2418774] Rid”
To fix the point ““K’’ opposite T’ we have
TK =(R.—-f:) sind «& = TK + RA. sin ¢=R,2 sin ¢.
Tables.
Table I gives the values of «/R with the argument #.
This table has been prepared from the equation 5a.
Table II contains ¢ with the argument h/R. Equation
(2) has been used in its preparation.
In both tables the numerical values of the derivatives ©
F(t) are tabulated and facilitate interpolation. We have
for a given value of h/R
in =b, +n oF (Ht — Fit) o F(t) t ee 8
or we may write
n= d-(1—n) fort} +25™ fon(—orlt)} ...0
If we write h/F in place of ¢, then the formule apply
equally well for the interpolation from Table II, they are
general.
The notation of these formulze will be understood from
the following example of their application.
HKxample.
Find the angle ¢ from Table II when h/2 equals 0°0109428.
Therefore n = 0°428
w F @M=+7179. of, @) = 2a
1 fw F, (t) — @ F (t)} = + 18
and
n = 17 7 6°7 + (0°428) x 7° 17"°9 + (0°428)? x 18.
= 17°14 26°4- (0°572) x 7° 215 + (0°572)? x 1°°8.
= 17° 10’ 14"°4
THE LOCATION OF THE CUBIC PARABOLA. ja |
In Table II the interval between the arguments has been
diminished so as to avoid additional terms in the formula
of interpolation. The value of ‘‘n’’ must therefore be
reduced to the proper unit by dividing “‘n’’ by ©, the interval
of the argument. ;
If we desired to find the value of ¢ corresponding to h/R
equals 0°0132572 then
2n = 0°0132572 - 0°01324 = 1°72
n = 0°86 and (1 — n) = 0°14
66
If the value of ‘“‘n’’ exceeds 0°5 then adopt formula (9).
The values of the derivatives are not given at the begin-
ning or end of Table II. To secure accurate interpolation
would necessitate an additional term in the formule, and
the tabulation of the higher derivatives.
When a value of h/R comes within these limits, then ¢
- should be determined from equation (2) if it is not equal to
one of the tabulated arguments.
The following equation forms a useful control
Cos ¢=1 Jens akin
io le
The following typographical errors have been noted in
the table Vol. xxxIv, page 285.
x/R Tabulated. Correct.
0°40 12° 4’ 20°°0 12° 4’ 20’°9
0°43 2°622733 9°622733.
2971°0 18° 2369 0 (24
132
0°000000
0°003491
0:006982
0:010474
0:013962
0 017452
0°020941
0 024430
0 027919
0:031407
0 034894
0°038380
0°041866
0°045351
0°048835
0°052318
0°055800
0°059280
0°062760
0°066238
0:069714
0°073189
0076662
0°080134
0°083604
0 087072
0:090539
0 094004
0°097466
0°100927
0°104385
0°107841
07111295
0°114747
0°118196
07121642
0°125086
0°128527
0°131966
0:135401
0°188834
0°142264
0:145691
0°149115
0°152535
0°155952
0°159366
0°162777
0°166184
0169587
07172987
0°176383
0 179776
07183164
0°186549
0°189930
0°193307
0°196680
0-200049
0°203413
0:206773
-O-
3491°0 | 6:0} 0°206773
3491°0 *1 | 0°210129
3490°5 "2| 0°213480
3490°0 | °3| 0 216826
3490 0 *4| 0°220168
34895 *B | 0°223505
3489°0 | -6| 0°226838
3489°0 ‘7 | 0 230165
3488°5 | °8| 0°233488
3487°5 *9| 0°236806
3486'5 § 7°0| 0°240119
3486 0 ‘1 | 0°243427
3485 5 | °2| 0 246729
3484 5 *3| 0°250026
3483'5 *4| 0 253318
3482°5 5} 0°256605
3481 0 ‘6| 0 259886
3480°0 | °7{ 0°263162
3479°0 | °8| 0°266432
3477°0 ‘9| 0°26969E
3475°5 | 8°0| 0°272955
3474°0 ‘1| 0°276208
3472°5 "2| 0°279455
3471'0 | °3| 0°282696
3469°0 "4| 0°285931
3467°5 °5B| 0°289160
34660 § °6| 0:292383
3463°5 | °7| 0°295600
3461°5 | + °8| 0°298810
34595 | °9| 0°302014
38457:0 | 90) 0°305212
3455‘0 | °1| 0°308403
3453°0 *2) 0311588
3450°5 °3} 0°314766
3447 5 °4| 0°317938
3445°0 *5| 0°321103
3442°5 °6| 0°3824261
3440°0 ‘T| 0°327412
3437°0 | °8| 0°330556
3434°0 °9| 0°333693
3431°5 [10 0| 0°336824
3428°5 ‘1| 0°339947
3425°5 | °2| 0°343063
3422°0 *3| 0°346172
34185 | °4| 0°349273
34155 | °5| 0°352367
3412°5 °6| 0°355454
38409°0 | °7| 0°358533
3405°0 *8| 0°361604
3401°5 | °9| 0°364668
3398'0 #11°0| 0°367724
3394'5 *1| 0°370772
3390°5 °2| 0°373813
3386 5 f °3| 0°376846
3383°0 °4|) 0°379871
3379 0 | °5| 0382888
3375°0 | °6| 0°385896
3371°0 | °7| 0°388897
3366°5 | °8| 0°391889
3362°0 | °9| 0°394873
3358'0 $12°0) 0°397848
Limits
2)
x/R
Cc. J. MERFIELD.
Table I.
3358 0
3353°5
8348'5
3344°0
3339°5
3335°0
8330'0
8325°0
8320'5
8315°0
8310°5
3305'0
8299°5
3294°5
3289°5
3284°0
8278'5
8273°0
3267 °0
8261°5
3256°0
3250°0
8244°0
3238.0
3232°0
8226°0
3220 0
$213°5
8207°0
8201°0
3194°5
3188 0
8181°5
3175°0
3168°5
8161°5
3154°5
8147°5
3140°5
83184°0
3127°0
3119°5
3112'5
3105°0
8097'5
8090°5
8083°0
8075°0
8067°5
8060°0
3052°0,
8044°5
3037°0
3029°0
3021°0
3012°5
3004°5
2996°5
2988°0
2979°5
-O-
12°0
0°397848
0°400815
0°408774
0°406725
0°409667
0°412600
0°415525
0°418441
0°421348
0°424246
0°427136
0°430017
0°432888
0°435750
0 438603
0°441447
0°444281
0°447106
0°449922
0°452728
0°455525
0.458313
0°461091
0°463859
0 466618
0°469367
0°472106
0°474836
0°477555
0480264
0-482963
0°485652
0-488331
0491000
0-493658
0496306
0-498944
0°501572
0°504189
0-506795
0°509391
0-511976
0°514551
0°517115
0-519668
0-522210
0-524742
0-527263
0°529772
0°582271
0°534759
0-537236
3539701
0°542155
0-544598
0-547030
0°549450
0°551859
0°554258
0556642
0°559017
-O-
2971°0 [18°0
2963°0
2955°0
2946 5
2937°5
2929°5
2920°5
2911°5
2902'5
2894°0
2885°5
2876°0
2866°5
2857°5
28485
2839°0
2829°5
2820 5
2811°0
2801°5
2792 5
2782°0
2773 0
2763°5
2754 0
2744'0
2734°5
2724°5
27140
27040
26940
2684°0
2674°0
2663 5
2653 0
2643 0
2633°0
26225
26115
2601°0
2590 5
2580°0
2569°5
2558'5
2547°5
2537°0
2526°5
2515°0
25040
2493°5
2482°5
2471°0
2459°5
2448°5
2437 °5
2426 0
2414°5
2403 0
2391°5
2380'5
0° 0' 0" to 24° 57 41""4..,
0:0
to 0°6804139..,
1
* 2 e@
3
7
19°
‘1
2
3
4
5
20°
21
22,
°
.
°
.
.
4
5
6
8
9
0
23°
2
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
*4
5
6
7
8
9
0
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0°559017
056138 }
0 563731
0°566071
0°568399
0°570715
0°573019
0°575312
0°577593
0°579862
0°582119
0°584364
0°586597
0°588818
0591027
0°593224
0595408
0°597580
0°599740
0 601888
0604023
0606146
0°608256
0°610354
0°612440
0°614513
0°616573
0 618620
0°620655
0 622677
0°624687
‘0 626684
0°628668
0630639
0°632598
0°634543
0°636476
0°638395
0°640302
0°642195
0°644076
0°645944
0°647798
0°649639
0°651467
0°653282
0655083
0°656871
0 658646
0°660408
0°662156
0°663891
0°665612
0°667320
0°669014
0°670695
0°672363
0°674017
0°675657
0°677284
0°678897
ok |oF (>| 1k jor Ol ¢| 7k loF | o| fk loF'®|
1900°0
1887°0 |
1874°5 |
1861°0 |
1847°5
1834'5
1821°5
1808°0
1794'5
1781°5
1768°5
1755°0 |
1741°5
1728°0
1714°5
1701°1
1687'5
1674°5
1661°0 |
1647°0
1633°5
1620°C
1606°0
a
THE LOCATION OF THE CUBIC PARABOLA.
DT eS ee a ee
h/R
0:0000| 0 0 6-0
00001 | 124 1°4
| 00002 | 1 59 18:3
-0:0003 | 2 26 14°4
0:0004 | 249 25
00005 | 3 9 10°6
0:0006 | 3 27 25°6
0:0007 | 3 44 15-9
0:0008 | 3 59 58°8
0:0009 | 4 14 47-0
0:0010 | 4 28 49:8
00011 | 4 42 13-8
00012 | 455 4-2
0:0013 | 5 7 25-2
0:0014 | 5 19 20-4
00015 | 5 30 52-6
00016 | 5 42 44
00017 | 5 52 57°5
00018 | 6 8 33-7
0-0019 | 6 13 54:4
0:0020 | 6 24 0-9
0:0021 | 6 33 54:4
0:0022 | 6 43 35-8
0:0023 | 653 6:0
0:0024 | 7 2 25°8
0:9025 | 7 11 35°9
0:0026 | 7 20 36-9
0:0027 | 7 29 29°5
0:0028 | 7 38 14-2
0:0029 | 7 46 51-4
0:0030 | 7 55 21-4
0:0031 | 8 3 448
0:0032 | 8 12 1-9
0:0033 | 8 20 13-2
0:0034| 8 28 18-9
0:0035 | 8 36 19-2
0:0036 | 8 44 14-4
00037 | 8 52 4:8
0:0038 | 8 59 50:7
0-0039 | 9 7 32:4
0:0040| 915 9:9
0:0041 | 9 22 43-5
0:0042 | 9 30 13:4
0-0043 | 9 37 39-7
0:0044| 945 2-6
0:0045 | 9 52 22:3
0:0046 | 9 59 39-0
0:0047 | 10 6 52°8
0:0048 | 10 14 39
0-0049 | 10 21 12-2
0-0050 | 10 28 17:9
0:0051 | 10 35 21-3
Table II.
wo F(t) | h/k
0-0051 | 10
0:0052 | 10
0°0058 | 10
0°0054 | 10
0:0055 | 11
0°0056 | 11
9°0057 | 11
0°0058 | 11
0-0059 | 11
, _, | 9:0060 | 11
+13 42°2 0:0061 | 11
13 6°4 0°0062 | 11
12° 35:0 0°0063 | 11
T2726 0°0064 | 12
11 43°3 0°0065 | 12
ll 21°47 0:0066 | 12
les 2:2, 0°0067 | 12
10 444, 0°0068 | 12
10 28°2 0:0069 | 12
10 13:4 0:0079 | 12
9 59°8 0:0071 | 12
9 47°3 0°0072 | 12
9 35°7 0:0073 | 138
9 24°9 0:0074 | 13
9 14°8 0:0075 | 13
9 55 0:0076 | 13
~ 8 56°7 0°0077 | 13
8 48°6 0:0078 | 13
8 40°9 0°0079 | 18
8 33°5 0:0080 | 13
8 26°6 0°0081 | 18
8 20°2 0°:0082 | 14
8 141 0°0083 | 14
8 85 0:0084 | 14
8. 3-0 0°0085 | 14
Cy ari 0°0086 | 14
7 52:8 0:0087 | 14
YT A481 0:0088 | 14
7 43°8 0°0089 | 14
7 39°6 0°0090 | 14
T 35'5 0:0091 | 15
T-31°7 0°0092 | 15
7 23:1 | 90093 | 15
7 24°6 0:0094 | 15
Macilics 0:0095 | 15
7 182 0:0096 | 15
7 15-2 0°0097 | 15
7 12-4, 0:0098 | 15
Fo (OF 0°0099 | 15
7 FO 0:0100 | 16
T 45 0°0101 | 16
+ 7 23 1 0-o102 ! 16
133
x o Ft)
35 21°3 | +7 2:3
42 225 | 7 O-1
50 216 | 6 58-0
56 186 | 6 56-0
3136 | 6 540
10 67 | 6 52-2
16 58:0 | 6 50°5
23 47-7 | 6 49-0
30 36:0 | 6 47°5
37 228 | 6 461
44 82 | 6 44e7
50 522 | 6 43-4
57 351 | 6 42°3
4168 | 6 41-2
10 575 | 6 40:2
17 372 | 6 39°2
24160 | 6 38:3
30 53:9 | 6 387-5
37 311 | 6 368
44 76 | 6 36:2
50 436 | 6 35°7
57 19:0 | 6 35:2
3540 | 6 34:8
10 286 | 6 344
17-129 |. 6341
23 369 | 6 338
30 108 | 6 338
36 446 | 6 33:8
43 184 | 6 338
49 52:3 | 6 33-9
56 262 | 6 340
3 04 | 6 344
9350 | 6 347
16 99 | 6 35:1
22 45-2 | 6 355
29 20:9 | 6 36-0
35 573 | 6 36-7
42 344 | 6 37-5
49 12:3 | 6-383
55 510 | 6 39°
2306 | 6 401
9113 | 6 41-2
15 531 | 6 42-4
22 361 | . 6 43:6
29 204 | 6 45:0
36 61 | 6 465
43 53:4 | 6 48:1
49 42:3 | 6 49:8
56 33:0 | 6 516
3256 | 6 535
10 201 | 6 556
17 168 ' +6 57:9
134
0:01300
0:01302
0:01304
0:01306
0-01308
0:01310
0-01312
0:01314
0:01316
0°01318
0:01320
0:01322
0:01324
0:01326
0:01328
0:01330
0:01332
0:01334
0:01336
0:01338
0:01340
0:01342
0:01344,
0:01346
0:01348
0:01350
0-01352
0:01354
0:01356
0°01358
0:01360
0:01362
0:01364.
0:01366
17
17
es
17
17
17
17
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
2U
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
29
20
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
C. J. MERFIELD. |
Table II—Continued.
db w F(t) | 2/R
/ “4 4 “
17 168 | +6 57:9 | 0:0116
24 15°8 7 O38 | 0°0117
31 17°74 7 2:8 | 0°0118
38 21°5 T 53~1 0°0119
45 281 7 81 | 0:0120
52 37°8 7 11:2 | 0°0121
59 50°6 7 144 | 0O-0122
7 67 7179 | 0°0123
14 26°4 7 21:5 | 0:0124
21 49°7 7 25°3 | 0°0125
29 17:0 7 29°4 | 0°0126
36 48°6 7 33:9 | 0°:0127
44 24°8 7 38°6 | 0:0128
52 58 7 43°5 | 0:0129
59 51:9 | +7 43°38 | 0:0130
2 33:9 | +2 2°2 | 0:01866
4 36°5 2 3:0 | 0013868
6 400 2 3°8 | 0:01370
8 44°2 2 46 |0°01372
10 49:2 2 54 |0°01374
12 55°) 2 63 [0°01376
fosi:s 2° 7:2 | 001378
17 94 2 81 | 0°01380
19 17-9 2 90 | 0°013882
21 27:3 2 99 4001384
23 37-7 2 10°9 | 0°01886
25 49°71 2 11:9 | 0°013888
28 1°5 2 12°9 | 0°01890
30 14°9 2 13°9 | 0°013892
82 29°3 2 15:0 | 0°01894
34 44°9 2 16:1 | 0°01396
ou) 1:6 2 17:3 | 0:01398
39 19°5 2 18:5 {0°01400
41 38°6 2 19°7 | 0:01402
43 58°9 2 20°99 | 0:01404
46 20°5 2 22°2 | 0°01406
48 43°4: 2 23°6 | 001408
Sie C7 2 25:0 {| 0:01410
538 .33°4 2 264 | 0°01412
56 O05 2 27:9 | 0°01414
58 29°2 2 29°5 | 0°01416
0 595 2 31:2 | 001418
3 31°5 2 32°99 | 0°01420
6 53 2 24°7 | 0°01422
8 40°9 2 36°6 [| 0:01424
11 18:4 2 88:5 {001426
18 57°8 2 40°4 | 0:'01428
16 39°2 2 42°5 | 0°01430
19 22°8 | +2 44:7
Limits hjR
|
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
b
59
7
15
23
31
40
48
57
5
14
23
33
42
52
2
19
22
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
13
17
21
25
30
34.
39
44
49
55
1
8
16
25
36
59
51°9
435
All
4A:Q
55:6
13°7
39°8
14°3
58:2
52-2
57:3
14-7
456
315
33:9
22°8
8°6
568
4-5
40°7
36°7
35'8
38°0
43°1
52°0
4°53
2171
41°8
7-2
37°7
13°3
54°9
4:2°8
38°3
41°3
52°8
149
47-9
34:4.
35°6
55°6
37°5
48:2
35°7
15°2
161
50°5
211
0:0000 to 0°0143010...
bin cnpie
OOOInFrF EE HP HPWWWWWWWWWWWWWNNND bd dw
-L
© OO OH OH CO CO OH OH MO ©
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 135
THE PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN
ARTESIAN BASIN. ,
By ALEX. L. DU TOIT, D.Sc., F.R.S.S.Afe.
(Communicated by Mr. J. E. Carne.)
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, July 4, 1917.]
I. Introduction.
JI. The Physiography of the Basin.
III. The Geology of the Basin.
IV. The Temperature of the Waters :—
~(1) General.
(2) Secular changes.
V. The Salinity of the Waters..
VI. The Gases in the Waters and their Origin.
VII. The Rising of the Waters under Pressure :—
(1) Gas Pressure.
(2) Rock Pressure.
(3) Temperature Differences.
(4) Hydraulic Pressure.
(5) Sub-surface Springs.
VIII. The Absorption and Transmission of Water: —
(1) Absorption.
(2) Transmission.
(3) Interference of Bores.
IX. The Early Tertiary History of the Basin.
X. The Relation between Volcanism and the Artesian Supply.
X1. The Closing History of the Basin.
XII. Conclusion.
Table A.—TFlows producible in Bores by Gases.
Table B.—Friction in Bores according to Depth and Yield.
Diagram I. Map of Basin showing Contours of Floor.
2 EF: fs if is Temperature Gradients.
ie DEY 74 5 “ Salinity of Waters.
re si Isopotentials for 1912.
5 EY,
136 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
I. Introduction.
By reason of its colossal size and extraordinarily economic.
importance, the Great Artesian Basin of Australia eclipses
all others, and the interest therein is heightened by the
exceptionally fascinating nature of the problems of its
structure and mechanism.
For many years the obvious view that the basin owed its
immense supply entirely to rainfall absorbed on its eastern
and south-eastern margin, remained almost unquestioned,
and it was not really until in 1906 Prof. Gregory* showed
that many of the facts were irreconcilable with such a
simple scheme, and that the meteoric theory was seriously
challenged.
He concluded that a certain part at least of the water
was of magmatic origin, some was probably water included
in the sediments during their deposition, or was a subse-
quent though ancient accumulation from the atmosphere,
and only the remainder was being drawn from the present
rainfall, orthat of very recent times, while in 1911? he
went so far as to deny even the importance of the last-
named action. | 7
In 1912, Mr. Symmonds,*adducing many reasons backed
up by chemical data and going even further than Gregory,
concluded that the bulk of the water was ‘“‘juvenile”’ or of
plutonic origin.
Against such views Mr. Pittman,* until lately Govern-
ment Geologist of N.S. Wales, the most uncompromising
protagonist of the meteoric theory, vigorously protested,
1 J. W. Gregory, The Dead Heart of Australia, London, 1906.
2 J. W. Gregory, The Flowing Wells of Central Australia, Journ.
Roy. Geogr. Soc., Vol. xxxvui11, 1911.
3 R. 8. Symmonds, Our Artesian Waters, Sydney, 1912.
¢ EB. F. Pittman, Geol. Surv. N.S. Wales, especially, Problems of the
Artesian Water Supply, etc., 1908; The Great Australian Artesian Basin,
1914; The Composition and Porosity of the Intake Beds, ete., 1915.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. Lot
claiming that all other geologists in Australia were at one
with him in favour of a purely meteoric derivation of the
waters in the Great Basin.
When in Australia in 1914, through the generous invita-
tion of the Commonwealth Government, the author found
that, so far from this being the case, quite a number of the
local geologists were perfectly ready to admit that many
aspects of the problem could better be explained by the
rival hypothesis, and there seemed to be a fairly general
opinion, that neither view alone would account for all the
facts observed, and that further investigation of the problem
was therefore highly desirable.
The papers by Gregory and Symmonds have certainly
been of immense service in directing attention to this
question, which is one so intimately bound up with the
welfare of ‘Australia, and it cannot be doubted that this
novel presentation of the subject, has stimulated in a con-
siderable degree scientific investigation of the Artesian
Basin, which has borne fruit in the two valuable reports of
the Interstate Conference (1912 and 1914); it is reassuring
also to find that a number of contentions or suggestions by
Gregory or Symmonds, originally received with somewhat
violent opposition, have either been partially admitted or
else recognised as being worthy of further research.
The Great Artesian Basin is perhaps the finest instance
Known of a geological problem to which the statistical
method—the quantitative and final stage in geological
investigation—can be applied, and, though the data pub-
lished concerning the numerous bores are often incomplete
in many important details, and uncertainties are constantly
appearing, yet it is believed that enough material is avail-
able of sufficient accuracy to enable deductions to be drawn
with a certain amount of precision. In the compilation of
the accompanying maps, all available data have been con-
138 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
sidered and plotted, figures that appeared in any way
doubtful having been omitted: for example, all shallow bores
were excluded in considering temperature increments.
Though the writer’s personal knowledge of the area is of
the slightest, his interest in the problem, principally by
reason of certain analogies with South Africa, must serve
as an excuse for the contribution; moreover, the magnitude
of some of the actions in dispute, such as the effect of gas,
can be closely determined, the probable rates of flow
through the water-bearing beds can be estimated roughly,
while there are particular aspects of the question dependent
upon pressure, temperature and salinity that deserve to be
set out and indicated in detail. .
The hydraulic departments of the several States con-
cerned are clearly alive to the importance and urgency of
the solution of the problem, especially in connection with
control of the supplies now and in the future, but, as Mr.
Knibbs pointed out in 1903,* our knowledge of the physics
of the basin in its earlier and almost untouched condition
is very slight. Now, though data are rapidly being col-
lected, the equilibrium of the reservoir has been entirely
upset, and this disturbance from the original condition is
making the solution of the problem more and more difficult
owing to the falling pressure in bores, to their mutual
interference, and to leakage, with consequent reduction of
yield. The potential surface is in a state of flux, the
accurate determination of the isopotentials over the entire
region for any particular short period is a practical impos-
sibility; accordingly deductions drawn from their position
and shift are likely to be only partially correct.
In utilising the published data for the preparation of the
attached maps, it must be explained that considerable dis-
crimination had to be used and much material rejected, by
1 G. H. Knibbs, this Journal, xxxvir, p. 24-47.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 139
reason of the incompleteness of the-returns and the abridge-
ment of details as regards strata cut, number of water-
beds, their thickness, their yield, temperatures of the
various flows, pressures, etc.; still it is believed that on
the whole the graphic presentations are not far from the
truth, except where the bores are scanty and far apart.
The excellent bibliography given by Pittman, makes it
unnecessary to attach a list of the important papers on the
problem; the reports of the Interstate Conferences are
referred to as I and II for convenience.
II. The Physiography of the Basin.
While valuable accounts have been written by Jack,
David, Pittman, Cameron and others, there has curiously
enough been no comprehensive and detailed description of
the entire basin, attention having naturally been concen-
trated more upon the problem of the origin of the water,
-and unfortunately, it is precisely in regard to certain
important and even vital points that data are particularly ©
lacking.
One of these is concerned with the nature of the sub-
surface contour of the great hollow, about 1,200 miles long
and 700 or 800 wide, filled in with Mesozoic beds, resting
upon a compact basement of Paleeozoic and older sediments,
granites and other igneous rocks. For the New South
Wales portion, a good idea can be obtained by plotting from
the records of such bores as are known to have bottomed
on bed-rock (II. App. B.), assisted in places by those that
have failed to reach the very base of the artesian beds. In
Queensland, it is only o¢casionally that bores have struck
the underlying foundation, an exception being the tract
Y-shaped in plan, stretching northwards from Tooleybuck
across the Northern Railway to Savannah Downs and to
Canobie; the bores in this section are all shallow. There
are also a few cases in the south between Cunnamulla and
140 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
Hungerford, and some isolated instances near Charleville, ©
Longreach, Muckadilla, Darr River Downs and Normanton,
and it is regrettable that they should be so few in number.
By utilising the figures given for the deeper and stronger
flowing bores, a fair idea can be gathered of the form of
the basin, or more correctly speaking, its shape at the base
of the principal water-bearing zone, a result which will be
of more real value after all, as will be seen later. On the
attached map (I) the sub-contours obtained in this way are
Diagram I.—Contours oveR FLoor oF Basin; figures in hundreds .of feet
below sea-level. .
Seale of rtles
100 200
A pprex. mergin of
2
A
4 Arfisien Basin
4 ‘
Ue y, /, gi eS
Ue .
Y / Chatlevi(le
1 ete
;
ig
(elef 0
given in hundreds of feet. below sea-level, following the
plan adopted by Cameron.'
Though the irregularity in relief of the floor, as shown
by the outcrops of granite well within the basin, such as
1 Ann. Progress Rept. Geol. Surv., Qu ensland, 1990, p. 10.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 14}
those in the south at Hulo, Hungerford, near Angledool,
between Walgett and Collarendabri (in which the bottom
sinks to as much as 2,500 feet not far away) and to the
north of Warren, yet the bore records indicate that this.
topographic irregularity is probably not general, but confined
to certain belts representing buried chains of hills’ (See I,
§1809).
The most important feature, and one to which attention
had been drawn at an early date, is the broad bulge in the
floor (with its surface rising almost to sea-level) athwart
the narrowest part of the basin between Cloncurry and
Saxby Downs. The view too, that the artesian water
would have to well up from the deeper region to the south-
east in order to travel across this buried ‘‘spill-way’’ into.
the section A, is obviously in part correct; the supplies are
all shallow hereabouts, while the floor drops to the north-
west, and is cut in the Normanton bore ata little over
2,000 feet below sea-level. Opinion supports Jack’s view
of a considerable submarine leakage of artesian water in
this quarter into the Gulf of Carpentaria.
‘The next is the buried low ridge extending south-west-.
wards from Charleville by way of Cunnamulla to Hunger-.
ford, and thence directed south-eastwards to Bourke and:
Brewarrina; at over half a dozen localities, indeed, does.
granite appear at the surface (See II, pl. 29). This ridge
cuts the basin into two unequal parts, the lesser of which,,.
CO, sinks to below 3,000 feet beneath sea-level on the New
South Wales-Queensland border, while primary rocks were
reported at 2,600 feet below sea-level on its southern
margin at Muckadilla; the depth of its base on the east.
below the Darling Downs is indeterminate, however, and.
* Several typical sections are included in the Queensland Hydraulic
Engineer’s Reports for 1892 and 1895, also by David, in the Federal.
Handbook, B.A.A.S., 1914; and by Pittman in the Mineral Resources of
N.S. Wales, 1901.
142 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
the geological structure in this quarter will be referred to
later. |
The main portion B of the basin deepens rapidly to the
south-west of Longreach, and the floor goes down to nearly
4,500 feet below sea-level around Bimerah. The region
westwards is as yet unprobed, and the floor may in points
descend to depths of well over a mile; in South Australia
the deep bores at Mount Gason and Goyder’s Lagoon have
not struck bed rock, although the bottom of the last named
is over 4,700 feet below sea-level. Along the margin here-
abouts, the now buried land surface was one with consider-
able topographical irregularity, and this unevenness seems
to have been aggravated by Tertiary faulting, as at Warrina.
Owing to the scarcity of bores within this huge western
region, the shape of the floor is almost unknown, but to
the north of Broken Hill there are long partially exposed
ridges of paleeozoics, forming the Stokes and Grey Ranges,
stretching away into Queensland to the neighbourhood of
Thargomindah, and only by means of boring can it be proved
whether perhaps this sub-surface feature continues north-
westwards. It may well be that the western portion D is
only imperfectly connected with B, in the same way that
B is linked to EH. Some further remarks concerning these
ridges will be made in treating of the Tertiary History of
the Basin (Section IX).
The widespread covering of superficial deposits conceals
toa large extent the boundary between the lower-lying
Mesozoic infilling and the marginal rim of older rocks, so
that the delimitation of the basin has presented many
difficulties, more particularly along its southern side.
In South Australia, Ward has concluded (I. §§ 47 —51, 93,
166-204) that the west-south-western boundary of the
basin follows more or less closely the line of railway, with
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 143
gome extension to the west of Oodnadatta;* maybe there
are one or more limited outlets leading westwards into the
Eucla Artesian Basin, following limited channels in the
older rocks, and towards which the Mound Springs near
Lake Phillipson point. This is, however, only just a possi-
bility, but against it there is the extreme contrast in
chemical composition shown by the two classes of waters
(See II. p. 269) as will be emphasized in Section V.
On the south the basin is cut off from Spencer’s Gulf by
a barrier of ancient rocks, and from the Murray Tertiary
Basin, both near Lake Frome and between Cobar and
Bourke by buried ridges. Pittman, while raising the point
whether there might not be an overflow close to Wilcannia
below the Cretaceous beds into the younger basin, considers
‘that the evidence in its favour is very slight (I. § 86, 1911).
III. The Geology of the Basin.
The recent work done by Saint-Smith (II. p. 19) in the
area north of Roma, in definitely proving that the actual
intake beds consist of the fresh-water strata underlying
the marine Lower Cretaceous Rolling Downs formation,
of which the so-called ‘‘ Blythesdale Braystones”’ really
form the basal portion, at once brings the Queensland
succession into line with that in New South Wales, as
worked out by Pittman during the last twenty years.
In view of their stratigraphical and paleeobotanical rela-
tionships, the use of the term Trias-Jura—a relic of ancient
nomenclature—is cumbersome and not altogether desirable,
and for these reasons the name “‘ Jurassic Beds”’’ is to be
preferred, as employed by Gregory and David, with the
proviso that in certain localities some actual Rhaetic or
even Triassic strata may be involved, as perhaps in the
south-eastern corner, where there may in places be a con-
formable passage downwards into Paleeozoic rocks.
* See R. Lockhart Jack, Geol. Surv. S. Aust., Bull. 5, pt. 2, 1915.
The position as regards the °*‘ Intake Beds’’ in Queens-
land now stands in a rather uncertain state; large areas
of so-called ‘‘ Desert Sandstone”’ have been eliminated from
the map and the Blythesdale Braystones are being grouped
with the Rolling Downs series. For these reasons no
attempt has been made to delimit the artesian series on
the accompanying maps, the necessity for the omission
being greatly regretted.
144 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
The important corollary that the Jurassic beds on the
north-eastern side of the Great. Dividing Range must also
act as “intakes,’’ would apply to a limited degree only
in the Dawson River catchment, as can readily be seen —
from Saint-Smith’s section (II. pl. 25), the right hand half
of which obviously cannot be contributing anything to the
supplies struck at Roma or Wallumbilla for instance; fur-
ther to the north, however, their quota may be much more
considerable. However this may be, of paramount import-
ance is the conclusion that these porous Jurassic sand-
stones crop out along the flanks and even along the crest
of the main watershed, for it may be presumed that the
bulk, if not the whole, of the ‘‘Desert Sandstone”’ (still |
called by that name on the latest geological map) between
Roma and Hughenden will prove to be really the fresh-
water Jurassic Series. They must be the same strata
extending north-westwards past Oroydon, described by
Gibb Maitland,’ under the name of “ Blythesdale beds.”’
At Hughenden their dip is a little steeper and the out-
crop narrower, while their base rests on granite or schists
at an altitude of just over 2,000 feet above sea-level at
Mount Miller, falling to about 1,800 feet along the railway,
. and dropping to about the same level in Betts’ Gorge Creek
to the north, where the beds are found in ravines that have
been cut through a great capping of younger basalt. ~
1 A. Gibb Maitland, The Delimitation of the Artesian Water Area
North of Hughenden, Geol. Surv. Serer rt 1898.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 145
Except for the two gaps through which the Northern
and Central railways have been run, the watershed seems
to attain an altitude of from 2,000 to 2,500 feet, quite
sufficient to account for the pressures met with in the bores
out to the west... |
South-eastwards from Roma, the Jurassics form a broad
belt curving past Dalby and Toowoomba to the New South
Wales border, where they rest upon paleeozoic rocks, etc.,
and have a considerable development east of Moree, extend-
ing from Narrabri to Dubbo, where their outcrop comes to
an end.
Pittman’s recognition of Tceniopteris Daintreei’ in cer-
tain wells and in the Moree, Coonamble, Nyngan, Wallon
and Bulyeroi bores, indicates the presence of the Jurassics
beneath the Cretaceous cover over a large region, con-
siderably extended by a similar discovery at Salisbury
Downs far to the west (north of Wilcannia). Excepting
by David,’ there seems to be a reluctance on the part of
geologists to admit that these fresh-water beds have any
great sub-Cretaceous extension in Queensland, and that
they form the real Artesian Series there. Yet quite a
number of bores in this State derive their water froma
series of sandstones and shales with coal-seams underlying
the marine blue shales, not only along the eastern margin
(Muttaburra-Blackall-Roma), but well out within the
basin, é€.g,, Kynuna and the deep bores at Elderslie and
Bimerah, and at Canobie well to the north of Cloncurry.
Whether these beds actually extend across to the west
and south-west, is an important question upon which very
1 Mr. Pittman’s announcement was made in 1895. Annual Report
Department of Mines, New South Wales, p. 123. In 1891 Mr. Robert
Etheridge identified Teniopteris in strata pierced by the Nyngan (sub-
sequently proved) sub-artesian bore. Annual Report, Department of
Mines for 1891, p. 320.—Eds.
* Federal Handbook, B.A.A.S., p. 280.
J—July 4, 1917.
146 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
little has been said, but it seems not unlikely that there is °
a general thinning out of the Jurassics in those directions,
and that to the east, on the contrary, still lower zones are
involved equivalent to the Lower Jurassic, Rheetic and
even the Upper Triassic without any unconformity, depo-
sition having commenced in the east and the area of sedi-
mentation having gradually extended westwards. An
overlap like this, such as might only be expected in view
of the huge area covered, is indicated by the zones present
between Toowoomba and the sea-coast, which include
_ horizons certainly lower than the artesian beds proper, or
the Walloon Series on the top of the plateau; such a
transgression is in fact shown in Cameron’s section through
Cloncurry and Hughenden.
This relationship would be reflected in the position of
the water bearing zones relatively to the base of. the
Artesian Series, and it is significant that away from the
margin the former are commonly situated not far above
the base of the group (See II. pls. 16 — 21), but closer to the
*‘intakes’’ there are considerable thicknesses of non-pro-
ductive strata below the main water-bearing horizon, as
for example, in Greendale Resumption (Tambo), Mucka-
dilla, Roma, and perhaps Nevertire near Warren. Indeed,
under such conditions, it would be uneconomical, despite the
value of the geological information obtainable, to sink the
boreholes down to bed-rock, as has consistently been carried
out in New South Wales during late years. Probably this
condition holds over a great length of the eastern margin
where the Jurassics or Jura-Trias rest with unconformity.
upon granite and paleeozoic beds, e.g., Dawson River.
“Whether there may not also be a lateral change east-
wards into less pervious sediments is not clear, but such a
possibility would help to explain the failure of deep boring
near Brisbane, for, in spite of Pittman’s criticisms based
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN -ARTESIAN BASIN. 147
on the dip, etc. of the beds, there would seem, as-Gregory
has contended, to be quite a possibility that some of the.
rainfall on the Toowoomba Plateau should enter the strata
wherever the covering of basalt is absent,.and percolate.
downwards along lenticular sheets of sandstone, and thus
make its way down to lower levels on the seaward side of
the great escarpment.
Further to the south in New South Wales, where the
Jurassics rest upon Permo-carboniferous and Triassic sand-
stones in certain places, it would be possible for some of
the artesian water to have been derived from these older
formations, more especially as they frequently outcrop on
- high ground to the east and possess a westerly dip below
the Jurassics, e.g., in the Nandewar and Warrumbungle
Mountains. The artesian bore in the “‘coal-measures”’ at
Ballimore near Dubbo is a valuable piece of evidence in
this connection.
_ The variability in thickness and number of the water-
bearing layers, with their accompanying impervious or
semi-pervious shaly partings, is considerable (See II. pls.
16—20, and sections in the Ann. Reports of the Hydraulic
Engineer, Q’land), as would only be expected in view of
their mode of origin, and this seems to be rather marked
on the north-western side of the basin. It might be re-
marked that it is just in this quarter, a little south of
Oorindi Station on the Cloncurry railway that there is a
local rise of potential against the sloping floor of palzeozoic
rocks.
- Whether this indicates the proximity of a local intake is:
not clear, but, if so, this is the sole occurrence giving
definite support to the view that water might be con-
tributed from meteoric sources along the north-western
edge of the basin. a
148 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
H. Y. L. Brown has suggested, and L. K. Ward is in
agreement, that in the area north of Charlotte Waters the
sandstones and grits of the Goyder and Finke Rivers may
act as intakes. This receives support, firstly from the
much greater altitude of the region cited, and secondly
from the fact that the waters of this marginal stretch are
not of the sodic carbonate type, and thirdly from the obser-
vations of R. Lockhart Jack, that the potential surface
west of Oodnadatta rises tothe west and north. The rain-
fall on the other hand is extremely low (4 to 6 inches
annually) and the evaporation high, but the precipitation
may have been higher in the past (see Section XI).
That the waters possess greater static pressures as well
as temperatures in the lower water-bearing zones, together
usually with a lesser salinity, is a truism, and, that the
supplies at different levels are in many cases quite inde- —
- pendent of one another, can be proved by the constancy of
flow between the double casings when the deeper supply is
shut off, e.g.,. Bando No. 3 and Congoola Hast. (Otinas No.
2) in Queensland.
Symmonds deserves credit for having pointed out the
‘* short-circuiting ’’ effect of slotting the casing opposite
water-bearing beds having different pressures, a policy
which would and probably does account for the rapid falling
off of pressure and yield in such bores. The upper waters
being more saline, should, if only for agricultural reasons,
be prevented from mixing with the main supply. |
While in many bores there is only one water-bearing.
‘stratum of importance, in others several are present,
occasionally eight, ten, or even more, but of such cases.
reported from Queensland, the majority are mostly located
near the margin of the basin, or on the shallow ridge sepa-
rating the sections A and B.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 149
These layers, varying in nature from extremely indurated
types to incoherent ‘‘sand-rock,’’ and consisting for the
most part of quartz grains with a certain proportion of
kaolinised felspar, exhibit great differences in their thick-
nesses at different points. The Conference’s map (I. pl. 14)
showing their value over part of New South Wales, gives
figures ranging from 100 to over 700 feet, the lower values
‘ being coincident with the margin of this section of the
basin. In Queensland there are similar changes from point
to point, but the data published are not sufficient to estab-
lish any definite relationship of the above kind.
The water-bearing section of the strata is some 500—
1000 feet or thereabouts, below the base of the marine blue
shales, which may attain a thickness of several thousands
of feet, and which form a practically impervious covering ;
in this connection it is unfortunate that so few sections
of boreholes exceeding 2,000 feet have been published.
Towards the west and north-west, these porous beds seem
on the whole to come closer to, if not actually to lie at, the
very top of the Jurassic Series, and it is not at all unlikely
that, with the development of an arenaceous marginal
phase in the Cretaceous, such as would occur along the
shelving floor of impervious rocks, the water-bearing beds
of the east and centre, would by means of this overlap, be
put into partial or complete communication with the Lower
Cretaceous beds, and that the latter would then become
the actuak Artesian member. According to a remark of
Carne,’ this obtains in the north-western corner of New
South Wales. |
This relationship apparently holds in South Australia
too, where perhaps the whole of the strata passed through
in the deep boreholes is of Oretaceous age, though the
Jurassic may be represented in certain localities and prob-
’ Brit. Assoc. Handbook, N.S.W., p. 607, 1914.
” ae .
’ a“
150 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
ably exists at greater depths; this series is indeed well
developed in the Leigh’s Oreek Artesian Basin* due south of
Hergott. 3 a
To the west of Oodnadatta? the covering of blue shales
gradually grows less, but the porous water beds are over-
lapped by the Upper Cretaceous series, or are concealed by
‘superficial deposits in that direction; they seem to crop
out to the north-west in the Northern Territory, however.
It is moreover precisely in those parts of the basin where
such is the case, not only along the outer edge, but around
inliers of older rocks as well, and at a few other points
‘where the cover is thin, that the waters have burst out at.
the surface; such springs have unanimously been regarded
in the light of safety-valves for the relief of hydraulic
pressure. There is a chain of cold springs on the east,
between Aramac and Richmond, but those across the
shallow tract between Croydon and Cloncurry, and thence
halfway round the periphery, past Hergott and at intervals
to Bourke, are generally warm, having the same chemical
composition as the waters of the Great Basin.
The annual outflow from the:Mound Springs must be of
no small magnitude, even without taking any account of
the water that is escaping laterally into porous drifts, such
as are met with in the upper levels of many of the bores,
and that, though usually dry, somtimes provide small flows,
The part played by the Mound Springs in the hydraulics of
the basin will be considered later.
Considering the thousands of bores that have been sunk,
the geological information recorded from them is remark-
ably meagre, and this is all the more regrettable, in view
of the immense value of the data that could have been
acquired systematicaliy during the past quarter of a
century. |
1 Brit. Assoc. Handbook, 8.A., pp. 174 eae 223-6, 1914.
2 Geol. Surv. 8S. Australia, Bull. No. 5, 1915.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 151
A great deal of knowledge concerning the strata could
be obtained by the use (at intervals) of a specially designed
cylindrical bit, so that. from time to time fragments of the
rocks passed through and of sufficient size for examination
could be brought up; this method would be much more
economical and rapid than the addition of a calyx attach-
ment, and for most purposes nearly as effective.
EV: Temperature of the Waters.
(1.) General.
- “When it is considered that the rapid increases of tem-
perature with depth within the Great Basin, are unequalled
over the globe in any other region of undisturbed sedimen-
tary rocks, unaffected by volcanic activity, it is perhaps
remarkable, that, except by Jack, so little notice has been
taken of this abnormal feature, for such it can be termed
without fear of contradiction.
EKven in Australia, outside the artesian basin, the rates
are as low as proved by the few determinations that have
been made:—Oremorne bore (1° F. in 80), Metropolitan
Colliery (1° F. in 78 feet), Sydney Harbour Colliery (1° F.
in. 91 feet), Bendigo (1° F. in 80 feét), and Broken Hill -
(very low, perhaps 1° F. in 100 feet).
Some rapid gradients—to below 1° F. in 20 feet—have
been noted from one corner of the Dakota Artesian Basin
in the United States, but, as no satisfactory explanation
thereof has been forthcoming, they cannot be cited in
argument with conviction; on the contrary, a suspicion is
raised that the conditions there may find some parallel in
those in Australia.
In Western Australia the coastal artesian basins possess
gradients steeper than the normal it is true, the values
ranging generally from about 1° F. in 60 feet to 1° F. in 36
feet, but over huge areas in the Great Basin rates of incre-
ment of from 1° F. in 30 to 1° F. in 22, and occasionally
steeper than 1° F. in 20 have been found.
152 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
The temperature found (180° F.) given for Nonda Downs
No. I, beside the Northern Railway in Queensland, with a
reputed large flow would, if correct, indicate a rate of 1° F.
in 12 feet, in marked contrast to its neighbour (112° F.,
1° F. in 34) at the railway station of that name. David?
has also cited cases of rapid increases in this quarter, e.g.,_
at Toorak and Strathfield.
The variation in mean annual surface temperature is
fully 14° F. across the basin from north to south, but the
correction for altitude is fortunately small.
Diagram II.—ArgaL DisTRinuTION oF TEMPERATURE GRADIENTS; figures
represent values in feet per degree F. (20+ indicates 1° F. for 20 - 29 feet; —
30+, 1° F. for 30-39 feet, etc.).
ZL Approx rrarg!™ ce
Gia
a Arlesien Basin -
oN
hall ae MW @
\
ae
1 Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol. xxvi1, p. 423, 1893.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 153
In regard to the figures computed from the bore records,
some are certainly not quite exact, since the depth to the
principal water-bearing stratum is not always exactly
known, or there may be a mixing of the main flow with
cooler water from a higher horizon. All figures from very
shallow bores,and also any particularly discordant numbers,
have been excluded, but at the same time it is only fair to
- point out that the curves obtained (see Diagram IT) from
the evaluations cannot be ‘“‘ smoothed down ’”’ unduly, since
it is precisely towards the detection of such thermal irregu-
larities that the analysis is being directed.
In addition to the mean temperature gradient calculated
in this way, there is also the very interesting problem of
the change of temperature increment with depth, but here
the lack of the necessary data prevents more than a state-
ment of the position as regards a few cases. Thus some-
times, where two or more flows have been struck, the
respective gradients (measured downwards from the surface
zone of constant annual temperature) are the same, for
example, Darr River Downs No. 3 in Queensland; but there
are cases in which the upper flow possesses a steeper
gradient than the lower, as in Cunnamulla and Northampton
Downs in Queensland, and in Beanbah No. 1, Bundy, Quam-
bone Nos. 1 and 2, and Wingadee Nos. 2 and 4in New South
Wales.
In these the apparent rate of increase of earth temper-
ature between the upper and lower flows ranges between
1° F. in 64 and 1° F. in 127 feet. Making the extreme
assumption that the issuing water includes the whole of
the upper supply (which, be it noted, actually possesses a
lower static pressure) the theoretical temperature of the
bottom supply can be calculated, but this computed inter-
artesian gradient, though now steeper, is still far less rapid
than the figures obtained for the upper flow in the instances
quoted.
154 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
In strong contrast stands the bore at Normanton’ in
which at 2,002 feet a small supply was cut having a tem-
perature of 104°. F., whereas the main flow struck only
102 feet lower down possessed a temperature of no less
than 151° F.; the granite floor was reached at 2,275 feet.
At Mirra Mitta in South Australia, the temperature of the
water increased from 122° F. to 176° F. between 3,485 and
3,006 feet, and to 190° F. at 3,534 feet. Gregory has
quoted also the Kynuna well in which the temperature rose
by steps concomitantly with each new flow, the figures
increasing from 125° to 150° F. (25°) in the last 242 feet.
Symmonds again has drawn attention to the remarkable
increase in temperature (107° to 128° F.)—after its com-
pletion—in the Neargo bore in New South Wales, accom-
panied by a rise in pressure.
Still more curious is the deep bore at Winton, in which a
limited supply with a temperature of 140° F. was cut at
3,235 feet, jumping to 182° F. at 3,555 feet; the main flow
struck about 300 feet further down is stated to have had a
temperature of only 173° F., and this has been maintained. %
It is difficult to conceive, how, under the meteoric
hypothesis, such extraordinarily rapid increases as those
instanced, could first of all have been produced, and secondly
maintained in strata through which the water is considered
to be moving laterally with a low velocity, since convection
currents, irregularities of flow and conduction, would
always tend towards the reduction of such violent thermal
gradients. Here we may introduce the question of the
stability of a free body of warm water heated from below
and compressed from above, but stationary, for, from the
known coefficients of expansion, compression and density,.
it can be calculated that, with a more rapid temperature
gradient than 1° F. in 5}; feet, equilibrium is rendered
impossible.
1 Ann. Rept. Hydraulic Engineer, Queensland for 1896, p. 6 and sec. 9.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 155
One can only conclude that these bores have been sunk
very close to the points of location of hot sub-surface.
springs.
In considering now the areal variation in increment—
apart altogether from the question of the abnormally steep
rate nearly everywhere—the modification introduced by
the slope of the water stratum should be analysed, such as
would be brought about when water in its upward or down-
ward movement crosses the isogeotherms.
In descending, the water will be absorbing heat from the
enclosing walls, and in ascending, the reverse will be true;
ewing to this fact therefore, and to the extremely low
diffusivity coefficient of rock, the temperature of the water
would lag slightly behind the normal geothermic value in
the first case, and exceed it slightly in the second, the
relative values of such amounts being dependent upon the
velocity of flow principally. In the Mound Springs the
water emerges, probably, without having lost an appreci-
able amount of its heat, but with the small rates of move-
ment and slopes actually experienced within the basin, the
difference between the temperature of the water-saturated
horizon and the neighbouring part of the earth’s crust,
must be of a very small order, even after the lapse of great
_ intervals of time. ;
This action may, Sometimes, be quite appreciable, how-
ever, for upon comparing the Diags. I, IJ, and IV, the waters
descending into the ““deeps’’ about Winton and Bimerabh,
and again to the west of Bourke, are found to be relatively
cooler than elsewhere; this is also conspicuous in the
stretch from Barcaldine to near Dubbo, along which the
marginal bores show increments as gradual as 1° F. in 70
feet, steepening progressively outwards.
More marked is this influence in the broad region across
the basin, from Kynuna almost to Burke, with a gradient
156 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
below 1° F. in 30 feet, and often as steep as 1° F. in 20,
since this abnormality may in part be due to effect of the
advance of the waters upon the shelving floor towards the
_ points of efflux constituting the Mound Springs.
Nevertheless, there are considerable discrepancies from
such an @ priori reasoning, as in the case of the steep
gradients about Richmond and Saxby Downs, and the patch
along the presumed “‘intake’’ due east of Muttaburra.
Several abnormal tracts are also found in the south, one of.
steep gradient at Warren, and particularly one of uncom-
monly flat gradient (1° F. in 70 feet) due west of Walgett;
the way in which they run in belts (extending roughly N. —
W.) would be rather puzzling to explain upon the meteoric
hypothesis, after com paring the three diagrams and notic-
ing the rather regular character of the underground flow
hereabouts.
In seeking an explanation for the steep gradients obser-
able, several possible factors can be discarded as ineffective
—for example radio-activity—while the existence of reser-
voirs of petroleum can hardly be invoked. To some extent
the low thermal conductivity of the great cover of over-
lying Cretaceous shales, and generally dry sandy drifts
might have been responsible, aided by the presence of
occasional coal-seams, and by the fact that the water-
horizons would possess a higher thermal conductivity,
while, had the basin formerly possessed a thick capping of
Tertiary beds, a blanketing effect would thereby have been
introduced, that, even after subsequent denudation of the
region, might not yet have vanished.
Since the basement rocks are no different to those with-
out the basin, and are no more conductive therefore, and
since the strata are not situated in a region of extensive
crustal folding, we are forced back to the only reasonable
and at the same time adequate hypothesis, namely that of
-PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN, 157
the presence below the basin of an extensive mass, or
more probably a series of masses of igneous matter intro-
duced into that position in late Tertiary times (see Sec. X).
-Koenigsberger and Miihlberg! in their analysis of the
causes of variation in geothermic gradient have shown
that values of from 27 to 21 feet per degree Fahrenheit are
found only in regions that have been subjected to volcanic
action in late geological times. That many thousands of
years would have had to elapse before the thermal additions
of this nature became dissipated, can indeed be shown by
the calculations of Ingersoll and Zobell upon the rate of
cooling of laccolitic intrusions.
(2.) Secular Changes in Temperature.
In such bores as have been re-examined after the lapse
of some years, differences in temperature have not infre-
quently been observed; these are about as commonly
positive as negative. The values range from 1 to a maxi-
mum of 9 degrees, but, when differences of a half or a whole
degree appear, such are probably generally due to instru-
mental or other errors.
For the purpose of investigating this problem, the differ-
ences between the figures given in the two Interstate
Reports, and corresponding to intervals of at least two
years, therefore, were plotted for part of the New South
Wales basin.
The analysis shows a fall of from 1° to 4° F. over the
greater part of this area, but Carinda and Warren have
rises of 65° and 9° F. respectively, while a little to the north
and to the west of Moree there are areas exhibiting in-
creases of from 1° to 8° F. In the same district there
appear the following contrasts in bores, the individuals of
each pair of which adjoin one another, are down to bed-
+ Trans. Ins. M.E., Vol. xxx1x, pt. 4. especially table 4, 1910.
— i
' -
P x
158- ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
rock at nearly similar depths, and furnish an approximately
similar yield:—Tycannah (Govt.) (—7°), and Tycannah
(Priv.) (+2°); Bunna Bunna (—7’), and Bulyeroi (+5);
Midkin No. 3 (—8°) and Talmoi (-++8°), differences amount-
ing to 9°, 12° and 16° respectively—the last remarkable
indeed !
To the west of Bourke the bores Wanaaring, Cuttaburra,
and Kelly’s Camp, have increased 8°, 9° and 10° respectively,
while the deep Hlderslie No. 2 bore in Queensland has risen
from 202° to 211° F. Symmonds has noted considerable
fluctuations in the temperatures of the bores at Neargo and
Dolgelly in New South Wales.
A fall of temperature could easily be brought about by
reduction in pressure, whereby water from a higher and
cooler stratum would be allowed to enter. The slotting of
the casing above the main horizon, so usual in the Coo-
namble district, will therefore explain the genom drop in
that region.
Neither the regular movement of water from regions of
greater depth and therefore of higher temperature will
serve to explain the departure noted in the Moree district,
since, instead of neighbouring bores being affected in the
same manner, the changes are frequently of opposite sign,
and this is so, irrespective of whether the’ bone are down
to bed-rock or not.
Though difficult of interpretation according to the
meteoric hypothesis, such thermal abnormalities can readily
be explained as having arisen through the contributing of
of juvenile waters to the reservoir, an action that would ©
be furthered by reduction of the static head of Kd bores
concerned. |
On this point further pen are greatly to be
desired. | Bat it Me
elk
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 159
Vv. The Salinity of the Waters.
Sufficient stress has not been laid upon the peculiar fact
that the suite of waters in the Basin belongs to that rare
‘class with predominant sodic carbonate and possessing
therefore high “primary alkalinity.”’ Alkaline carbonate
waters are distinctly uncommon among sedimentary types,
one good example being those of Montreal;! the analyses
from the last are closely comparable with those of Australia,
but in certain localities, sulphates of sodium and of lime
take the place of much of the sodic carbonate. Of the
waters of the Texas Cretaceous basin,” with which an
analogy has been expressed, only two are really comparable,
since in those that carry sodic carbonate, this salt is sub-
ordinate to sodic chloride, and, when in excess, is accom-
_ panied by.sulphates of sodium, lime and magnesium.
The suite of the Great Basin differs again most markedly
from all the other artesian basins in Australia—paleeozoic,
mesozoic and tertiary—in possessing only rather minute
quantities of calcium and magnesium carbonates, a general
absence of sulphates, and, conspicuously, a distinctly low
proportion of sodic (and occasionally potassic) chloride. In
the other basins the amount of sodic chloride is usually five
or six times as high—very much more so indeed in the
Murray Tertiary Basin—carbonates of lime and magnesium
are somewhat higher, especially in the Adelaide Plains
Artesian Slope, and also chlorides and sulphates of Mg or
of Ca; sodic carbonate is only present now and then, and
invariably in small quantity.
Gregory pointed out that upon the meteoric hypothesis
the salinity should increase in a more or less definite-man-
ner in a westerly or south-westerly direction from the
assumed intake, inasmuch as soluble matters would be
* Cumming, Geol. Sur. Canada, Mem. 72, 1915.
* BR. T. Hill, U.S.G.S., 21st Ann. Rept., Vol. 7, 448 — 450, 1901.
160 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
taken up by the waters in the course of their progress
across the Basin. In Wisconsin, Weidman and Schultz‘
have shown in the clearest manner how the waters are soft
throughout the intake area in the central part of the State,
but become more and more saline as they progress through
the Cambrian reservoir to deeper levels in the south-eastern,
southern, and south-western parts of Wisconsin, while after
passing into Iowa,’ this increase of salinity, with distance
from the intake, has been found to have become still more
pronounced. The distances involved range from 200 to
fully 350 miles. |
Gregory’s map* only too well,shows that the actual depar-
ture from @ priori expectation is striking, since an area of
relatively high salinity is present with Longreach at its ©
centre; there is a second one about Cunnamulla, and’ only
between Richmond and Cloncurry is the anticipation of
progressive increase outwards fulfilled.
Symmonds* has rendered great service by proving that
in almost every case examined in New South Wales, there
is in individual bores a marked decrease in salinity with
depth, the smaller upper flows being nearly always more
mineralised than the main supplies tapped close to the floor
of the Basin; concurrently, there is a small increase in pot-
ash and lime. He was also led to conclude that the supplies
towards the intake were in many instances more saline ~
than those met with further out.
Both Gregory and Symmonds lay stress, and rightly too,
upon the excessively low amounts of sodic chloride present
in the bulk of the deep waters—in some cases reaching
only two grains per gallon, a quantity far lower even than
1 Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey, Bull. 35, ch. 7, 1915.
* Iowa, Geol. Surv., vol. 21, p. 205, and pl. iv., 1912.
3 J. W. Gregory, The Dead Heart of Australia, p. 312 and map, 1906.
* R.S. Symmonds, Our Artesian Waters, p. 22, 1912.
-
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 161
in many of the river waters of Queensland (see analyses in
I. App. pp. 52 - 63).
In the preparation of the accompanying Isosaline Map
(Diagram II), only the amount of chlorides present (with
rare exceptions wholly that of sodium) was chosen for
plotting, for the following reasons :~
(a) because of the fact that as yet the abstraction of com-
mon salt from percolating water is unknown to occur in
nature under the conditions normally met with here, (b)
because its proportion therefore can only be increased
and not diminished in time, and by the movement of the
water, and (c) because on the other hand the abstraction or
conversion of carbonates is both possible and probable.
Diagram I[I.—Sauiniry or Waters; figures represent grains of sodium
chloride per imperial gallon.
4I35 139 /4/ 144
soi le Normanton
" %
t y
4
50 153
(4 /.
tare eae
See
a : fh iN) Se1
o
5 50 C)
Ue
Townsy//)
ns Terhiary
etd) Volcanic Rocks
Approx. mergim of
Arlesten Basih
eS
4
4
(Za s
breach \¢ Barcaldsne®
Nandewar
=19, =; Tad
Nae
rabrl
x]
J
arr
ft.
2
Ze
Dr, Sa
Duro 7
Nv
K—July 4, 1917.
162 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
The map has been plotted to show grains per gallon, and
in compiling it the higb values from certain shallow bores,
as well as from some deeper ones, have been rejected, the
inclusion of which would prejudice the meteoric aspect
somewhat. The lines of equal salinity should be considered
in relation to the movement of the water as inferred from
the courses of the isopotentials (see Diagram IV). It might
be observed also that, when the amounts of sodic carbonate
were plotted ina similar manner, there was generally more
uniformity exhibited in regard to the quantities dissolved
and their distribution.
The conclusions from the variation in the chlorine con-
tent are as follows:—The water entering at the high
Diagram IV.—IsoporEntTriats FoR 1912; the figures represent hundreds of
feet above sea-level.
153
i Sees 13S f44/
]
Seale af miles
700 200
Ee
1S
Approx margin af
Arfesian Bastm
O
a we
iN een la
WA
“Biisty « Of
“Ol Typ)
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 163
potential region near Hughenden is distinctly saline, using
that term ina purely relative sense, but its salinity be-
comes less further to the west and north-west; near the
opposite side of the basin the proportion of common salt
rises again. Data concerning the Flinders Valley are
scanty, but at Inverleigh and at Normanton, the waters
(in the latter case just above bed-rock) are very high both
in chlorine and total solids.
Analyses are not numerous south of Hughenden, but
from Aramac south-eastwards to Roma, the arrangement
seems to be that the waters to the north-east or intake
side are fresh, and that the salinity rises towards the south-
west. Though the supplies at Barcaldine and Blackall
contain only traces of chlorides, they are nevertheless high
in alkaline carbonates. The water from the deep bore at
Warbreccan is high in total solids, while that from Bimerah
No. 3 is said to be “‘highly mineralised.”’
Around Chinchilla and Dalby the content both of car-
bonate and chloride of sodium is very high, and similar
conditions are found away out in the Basin to beyond St.
George. Low chlorine values exist about Moree, and the
common salt content falls to 5 grains around Ooonamble,
the proportion of sodic carbonate ranging from 30 to 45
grains. It is close to Coonamble, and more especially on
its south-western side, where the purest waters have been
brought to the surface, often with only 2 grains of chlorides
and 20 to 30 of alkaline carbonates; yet isolated within
this region of “fresh water’ is a small tract with about
9 and 40-45 grains respectively. Furthermore, cut off
on the north, east and south by moderately saline water,
extends a great tract between Ounnamulla and Thargo-
mindah with a chlorine content of under 5 grains per gallon.
South of the route from Bourke to Milparinka and prob-
ably continuous westwards into South Australia, there
164 ALEX. L. DU ‘TOIT.
stretches a belt of water with over 20 grains of common
salt, becoming very saline indeed along the southern margin
of the Basin, well seen for example between Hergott and
Oodnadatta.
It is surprising indeed to find that, after travelling under-
ground through sediments, a distance of almost 600 miles,
as one has to suppose, the bore waters at Goyder’s Lagoon
and Mungeranie in South Australia, actually possess only
8°2 and 9°7 grains of NaCl respectively, a fact that is all
the more remarkable, considering the extremely high tem-
peratures and pressures prevailing in the depths of the
reservoir hereabouts. That the hot but very dilute alkaline
solutions have reacted toa limited extent upon the quartz
and silicates, is nevertheless proved by the return of from
1 to over 3 grains of silicic acid and soluble silicates in the
analyses of waters from some of the bores and hot springs.
Sulphates as a rule are either absent or present in very
small amount, and this is worth remembering when com-
parisons are being made with artesian waters from other
parts of the world, e.g,, Texas, Wisconsin and Iowa. In
the Coonamble district sulphates are pretty well confined
to an area within which corrosion of casing is rife; they
are also found in Queensland at Roma (Govt.), Afton Downs
and Murweh, but are in much larger quantity along the
shallowing margin in South Australia in some bores and
certain springs, e.g., Catt’s and Sulphur Springs (I. p. 191;
II. p. 268). The presence of sulphate of magnesium along
with that of sodium points to the marine Cretaceous beds
as their probable source, although, from the fact that the
sulphate waters may be low in sodic carbonate and often
contain free carbon dioxide, it is possible that part of the
sulphate may have arisen through the oxidation of sulphide
of iron, nodules of which are known to occur in the strata
of that quarter of the Basin; yet it seems very unlikely,
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 165
that any of the oxygen originally dissolved could have
escaped being used up long ere the waters reached this
point.
The sodic carbonate over the Basin generally ranges |
between 20 and 60 grains per gallon, and with the excep-
tion of Eromanga No. 2 (121 grs.) and Normanton (160 grs.)
the high values are all along its intake edge, e.g., Barcal-
dine and Blackall (64—70), Dalby (67), Baroma (67),
Tunderbrine No. 1 (125), and the bed-rock bore at
Narrabri (671).
Suggestive indeed is the occurrence of waters of this
class, both along the outer edge of the Basin—the Ballimore
bore, east of Dubbo (196 alkaline bicarbonates) the Helidon
Spa below Toowoomba (212 sodic carbonate, 3 sodic chloride)
—or further afield, as at Maria Creek on the Central Rail-
way (576 grains) with pulsations of carbon dioxide, and
several hot springs north-east of Hughenden between
Georgetown and Chillagoe, to be cited later.
Obviously the carbonates could only have been formed
by the prolonged action upon soda-bearing minerals of
- carbon dioxide—of which the artesian waters contain on
an average about 40 grains to the gallon (in the combined
form).
Cummings, it may be noted, has given reasons for ascrib-
ing the sodic carbonate waters in the limestones of Montreal
to the numerous bostonite dykes which are often directly
associated with the supplies. Suess has discussed the
hypogene nature of the mineral waters with free OO, along
the borders of the Erzebirge, while Parkinson’ has con-
sidered the soda deposits of Lake Magadi in B. B. Africa,
as having been formed by the hot springs rising through
the alkaline lavas, the water being regarded as of plutonic —
origin.
" Journ. Roy. Geol. Soc., vol. 44, p. 38, 1914.
166 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
Illuminating are Gautier’s! experiments in which he
obtained a solution containing silicate of soda (with a trace
of borate it should be noted) by digesting powdered granite
in warm water, while at the same time only a minute trace
of the potash of the felspars was dissolved; in the presence
of CO, at relatively low temperatures the sodic silicate was
converted into carbonate. Long ago Daubrée had dis-
coved that soluble compounds could be obtained by merely
grinding felspar in ‘water, and that this action was assisted
by CO, but inhibited by NaCl.
The production of the sodic carbonate by the carbonation
of felspars is thus quite feasible, and it remains therefore
to investigate the circumstances under which such changes
could have taken place.
The analyses’ of typical intake sandstones prove these
rocks to be rather poor in alkalies and alkaline earths, and
to have the percentage of soda almost universally lower
than that of potash. Since they, as well as the artesian
sandstones cut in the bores, are all more or less kaolinic in
character, and must have carried a fair amount of felspar
originally, it is only reasonable to conclude that they had
yielded up a certain proportion of their soda to the waters
percolating through them. On the other hand it is most
essential to observe the location along the eastern side of
the basin of nearly all the highly alkaline waters, and that
such are often high in chlorine also.
The great quantity of carbon dioxide present, far higher
even than in the “‘highly carbonated”’ waters of Iowa for
example, seems out of all proportion to the amount that
would be derived from the atmosphere under any but the
most abnormal of circumstances (see next section), and
1 La Genése des eaux thermales. Annales des Mines, Ix, p. 316, 1906.
2? H. F. Pittman, Problems, etc., p. 15, 1908; The Composition and
Porosity of the Intake Beds, etc., p. 9, 1915.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 167
partly for this, but for other reasons as well, it would seem
not unlikely that from deep-seated sources have been con-
tributed waters charged with carbonic acid and also sodic
carbonate.
Gregory has laid stress upon the presence of small
amounts of boric acid in quite a large proportion of the
New South Wales waters, and this substance is probably
more widely spread, only it has not been looked for. He
has regarded this radicle as pointing towards a magmatic
origin for the water, and certainly Pittman’s contention,
that its presence is not peculiar, because borates would be
contained in salts derived from sea-water by evaporation,
is ineffective, because the Jurassic beds are admittedly of
fresh-water origin, a conclusion supported by the scarcity
of such compounds as sulphates, chlorides and bromides of
magnesium. In citing F. W. Clarke on the marine origin
of the borates at Stassfurt, Pittman should also have quoted
this authority’s conclusion, that in a large number of
instances boric acid is undoubtedly directly of volcanic
origin; Clarke has also noticed that in such cases there is
the frequent accompaniment of ammonia. Without wishing
to attach undue weight to the presence of this base, which
would naturally be in very small quantity, it ought not to
be overlooked that a good number of Queensland and a few
New South Wales bores have free, as distinguished from
albuminoid ammonia, in noticeable amounts, for instance
Normanton and Dillahlah No. 2.
VI. The Gases Contained in the Waters and their Origin.
Of the gases evolved from bores—methane, nitrogen,
carbon dioxide, and occasionally a little oxygen—the first
mentioned has been observed in a few cases, e.g., Thurloo,
Yowie, Baroma and Currumbah in New South Wales, in
Coonanna and Yandama in South Australia, but it is in
Queensland that inflammable gas is most frequent, e.g.,
168 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
Tara No. 3, Eromanga Nos. 1 and 2, Portland Downs,
Ruthven Downs, Dagworth, and particularly Roma. Indeed
evidence has been led to show that it is commonly tapped
just before the water is struck.
The fact, as already noted, that carbonaceous matter is —
not unusual, and that coal seams have been intersected in
quite a number of bores in this State, generally above the
water, would explain the presence of methane; the huge
evolution at Roma in the Mineral Company’s well came
from an horizon far below the water-bearing zone, and
from its composition has been surmised as not improbabl y
originating from an oil-sand.’
As regards the nitrogen, Symmonds’ analyses show that
it most frequently forms the sole constituent of the gas
evolved in New South Wales; though not reported from
the other States, it is doubtless represented there as well,
for its presence would easily be overlooked. David,’ though
realising the high temperatures involved, suggests the
derivation of the nitrogen by the action of anzrobic bacteria
on organic matter, such as lignite or coal.
The nitrogen discharged from the bores of the Kharga
Oasis in Hgypt has been considered by Beadnell® to be
mainly of atmospheric origin, on account of the presence
of a small amount of argon. The New South Wales cases
have been regarded by Pittman and Fawsitt as analogous
to the Egyptian, but their argument is inconclusive, when
it is realised that in Gautier’s experiments, to be cited
below, argon accompanied the nitrogen in proportion of
from 1/40th to 1/110th, along witha little helium at times.
Moreover, there are many hot and deep seated springs from
which N, Ar and He are being evolved, that have been
1 Queensland Geol. Surv. Pub., 247, 1915.
2 T. W. E. David, Handbook for Australia, B.A.A.S., p. 281, 1914.
3 H. J. L. Beadnell, The Cairo Scientific Journal, No. 52, v, Jan. 1911.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 169
regarded as being fed with “‘ juvenile waters,’ for instance
in the Pyrenees, Aix-la-Chapelle, Plombieres, Vichy and
Maiziéeres; indeed the element helium, which is charac-
teristic of many thermal springs, has been pretty generally
taken to indicate a plutonic source of supply.
On the other hand, quite curious indeed is the discovery
that the natural inflammable gas from the Upper Oarboni-
ferous gas-field of south-eastern Kansas,* contains with
_ hardly an exception, some nitrogen and helium. The
amount of the latter element is roughly proportional to the
former, and an example from Dexter consisted of CH.
14°857, N 82°707%, and He 1°84%. In North Dakota’ a huge
blower of nearly pure nitrogen was struck in a shallow
gas-field.
It would be of extreme scientific interest if complete
analyses of the gases from the Great Basin could be made,
including some taken from different levels in the same bore;
from analogy the discovery of argon, helium and neon
would seem not at all unlikely.
Free carbon dioxide characterises the waters in the
Coonamble district of New South Wales, and has been inci-
dentally noticed in Queensland as well, e.g., Bando (Govt.),
the Mount Browne Springs on the Flinders and the shallow
bore on the Central Railway in the small Jurassic basin of
Stanwell near Rockhampton.
The gas would readily be overlooked in the presence of
methane or nitrogen, while under other circumstances its
existence might remain unsuspected owing to its solubility;
even at the high temperatures prevalent, a water could
retain from 3/4ths to 1/6th of its volume of the gas at
atmospheric pressure.
* U.S.A. Geol. Surv. Mineral Resources, 1913, 1463.
? U.S.A. Geol. Surv. Mineral Resources; 1908, 11, p. 343.
170 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
How large is the amount of carbon dioxide held com-
bined is perhaps not fully realised. While the Oa and Mg
salts are in the bi-carbonate form, that of Na is either
normal or acid; from statements made by Mingaye and
Symmonds it appears that in New South Wales at least,
the bi-carbonate state is either closely or fully attained.
Taking the general analysis of the waters, the combined
CO, per gallon would range from a minimum of nearly 20
grains to a maximum of about 80, and the average water
may be reckoned to carry about 40 grains, or nearly three
tons per million gallons. When comparisons are made with
river, ground or artesian water of undoubted meteoric
origin, it will be found firstly, that carbonates are rarely
present in such high proportions, or, if so, ona large scale,
and secondly, that, when they do occur, they consist almost
entirely of those of Ca and Mg, and that sodic chloride is
invariably present in relatively high amount and frequently
sulphates also.
As to the quantity of CO, that could be derived from the
organic matter in the rocks through the action of free
oxygen of atmospheric origin dissolved in the entering
water, it can readily be shown from the known solubility
of the latter gas, that, under the conditions obtaining over
the intake area, this would amount to not more than from
4 to 5 grains per gallon at the most. That a little oxygen
may be left unused in the process is shown by the rare
occurrence of this element in a few of the bores in the
Coonamble district. |
Of considerable importance is the fact shown by Fawsitt
and Symmonds, that in New South Wales—and_ probably
this will be the case elsewhere—free CO, is confined to the
lower levels of such bores as contain it, and this, as Sym-
monds has logically argued, points strongly to a subter-
ranean source for some of the gas at least.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 174
The general coincidence of the area of corrosion of bore-
easing with that in which thé waters carry free OO. (and
O) is now well known, and it is therefore highly suggestive
to find that the bores in which such destructive action is
taking place are arranged upon a long arc stretching from
Saxby Downs in Queensland, through Hughenden, Aramac,
Charleville, Cunnamulla, to Coonamble in New South Wales;
at either end corrosion is particularly active. Although
only a small proportion of the bores along this line are
affected, fresh cases are now coming to light, while it must
be remembered that about Coonamble several of the bores
were not troubled in this way until after deepening; also
at Saxby Downs the deeper flows are corrosive.
Still mere depth alone along this arc, does not necessarily
imply corrosive action, and the suggestion is thrown out of
a concealed fracture in the artesian basement through
which CO; has been, and perhaps is still being contributed
at points along its length. At the head of the Flinders
River to the north of Hughenden, the artesian beds are
thrown down against the schists by a “‘pre-basalt’’ fault,
striking south-east, so that the tectonic assumption made
is not without warrant.
The work of Gautier’ has shown that considerable
volumes of gases can be obtained by the dry heating of
granite and other igneous rocks, comprising in their order
of abundance H, CO,, CO, CH,, NH:, N and sometimes
traces of H.S, similar in fact to those evolved during the
eruptions of Mount Pelée and Santorin; the N is accom-
panied by Ar. Suess has pointed out that in the case of
gaseous emanations the evolution of chlorine comes to an
end first, and that the CO. continues its escape longest.
Water in the form of vapour would be driven out of rocks -
1 A. Gautier, Genesis of Thermal Waters, Econ. Geology Vol. 1, p. 688,
1906. ; .
172 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
by a sufficient rise in temperature and CO. would be
evolved by the silication of limestones under the influence
of igneous sills and batholithic intrusions.
Since, as will be shown later, there is strong evidence
that large basic or sub-basic masses were injected in Ter-
tiary times into the crust beneath the eastern part of the
Australian Continent, a likely source from which the balance
of the CO, and N over that derivable from the pene
is at once provided.
VII. The Rising of the Waters under Pressure.
Five main causes may act separately or in conjunction
to produce the flows from the Basin, the third of which has
not been considered worthy of citation hitherto:—
(1) Gas Pressure.
(2) Rock Pressure.
(3) Contrasts in density due to temperature differences.
(4) Hydraulic Pressure.
(5) Thermal Sub-surface Springs.
(1) Gas Pressure.—The influence of bubbles of gas in
raising the water to the surface has been considered an
important one by both Gregory and Symmonds, but this has
not been conceded by the Interstate Conference, although
the principle involved received recognition in their second
report (II, p. 16).
The effect is directly calculable, and the results obtained
for different conditions are submitted in Appendix A, from
which it will be seen that the influence may be indeed con-
siderable, though the circumstances in Australia do not
appear to be such as to make it an important contributor
towards outflow as far as we know, except in some isolated |
cases.
The problem is a variant of that involved in the air-lift
pump (see Gibson, Hydraulics and its Application, London,
PROBLEM OF THK GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 173.
p. 671, etc.). Let v=velocity of flow produced by gas rising
freely from the bottom of a bore in which water would
stand normally flush with the top of the casing, a=ratio
““volume of gas at atmospheric pressure to volume of water
issuing at surface owing to levitation of the column,’’ d=
diameter of bore in feet, h=depth of bore in feet, and f=
constant for frictional resistance, which in the case of fairly
clean wrought-iron or steel pipe may be taken as °00575.
From Table A 1, it is seen that even an extremely small
amount of gas can give quite an appreciable flow, a 1/100th/
of gas in a 6-inch bore 1000 feet deep, inducing a yield of
13,300 gallons per day; the total volume of gas set free in
that time will be only 2°1 cubic feet. 3
A marked instance of a shallow bore—in which this effect.
would be most pronounced and recognisable—is Fort Con-
stantine No. 1, Queensland, 620 feet to the water-bearing
beds (1 § 269), giving off 40 cubic feet of methane per day.
This quantity would account for 74,000 gallons out of a
total of 111,620, or two-thirds of the actual flow. A special
example is Westlands No. 2, Queensland, with the water-
bearing beds at about 3,300 feet in depth; the gas set free,,
40 cb. ft. per hour, is enough to give an outflow of 163,800:
gallons, whereas the actual flow is only about 30,000. In
view of the high static pressure (42—80 Ibs.) the supply
below must be restricted.
Considering some actual cases in New South Wales as.
given by Symmonds, the effects in Wangrawally, Polly
Brewon No. 2, Kensington, Walgett and Wapweelah No. 4.
- are negligible. In Yarraldool only 20,000 gallons per day
and in Wirrah, Four Posts and New Yarrawa from 100,000:
to 150,000 can be accounted for out of over a million. The
only one in which gas can play an important part is Pera.
No. 1, where its effect (as based upon a statement of Sym-.
monds) can be estimated roughly at one-sixth of the yield..
174 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
There are a number of bores from which large volumes
of gas have been evolved, e.g., Dagworth, Tara No. 3 and
Roma in Queensland, more especially that of the Mineral
Oil Company, but in those at Roma, owing to the fact that
the water and gas were brought to the surface separately,
the effect of the latter upon the flow, and especially the
consequence of the failure of the evolution cannot be
determined. |
This is unfortunate, because there is no doubt that even
moderate volumes of gas are capable of raising large quan-
tities of water and of thereby inducing static pressures of
considerable magnitude. This is shown by Table A. 2, cal-
culated from a more complicated formula derived from the
one given before; the higher figures are rather uncertain.
As it happens, these tabulated values represent only the
effect of gas rising freely in the bore, the supply of water
at the bottom being assumed unlimited in amount, though
under such pressure only as otherwise to stand in the pipe
at the surface level of the orifice. If, as generally happens,
the water and gas at the bottom are under a pressure
greater than that simply due to the height of the column
in the bore, this additional pressure will have to be added
to that induced, given in the table.
Hence it can be deduced that discharges of gas at the
rate of one or more cubic feet per second, are fully com-
petent to account for many of the flows found in the Basin,
jt would be interesting, therefore, to have more observa-
tions made upon the proportion of gas to water in various
bores, as it is a common accompaniment. Any evidence
bearing upon the variation in yield of the water in relation
to the increase or diminution of gas would be welcome, for
upon this point little can be gathered.
Tara No. 3, Queensland, evolved a considerable amount
of inflammable gas, but the water-level ultimately sank
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 175
below the top of the casing. Is gas still being evolved, and,
if so, is it in lesser volume? Without a number of careful
observations on this point, there would always be doubt
whether the gas was falling off owing to reduction in the
flow of the water or vice versa.
Irregularities of flow due to outbursts of gas have been
noted in a few bores in Queensland, e.g., Congoola Lease,
Westlands No. 1, and Maria Creek, the latter being outside
the Basin though. |
(2) Rock Pressure.—Gregory? has claimed rock pres-
sure as an agent in artesian flow, a point disputed entirely
by Pittman.
With a stratum of coherent sandstone it is obvious that
only when the pore-spaces suffer reduction in volume by
some external or internal action, could additional com-
pression be exerted upon their water content. This might
be brought about by (a) earth movements, involving a
reduction in pore-space, (b) shaking of the grains into
positions involving closer packing, and (c) solution of the
matrix and crumbling of the rock. Of these, (a) is zero,
owing to absence of lateral compression since the Basin
was filled, (b) may have been brought about by seismic
shocks—(note King’s? remarks anent the level of a well
affected by the passing of a train)—and (c) may quite likely
be due to the action of the hot alkaline waters upon the
felspar grains and clayey matrix of the sandstones; observe
that the waters in South Australia may carry solub'e
silicates, while the quartz grains of the beds in the Goyder’s
Lagoon bore have been slightly corroded.
In this way a cellular porous rock could be formed that
would squeeze down slightly under the weight of the cover,
+ Journ. Roy. Geogr. Soc., vol. 38, p. 175, 1911; Economic Geology, vol.
9, p. 768, 1914.
? U.S.G.S. 19th Ann. Rept., pt. 11, p. 278, 1898.
7
Ss
7
{
176 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
so that considerable pressures could be brought to bear
upon the enclosed water. | |
It must be clearly pointed out, however, that this state
of affairs would bea purely local and impermanent feature;
the superinduced pressure would force the water laterally
into regions of lower potential, but, in view of the slow
rates of motion as we shall see, it is quite likely that a
state of abnormally high potential might prevail over a
certain tract until such time as relief would have been
afforded by diffusion. This would be indicated on the Iso-
potential Map by the lowering of inclination or reversal in
the slope of the potential surface over the centre of the
limited region affected.
There are several localities within the Basin where such
irregularities obtain, and it is noteworthy that immediately
to the north-east of Kynuna, the bore specially instanced
by Gregory, there lies a region of large flow and presumably
of high potential. On the other hand the fact that success-
ive supplies met with in bores almost invariably rise to
correspondingly increasing heights is capable of explanation
otherwise, either as being due to independent water-hori-
zons, having different potentials by virtue of different
heights of intake, or equally well as irregularly bedded
deposits fed through upward leakage from a single stratum
near the base of the artesian series. With the latter con-
ception a rapid rise in temperature might be expected in
going from the shallower to the deeper waters; this, as a
matter of fact is particularly well marked at Kynuna,
where the gradient near the bottom is about 1° F. in 10 feet.
These are all points worthy of further investigation;
chemical analyses would be of additional assistance without
doubt.
(3) Contrasts in density due to temperature differences.
—For general purposes, the density of the waters has been
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 177
taken as unity, without introducing any notable errors into
calculations. The ranges of temperature are so consider-
able, however, and the depths of the bores frequently so
great, that it is worth while computing the amount by
which the potential would be raised by reason of the con-
trast between the cooler water near the intake, and the
warmer and lighter column in a bore several hundred miles
further out.
Consider, therefore, a case in which water enters at 75°
F., and descends to a depth of 4,500 feet, by that means
acquiring a temperature of 200° F. Its density will gradu-
ally and nearly uniformly be reduced from 0°99732 to 0°9620,
and its mean density will therefore be 0°97966. From this
it can be shown that the static head of a bore 4,500 feet
will have been raised by temperature alone no less than 80
feet. The effect due to salinity may be neglected.
The result will help to explain the rather high potentials
to be found over the western end of the Basin in South
Australia. Boring in the deep part of the Basin beyond
Bimerah will be looked forward to with interest in this
connection.
The suggestion made by Dr. Jack and Capt. Gipps that
tangible increases in pressure would be brought about by
actual expansion in volume due to rise in temperature
suffers from the same limitations as that derived through
rock pressure, as pointed out by Mr. G. H. Knibbs.
(4) Hydraulic Pressure.—That the principal cause of
pressure is the greater altitude of the water-table on the
eastern margin of the Basin, cannot be denied in view of the
abundant and convincing data in support thereof, though
opinion may differ as to the way in which this head has
been developed.
It should be pointed out at this juncture that in the
compilation of an isopotential map, one is confronted by a
number of difficulties.
L—July 4, 1917.
|
° +
.
178 - ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
_ Firstly, it is clear that in almost every case the pressure
of the supply has increased with depth until the impervious
floor has been reached. In New South Wales a great:pro-
portion of the bores bave been sunk to bed-rock, but in the
other States, this is the exception, and for this reason the
figures for the static pressures cannot, and do not, represent
the truth, though in many cases no doubt they are certainly
but little lower.
~ Secondly, the serious leakage brought about by closing
down bores, has prevented the taking of further periodical
gaugings satisfactorily in a number of cases.
Thirdly, many private bores have never been tested,
either through lack of opportunity, or because of the risk
involved. Some idea, however, can be gathered as to their
static pressures, from their yield in relation to their depth
and diameter of casing. The friction developed during the
flow represents a loss of head that is very considerable in
the deeper holes, as shown by Table B, and by its means a
minimum value for the static head can be obtained; the
latter will exceed this by an amount depending on the
porosity of, and depth into the water-bearing beds as will
be discussed later on,
' Fourthly, the presence of gas, as proved already, may
raise the pressure considerably.
Fifthly, the data published in the two Interstate Reports
are frequently incomplete; figures for the pressures are
given that range between two very different values—in
such cases the mean has been taken—while no doubt there
are some inaccuracies. In re-plotting the Coonamble-
Moree area from the data given in the Second Report,
totally different values were often found to those marked
on the Isopotential Map (plates 13 and14). It is not clear,
whether in the preparation of the latter, any pressures not —
in harmony with those of the adjoining bores were ignored
“a
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 179
and the curves smoothed off, but, if so, it should. be em-
phasised that it is of the highest importance that every
apparent discrepancy be fully investigated before -being
rejected, because one of the very few direct indications of
the irruption of magmatic waters below the Basin, will be
afforded by the presence at each such point of an area of
higher potential entirely surrounded by a region of lower.
There are several high potential areas, the isolation of
each of which appears sufficiently well defined, while there
are a number also where the bores are not sufficiently close
together to make it certain that the region of higher
potential is not merely a lobe. |
Sixthly, owing to the rapid fall of pressure that the bores
are showing, there will always be discrepancies between the
static pressures got, solely by reason of the different dates
upon which such measurements had been made.
The Map attached has been compiled almost entirely from
the records in the Report for 1912, and does not therefore
_ profess to give much more than the general direction of the
isopotential curves for about that year; it might be com-
pared with that in the Report of the Hydraulic nil cae
Queensland for 1900, (App. Map A, No. 9).
Like the latter, it proves the existence of the two regions
of exceptionally high potential, the first immediately to the
- east of Hughenden, and the second to the north-east of
Charleville, the hydraulic surface just exceeding 1,450 feet
on the Burenda Lease; it throws out a prolongation or lobe
as far westwards as Thargomindah at least.
From Richmond there is a depression of the hydraulic
surface towards the north-west and the potential falls right
across almost to Oloncurry, where there is a small local
area of high potential, just south of Oorindi railway sta-
tion; this is rather a curious feature, but whether it arises
180 ' ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
from a local intake, or is due to another cause is not clear.
From Kynuna the gradient falls regularly towards the
south-west (corroboration of this has been given by F. J.
Oalvert, II, pp. 175-7), but between Kynuna, Richmond and
Winton, there extends a region that appears to have an
abnormally high potential. Actual pressure readings are
absent, but, from the large flows either measured or esti-
mated on Quambeytook, Sesbania, Albion Downs, Dagworth
Resumption, Hamilton Downs, etc., reduced to pressures
by the aid of Table B, this seems to be a tract possessing
potentials of from 800 to perhaps over 1000 feet; reliable
measurements of pressures over this bit of country would
be very welcome.
A curiosity again is the belt of low potential running
down from the Dividing Range past Muttaburra to Bimerah,
and its extremely low value in that excessively deep bore.
In the S.H. the isopotentials indicate a fall of head towards
the W.S.W. in the Moree district, aud towards the W. and
even a little N.of W. around Coonamble. The static pressure
originally recorded for Munna Munna (117 tbs.) gave a
potential of from 100 to nearly 200 feet higher than the
surrounding bores, a matter of extraordinary interest. A
lesser patch of high potential is found about Trialgara near
by, and a more important one at Goondablui on the State
border. There is a peculiar curving tongue of low potential
extending from Wilby Wilby to Bourke, while between it
and Barringun there stands an isolated tract of high poten-
tial with Lila Springs at its centre. ;
Concerning the central part of the Basin, nothing seems
to be known, but the existence of bores on the extreme
west with potentials well above 500 feet, shows that, if
this remote quarter does not form an out-lying and de-
tached region, then there must be a long narrow tongue
of high potential extending westwards from Thargomindah,
along which the hydraulic gradient will be low.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 181
_ A study of the isopotentials proves in the clearest manner
the present direction of movement of the Artesian water
and also shows that along a considerable length of ‘‘intake’’
on the east, the accession of waters, apart from the two
centres, cannot be much, and again, that beyond a point a
little to the north of Warren, no further feeding of the
water-bearing series is taking place, so that neither from
south ror west are any appreciable supplies being con-
-tributed. The map also indicates, as pointed out by Pitt-
man, the error into which Gregory has fallen, when he
states that the pressures upon the meteoric theory would
be insufficient to bring the water to the surface at the
several places that he specifies.
The evolution of the form and slope of the potential sur-
face is so intimately bound up with the Tertiary history of
the Basin that this will be reserved for discussion in the
later sections.
(5) Sub-surface Springs.—Though certain evidence has
already been presented in Section IV in favour of the above,
the subject will not be pursued further here in view of the
additional remarks to be made later. It will be sufficient
to say that there are grounds for presuming that springs
were or are active in feeding the reservoir from below, and
that the waters they supplied or are supplying, were or are
similar in chemical composition to, and their temperature
either the same or somewhat higher than, those of the
Basin.
VII. The Absorption and Transmission of Water.
(1) Absorption.—One of the principal arguments quoted
in support of the meteoric theory is that the run-off of the
Murray River is much greater than that of the Darling,
though this has been denied by Gregory. For reasons that
will appear later on, the author has to express a doubt
whether this problem, to which appeal is being made, is
182 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
definite enough to enable practical use to be made of it,
though the principle of absorption is not denied.
The figures quoted by Pittman! certainly show that the
respective run-ofis of the two rivers are very different, yeta
closer examination of the data reveals certain discordances.
The twofold table that he presents, supplies figures for the
Darling, both at Wentworth and at Bourke for the years
1895 — 1903, and a comparison of the readings indicates
that there must be large losses in the flow between these
two points (outside the Basin) due to evaporation and
soakage.
Secondly, the catchment of the Darling has a mean annual
temperature of fully 6° F. higher than that of the Murray,
while a relatively larger proportion of it lies within the
region of lower rainfall, where presumably the mean
humidity is less. Until the relative value of each of these
factors can be more correctly gauged, the lower discharge
of the Darling ought not to be presumed as wholly or even
in part due to the absorption of head-water run-off by the
intake beds.
Certainly the reasoning of Mr. L. A. B. Wade “that the
losses by evaporation, absorption and other causes on the
Darling catchment, exceed by more than three and a half
times the losses on the Mildura (Murray) catchment” is
fallacious. Actually the annual ‘total loss” on the Darling
for the period 1891—1911 is 20°56 inches of rainfall (22°66
—2°1) out of 22°66 or 91%, that of the Murray similarly is
647%; their ratio is therefore 13} to 1 nearly, but how far
this inequality may be due primarily to absorption and not.
to evaporation is still left undecided.
That the rainfall could be rapidly absorbed by the porous
sandstones with their overlying sandy soils along the eastern
1 E. F. Pittman, The Great Australian Artesian Basin, pp. 8- 12, 1914.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 183
margin of the Basin cannot be doubted, for Jack has given
a list of large water-courses in Queensland that lose water
rapidly in their channels—to this Gregory’s criticism no
longer applies, as the strata over which they flow are
probably all Jurassic and not Cretaceous—, Gibb Maitland
has cited the Oambridge River, a tributary of the-Flinders
(I. §§ 116-8), while there is also the section of the Mac-
quar ie just below Dubbo.
: Altogether, recollecting that the mean jinn rainfall
on the Main Dividing Range ranges from 22 to 30 inches
along its length, there should be no reluctance in acknow-
ledging the correctness of the view generally held, that
meteoric water must be making its way at the present |
time below the Rolling Downs Series and thus feeding the
reservoir.
- (2) Transmission of Water.—Pittman having admitted
Gregory’s contention that the Blythesdale Braystones will
not be porous enough to transmit large enough volumes of
water underground, it now remains to submit the Jurassic
sandstones toa critical examination as to ane capabilities
in this direction.
Pittman’s determination of their average porosity as
equalling 25% may even be accepted without demur, with
the proviso that some of the sandstones of the lower zones
in the east are not unlikel y to be a good deal more compact.
in view of the fact, however, that the water-bearing beds
are in depth often very friable and in the state termed
‘“‘sand rock,” the higher figure of 30% has been adopted in
the following calculations, as to the rate at which water
will be transmitted under definite heads.
Through the kindness of Messrs. B. Dunstan, L. K. Ward
and R, I. Jenkins, I have been enabled to examine hand-
specimens of typical intake sandstones as well as drillings
from a number of bores in each of the States.
4
‘
FT
.
*
184 _ ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
A microscopical examination of the material indicated:—
1. That the water is found equally in very fine and in
moderately coarse grained sandstones.
2. That the fine sandstones are rather even in texture,
the mean diameter of the particles ranging from
0°15 to 0°2 millimetres.
3. That in the coarser sandstones, though there are
grains up to 1 or 2 mm. in diameter, or even more,
their relative proportion is low, the bulk of the
rocks being composed of grains ranging from 0°2
to 0°4 mm. in size, while there are many smaller
particles that help to fill up the larger pores, and
hence bring down the average diameter appreci-
ably.
_ Altogether, considering both fine and coarse varieties,
the mean effective size of.particles may be taken to possess
a diameter of from 0°2 to 0°3 mm., especially if one takes
into account that the grains are never well rounded, that
there are always smaller angular fragments present, and
that the particles are bound together by a certain, though
perhaps sometimes negligible, amount of rather incoherent
kaolinic cement.
: The following formula for the transmission of water
through a bed of sandstone is borrowed from Slichter:
pd’ s |
"96 -hB (1—m).
where q equals. the volume of water in cubic feet per
minute, flowing through s square feet of sandstone of
porosity m,and effective diameter of grain d(in millimetres),
under a head of p fect of water through a horizontal dis-
tance of h feet; Brepresentsa variable dependent 1 the
closeness of packing of the grains.
q=
1 ¢C. S. Slichter, U.S. Geol. Surv., 19th Ann. Rept. pt. 11, p. 322, 1899.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 185
The flow, it will be observed, is inversely proportional to
the viscosity », and, since the latter varies from ‘0080 at
86° F. to 0032 at 194° F., full allowance has to be made
for this factor, in view of the high temperatures so uni-
versally met with. | ,
From this formula the following table has been computed,
to show the effective rate of flow per square foot of rock
in feet per annum, under a difference of head of one foot
per mile, for sandstones of different mean average diameter
of grain, assuming a porosity of 30%. The ‘effective
velocity”’’ is not the actual speed of the water in the capil-
lary passages, but the more convenient quotient of q by s,
and with a constant hydraulic gradient is independent of
the horizontal distance involved. |
Diameter of Grain. 86° F. 1049 F. | 140° F. | 194° F. a2
20a. 1-90 2:3] 3-03 Piette
0:25 mm. . 2-98 3-61 5:07 7-45 | S
0-30 mm. 4°29 5:20 130) aol0-43 8
0-35 mm. 5:84 7:07 9-93 14:60 =
0-40 mm. 7-60 Domenie, 19:04 *|} &
Even allowing values several times these for the aug-
menting effect of joints and bedding planes, as shown by
King’s application of Slichter’s formula, and reckoning a
fall of potential of four to five feet per mile (such as is just
attained along the margin of the Basin, more especially
about Hughenden), it will be seen that the rate of flow
may rise to 100 or 150 feet per annum at the most.
This value would probably be maintained in the deeper
parts of the reservoir, for the effect of the lower hydraulic
gradient would be compensated for by the diminished
viscosity; moreover actual boring operations have fre-
quently proved the artesian beds to include some rather
incoherent ‘‘sandrock.”’
From these figures: there follow two conclusions of the
highest importance :—
186 ALEX. L. DU TOIT. =
Firstly, that none of the present rainfall over the intake
will become available within the Basin, even along its
margin, till after the lapse of centuries, and
_ Secondly, that, unless the underground supplies are being
augmented by magmatic waters, only the stock at present
within the reservoir can be drawn upon.
Consequently, since renewal of the reservoir ciel
purely meteoric contributions may not be counted upon in
the near future, it behoves us to investigate more fully the
alternative factor; this will be done later on.
That the permeability of the water-horizons must vary
greatly from point to point will be inevitable, from the
mode of deposition of the Jurassic sediments, but this
property can be demonstrated in a more tangible way by
an analysis of the frictional losses in bores during their
discharge. The resistance to flow through the bore-casing
may be very considerable, as shown by Table B, computed
for clean wrought-iron or mild-steel pipes of five and six
inches internal diameter. The co-efficient of friction has
been taken as 0°00575, but, from’ Osborne Reynold’s work
on the effects of temperature upon flow, it is clear that the
co-efficient should be smaller, except when the casing is
rough and encrusted. |
‘Having worked out a number of cases with the aid of his
formula, it seems to me that for the majority of bores with
temperatures ranging from 100° F. to 150° F. the values
given in the table ought to be multiplied by about 0°9 and
0°8 respectively.
Since the frictional losses vary inversely as the fifth
power of the diameter (for 5 and 6 inch casing as 2°49: 1),
it might be worthy of consideration whether some of the
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 187
excessive flows could not be throttled by finishing the last
few hundred feet with a smaller bit, and employing at the
same time a smaller-sized and less costly string of deep
casing.
The calculated casing losses are lower than the static
pressures by amounts representing those due to friction in
the pores of the sandstone forming the bore-walls, for the
velocity in the capillaries increases progressively on
approaching the borehole.
When, after eliminating the loss in head due to the casing,
the residuals are compared, the great differences even in
bores possessing similar depths and yields become apparent,
and in this direction there is scope for considerable invest-
igation. Examining only a few instances, we find in the
deeper bores of New South Wales high values in comparison
with their outputs in Finger Post, Goondablui No. 4, and
- Mullawa, and the reverse eu in Boomi, EKuraba,
Coubal and Tyreel. “eas
Among Queensland bores an interesting point is the high
static pressure of many of the shallow wells regarded from
this standpoint, e.g., on the Corinda Leases, Manfred
Downs, Saxby Downs, Warenda Lease and the deep Ero-
manga bore. -
Slichter’s formula for the yield of a wellis unsatisfactory
to apply, in that the most important quantity—the limiting
distance of interference of wells—is given the arbitrary
value 600 feet, this being undoubtedly too low. Itisclear
anyway that the “permeability” of the strata vary much
from point to point.
In order to determine whether this variation takes place
according to any definite or orderly plan, the assumption
was tentatively made that the porosity of the strata does
not change abruptly from point to point, but in a gradual
manner. The volume of water passing across a unit strip
of vertical plane through the Basin would then be propor-
tional jointly to the thickness of the water-bearing beds
and the hydraulic gradient at that point. Over the eastern
part of New South Wales, using the latest published maps
of the isopotentials, there were plotted firstly the hydraulic
gradients represented by the reciprocals of the distances
between adjoining contours, and secondly the resistance
to flow which was reckoned as being inversely proportional
to the thickness of the water-bearing beds. Lines of equal
value, that will be referred to as A and B respectively,
were drawn for each of these sets of quantities.
188 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
The following relationships emerged:—(a) along the rim
of the Basin high values of A accompanied high values of
B, (b) low values of A generally coincided with low values
of B, (c) but elsewhere there was a marked discordance,
and this was especially noticeable just north of Warren, at
Kiameron, at Wingadee No. 4, and over a belt extending
N., W. and S.W. of Carinda.
(3) Interference of Bores.—The actually observed cases
of direct interference of bores are few in number. Oldham
(II, p. 30) records a conspicuous case at Fremantle in
West Australia, where the wells were about a quarter of a
mile apart: in this instance there was an actual flow from
one into the other. Jenkins (I, §1030) cites an instance in
the Coonamble district, where the distance was about three
miles. Here, however, the effect observed must have been
solely that brought about by the hydro-dynamic impulse
propagated through the water-filled beds, an action that
with distance would be delayed and finally damped out,
especially in the presence of small amounts of gas. There
could have been no immediate bodily transference of water
from the one hole to the other, as the rate of movement
underground, as shown earlier, would have been quite low
even under the increased gradients developed through
closing or opening one of the bores.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 189
There have been instances again in which new bores have
caused either a diminution or cessation in yield in one or
more of the adjoining wells, as about Longreach (II, §§
2135 — 2147) and Saxby Downs (LI, §2807).
An approximate solution of the interesting and practical
problem of the limiting radius of interference of a group
of bores can be obtained in the following way.
Firstly, assume that the wells are arranged at equal
distances R apart, in a chain parallel to the isopotentials,
and that the effective velocity of the underground flow is v,
and the thickness of the water-bearing beds t. Slichter’
taking the case of a stratum in which there is a regular
flow in one direction, has worked out the plan of the lines
of stream-flow when water is being removed by a single
well, and it will be observed on examining his graphic pres-
entation, that all the water is being drawn from between
two limiting lines of flow which are at first parallel, and
then converge, and close upon and around the bore; the
water further to right and left escapes. The captured
portion may be considered as entering with the normal
velocity v upon an arc of radius r and centre a little beyond
the bore, within which its speed increases rapidly, and it
will be found that this sector subtends an angle of about
120°, and that 7 will about equal R/2.
The water withdrawn by the bore crosses a sector of a
cylinder 7 x * along the length of arc and t in height;
let this equal Q.
Then Q = =F Rtv.
If Q = 1,000,000 gallons per day, t = 300 feet, and v =
150 feet per annum or about 0°4 feet per day, then R =
1,273 feet or almost one-third of a mile.
1 OS. Slichter, U.S.A. Geol. Surv. 19th Ann. Rept., pt. li, pl. 17, 1899.
190. MICAS _ ALEX. L. DU-TOIT.
Hence, if the bores be this distance apart, they will
capture the whole of the underflow. If there be 1 rows of
holes uniformly spaced and geometrically grrr: to the
best advantage, then they will have to be a miles apart
in order that each one’s yield of a million gallons daily
might be maintained; if they cover a belt b miles in width,
their distance apart R’ will have to be = V 3b miles.
Hence, if b = 75 miles, &’ = 15 miles, and if b = 300
miles, 7’ = 30 miles.
Of course, owing to the time taken for water to travel
from one bore to the next, some years would have to elapse
before interference would first become apparent.
In order to obtain some idea as to the actual rates of
abstraction of water from the Basin, two areas A and B,
each of 3,250 square miles in extent, were selected N.W.
and §.W. respectively, of Moree, and such that, as far as
possible (as indicated by the isopotentials), all the water
reaching B should first have to pass through A. The
results are displaye:l below :—
raenlvichide Ping = Average Mean pe io er in
umber 0 ean dis- P ence 0 millions of gallons
| Area, bore in tance apart pena ee pee in per day.
9 in miles. in edt. cee eee
. mile. 1912 1914
A 25 96) 3470 450 Dl. 18°5 | 16°6
B 36 9°5 2435 300 2-0 8°95 6°9
Assuming, aS we have done before, a nearly constant
permeability, the flows “across equivalent breadths of
country would be proportional both to the thickness of the
water horizon and the hydraulic gradient, and the relative
total yields might be expected to be roughly in the pro-
. 450 - 2°7
{ 2. Xa
portion o 300 x a9 OF ais i.
Actually in 1912 the ratio of A to B was 2°23 to1, though
two years later it was 2°4:15; nevertheless, since it can be
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 191
shown that the falling off of B would have been much higher
had A been overdrawing the supply, one must conclude
that interference is not yet marked, and that the falling
off in yield is due rather to a universal lowering of potential
over the region. : ass)
Calculations based on underground velocities of 4 and 6
inches per day, give the volume passing into A as between
30 and 40 millions daily, and that into B as from 16 to 20;
although only approximations, these figures serve to give
a general idea of the magnitude of the quantities involved,
and fit well with the conclusion stated above. Upon tabu-
lating the results within a square degree of country around
Blackall in Queensland, similar conclusions were reached.
That the lowering of head is general rather than local is
indicated by the fact, that the hydraulic gradient calculated
from bores now sub-artesian but originally flowing, may
correspond exactly with that obtained from the still flowing
wells, for example at Winton (II, § 246); therefore the
duplication of bores is generally no remedy for loss of head
not due to leakage or obstruction. |
The increases in yield of a few bores, e.g., Neargo and
Collymongle in the Moree district, are in strong contrast
to the almost universal reduction as shown by the records
of the several Hydraulic Departments, and which the Inter-
state Conference has found to be proceeding at a progressive
rate—in New South Wales between 1903-8 at about 53%
per annum, and for 1913-4 at about 8%—thus bearing out
Gregory’s’ contention for the necessity of the restriction
of flows by legislation or otherwise. In view of the import-
ance of the recommendations made by the members of the
Conference,’ it is needless to say more, except to express a
hope that they may be given effect to as soon as possible.
* J. W. Gregory, Journ. Roy. Geogr. Soc., Vol. 38, p. 38, 1911.
2 TI, pp.. xii— xv.
192 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
IX. The early Tertiary History of the Basin.
It seems to have been tacitly assumed that the Basin
has suffered but slight changes during the late Tertiary
and Quaternary Epochs, though Gregory has indeed pointed
out that the crest of the Great Dividing Range must have
been experiencing a gradual westerly shift and diminution
in altitude owing to the headward erosion performed by
the easterly flowing rivers. Since this implies a reduction
of intake area, he reaches the conclusion that the present
absorption from rainfall is probably insufficient to feed the
Basin, though such an action might have been adequate in
the past.
_ Australian geologists appear to favour the view that
there was a complete withdrawal of the sea from over the
limits of the Basin after the deposition of the Desert Sand-
stone. Because of the widespread development of marine
tertiaries in the Murray River, Adelaide and Eucla basins,
and from other considerations, there is just a possibility
that similar beds extended into the heart of the continent, ~
but were subsequently removed by denudation; in this con-
nection the evidence from Western Australia is very sug-
gestive. Certainly, as stated further back, such a history
would help to explain the abnormally high temperature ~
within the Basin.
Modification by warping of the primitive drainage is to
some extent evinced by the relationship of the present
river Systems to the sub-surface contours of the Basin. The
ridging up of the floor at the narrowest part of the hollow
—hbetween A and B—coincides with the water-parting —
between the Flinders and the interior drainage, making
allowance for some capture effected by the former river.
The deep trough south-west of Longreach is coincident
with the courses of the Thomson and the Barcoo rivers, the
watershed between these rivers and the Darling system
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 193
agreeing in position with the underground ridge between
Oharleville and Bourke; coincidence in plan is found even
in the case of the tributaries between Roma and Warren.
Howchin again has pointed out the modifications of the
interior drainage brought about in the south-west by the
ridging up of the Mount Lofty Ranges and by the trough-
faulting in the Spencer’s Gulf—Lake Hyre region.
In addition to this gentle warping the much more extens-
ive upheaval just east of the Great Dividing Range came
about, whereby the Jurassic beds were brought up some
thousands of feet above their level at the centre of the
Basin and. laid bare along its eastern margin. If Jack’s
views in regard to the stratigraphical relationships of the
Desert Sandstone to the north and to the south of Hughen-
den are correct, certain portions of the intake beds must
have remained sealed beneath an unconformable cover of
Upper Cretaceous strata as well of Tertiary basalts until a
comparatively late period.
Hven without any addition of rain to the outcrops, this
tilting would have produced a gravitative movement of the
contained or connate water towards the west, and it is
suggestive to find that the Cloncurry-Richmond and the
Bourke-Charleville “‘rolls,’’ when extended, strike the back-
bone of Queensland, where the latter attains its maximum
height, and where the Jurassic beds rise to over 2,000 feet
above sea-level. It is precisely there, also, that the high
potential regions are located, and, when comparisons are
made with the Hydraulic Diagram (IV), the surface con-
tours of the Thomson Valley will be seen to conform with
the courses of the isopotentials to an unexpected degree.
This suggests that very late earth movements rather
than mere rainfall, may have determined the main distribu-
tion of potential over the eastern side of the Basin.
M—July 4, 1917.
a
‘
-
~
ein |
° ‘
. 194 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
X. The Relation between Volcanism and the Artesian
Supply.
The suggestion made by Gregory of a probable intercon-
nection between the Artesian water and Tertiary volcanicity
is a fruitful one and worthy of elaboration, for it is worth
observing that De Launay’ has shown how in Hurope there
is an almost absolute restriction of springs with free CO,
to the regions of Tertiary and recent volcanic activity, e.g.,
the Auvergne, Bohemia, the Carpathians, Appennines, etc.
It is not surprising, therefore, to find both high potential
areas in Queensland still possessing considerably developed
though now much dissected cappings of the presumably
earlier Tertiary basalts (Diag. III). In the northern area “
the lavas stretch westwards across the Rolling Downs.
series for some distance down the Flinders valley, and in
the opposite direction cover a wide region about the head-
waters of the Burdekin river. They are linked to the
southern area by the flowsaround Clermont and Springsure.?
Further to the south-east again basalts crown the Bunya-
Toowoomba watershed, and are represented in New South
Wales, between Yetman and Warialda, Moree and Narrabri
and around Dubbo.
There can be no doubt from the number of outliers scat-
tered around each of these detached centres, that these
basalts must have had in Miocene times a very much wider
distribution, and it would appear not unreasonable to sur-
mise that they formed a belt—interrupted perhaps only
here and there—extending the full aan of the present
eastern margin of the Basin.
It is significant again that, while they lie upon paleeozoic
rocks now and then outside the Basin and within it upon
1 L. De Launay, Recherche, Captage et Aménagement des Sources
Thermes Minerales, Paris, p. 130, 1899.
* Jack and Etheridge, Geol. and Palwont. Queensland, pp. 581-6, 1892+
3 ‘PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 195.
the Oretaceous, they rest for the greater part of their
breadth upon a surface cut very obliquely across the out-
crop of the Jurassic intake beds. Thelater Tertiary tilting
movement has brought about a gentle inward dip of these
strata and their lava covering. Some of the volcanic foci.
from which these or perhaps the younger basalt flows were
erupted, have been observed in the neighbourhood of
Hughenden, quite a number in that of Clermont—the former
within, the latter just without the Basin—and. others
towards Herberton; doubtless many more of these centres
await discovery.
In addition thereto, and perhaps of greater importance,
are the Miocene alkaline (trachytic) lavas and intrusive
dykes and plugs (rocks all rich in soda, but poor in lime)
that are found along a broad belt stretching with breaks in
a curving direction from Casterton in Victoria to Clermont
and Rockhampton in Queensland.* These were followed
by great basalt outpourings, the lavas issuing from cones,
and either forming great sheets or having flowed down
valleys eroded during mid-tertiary times.
This eruptive phase near the close of the Pliocene was
accompanied or immediately followed by great continental
uplift with some block-faulting, while on the extreme
eastern edge of the continent the forces of compression
acted in a westerly direction.
From analogy with other parts of the world, e.g., South
Africa, where similar structures occur and similar geo-
logical episodes have been experienced, it is to be expected
that beneath the uncompressed and only feebly warped
Artesian Basin, the older strata will have been injected by
igneous matter, possibly on an extensive scale. The exist-
ence of tertiary sills, dykes and even batholithic intrusions
below this interior region, or at least its eastern part, is a
1 T. W. E. David, Handbook of Australia, B.A.A.S., ch. vii, 1914.°
196 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
logical deduction, and is strongly supported by the abnorm-
ally high temperature gradients found underfoot. Pittman’s
testimony regarding the presence of intrusive dolerite in
some of the bores in New South Wales is welcome, also his.
admission that the high temperatures in some of the wells
may be due to expiring volcanism. |
The Warrumbungle Mountains! overlooking the south-
eastern corner of the Basin are important in this connection,
because the numerous vents and plugs piercing the Jurassic
beds indicate the existence below the surface of an ex-
tensive laccolitic mass, from which through prolonged
differentiation, a suite of alkaline (soda-rich) rocks of great
variety, both effusive and hypabyssal, has been derived
and erupted. The same again is the case in the marginal
range of the Nandewars,? where in addition faulting has
played a part, while another region of alkaline rocks has
Dubbo at its centre.
The effect of heated waters charged with silica and sili-
cates, derived by contact with or directly from the cooling
magma, is proved by the diatomite deposits interstratified
with the trachytes and tufis, and by seams of opal, chal-
cedony and silicified breccias in the Warrumbungles, such
silicification having been noticed in the Nandewars also,
and in the basalts at Springsure near Clermont.
Again, the Warrumbungles, and to a lesser degree the
Nandewars, are well known for their curious permanent
springs high up among the mountains, difficult to explain
by hydrostatic pressure alone. Jensen,* who favours the
view that CO, set free by rock decomposition may be
assisting in bringing the water to the surface, considers
that this action is probably inadequate, while Symmonds*
1 H.I. Jensen, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxx, pp. 557 — 626, 1907.
2 H. I. Jensen, ibid., xxx11, pp. 842-914, 1907.
3 H. I. Jensen, ibid., xxxt1, pp. 579 — 581, 1907. :
* R. 8. Symmonds, loc. cit., pp. 28 - 33; also App. A by H.I. Jensen.
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 197
regards the waters as possibly of magmatic origin; their
chlorine content is invariably low.
Ever since the pioneer work of Bischofi, geologists have
recognised that in the waning stages of volcanicity OQOn:,
N, and H.O, are given off at low temperatures, for example
in Java, in the mofettes of the Hifel, etc., and it may not
unreasonably be surmised, that in Australia these gases
were set free, both below ground as well as at the surface,
so that a large proportion of the CO, required for the car-
bonation of the artesian waters could have been derived
from such volcanic sources.
It is worthy of note that the Coonamble area, adjoining
the Warrumbungles, is specially characterised by the
presence of free CO, in its waters.
That such evolution of CO. has not wholly ceased, is
indicated by the existence of certain warm springs with
‘free carbon dioxide, outside the eastern limits of the Basin,
but still within the region of volcanic activity, e.g., the
Hinasleigh (180° F.) Oakvale (hot) and Innot Springs (158°
—168° F.) between Georgetown and Herberton in Queens-
land, rising in.a tract of granite, gneiss and metamorphic
rocks, and the tepid spring at Rock Flat near Cooma in the
extreme south-east of New South Wales, issuing from
Devonian strata overlain by basalt. The close association
of all four with basalt may be regarded as evidence for the
volcanic origin of these thermal springs, and Jack" has
connected the first and third with the younger phase of
volcanicity.
While alkaline carbonates exist in all four waters, they
predominate in the second and fourth, the ratio of this salt
to the sodic chloride being respectively 1:2, 5:1, 1:2°5
and 8:1.
* Jack and Etheridge, The Geol. and Palezont., Qld., pp. 586, 626, 1892.
198 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
These, the similar water at the Zetz Spa (Ballimore)*
east of Dubbo, struck at 550 feet in a bore in Permo-Car-
boniferous beds, and highly charged with OOzs, and the —
highly alkaline water in the Maria Creek bore on the
Central Railway in Queensland in the same system, prove
that waters of the Great Basin type can be found in rocks
both sedimentary and plutonic older than the Jurassic,
while the position of the cold Helidon Spa with its pre-
ponderance of sodic carbonate is also significant. From
this and from the collateral evidence presented earlier, it
seems highly likely that waters carrying carbon dioxide
have been and probably are still being fed up into the
water-bearing beds through fissures in the basement rocks.
Of direct evidence within the basin very little could be
expected under the circumstances, but there are three
items worth citing in support:—(1) the abnormally hot
waters struck on the Northern Railway at Strathfield (130°
F. at 841 feet),? and at Nonda Downs or Clutha Resumption’
(180° F. at 1,340 feet—if this be correctly printed); (2) the
observation that flakes of granite are being brought up by
one of the warm mud springs at Mount Browne? on the
lower Flinders river, presumably from the granite basement
known to lie at a shallow depth hereabouts (see earlier);
(3) the Oxton Downs bore on the Northern Railway, where
the water was tapped in a crack in the granite, the signific-
ance of which was pointed out by Gregory.
The evidence quoted by Pittman* shows that, after bor-
ing slowly for some weeks in hard granite, the tools dropped
suddenly six or eight feet, and that the boring then followed
this crack down until the rock became hard again; flakes
E. F. Pittman, The Mineral Resources of N.S. Wales, p. 449, 1901.
T. W. E. David, Journ. Roy. Soc: N.S.W., Vol. xxvii, p, 428, 1893.
T. W. E. David, ibid., Vol. xxv, p. 294, 1891.
E. F.
Pittman, Problems of the Artes. Water Supply Austr., Geol.
Surv. N 8.W., p. 20, 1908,
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 199
of granite were brought up by the bailer. Flowing water
was obtained near the bottom of this deep crack, but the
supply was much smaller than in the surrounding bores,
but with a greater static head.
There was no evidence to show that sandstone filled the
crack, and therefore, despite Pittman’s attempt at ex-
planation on these lines, Gregory’s view seems far more
reasonable. Unless such fissures be highly numerous, the
probability of one being struck in the course of random
boring would be excessively low.
The Urisino “‘tidal well’? in New South Wales instanced
by Gregory in support of his views, is hardly a suitable
subject in this respect, on account of the obscurity of the
phenomenon; the investigation of the behaviour of certain
‘oscillating’? bores near Cradock’* in the Cape Province,
has shown some of the difficulties inherent in elucidating
the causes of such movements of water-level.
Taking into consideration the irregularities of tempera-
ture, pressure and salinity, as pointed out under those
separate heads, each of which is admittedly small but
collectively of appreciable weight, the composition of the
waters and their associated gases, the contentions stated
above appear to be justified, and agree with David’s? dictum
that springs connected with faults obviously supply part of
the artesian water. At the same time waters ofa similar
type, either plutonic or resurgent, could have entered the
broad outcrop of the Jurassic beds beneath the covering
of basalts and thus assisted in the charging of the reservoir.
XI. The Closing History of the Basin.
Hlaborating this conception, the additions both along the
eastern outcrop and from below are suggested as having
' A. Young, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Africa, Vol. 111, p. 61, 1918.
* T. W. E. David, Handbook for Australia, B.A.A.S., p. 280, 1914.
gradually displaced the residual waters, that had been
throughout Cretaceous and early Tertiary times either
stagnant or imperceptibly circulating through the sand-
stones, this action being hastened by the westerly tilt that
in late Pliocene or Harly Pleistocene times produced a
movement of the water-body in that direction. At the
same time, as erosion laid bare the intake beds by stripping
off the cover of basalt and Desert Sandstone, a progressively
greater area would become exposed afd available there-
fore for the absorption of the rainfall, and it might be
remarked that in a rough manner the marginal waters are
fresher opposite those sections of the intake, off which the
volcanic rocks have been denuded.
200 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
It was moreover just then that glacial conditions set in
over Australia, whereby heavier precipitation was brought
about upon the Main Hastern Divide and the intake area
more fully supplied.
The static pressures induced over the centre and further
side of the Basin became excessive, and, taking advantage
of the contact of the Mesozoic strata with the older rocks,
and of the marginal coarseness of the Oretaceous beds
along both the main boundary of the Basin and the borders
of any inliers, the water burst up to the surface over more
than half of the periphery, and a steady flow was established
with concomitant westerly fall of the potential surface.
The process of elimination of the saline ‘‘ residual water’’
would be effected by these, the Mound Springs, while in
their turn the magmatic waters would be in process of
replacement at the intake by rainfall; when the Salinity
Diagram is compared with that showing the Isopotentials
(and therefore the direction of flow), the general correct-
ness of this reasoning is strikingly confirmed. ‘
The fresh meteoric additions make their appearance due
north of Richmond, between Barcaldine and Charleville,
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 201
and about Coonamble; the semi-saline magmatic waters
occupy the centre of the Basin, while the highly saline
residual types appear on the Gulf of Carpentaria, and along
the south-south-western margin between Bourke and Char-
_lotte Waters. In the last-named region, analyses of the
waters both of the mound springs and of the marginal bores
exhibit high salinities—from 150 to 400 grains of salts per
gallon (I, App. Z; II, App. E). That the overlying Cre-
taceous marine beds are not contributing salt to the waters
of the springs in any marked degree in their passage to the
surface, is proved by the fact that, when bores are put
down in their vicinity (e.g., Coward, Warrangarrana, and
Hergott), the analyses agree closely, or the bore-water
has a somewhat higher salinity.
The type of water in this quarter, instead of having a
high “primary alkalinity’’ is now characterised by both
high “primary salinity’’and moderate “‘secondary salinity,”’
and in accordance with this new system of classification,*
can be interpreted only asa trapped marine (connate) water
but slightly altered; that of the Oodnadatta bore isa good
example. fbf
As already stated, of the dissolved solids, sodic chloride
exceeds sodic carbonate, while there is often a high pro-
portion of sodic sulphate and some magnesium salts as well.
In the deeper bores to the north-east, the waters are nearly
normal, as are also those from the mound springs between
Boulia and Cloncurry. Upon the hypothesis suggested the
high salinity of the water at Normanton can readily be
explained.
It is most improbable that the leaching action of the
replacing waters could have been completely effective; thin
- water horizons with weak circulation would naturally have
: C. Palmer, U.S. Geol. Surv., Bull. 479, 1911, and G.S. Rogers, Econ-
omic Geology, Vol. x11, p. 78, 1917.
202 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
been diluted the least, and it is suggested therefore, that
some of the supplies struck above the main flow, represent
wholly or in part, “residual waters”’ enclosed in the strata
at the time of their deposition or introduced at an early
stage of the Tertiary.
According to the rate of flow calculated, assuming the
same fall of the hydraulic surface as at present, water
would take about 20,000 years to cross the widest part of
the Basin, and knowing the great affinities that fine sedi-
ments and clays have for soluble salts, it is only to be
expected that the beds would require the passing of much
water to accomplish the forward transference of saline
matter, so that the time involved for this action may there-
fore have been very considerable.
While the total yield of the Mound Springs cannot be
- estimated, even roughly, all observers are agreed that their
output, judging from their numbers, must be enormous—
take the case alone of the Boiling Springs near Coward
Springs in South Australia, estimated at a million gallons
per day—while there are many small springs on the eastern
side of the Basin as well (I, pp. 50-1).
Their action as safety-valves implies that they were able
to discharge water sufficiently rapidly to prevent the excess-
ive rise of the hydraulic surface in that quarter. It is
reasonable to conclude. therefore, that this volume might
have been approximately equal to the quantity absorbed
by the intake and transmitted westwards, due allowance
being made for the amount lost by leakage below the Gulf
of Carpentaria, and perhaps some to the south and south-
west also.
On the other hand the observation of extinct mound
springs, such as on the western plains of New South Wales ©
by Pittman, in South Australia at Dalhousie Head by H.
Y. L. Brown,.and near Langlo Downs (S.W. of Tambo) by
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 203
G. N. Griffiths—at the first-named in great numbers—must
be correlated with a reduction of potential in the south-
west. This could have been due either to too great a leak-
age, or perhaps to a diminution of effective area brought.
about by the headward erosion and to the lowering of the
water-shed, as discussed earlier, or probably with much
greater likelihood to the lesser rainfall following upon the
period of Pleistocene glaciation, or all these causes may
have acted in combination.
If this be correct, then the conclusion seems inevitable
that the Basinzhas passed maturity and is now in decline.
Some support is also afforded by the observation that the
Hinasleigh Hot Springs near, Chillagoe appear to be drying
up, aS many of the basins are empty and much of the cal-
careous sinter is crumbling away.
In view of the great drain being made by the existing
bores, estimated at between 600 and 700 million gallons
per day, it remains to be seen whether there will come
. about a corresponding reduction in the output of the mound
springs; that some of them have already been affected is
indeed indicated by the reported diminution in flow of those
at Saxby Downs in Queensland (II, § 2801).
When to this is added the disquieting fact that the yield
of the bores, is as a whole, falling off at the rate of perhaps
as much as 6 or 7% annually, the fear arises lest the
reduction in flow be due not merely to the temporary
readjustment towards equilibrium, but to an actual over-
draft upon the existing resources of the Basin. One can
hardly accept Jack’s opinion that in view of the vast sub-
marine leakage, the withdrawal by bores is infinitesimal in
comparison, with the inference that no control or restriction
would be necessary.
There is great need therefore, until such time as sufficient
evidence be forthcoming to decide this question, to legislate
204 ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
in the direction of curtailing boring operations, of controll-
ing and restricting the outflow of those in existence, and
of preventing the underground leakage by means of water-
tight contacts between the casing and the sealing beds.
In fact Artesian water ought to be recognised as an asset
vested in the State, and to be conserved and used in the
most judicious manner. It may even become necessary for
the State to carry through a scheme of nationalisation of
all the bores in the Great Basin, and to institute a system
whereby the amount permitted to flow from each borehead
would have to be determined by a Board with State
control.
XII. Conclusion.
Any working hypothesis must take into account the
previous history of the Basin, its development, and the
processes by which the reservoir became charged; in this ©
the generally accepted Meteoric Hypothesis fails entirely.
The conclusions arrived at by the Author agree with
those of Gregory, in so far that the waters are regarded as
composite in character, and originating from three distinct
sources:—(1) residual (mesozoic), (2) plutonic, and (3)
rainfall of an earlier epoch (tertiary).
Of these, the bulk of the residual water is considered as
having to a great extent been replaced subsequently by
alkaline waters, fed in at the sub-basaltic outcrops as well
as from below, being evolved by, or derived from, the
hypabyssal and plutonic masses, from which the younger
Tertiary basalts, alkali-trachytes,etc., were derived. Aided
by an escape on the west, they permeated the Jurassic
beds, and the reservoir became charged with waters of
fairly uniform composition, in which carbonate of sodium
predominated over chloride. On the east, the stripping off
of the basalt, etc., from the intake beds, accompanied by
the pluvial conditions in the Early Pleistocene, led to the
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 205
accession of surface water, which is not only in its turn
displacing the earlier accumulation, but also carrying salts
in and downwards from the actual outcrop. Whether this
stage is marked by the eastern edge of the belt of moder-
ately high salinity running from Winton to Oharleville is
problematical, but to the east of Roma, little water seems
to be passing westwards into the reservoir, and probably
for this reason the beds have remained saline there.
In opposition to Gregory, however, the meteoric supply
is believed to be the predominant one, and the contribution
from plutonic sources subordinate in amount at the present
day, yet of the water actually stored, and now available,
quite a large, possibly the greater, proportion may have
been derived from other than meteoric sources, as
suggested.
In concluding, a few words might be said in reference to
some of the problems of the Basin that await investigation.
One of the most important of these is the delimitation of
the Cretaceous and the Jurassic beneath the surface, and
the probable existence and distribution of Lower Oretaceous
Artesian horizons. A second is the nature of the Artesian
series on the eastern and south-eastern margin, and their
stratigraphical relationship to the Triassic and Permo-
carboniferous strata there. A third is the investigation
of the Tertiary igneous lavas, intrusions and volcanic
centres, both with special reference to their behaviour
towards the Jurassics, and regarded as a source of deep-
seated waters and of carbon dioxide gas. The geological
survey of the two high potential areas ought to furnish
valuable data on a number of points.
On the physical side numerous lines of inquiry suggest
themselves, such as the downward rate of temperature
increment, both of the strata and the waters they yield,
the variations just above or within the main flow, the
206: ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
general distribution of temperature increment and variation
of such in shallow parts, the presence of abnormally hot or
cold waters and other thermal anomalies both in bores and.
in springs.
Information should be collected upon the existence and
limits of ‘‘inlying’’ high potential areas, of variations of
pressure with depth and with time, of the pressures in the
several water-horizons; of variations in flow, the relation
of the latter to porosity and the absolute values of the
“*transmission constants,’’ the interference of bores and
the causes bringing about loss of head. Much work could
be done in measuring the relative volumes of gases evolved,
in determining their effect on the flow, their relative pro-
portion in east and west, etc.
Chemical investigation should be concentrated upon the
salinity and origin of the waters, more especially of the
marginal types and intake waters, upon variation of com-
position with depth, upon the nature and origin of the
gases with special reference to the rarer elements, and
upon the study of the mound and other thermal and cold
springs. .
From the engineering aspect much more ofa similar
nature might be said.
Summing up, it may be stated without fear of contradic-
tion, that probably no other geological problem is so many-
sided as that of the Great Australian Artesian Basin,
bristling as it does with puzzles of all kinds, both from
theoretical and practical points of view.
It is to be hoped therefore, that the Commonwealth
Government may realise the extremely important but
complex nature of the problem, and sanction some compre-
hensive scheme for its thorough study from every aspect.
The discussion given above is merely an outline, and,
though the arguments are weak at times and the evidence
PROBLEM OF THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 207
in support thereof slender, it is hoped that the suggestions
made may pave the way to a fuller search for the data
requisite for the solution of the many difficulties that
confront the inquirer.
Table Al.—Discharges induced in a bore by small amounts of
rising Gas.
a x 34 x 2°3 log ree in feet
Based on the formula v = | | 7 per
ee" ue second.
ad
Percentage of 948 4! Cubic feet of Velocity of | Discharge of | Depth of bore-
eecnee gas evolved water in feet {water in gallons|hole of diameter
Sea per day. per second per day. six inches.
0-25 33-5 0-79 83,720
geo |r | TT | I Ny
2-00 726 234 | 926-800
0-25 26-5 0:63 66,415
1:00 419 1.26 | 132/830 | ¢ 1000 feet
2-00 600 1:78 | 187,870
1-00 166 0-98 | 103,690 | 2,000 feet
1-00 143 0-85 89,520 | 3,000 feet
100 5 fat | 0-96 79,420 | 4,000 feet
Table A 2.— Volumes of Gas required to produce large flows of
Water in a stx inch bore, 2,000 feet deep; f = 0:00576.
Discharge of water | Ratio of proportion | Equivalent head | Volume of gas set
induced, in gallons | of gas to water at at- | induced in pounds | free at the surface
per day. mospheric pressure. | per square inch. | in cubic feet per day.
125,000 0-015 0-4 290
250,000 0-058 3+5 9,320
500,000 0-234 14 18,600
750,000 y 0°535 o2°2 64,200
1,000,000 0-961 57°8 153,900
1,250,000 1°54 93 309,400
1,500,000 2-32 140 558,000
(The higher figures are uncertain.)
208
Table B —frictional losses in borehole casing with varying
ALEX. L. DU TOIT.
discharge.
4f v?
Based on formula:—Loss of head = —*—
2 gd
v = velocity of flow in feet per second; d = diameter of casing in
feet; g = gravitation constant; — = depth of bore in feet; and
f = 0:00575.
i]
Discharge of
water in gallons
perday. .
50,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
300,000
400,000
500,000
600,000
700,000
800,000
900,000
1,000,000
1,100,000
1,200,000
Frictional losses in pounds per square inch.
FIVE-INCH CASING. SIX-INCH CASING.
Depths in Feet. Depths in Feet.
1,000 2,000 3,000 1,000 2,000 3,060 4,000
0:2 0:4 0-7 0-1 0:2 0-2 0:3
0:7 1:4 2°8 0:3 0°6 0-9 tees
1:5 3°] 6:2 0:6 1d Ay ele 2°5
2°8 Oo) Tel Meal 2°2 3°] 4+4
62) |e12°5 | Zo-0 2°5 5:0 (eS
11:O8| 22-4 4) 44-2 4°4 8°81 13°S 19 Pies
W7-1 | 34:2 | 68:3 6:9} 13°9 | 20ers
25°0. | 50°0 | 100-0 | - 10:0 | 20:0 | 30°Oxy Agee
34:0 | 68:0 |136:0 | 13:6 | 27-2 | 40°9 | 54:0
17°8 | 35°5 | bo" 2 a eis
22°56 | 45:1 | 67:7 | 90-2
27°8 | 55-6 |. 83°> VidTsS
33°5 | 67:0 |100°5 | 134-0
40:0 | 80:0 |120-0 | 160-0
For temperatures of discharge in the neighbourhood of 100° F.
and 150° F. multiply these results by 0°9 and 0°8 respectively.
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 209
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY.
By T. W. KEELE, m. inst. 0.5.
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Waes, July 4, 1917 |
At the present time, when the Cataract and Prospect
Reservoirs are practically full to overflowing, the Cordeaux
Dam also having been commenced, which, on its completion
in about four years’ time, will make a further large addi-
tion to the storage, and with the prospect of a succession of
favourable seasons, after so long a period of decline in the
rainfall as we have experienced, it may be considered in-
opportune to draw your attention to the subject of the
water supply of Sydney.
I think, however, I shall be able to advance some very
good reasons why this question should not be left in abey-
ance, and I hope you will be interested in a proposal I
will presently submit for your consideration, which, if
adopted, will effect a very considerable alteration in the
system, and will result in greater economy and efficiency,
and, above all, security of the supply.
In an investigation of this nature it is necessary, in the
first instance, to inquire into the rate of increase of the
population to be served with water in order to arrive at a
reliable estimate of future requirements. It is always diffi-
cult to determine with accuracy the number of persons to
be served with water, for the reason that the tables sup-
plied by the Government Statistician refer to the popula-
tion within municipal boundaries, whereas the system
supplying Sydney serves a very wide area entirely outside
the boundaries of the metropolis, in addition to those
within the city and suburbs. To arrive, therefore, at an
N—July 4, 1917.
210 T. W. KEELE.
approximation of the number of consumers, the Water
Board follows the usual practice of such authorities by
ascertaining accurately the number of houses connected
with the water service, and allowing five persons to each
house.
The statement in Appendix shows the annual rate of in-
erease of the population arrived at in this way. It will be
seen that from 1888 to 1908 the increase was fairly uniform
at the rate of about 2% per cent. per annum. From this on
to 1916, the curve shows a very remarkable rise as follows:
—1908-9, 3.514 per cent.; 1909-10, 4.16 per cent.; 1910-11,
4.073 per cent.; 1911-12, 5.026 per cent. ; 1912-18, 6.138 per
cent. ; 1913-14, 7.022 per cent.; 1914-15, 5.807 per cent. ; and
1915-16, 4.46 per cent.
It will be seen that up to the commencement of the war
the increase was very rapid, and it would be exceedingly
difficult to forecast the rate under such circumstances. The
decline for the two following years up to June of this year
has, no doubt, been largely owing to the decline in building
operations, owing to the war, and the large number of men
who have gone to the front, and this may be expected to
continue for some years. In view of the fact that all fore-
casts of the future increase of population to be served with
water have been under-estimated, and, seeing that the
population of New York increased at about 4 per cent. per
annum from the time it numbered 1,000,000 to 2,750,000,
I think it would be safe and reasonable to assume that we
shall experience a similar rate of increase over a like
period.
The water for the supply of Sydney, as you know, is
derived from a catchment area of 350 square miles, in
which the Nepean River takes its rise. It is of exceptional
quality, and requires no filtering. Probably no other city
in the world can boast of greater purity of its water.
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 211
It is conducted to Prospect Reservoir—40 miles—
through a conduit, 33 miles of which are in open canal;
from Prospect to pipehead by a further length of five miles
of open canal; thence to Potts Hill, 5 miles, the water is
taken through two 6-feet diameter wrought iron pipes laid
upon the surface of the ground. From Potts Hill the
water is taken underground in pipes, and passes into cir-
culation throughout the city.
Owing to its physical conditions, the main portion of
the supply, namely, 62 per cent., has to be lifted to the
higher zones by pumping, the principal pumping: stations
. being at Crown-street on the south side, and Ryde on the
north side of the Harbour.
The percentage of water pumped has been gradually in-
creasing, until 1914-15, when it reached 68 per cent. The
drop to 62 per cent. last year was probably to a great
extent caused by the prohibition of the sprinklers, owing
to the rapid diminution of the storage in the reservoir,
eaused by the protracted drought. On reference to Mr.
Clarke’s report (18th May, 1877) on the Sydney Water
Supply, it will be seen that it was not then anticipated
that so large a percentage of pumping as has occurred
would be required; but it is a remarkable fact that, when-
ever facilities for obtaining water on the higher levels have
been given, extensive settlement has followed—the public
evidently preferring the higher zones for residential pur-
poses; and when it is reflected that as more and more of
the foreshore of the harbour is being resumed for com-
mercial purposes, the people will naturally be compelled
to resort to the higher levels. Seeing that the gravitation
limit is 141 feet on the south side, and only 97 feet on the
north side, and that very tall buildings in the city area
above that limit are increasing rapidly, I think it is
reasonable to anticipate that for years to come the per-
Pin ee) T. W. KEELE.
centage will not be reduced below the level it has already
reached.
Having briefly sketched the manner in which the water
is brought into the city and distributed, the important
question of security may be referred to. Are the citizens
satisfied that their water supply is as secure as it should
be, and that when turning on their taps they may reason-
ably expect to draw from them all the water they require?
Apart from the sufficiency of the storage, which I shall
presently refer to, there has been recently developed a new
and startling danger, namely, the deliberate interference
with the supply to the higher zones by industrial strikes, .
which have for their object either the partial suspension of
the supply of coal by the ‘‘slowing down’’ process, or its
total stoppage when the strike has lasted sufficiently long
to exhaust the immense reserves of coal which must be
maintained to meet such emergencies. The recent great in-
dustrial strike has surely brought forcibly (before the
citizens of Sydney the very precarious position in which
they can be placed by a stoppage of the coal supply. The
various public utilities were all, more or less, affected, but
when we consider that we were actually within measurable
distance of an interference with the pumping of water to
the higher levels, and that a continuance of the strike
would have resulted in the pumping engines ceasing work,.
the seriousness of the situation is at once brought forcibly
before us. We might possibly manage for a little while
without gas, or electric light, but we cannot exist without
water for domestic purposes and the flushing of sewers.
The complete stoppage of water for even a day or two would
indeed be a calamity, but it is not too much to say that a
further continuance would mean an exodus from the city
before the expiration of a week.
Following quickly upon this coal strike the citizens were
afforded another demonstration by a band of lawless men
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. De Wes
that no building or public work of any description above
ground is immune from their attack. I have endeavoured
to show what would be our predicament through the hold-
ing up of the coal, so far as the water supply to the higher
- gone is concerned, but it is only those who are fully aware
of the manner in which the water is brought into the city,
who can realise how precarious is our dependence on the
daily supply of the precious fiuid. It is sufficient here to
say that no city of the importance of Sydney, with close
upon one million inhabitants, should be satisfied with only
one conduit, and that one wholly above ground for about
half its length, and therefore subject to interference in a
manner which it is obviously undesirable here to enlarge
upon.
The reasons above stated are quite sufficient in them-
selves to cause anyone interested in the water supply to
ponder over means for its better security and improve-
ment. That such is very necessary has also been recently
demonstrated by the state of the reservoirs at the termina-
tion of the drought in September last year, when we were
so near to a water famine, there being less than 200 days’
supply on a very much reduced consumption, when the
situation was relieved by bountiful rains at a season of
the year when they were not usually expected.
It is nearly seven years ago, namely, in August, 1910,
that the Public Works Committee inquired into a
proposal for the amplification and improvement of the City
Water Supply. The reference included works for improving
the distribution of the water only, but although the question
of increasing the storage did not form part of the refer-
ence, the chairman very early in the inquiry recognised its
importance, and the matter was fully investigated, im-
portant evidence on the subject being given by the officials
of the Water Board, and also by the late Mr. Wade and
214 T. W. KEELE.
myself, and the Committee were much impressed with the
necessity of increased storage, and drew special attention
to the matter in their report.
No action appears to have been taken, so far as the con-
struction of any works is concerned, from that time—
seven years ago nearly—until the decision in September
last to commence the building of the dam on the Cordeaux
River.
It is estimated that it will take four years to complete
this work, during which, if we have favourable seasons, no
inconvenience may be felt; but, on the other hand, if they
should be unfavourable, and droughty conditions prevail,
it is quite possible for the situation to be actually worse
than in last September.
With a population of 917,990, increasing at the rate of
4 per cent. per annum, the reduction in the reserve storage,
after allowing for the daily consumption and loss by
evaporation, ete., would amount to eighty-four (84) days’
supply in four years, assuming that the reservoirs remained
full all the time; but if the weather conditions were similar
to the four years preceding September last, then it is
evident that the reserve storage in 1920 would be very
much less than it was in 1916, unless some water was con-
served by the new dam during construction. Our experi-
ence, however, while building the Cataract Dam, showed
that too much dependence must not be placed upon this.
Sufficient has been said in this matter to show that, in a
climate like ours, and especially where the supply is de-
rived from storage reservoirs, it is absolutely necessary
that such provision should be of the most ample character.
Leaks have occasionally occurred in the best constructed
works, necessitating the emptying of the reservoir to ef-
fect repairs. We have had our cwn experience with
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 215
Prospect Reservoir, which it is unnecessary to dilate upon,
beyond stating that, as a consequence, no reliance can be
placed on what previously was regarded as a_ reserve
storage in that reservoir, namely, the 5,000 million gallons
below the gravitation limit.
In my opinion, we should in future make every endeav-
our to work up and permanently maintain (if I may be
permitted to so express myself) a reserve storage of not
less than 600 days, equalling 1.64 years. Indeed, it would
be wiser to make it considerably more than this. That it
ean be done without making any appreciable strain upon
the ratepayers will be shown presently.
In 1921, assuming that the Cordeaux is then completed,
the population at 4 per cent. increase will have reached
1,112,000 people, consuming, say, 52 gallons daily per head,
the daily consumption will amount to 57,821,000, and, as-
suming losses from evaporation, etc., to amount to 15 mil-
lion gallons daily from the three reservoirs, the total daily
loss will amount to 72,821,000, which would result in a re-
serve storage capacity of 587 days, or 1.61 years, which it
will be observed is less than the reserve I have suggested.
Assuming that it will take four years to provide further
storage elsewhere, by 1924 the consumption and evapora-
tion will have amounted to 87,546,000, and the reserve
storage under the most favourable conditions will have de-
creased to 488 days’ supply, equalling 1.33 years, or actu-
ally less than the reserve storage at the present time (in
May, 1917), when we are just starting to build the Cor-
deaux Dam.
In 1925 the new storage reservoirs should be ready to take
up the duty. I have not yet mentioned where they should
be located, but presumably the Avon would be one. It
would have a catchment area of 63 square miles, or 13
216 T. W. KEELE.
square miles greater than that on the Cordeaux. It would
not, however, be wise, without further information as to its
capacity for storage, to assume a greater storage than the
Cordeaux, namely, 15,859 million gallons. This, however,
would be 9,500 million gallons less than the reserve storage
I have already advocated, namely, 600 days’ supply, and I
would here strongly advise that it should come from the
Woronora and O’Hare’s Creek Reservoirs, the sites for
which have already been surveyed, and their capacity as-
certained to be 7,565 millions on the Woronora and 2,000
millions on the O’Hare’s Creek. A tunnel ten miles in
length would be necessary to convey the combined waters
to the existing canal at the Sugar Loaf. By the construct-
ion of the tunnel, the drainage from 85 square miles of
country, the discharge from which equals 23,899 million
gallons in a year of mean rainfall, would be added to the
present catchment area of 350 square miles, making a total
of 485 square miles. If these works were commenced next
year they would, together with the Avon Dam (to be com-
menced in 1921), be completed in 1924 and ready to com-
mence duty in 1925, when the population would have in-
ereased to 1,300,823 consuming 60 gallons per head per day.
The daily consumption would amount to 78,049,380 gallons,
and, allowing for evaporation and other losses from the six
reservoirs, the total loss would amount to 108,049 millions
daily. The reserve storage would, therefore, amount to
623 days’ supply, or 1.7 years.
I will not weary you by taking you step by step along
the course necessary to determine the storage capacity that
will become necessary from year to year as the increase of
population makes its demand for water. We cannot afford
to live from hand to mouth any longer.
Enough has been said to impress upon you the absolute
necessity of forecasting our future requirements and mak-
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 217
ing provision to meet them. It is necessary, however, to
say that the storage I have mentioned by no means exhausts
the capabilities of the catchment area. There are three
more, namely, the Burke, the London and the Chain-of-
Ponds reservoirs, which should be capable of impounding
~ about 29,000 million of gallons, and, in addition to those,
there are two others of 20,000 million gallons situated in
the cap of the range at an elevation of over 2,000 feet on
the Wingecarribee River, which takes its rise near the
village of Robertson and drains into the Wollondilly River.
There is an area of 55 square miles, which can be made
available by intercepting the water by a dam at a point
above the junction of Wingecarribee Creek with the river, |
and conveying it by a tunnel seven miles long into Doudles
Folly Creek, which drains into the London River within
‘the present catchment area. A second dam on the Winge-
carribee area could be constructed on the site suggested by
Mr. Gipps when giving evidence before the Royal Com-
mission in 1902. The objection then taken to Mr. Gipps’
proposal was that the water might be contaminated by the
drainage from the village of Robertson, but it will be seen |
from the map that there should be no difficulty in diverting
this drainage and conveying it outside the catchment area, —
and provision in my estimate of cost has been made for the
Yesumption of any other holdings that may be considered
objectionable. The drainage from the town of Mittagong
does not come within this catchment area at all.
An inspection of the table ‘‘A’’ on page 219 will show
that the storage capacity of the reservoirs I have referred
to, including Prospect Reservoir, amounts to 116,337,369,000
gallons, while the discharge resulting from the mean annual
rainfall over the respective areas from which they derive
their supply amounts to 140,684 million gallons. If these
reservoirs, therefore, are all completed in 1937, the posi-
218 T. W. KEELE.
tion would be then:—Population 2,082,661, increasing at
4 per cent., consuming, say, 63 gallons per head per day.
The total daily consumption would be 131,207,648, and,
with evaporation and other losses, amounting to, say,
52,000,000 gallons per day, the total daily loss from the
reservoirs would be 183,207,643 gallons. The reservoirs, if
full at that time, would therefore be capable of affording
a reserve storage of about 600 days, or 1.64 years.
SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY
4
- “ nett & Vey = =
PLAN SHOWING THE EXISTING SYSTEM AND
Soy ‘ ae
ALSO A PROPOSAL TO SUPPLY WATER«~TOX &
say UR f
THE HICHER ZONES BY CRAVITATION THROUCH b
PRESSURE TUNNELS
It will thus be seen that, in order to maintain this re-
serve, it will have become necessary to obtain a further
supply capable of meeting the requirements after the year
OST. ee
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY.
219
STATEMENT <A.”
Discharg
Storage AES on harxe |
capacity of Sed eis aunuet Percentage a lan
reservoirs) 2°€4S In rainfall of rainfall | from aver-
in millions| S@are jovercatch-\dischargea|*ke annual
of gallons. miles. |ment areas millions of
in inchss gallons.
Wingecarribee No. 1...... toon
Wingecarribee No. 2...... 10,000 28 BU a BE
Chain-of-Ponds ............ 7,000 14°5 36 44, 3,330
LIC TE (A ne oe 10,000 38 48°5 4.4, 11,758
Burke ‘ 12,0C0 36 48°5 44, 11,139
Avon Me etc LO{000 63 50°49 44, 20,294.
WOPECAWE <.cccc0cc2..002.0002 | 15,859 35 50°49 44, 11,275
Cataract bease cet 2D 4aNE 50 50 44, 15.950
WWieronora, <2. s..s..- s0:--(,.7,565 | 29 50 44, 9,251
O’Hare’s Creek ...........| 2,000 28 4.4, 4.4, 7,860 |
EGGBCED! fio ceo) osise00eo0's: 5,002
Totals: 2°... = 116,337 | 348°5 | 48°75 AA, 108,402
Area of the lower Cordeaux |
Avon, and Nepean
Rivers, draining into
Nepean Tunnel at the
Pheasant’s Nest, and
thence by the canal to |
Prospect Reservoir .. 11l 36 44, 25,494.
Area draining into the
W oronora Tunnel and
thence via the canal
to Prospect Reservoir 28 38 4,4, 6,788
Totals... .....{116,387 | 4875 | 45:23 | 44 | 140,684
The above estimate of discharge from average rainfall is a conservative
one, and is probably greater than the amount stated. Prospect Reser-
voir would probably be maintained by the drainage from the Woronora
Catchment Area alone. It will be seen, however, that any deficiency
would be made up from the drainage from the area of the lower portion
of the existing Catchment Area, namely, 111 square miles. There would
be, therefore, an amount equalling 20,000 million gallons annually going
to waste, which might be conserved by impounding it in a reservoir which
could be formed by a dam at the junction of the Cordeaux and Nepean
Rivers.
The only other sources capable of affording so large an
additional supply as 80 million gallons daily within ten
years are the Wollondilly and the Cox Rivers, either singly
or combined, as they would be in the Warragamba. As
220 T. W. KEELE.
the site for this dam is situated at too low a level (namely,
only 50 feet above high water at Sydney) to be connected
with the existing system, and would therefore require a
separate conduit into the city, and as a dam at a higher
elevation on the Wollondilly can be connected with the
existing system, and as I shall presently show that the
cost of the water to the consumer would be less from
there than from the Warragamba, I would therefore recom-
mend the Wollondilly proposal. Briefly, it will consist in
the construction of a dam capable of impounding 63,500
million gallons of available water at an elevation sufficient
to admit of its filtration and subsequent conveyance
through a tunnel 26 miles in length, discharging into the
Nepean River just above the intake of the Nepean Tunnel
at the Pheasants’ Nest. I am not in a position to say
definitely where the dam should be located, but I think the
position shown for it on the map will probably not be far
out. The work would have to be commenced about the
year 1930 in order to be in readiness to take up the duty of
supplying the additional water required in 1937. It is in-
teresting to note that by 1946-7 the daily consumption will
probably reach such high figures as 211 million gallons, 80
million of which will come from the Wollondilly, and, as
the limit of reserve storage to supply that quantity, after
providing for evaporation and other losses for 600 days,
would then be reached, another reservoir higher up the
stream would have to be ready to take up the duty of
further supply.
Having forecasted the probable increase of population
to be served with water during the next thirty years, and
the arrangements with regard to storage which will have
to be made for an effective supply to be maintained, I will
now submit for your consideration a scheme that has
occurred to me, which, if adopted, will bring the whole
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 221
of the storage reservoirs on the Catchment Area under
complete control to the extent of making the maximum use
of the rainfall upon the area, and enabling the reservoirs
to maintain not only a constant supply via the present low
level gravitation system of open canal to Prospect Reservoir,
but also a constant supply of water at high pressure suffi-
cient to meet all demands of the consumers located in the
higher zones of the city and suburbs, on both sides of the
Harbour, for the next thirty years, thus dispensing alto-
gether with pumping from the time the works may be com-
pleted, thereby placing the city in an entirely secure posi-
tion with regard to its water supply, inasmuch as it would
be safe from any interference of any kind whatsoever, and
also entirely independent of coal strikes.
The idea of bringing in the water under pressure
through pipes is, of course, not a novel one, and no doubt it
has occurred to everyone who has ever given a thought to
the improvement of the water supply.
The fact that the water is now impounded in the Cataract
Reservoir at an elevation which would command all the
heights ever likely to be occupied in the vicinity of Sydney
has long been recognised, but, on reflection, it has generally
been considered that the limited quantity of water from so
small a catchment as 50 square miles, does not warrant the
expense.
After studying the topography of the present Catchment
Area on the Upper Nepean River from a recognizance sur-
vey made by Mr. Surveyor Lee in 1902, with the aid of an
Aneroid barometer, which enabled him to give spot levels
along the various streams, I noticed that the levels of the
several sites for future dams in the Cordeaux, Avon,
Burke, London and Chain-of-Ponds were such as to indi-
cate that if they were all connected by tunnelling they
could be all drained one into the other from the highest at
232 T. W. KEELE.
Chain-of-Ponds, where the bed level is 1,710 feet, down to
the lowest at the Cataract at bed level 800 feet, and, as I
have already stated that the Wingecarribee area of 55
square miles can be conveyed by a tunnel into the London
Reservoir Area, it was evident that the solution of the
problem of sufficiency of water at an elevation to warrant
the expense of conducting it to the city at high pressure
had been reached.
On looking into the question of the conveyance of the
water by pipes to the city, I found that, apart from the
fact that the metal at the present time is absolutely unob-
tainable and not likely to be available for probably some
years, the cost even at the pre-war prices was almost pro-
hibitive; moreover, there is the difficulty in crossing the
Harbour to be overcome. The pipes also as far as Banks-
town, 27.3 miles from the Cataract, would have to be laid
above the surface of the ground for purposes of inspection
and maintenance.
In earlier times this would not have been objected to,
but there can be no security in the present day for works
of this description, for reasons already referred to. It
then occurred to me that if the water be taken through a
specially lined tunnel, located in sound rock at a sufficient
depth to withstand the pressure due to the head of water in
the reservoir, the difficulty might be overcome, and after
making out an estimate of the.cost I felt sure that the
scheme was feasible, and have since beeen confirmed in that
opinion since reading Mr. Charles Prelini’s paper on the
New York Water Supply, volume XCVII, Engineering, 13th
March, 1914, to which my attention was directed by my
friend Mr. H. G. McKinney, in which the method adopted
for conveying the water across valleys, and, in two places in
particular, across the River Hudson and the East River,
were fully described, and is exactly similar to my proposal.
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. TOS
The difficulty they had to contend with was that, owing to
the faulty nature of the rock when crossing the Hudson
River, they had to go down 1000 feet below the water level ;
elsewhere, it was found that sufficiently sound rock was ob-
tainable at not less than 150 feet below the surface of the
rock. Their ‘‘pressure tunnels’’ were lined with 4-2-1 con-
erete, of varying thickness, according to the hydrostatic
pressure, up to 17 inches thick below the Hudson River, the
tunnels being 144 feet in internal diameter, to carry five
- hundred million gallons per day.
I feel sure that in our Hawkesbury sandstone rock it will
be possible at a reasonable depth to take the water safely
through a tunnel similarly lined, and, in my estimate, have
made provision, when passing under George’s River, and
also across the Harbour to Ryde, to locate the tunnel at not
less than 500 feet below high water level with 17 inches
thickness of concrete lining.
My scheme provides for a tunnel from the Cataract Reser-
voir direct to Bankstown, 27.3 miles in length. There it
would be bifurcated, one branch going direct to Crown
Street Pumping Station, 11.55 miles long, and the other
direct to Ryde, 8.3 miles in length. The main tunnel would
_be capable of delivering 150 million gallons per day to
Bankstown, and the branch tunnels would each carry 75 mil-
lion gallons per day. At the termination of each branch
tunnel, the water would be taken up a shaft specially
designed at the top to admit of connections being made with
the rising mains. The pumping engines could then stop
work, and the water would be delivered under the pressure
due to the head at the Cataract Reservoir, which would be
sufficient to supply the maximum quantity, if required, to
Wahroonga, on the north side, or to Waverley, on the south
side.
224 T. W. KEELE.
As the time for completing the tunnels depends princi--
pally on the number of faces at which the men can work,
I have made provision in the estimate for 39 shafts along
the main tunnel line, the average distance apart would be
3696 feet and the average depth 300 feet.
In the branch tunnel to Crown Street, I have allowed for
32 shafts at varying distances apart from 1452 feet in the
thickly populated portions of the line to 3388 feet where
the settlement is not so dense. Along the tunnel to Ryde
the greatest distance between shafts would probably be
about 7392 feet where crossing the Harbour, which would
leave 31,680 feet on the south side, and 4752 feet on the
north side, and the shafts would be spaced at distances apart
of 3168 feet and 2376 feet, respectively.
The total leneth of the six tunnels connecting the several
reservoirs from Wingecarribee to the Cataract Reservoir,
would amount to 204 miles. Provision has been made for
their being lined with concrete throughout, and for their
capacity to deliver 150 million gallons per day. They would |
thus be capable of passing a large quantity of water. quickly
from one reservoir to another, so that during storms, which
occur sometimes on one portion of the Catchment Area and
do not extend to the other, the surplus water, which other-
wise would run to waste when a reservoir is full, would be
passed on to those lower down. In this way it will be pos-
sible to obtain a greater benefit from the rainstorms over
the whole area than would result from a series of discon-
nected reservoirs.
I estimate that the main ‘‘Pressure tunnel’’ from the
Cataract Reservoir to Bankstown, together with the two
branch tunnels, could be completed in five years, if the works
were all being carried on at the same time, at a total cost of
£3,761,468.
:
4
i
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 225
_ The tunnels connecting the reservoirs in the Catchment
Area could be carried on from time to time as they were
required, but those connecting the Cataract and Cordeaux,
and the Avon should be commenced at once, so as to be
completed at the same time with the dams for those reser-
voirs, namely, in 1920 and 1924. I estimate that the total
cost of the 204 miles of tunnel on the Catchment Area would
cost £1,075,727.
The Woronora Scheme is of the greatest importance, as it
would, when completed, be capable of conveying the drain-
age from 85 square miles of new country in every way simi-
lar to the present Catchment Area of the Upper Nepean and
Cataract Rivers, into the existing canal.
The rainfall over this area is quite equal to that over the
area above-named. The works will consist of a ten mile tun-
nel and two reservoirs, which, I estimate, could be con-
structed for £1,365,064. If the full benefit of these works
is to be secured in 1923, when it may, perhaps, be sorely
needed, they should be commenced not later than next year.
In the statement in Appendix I now submit for your in-
spection, I have set out in their proper sequence, the costs
of the several works year after year for the next thirty
years, which would have to be incurred if the Sydney Water
Supply is to be placed upon a satisfactory and secure basis
after the year 1924.
During the next seven years, from the present time, I
have endeavoured to show that there may not be a sufficient
reserve storage to meet a possible protracted dry period,
and it is therefore obvious that the only way to make the
position secure would be to commence the works earlier than
I have shown, which would mean that the Avon Dam and
the Woronora Tunnel should be commenced at once or other-
wise with the least possible delay. We have already lost
O—July 4, 1917.
226 T. W. KEELE.
:
-
f
seven years of valuable time, and there is therefore no other
way to make up for it but to proceed in the manner I have
indicated.
In order to confine the statement of costs of the various
works and services within reasonable limits, I have con-
verted the whole of such costs shown in the Table in
appendix into pounds per day.
The cost of the water in Columns ‘‘J,’? <P,” and= V
is given in pounds per million gallons, and as consumers
have to pay for water at a rate of pence per thousand gal-
lons, I have complied with that requirement in Columns
SOK ee) EQ? and OW 99
Column ‘‘K’’ shows the total cost in pence per thousand
gallons of the water delivered to Crown Street and Ryde by
gravitation only. Column ‘‘Q’’ shows the total mean cost
in pence per thousand gallons of the water delivered to
Crown Street and Ryde by gravitation, plus the total mean
cost of pumping it to the higher zones.
Column ‘‘W’’ shows from the year 1922, when pumping
would cease, the total mean cost in pence per thousand gal-
lons of all the works included in the costs shown in Column
““Q,’’ less the cost of the additional works of the Prospect
Scheme shown in Column ‘‘E,’’ less also the cost of pump-
ing shown in Columns ‘‘M”’ and ‘‘N,’’ plus the cost of all
the work included under my proposal shown in Column
yee,
Column ‘‘X’’ shows the excess or deficiency in the cost
per thousand gallons when comparing the cost of the water
delivered under my proposal shown in Column ‘‘W,’’ with
the cost of the water gravitated and pumped as shown in
Columns ~“@)~
An inspection of Column ‘‘X’’ shows that, notwithstand-
ing the heavy expenditure which will be necessary for the
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. pee
construction of the works connected with my proposal, over
and above the expenditure which will have to be incurred
if it is not adopted, the additional cost expressed in pence
per thousand gallons would only amount to a small decimal
above one penny per thousand gallons in the year 1922, and
this would immediately drop to a little over 1/8rd of a
penny per thousand gallons in the following year, owing
to the stoppage of boosting and pumping the water.
Thereafter the decline in additional cost would continue
until the year 1931-2, when the costs in Columns ‘‘Q’’ and
“W’? are shown to be equal. A saving would then com-
mence, which would increase year after year until 1946-7,
when the saving would amount to 0.386 of a penny per
thousand gallons.
As the limit of my scheme would then have been reached,
that is to say, the pressure tunnels would then be delivering
water at their full capacity of 150 millions of gallons per
day, any further increase in the daily consumption of water
on the higher zones beyond that quantity would, of course,
have to be pumped; but it should not be forgotten that the
saving in the eost of pumping 150 millions of gallons daily
would continue for ever.
I have added another column (‘‘Y’’) showing the excess
or deficiency in the cost, expressed in another way, namely,
in pounds sterling per annum, which enables one to grasp
the magnitude of the saving better than by the previous
column.
It will be seen that in 1922, when the pressure tunnels
would be ready to commence duty, the additional cost of
my proposal would amount to £274,115.
Although the yearly additional cost from that time
rapidly decreases, it still reaches considerable figures,
namely, £419,385 in 1931, on which date the costs of the two
‘Columns ‘‘Q’’ and ‘‘W”’ are shown to be equal.
228 T. W. KEELE.
Thereafter a saving would be effected, which would an-
nually increase until 1942-3, when it will be seen that my
proposal would pay for itself, inasmuch as the total savings
would then have amounted to £419,385.
The saving would continue to increase until in 1946-7,.
the total clear profit would amount to £490,560. There-
after, the profit would continue to increase at the rate of
£125,5€0 per annum, resulting from the elimination of the
costs shown in Columns ‘‘E,’’ ‘‘M’’ and ‘‘N,’’ equalling
£835 per day.
I think it will be admitted that if these figures are correct,
a good case has been made out in favour of very careful
consideration being given to my proposal. The figures de-
pend, of course, upon the question of the reliability of my
estimates.
I may say that I have given the whole matter very close
study, and my assurance may be accepted that a perfectly
honest attempt has been made to arrive at the truth. The
costs of the existing system are based on the figures given
in the annual reports of the Water Board. Those relating
to the construction of the various dams are based on the
costs of works already constructed and of the Cordeaux
Dam, as given in the Public Works Committee’s reports,
making a fair allowance for increased costs of labour and
materials, and also for land resumptions, ete. The works
I propose are all connected with tunnelling and as some of
you may be aware, the whole of the alignment and con-
struction of the tunnels on the existing system of the Sydney
Water Supply were carried out by me, personally, or under
my direction during 1880 to 1885 amounting to twelve
miles in length, the longest being four and a half miles
through the Hawkesbury Sandstone; it will, therefore, be
perhaps admitted that I have had considerable experience
in that class of work which is similar in every way to that
{
4 i
eee |
ft
<; ’
i
THE SYDNEY WATER SUPPLY. 229
I propose. Having made liberal allowance for increased
cost of prices in labour and materials since the existing
works were constructed, I think it will be found that my
estimates will not be far out; but even assuming that the
proposed works would cost as much as 50 per cent. more
than what I have estimated, my proposals are well worthy
of adoption.
My estimate of the cost of pumping is based on the lowest
prices shown in the Board’s Annual Report for 1915-16. It
may be interesting to state that since that time the cost of
coal has risen to an extra 3s. 6d. per ton. It is not at all
likely to decrease, and who can say, therefore, what it will
amount to ten, twenty, or thirty years hence?
I have already referred to the fact that more than half
the existing conduit is easily accessible on account of it
being above the surface of the ground and the risk is there-
fore always present of possible interference, or, indeed, I
may go so far as to say, complete dislocation of the supply,
and where dependence must be placed upon coal as a means
of generating the power required to raise the water to the
higher levels, we are entirely at the mercy of those who
foment strikes amongst the industrial unions.
If we compare the situation under these circumstances
with the advantages that would be derived from a conduit
located in such a manner as to eliminate all those risks, and
which, once constructed, would be everlasting, would re-
quire no maintenance, and would moreover deliver the water
in the same condition of purity in which it fell from the
heavens upon the Catchment Area, we might well consider
ourselves fortunate if the work would eventually pay for
itself alone, without any profit whatever.
es
4
a
Ss
i
e
=
Fel
xs
230
2h6l ©} QIG] wos Keupks yO Ja}DM YYM -padsas uolDjndoy jo abunjsq
dig 9
Oss SzF we NO BHI fhuaont
bursovuour yuosd uemDd O9S DER 7
HN 24 Med WEDS CEE EIYT
SONIAYS
#809 esa2r} 1DI1 CBE GIP FT
$07 Pinom buidwng
uaYM SOD SSP
Siivley
w :
aa
oosszt LzLe0-
o9sszi} sBeo-
osz7silf vLEO -
osgsol} wseo-
OLIvG | 2e£0
¢se28 60£0
Seozt | sez0
Siv29 6S20
SBErS 9€20
cSeor 2120
SSObE L810
oO212¢ 1910
seis2 2€10
oges! 8010
O€eGt 8200
os6ol 9900
oves st00
Sof | 2000
oves 6£00
secs 6so0
ose0! 1800
sosei so10
os2ei lvio
S6622 reE10
o¢ee2 | O20
ovose 2ve0
Si6s6 2701
S7LlL | va80
O20rS 7990
Ccsr2e €tv 0
oscol 8s10
prudg
Seagal lbedaraios
spunog | bussodiuo>
us
dgumryag| A>
20
A
py A
oLr2
Lev
ees2
sig2
669 2
1612
SHB 2
186 2
€g0€
BLIE
SL2E
92VE
6Ss ¢
vo9e
€B9E
OL9E
eso
829€
VES '€
sucjjob
4212142Q |puosnouy
40
$82203
x
aod
9i¢ Ol
€9E Ol
vss ol
968 01
Lyz il
82911
S202!
ory 21
sve2i
Iv2€1
LV9EeI
Slevi
628 rl
96 SI
9vESl
2625)
€22S1
est
Lle vt
99971
168 VI
w2ust
22vsci
o2LS!
L¢9 91
609 11
ees i2
9€L 02
6596)
8S2 81
§299)
spunog
es22
9122
o6i2
evie2
9602
€S02
1102
1461
(v6)
6061
LLg)
Eze
9se!
ecg
OSL)
1191
oao9!
€2S1
Orr
LS€)
125
SB2I
9S2!
422)
L021
9911
Svcl
6611
1Sol
106
9SL
9!
os!
1SLt
6211
669!
2591
Soo!
2951
025!
osvi
ost
eIvi
ogc!
28¢1
Soe!
ves
oL21
volt
zing
ovol
€96
2828
vse
928
LGL
89L
87h
2e4
168
Gee
Sel
v2L
199
hop aed
spunog
SDra2x0
wouduin
V9
suo> JODY
way
P2y40us
buidung suey
At
rT)
1509
(myo 469
S
hopsad
spunog
auny>c|
DANSSaug sL0}|06
48IH
yo
160 453
u
Puvsnoy
avd Mu
4809 163
o
Leet
2l6 1
Sliz2i
Le 2I
1eo2t
€16 2
vI2El
S2o'€1
18
22191
S2vvl
Svevl
OSE GI
(ees)
€iLsi
soci
VLE)
601 S1
21971
Livy
6GS¥I
Sg9ovl
so¢rl
€iGvi
L106 SI
vgi 9
86) Lt
250 11
16991
vsv9l
S96S!I
6S1S)
soivt
2L¢S)
d
<—_—_—____— 42}0\4 uoyjo41AD4y euNSSe4g YybIY_ 4. Paduing 42,0,Q UoYO}AoUN [2n27 a A2}0AQ
2092 Ivd €€ LY { 2002
o9S2 G20 a 2802
wise goo ce ev][sii2
eeve2 1S €€ Lyi VLle
wGC2 GEG EF LH] VE22
og22 g0S €€ LY } 6622
Ol22 ogy &£& Ly} s9t2
2viz 2sVv €¢ Lv | 6<v2
Q602 ofv £f Lv} Gos2
9¢02 s0vV ££ Lv] Lise
vecl sgt ££ LY | SV92
1961 69 €€ LY] so2
$26) os €€£ LV | 9982
ocgi fee LE LV} 6962
e6LI BIE CE LV | 9£6 2
LOL! €O€ €& LV] L682
9191 682 ¢& LY] LYE 2
2261 9L2 62 LV |} 88lL2
ocvi v92 92 Ly] bic2
vee! 262 €2 Ly, $292
16zf ov2 02 sv | <992
ev2t 622 91 Lv] 0OL2
9021 GI2 &1 Lv] 2eL2
voit 602 OF LV} I19L2
Gzis 61 2b Lv | vOG2
o6o!' gli € Lv | 1LO€
v.o1 G9l iv] €ive
986 264 Lv | L92¢
€06 ov Lv | vize
219 82) 20 j 221¢
92L elt Le | viog
veg gol ce | 6292
6SS 89 82 | 6692
2s¢ i) 82] 1262
dppsod = kopand hop sed lop and
Gpunog Spunog spunog Spunog s2ueg
yuo?
ee ead pub |" suo}iob
a PP SUOHPPY S140M]| PUDSNOY J
480) Yee avd
19101 13 (80 199 BODISD IS0D 480) 1S
(0) N w 7 >]
—— fA\ddas
Ja}0M
ese ise
L98 eset
ieee 6281
906 2eLI
cb GeLl
8s6 2695
Lg6 oso!
Lio! O89
9y0I Ossi
wo! 8ysi
20711 gist
asit 21st
vel! Ser
Le2t Livi
€221 oovi
Loz) =6v2Et
ogit 272i
19th OLN
2eht <6ol
Gol 2101
601! vee
s2it 9S6
ect L276
ost 868
o12t 81g
og2! 298
ostt 299 ov
Ige1 L8L oC
6C€! IL vE
10€! 2v9 1¢
9G2! 1g 62
QL1i GR 92
S211 €Vv S2
Li2t Lev €2
fopaed sop and
Spunog Spunog spunog
Guseoog
BoD 49
409159 [PIL 4S} OTIS
c 1 H
aupAS uO ua
69¢ 216 Lei OSt Ge ESM Ise 2rIPLBESI €oL zei2zeeale th
eve Qo000000S1 SIOL 21S22e¢12 SIOL
Lig 21€ LLt OS! ce ES 18E 2GGrve>Gr) OL ozeeerLoz2 o£
OL2 2t€ LLI OG) GE €SV I8f PELLLOLE! 269 sSeze999G1 69
€22 21€ LL! OG! GE sy I8E 9E29EEG2I VEO 2SyC9C981 89
os! 2€ LL! OS! Ge Sw IGE EVZEO02ZZ! 169 O1vO9SSLI 19
eel 2 LLi OSI GE SW If 2€¥S22G11 689 OS1S¢2191 99
eG «te LLt OS! GE ESF I8€ BLB6EC9801 989 OLILOEeSI S99
eo 2 LLI OSI GE SY I8€ SLSVOZC01 £89 SELvOIIS! GV
96 2€ LLY OSI 6E SY IBE CIVECORG 89 VBL99I771 9
v 2IE LLI OS! GE €SP I8E LLEIGZEE @L9 voEeesLE! SED
21€ LLI OS) GF FESVgpIe¢ Gsisoses GLO €v9LozlE! €9
zie LLt 0s) «6c 29evahs1e¢ OE rLOIVE 219 GLE6SIG21 S29
Zl€, LLI OS! «GE J BIT ,18e LOBIeGEL 49 VEzEBTGI! 29
Booze LLI ost Gt gece 4 1se vEocICoL L199 OVEl2vvII B19
8802, LL! 0S) Ge coe §iBe CEILIgeL 799 LVVY99GO! 919
Loci int ost 6¢ drve Fiee seec.rco 199 €12v0ISO) Id
3VOln LL! OS) Gf FGIE 18f z9L28¢99 659 89S2¢€1001 219
26 §LLt OG! Gt Vee 18 29E1CeC9 969 1ILIvS96 19
eet OS) «1 Fee2 ise giegi vos €69 v22v25626 809
Lui ost €2 Ses2 "ise Livicons 69 0S62L988 909
cL OGi 91 L2e2 § IBE GILLIOSS 8v9 svOolscre vo9
Lit OG! @ glI2 ¢1Be S¥OOTGes Gv9 I€GIvvIg 209
tlt OS) "06! I8€ 20220105 2¥9 O8€GVOBL 09
LLt [OCI zOl! 1s¢ E€seoccoY 6€9 9EGGS2L 8S
LLU ZOGIg, 87S) yige eGLvEBZy 9€9 VOCOSELD 9c
Lut is2igs 1ee1 Pigs seviecce ve9 8GOLVV29
Lvi z001g? E21 1B¢ OL2s8H9e 1€9 BVe128L¢ 2s
ei “GL pOOT IBE SIt2LsEE 829 oo16SyvES 0S
ge 0S $26 8 18€ OO8IvBOE G29 oss9orecy aP
66 Gz lis Fige s]egzeez €29 PLeILySV oF
62 tio Site 21962652 29 96612917 vr
IFS? SpELE GOEIDSV2 L€29 OOOOBEGE EB2P
top ans Jisy fiese co2zsov"2 cies GEscocse 980%
fopard hop 39d Cone hopsed lopsed hopaed = hopued
Spunog spunog Spunog spunog Spunog = #punog
Saye : seats peduind {ep ad
wale “SB mane” wayuge. Guatay tie Sento Pad Tenet anaTLe
ma wollen endiaa osatee i aN peaks ie aro jo Ayvony eboylarseg = wouduunguop = woudurntuo)
AFODISZ 4WOPISD 4807183 A80D1S7 BOD HZ W807 187
0] 4 I (a) 9 9 Vv
uoyo}iaoun jana MOF —|
LvB2e0€
VIOCEOE
9L2v962
$920S82
6E90VL2
0€ 25€92
SLBECS2
BIvIEv2
O1L2ve2
9092622
L96S912
1992802
9$S2002
LeSS2cl
eLvisel
492081!
GGLttLt
LS6SV91
1g¢928G1
OSLi2si
oszeori
11690¥1
9982S¢1
€2800€!
2610921
ve9202)
L2v9sgit
6rciitt
2816901
0908201
61S88G
66v0SG
O6G621G
Q6L8L9
m0 ee
wn? andy
@ buisoesruy
noe
Wim OPAsRS
Werojndog
752, H. G. SMITH.
ON THE RESIN OF THE OUTER BARK OF
MELALEUCA UNCINATA.
By HENRY G. SMITH, F.C.S.
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, August 1, TST al
SOME time back attention was directed to certain peculi-
arities shown by the outer bark of this Melaleuca, and
material forwarded to the Technological Museum, Sydney,
by Mr. H. Burgess of Cygnet River, Kangaroo Island, South
Australia. Mr. Burgess stated that this thin inflammable
bark could be obtained in large quantities, if suitable
apparatus for collecting it were employed. He also pointed
out that it appeared to be almost imperishable, as no alter-
ation seemed to have taken place after exposure to the sun
and the weather for at least twenty years. This species
of Melaleuca is known as ** Broombush”’ in Kangaroo Island,
where it grows extensively on the wet clay flats, as well
as on the high lands. The shrub in the moister positions
becomes very dense, and practically free from other species,
but on the higher land it is more sparsely distributed and
intermingled with other plants and trees. The species is,
however, not restricted to Kangaroo Island, but has a most
extensive range, and occurs plentifully in the neighbourhood
of Wyalong, New South Wales.
In 1907 a paper! was read before this Society, by Mr.
R. T. Baker and myself, on the EKssential Oil of Melaleuca
unecinata, in which it was shown that an excellent
‘*Cajuput’’ oil could be distilled from this species. The
present investigation is thus a further addition to the
economics of this Australian plant.
1 The Australian Melaleucas and their Essential Oils, Part II.
RESIN OF THE OUTER BARK OF MELALEUCA UNCINATA. Zao
The thin paper-like bark, or epidermis, entirely clothes
the stems, and branchlets, and when dry peels off in thin
semi-transparent sheets, without distinctive structure.
The under bark is quite separate, splits longitudinally, and
does not contain the resin to any extent. This inner bark
gives a fair quantity of ash on ignition, and isolated crystals
of oxalate of lime can be detected microscopically in the
section.
When ignited at one end, a piece of the thin outer bark
continues to burn like a candle until wholly consumed,
giving a bright flame with a considerable amount of black
smoke, and an odour of burning resin. It is evident how
greatly this material would aid firesin the Australian bush
where this Melaleuca grows.
The inflammable substance in this bark consists almost
entirely of a resin, and only a small proportion of a vege-
table wax was detected.
The presence of a resin in quantity is a most unusual
occurrence in plants belonging to the natural order Myr-
taceze, and I have been unable to find but one previous
instance of a true resin having been recorded for this genus;
(Hartzer, Ber. 9, 314, in the leaves of Eucalyptus globulus).
Solereder refers toa statement by Moller (Rindenan-
atomie, pp. 344-347) that resin spaces occur in the
secondary bast in Eucalyptus viminalis and E. Stuartiana
as an improbable one, and that it required re-examination.
The outer bark of M. uncinata is reddish-brown extern-
ally with grey patches at places; the markings indicate a
more or less concentric arrangement, and the bark can be
peeled off in that way. The outer bark when removed from
a stem 1 cm. diameter was only $ mm. thick, was semi-
opaque, reddish-brown internally, and somewhat tough;
the thickest bark in the bulk sample received was under
1mm. After boiling in alcohol to remove the resin, the
234 H. G. SMITH,
bark was slightly swollen, and had the general appearance
of sheet rubber without its elasticity.
Numerous specimens of M. uncinata from various Aus-
tralian localities are in the Museum herbarium, and they
all have this thin outer bark on the stem and twigs, which
ignited readily and gave a similar odour in each case. This
peculiarity is thus a constant feature with this species of
Melaleuca throughout the whole range of its distribution.
Although nearly one-fourth of this thin outer bark con-
sists of resin, yet a natural exudation of the resin has not
been observed, although one might expect such to occur
under abnormal conditions.
The resin, after extracting from the finely powdered
bark with boiling alcohol and evaporating to dryness on the
water bath, was of an orange-brown colour, semi-trans-
parent, in thin pieces, very brittle, and easily powdered
between the fingers. In general appearance it somewhat
resembles ordinary shellac, but is less transparent and
more brittle. The specific gravity was 1°135 at 15° O.
The resin was almost entirely soluble in alcohol, more so
in ether-alcohol and readily in acetone. It was only
slightly soluble in chloroform, the portion going into solution
being principally the neutral bodies and not the acid resin.
Benzene acted similarly to chloroform. Turpentine had
little action even on continued boiling. The resin was only
partly soluble in ethyl-acetate.
The resin was practically soluble in hot glacial acetic
acid, remaining in solution when cold. Onslow evaporation
microscopic crystals were formed in quantity, the whole
mass being more or less crystalline.
The resin was only slightly dissolved on boiling in a
solution of borax.
RESIN OF THE OUTER BARK OF MELALEUCA UNCINATA, 235
The acetone solution makes a splendid cold lacquer for
brass. It is slightly coloured with a yellowish tint, dries
quickly, becomes very hard, adheres to metal with great
tenacity, and has a brilliant lustre, probably this is one of
the best uses to which the resin could be economically put.
It could readily be extracted by the acetone direct from
the finely powdered bark.
Substances extracted.
The bark was finely ground in a mill and passed through
an 80 mesh sieve. The powder contained 3°82 per cent.
moisture, and 1°89 per cent. ash. 10 grams of the powder
were treated with ether in a soxhlet for six. hours, when
the amount extracted was 1°827 grams = 18°27 per cent.
The same amount of powder, when extracted for twelve
hours, gave 20°6 per cent. The residue afterwards boiled
in alcohol yielded 2°68 per cent. more, so that altogether
23°28 per cent. was extracted.
When dissolved directly in boiling alcohol, the amount.
extracted was equal to 23°22 per cent. When this was dried,
powdered, and extracted with ether, the whole dissolved
with the exception of 2°6 per cent. The greater portion of
the freshly extracted resinous bodies was thus soluble in
both alcohol and ether.
=
The Vegetable Wax.
The filtered boiling alcoholic extract on cooling deposited
the wax ina flocculent condition. This was filtered off,
purified from boiling alcohol, dissolved in ether and filtered.
The substance remaining on final evaporation represented
not more than about 0°1 per cent. of the amount first
extracted. The wax was somewhat brittle after fusing,
and melted sharply at 67-68 C. The outer portion of a
stem in the green state was scraped, the powder boiled in
alcohol and the wax prepared as above. It was identical
236 H. G. SMITH.
with the portion precipitated from the boiling alcohol of
the powdered bark. It thus appears that the whitish
patches on the exterior of the bark consist of a vegetable
wax.
The Acid Resin.
The ether solution from the dry alcoholic extract was
neutralised with alcoholic potash, the ether removed, the
pasty resin-salt dissolved in water, and the solution
extracted with ether to remove adhering substances. The
aqueous solution was then heated and afterwards acidified
with hydrochloric acid. The acid resin represented from
65 to 70 per cent. of the whole resin extracted. When
dried and powdered it was of alight drab colour, becoming
brown with alkalis; for this reason it could not be satis-
factorily titrated as the end reaction was obscured.
The acid resin melted at 148 — 150° C., darkening at about
135—140° O., and was partly soluble in ammonia. The
acid resin evidently consists of a single substance, as is
indicated from the following analytical data:—
0°1428 gram gave 0°1192 H,O and 0°3628 gram CO,=
69°25 per cent. C., and 9°272 per cent. H.
C,,H..O, contains 68°88 per cent. C., and 9°452 per
cent. H.
That this formula is probably the correct one is suggested
from the results obtained with the silver salt, prepared
from the neutralised resin by the addition of nitrate of
silver in the usual way.
0°2048 gram silver salt gave 0°0551 gram Ag = 26°9%
0°1042 ,, 4 se , 0°0283 ,, Ag =Zie
C,,H.,AgO, contains 26°8 per cent. silver.
The alcoholic solution of this acid resin gives a deep green
colour, and deep green coloured precipitate with ferric
chloride. This reaction is also given with the original
RESIN OF THE OUTER BARK OF MELALEUCA UNCINATA. Dat
resin, but the neutral bodies do not give it, so that it is
peculiar to the acid resin.
Neutral Resins.
The ether extract from the resin-salt, when evaporated
to dryness, consisted ofa light coloured resinous substance
of a brittle nature, which melted at about 125 — 130° C.,
but the melting point was not sharp, and it evidently was
not a single substance. The alcoholic solution was bitter
to the taste. The neutral bodies represent about one-
fourth of the amount of the resins extracted.
Action of Nitric Acid.
Five grams of the powdered resin were treated with
40 c.c. nitric acid; dense fumes were at once formed in the
cold. The solution was boiled one and a half hours until
clear and brown fumes ceased to form. The whole was
then evaporated almost to dryness on the water bath, the
residue boiled in water, in which it was only partly soluble,
and treated with potash. Aithough crystals of potassium
picrate were not formed, yet the after treatment showed
that picric acid or an allied substance was present in traces,
as it was possible to dye wool yellow. The mass insoluble
in potash was of a yellowish colour, and although scarcely
soluble in potash, was soluble in hot soda solution, from
which it was again precipitated by acids. It was evidently
an oxidised product and not a nitro compound, as the test
for nitrogen gave negative results.
In the bark residue small amounts of tannin substances,
and a glucoside, hydrolised by boiling acid, were detected,
but no other constituent of interest was found.
bo
Se)
o2)
J. H. MAIDEN.
NOTHS ON ACACIA, No. IJ.—EXTRA-TROPICAL
WESTERN AUSTRALIA.
(WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.)
By J. H. MAIDEN, f[.8.0., F.R.S., F.L.S.
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, September 5, 1917. ]
Pungentes (Plurinerves).
I. A. XEROPHILA W. V. Fitzgerald, Journ. W.A. Nat. Hist.
Soc., p. 8, (May, 1904). (Syn. A. Fitegeraldi Pritzel,
Engler’s Bot. Jahrb. xxxv, 291, 1905).
Originally described from Bardoc, thirty miles north of
Kalgoorlie. It has since been collected by Mr. Surveyor
Anketell in Muir’s Transcontinental Railway Survey, 1901
(Kalgoorlie, going east). :
Pungentes (Uninerves).
II, ACACIA PRAINIT n. sp.
Frutex parvus, erectus, glaber, pungens, 2-3’ altus, ramulis
paullo angulatis; phyllodiis angusto-linearibus, pugioniformibus,
nervo medio prominente, mucrone longo, acuto, non striato; capi-
tulis in racemis axillaribus gracilibus, pedunculis fere filiformibus;
floribus glabris, 5-meris ca. 20 capitulo; calyce angusto, fere lineare,
corolle dimidio equilongo; petalis libris; pistillo laeve, nitente;
Jegumine seminibusque non Visis.
A free-flowering small, erect bushy glabrous shrub of two
or three feet, prickly to the touch because of the pungent
tips of the phyllodes; branchlets slightly angular.
Phyllodia about 3 cm. (1+ inch) long, narrow linear,
thickish, rigid, pugioniform, with a prominent midrib, and a
long sharp mucrone; not striate. There are usually two
but sometimes three glands, which vary somewhat in regard
to the distance from the base.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 239
Flower-heads in slender axillary racemes, the peduncles
almost filiform. Flowers glabrous, 5-merous, about twenty
in the head, which is globular. Bracts at base of flowers
not seen. Oalyx narrow; almost linear, free, thin, half as
long as the corolla. Petals free, thickened at the apex.
Pistil smooth and shiny. Pods and seed not seen.
Southern Oross (J. H. M., October, 1909).
Named in honour of Sir David Prain, F.R.s., Director of
the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, who has fen most kind
in assisting me with material of this genus.
The following specimens are referred to this species :—
1. A shrub six feet high, Jibberding, Watheroo Rabbit-
proof fence, August, 1905, in flower only (Max Koch, 1030a,
formerly mixed with and labelled 1030), is referable to this
species. The specimens are not good, but the flowers
appear to be smaller and with ciliate tips to the sepals.
2. Coolgardie, flowers only (H. Nathan, October, 1899,
and L. C. Webster, 1900).
The structure of the flowers is the same as that of A.
Prainii, although it appears to have fewer flowers (13 —16)
in the head, but it has longer and narrower phyllodes, and
the varietal name linearis is therefore proposed for it.
If the phyllodes be alone considered, A. Prainii comes
under Pungentes (Uninerves), and in that series would
be placed near A. sphacelata, A. genistoides, and A.
ineequiloba.
But its racemose inflorescence takes it to Uninerves
(Racemosz) where, however, it seems to have no Glose
relations. Its position can be reconsidered when pods are
available. |
Affinities.
1. With A. sphacelata Benth. In A. sphacelata the
phyllodes are smaller, narrower and not flattish.
240 J. H. MAIDEN.
2. With A. genistoides A. Cunn. In A. genistoides the
midrib is scarcely if at all evident, and the phyllode is not
flattened. The flower in A. genistoides is ciliate, typically
spathulate and not linear.
3. With A. incequiloba W. V. F. A. incequiloba differs
from A. Prainii in the phyllodes, which are less rigid, and
have the central nerve less defined, less numerous phyllodes,
which are slightly narrower and longer (4-5 cm.); tips
curved.
The flower-heads are in racemes, each raceme having
leafy bracts with ciliate margins, which spring from a
peduncle not in the axil, but a little removed from it, along
the rhachis. The flower-heads are slightly oblong in shape,
whereas those of A. Prainii are globular. Flowers about
23 in the head. Sepals narrow. The petals have black
hairs on the outside on the upper half.
4. With A. heteroneura Benth. This species has phyl-
lodes generally similar in outline and a similar midrib, but
the fine lateral nerves of this species are absent in A.
Prainii. A. heteroneura is also few-flowered, has a broad
calyx and a pubescent pistil.
Pungentes (Uninerves).
III. A. INHSQUILOBA W. V. Fitzgerald, Journ. Bot., L, 18,
(1912).
This species is hitherto known only from R. Helms’ speci-
mens collected on the Elder Exploring Hxpedition, Victoria
Desert, Camp 56, 19th September, 1891. The following
specimens appear to be referable to it.
1. A shrub about four feet high, in flower only. Oow-
cowing, August, 1904 (Max Koch, No. 1030).
2. A shrub of three feet. In fruit only. Kellerberrin,
November, 1907 (W. V. Fitzgerald).
NOTES ON ACACIA. 241
Attention may be invited to the tendency of the flower-
heads to be oblong in the type.
The Cowcowing specimens (1030) are inequilobed (as
regards the calyx) but not so much so as the type.
The Kellerberrin specimens are in fruit, which may be
described as follows, as the fruit has not been previously
described. Straight or slightly curved, 5 or 6 cm. long
(but not fully ripe), 5 mm. broad, margins slightly thickened,
moniliform. Seed (not quite ripe), longitudinally disposed,
with a broadish funicle once or twice folded terminating
in large granular basilar arillus. |
Affinities.
1. With A. genistoides A. Cunn. Mr. Fitzgerald’s own
unpublished remarks are “‘The foliage and general appear-
ance are those of specimens of A. genistoides. It differs
from that species in the bracteate peduncles, conspicuous
differently shaped bracteoles, fewer mostly 4-merous flowers
in the heads, markedly distinct calyx, and broader thin,
unribbed petals.”’ 3
2. With A. Prainii n. sp. It is not necessary to fully
repeat the remarks under A. incequiloba at p. 240. The
two species present considerable resemblance, but the
inflorescence is racemose in A. Prainii and the flower-heads
globular, while they are slightly oblong in A. incequiloba,
which also possesses leafy bracts, and also long black hairs
on the petals, neither of which characters occurs in A.
Prainii.
Uninerves (Triangulares).
IV. AcactA RENDLEI 2. sp.
Frutex spinosus, glaucus, 23’ altus; phyllodiis sub-triangularibus
vel irregulariter trapeziformibus, ca. 7 mm. longis, apice ca. 7 mm.
latis, phyllodiis plerumque spinis tenuibus, flexibilibus, brunneis,
stipularibus ca. 1 cm. longis suppletis; phyllodiis duobus nervis
P—September 5, 1917.
242 J. H. MAIDEN.
principalibus, uno nervo inferiore margini approximato et in
mucronem acutem terminante, altero e basi phyllodie in marginem
dorsalem terminante; nervis minoribus ex nervis principalibus
provenientibus; floribus in capitulis solitariis, axillaribus, globosis,
pedunculis filiformibus 1 — 1:5 cm. longis; calyce profunde lobato,
hirsuto, corolla ca. triplo zquilongo; petalis partim disjunctis,
glabris; pistillo longo, laeve; legumine seminibusque non visis.
A spinous glaucous shrub of two and a half feet. Phyllodes
sub-triangular to irregularly trapeziform, about 7 mm, long
and about as wide at the top; the phyllodes largely replaced
by thin, flexible brown stipular spines up to 1 cm. long.
The phyllodes have usually two main nerves, one nearly
following the lower straight margin, and terminating in a
sharp mucrone, while from the base of the phyllode usually
springs a second thinner nerve terminating in the dorsal
margin. From both nerves some smaller nerves proceed.
Flowers in single axillary globular heads, about thirty in
the head, on filiform peduncles of 1—1°5 cm. Flowers
5-merous; calyx deeply lobed and hairy, about a third as
long as the corolla. Petals divided part of the way down;
glabrous. Pistil long and smooth. Pod and seeds not seen.
Type in clayey sand near Fraser Range, 2nd November,
1891, Elder Exploring Expedition (R. Helms).
Named in honour of Dr. Alfred Barton Rendle, F.R.s.,
Keeper of the Department of Botany of the British Museum,
London, who has been most kind in assisting me with
material of this genus.
Referable to this species is a specimen from Coolgardie,
1900 (L. C. Webster).
A ffnities.
1. With A. strongylophylla F.v.M. In A. strongylophylla
we have a longer, larger, entirely glabrous flower; the
calyx is very slight, with a spoon-shaped apex to each sepal.
The petals are divided one-third of the way down, and the
NOTES ON ACACIA. 243
calyx is two-thirds as long as the corolla. In A. strongy-
dophylla also, the phyllode is less triangular or trapeziform,
and has only one main nerve.
At the same time it seems to me that in habit of the
plant, in the presence of stipular spines, and prominent
mucrones, in the general shape of the phyllodes, the new
species presents an obviously very close affinity to A.
strongylophylla.
Mueller (Fragm. viii, 227) hesitated about the position
of A. strongylophylla. He placed it in the neighbourhood
of A. idiomorpha A. Cunn., A. pyrifolia DO., A. anceps DC.,
all of which belong to the Series Uninerves, but to the
Sub-series Armatze, Racemosz, Brevifolize respectively. I
have already suggested that the place of A. Rendlei is with
the Sub-series Triangulares.
_ 2. With A. dilatata Benth. In this Sub-series it exhibits
obviously close affinity to A. dilatata, in the shape, size
and venation of the phyllodes and in the pungent mucrones.
A. dilatata differs in the comparative fewness and small
size of the spinescent stipules, and in the hispid covering.
The flowers of A. dilatata are hispid all over (not the calyx
only, as in A. Rendlei), and the calyx is half as long as the
corolla. |
3. With A. Luehmanni F.v.M. There is a general
similarity in regard to the phyllodes of the two species
which is drawn attention toas matter of convenience. The
Stipular spines are quite small and the structure of the
flowers is quite different. The phyllodes are plurinerved,
that is to say, one is (or occasionally two are) not dominant,
as in uninerved species.
The placing of A. Luehmanni F.v.M. in the Plurinerves
{Triangulares) draws attention to the fact that the boundary
line between that Series and the Uninerves (Triangulares)
vests on minor and not larger details. The Series of
Py
> a <S, :
244 J. H. MAIDEN.
Bentham have been of great value, but in view of the
additional knowledge we have acquired concerning Aus-
tralian Acacias during the last half century, the broad
classification requires amendment in certain directions,
Uninerves (Brevifoliz).
V. A. TysonI Luehmann, Vict. Nat., xiii, 112 (1896).
Following are supplementary notes :—
(1) Called by the settlers ‘‘Limestone Wattle” at Mount.
Narryer, Murchison River (Tyson).
_ (2) “Twelve feet high.” Nannine (W. V. Fitzgerald).
(3) 1°3—2 metres high. Cowcowing (M. Koch, No. 1666).
This is probably correct, but No. 3 specimen consists of
little more than phyllodes.
Uninerves (Racemosez).
VI. A. ASTIVALIS Pritzel, in Engler’s Bot. Jahrb. xxxv,
_ 800 (with a figure), was described as a small glabrous tree,
about three metres high, and was recorded from near Moora
and near Watheroo. Mr. W. V. Fitzgerald collected it, a.
shrub of 8—10 feet, Cunderdin, 104 miles east of Perth.
Dr. Stoward now sends it from cultivated land near Baandee
Railway Station (149 miles east of Perth). Land of best
quality, Salmon Gum and Gimlet. A strong growing shrub
of six feet high, spontaneous. He also sends it from
Kunonoppin (No. 68). Mr. L. OC. Webster collected it at
Coolgardie, 351 miles east of Perth.
Uninerves (Racemosez).
VII. A. SCLEROSPERMA F.v.M.
(Syn. A. spodiosperma F.v.M. and A. leucosperma F.v.M.)
(1) A. sclerosperma F.v.M. in Wing’s Southern Science
Record ii, 150, (July, 1882).
I have not seen the type, which is “near the Gascoyne
River, Oliver Jones,’’ but I have seen a specimen labelled
NOTES ON ACACIA. 245
A. spodiosperma from the Gascoyne River, Mrs. Gribble,
1886, given. me by Prof. Hwart, and also a specimen labelled
A. sclerosperma F.v.M. (by Mueller) in pod only, Nickol
River, W.A. (A. Forrest), given by Mr. Luehmann to me
in 1897. I consider them, from the material available, to
be identical with (2) and (8).
In the original description of A. sclerosperma, Mueller
says “Foliage resembling that of A. dentigera (misprint
for dentifera) and A. pycnophylla.
(2) A. spodiosperma F.v.M. type, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.
iii, (2nd Ser.) 164 (1888). Near Lake Austin, W.A. H.S.
King. Considered by Mueller at the time to be aff. A.
seirpifolia and A. calamifolia, but now, I think correctly,
placed near A. salicina Lindl.
(3) A. leucosperma F.v.M. MSS. Quoted by Pritzel in
Engler’s Bot. Jahrb., xxxv, 302, (1905), and described by
him as F.v.M. ined. and Pritzel. See also a note on it by
Ewart and White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxii, 91 (1909).
I offer a translation of Diels and Pritzel’s remarks, as
the species has been otherwise only imperfectly described.
A, leucosperma F.v.M. ined. et Ei. Pritzel n. sp.
In the Melbourne Herbarium I found a specimen collected by
H.S. King near Lake Austin, named by F.v. Miller A. leucosperma
n. sp. but never publicly described. From more complete specimens
collected by us this species may be described :—
A shrub or tree up to 3°5 m. high, very glabrous, the young
parts often glaucescent. Phyllodes spreading, linear, obtuse at
the apex, subtruncate or curved back, somewhat thick, without
nerves except for the prominent middle nerve, pale or glaucous
green. Heads solitary in the axils or shortly (up to 3), racemose,
peduncles conspicuous, heads conspicuous about 20 flowered.
Flowers 5-merous, calyx shortly truncate, petals smooth. The
pod when quite ripe having woody valves strongly arched above
246 J. H. MAIDEN.
the seeds, dark brown, narrowed in breadth between the seeds:
about towards the middle, seeds more or less globular, dark yellow,
shining. Unripe pods somewhat smooth, glaucescent. Phyllodes.
5—8 cm. long, 2—4 mm. broad. Pedunclel|—2cm. long. Ripe
pod 10-12 cm. long, up to 13 mm. broad above the seeds. Ripe
seed ‘5-°8 mm. in diameter. Habitat in the Austin district near
Carnarvon at Shark’s Bay, most frequent in the sandy muddy sea.
coasts, flowered in the month of August (D. 3653). There is an
incomplete indeterminate specimen of the same species in the
_ Berlin Herbarium, collected by Gaudichaud at Shark’s Bay about
1830.
The species bears a strong affinity to A. salicona Lindl, and is.
not certainly distinguished from that species except in the fruits.
and seeds (which are very distinct); it differs, however, in having
much narrower phyllodes.
The late Dr. A. Morrison collected it at Onslow, Ash-
‘burton River, so that it is recorded from Shark’s Bay
(Carnarvon), round the coast as far as Nickol Bay, but it
has not yet been recorded from the Northern Territory.
VIL A BLAKELYI 0. sp.
Frutex parvus, suberectus, ramulis rotundatis, paullo curvatis,
glabris; phyllodiis lineari-lanceolatis, 10-11:5 cm. longis, 7-8
mm. latis, rectis v. paullo falcatis, crassiusculis, marginibus incras-
satis, costa media prominente, duabis venis parallelibus minus.
prominentibus, uno utroque latere costae mediae; costa media.
glandulam phyllodiae basin versus gerente; capitulis paucis im
brevibus racemis, floribus numerosis, 5-meris; calyce tenue, non
ciliato, truncato, plus triplo petalis aequilongo; petalis basi facile
disjungentibus; pistillo laeve; legumine lineare, paullo contorto,
moniliforme, phyllodiis longiore, marginibus pallidis, seminibus.
angustis, funiculo bis curvato et in arillum paullo inflatum
terminante.
A small sub-erect shrub. Branchlets rounded and slightly
curved, glabrous. Phyllodia linear-lanceolate, 10-11°5 cm.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 247
(4—4°5 inches) long, 7-8 mm. broad, straight or slightly
falcate, the apex a rather sharp point, texture rather thick,
margins thickened, with a prominent midrib, and two less
prominent, but usually quite distinct, parallel veins, one on
each side of the midrib. One prominent gland on the
midrib, an unusual situation, near the base of the phyllode.
Flower-heads few, in short racemes, on peduncles of about
1 cm., with numerous 5-merous flowers.
Calyx very transparent, not ciliate, without midribs,
truncate, rather more than one-third as long as the petals;
the petals easily separating to the base, and without mid-
ribs. Pistil smooth.
Pods linear, slightly twisted and moniliform, longer than
the phyllodes, with pale-coloured, smooth, thickened valve-
margins. Seeds narrow, the funicle usually bent twice and
terminating in a slightly swollen arillus.
Minginew, in flower and fruit. Type. (J.H.M., Oct. 1909).
The following specimens are referable to this species :—
1. Minginew, in flower only, and phyllodes narrower
than the type (W. V. Fitzgerald, September, 1903).
2. Yandanooka, south of Minginew, in flower only. (A.
Morrison, September, 1904).
3. Northam, in flower only (J. H. Gregory, 1900).
4. Geraldton, in flower and fruit, with phyllodes narrower
than the type. (Dr. J. B. Cleland, 1907).
In honour of William Faris Blakely, Botanical Assistant,
Botanic Gardens, who has given me most valuable assist-
ance in the elucidation of this genus.
Affinities.
1. With A. bivenosa DC. Perhaps its closest affinity is
to A. bivenosa DO., and particularly to that form of it
originally named A. xanthina by Bentham. A. Blakelyiis
primarily uninerved,although the secondary veins are some-
248 J. H. MAIDEN.
times almost continuous, and thus may simulate a pluri-
nerved phyllode. Similarly the ‘“‘bivenose’’ character of
A, xanthina is not always present.
As a rule the phyllodes of A. Blakelyi are narrower than
those of A. bivenosa (and even of the narrower A. xanthina
form), while the conspicuous gland of the former is not
present in the latter species.
The flowers of the two species resemble each other a
good deal in structure, but the pods are very different,
those of A. bivenosa considerably resembling those of A.
salicina.
2. With A. rostellifera Benth. There is no doubt that
it has often been confused, on general resemblances, with |
A. rostellifera Benth. In that species we have one-nerved
phyllodes, with two to four glands on the edge of the
phyllodes, axillary flowers, calyx finely ciliate and a hairy
pistil. It is sharply separated from A. Blakelyi, which has
a gland in an unusual position,—on the midrib.
As regards fruits, while I have excellent ones as regards
A. Blakelyi, I have only fruits from a cultivated shrub of
A. rostellifera, the spontaneous specimens corresponding to
the seeds, having been misplaced. I therefore speak with
diffidence in regard to them, since the pods of A. rostellif era
have not been described. The cultivated pods referred to -
have valves very much wider than those of A. Blakelyi,
while the arillus is smaller.
IX. A. PYRIFOLIA DO. var. MORRISONI, var. nov.
Globe HIlll, Ashburton River (banks of river). (Dr. A.
Morrison, 6th October, 1905).
In a short paper in the Scottish Botanical Review, April,
1912, p. 98, Dr. Morrison described this form as a new
variety, but omitted to give it a name, and I rectify this
omission by naming it after our lamented friend.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 249
Oompared with the type, it has narrower and smaller
phyllodes, and is less glaucous. The pods are narrower
and smaller, the seeds more globular and the funicle is
about half the length of that of the typical form. Dr.
Morrison describes the funicle in the variety and it varies
in A. pyrifolia.
Plurinerves (Nervose).
X. A. MULTILINEATA W. V.F., in Journ. W. A. Nat. Hist.
Soc., 13 (May, 1904).
The pods have not been described. The following is from
Mr. Fitzgerald’s MSS., and the pods were collected at
Kellerberrin in November, 1907.
‘*Pod linear, torulose, compressed, tomentose, seeds
longitudinal, ovate, dark brown, funicle short, terminating
in a pale-coloured cupular basilar arillus.”’
Julifloree (Rigidule).
XI. A. OHISHOLMI Bail., in Queensl. Agric. Journ. Iv, 47
(1899).
Manutarra, Ashburton River, A. Morrison, 4th October,
1905. In fruit only.
This seems to be conspecific with A. Chisholmi Bailey, a
species hitherto only known from Northern Queensland. It
differs slightly from the type in the rather more curved
pod, and in the depression of the seeds, which is not so
deep in the type. —
The specimen appears to be taken from a well developed
plant. A. Chisholmi approaches some specimens of A.
linarioides Benth. closely. The chief differences are in the
more numerous phyllodes, which are obscurely one-nerved,
and the narrower pods of the latter.
Julifloree (Rigidulee, but closer allied to A. aneura.)
XII. A. CRASPEDOCARPA F.v.M., Melb. Chem. and Drugg.,
New Ser. ii, 73, 1887. (Syn. A. ewphleba W. V. F.)
250 J. H. MAIDEN.
The co-types came from Lake Austin, H. 8. King, and
between Yuin and the Murchison River, Hrnest Giles. (To
quote more than one specimen as a type is to be deprecated,
and has often led to uncertainty).
(1) Mr. I. Tyson, Mount Narryer, Murchison River, sent
it to the late Mr. R. Helms in 1897 with the note “‘The
native name is “‘Turla.’’ Settlers sometimes call it ‘‘ Round-
leaf Mulga.”’
(2) A. euphleba W. V. Fitzgerald, in Journ. W. A. Nat.
Hist. Soc. (May, 1904), was described from a small leaved
form of A. craspedocarpa in young bud and without pods.
Type of A. ewphleba from near Milly’s Soak, near Cue,
Murchison River district.
(3) This specimen (No. 2) may be identical with “‘A plant
with smaller phyllodia, obtained near Stuart’s Range by
Mr. Winnecke, may belong to A. craspedocarpa also; the
specimens however are in a young flowering state only.”’
(4) Diels and Pritzel in Engler’s Bot. Jahrb., xxxv, 304,
with fig. 35a, also found it in the Austin district.
(5) A dense, sturdy shrub of 6—8 feet. In both flower
and fruit. Cue to Milly’s Soak (J.H.M., September, 1909).
The flowers, the only ones I have seen, are sub-spicate.
(6) Tampa, 120 miles north of Kalgoorlie, in early fruit
(J. F. Jutson, No. 9, July, 1915).
Mueller says ‘‘The phyllodia of our new species are not
dissimilar to those of A. translucens, though generally
broader, but there is a wide difference in flowers and fruit;
of real affinity is A. lysiphleea, from which however, as
well as from nearly all other species, it is really distin-
guished by its remarkably broad-margined fruit, reminding
in that of A. sericata.”’ ;
Fitzgerald gives the affinity as A. dictyophleba F.v.M.,
doubtfully, basing it on the venation of the phyllodes.
NOTES ON ACACIA. 25T
Diels and Pritzel (op. cit., p. 305) give the affinity as A.
aneura F.v.M., based on the pods, and I independently
arrived at the same conclusion. Their figure of the pod
might be better, particularly as regards reticulation, but
the yellow coloured, varnished, reticulated pod is strikingly
like that of A. aneura, particularly of Western Australian
plants of the species.
Julifloree (Stenophylle).
XITI. A. GRASBYI nN. sp.
Frutex divaricatus ad 10’ altus. Phyllodiis teretibus 4 — 5 cm.
longis, minute striatis, tomento breve tectis. Floribus 5-meris,
spicis ca. 2 cm. longis, pedunculis subaequilongis. Calyce truncato,
magno, basi hirsuto. Petalis glabris, dimidio longitudinis con-
junctis. Pistillo pruinoso. Legumine 8—11 cm. longo, 1 cm.
lato, applanato, inter semina incincto, valvarum marginibus.
incrassatis. Semine applanato, fere oblongato, fusco, funiculo
longo, applanato, rugoso, in arillum parvum, rotundatum, rugosum.
* terminante.
A divaricate shrub up to about 10 feet high, and usually
nearly as broad as high. Phyllodes terete, 4—5 cm. long,
minutely striate when seen under a good lens, covered with
a fine, short tomentum. Flowers 5-merous, in spikes, about
2 cm. long, on peduncles nearly as long. Bract long,
capitate or spathulate, stipe hairy. Calyx large, truncate,
hairy at the base. Petals glabrous, united about half way
up. Pistil hoary.
Pod straight or curved, 8 to 11 cm. long, up to 1 cm.
wide, flattish, constricted between the seeds, the valves.
with thickened edges, with dull or waxy lustre, with almost
transverse markings or fissures on the outside of the valves,
and very oblique ones on the inside through the contraction
of the membrane.
Seed flattish, oblong, nearly 9 mm. long, colour brown,
with a long white thin, flattish, wrinkled funicle, termin-
ating without folds in a small rounded wrinkled arillus.
252 J. H. MAIDEN.
Type from the Oue-Milly’s Soak road (J. H. M., October,
1909). Ihave taken this as the type, as I have a number
of specimens from this locality; I have compared the others
quoted, and do not find any differences from the type.
Named in honour of William Catton Grasby, Agricultural |
Editor of the ‘‘ Western Mail,’’ in recognition of his work,
extending over a number of years, in diffusing a knowledge
of the indigenous flora of Western Australia.
In addition to the type-specimens of A. Grasbyi I have
small specimens of the following, belonging to the same
species :—
1. Mount Narryer, Gascoyne River to Murchison River.
In flower only (Isaac Tyson, 1898). °*
2. Murchison Goldfields (W. V. Fitzgerald, September,
1903. No flowers or fruit).
As regards No. 1, on 25th September, 1914, a specimen
belongmg to the late Mr. R. Helms, came into my hands.
It bears the following label in Mr. Isaac Tyson’s hand-
writing (Mr. Tyson was a friend of Mr. Helms):—*‘ No. 9,
Acacia palustris. Seeds much liked by sheep, used as food
by the natives. ‘‘Cogada”’ is the native name.”
Coming to No. 2, the following two paragraphs are from
Mr. W. V. Fitzgerald’s MSS.:— :
1. “A. cyperophylla F.v.M. Shrub to a tree of 30 feet;
trunk to 10 feet, diam. to 1 foot; bark reddish, rather
rough, and curly; timber almost black, hard and rather
heavy. Vernacular name ‘Minnie Ritchie.’’’ Then fol-
lows a portion whichis a copy of a passage by him in Journ.
W. A. Nat. Hist. Soc. 2, Pt. i, p. 51 (1904).
2. “‘A. palustris J. G. Luehmann. EHrect shrub to a tree
of 20 feet; trunk and branches very tortuous, the former
to 6 feet, diam. to 1 foot; bark reddish-brown, rather rough
and curly; timber very dark, hard and heavy. “Snakewood.””
@
“Jed
NOTES ON ACACIA. 253
A clue to the identity of the above two species (in Mr.
Fitzgerald’s mind), is given in the following specimen
(phyllodes and twigs only, but the material is quite unmis-
takable), labelled by him :—
‘Acacia cyperophylla F.v.M. (with cynerophylla struck
out and palustris substituted). Erect with crooked stem
and curly bark, 10 feet high. ‘Snakewood.’ Murchison
Goldfields, September, 1903.”’
What the plant is, described in paragraph one as A.
eyperophylla, one cannot say. Certainly A. Grasbyi in
part, but certainly not the true A. cyperophylla F.v.M.,
see Part Lx of my “‘Forest Flora of New South Wales.”
Diels and Pritzel say, ‘“‘A. palustris Luehmann (nomen
ineptum). Shrub up to 2°5 metres high, the bark coming
away in twisted or curly flakes. In the Austin district.
near Oue, in muddy and stony soil. Flowering in June (D.
3276). (Engler’s Bot. Jahrb. xxxv, 308).”? A. Grasbyi is
doubtless referred to.
The new species has therefore been confused with A.
cyperophylla F.v.M. and A. palustris Luehmann. A.
Grasbyi appears to be closest to A. cyperophylla F.v.M., a
species I have carefully defined and illustrated in Part Lx
of my ‘“‘Forest Flora of New South Wales.’’ I will take
the opportunity of indicating the principal differences
between A. Grasbyi and both species.
A. cyperophylla is a broom-like bush; A. Grasbyi is more
spreading and round-headed. The phyllodes of A. Grasbyi
are short, averaging 4—5 cm. long, while those of A.
cyperophylla are 15—25 em. long. The flower-spikes have
much longer peduncles than those of A. cyperophylla. The
flowers do not differ in important characters from those of
A.cyperophylla; these differences may be stated as follows:
The calyx is rather larger in A. Grasbyi, and is hairy at
the base. The petals of A. Grasbyi are united about half.
} —_
” an
? ‘ %
a
254 J. H. MAIDEN. :
way up, and are sometimes reflexed. Pistil smooth or
hoary. The pods of A. cyperophylla are thinner and smaller
than those of A. Grasbyi, but there is undoubtedly affinity
between them.
The more important differences between A. Grasbyi and
A. palustris appear to be as follows:—The phyllodes of the
former are 4—5cm. long, those of the latter 8—15 cm. long
and much more markedly striate, and somewhat thinner.
The spikes of A. Grasbyi have long peduncles; those of A.
palustris are shortly pedunculate. The species are sharply
separated by the truncate calyx of the former, as compared
with the spathulate sepals of the latter.
The original type-specimen of A. palustris alone is known,
and it would be desirable to obtain additional material of
it and field-notes.
XIV. A. LONGIPHYLLODINEA 0. Sp.
Frutex crassus, rigidus, 6 — 8’ altus, caule glauca. Phyllodiis
omnino glabris, fere 38 cm. longis, rigidissimis, teretibus crasse
striatis, aliis costis prominentioribus quam aliis. Spicis plus quam
2 cm. longis, pedunculo lcm. Floribus 5-meris. Calyce truncato
vel semi-truncato, paulo lobato, corolla plus dimidio aequilongo,
apicibus crassatis, paucis nerviis sparse hirsutis. Petalis plus
dimidio longitudinis conjunctis, glabris. Pistillo laeve. Leguminibus
‘seminibusque non visis.
A coarse wiry, rigid, glaucous stemmed shrub of six to
eight feet. Phyllodes quite glabrous, nearly 38 cm. (15
inches) long, very rigid, terete, coarsely striate, some ribs
more prominent than others. The attachment to the
branchlet not wrinkled, but decurrent and not articulated.
Flower-spikes more than 2 cm. long, with a peduncle of
1 cm. (about 2 inch). The flowers closely packed in the
spike and 5-merous. Bract long and narrow with hairs
and a capitate head. Calyx truncate or semi-truncate,
“
|
NOTES ON ACACIA. 255
slightly lobed, reaching about two-thirds up the corolla;
tips thickened, long scattered hairs on some of the nerves
and tips, edges ragged. Petals united two-thirds up,
glabrous. Pistil smooth.
Pods and seeds not seen.
Jibberding, and Lake Monger, Victoria district. Growing
on sand-plains. September, 1905 (Max Koch, No. 1341).
In flower. (Distributed by Mr. Koch as A. cyperophylla
F.v.M.).
The closest affinity of this species is to A. cyperophylla,
_ and the differences may be indicated as follows :—
The phyllodes of A. longiphyllodinea are even more rigid
and coarse than those of dA. cyperophylla, and are up to
half as long again. They are entirely glabrous, deeply
grooved and ribbed. Some ribs stand up more prominently
than others. There is an absence of the constricted base
as seen in A. cyperophylla, the phyllode broadening a little
at the base, and becoming decurrent, with the grooves and
ridges continuous. Branchlets glaucous. The peduncles
are 1 cm. long, those of A. cyperophylla are shorter.
The flower spikes of the latter species are shorter.
- The truncate calyx of A. longiphyllodinea reaches about
two-thirds up the corolla; (half-way in A. cyperophylla).
The calyx is more definitely nerved than in A. cyperophylla,
and it has longish scattered hairs. |
[Jibberding is just east of the 120 mile peg, north of
Cunderdin, on the Hast Goldfields Railway. The south
end of Lake Monger commences about four miles north of
Jibberding, about three miles east of the 124 mile, and
extends north for about 40 miles parallel to Rabbit-proof
fence (Watheroo section), and thence north-east another 30
odd miles. The camp known as Lake Monger would be
situated to the west of the fence, opposite the 141 mile,
256 J. H. MAIDEN.
and about 21 miles north of Jibberding. This Lake Monger
is not to be confused with a Lake Monger in the Perth
district. |
XV. A. RAMULOSA W. V. Fitzgerald, in Journ. W.A. Nat.
Hist. Soc. No. 1, p. 15 (May, 1904).
This Western Australian species which has long been
confused with A. brachystachya Benth., I have figured
and described it in Part LxI of my ‘‘Forest Flora of New
South Wales.’’ I refer my readers to that work for details
as to synonymy, localities, etc.
XVI. A. LINOPHYLLA W.V.F., Journ. W. A. Nat. Hist. Soc.
16, (1904).
Described without flowers, and the affinity given as A.
xylocarpa A. Cunn., on the pods. Type from Mount
Magnet. A label of Mr. Fitzgerald’s gives the additional
localities of Nannine and Cue.
A specimen from Isaac Tyson, about 1897, from Mount
Narryer, Murchison River, has the label “‘No. 50, one of
the principal food seeds of the natives. Name ‘Burgedur.”
Settlers’ name is ‘Wanderry Mulga’.”
Cue (W. D. Campbell, June, 1902; J.H.M., October,
1909).
This pungent phylloded Acacia with succulent pods has
the pods suspended vertically like tallow candles hanging
by their wicks, giving the shrub or tree a singular appear-
ance. The pods are quite straight. Around Cue the plant
is a tall shrub, beyond Yalgoo, going west, it becomes a
tree of say 20 feet, with a stem of six inches and more. |
The flowers are undescribed, and may be described as
follows:—F lowers in nearly sessile spikes. Floral bracts
thick and short. Calyx divided nearly to the base; has a
few hairs. Calyx about a third as long as the corolla..
NOTES ON ACACIA. 257
Corolla united two-thirds of the way up, glabrous. Pistil
tomentose.
The affinity of this species both in flowers and fruits is
with A. ramulosa W. V. F.
XVII. A. EPHEDROIDES Benth.
A. TRATMANIANA W.V.F. <A. FILIFOLIA Benth.
Those who have carefully studied A. ephedroides,
described without ripe fruit, do not need to be reminded
that it is in an unsatisfactory state. Mueller declined to
touch it in his Iconography, and no recent writer has
critically dealt with it and its affinities. Following isa
translation of the original description of A. ephedroides.
““Glabrous, branchlets terete; phyllodes elongated-subulate,
somewhat compressed-terete, uncinate-subulate at the apex, very
finely striate, spikes shortly cylindrical, dense, solitary or in twos,
sessile. It has the habit and phyllodes of A. calamiformis. The
flower-bearing spikes about 4 inch long, shortened before the
flowering, amentiform with crowded imbricate flowers. Cape
Porteray, Fraser, Swan River, Preiss.” Bentham in London Journ:
Bot. i, 370, (1842).
It will be seen that specimens of Fraser and of Preiss
were described. I have not seenaspecimen of Fraser, but
1 have of Preiss, which must be taken as a co-type, and it
is a very hairy form. It is quoted by its number (974) in
Bentham’s amended B. Fl. ii, 399, description.
Preiss says of it that it was collected on this (Perth)
side of “‘Halfway House, Darling Range, 13th September,
1839.”’ It is described by him in language of which the
following is a translation :—
“Shrub of 8 feet. Branches somewhat compressed, obtuse-
angled, the young shoots with a minute, ashy pubescence. Spikes
oblong in one specimen, scarcely half an inch long, in another
(but entirely similar) almost globose.”
Q—SsSeptember 5, 1917,
258 J. H. MAIDEN.
It may be described as follows :—
Phyllodia grooved, with a few scattered hairs;-more on
the tip, flattened. Flowers in short spikes (4 inch), peduncle
covered with short white hair. Rhachis silky pubescent,
5-merous. Floral bract large, covered with hair. Calyx
lobed half way down, covered in soft hair, half as long as
the corolla. Petals smooth, separating about half way
down, generally recurved, and witha slight midrib. Pisti]
covered in a thick mat of hair.
I have also seen Drummond’s Fifth Collection, No. 2,
which I understand was also collected on the Darling Range.
This specimen, collected in 1849, could obviously not have
been seen by Bentham when penning his original descrip-
tion of 1842, but he includes it in his amended description
of B. Fl. ii, 399. The present specimen, as compared with
Preiss’s No. 974, shows the following differences:—
No. 974 is silky hairy everywhere, except in the adult
foliage, and this silky hairiness extends to the floral bracts.
The phyllodes are longer and more deeply grooved, and its
calyx-lobes are pronounced, while the calyx-tube is almost
truncate in Drummond’s specimen. Floral bracts stipitate
in Preiss’s specimen and foliaceous in Drummond’s No. 2.
The latter specimen may be thus described.
Phyllodia terete, flexuose, smooth, more lined than
grooved. Flowers in ovoid heads, sessile; rhachis glabrous,
4-merous. Floral bract hoary. Calyx truncate, lobed,
with minute points, glabrous. Petals smooth, much
thickened at the tips. Pistil hairy.
Pods in both cases unknown. I trust that Perth botan-
ists and collectors will make satisfactory collections and
notes of Darling Range (and indeed other localities) speci-
mens believed to be A. ephedroides.
The A. ephedroides of Fig. 35 of Diels and Pritzel,
Hingler’s Jahrb., xxxv, 306, shows a rather rigid plant with
NOTES ON ACACIA. 259
flowers more distinctly spicate. I have not seen the plant
figured, and therefore suspend my judgment concerning it.
~The late Dr. A. Morrison, in the ‘‘Scottish Botanical
Review ”’ for April, 1912, p. 99 gave a description of the
pods of A. ephedroides (Kunonoppin, F. E. Victor). Ihave
not seen them, and the specimens should be re-examined.
The following specimen (Minginew, W. V. Fitzgerald,
September, 1903) is temporarily attached to A. ephedroides,
pending the receipt of pods and further information. It
appears to differ from A. ephedroides in the young phyllodes
which are terete and covered with a close white tomentum.
The lobing of the calyx is also much more pronounced than
in typical A. ephedroides.
Phyllodes when young, weak, covered ina close white
tomentum; when mature smooth, and lined rather than
grooved as in A. ephedroides. Flowers in short ovoid
spikes half an inch long, very irregular, 5-merous, and
sometimes 4-merous. Peduncle short and covered in white
hair. Rhachis hairy. Floral bract capitate or thin, hairy.
Calyx more or less deeply lobed, lobes rather narrow, fully
half as long as the corolla, hairy. Petals united half way
up when young, free when mature, smooth. Pistil hairy.
Pods not seen.
A. TRATMANIANA W. V. F. in Journ. W.A. Nat. Hist. Soc.
p. 8 (1904).
The author says “‘It may ultimately prove to be a viscid
form of A. ephedroides Benth.’’ This may be so; I do not
think so, but until complete material of A. ephedroides is
available it is best tolet A. Tratmaniana stand, especially
as the four-angled phyllodes appear to be distinct, and
there are other differences.
Mr. Fitzgerald describes his A. Tratmaniana with “calyx
broadly turbinate.’’ The type comes from Ounderdin. I
‘ ;
260 J. H. MAIDEN.
have it also from Kellerberrin (F. H. Vachell and A. EB.
Lankester); also Kwelkan, north of Kellerberrin, a shrub
of 7—8 feet (Dr. F. Stoward, No. 153).
A. FILIFOLIA Benth.
This species was described in Hooker’s Lond. Journ. Bot.1,
369, (1842) in words of which the following is a translation.
161. Glabrous with terete branchlets; phyllodes long, filiform,
rigid, terete, very finely striate, shortly and straightly mucronate
at the apex; spikes ovoid, dense, solitary, sessile. Phyllodes 4—6
in., much thinner than in the following ones (ephedroides, xylo-
carpa, arida, oncinophylla, J.H.M.) and not uncinate at the apex.
Spikes sometimes almost globose. Swan River, Drummond.
Bentham in London Journ. Bot. 1, 369 (1842).
It will be observed that the describer had only phyllodes
and unexpanded flower-buds.
There is a reference to the species in Pl. Preiss, 1, 18,
with a statement that Drummond’s No. 302 (one of the
specimens quoted under A. ephedroides in B. FI. ii, 400) is
referable to it, and he adds that it is not found in Preiss’s.
collection. |
_ While Bentham sinks it under his A. ephedroides Benth.,
the specimens that I attribute to A. filifolia are certainly
not that species. I will supplement the description of A.
filifolia as I interpret it in the following particulars. [I
may say that I have not a specimen of the type, and that
the specimens [ have seen attributed to that species only
agree in having filiform leaves. |
Phyllodia 4—6 inches long, terete, or slightly flattened,
with fine striate lines, some more nerve-like than others.
Sometimes with a slight hoary tomentum. Attachment.
terete, slightly wrinkled. Flowers in short ovoid spikes,
sessile or with very short peduncles, about ¢ inch long,
d-merous. Occasionally in pairs. Floral bract capitate,
NOTES ON ACACIA. 261
rugose. Oalyx narrow-lobed, free to the base or nearly so,
spathulate with rugose apex, thin, smooth. Petals united
about half way up, separating at a touch, glabrous. Pistil
hoary-tomentose. Pods terete, smooth, with a resinous
incrustation. Seeds longitudinally placed, and when ripe
suspended from the pods by a filiform funicle, which is
attached to a broad arillus. |
I have seen it from Coolgardie (L. ©. Webster). “A tall
shrub,’? Cowcowing (Max Koch, 1025, and also found mixed
with 1338). 132 miles and upwards, Watheroo Rabbit
Fence (Max Koch, 1338a). Kurrawang, near Kalgoorlie
(Dr. J. B. Cleland). Dr. F. Stoward, Nos. 223 and 224, no
localities. Bruce Rock-Merriden district (Dr. F. Stoward,
Nos. 8and 14). Kunonoppin (Dr. F. Stoward, No. 75). The |
only pods I have seen. These are identical with the pods
from the same place (F. H. Victor), described by the late
Dr. A. Morrison as A. aciphylla Benth. in the ‘“‘Scottish
Botanical Review,”’ April, 1912, p. 99.
There is some danger (with flowering material) of con-
fusion with A. leptoneura on a casual glance, but the
flower-heads of the latter are uniformly spherical, while
those of A. filifolia are either ovoid or a little longer. The
young phyllodes of A. leptoneura are soft, golden pubes-
cent; those of A. filifolia are stiff, rugose, resinous.
The pods and seeds display a marked difference. The
pods of A. leptoneura are flattish; those of A. filifolia are
terete. The seeds of A. leptoneura have a funicle with
two folds anda barely expanded arillus; those of A. filifolia
have a very broad arillus, and the commencement of the
filiform funicle is on the opposite (the ventral) side of the
seed or base of arillus to that from which the attachment
of the funicle springs. In other words, the funicle appears
to cross over from one side of the valve to the other.
262 J. H. MAIDEN.
XVIII. A. JUTSONI n. sp.
Frutex, ramulis angulatis v. fere teretibus. Phyllodiis lineari-
tetragonis, rigidis, leniter curvatis mucrone breve pungente, 6:5 —
8 cm. longis, utroque latere striatis, junioribus partibus viscidis,
cum costis parallelibus, brevibus pilis tectis. Floribus in spicis
brevibus ovoidiis densis, breviter pedunculatis, ca. 7 mm. longis.
Calyce turbinato, pilis paucis sparsis disperso. Petalis calycem ca.
triplo superantibus, sub lobis cohaerentibus. Legumine non
viSo.
Apparently an erect shrub, branchlets slightly angular
or nearly terete. Phyllodia linear-tetragonal, rigid, slightly
curved, with a short pungent point, 6°5-—8 cm. long, each
of the sides uniformly exhibiting a rounded rib, giving the
phyllode a grooved appearance, the young growth viscid,
but with parallel ridges covered with short white hair, the
mature phyllodes covered with a very short tomentum.
Flowers in sbort ovoid dense spikes, shortly pedunculate,
about 7 mm. long. Flowers mostly 5-merous.. Oalyx
turbinate, sprinkled with a few scattered hairs, about a
third the length of the corolla. The petals united immedi-
ately below the lobes. Pistil small and smooth. Pod not
seen.
The type is from Comet Vale, near a railway station 63
miles north of Kalgoorlie (John Thomas MIS Nos. 160
and 49 of December, 1916).
The following specimens belong to this species, although
their phyllodes are, for the most part, less tetragonal,
sometimes becoming almost terete, with striee.
a. Hider Exploring Hxpedition, Camp 54, Victoria Desert,
17th September, 1891 (R. Helms, No. 14). ‘On sand.”
Latitude 29° 33’ 25", Longitude 124° 50’, height 1,100 feet.
b. Phyllodes resinous all over. Coolgardie (L. O. Webster,
year 1898). | ) |
NOTES ON ACACIA, 263
Affinities.’ ;
1. With A. resinomarginea W. V.F. It seems that this °
Species is perhaps closest to A. Jutsoni, subject to the
discovery of fruits. The phyllodes of A. resinomarginea
are somewhat flatter and have “‘the angles margined with
a crenulated resinous line;’’ the spikes of flowers of A.
resinomarginea are more interrupted, but the individual
flowers of the two species resemble each other very closely.
2. With A. microneura Meissn.-. This species has a
general resemblance to A. Jutsoni, but in A. microneura
the phyllodia are flattened, and the spikes sessile; the
flowers are different, e.g., in A. microneura the calyx is
more divided and more hairy, while the petals are divided
low down, the corolla not being gamopetalous as in A.
Jutsoni.
3. With A. Tratmaniana W.V.F. The leaves of this
species are more filiform, more rigid and more numerous, —
but the individual phyllodes are quadrangular, although the
sculpture is different, there being an absence of the central
rib on each side. The spikes of 4. Tratmaniana are sessile,
the calyx more deeply cleft, and the petals separate.
Julifloree (Falcatee).
XIX. A. ACUMINATA Benth.
A. OLDFIELDIE F.v.M. — A. SIGNATA F.v.M.
A. LASIOCALYX C. Andrews.
Under his own A. acuminata, Bentham in B. FI. ii, 404,
quotes Drummond’s 8rd Coll. No. 99. A large specimen
received from the British Museum is neither in flower nor
fruit, but there is no doubt it is A. lasiocalyx C. Andrews.
Drummond’s specimen, quoted as No. 9, also without flower
and fruit, is the same species. This reputed 9 is probably
a reversed 6, and is Drummond’s 5th Coll. No. 6, as quoted
in B. FI. ii, 404.
264 J. H. MAIDEN.
A. acuminata has smaller phyllodes, with the margins
- often ciliate. Fruits of A. acuminata are very rare in
collections; they were described by Bentham, and also by
Mr. W. V. Fitzgerald in Journ. W. A. Nat. Hist. Soc., p. 52
(May, 1904). I have received fruits from Kununoppin,
January, 1917 (Dr. F. Stoward) and they present a very
considerable similarity to those of A. lasiocalyx, additional
evidence of the affinity of the two species. The A. acu-
minata pods I have are pale brown, glabrous, with valves
more woody, more embossed by the seeds, and the rims
more marked. :
A. OLDFIELDII F.v.M., Fragm. iv, 7.
Bentham (B. FI., ii, 404) considers this to be a synonym
of A. acuminata.
Ihave been favoured by Professor Ewart of the Melbourne
Herbarium witha sight of the type. The material consists
of atwig with afew mature phyllodes with some small
young shoots with golden pubescence, some loose phyllodes,
a fragment of a spike of flowers (loose), and a detached
pod with ripe seeds. Such material is obviously unsatis-
factory. At the same time, it is very desirable that des-
criptions of species should be investigated, and I therefore
submit the following notes.
I do not disagree with Bentham’s opinion that A. Olafieldii
is Synonymous with A. acuminata Benth.
Phyllodes 23 — 43 inches long, 15 — 23 lines broad, as seen
by me. Theold phyllodes are quite glabrous, but the young
growth is golden pubescent asin A.acwminata. Branchlets
angular.
Flowers 4-merous. Calyx yellow pubescent, denticulate.
Corolla short-glabrous. Pods 2—4 inches long, 1—14lines
broad. Seeds elliptical and longitudinally arranged. They
are not the pods of A. acuminata.
- NOTES ON ACACIA. 265
The type of A. Oldfieldii came from the Murchison River
*tin rather dry places,’’ and was collected by Oldfield.
A. SIGNATA F.v.M., Fragm. iv, 7.
In B. FI. ii, 404, Bentham says °‘ Foliage of A. acuminata,
but the fruit different.”’
There has been a good deal of confusion in Australia in
regard to A. signata, and I am inclined to think that
Bentham had wrong, or poor, material before him. (The
type consists of phyllodes and pods only). First of all let
me re-describe the plant from ample and fresh material.
Small tree, about 15 feet high, with-branchlets sub-
angular towards their extremities, round when older, the
young branchlets and pods slightly glaucous.
Phyllodia linear-lanceolate, slightly falcate 10—14 cm.
(say 4—54 inches) long, and 5 mm. broad, tapering slightly
into a dark-coloured curved, moderately sharp apex, moder-
ately thick, with numerous fine parallel nerves, the central
one more prominent. With thin nerve-like margins, reddish
in colour, like the branchlets.
Flowers in short pedunculate spikes, the spikes 1-1'5cm.
long, and the peduncles about 1 cm. The spikes sometimes
so short as to be almost ovoid; 5-merous.
Calyx matted with white hairs, sepals free nearly to the
base, not quite half as long asthe corolla. Petals glabrous,
free, very thin, separating about half way down, the tips
somewhat thickened. Pistil silky pubescent. Pods shortly
stipitate, linear, slightly falcate, about 11 cm. long by 5
mm. broad, glaucous; the rather small, ovoid, flattish seeds
longitudinally arranged, and pendulous when ripe; areole
- oblong, the funicle very narrow, soon passing with one or_
two folds, into a crumpled, broad ribbon-like mass termin-
ating in a cup-shaped arillus.
266 J. H. MAIDEN.
The type of A. signata comes from the Murchison River,
Oldfield.
[ have it also from Minginew (EK. W. Hursthouse through
W. V. Fitzgerald, as A. acuminata).
Dr. F. Stoward has sent it from Bruce Rock to Merriden,
September, 1916, in flower; December, 1916, in flower and
fruit, and also on poorest sandy land, about 10 miles south
of Merriden and Totadgin district. December, 1916, in
fruit. The above description has been drawn up from Dr.
_ Stoward’s specimens checked with the scanty specimen of
the type, which Prof. Ewart has had the kindness to lend
me. ‘The flowers are described for the first time.
A fiinities.
1. With A. acwminata Benth.
Bentham (B. FL, ii, 404), speaking: of A. signata, says
‘Foliage of A. acuminata, but the fruit different.”
A. acuminata .is the ‘‘Jam’’ or ‘‘Raspberry Jam”’ tree
that every West Australian knows. Its young foliage has
a golden pubescence, while the margins of the phyllodes
are often ciliate.
A. signata is never more than a shrub or very small tree.
It is usually less floriferous, its phyllodes are usually
broader and have more of the lustre of parehment, with_
red branchlets and red phyllode-margins. Its branchlets
are more angular. Its venation is finer, the pods have a
more waxy or hoary lustre.
2. With A. lasiocalyx.C. Andrews.
The phyllodes differ in dimensions and in venation, but
the flowers are quite different, the calyx of A. lasiocalyx
being truncate and the pistil smooth, as compared with a
pubescent pistil in A. signata.
The pods of A. signata are somewhat smaller than those
of A. lasiocalyx, and the seeds are more orbicular and
NOTES ON ACACIA. 267
flatter, the areole more distinct and from oblong to elliptical
in shape. The funicle is longer and the seeds are more
persistent; remaining hanging from the pod.
E. Pritzel’s No. 559, recorded as A. signata in Engler’s
Bot. Jahrb. xxxv, 308, is A. lasiocalyx.
3d. With A. stereophylla Meissn. There is a general
similarity of appearance between A. stereophylla and A.
signata when in flower, but the phyllodes of the former are
much more rigid and thick, with hardly visible nerves, and
there is an absence of the reddish nerve-like margins seen
in A. signata. As regards the structure of the flower, the
calyx and pistil of A. signata are far more hairy than that
of A. stereophylla, and the shapes and relative sizes of the
calyces are different. |
4, With A. Beauverdiana HKwart and Sharman. There
is considerable superficial resemblance with the broader
phylloded forms of this species. The plyllodes of both
Species have numerous parallel veins, but those of A.signata
have a more prominent central one. The spikes of A.
Beauverdiana are nearly sessile and more ovoid, while the
structure of the flowers is different, the calyx of A. Beau-
verdiana being truncate.
A. LASIOCALYX ©. Andrews, Journ, W. A. Nat. Hist. Soc.,
41 (May, 1904).
OContrasted by the describer with A.doratoxylon A. Cunn.
The pod was not seen, and the type came from sand plains
near the Gairdnerand Hammersley Rivers(at Jerramungup).
Pods have been received from Kununoppin, January,
1917 (Dr. F. Stoward). They differ from those of A. signata
in being slightly larger, with thicker, more oblong and
‘larger seeds marked by a spherical areole. The funicle is
shorter and the seeds are not pendulous from the pod, as
in A. signata.
' oa ;
®
7
268 J. H. MAIDEN.
The type locality is the most northerly one known to me,
and we have it from ‘‘In fruticetis Moore River’’(K. Pritzel,
No. 559, as A. signata).
Following is a translation of a brief account of this plant,
which I find to be A. lasiocalyx.
“A. signata F.v.M. Phyllodes up to 30 cm. long, falcate,
up to 4mm. broad. Habitat in Avon district in ‘ Victoria
Plains,’ in sandy places. Flowering in August (D. 3970;
K. Pritzel, No. 559). South towards the Kyre district near
Peniup. (D. 4739).’’ (Diels and Pritzel in Engler’s Bot.
Jahrb. xxxv, 308, 1905).
We have it on the Hastern Railway and its branches
from Kunonoppin (Dr. F. Stoward, No. 61); MKellerberrin
(Miss Leake, F. H. Vachell); Bruce Rock to Merredin (Dr.
F. Stoward, No. 24); Coolgardie (L. OC. Webster).
Going further south, Mr. Muir collected it from ‘100
miles north of Stirling Range,’’ and I have received it from
Prof. Ewart from the Tulbrunup Swamp, which is of course
adjacent to the Stirling Range (collector not given).
Then we have A. acuminata Benth. var. glaucescens H.
Pritzel in Engler’s Bot. Jahrb., xxxv, 308. The following
is a translation.
“Straight phyllodes with the pods thickly marginate,
glaucescent. In the Coolgardie district near Karalee, form
scrub with Eucalypts (D. 5579). Fruiting in November.”
In the absence of specimens I suggest that this variety
may be A. lasiocalyx. —
XX. A. BEAUVERDIANA Ewart and Sharman, in Proc. Roy.
Soc. Vict. xxvil, (2nd Series) 230. As Plurinerves
(Microneura), aff. A. coriacea DC.
Type from Cowcowing. I have since obtained it from
the Bruce Rock-Merriden district (Dr. F. Stoward). It
varies a good deal in the width of the phyllodes, and not
NOTES ON ACACIA. 269
only are the flowers in “‘globular heads very slightly cylin-
drical,’’ but some are so distinctly cylindrical as to justify
removal of the species to the Juliflores. I think its position
is next to A. signata. |
The pods are hitherto unknown, and may be described as
follows:—
Stipitate, linear-moniliform, the seeds longitudinally
arranged, the valves thin, with a marginal thickening, 6 —
7 cm. long, with a width of 3 mm. where distended by the
seeds, and half this width between the seeds; seeds shining,
elongated, suspended by a delicate ribbon-like funicle which
terminates in a slightly expanded arillus. (Poor sandy land,
ten miles south of Merredin, March, 1917. Dr. F. Stoward,
No. 82).
XXI. A. STOWARDI n. sp.
Frutex glaber. Phyllodiis lato-linearibus, rectis vel paullo
falcatis in acumen obtusum leniter curvatum terminantibus, 4 — 6
cm. longis, 3 mm. latis, rigidis, crassis, tenuiter striatis, nervis
numerosis tenuibus parallelibus, nervo medio prominentiore.
Pedunculis 5 mm. longis, solitariis, capitulo ovoideo v. spica sub-
cylindrica v. sub-laxa, 1:5 cm. longo. Floribus 5-meris. Calyce
sinuato-dentato corollam minus dimidio zequante, glabro. Petalis
dimidio longitudinis cohaerentibus, glabris. __Pistillo pruinoso.
Leguminibus tenuibus sub-obliquis, 4 v. 5 cm. longis, 1 em. latis,
valvarum marginibus angustis incrassatis, valvis leniter nervosis.
Seminibus ovatis, obliquis v. fere transversis, funiculo duplo plicatis
in arillum leniter incrassatum terminante.
A glabrous shrub, the young tips slightly resinous, the
young branchlets angular, but soon becoming terete.
Phyllodia broad-linear, straight or slightly falcate, ter-
minating in a slightly curved blunt point, gland near base,
sometimes narrowed at the base into a distinct yellowish
curved petiole, mostly 4—6 cm. (say 14-24 inches) long,
a a
.
Ds
Pom ne
270 J. H. MAIDEN.
3mm. broad, rigid, thickish, finely striate with numerous
fine parallel nerves, scarcely visible without a lens, the
central one sometimes rather more prominent than the
rest, and so visible to the naked eye.
Peduncles somewhat angular, resinous, erect, short,
usually about 5 mm. long and single, straight, bearing an
ovoid head or a subcylindrical or a somewhat loose spike of
1°5 cm. (say 4 inch) long.
Flowers 5-merous. Calyx sinuate-toothed, not half as
long as the corolla, glabrous. Petals united about half-
way down, glabrous. Pistil hoary.
Pods thin, somewhat oblique, somewhat narrowed at the
base, 4 or 5 cm. long, and 1 cm. wide, the sutures edged
with a narrow thickened margin, and the valves slightly
veined. Seeds ovate oblique or almost transverse, promin-
ently embossing the valves, the funicle in two folds,
terminating in a not very much thickened arillus.
Comet Vale, 63 miles north of Kalgoorlie. (John Thomas
Jutson, No. 281, in flower; No. 175, in fruit).
This may be a puzzling species, because it varies from
inflorescence in heads to inflorescence in spikes, but the
spikes are so marked in some of the specimens that it had
better be put in the Julifloree.
The following specimens illustrate the above variation:— -
(a) Ovoid heads scarcely more than globular, Goongarrie,
55 miles north of Kalgoorlie (J.H.M.); Tampa, 120 miles
north of Kalgoorlie (J.T. Jutson); Comet Vale (J. T. Jutson,
No. 253).
(b) Short oblong spikes, hardly twice as long as broad.
Comet Vale (J. T. Jutson, Nos. 271, 253).
(c) Decidedly spicate (Comet Vale, J. T. Jutson, Nos.
281, 282). So far, therefore, the species has been traced
between sixty and seventy miles north of Goongarrie.
NOTES ON ACACIA. A
It is named in honour of Dr. Frederick Stoward, Govern-
ment Botanist and Vegetable Pathologist, Department of
Agriculture of Western Australia, who has vigorously
helped me in the elucidation of this beautiful and interest-
ing genus, so well developed in his State.
A. Beawverdiana HKwart and Sharman affords another
illustration of a species having flowers both in globular
heads and cylindrical spikes, and this has been noted in
regard toa few others. It is but another illustration of
the fact that all morphological characters used in classifi-
cation vary, and must be interpreted philosophically.
Affinities.
1. With A. Beawverdiana Ewart and Sharman.
As already pointed out, this is another species which
hovers between the groups with globular and cylindrical
heads. The two species appear to be closest allied.
But the phyllodes of A. Beauverdiana are more erect;
they resemble each other in venation. The peduncles are
very often recurved in A. Beauverdiana, straight in A.
Stowardi. As regards the flowers, the calyx is propor-
tionately much longer in comparison with the corollain A.
Beauverdiana, while the two species are sharply separated
by the pods, those of A. Beauverdiana being narrow and
moniliform.
2. With A. duriuscula W.V.F.
There is a good deal of external similarity between these
two species, but if we examine them carefully, we find that
flowers in spikes are unknown in A. duriuscula, while the
calyx is more than half as long as the corolla in that species,
and not half as long in A. Stowardi. The phyllodes of A.
duriuscula are shorter and more resinous, though in neither
Species is it abundant; those of A. duriuscula are less
smooth to the touch, as the venation is coarser, i.e., the
2T2 J. H. MAIDEN.
veins are thicker and more prominent, yet in both it would
be termed fine. The pod of A. duriuscula is unknown.
XXII. A. QUADRIMARGINEA F.v.M., Fragm. x, 31.
Was described without flowers. The following description
of them is by Mr. Fitzgerald.
‘‘A bushy shrub, 5—7 feet high; peduncles often two
together, 4 lines long; flowers in ovoid or semi-spicate
heads of 20, mostly 5-merous; bracts ciliate; calyx shortly
toothed, half the length of the corolla, hirsute; corolla
divided half-way down, the petals with prominent midribs.
. In sandy soil. Referable to A. heteroneura Benth.’ (MSS.)
The type locality is Ularing, in the Menzies district, W.
A. (Young); Mr. Fitzgerald found it at Gwalia, W. A.
~ The following specimens are referable to this little known
species.
1. Coolgardie. In flower, June, 1899 (R. Helms).
2. On granite plateau, three miles north-east from Cue.
In flower, June, 1902. (W. D. Campbell).
3. Tampa, 120 miles north of Kalgoorlie. In flower. July
1915 (J. T. Jutson, No. 29).
4, Bushy shrub, 5-7 feet high. In fruit. November,
1903 (W. V. Fitzgerald). In two forms, one with phyllodes
slightly narrower than the type, and the other very much
narrower than the type (neither in flower or fruit), almost
linear.
I have not seen any flowering specimen collected or seen
by Mr. Fitzgerald, and do not understand his words “‘ Refer-
able to A. heteroneura Benth.” (Plurinerves: Nervose).
At the same time his description of the flowers is accurate,
although it will bear amplifying.
A. quadrimarginea belongs to the Juliferze (Falcatze) and
some of the heads are short and nearly ovoid. Under the
NOTES ON ACACIA. 273
circumstances it may be desirable to partly re-describe the
species, taking Helms’ Coolgardie specimen for the purpose.
Phyllodes with one central nerve, finely striate, gland
near base, edges resinous and granular. Flowers 5-merous,
_ in short spikes, the peduncle clothed with hair; floral bracts
capitate. Calyx very narrow, spathulate, about half as
long as the corolla; with long irregular, - transparent
processes. Petals glabrous, united about half way down.
Pistil very resinous, probably smooth.
A. heteroneura is quite distinct from A. quadrimarginea.
The phyllodes of the former are almost trigonous, the
central nerve is much raised on both sides of the phyllode,
and there are three or four fine distinct nerves on each
side. Gland near base. The phyllodes of A. quadrimarginea
are flat with a faint central nerve. The nerves on each
side are indistinct. The plant appears to be quite glabrous;
and the gland is some distance from the base. The pods
_ of A. heteroneura are very narrow, those of A. quadri-
marginea broad, angled and almost winged.
Mueller (in absence of flowers) was naturally uncertain
as to the position of A. quadrimarginea, and suggested
affinities to A. quadrisuleata and A.lineolata. Its position
appears to be near A. tarculensis J. M. Black. It differs
from that species in the longer and narrower phyllodes, in.
the single spikes, and in the glabrous pistil (that of 4.
tarculensis being pubescent).
Bipinnatee (Pulchelle),
XXIII. A. Drewrana W. V. Fitzgerald, n. sp.
An erect unarmed shrub, invested with white spreading
hairs; the branchlets slightly angular; leaves bipinnate,
the pinne in two pairs, the lower at the base of the com-
mon petiole, the latter terminating in recurved acute points;
R—September 5, 1917.
274 J. H. MAIDEN.
leaflets 3-4 pairs, lanceolate to oblong, obtuse, scabrous-
hirsute above, pale and glabrous beneath, margins recurved,
midrib evident; peduncles solitary, hispid, each bearing a
globular head of about 30 mostly 4-merous flowers; bracts
setaceous; sepals linear-spathulate, scarcely half as long
as the corolla, free or almost so, ciliate; petals almost free,
ovate, obtuse, glabrous, with evident midribs.
Type from Cannington (W.V.F.). Height 3—4 feet.
Pinne to $ inch long, the common petiole 7 — 9 lines long.
Leaflets 2—3 lines long. Ona heathy flat. Named after
the Honourable J. M. Drew, a former Colonial Secretary,
Western Australia. Affinity to A. nigricans R. Br.
AZURITE CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL. 275
-AZURITE CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL, NEAR
CONDOBOLIN, NEW SOUTH WALES.
By C. ANDERSON, M.A., D.Sc., (Edin.)
Mineralogist to the Australian Museum, Sydney.
(Contribution from the Australian Museum.)
With Plates V, VI.
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, October 3, 1917.)
AMONG recent additions to the mineral collection of the
Australian Museum are three hand specimens of beautifully
crystallised azurite from the Iodide Mine, Mineral Hill. A
number of the crystals have been measured on the gonio-
meter and the results are embodied in the present paper;
at the same time the elements of azurite are discussed in
the light of the angular measurements obtained and new
constants have been calculated from these angles.
Occurrence and Associated Minerals.
The Mineral Hill Silver Field has been described by Mr.
HK. F. Pittman.* It is situated in Parish Talingaboolba,
Co. Kennedy, about 42 miles north of Condobolin. The
ore-deposit occurs in gritty sandstones and slates, probably
of Devonian age. In the ore-body these rocks have been
metamorphosed into very hard, dense, siliceous rocks such
as quartzite and jasper, and the ore-body itself consists
essentially of friable, gossany material with interspersed
masses of quartzite, and containing such minerals as cerus-
site, azurite, cuprite, and cerargyrite. The workings have
not reached the unoxidised zone (the mine is now idle), but
Mr. Pittman concludes that these minerals will be found
to give place at a depth to argentiferous galena, associated
in places with chalcopyrite.
+ Pittman, Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1912 (1913), pp. 170-172.
276 C. ANDERSON.
The three hand specimens seem to be nodular in origin,
and the best crystals are found inside hollow nodules. In
two of the specimens, which may be called A and B, the
azurite is seated on a dark, gossany mixture, consisting
mainly of limonite with small quantities of cerussite and
malachite. In A the malachite is apparently more recent
than the azurite which it partly pseudomorphs; malachite
also occurs on this specimen as small spherules. On B
malachite is found as little globular masses, umber coloured
externally and dark green inside; it was at first thought
that these might be atacamite, but they gave no reaction
for chlorine. Specimen C is larger than the others and the
crystals of azurite are quite fresh and show no signs of
alteration to malachite, which appears as bright green,
fibrous tufts amongst the cerussite. A typical vugh in this.
specimen is lined with a crystalline crust of cerussite on
which the azurite rests; the walls of the vugh are com-
posed of a hard, siliceous shell, jasperoid in part, and
traversed by veinlets of azurite and cerussite in a direction
at right angles to the inside surface of the vugh. The
nodules on specimen C are coated externally by a yellowish
powder, which contains lead in large amount; this coating
is probably identical with a substance which sometimes.
forms fairly large masses at Mineral Hill and which was..
found by Mr. J.C. H. Mingaye, Analyst tothe Department
of Mines, to contain 165 oz. silver, 54 per cent. lead, 5°4
per cent. antimony, and a trace of gold. It seems to be
an impure mixture of massicot and bindheimite. Ouprite-
and cerargyrite were not observed in immediate association
with the azurite, but crystallised specimens of these
minerals from the Iodide Mine are in the Museum Collec-
tion; these and the cerussite, which is mostly in aggregated
crystals twinned on m (110), will be described in another
paper now in course of preparation.
AZURITE. CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL. er
The Azurite Crystals.
The azurite is mainly attached to the matrix obliquely
by one end of the symmetry axis; where the crystals are
not too crowded they are finely formed, and among those
detached for measurement some are doubly terminated.
They vary in length from about °25 cm. to 1°75 cm., and
average perhaps °5 cm.
Highteen crystals were measured on a two-circle gonio-
meter, and several more were carefully examined for
additional features of interest. Assome of the best crystals
were measured more than once and in different settings, a
large number of angular measurements were made and the
average values for the best faces are believed to have a
high degree of accuracy. A total of twenty-one forms, of
which one is new, was obtained; doubtful and vicinal forms
are omitted from the lists but are dealt with below. The
forms are as follows, that marked by an asterisk being pew:
e (001), b (010), a (100), m (110), w (120), 1 (023), f (011),
p (021), ¢ (201), « (101), 9 (101), 7 (802), v (201), h (221),
s(111), P(223), k (2 21), y (121), R (241), X*(4 81), 4 (2°18°3).
Combinations.—The following table gives the combina-
tions observed on the eighteen crystals:
ponMse. bo 2ad-4 5.6 7 8 9.1011 1213 14.15 161718
c (001) CRIECG ICL ChUCe (CCC SCUCae Cinie) G2 Le -¢
GOO, GEGdaoaaaaaagaaacagtkawaaa
m(11l0l) mmmmnmnmnnnmmnrmmmmm mim
w(120) wwwuwwwwwwwwwwwwww
ries etree ot tok ht Pt kd
ee rp yp he ee eS
ae PP PP Pp pp... p p p pp p p p pp
$(201) .. bbb o..¢64$6$6 6b. $¢6O0G$
PMN LOnL G16) 0) GN ONG o.oo. 6 6 6 6 HG
Tee? 6 OTF 0.8 0.0.0 0.0.0 6.0 6.8
eT TT
278 C. ANDERSON.
Forms. 1 23 45 67 8 9101112131415 1617198
0(201l) vv vv vvovyvvv
vo vvvvy
A(221) heh h h hh Wh hh Hoe h
SEIT) ents Bree OAS ate Seti Mee Shc. cee one See
Pas). DP olpsag Gee POP ee P
YARD Wie yy. ines
Qa) RRRRRRRR ERE BR
Des) 988 Eye D Rae eee au ieee X Ee a
naties) NENA TO Ue) Sane Oe
h
8
Li aD
k (221) kkk hk kh koh bok oe pe
Y
R
In the above list Nos. 1 and 2 are from specimen A, Nos.
3 to 6 from B, Nos. 7 to 18 from OC, and it will be observed
that 4 does not occur on the crystals of O, also that the
new form X is commoner on specimen A and B; otherwise
the combinations are very similar for all the crystals.
New form X (481).—This was found on seven crystals
and its indices were determined from the following measure-
ments; in most cases the reducing objective was used as
the faces are small. .
Crystal. Signal. GD me p
1 good 30 21 83 10 Average Calculated
2 fai 30 12 82 57 a ya
‘ alr sat p 30) 6 30 l
good 30 15 83 5 93 9 83 9
5 fair (a 0 aes :
5] Oe) 82 49
8 fair 29 43 83 4
The form occurs as a minute line face or a spot between
w (120) and R (241); although it is small, the signals are
distinct, and the form may be considered as established
beyond doubt.
Doubtful forms.—In all the crystals there is a much
striated area between c (001) and 9 (101) which gives a
succession of overlapping signals. No forms can be
definitely established here, but » (105) and D (104) are
AZURITE CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL. 279
probably present, and possibly F (207), A (103), and B (504).
The following are the values obtained for p from the stronger
reflections.
ey Crystal. p Average. | Calculated.
2 Be elit eael
» (105) ; Sica | 8°. 33’ |. 9°. 21’
18 9 39
3 LE ED
2 2 essen
D (104) 15 13: +20 1225 [othe
17 We 20)
17 rie We |
F (307) OD eileer ach hid het SSS
A (103) | eS beet ss 16 Biv lpcionnan
B (504) ~ 3 5G 52 50 52 ble ot
Habit.—There are two habits of which Habit Lis peculiar
to the crystals of specimens A and B. This habit [Plate V|
may be described as elongated parallel to the symmetry
axis and tabular on the plane of the b and c axes. Only
two pinacoids are present; of these c (001) usually has an
oblong face, never very large but fairly smooth and giving
good reflections; a (100) is a well developed form, oblong
or nearly square in shape and striated horizontally. The
unit prism m (110) is large and brilliant; it is sometimes
- slightly striated vertically, but generally gives an excellent
reflection of the signal. The prism w (120), though always
present, is never large, being represented by a long, narrow
face; w (120) and w’ (120) generally meet in a long vertical
edge [Plate V, figs. 2,3]. The orthodome zone is well
developed, but the negative orthodomes, particularly
6 (101) and v (201), are strongly striated parallel to the
zone edges and give multiple reflections; there is the usual
indefinite striated area between cand 9. Of the clinodomes
p (021) is usually small and almost triangular, f (011) is
280 C. ANDERSON.
well developed but not so large as 1 (023), which is one of
the dominant forms; all three reflect well and give good
signals, although f, and particularly 1, are sometimes
striated parallel to their intersections. None of the pyra-
mids are large; h (221), k (221), and R (241) are the best
developed and are invariably present. The rare pyramid
- (2:18°3), which is present on all but one of the crystals
with this habit, and always accompanied by the new form
xX (481), is occasionally a fairly large polygonal face | Plate
V, fig. 4), separating w and w’, but usually it is quite small
and elongated. The following angular measurements were
obtained for 4: |
Crystal. Signal... 0) p
9 good | 46 79 29
4 good ean 79 39
5 good 6 53 CIES:
5 fact 7 3 79 97 Average. Calculated.
5 fair 6 55 79. 25. ihn G. BT 6 57
5 fair 6 42 79 25. 1p 79) 26 43 n7O mae
5 good 6 58 9 23
6 good 6 58 19-22. |
6 good 6 53 79 16 }
Habit II [Plate VI] is characteristic of the crystals on
specimen ©. Thecrystals are, as before, elongated parallel
to the symmetry axis, but they have in this case a tendency
towards tabularity on the plane of the a and Db axes, so that
the edge at the end of the b axis flow runs horizontally and
is formed by the meeting of the faces p (021) and p’ (021). °
[Plate VI, figs. 2, 4]. The three pinacoids are here repre-
sented, although b (010) was observed on only two of the
crystals, and then asa mere line face. The base is always
present, usually as along narrow face. The orthopinacoid
a (100) is large and slightly striated parallel to its inter-
sections with m (110) and the orthodomes; there is some
oscillation between a and m. The prism m is much less -
AZURITE CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL. 281
developed than in the crystals of Habit I, and w (120) is
here usually a small triangular face. The orthodome v (201)
is, as before, strongly striated parallel to its intersection
with a (100). The ‘‘no man’s land” between c (001) and
9 (101) is in some” cases of considerable breadth and has a
strong influence on the general shape of the crystal [Plate
VI, figs. 1,2]. It is gently curved, finely striated, and
gives a regular succession of signal reflections in the tele-
scope; readings were obtained from dominant reflections
which indicate the presence of + (105), D (104), F (207) and
A (103); of these D is the most probable and it is included
in fig.4. The three clinodomes / (023), f (011), and p (021),
are well developed and smooth, particularly I and f, though
1 is sometimes slightly striated parallel to the zone edge,
Of the pyramids, h (221), k (221), and R (241) are the most
prominent as before. The new form X (481) was observed
on two crystals, s (111) and P (223) each on four and
usually simultaneously; y (121) was found twice asa narrow
face between m (110) and f (011). The pyramid A (2°18°3)
is never present on the crystals of this habit.
. Elements.
The elements of azurite are in a curious position. Those
adopted in standard works, such as Dana’s ‘System of
Mineralogy,’ Groth’s ‘Chemische Krystallographie,’ Gold-
schmidt’s ‘Index der Krystallformen’ and ‘Winkeltabellen,’
were determined by Schrauf from measurements on the
azurite from the well-known locality Chessy in France,
although the later authors have generally taken half the
length of the vertical axis chosen by Schrauf. Schrautf’s
classic paper’ was published in 1871 and most crystallo-
graphers who have since measured the angles of azurite
from other localities have found marked discrepancies
between the values obtained and those calculated from
+ Schrauf, Sitz.d.k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Lxiv, 1871, abth. 1, pp. 123 - 136.
>
= -
*
“
iy
‘~
° “ P ;
>
282 C. ANDERSON.
Schrauf’s elements. Farrington was, I believe, the first to
remark on this variation; in his study of the azurite of
Arizona,’ he points out, for example, that the measured
angle mm closely approximates to 81° 8’ instead of 80° 42’
as calculated by Schrauf. Farrington was not able to say
** whether this variation is to be regarded as a fundamental
difference in the prismatic angle of the crystals from the
separate localities, or, on the other hand, as so small as to
be within the limits of error of observation.’’ . Evidence
has now accumulated which shows that there is a funda-
mental difference, and that Schrauf’s elements, though -
correct no doubt for the azurite of Chessy, are not the best
for crystals from other localities such as Arizona, Broken
Hill, N.S. Wales,? Muldiva and Girofla Mines, Queensland, *
Tsumeb, German S.W. Africa,* and Calabonna, Sardinia.®
In all these cases the variation from Schrauf’s angles is
considerable and in the same direction, which would lead
to the conclusion that the azurite of the type locality
Chessy is abnormal.
A large number of reliable angles were obtained from
measurement of the crystals described in this paper, and
by carefully sifting them and rejecting all except those
derived from single and distinct reflections, the figures —
tabulated below resulted :—
p p |
_ Form. Average. Limits. Average. Limits Obs
(001) [90.0 ~ |. 8 94 40)"9 58 eee
m (110)| 49 244 |49 17-49 29190 0 89 57-90 3] 56
w (120); 30 18 > [30 14-30 22)...,, ~ 189 56—-90 i2\aiG
p (021); 1.23 1 20- 1 27/60 33 21/60 30-60 37| 14}
f(O1ll) | 2 442°-| 2 42- 2 4941 34° (ft 28 = aaa
1 (023) | 4°43 | 4° 0-4 °7/30°38'* 1803329530 ee eee
R (241) | 29 47 29 44-29 49/76 14 76 13-76 20) 17]
k (221) | 48 50 [48 47-48 53/69 37 (69 34-69 39] 14
s (111) | 50 ap 50 34-50 36/54 213 (54 19-54 26) 4}
P (273)| 51 4 24 [51 1-51 8143 16 36/43 13= 45 aoe
1 Farrington, Amer. Journ. Sci., xL1, 1891, pp. 300 — 307.
2 Steiner, Ann. Mus, Nat. Hung. Iv, 1906, pp. 293 - 298; Cohen, Journ.
Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxiv, 1910, pp. 577 — 583.
3 Anderson, Rec. Austr. Mus., vu, 1909, pp. 278 - 279..
* Toborffy, Zeits. Kryst. L11, 1913, pp. 225 - 235.
5 Manasse, Atti d. Soc. Tosc. Sc. Nat., xx1x, 1913, pp. 196 — 209.
AZURITE CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL.
283
From the averages thus obtained we derive the following
constants:
Form. a
e (001)
p (021)
f (011)
1 (023) ae
m(110)| *85762
w(120)| 85642
A221) |, 85727
s (lil) | :85629
P (223) | 85799
R(241)| 85653
“88550
.88578
88603
"88578
"88553
°88743
"88559
p
87 35 18
87 33 4
87 34 16
87 35 39
Obs.
20
14
Uy
10
56
16
14
4
5
17
By weighting these values according to the number of
observations we obtain the elements:—
a: b°
Below are tabulated,
Cc
for
obtained by different authors:—
Author. Locality.
Schrauf Chessy
Lacroix! Chessy
Gonnard? | Chessy
Farrington | Arizona...
Cohen Broken Hill
Manasse Calabonna...
Anderson | Mineral Hill
°85721 : 1 : °88581, 8 = 87° 34%.
comparison, the elements
a c B
85012 88054 | 87 36
+8469 8789 87 39
8477 +8792 as
85676 88603 | 87 36 36
-85608 88585 | 87 38
“85755 88803 | 87 41
‘85721 *88581 | 87 344
From this table it is apparent that the axial ratios for
the azurite of Arizona, Broken Hill, Calabonna and Mineral
Hill are in close agreement and differ considerably from
those of the Chessy azurite in which the values for both a
and ¢ are smaller. The difference may be emphasized as —
follows:—
Base coe) pBitorehee. |p yezg eee | Difference. |Gionest vals,
a ‘85012 "00596 °85608 °00147 *85755
*88054 "00527 *88581 "00222 “88803
* Lacroix, Min. de la France et de ses Colonies, 111, 1901, p. 751. |
* Gonnard, Bull. Soc. fr. Min., xxx111, 1910, p. 248.
284 C. ANDERSON.
The polar elements for the Mineral Hill azurite were
calculated from the above elements, and also directly from
the measured angles. The results, which are in accordance,
are as follows, Goldschmidt’s values as given in his ‘Index’
and ‘Winkeltabellen’ being added for comparison.
| P. q. e.
Anderson 1°03337 °88502 "0423
Goldschmidt 1°0357 °8797 "0419
Forms and Angles.
The forms and measured and calculated co-ordinate
angles for the azurite of Mineral Hill are tabulated below,
doubtful forms and fractions of a minute being omitted;
the new form is indicated by an asterisk.
Measured. Calculated.
Form. | Symbol. ee eee
d p Oo a peu
C 001 90 O.. 3.25. |00, O.leeies 20
b 010 Y 0 3feo 0 0-90.26 3
aw 100 900°) | 908. 0) 19040 ms 25
m 110 49 25 2 49 25 % +56
w 120 30 18 i 30 17 salou 16
} 023 4 4 ; 30-38 4 6 | 30 38 10
bf 011 2-44°| Aq, 84 944 | 41 34 17
p 021 123 | 60:33 1 92: \60 34 14°
db 201 90 0 | 64 40 | 90 O | 64 39 6
g 101 - A748 ‘4 ae | 10
6 101 90 O | 44 49 | 90 0 | 44 46: 9
” 302 56 28 if 56 28 11
v 201 ar Oana al es 63,44 Se oa
h 221 50 Tt) 170 2 BO One Ones 11
8 1 50 35) | 54.21) < 50033. 4 | S5a 1 4
P 223 Bl 41043" 16 af obo kOe 5
k 331 48 50 | 69:37 | 48 50 -| 69 37 14
y 121 $1 14 | -64.14. | 31 17 (64 See
R 341 99 47 | 76-14. | 29.46. 76a
x* | Gey | 30:23 | 8259 (| 30. daa leegee 6
r F-18°3)\. 6. 57-1. 79-26 6. Sin ZOuos 9
From the co-ordinate angles given in the above table
some of the principal interfacial angles were calculated,
AZURITE CRYSTALS FROM MINERAL HILL.
and in the following table these are placed alongside the
corresponding angles derived from the elements of Schrauf
and Farrington respectively; there is, it will be noticed, a
striking agreement between the angles for the Arizona
and Mineral Hill azurites.
Angles on ¢ (001).
Form. | Anderson.
a (100) 87 35
m (110) 88 10
w (120) 88 47
7 (623) 30) 33
FOLD) eS
p (021) 60 32
o (101) 44 42
f (201) 62 14
6 (101) AG hi
n (302) 58 53
v (201) 66.,. 9
P4293) er 23
SEMEL Nai NH IPHSO
h (221) 68 13
y (121) Ge 1
k (221) poly,
R (241) Cie 2a
X (481) 84 15
A (2:18°3) | 79 43
87
88
8s
30
4]
60
44
62
47
58
66
41
52
68
63
ral
Te
84
79
Farrington.
37
11
48
33
31
ag
Angles on 6 (010).
Form. Anderson.
m (110) 49 25
w (120) Oreeah
h (221) 52 50
y (121) 39 40
s (111) 58 55
P (223) 64 31
Me (2-183) 12 38
R (241) By ae e.
k (221) 51 5k
X (481) 30 44
49
30
52
39
58
64
12
39
51
30
Farrington.
26
7
49
40
55
31
38
33
53
44
Schrauf.
87 36
88 10
88 47
30 24
41 21
60 24
44 46
2627718
47 15
D8 56
66 Ill
41 21
Schrauf.
49 38
30 28
eee le
39 51k
59 OB
64 40
12 424
32 45
52 «7
30 574
286 C. ANDERSON.
Angles on a (100).
~ Form. Anderson. | Farrington. Schrauf.
P (223) 57 AT | 57 48. < age
T0235) 87 55 87 56 Byamame
s (111) 51 8 6171087 1 Ree
f (011) 88 11. | 88 12 88 12
h (221) 43 56 43 56 43 454
y (121) 62597 62, 7 61 58
p (021) 88 49 88 50 88 49
k (221) 134 53.) 134. 55 * |B a ae.
d (2183) | 96 50 | 96 50 | 96 53
R (241) 18 50. \\-118' ‘or sierra
X (481) 119 46 5] 119 47. | T9 ages
Summary.
Fine crystals of azurite, accompanied by cerussite and
malachite occur in the oxidised zone of the Iodide Mine,
Mineral Hill, near Condobolin, New South Wales. A total
of twenty-one forms of which X (481) is new, were found
on the crystals, which are characterised by two different
habits. The measured angles are not in agreement with
the standard values as given by Schrauf, and new elements
@?b.: © = “85721 © 1.:,°885815 8 = 87 245
have been calculated. When comparison is made between
Schrauf’s elements for the azurite of Chessy and those
derived by others for the azurite from various localities, it
is found that Schrauf’s a and c axes are distinctly shorter.
Description of Plates.
Puate V.
Fig. 1. Crystal 5; orthographic projection on the plane of the a
and 6 axes, crystal shown in its actual development.
Fig. 2. Crystal 5; orthographic projection of Fig. 1 on the plane
of the a and ¢ axes.
Fig. 3. Crystal 5; Fig. 2 idealised.
Fig. 4. Crystal 2; orthographic projection on the plane of the a
and ¢ axes, ideal.
Journal Royal Societyof N.S.W.,Vol. LI.,1917. Plate V.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LI., 1917. Plate V1.
ALK
Ne.
d D C. A., del.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 287
Fig. 5. Plan of Fig. 6.
Fig. 6. Crystal 3; clinographic drawing, ideal.
PiaTe VI.
_ Fig. 1. Plan of Fig. 2.
Fig, 2. Crystal 15; clinographic drawing, ideal.
Fig. 3. Crystal 8; orthographic projection on plane of a and ¢
axes, ideal.
Fig. 4. Crystal 17; orthographic projection of plane of a and c
axes, ideal. |
Fig. 5. Stereogram; the doubtful forms D (104) and 105 are
included (the zone circles }yso and who are inadver-
tently omitted with drawing).
TOPOGRAPHICAL, KECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC
NOTES on THE OCEAN SHORELINE VEGETATION
OF THE PORT JACKSON DISTRICT.
By A. A. HAMILTON.
- Botanical Assistant, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
[With Plates VIL - XTIII.]
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, October 3, 1917. ]
THE floristic region reviewed in these notes runs coastally
from Turrimetta Head to Port Hacking, and stretches
inland a few hundred yards from the Pacific Ocean. Within
this zone we have the customary strand, alternating with
bluff headland and rocky escarpment. At the rear of the
various beaches sand-dunes rise into more or less steeply
graded embankments of varying height, with, usually, an
uneven plateau above extending to a valley running parallel
to the beach, and which is sooner or later excavated by
atmospheric pressure, the rearward slopes continuing until
288 A. A. HAMILTON.
the frequently occurring lagoon or the general contour level
is reached. The northern section of the shoreline consists of
Narrabeen Shale superimposed on the reef. Throughout
this area in which the soil is comparatively rich, the indi-
genous vegetation has been removed, and the ground
dedicated to a pasture of ‘‘Oouch-grass’’ Cynodon dactylon
Rich., which creeps out to the verge of the ocean headland
or the dune embankment.
South of Deewhy the shale is replaced on the headland
by the coastal sandstone. The broken escarpment, and
the shelving parapet immediately above, are sparsely clad
or frequently quite bare, a shallow layer of soil finding a
lodgment here and there in depressions of the rock benches,
or filling pockets and crevices in the reef, and supporting
a scanty, storm-bitten vegetation. On the rocky hillside
the plants are chiefly shrubby, most of the herbaceous
Species, with the exception of Glumiferce, retreating inland |
or descending to the dune. The vegetation on the dune
front is largely herbaceous, though several shrubby species
reach the plateau of the embankment. The bulk of the
ligneous vegetation does not, however, venture within
range of the periodic storm visitation, which denudes the
frontal embankment and deposits its spoil on the rearward
slopes. The frontal dune slopes are scantily furnished,
and competition between the scattered plant colonies is
consequently limited, permitting, in many instances, fairly
large areas of a practically pure specific formation.
Occasionally, however, especially among the rhizomatic
species, two or more struggle for supremacy, and frequently
the individual competition within the colony is exception-
ally severe.
The gregarious sylvatic species on the rearward slopes,
have generally adopted an open forest formation, in which
a thick undergrowth finds protection, a notable exception
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 289
being provided by the “‘Coast Tea-tree’’ Leptospermum
leevigatum F'.v.M., which is frequently assembled in a close
formation, occasionally so densely packed as to exclude all
except liane growth, or a few exceptionally shade-tolerating
species. This habit is simulated by Casuarina suberosa
Otto and Dietr., which, on the headland at Cronulla, has
formed so close a thicket that the only intruder on its
privacy is the creeping Hydrocotyle hirta R. Br. Of these
arboreal societies, Banksia integrifolia L. f. occasionally
extends in belt formation, B. serrata L., Melaleuca leuca-
dendron L. var. albida (Sieb.) EH. Cheel MS., (Melaleuca
Smithii R. T. Baker), Eucalyptus corymbosa Sm., ete.,
usually forming clumps or groves. ‘Two arboreal species
are confined to the rocky hillside, the remainder of the
sylvatic vegetation bestowing equal favour upon dune and
headland.
The principal factor affecting the vegetation on the sea-
board, is the on-shore wind, whose mechanical action
retards arborescent growth and induces nanism, its
sustained attack compressing the shrubs on the exposed
front of the dune embankment, or rocky headland, into a
horizontal growth. Its capacity for quickly carrying off
moisture, promotes rapid transpiration, resulting in the
_ survival of plants with a xerophytic equipment. The wind
also minimises the stability of the soil by erosion, and
transportation, the dune vegetation in the region of exposure
responding by trailing, or spreading a carpet closely
appressed to the soil, by deep taprooting, or by framing a
rhizomatic network. The latter device also serves asa
protection against displacement by flood-waters, and acts
as a deterrent to the intrusion of fugitive plants. A con-
siderable share of the root ramification may also be debited
to the necessity for covering an extensive field of this
inhospitable region in search of a suitable food supply, the
S—October 3, 19:7. |
290 A, A. HAMILTON,
littoral sand containing little humus, and affording indiffer-
ent nourishment to the vegetation.
The xerophytic device most favoured by the herbaceous
plants on the frontal dune slopes is succulence,—aqueous
tissue—the shrubs at the rear, and those on the rocky
headland, adopting various forms of leaf modification,
heathlike, crass or leathery, clothed more or less thickly
with a felted vestiture, or waxy coating, and with variously
arranged and protected stomata. The frontal slopes of the
dune receive the salt-laden spray from the ocean, and are .
consequently halophytic, but the xerophytic character of
the vegetation on the inner slopes is due to the physical
factors with a desiccating tendency operating in this region,
rather than the effects of a superabundance of sodium
chloride in the soil, |
The principal colonisers on the strand are aliens, more or
less suspected introductions, cosmopolitan species, or plants
with an extra-Australian range, many of which have been
brought to our shores in ships’ ballast, which has been
dumped on several of our beaches and spread thence along
the coast. Stockton Beach at Newcastle, and Geelong on
the shores of Corio Bay, Port Phillip, are both well known
nurseries for alien weeds. In an interesting account of the
Flora of Coode Island,’ Mr. J. R. Tovey notes that a portion
of the island has been used as a dumping ground for ships’
ballast, and, as a consequence, the flora is now almost
entirely exotic. Mr. Tovey mentions, inter alia, that many
of the exotic species on the island are natives of South
Africa, and a similar occurrence of natives of that country
‘was noted among the dune flora of the Port Jackson district.
Many of these plants are provided with fruits whose seeds
are enclosed in suitable vessels for maritime voyaging. The
‘structure of the fruits is primarily designed for buoyancy,
1 Vict. Nat., Vol. xxviit, p. 57 (1911).
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 291
their coats are usually of a corky, or woody texture, and
they have one or more watertight compartments, which
serve the purpose of floats, and act as a protective agency
against the intrusion of the saline water. A by no means
insignificant factor in the moulding of the fruit, is the
danger of being dashed to pieces by the waves upona rocky
headland, or ground to powder on a shingle beach, while
en voyage. The most suitable contrivance to neutralise
the effects of such an occurrence, is the production of
strengthening ribs, which are frequently extended into
wing-like appendages, or, in the Spinifex, an elongated
spine (awn) proceeding from the apex of the fruit, which
act as collision buffers.
[In the scientific portion of his Presidential Address to
the Royal Society, “An Hcological Sketch of the Sydney
Beaches,’’* Mr. Charles Hedley cites a series of devices
adopted by certain molluscs, characteristic of the rocky
surf-swept headland; in the construction of their dwellings,
by which the sculpture of the shell is so contrived as to
produce extensions or projections, calculated to strengthen
its resistance to wave action, and figures (p. 57, fig. 19)
such a shell, armoured with massive rings. |
The material of which the fruit coat is composed, corky,
pithy, felted, membranous, etc., is of a tough but yielding
character, not easily fractured. The members of the strand
community are asa rule prolific seed bearers. Two grasses,
Spinifex hirsutus Labill., the ‘‘Spiny: Rolling-grass,”’ and
the littoral ‘‘Fescue,’’ Festuca littoralis Labill., play an
important part in the building and upkeep of the frontal
dune embankment rising immediately behind the strand,
the former, in the area inspected, representing appro
mately 50% of the herbage clothing its slopes.
1 This Journal, xu1x, (1915).
292 A. A. HAMILTON.
[In ‘Shoreline Studies at Botany Bay,’’! H.C. Andrews,
B.A., F.G.S., has demonstrated the capabilities of the Spinifex
as a sandbinder, in a diagram p. 169, depicting a ‘‘Terrace
of accumulation,’’ at Lady Robinson’s Beach. |
On the beaches which it has specially favoured, the
trailing stems of this dicecious grass, (the best of our indi-
genous sandbinders), creep out from the plateau above, and
invest the steep unstable slope to its base, frequently
intruding on the strand below. Its flexible stems, which
root at every joint, roll elastically from side to side under
the pressure of the wind, permitting the moving sand to
accumulate beneath them, and bestriding the drift to hold
it in position.” The stems are assisted in the work of build- |
ing and retaining the embankment, by the upright tufts of
leaves, which rise from the joints above the roots, around
which the sand forms miniature mounds, the leaf tufts
working upwards as the sand rises.
The Spinifex is eminently adapted to contend with ae
adverse conditions inseparable from a strand environment.
Its stems are succulent, and together with the leaves are
clothed with a shaggy vestiture, the latter are involute in
form, and fibrous in texture, a series of characters which
provide a maximum of resistance to the attack of the sharp-
edged storm-driven sand grains, the desiccating effects of
the superficially heated sand, and. the presence of an undue
quantity of sodium chloride in the soil.
To its colleague, Festuca littoralis, is allotted the pioneer
work of embankment building and restoration. When
operating iv a frontal position, the Fescue forms isolated
tufts on the beach at the base of the embankment, occupy-
ing any vantage points presented by the buttressing sand-
ridges atits base. Dotted here and there on the otherwise
bare surface, each tuft forms a mound from the sand caught.
* This Journal, L, p. 165 (1916).
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND: TAXONOMIC NOTES 293
by the eddy which its presence creates. At this stage the
plant makes use of its capacity for vertical movement only,
rising with the sand and producing a Secondary root system
on the stem (adventitious) at a distance from the base, in
conformity with the measure of the drift. When thestem
is securely rooted in the new position, the lower portion,
together with the old root attachment is discarded, and
eventually decays, adding a modicum of humus to the sand.
The mounds eventually become confluent at the base, and
the Fescue travelling laterally by means of its horizontal
rhizomes, connects them, forming them into a low bank.
Concurrently with the movement of the Fescue, the Spinifex
has felt its way down the slope towards its associate, and
these tireless builders meet and join forces in the work of
reclamation. When engaged in the rehabilitation of the
storm blown sand banked up on the rearward slopes, which
has buried the previously existing vegetation, the Fescue
brings both vertical and horizontal thrust into play, form-
ing a series of elongated ridges, running parallel to the
strand, and which are finally merged into a second embank-
ment, with the usual valley lying between it and the frontal
slope.
Of the species enumerated 10 are endemic in the Port
Jackson district ; 4 extend to the Blue Mountains; 45 are
found in New South Wales only; 5 in New South Wales and
Victoria; 18 in New South Wales, Victoria, and Tasmania;
4 extend from New South Wales to South Australia; 3 from
New South Wales to Western Australia; 33 occur in both
Queensland and New South Wales; 48 in Queensland, New
South Wales and Victoria; 35 extend from Queensland to
South Australia; 24 from Queensland to West Australia;
8 from North Australia to New South Wales; and 2 are
found in all the Australian States. Known and suspected
aliens number 25 and there are 55 species—indigenous and
alien—with an extra Australian range. 45% of the whole
=
“ a
294 A. A. HAMILTON.
are confined to New South Wales and the two neighbouring
States. The preponderance of species extending north,
over those found south of Port Jackson, is at least 257% in
favour of the northern localities. The oversea species—
indigenous and alien—are chiefly beach-dune plants. The
absence of bulbous plants from the shoreline is particularly
noticeable. Most of the plants noted approach within one
hundred yards of the strand on the dunes, and a similar
distance from the shoreline on the headland. The speci-
mens mounted to illustrate this paper will be presented to
the National Herbarium.
Southward from Turimetta Head, Long Reef Beach,
locally named Collaroy Beach, enters upon a comparatively °
flat area bare of vegetation, such as is usually found at
either end of the ocean beaches, which is here bisected by
the channel at the entrance to Narrabeen Lake. From the
southern margin of the stream, the dune embankment rises
with an easy grade, the sand waves at its base beset by
outlying trailers of Spinifex, among which are sprinkled a
few tufts of Festuca littoralis. Prominent on the crest of
the embankment is the bunchy Xcrotes longifolia R. Br.,
a ubiquitous species which can accommodate itself to an
exposed position on the seaboard, or a bald. ridge on the
highest elevations of the Blue Mountains, and is equally at
home in a sheltered nook in a rich southern Illawarra brush.
On the dune front it frequently chooses the crown of a
knoll, or the saddle of a ridge, upon which to found a colony.
In such situations the plants are closely packed, those in
the centre of the cluster uplifted by the pressure of their
brethren in the outer ring. On the sheltered rearward
slopes the plant clusters, though retaining the gregarious
habit, are more open, the necessity for a close formation
disappearing with the reduction of exposure. The tough,
leathery consistence of the leaves renders frequent renewals
unnecessary, their persistence imposing a minimum strain |
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 295
on the weak root system, whose limited area of activity is
not conducive to the accumulation of either food con-
stituent, or watersupply. The rigid, flattened flower stem,
is structurally adapted to carry the heavy panicles of fleshy
flowers. |
Its frequent associate on the dune, Hibbertia volubilis
_ Andr., is a trailer, or twining climber, as befits the situ-
ation. When growing on the ridges and spurs of the broken
dune front, its running stems turn inwards and become
interwoven, building up the plant into a hummocky form.
On the protected slopes at the rear, its movements are less
restricted, and it here assumes a diffuse, or scrambling
habit. Bentham, Fl. Austr. i, 37, notes this species as
climbing to a height of 2—4 feet, but under the dense
canopy of a close shrubbery, such as that afforded by a
grove of “‘Coast Tea-tree,’’ its climbing habit is fully
developed, and in sucha habitat on the shore of Botany
Bay, it was noted ascending the Tea-tree to a height of
12—15 feet in search of the light. It has a coastal range
from Milton, north into Queensland, but has only’succeeded
in ascending the dividing range, in New England, where it.
has reacbed the tableland. In the Port Jackson district
it extends inland to Parramatta.
A congener, H. diffusa R. Br., a prostrate, twiggy shrub,
occasionally ventures on the dune flats, but its greater
frequency on the grasslands and hillsides, removed from
the littoral, demonstrates its preference for such situations.
At this (northern) end of the beach, Convolvulus soldanella
L., a Sea coast habitue in most extratropical countries, is
sparsely represented. To secure stability in the mobile
sand, it has developed an intricate system of subterranean
creeping stems, (stolons) radiating from the rootstock,
upon which it depends for fixity oftenure. It will occasion-
ally descend the frontal embankment, where the gradient
296 * 3 A. A. HAMILTON.
is not too severe, but is much better suited on the plateau
above.
At the southern end of the beach, where it commences
to curve towards the shelter of Long Reef, the Convolvulus
has run along the edge of the embankment plateau in a
confluent patch, two or three hundred yards long and a few
yards wide. The glossy upper surface of the leaves marks
the course of the plants along this stretch of the dune, their
waxy coating affording them a measure of protection from
direct insolation, as the broad leaves lie flat on the sand
presenting the whole of their upper surfaces to the sun’s
rays. On the open dune this herb is a prostrate trailer,
but under suitable conditions it displays the climbing
tendency common to the family (Convolvulacez). |
Another prostrate herb, also symptomatic of the sandy
sea coast, and occupying a similar position on the dune, is
Euphorbia Sparmanni Boiss. It is one of the deep rooting
members of the dune fraternity, and forms a more or less
circular carpet by means of its radially branched stems,
which lie closely appressed to the sand. Though not wide-
spread, it isa useful addition to the vegetation on the dune
front. The plants are usually isolated, but occasionally a
few are observed associated ina small colony. In common
with other members of the family (Euphorbiacez), it
secretes a milky latex, a useful xerophytic provision.
In the valley behind the frontal embankment and parallel
to it, the vegetation is sheltered. Correa alba Andr., the
‘*Cape Barren Tea-tree’’ of Tasmania, here assumes a com-
paratively open habit, displaying its normal depressed
conical contour. In exposed situations on the frontal dune
embankment, it is frequently compressed by the wind into
a dense shapeless mass of tangled branches. It has crass,
tough leaves, clothed with a felted tomentum on the under
surface, the upper side less thickly covered, and with a
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 297
varnished coat, the latter serving the dual purpose of
deflecting the storm-blown sand, and the direct solar rays.
This species is recorded in the Fl. Austr. i, 354, from
Victoria, Tasmania, and South Australia. The omission of
New South Wales is obviously a clerical error, as Bentham,
loc. cit., refers t.515, Bot. Reg. to this species. The plate
is given as Correa alba, ‘‘ White Correa,” or ‘‘ Botany Bay
Tea-tree,’’ and the habitat of the plant depicted as New
South Wales.
The ‘Pig’s-face,’’ Mesembryanthemum cequilaterale
Haw., finds in the valley a congenial habitat, where—either
individually or collectively-—it forms large carpets, the
plump succulent leaves, and generally healthy appearance
of the plants, demonstrating their appreciation of the shelter
afforded. As it approaches the strand, the area of the
carpet and bulk of the foliage, diminishes in proportion to
its proximity to the region of exposure. Environment has
in this case affected the whole plant, leaves, stems, and
even the fruits responding to the demand for water con-
servation, by becoming succulent, the imprisoned moisture
incidentally adding weight to the carpet and strengthening
its resistance to displacement by the wind.
The deep-rooting Pelargonium australe Willd., is occas-
ional on the frontal dune slopes, more plentiful on the
embankment plateau, but attains its greatest -frequency
and scope of ramification in the sheltered dune valley. In
exposed positions, its rotund leaves spread in a circle, with
the lamina turned outwards, and held in a vertical position
at a distance from the stem by the elongated petioles, the
overlapping whorls forming a close rampart. When the
shifting sand bares the rootstock the basal leaves droop,
shading and protecting the roots, and encouraging the
reaccumulation of the sand by acting as a barrier to its
drift. The thickened rootstock is sufficiently firm to support
298 A. A. HAMILTON.
the surface growth during the period of exposure, and im
conjunction with the exceptionally deep tap-root acts as a
reservoir for food and moisture. It is more frequent on the
dune than on the rocky headland, favouring the latter
habitat in places where the sand has accumulated to some
depth, or in the soil. pockets where the tap-root can
accomplish its normal descent. The maritime forms are
generally more luxuriant than those growing at a distance
from the coast.
Stephania hernandifolia Walp. on the open dune is a
trailer, but in its customary habitat in the coastal scrub:
its climbing habit isasserted. Climatically it is an adapt-
able species, ranging from India to the southernmost parts. .
of Victoria, via the Australian coast.
A consequential member of the dune valley vegetation is
the ‘‘Lilly Pilly,’’ Hugenia Smithii Poir., which generally
adopts a more or less open grove formation. On the head-
land its tendency to avoid exposure is manifested in its
choice of position, which is usually on the northern (shel-
tered) side of the point, or, as on the dune, in a depression..
The blue flowered trailer Commelina cyanea R. Br.,
though capable of withstanding a considerable degree of
exposure, as its presence on the bluff rocky escarpment
indicates, prefers a sheltered shady situation such as tbat.
afforded bya Lilly Pilly plantation. When unprotected by
shrubby or arboreal vegetation it seeks moisture, aswampy
patch on the rock benches, or the verge of a waterhole-
where it can creep among the rushes and sedges, presenting
an ideal habitat. Itreaches the Northern Territory coast-
ally, and is not recorded south of the Port Jackson district.!
A miniature forest of the ‘‘ White Honeysuckle,’’ Banksia
integrifolia L. f., extends along the dune flat on the land-
1 This species was recently noted by the Government Botanist, Mr.
J. H. Maiden, at Sussex Inlet, and by Mr. R. H. Cambage at Milton.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 299:
ward bank of the valley, following its course in belt form-
ation until it merges into the dune flat, a few straggling
trees crossing the dune in Indiar file, the outermost reach-
ing the embankment plateau and extending to within a few
yards of the strand. Under cover of this arboreal shelter,
several adventurous shrubs have reached the dune valley,
which do not, except under very favourable circumstances,
approach so closely to the strand. Of these, Marsdenia
rostrata R. Br.; a plant with a lengthy coastal range, and
recorded from several elevated stations on the Blue Moun-
tains, is here represented by an individual specimen, the
only one noted on the shoreline. A climber in the brush
forest,—its customary habitat—it has here adopted a
matted habit, and spreads outwards for some distance,
establishing its position by smothering the undergrowth in
its vicinity. A few bushes of the soft, porous wooded,
Clerodendron tomentosum R. Br., have taken advantage
_of this opportunity to press forward into the valley. Though
not a strictly halophilous species, it is frequently found in
the vicinity of tidal waters. Another small group of these
plants was noted on the rocky hillside—facing north—at
the southern end of Manly beach.
A large leaved form of Notelcea ovata R. Br., a species.
which extends from Illawarra to Queensland, has here found
its way through the Banksian forest into a frontal position
in the valley.
The “‘Port Jackson Beech,’’ Monotoca elliptica R. Br.,
and Breynia oblongifolia J. Muell., also attain, in this valley,
their closest proximity to the strand. They are both more
or less dependent—in this situation—on the surrounding
vegetation for protection, neither venturing alone on to
the frontal dune slopes. On other parts of the shoreline,
the “‘ Beech’’ exhibits a preference for a Banksian associ-
ation, the White and Red Honeysuckle forests being
300 A. A. HAMILTON.
. specially favoured.. Breynia oblongifolia has no prefer-
ential associates, but is content to mingle with any vege-
tation which provides a modicum of shade and shelter.
Both species frequent the rocky hillsides on the ocean front,
maintaining a respectful distance from the verge of the
escarpment.
Further south the valley shallows, and Wikstroemia
indica C. A. Mey., a soft-wooded halophytic shrub, consti-
tutes a considerable proportion of the vegetation. In this
station the Wikstroemia attains its greatest profusion,
extending inland for some distance on the dune flat.
Occasional clumps were met on all the beaches south to
Manly, but it was not noted south of Port Jackson:
Towards the southern end of the beach the shelter
afforded by the Long Reef promontory becomes effective,
the lowering of the dune embankment, and the merging of
the valley into the plateau, demonstrating its influence in
moulding the contour of the beach. On the plateau in close
proximity to the strand, the introduced ‘‘Oat’s-ear,’’ Hypo-
cheerus radicata L., has established a colony, the large,
closely appressed, basal rosettes of the plants, enabling
them to support the elongated branching stems in an upright
position. Into this association several plants of the weedy
erucifer, Lepidium hyssopifolium Desv. (one of a number
of species included by Bentham, Fl. Aust., i, 86, under L.
yuderale L.) have intruded. In their immediate neighbour-
hood several bushes were noted of the spiny ‘“‘Wild Tomato,”’
or ‘Apple of Sodom,’’ Solanum sodomceum L., from the
Mediterranean littoral, one of the hardiest members of the
dune flora.
In this comparatively sheltered situation its behaviour is
normal, but when growing in a position, frequently chosen
on the windswept crown of a hillock, or the verge of the
exposed frontal embankment, where its upright growth is
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 301
retarded, it Spreads trailing branches to retain the sand in
its vicinity and intercept the drift from the beach, using
the collected material as a support for its heavy limbs, and
relieving the ascending stem of the burden of supporting
the unwieldly lateral growths. ss
One of the twiggy ‘“‘Salt-bushes,’”’? Rhagodia Billardieri
R.Br., is prevalent on the dune flat. Plants of this species
when standing alone, build up a divaricately branched,
hedge-like structure, but when growing in the vicinity of
stout upright shrubs, they invest them, trailing over their
stems and branches. One of these plants was noted to
have covered the trunk of a dead Banksia toa height of
eight feet. On the dune it usually coats its leaves with a
waxy varnish, but on the rocky escarpment of the head-
land this protective device is not so much in evidence, and
is occasionally—in very exposed situations—replaced by a
mealy tomentum.
The cosmopolitan ‘‘Couch-grass,’’ Cynodon dactylon A.
Rich., spreads a closely matted lawn on the plateau, creep-
ing out to within a few yards of the edge of the dune
embankment, the ‘“ Buffalo-grass,’’ Stenotaphrum ameri-
canum Schr., forming a flanking carpet, or, in places where
garden refuse has been tipped, intruding on the Couch. In
the frequent encounters between these two favourite lawn
grasses, the question of supremacy is decided by the quality
of the food supply, the quantity of moisture available and
the physical condition of the soil. On the impoverished
permeable sandy soil of the dune, the Couch will hold its
own, but in the stifi clayey soil of the Wianamatta Shale
the stouter subterranean stems of the Buffalo overpower
the slender rhizomes of the Couch, and its broad heavy flag
will exclude the light from the weaker grass, and eventu-
ally suppress it.
Though both grasses advance to the front of the dune
plateau, they cannot, either singly or in association, main-
302 A. A. HAMILTON.
tain a position at its extremity, always retreating from the
rapidly eroding verge of the embankment, if not protected
by hardier vegetation. One of these protective plants is
the “‘Coast Couch,” Zoysia pungens Willd., a creeping grass
similar in habit to the common Couch, but possessing a
greater exposure resistant capacity, as demonstrated by
its proximity to the beach, its short, dark coloured flower
spikes always showing prominently in front when these two
grasses are associated—a common occurrence—and attain-
ing a position prohibitive to Cynodon. This association is
continued on the rocky escarpment of the headland, the
Cynodon in places creeping down the rock-strewn hillside
to within a few yards of the bare parapet above the cliffs,
when the Zoysia again asserts its beneficent influence, and
accepts the brunt of the exposure. |
The frontal embankment from the point of emergence of
the dune valley to the southern end of the beach, is inter-
mittently fringed by another creeping grass Sporobolus
verginicus Humb. and Kunth., a frequenter of the salt-
marsh and estuary rather than the strand. The upright
branches rising from the decumbent stems are normally
slender and graceful, with distant convolute leaves. On
the ocean front, on either dune or rocky escarpment, it
presents an unkempt appearance arising from a malforma-
tion of the infertile stems, which are dilated and crowded,
simulating a distichous arrangement though the leaves are
alternate. The flowering branches were not observed to .
be subject to this disability. |
The ‘‘Sour-grass,’’ Oxalis corniculata L., a shallow root-
ing creeper, of annual growth in cold regions, which
responds tothe mild conditions in this district, by attaining
a biennial, or even longer duration, is an exceptionally
adaptable species. It exercises little or no discrimination
as to soil, climate, elevation etc., contenting itself with
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 303
regulating the dimensions of its leaves and carpet, to meet
the varying conditions obtaining in its ubiquitous habitat.
’ On the dune it reaches the frontal slopes, displaying a pre-
ference, here as elsewhere, for association with a ‘‘Couch’”’
lawn, but is capable of maintaining its individuality on the
bare sandy plateau.
In a frontal position on the dune flat, the ‘‘Salt-wort,”’
Salsola kali L.,—found on the shores of most temperate
countries—was represented (November) by numerous groups
of seedlings, springing up among the rapidly withering
stems of the parent plants. The adolescent plants are
leafy, but can only maintain the foliar character for a brief
period, reducing it when they reacl the adult stage toa
mere wing-like, spine tipped, outgrowth (cladodium) on the
succulent stem and branches. The latter are interwoven
into a divaricate framework, stayed and supported to pre-
vent dislocation and consequent fracture, of the heavy
brittle limbs. The interior form of this species, the ‘Roly
Poly’’ of the Western Plains, is less succulent and more
spiny, and retains its foliage to a much later stage. On
the exposed ocean beaches the ‘“‘Salt-wort’’ is not as
plentiful as on the sheltered harbour beaches, e.g., the
eastern shore of Botany Bay, where it was collected by
Banks and Solander in 1770. The fact of its presence pre-
vious to the advent of these eminent botanists, isa measure
of evidence that it is not an alien in Australia.
The ‘Travellers’ Joy,’ Clematis glycinoides DO. occasion-
ally crosses the dune flat to the frontal embankment, where
in the absence of supporting shrubby growths, it forms a
tangled thicket. It is a typical example of the petiolar
group of climbers, and when growing in its customary
station in the scrub, its running stem ascends the trunk of
an arboreal neighbour, and throws a leaf oyer a convenient
branch. The tendril-like leafstalk coils itself with one or
304 eee A. A. HAMILTON.
more spirals round the branch, securing a foothold from
which the climbing shoot advances to a higher plane, the
pendulous stems eventually festooning the shrubs in the
immediate vicinity.
A perrenial Sonchus (under review), is sparsely sprinkled
among the Spinifex trails, or dotted on the bare dune slopes.
This deep-rooting species has adopted both sexual and
vegetative methods of reproduction, the former for dis-
tributive purposes (seeds), and the latter as a colonising
agency (offsets). The young plants spread outwards
encircling and protecting the parent plant, and maintaining
it in an elevated position in the centre of the cluster.
A widely distributed extra-tropical “Rush,” Scirpus
nodosus L., is the most prominent Cyperaceous plant on
the shoreline. It advances to the frontal dune slopes and
is frequent on the plateau, its solitary tufts rising from
the bare sand or turf lawn, imparting a marked feature to
the dune landscape. Its intricate system of stout, wiry,
strongly jointed rhizomes, provides a foundation upon which
the closely packed superstructure of elongated stems is
secure from overthrow by the fiercest storm blasts. It is
equally in evidence on the rocky escarpment and headland,
in sand-patches, soil-pockets and rock crevices.
The dune embankment which has gradually lowered is now
merged into the beach. The sweep of the curve towards
Long Reef is interrupted by the intrusion of a bluff, on
whose rocky escarpment the trailing stems of Kennedya
rubicunda Vent., and the ‘‘Egyptian Bind-weed,” Ipomoea
palmata Forsk.,are interlaced. The latter is the Convolvulus
cairicus of Linneeus, a dedication (specific) to the ancient
city of Cairo, where it has been cultivated for many cen-
turies. Though a trailer on the rocky escarpment, it does not
descend to the, dune, it is normally a climber. In a paper
on the “Flora of Norfolk Island,”’* Mr. J. H. Maiden says:
1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8S. Wales, Vol. xxviii, p. 692.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES, 305
“It is found all over the island climbing the highest trees.’’
At Kurnell, near the landing place of Captain Oook, it was
noted climbing trees of Banksia integrifolia, and this is
doubtless the source from which Banks and Solander col-
lected their specimens, a sheet of which is now incorporated
in the National Herbarium collection. It has not, so far
as I can ascertain, been recorded south of Port Jackson,
but we have specimens in the National Herbarium collected
by Mr. A. H. S. Lucas at Jervis Bay, 7, 1899, and by Mr.
R. H. Cambage at Ulladulla, No. 4174, 12, 1915.
Associated with these trailers was the prostrate herbace-
ous Hibiscus trionum L., the ‘‘ Bladder Hibiscus’’ of
HKurope. Its flowers are short lived, opening for a few
hours only. It was not seen elsewhere on the shoreline,
but its occurrence in the vicinity of the beach is not unusual.
The indigenous vegetation, with the exception of a few
scattered -trees of Banksia integrifola, several of which
occupy positions on the extreme verge of the bluff, has been
removed from the top of the headland and the ground turfed
with ‘‘Couch,’’ which creeps down the slopes of the over-
lying Narrabeen Shale until it reaches the rocky escarpment
at the base, where it finds its associates of the dune Sporo-
bolus virginicus and Zoysia pungens, fringing the rock
benches.
Beyond the bluff the beach narrows, the dune embank-
ment rising abruptly from the strand, its verge indifferently
protected by the remnant of the native flora. On the
northern slopes of Long Reef point, isolated specimens of
Banksia integrifolia find a somewhat insecure foothold on
the ridges, the trees dwarfing as they reach the line of
exposure on the ocean front. [The winds most injurious
to the vegetation on the shoreline come from the south,
and the northern slopes of a promontory or headland are
more or less protected from its visitation].
T—October 3, 19.7.
306 A. A. HAMILTON.
The broad benches of the rocky escarpment are thinly
coated with a layer of soil, (Narrabeen Shale) eroded from
the embankment above, on which two grasses, Imperata
arundinacea Oyr., ‘‘ Blady-grass,’’ and Themeda Forskalii
Hack. var. imberbis, ‘‘ Kangaroo-grass,’’ have established
colonies. Both species form gregarious communities, the
former linking up its members by their subterranean stems,
and the latter binding its closely packed tufts by interlac-
ing their erial stems. Though the communal bond is a
palpably useful device in this unstable environment, it does
not appear that these plants have adopted it with a view
to the conquest of this territory, as both species act ina
similar manner in situations where the soil is perfectly
stable, though in the latter case the tufts of the ‘‘Kangaroo-
grass’’ adopt a more open formation. Itis evident that the
survival of these grasses, in this exposed position, is due to
the suitability to the prevailing conditions of their ordinary
habits and structure. A few clumps of the cosmopolitan
Juncus effusus L., are present in the moist rock crevices.
It does not favour the dry dune slopes, its massed formation
onthe margin of the beach lagoon disclosing its preferential
habitat. The taller species of Juncus, (Junci genuini) are
exceptionally plastic, and owing to the paucity of fixed
morphological characters are difficult to separate.
At the extremity of the promontory, the steep bluff, and
the easily eroded shale of which it is composed, have, in
combination, created a situation so detrimental to plant
life that the slope isalmost bare. Two trailers, Kennedya
rubicunda Vent., and Wedelia biflora DC., are the only
inhabitants of this inhospitable region. The former extends
to the coastal tableland but the latter is confined almost
exclusively tothe shoreline. Its habit of scrambling among
hedges and rocks near the sea side, is noted by Bentham in
the “Flora Hongkongensis,’’ p. 163. Beyond the point the
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 307
dune formation reappears, and a little further south the
shoreline again alters, the bare embankment facing the
ocean disclosing the local shale. Two shrubby species
occupy prominent positions on its verge, the “‘Coast Rose-
mary,’’ Westringia rosmariniformis Sm., and the “Coast
Tea-tree.’’ The former is rarely found more’ than a few
hundred yards inland, and exhibits a preference for the
headland rather than the dune. Its associate, on the con-
trary, reaches its optimum on the dune, though it occasion-
ally forms by no means despicable colonies on the more
sheltered parts of the rocky hillside. :
The root system of young plants of the Coast Tea-tree
growing on the dune is chiefly lateral, the tap-root in the
example exhibited measuring 43 inches, the laterals reach-
ing a length of 18 inches. This arrangement is due to the
fact that the modicum of humus in the dune soil is super-
ficial, the roots spreading in the direction of the food supply.
In a comprehensive article on “‘Sand-drift Problem in New
South Wales,’’* the Government Botanist, Mr. J. H. Maiden
says of this species, (p. 988), “‘ Let me particularly emphasise
the value of Leptospermum lcevigatum, Nature’s special
sand-stay for many parts of coastal New South Wales.”’
At the southern end of the headland the escarpment
descends with a steep grade to Deewhy Beach. ‘Two
undershrubs were noted on its slope, Acacia myrtifolia
Willd., and Styphelia humifusa Pers., the prostrate Ground
Berry, neither of which is found on the frontal dune
slopes. The waters of the lagoon behind the beach have
overflowed in several places, and formed broad shallow
drainage channels across the dune, extending to the strand. ©
In this moist area the sand or mud creeper, Bramia indica
Lam.,, has formed large carpets, connected throughout by
its creeping stems. Associated with it is a diminutive
: Agric. Gazette N. S. Wales, Vol. xvii, p, 975.
308 A. A. HAMILTON.
sedge, Scirpus cernuus Vahl., which contributes a measure
of assistance to the communal effort to secure stability by
means of its ramifying stolons.
At Port Hacking, B. indica was recently noted associated
with another mud-creeping member of the same family,
Mimulus repens R. Br., the ‘‘Oreeping Monkey Flower.”
The former, which had not previously been recorded south
of Parramatta, is a common marsh plant in most tropical
countries, and, as is the case with many widely distributed
species, has acquired an extensive synonomy. The climatic
boundaries of these two species overlap in New South
Wales from the northern rivers to Port Hacking, M. repens
proceeding south from the latter locality to the colder
parts of New Zealand, and B. indica extending northwards
into warmer latitudes.
A large area on either side of the drainage channel is in
the sole occupation of a maritime sedge, Carex pumila
Thunb., which prefers a position less constantly inundated
than that favoured by B. indica, the volume of surface
water regulating the boundaries of these two species. The
Carex is one of the few plants which are capable of exist-
ing on the strand, usually choosing the level stretches at
either end of the beach under the lee of the headland, and
spreading thence to the dune when the conditions are
favourable. It is distributed along the coastal beaches by
means of its fruit (utricle), a corky watertight vessel which
is produced in large quantities. They are swept off by the
high tides which occasionally inundate the colony, and
carried by the ocean currents to distant beaches, the
buoyant water resistant utricle maintaining the flotation,
and protecting the enclosed seed. A safeguard against.
tidal invasion is furnished by the subterranean connective
arrangement, the tufted leafy members of the colony rising
at more or less distant intervals from the stout ropy
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 309
rhizomes, which root below each tuft, simulating under-
ground, the action of the Spinifex on the surface. Behind
the Carex a colony of Scirpus nodosus is in possession of
the dune slope, its scattered clumps penetrating the
fringe of a forest of Banksia integrifolia.
The Banksia continues the sequence as a pure culture,
inland to the Pittwater road, where its association is
intruded by a few trees of the “‘ Blood-wood,”’ Eucalyptus
corymbosa Sm. The “Swamp Oak,’ Casuarina glauca
Sieb., has here demonstrated its adaptability, by ascending
the dry sandy hill to a considerable distance from its normal
habitat on the margin of the lagoon.
South of the entrance to: Deewhy lagoon, an association
of Apium prostratum Labill., the ‘Australian Celery,”’ is
established among the Spinifex. When growing in close
proximity to the strand, this diffuse herb incurves the leaves
on its exposed margin, presenting a rounded surface to the
wind and spray. On the dune the plants are solitary, but
in moist situations in the soil pockets and crevices on the ©
rocky ocean escarpment, they frequently form confluent
mats in association with Lobelia anceps Thunb., and
Samolus repens Pers.
The dune vegetation from this point to beyond the centre
of the beach is herbaceous, one plant (dwarfed) of Lepto-
spermum loevigatum, and a few bushes of Styphelia Richei
Labill., on the frontal slopes, were the only shrubby growths
noted. The latter, a halophilous species which does not
travel far inland, displays a partiality for the dune, rarely
extending to the rocky escarpment or hillside. Its suscep-
tibility to exposure is invariably expressed by dwarfing
{nanism), a considerable degree of shelter being necessary
for the attainment of its maximum stature.
The rearward dune slope trending towards the waters of
the lagoon is carpeted at its base by a lawn of Zoysia
310 A. A. HAMILTON.
pungens. Nearing the lagoon the latter meets and enters:
an association of Carex pumila, which extends—accom-
panied by the rapidly weakening Zoysia—to the verge of
the muddy zone fringing the lagoon, where the further
progress of the Zoysia is arrested, the Carex proceeding
alone towards the submerged area. The shallow water
bordering the mud is occupied by several semi-aquatic
species, grouped in accordance with the degree of submerg-
ence suited to their requirements. Mimulus repens R.Br.,.
and Selliera radicans Cav., remain in the vicinity of the
~ muddy region, Cotula coronopifolia L., Samolus repens
Pers., and Cotula reptans Benth., advancing in this order
towards the deeper water. Neither Cotula reptans, nor
Mimulus repens, were noted on the rocky headland, but
Selliera radicans, and Cotula coronopifolia, were occasion-
ally observed associated on the drainage soaked ledges of
the escarpment.
Near the southern (sheltered) end of the beach, Sccevola
suaveolens R.Br., spreads a heavy succulent carpet, closely
investing and retaining the sand within its boundaries. It
is almost entirely restricted to the frontal dune slopes,
rarely crossing the embankment plateau. The end of the
beach is flanked by a bank of shale, which curves towards
the rocky headland running south to Deewhy head, trailing
stems of Kennedya rubicunda and Mesembryanthemum
cequilaterale, festooning the weathered verge of the shale-
bank.
On the rocky headland, a rhizomatic colony of Dianella
revoluta R.Br., is established in a shallow bed of soil in the
rock benches. This species also frequents the dune, but is
unable to reach the frontal slopes, and is usually found in
the open country at the rear among the hardy undergrowth.
Its fibrous framework does not makea heavy demand upon
either food or water supply. A considerable percentage of
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. oll
the vegetation on the ocean headland consists of the prickly
narrow-leaved Melaleuca nodosa Sm., a species edaphically
adaptable but climatically restricted. Itis present on the
landward sand hills and on the Wianamatta shales of the
Bankstown-Cabramatta district, retaining its xerophytic
leaf structure in both regions. In the latter area it occas-
ionally covers large tracts several acres in extent, with a
practically pure culture.
On the exposed (southern) slope of Deewhy Head the
vegetation is low and closely packed, creeping over, or
clinging to the verges of the boulders and benches, and
rooting in the soil pockets among the rock masses. The
‘wiry leaved Xerotes glauca R. Br., forms ribbon-like
colonies in the soil trenches, curving among the rock
benches, or takes exclusive possession of a shallow basin.
Plants of the flat-stemmed (cladode) Bossicea scolopendria
Sm., growing in the rock crevices have developed excep-
tionally large tufts which demonstrate the suitability of
this species for a harsh exposed position, The trailing
stems of the ‘‘Sarsaparilla,” Smilax glycyphylla Sm.,
wind in and out among the low shrubs or coil themselves
upon each other on the bare rock ledges. Marsdenia
suaveolens R. Br., a twiner under favourable conditions,
can only maintain, in this situation, a short debilitated
stem, with rarely a few branches.
A few spreading tufts of the somewhat rare Schoenus
tenuissima Benth., find a lodgment in the soil pockets, but
it is better suited in sandy peaty soil, which, though con-
stantly moist, is rarely inundated. Its ascertained range
northwards does not extend far beyond Port Jackson, and
it was until recently regarded as an exclusively coastal
species.’ Several plants of the scrambling Bauwera rubioides
Andr., which is usually found on the banks of a watercourse
' Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv, p. 412.
a)
a
>
~~
ake A. A. HAMILTON.
are established among the boulders. The drastic change
in the conditions on the headland has compelled the plants
to reduce their bulk, diminish and toughen their foliage,
and encourage a twiggy growth in their branches.
In a sheltered hollow in which a swampy seepage has
collected, a patch of Boeckea crenulata R. Br., is estab- —
lished. This shrub presents a considerable divergence in
habit and height of the plants, and in size and arrangement
of the leaves, within its coastal boundaries. In his descrip-
tion of the species, Bentham (Fl. Austr., iii, 78), allows a
margin in the length of the leaves from 13 to 3 lines. The
plants on Deewhy Head average 18 inches in height, with
leaves 2 lines long. This form is also found in Swampy places ~
in the Centennial Park, and extends vid Hornsby to the
Blue Mountains, in similar situations. .
On the exposed frontal ledges of the parapet above the
ocean escarpment, this small Jeaved form is prostrate and
matted, but gradually assumes an erect habit as it retreats
from the verge. In the soil pockets on the broken cliffs of
the ocean escarpment at Manly, Bondi, etc.,a form occurs =
with symmetrically decussate leaves 4$ lines long, which
reaches a height of 3 feet. Growing side by side with this
form, plants of a similar height were noted, whose leaves
were slightly smaller, more distant. and not strickly decus-
sate. A closer scrutiny revealed the two forms as young
and old plants, the former with succulent, closely packed
leaves, regularly arranged in opposite pairs, and the latter
with shrunken leaves, a sufficient number of which had
fallen, to obscure the decussate alternation, and completely
alter the facies of the shrub. Both forms are depicted in
Illustr. Cook’s Voyage, ii, tt. 103-104, the former, a twig
from a young plant, representing the typical species, and
the latter, a twig from an old shrub, the var. tenella of
Bentham. Both forms of the taller, large leaved shrubs—
a
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 313
old and young—occupied positions with free drainage, the
smaller plants with lesser leaves, all growing under swampy
_ (xerophytic) conditions.
The stout ropy stems of the parasitic Cassytha melantha
R. Br., twine round and attach suckers to any vegetation
within their reach. The habitat of this species is given in
the FI. Tasm. i, 317, as ‘‘Abundant near Launceston grow-
ing principally on Acacias.”’ In the FI. Austr. v, 311, its
habitat in W.A.-is given as ‘‘South West Bay, on Acacias
near the sea.’’ It was not noted to exhibit a preference
for any member of this genus as a host in the Port Jackson
district. .
Two Banksias, B. ericifolia L., and B. marginata Cav.,
approach to within a few yards of the shoreline. The
former does not attain more than a shrubby growth on the
rocky headland, a moist peaty soil in a sheltered position
being essential for its arboreal development. B. marginata
is better adapted to this harsh environment, and in favoured
positions makes a passable shrub, but its maximum growth
is reached on the landward sandhills. B. ericifolia is
restricted to the coastal districts of south-eastern Australia,
its congener, which extends to Tasmania, having a much
wider range.
A floriferous undershrub, EHriostemon buwxifolius Sm., is
sparsely represented on the headland. It extends coastally
from Gosford to Conjola, but it is most abundant between
South Head and Port Hacking, the rocky terraces in the
vicinity of the ocean escarpment—it is not found on the
dune—accommodating the major portion of its member-
ship. At Waterfall, where it reaches its greatest distance
from the coast, and at French’s Forest, inland from Manly,
the leaves lose their apical roundness and are produced into
a lanceolate point. Within the area extending north and
south from Manly to George’s River, and onwards, as far
314 A. A. HAMILTON. .-
at least as the Woronora at Heathcote, EH. buwifolius is
replaced inland by its narrower leaved congener, EH. scaber
Paxt. The latter reaches Liverpool via George’s River,
Spreading west towards the Nepean, and extending to the
foothills of the southern highlands and the Blue Mountains,
whose ascent it is unable to accomplish. The geographical
sequence is continued by the varifoliate EH. hispidulus
Paxt., and maintained on the southern highlands to an
altitude of approximately 2,000 feet at Hilltop, and on the
Blue Mountains to Lawson, 2,400 feet.
From. the boundary of this species, westwards to the
highest elevation on the Blue Mountains, the sub-alpine
HK. obovalis A. Cunn., represents this closely allied group,
whose limits, though not strictly defined, are sufficiently
well marked ecological regions, viz., the exposed shoreline;
the sheltered equable basin between the coast and foothills;
the comparatively mild conditions obtaining on the lower
slopes of the Blue Mountains; and the bleak, storm-swept,.
sub-alpine area. Notes appended to the descriptions of
these Hriostemons by Bentham,! disclose a difference of
opinion between the author and Baron von Mueller, on the
relative specific values of H. hispidulus Sieb., and EH. scaber
Paxt. Bentham also suggests that EH. buxifolius Sm., is
merged into H. obovalis A. Cunn.
These four forms are differentiated chiefly on foliar
characters, and may well be considered as species in the
making, the variation shown in a series of examples of EH.
hispidulus, exhibited before the Linnean Society,” showing
a degree of divergence equal to that which distinguishes
any member of the group from its allies. The following
five species are found on the rocky hillside rising from the
headland, and are endemic in New South Wales. Grevillea
* Fil. Austr. i, pp. 333, 334.
2 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, p. 415, 1915.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 315
punicea R. Br., is limited to the coast, extending from the
Hawkesbury River to Port Hacking. Hemigenia purpurea
R. Br. is found as far south as Dapto, and has ascended the
Blue Mountains to Linden. The divaricately branched
Podocarpus spinulosa R. Br., which extends south to Con-
jola, has followed the course of George’s River to Liver-
pool, and ascended the southern highlands to Picton. The
rigid, exposure resistant, ‘‘Honey Flower,’’ Lambertia
formosa Sm., has a lengthy coastal range, and surmounts
the western slopes of the dividing range at New England, |
the Blue Mountains, and the southern highlands. Pultencea
elliptica Sm., ranges coastally from Bermagui to Morrisset
and reaches Barber’s Creek on the southern highlands, and
Leura on the Blue Mountains.
A further series of species (five) which occur on the
hillside and are found in New South Wales and Queensland
only are as follows:—Actinotus Helianthi Labill., the
**Hlannel Flower.’’ The plants of this popular favorite,
though usually scattered, occasionally form compactassocia-
tions. The close colonisation of an area by this species is.
reminiscent of the apparently spontaneous occurrence in a
district of certain well known aliens, which flourish luxuri-
antly for a period, after which the plants lose their vigour,
and the colony disintegrates, or in some instances entirely
disappears. Its congener A. ininor DC., a prostrate herb,
does not depart from its solitary habit. On the headland
Phyllota phylicoides Benth., is dwarfed, its woody root-
stock spreading laterally and sending up numerous short
twiggy stems. In the sheltered gullies on the lower slopes
on the Blue Mountains it assumes an erect habit, and
softens the asperity of its foliage. Olax stricta R. Br., a
graceful shrub with an open, distichously arranged, branch-
ing habit, and the heath-leaved Philotheca australis Rudge,
whose range extends far into the interior, completes this
group.
316 A. A. HAMILTON.
Two species which range from Queensland to Victoria
are the spreading, flexible stemmed Sccevola hispida Oav.
and the very common—in the Port Jackson district—
Dodoncea triquetra Wendl., the latter responding very
quickly to exposure by reducing the size of its leaves. The
typical Xanthosia pilosa Rudge, with a heavy grey vestiture
on the underside of its leaves, frequents the rocky hillside,
the form with a brown foliar tomentum remaining further |
inland. Two Acacias are occasional on the headland, the
pinnate-leaved A. discolor Willd., and the ‘*Coast Golden
Wattle,’’ A. longifolia Willd. The latter is more frequent
on the dune where it is prominent on the frontal slopes,
but A. discolor favours the rocky hillside, and though
- occasional on the inland sandhills does not closely approach
the beach on the dune.
The headland at its southern end descends abruptly to
the strand with a bank of sand at its base sloping to the
entrance of Manly Lagoon. Much of the hillside vegeta-
tion is continued on the sand-bank, the “‘Coast Rosemary,”
creeping along its crest some 300 yards inland. At the
base of the slope on the banks of the lagoon entrance
channel, a semi-aquatic creeper introduced from America,
Hydrocotyle umbellataL.,var. bonariensis Spreng.,formsan
underground network of stems, and carpets the surface
with its large orbicular peltate leaves, which lie closely
- appressed to the sand on the moist verge of the channel,
or are raised on their long petioles when growing in a lawn
of Zoysia on the dune slope. Though it flourishes best
near the water, it will creep up a dry steep sandy embank-
ment to a considerable height. This alien was first dis-
— covered by the writer in 1902, on Freshwater Beach.’ Its
range as now known extends northerly to Newcastle, and
as far south as Thirroul where it was recently collected by
' Proc Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xx11I, p. 906.
TOPUGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. o17
Mr. A. H. S. Lucas. It was also noted some distance
inland at Gosford State Nursery ina swampy patch, creep-
ing among the rank undergrowth. In this situation the
rhachis of the inflorescence, in common with the leaf-
stalks, has elongated in response to the influence of shade
and moisture.
On the southern side of the lagoon entrance the dune
embankment rises abruptly to a height of 25-30 feet. On
the plateau at the northern end is a shallow depression, the
remnant of the usual valley, which has been levelled for
the greater part of its length by the deposit from a huge
wind-torn rent in the embankment further south. ‘This
hollow harbours a shrubby vegetation, among which Myo-
porum insulure R. Br., a floriferous, halophytic plant with
succulent fruits, occupies a prominent position. This
species, which is closely confined to the coast, is replaced
a short distance inland at Brighton-le-Sands by its arboreal
congener, M. tenuifolium Forst. var. acuminatum Benth.
Hlceodendron australe Vent., also found in the depression
‘favours the coastal brush, and is only occasional on the dune.
Southwards the embankment is disrupted to its base, the
cavity extending 100-200 yards along the front and a
similar distance inland. On the floor of this gap Festuca
littoralis is in undisputed possession. Its colony, originat-
ing on the southern side of the breach under the lee of the
broken embankment, has spread over the greater part of
the denuded area, its tufts plentifully sprinkled upon the
bare territory into which no other species has yet ventured,
and working seawards to a point well below high water
mark. The Fescue has already raised a low uneven bank
in the centre of the excavation by the previously explained
process. The displaced sand deposited on the rearward
slopes has buried the smaller shrubs and undergrowth, a
few trees of Banksia integrifolia, and Casuarina glauca,
so «4
+ ee
—"/
e i)
. .
alone surviving. On the newly formed bank the Fescue
has erected an irregular system of elongated bands running
parallel to the beach, stretching ribbon-like, along the
otherwise bare sand and creating a series of ridges, whose
confluence, when consummated, wil! form the nucleus of the
landward embankment of the dune valley which will even-
tually be developed. In this region also the Fescue is
unsupported, no other species with the qualification neces-
sary for existence in this unstable environment having yet
appeared, but its associate the Spinifex, is moving out from
the embankment plateau to connect with the Fescue, and
assist by retaining the bank which the latter is building. —
a18 A. A. HAMILTON.~
At the southern boundary of the excavation, a second
similar breach occurs. On the frontal slope of the embank-
ment, south of these gaps, which here enters the protected
zone under the influence of the shelter provided by the
northern headland of Freshwater Beach, the succulent
trailer Senecio spathulatus. A. Rich., has formed a chain of
mats several hundred yards in length, on horizontal ridges
at a relatively even elevation above the strand. This
species has been collected as far north as Port Stephens,
‘but is more securely established south of Port Jackson, and
rarely leaves the vicinity of the strand. It responds
quickly to a halophilous environment, modifying its jeaf
structure chiefly in the direction of diminished length, and
increased rotundity and thickness, as the soil salinity is
increased.
A considerable area on the rearward slopes is occupied
by a dense coppice of the ‘“‘Coast Tea-tree,” in whose
darkened precincts a colony of Podocarpus spinulosa is
established. The Podocarpus is an exceptionally rigid :
species, and does not exhibit a marked difference in either ;
structure or habit when growing in this dense shade, to
that maintained on the open hillside subject to direct
her
a
- a
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 319
isolation. At the southern end of the beach the dune is
merged into the headland, a belt of dwarfed plants of
Banksia serrata L., 3—5 feet high, lining its base a few
yards above the flood waters of the lagoon. The headland,
as it extends seawards, develops the usual escarpment
which continues along the ocean front to Freshwater Beach.
’ On its frontal ledges Selliera radicans, a species whose
proclivities are estuarine rather than littoral, creeps along
the surface of the shallow mud in erratic lines, which, in
favoured positions, become united into small carpets. The
broad succulent leaves which are closely appressed to the
ground, act in conjunction with its underground stem and
root system, aS a protective agency against the displace-
ment of the soft earth by the rock seepage. This species
has a climatic range from a few miles north of Port Jack-
son, south to New Zealand, and is also found in extra-
tropical South America.
In a shallow water channel on the hillside, a series of
plants, ligneous and herbaceous, find a congenial habitat.
Of the shrubs, Callistemon linearis DC., has rigid linear
leaves, the oldest of which, those at the base of the branches,
it discards in response to a diminished water supply. Its
frequent associate Hakea pugioniformis Cav., does not
under similar conditions shed its leaves, but shortens them
and arrests the internodal elongation, which results in leaf
aggregation and consequent reduction of the isolated
surface. Representative herbaceous plants in the water-
channel are Goodenia bellidifolia Sm.,Velleia lyrata R.Br.,
and Stypandra umbellata R.Br., all of which have rosulate
leaves, flattened on the ground when the surface is flooded
and the foothold insecure, relaxed and uplifted as the sur-
face dries and a measure of stability is restored. The first
named has a considerable coastal range, and ascends the
eastern slopes of the dividing range to the tableland in
320 A. A. HAMILTON.
several places. Velleia lyrata is more restricted, occurring
most frequently in the Port Jackson district, though it has
been collected as far north as Gosford.
Three shrubs were noted on the headland with xerophytic
heath-like foliage, two of which, Calycothrix tetragona
Labill., and Kunzea capitata Reichb., found colonies on the
rock benches, the former maintaining the larger and less
intruded association. The third, Styphelia microphylla
Spreng., has a scattered membership among the boulders.
A dwarfed form of Pimelea linifolia Sm., common and
variable—the latter the natural corollary of the former—
is occasional on the headland and was also noted on the
plateau and rearward slopes of the dune. The fugacious
flowered Patersonia sericea R.Br., is plentiful, and the
slender wiry-stemmed Ccesia parviflora: R. Br., more
scantily represented among the undershrubs, the former
arranged in circular clusters in well drained positions on
the hillside. The Patersonia is represented on the Blue
Mountains by its var. longifolia,a much smaller plant with
narrower leaves, a result of the deleterious conditions
obtaining in its selected habitat, a peaty, badly drained
soil with a cyperaceous association.
Ruelingia hermannicefolia Steetz, a low spreading
twiggy shrub, descends the hillside to the exposed terrace
above the escarpment. For the greater part of the year
the plants are plentifully furnished with foliage, but during
the fruiting period leaf production is suspended, the plants
expending the whole of their energy in the propagation of
the capsular fruits, which are borne in great profusion on
the upper side of the leaf denuded branches, the dwarfed
shrubs presenting an extensive fruit covered surface. A
tall neighbour, Casuarina distyla Vent., which has per-
manently reduced its leafage to a minimum, also devotes a
considerable effort to the formation of the large woody
fruits with which its branches are laden.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES a21
Several prostrate divaricately-branched examples of a
small undershrub Micrantheum ericoides Desf., are scat-
tered on the headland. In its customary habitat on the
peaty margin of a swamp it is upright, and there is no
ramification of the branches. This species extends from
National Park to Queensland, and creeping round on the
coastal sandstone has reached and ascended the Blue
Mountains to a height of 2,000 feet at Hazelbrook. Phe-
balium squamulosum Vent. is dwarfed when subjected to
exposure on the headland, though in sheltered positions it
may reach its normal height, 3—4 feet. The plants in this
station have much broader leaves than those of a form
growing in a well favoured position among the alluvial
detritus on the banks of the Nepean River at Douglas Park.
The ‘* Native Rose,’’ Boronia serrulata Sm., is suspected
of parentage in the production of a natural hybrid, B.
serrulata x B. floribunda Sieb.,' both of which are found
on the headland. The former has a limited range on the
coastal sandstone from Gosford to Port Hacking. Acacia
suaveolens Willd., one of the earliest flowering Wattles,
has shorter leaves when growing on the headland than its
confreres on the landward sandhills. An orbicular, fleshy
leaved form of Trachymene Billardieri F.v.M. var. crassi-
folia Benth., occupies a frontal position on the ledges above
the escarpment. Of this variety Bentham, (FI. Austr., iii,
357) says, “*...and at first sight it appears to be a well marked
species but nk differences may TOSEIO ES be due toa sea-
coast station.’
A glumaceous association of tufted cee which intermix
freely, is established on the shallow sand patches and soil
pockets on the rock benches. Of these, Lepidosperma ~
viscidum R. Br., has adopted the xerophytic device denoted
by its specific name. On a warm day, when the viscid
1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol. xu, p. 419.
U—October 3, 1917.
322 ‘ A. A. HAMILTON. ‘
exudation is greatly increased, a sticky stain is left if the
leaves are drawn through the hand. Its congener L. con-
cavum R. Br., has thinner and more flexible leaves and
stems. The dicecious Restio dimorphus R. Br., a coastal
sandstone species common in the Port Jackson district,
spreads a drooping plume-like tuft whose bad presents
an effective barrier to intruders.
Panicum marginatum R. Br., a wiry-stemmed straggler,
reduces the density of its tuft under drought conditions by
restricting the number of its stems, and narrowing and
recurving the margins of its leaves. Discussing the varie.
ties of this species, Bentham, (Fl. Austr., vii, 486) says of
P. strictum R. Br.—which he has reduced to a var. of P.
marginatum—‘'Some specimens seem to show that the P.
strictum is rather an aftergrowth from plants that have
been cut down than a distinct variety.’’ In one of the
swamps in the Centennial Park there is a dense growth of
this form which under normal conditions has the flattened
habit of the typical P. marginatum, but after a fire has run
through the swamp the young shoots are upright and
luxuriant, exhibiting a striking contrast to the older growths ©
which have escaped the fire. The swamp form is more
compact than the rock-dweller, and does not attain either
the elongated paniculate inflorescence or the breadth of
leaf of the typical P. marginatum.
Descending from the headland to Freshwater Beach,
Rottbeellia compressa L.f., a climatically adaptable species
which has reached Australia from India via the Malayan
Archipelago and proceeded south to Tasmania, was noted
lining the moist rock benches at the base of the escarpment,
flanked by small communities of Lobelia anceps and Samolus
repens. The association under similar conditions of this
series of swamp habitues was frequently observed. The
- vegetation on the dune at Freshwater Beach has been
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECULOGICAL AND TAXONOMIC NOTES, 323
extensively deleted, the remainder presenting no excep-
tional features. This applies also to the headland at the
south end of the beach on which the flora is similar to that
described on the northern headland.
On the rugged escarpment at the northern end of Manly
Beach numerous plants of Olearia dentata Andr., find a
jodgment. The normal habit and stature of these soft-
wooded shrubs is well maintained in this exposed position,
but. a considerable divergence in foliage was noted, the
flowers also varying in colour from deep blue to pure white.
The usual comparatively flat area at the end of the beach
is covered with an almost pure growth of Carex pumila,
into which the Spinifex—a few trails of which crown the
occasional ridges—is the only intruder. Behind the Carex,
which runs inland 200-300 yards along the banks of the
entrance channel to Curl Ourl Lagoon, two introduced
shrubs Polygala myrtifolia L., a native of South Africa,
and Lantana Camara L., from South America, have in
~ combination colonised an extensive tract on the banks of
the channel.
The dune embankment at Manly Beach has been artifici-
ally levelled and turfed, and protected by a wall of masonry
extending from the southern end of the beach to some
distance beyond the centre. At the northern end the front
is unprotected and requires constant renewal, both Couch
and Buffalo, of which the lawn is composed, receding
as the bank is eroded. The wind is here raising a sand-
ridge parallel to the turfed embankment—upon which the
Spinifex is already established—which will eventually
afford a measure of protection to the artificial sward.
Immediately behind the beach an avenue of the Norfolk
Island Pine, Araucaria excelsa R. Br., has been planted,
the results fully justifying the encomiums bestowed upon
4his tree for maritime situations by the Government
324 A. A. HAMILTON.
Botanist, Mr. J. H. Maiden, who on p. 984 of the article on
‘“‘The Sand-drift Problem,’’ previously referred to, says:—
beste ‘*Tt revels in the sea air; its narrow leaves and conical
shape present comparatively little resistance to strong
winds; it is ornamental in appearance, and it furnishes a
useful soft wood.”’
At the southern end of the beach several trees, the
remnant of a forest of Melaleuca leucadendron L. var.albida
(Sieb.) EK. Cheel MS. (Melaleuca Smithii R.T. Baker) whose
usual habitat is low-lying swampy ground, are established
on the rocky hillside which runs eastward to the ocean
headland. On its sheltered (northern) slope a series of
grasses occur, all occupying dry stations. The slender
stemmed Panicum parviflorum R. Br., Small-flowered
Hinger-grass; Hehinopogon ovatus Beauv., the Rough-
bearded grass, witha climatic range from Northern Queens-
land south to New Zealand; the variable Poa ccespitosa
Forst.; and the weedy, cosmopolitan, Parramatta Grass, _
Sporobolus indicus R. Br. Two Restiaceous plants, Caustis
pentandra R.Br., and Lepyrodia scariosa R. Br., are here
occasionally associated. The latter is more frequent in
‘the drier parts of the swamp, the conditions prevailing in
either station producing a similar effect on the size and
habit of its tufts. The Caustis is confined to the sandstone
hillside, and in the open forest country in the National
Park, and on the lower slopes of the Blue Mountains is a
-graceful plant with a drooping habit, its cane-like stems
reaching a length of seven feet, but on the headland it is
reduced to a stunted tussocky growth rarely exceeding two
feet in'height: > ~
On the soil patches coating the drainage soaked, basal
rock ledges, a typical congeries of ruderal plants is
assembled. The mud-creeping Penny-wort, Hydrocotyle
vulgaris L., overruns the tufts of Cyperus polystachyus
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 325
Rottb., and sprawls among the lax stems of the Sheep’s
Sorrel, Rumex acetosella L., the latter indicative of a sour
soil; and the Bushy Star-wort, Aster subulatus Mich., of
the North American salt-marshes finds in this environment
a satisfactory. substitute for its natural habitat. As a
result of the bad drainage and lack of eration, the tufts of
Scirpus nodosus located in the muddy area have become
debilitated, and the weakened stems unable to maintain
their normal erect habit are relaxed and prostrate.
Two Rutaceous undershrubs, Zieria leevigata Sm., and
‘Eriostemon Crowei F.v.M., are well represented on the
sandstone hillside, to which they are edaphically restricted.
Both species extend from Victoria to Queensland, and
ascend the eastern slopes of the dividing range to the table-
land. The Blue Mountain form of Z. leevigata was
described as a distinct species under Z. revoluta by Allan
Cunningham, in ‘‘Field’s New South Wales,’’ p. 330, but
was later reduced by Bentham, (FI. Austr. i, 304) to a
synonym of the former species. The Dwarf Apple,
Angophora cordifolia Cav., a local species found on the
coastal sandstone from Woy Woy to National Park, forms
small exclusive colonies.
Two forms of the Geebung, Persoonia lanceolata Andr.,
differing chiefly in size of leaf, occur on the hillside, both
maintaining their distinct leafage on the landward sand-
hills. Ricinocarpus pinifolius Desf., Trachymene linearis
Spreng., Acacia juniperina Willd., and Styphelia ericoides
Sm., have all narrowed their leaves with a transpiration
reducing objective. Hpacris longiflora Cav., is very
susceptible to the influence of shade, moisture and drainage,
plants growing within a few yards of each other quickly
responding by enlarging or reducing their foliage as these
factors are favourable cr the reverse. Styphelia tubiflora
Sm., a twiggy undershrub, occurs in isolated patches on
326 A. A. HAMILTON.
the hillside. A widely separated community of this species
occurs on the higher slopes of the Blue Mountains,
Two Hibbertias were noted, the upright H. linearis R.Br.
and the straggling H. fasciculata R. Br., ata distance from
the line of exposure. The weedy Pomax umbellata Sol.,
does not alter its configuration either on the open hillside
under direct insolation or in the dense shade of a shrubbery.
Its occasional associate, Chloanthes Stcechadis R. Br., on
the contrary, responds quickly, by reducing the size of its
leaves, when subjected to direct sunlight.
Billardieri scandens Sm., on the open hillside is reduced
to a shrubby growth. Its climbing habit, though tem-
porarily suspended, is disclosed by the advent of one or
more rampant twining shoots in the early spring, which
are unable to persist in the absence of shrubs to climb upon.
The rigid leaved Burrawang, Macrozamia spiralis Miq., is
well equipped, both above and below the ground line, to
withstand drought conditions, hypogeally, by virtue of its —
tuberous rootstock—a reservoir of food and moisture—and |
epigeally by means of its transpiration resistant foliage.
The frequent. mutilation of its leaves by grazing animals
has resulted in a reduction in the length of the frondage.
Two EHucalypts, the Blood-wood, H. corymbosa, and E.
virgata Sieb. var. obtusifiora Maiden, form small groves
on the hillside, occasionally in close proximity but not.
intrusive. The former in favourable situations attains the
dimensions of a large tree, but in this impoverished soil can
only maintain a limited arboreal growth.
On the lower slope of the hill where the shoreline winds
into Cabbage-tree Bay, the straggling Rumex scutatus L.,
an immigrant from southern Hurope, has established its
trailing stems among the Kangaroo-grass and other ces-
pitose vegetation, its succulent herbage indicating its
xerophytic protective device. Though not exclusively con-
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 327
fined to a saline environment it is more robust when grow-
ing in the vicinity of the sea. This plant is an aggressive
coloniser, its trailing stems, thickly covered with heavy
leaves, eventually building up a close screen, and depriving
the undergrowth within its network of the necessary light.
It is assisted underground by its tuberous root system—
reminiscent on a larger scale of the Nut Grass, Cyperus
rotundus L.—which develops into an intricate mass, taking
possession of the soil and starving out the existing vegeta-
tion. Its relatives, the Curled Dock, Rumex crispus L., -
and R. pulcher L., the Fiddle Dock, find a congenial home
in the drainage channel at the base of the escarpment.
Both species frequent the marsh, or the margin of the
water-course, and produce fruits in which the seeds are
enclosed in a corky case suitable for water carriage.
On the sheltered banks of Cabbage-tree Bay a limited
‘“‘brush’’ association is established. Two Native Grape
vines, Vitis hypoglauca F.v.M., and V. Baudiniana F.v.M.,
are growing side by side—a frequent occurrence—their
branches interlaced. Pittosporm revolutum Ait., occupies
a more exposed position on the hillside. The three above
species range coastally from Queensland to Victoria, and
ascend the eastern slopes of the dividing range to the table-
land via the brush gullies. The Port Jackson Fig, Ficus
rubiginosa Desf., roots in the sandstone crevices, its trunk
spreading over and moulding itself to the contour of the
rock ledges. When growing in the rich soil of the brush
forest, this basal trunk expansion is produced in the form
of flanking buttresses. There is no dune embankment
behind the diminutive beach, which is carpeted above high-
water mark by Carex pumila. —
On the strand at the base of the hill a row of Ooral-trees,
Erythrina indica Lam., has been planted. A native of
the Hast Indies which has reached the Northern Territory
328 A. A. HAMILTON’
via the Malayan Archipelago and crept down the Queens-
land coast, it has not yet spontaneously reached a station
south of our northern river system in New South Wales,
and probably most of the trees in that district were planted
by the settlers. That cooler climatic conditions offer no
obstacle to its progress southwards has been amply demon-
strated by the success attendant upon its acclimatisation
in the southern Ilawarra. |
In a valley draining into Cabbage-tree Bay, and running
parallel to the ocean escarpment, a typical coastal gully
flora is encountered. On the banks of the watercourse a
solitary example of the purple berried Hugenia cyanocarpa
F.v.M., was seen heavily loaded with fruit, though but a
slender shrub eight feet high. The fruiting of this tree in
the juvenile stage is mentioned by Messrs. Maiden and
Betche in a note on the species." The Mock Orange
Pittosporum undulatum Andr., a shapely ornamental tree
when growing in the brush forest, is somewhat cramped on
this rocky hillside, presenting a straggling appearance and
a sparse leafage. The Sydney Black Wattle, Callicoma
serratifolia Aundr., a withy stemmed shrub, the sole repre-
sentative of a genus endemic in Australia, was noted in its
customary position among the boulders in the watercourse.
A halophytic shrub Glochidion Ferdinandi J. Muell.,
which also grows near the watercourse, and frequents the
foreshores of the harbour, is extremely sensitive to frost
when growing at a distance from tidal waters. This
inability to withstand frost when removed from a saline
environment is even more pronounced in the soft-wooded
Hibiscus diversifolius Jacq. Seeds taken from a chaparal
of these plants growing close to the water’s edge at Botany
Bay were propagated at the Centennial Park, and the
resultant plants made a sturdy growth, attaining their full
1 Proc. Linn. Soe. N.S. Wales, Vol, xx1x, p. 741.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 329
height within the growing season. The winter frosts
wilted their leaves and blackened their stems, eventually
destroying them, the plants growing in their natural environ-
ment, though unsheltered, escaping uninjured.
' Two twiners Geitonoplesium cymosum A. -Cunn., and
Eustrephus latifolius R. Br., find in the canopy and support
of the tall shrubs and trees suitable conditions for climbing,
the two species, their stems intertwined, occasionally
mounting the same tree. Their range is similar, neither
advancing far inland, and both extending from Queensland
to Victoria. Both species are generically monotypic. An
individual specimen, the only one noted on the shore line,
of a large fruited Hucalypt, overhangs the watercourse. It
is considered by the Government Botanist, Mr. J.H. Maiden,
to be an intermediate form between E. pellita F.v.M., and
E. resinifera Sm., both of which are exhaustively treated
in his “‘Oritical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus,” Vol. 111,
Part 10.
Pultencea daphnoides Wendl., a common ‘coastal gully
shrub, is occasional among the larger growths near the
watercourse. It extends from Port Stephens south to
Tasmania, and ascends the Blue Mountains to the eastern
slope of King’s Tableland. The Christmas Bush, Cerato-
petalum gummiferum Sm., is also occasional in this shady
situation, but its greater frequency on the open hillside
marks its preference for the latter situation. The foliage
of this species is an excellent phenological indicator, the
leaves responding in a marked degree to seasonal changes.
It is confined to New South Wales, is chiefly coastal, and
ascends the Blue Mountains to Katoomba.
The dimorphic leaved Rapanea variabilis Mez, has
prickly margined juvenile leaves, which are not maintained
in the adult foliage, a physiological metamorphosis whose
function is still in the controversial stage. It is here
330 A. A. HAMILTON.
associated with the Blue-berry, Eleeocarpus reticulatus
Sm., both species displaying a preference for the shelter of
the gully and the proximity of the watercourse. The
association is maintained throughout their geographical
distribution which is centred in New South Wales, extend-
ing northerly into Queensland and southerly to Victoria,
both species also reaching a considerable altitude at various
points on the dividing range.
Several plants of Casuarina suberosa, are scattered along
the watercourse intermixed with the larger shrubs. The
characters usually relied upon to separate this species from
its congener C. distyla, are, its erect habit, slender
branchlets, and truncated cones. The two first mentioned
characters are largely dependent upon ecological conditions,
When growing individually, as noted above, the plants of
C. suberosa have the spreading habit and coarse branchlets
of C. distyla, but when assembled in a close coppice form-
ation (its usual habit) the growth necessarily becomes
erect. In such an assembly growing in a swampy flat in
the Centennial Park, the branchlets are typically slender.
The truncated cone of Casuarina suberosa is not infre-
quently simulated by that of C. distyla.
On the hillside rising from the gully to the ocean escarp-
ment, the open sandstone vegetation includes examples of
a broad leaved form of Hakea dactyloides Cav.; the
indifferently named Styphelia triflora Andr.—it is the
exception rather than the rule that the flowers are in
clusters of three; and the fascicled leaved .xerophyte
Darwinia fascicularis Rudge. |
Kunzea corifolia Reichb., which on the shale flats in the
Oabramatta-Bankstown district forms associations several
acres in extent, is unable on this sandstone hillside to
maintain a large colony, and is occasionally represented by
a group of two or three plants. Olimatically it is a cool
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. BBR
country species, extending from the Port Jackson district.
south to Tasmania. It ascends the Blue Mountains to
Lawson and reaches Hilltop on the southern highlands. The
weak, diminutive, Cryptandra ericifolia Sm., is occasional
in the damp soil pockets, its slender branches in this
exposed area prostrate and scantily clad with foliage. In
the peaty soil of the swamp,—its customary habit—the
branches supported by the crowded cyperaceous growth,
assume an erect habit and are more plentifully supplied
with leaves.
Numerous tufts of Restio fastigiatus R. Br., are
scattered among the rock crevices. This species, endemic
in New South Wales, was known only from the Blue Moun-
tains and the Port Jackson district, until collected by Mr.
R. H. Cambage at West Dapto and Pigeon House, Milton.
Along the verge of the ocean escarpment of the headland
running south to Port Jackson, Gleichenia circinata Sw.,
hangs in heavy festoons from the topmost ledges, its creep-
ing rhizomes invading the crevices on the face of the cliff,
the tangled masses losing in volume as it descends to the
wave splashed region at the base of the escarpment. The
New Zealand Spinach, Tetragonia expansa Murr., which
maintains its xerophytic succulence from the sea-coast to
the salt-marshes of the interior, has here developed leaves
much larger than those noted in any other station. When
growing on an escarpment flanking the beach it occasionally
descends to the strand, but cannot proceed far from the
base of the cliff. Its presence on the headland is casual,
the large area covered by its carpet in the tidal basin or
salt-pan, disclosing its partiality for an estuarine station.
In such an environment the heavy fleshy limbs and foliage
perform the dual offices of maintaining stability and regu-
lating its water supply. Ina note on this species in the
Fl. Tasm., Vol. 1, p. 148, Sir. J. D. Hooker, says, ...... be
332 Thy OF A. A. HAMILTON.
sometimes bears flowers at the top of the horns of the
fruits.”” An example of this unusual form of heterotaxy in
the New Zealand Spinach, was exhibited before the Linnean
Society by the writer.’ —
Apium prostratum has in this region remodelled its leaf
dissection, varying it from the linear segmentation of the
lobes of the inland form, toa broad obtuse lobing, an alter-
ation of form noted by Bentham, Fl. Austr. iii, 372, ina
reference to the maintenance of two distinct species of
this herb, a proposition with which he was not in agree-
ment. The breadth of the lobes is still further accentuated
when the plants are growing in the strand sand. Its fre-
quent associates on the escarpment, Samolus repens, and
Lobelia anceps, rarely descend to the beach, and are unable
to establish their colonies on the open strand. The latter
prefers to creep among the rushes and sedges in a Swamp,
and in such a situation narrows and elongates both stems
and leaves. Samolus repens also frequents the swamp but
reaches its maximum growth in the estuary, where it
frequently lines the low muddy banks with a broad marginal
band, occasionally many hundred yards in length, or invades
the precincts ofa Mangrove forest. The creeping stolons,
netted below, and the decumbent stems, matted above,
bind the community together, enabling it to ride secure
from tidal invasion on the unstable mud.
On the escarpment the Buffalo Grass exhibits a greater
exposure resistant capacity than the Common Oouch,
(Cynodon) carpeting the rock ledges for some distance down
the face of the cliff, the Couch rarely venturing from its
haven on the parapet above. Zoysia pungens has again
demonstrated its superiority over both its congeners, by
descending to the spray-drenched soil pockets at the base
of the escarpment.
1 Pro2. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, Vol. xxx1x, p. 518.
TOPUGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. B00
-Epacris crassifolia R. Br., a robust form mentioned by
Bentham, Fl. Austr. iv, 237, which extends northwards as
far as Cowan Bay, shares the lower rock crevices with
Gleichenia circinata. Wedelia biflora here presents its
characteristic scrambling habit, forming mats on the hori-
zontal surface of the boulders or overhanging their per-
pendicular walls. Rhagodia Billardieri has on this exposed
front developed a rock-clinging habit, and its leaves have
lost much of the polished surface of its confreres on the
dune, a scaly incrustation, not unusual in the family,
replacing the coating of varnish.
On the southern side of Port Jackson ae rocky headiand
extends along the ocean front to Bondi. Melaleuca armil-
laris Sm., here first noted, maintains in some measure its
erect habit, and in the region of greatest exposure, on the
verge of the escarpment, is less dwarfed and prostrate
than its rigidly framed congener M. nodosa, its elastic stems
bending to the storm-blast, and quickly recovering their
upright position when the pressure is removed. Both
species range from Queensland southwards, M. nodosa
ending its southern traverse in the Port Jackson district,
and its ally proceeding into Victoria. M. armillaris is
edaphically restricted to the sandstone, and is unable to
accompany M. nodosa into the Wianamatta Shale belt. The
latter is limited as to elevation, and cannot ascend the
southern highlands, where M. armillaris is established at
Bowral, extending also to the Jenolan Caves.
Another member of the genus, M. hypericifolia Sm.,
which was not seen in the area described, though it has
been collected on the northern boundary at Newport, and
extends south into Victoria, was considered as essentially a
sea coast habitue until discovered in the Valley of the
Waters at Wentworth Falls in 1906.' It has also reached
» 1? Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxuz, p. 312.
334 A. A. HAMILTON,
Mittagong on the southern highlands, where it was recently
collected by Mr. W. Greenwood 4, 1916. Both M. armillaris
and M. hypericifolia, appear to be fugitives in these moun-
tain localities. The habitat given by Bentham for the
latter species, Fl. Austr. iii, 131, is, “‘In swampy places, -
Port Jackson,’’ but it is usually found on well drained
sandstone hillsides. |
A coastal Needle-bush, Hakea pubescens Schrad., which
has a limited range within the State and occurs also in
Queensland, is represented in the Port Jackson district by
a few small colonies which are confined to the sandstone
hills. The much commoner H. sericea Schrad., its nearest
affinity, does not so closely approach the shoreline. Crypt-
andra amara Sm., a twiggy xerophytic undershrub, which
ranges from the sea-board to the Western Plains, advances
in small, closely packed colonies, to a frontal position on the
headland. A few isolated bushes of Styphelia viridis Andr.,
Five Corners, are scattered among the headland shrubbery.
This species, which has a range from Port Jackson to
Queensland, is better represented on the sandhills.
At the top of a “‘dyke’’ which here intrudes the escarp-
ment, a sand patch carpeted by the Common Oouch, has
weathered, exposing its front, and the capillary roots of
the Couch are disclosed, threading a tortuous course
through the sand to a depth of three feet and matting on
the subsoil, a ferruginous hard-pan, which they are unable
to penetrate. In the narrow passage of the dyke the only
plants noted were Scirpus cernuus Vahl., Apiwm pros-
tratum, Samolus repens, and Lobelia anceps, which associ-
ate in elongated mats on the narrow rock ledges, for mutual
protection in this wind-swept cavity. .
The wiry stemmed Hypoleena fastigiata R. Br., is occa-
sional on the rocky hillside, but the larger tufts and their
greater frequency on the sandhills indicate its preferential
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 335
habitat. The station given for this species by the authors
of the Handbook FI. N.S. Wales, p. 443, is, ...... ‘in wet
sandy places.’’ It is very common on the dry sandhills
between Port Jackson and Botany Bay and was not noted
in moist situations. The Blood-root, Hcemodorum plani-
folium R. Br., is also more plentiful on the dry sand hills
than on the exposed headland. Its rootstock is protected
by a highly coloured exudation which is responsible for the
vernacular name of the plant. Its bulbous base is deeply
embedded in the soil and acts as a reservoir, though the
pithy consistence of the stem, and the leathery texture of
the leaves, obviate the necessity for insistent demands
on the supplies conserved.
Its congener H. teretifolium R. Br. does not so closely
approach the shoreline, and has less objection to a swampy
environment. The two species occasionally meet and inter-
mingle on the verge of a swamp, H. planifolius ascending
the hillside, and its ally proceeding intothe swamp. Both
are found as far south as Bateman’s Bay, H. teretifolium
extends northerly to Byron Bay, and its congener continues
into Queensland. 4H. planifolium is plentifully distributed,
but its associate has only a sparse representation in widely
separated localities.
The headland at Ben Buckler curves inland, descending
in along slope to Bondi Beach. At the western end of the
beach a few tufts of the Marram Grass, Ammophila
arundinacea Host., were noted among the Spinifex, the
sole survivors of a large area planted with this introduced
grass. Owing to a combination of adverse circumstances,
this valuable sand-binder, with whose aid a large acreage
of dune has been reclaimed in Victoria, at Port Fairy and
elsewhere, vide ‘“‘The Sand-drift Problem in New South
Wales,” loc. cit., has not been successfully established in
this district.
\ «3 om
- -. «
;
4
336 A. A. HAMILTON.
An instance of the difficulties attendant upon the estab-
lishment of vegetation on the dune at Bondi, came within
the experience of the writer. In August 1903, [supervised
the planting of anumber of shrubs and trees, chiefly Lupines
and maritime Pines, which had been grown for this purpose
at the Centennial Park, under the direction of the Officer
in Charge, Mr. J. H. Maiden. <A few days after the work
was finished, an exceptionally severe storm arose, and the
whole of the plants were buried under two feet of sand in
as many days, though defended by three distinct lines of
break- winds.
At the eastern end of the beach, partly sheltered by the
headland, the Sea Rocket, Cakile maritima Scop., ventures
across the strand to the verge of the tidal zone, frequently
establishing its members among the débris thrown up by
the surf. It isa decumbent succulent herb and in this
Situation is occasionally subjected to a considerable degree
of spiral torsion. A strong wind will overturn or twist the
plant laterally, the heavy trailing limbs upon which it
depends for anchorage, as its root system is neither deep
nor ramifying, imposing a severe strain on the stem, which
is frequently found curved into one or more complete spirals.
The quaint fruits, which consist of two bead-like angular
articles, are produced in great profusion, and are well
equipped to withstand the buffeting likely to be encountered
on a voyage along the coast, which may result in its
establishment in a new region, both in regard to the tough
buoyant material of which the capsules are composed, and
the method of construction, t.e., strongly ribbed and pointed
at both ends. This species, which is found in maritime
stations in Hurope and North America, is recorded among
the indigenous flora of this State by the authors of the
Handbook Fl. of New South Wales, p. 27, but is not included |
by Bentham in the Fl. Austr. :
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. O37
The first Australasian record which I can find of this
species occurs in ‘‘Contributions to the Phytography of
Tasmania,’’ by Baron von Mueller.’ The author, p. 30,
IIS aa oss “It is remarkable that this conspicuous and
singular plant should have been overlooked so long in Tas-
mania, where, from my own personal enquiry among the
local coast residents it seems to be indigenous, but it was
not before 1861 that the Cakile, became by my own inves-
tigations, discovered on the coast of the Australian main-
land.’”’ It is plentiful on all the beaches in Botany Bay,
and if it had been present (indigenous), at the time of the
landing of Captain Cook at Kurnell, it would hardly have
escaped the vigilance of the botanical members of the
expedition.
A portion of the dune has been treated with ashes and
débris, and planted with common Oouch, resulting in the
establishment of a lawn of several acres, which extends to
the verge of the strand embankment, here 3 - 4 feet high,
where it is protected by a band of Zoysia pungens. The
latter species occurs in the maritime sands of tropical
Hastern Asia and New Zealand. According to Cheesman?
it ascends to 2,000 feet at Lake Taupo, and in Canterbury
and Otago.
Several exotic weeds are established in the Couch lawn,
prominent among which is the aggressive Cape-weed,
Crytostemma calendulaceum R.Br. At a distance from
the strand the root system of this Composite is shallow, its
heavy rosette of basal leaves sufficing for the maintenance
of equilibrium and incidentally retaining the sand in its
vicinity. As the strand is approached, the harsher con-
ditions are indicated by the decreased luxuriance of the
foliage, the root system also responding by descending toa
greater depth. Several alien Chenopods thickly coated
1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1876, p. 29. 2 Manual FI. N.Z., p. 884.
V—October 3, 1917,
338 A. A. HAMILTON.
with a saline incrustation, were noted in close proximity
‘tothe strand, among which Atriplex patulum L., a typical
estuarine species, was liberally represented.
_ At the rear of the dune in the sheltered valley running
in a north-easterly direction, a number of large umbrageous
trees of Melaleuca leucadendron L. var. albida (Sieb.) H.
Olteel MS. (Melaleuca Smithii R. T. Baker), survivors of
the extensive forest of these plants originally in possession
of the peaty flat stretching across to Rose Bay, are still
preserved in paddocks and private gardens.
On the headland south of Bondi Beach the few flowered
Cladium juncewm R. Br. is established in a swampy basin.
Isopogon anethifolius R. Br. and I. anemonifolius R. Br.,
both of which are plentiful on the Botany sandhills, are
heresparsely represented. An anomalous fruited Composite,
Osteospermum moniliferum L., an alien from South Africa,
where it is a coast dweller, is strongly entrenched on the
headland. Originally a garden escape in the neighbourhood
of Bellevue Hill, it has spread seawards through the scrub
to its natural habitat on the coast.
Two terete leaved members of the genus Lepidosperma
occur on the headland, L. flexuosum R. Br., with large
spreading tufts occupying the drier soil pockets, and L.
Neesii Kunth., with a scanty erect tuft choosing a peaty
soil not frequently inundated. The former is restricted on
the sea-board to the Port Jackson district, but is sparsely
represented on the higher elevations of the Blue Mountains.
L. Neesii, whose northern boundary is also in the neighbour-
hood of Port Jackson, extends into Victoria.
On a sandy slope on the northern boundary of the
Waverley Cemetery, a favourite garden plant, Alyssum
maritimum Laon., (an escape from the cemetery) has shown
its appreciation of the similarity in the edaphic and climatic
conditions, to those obtaining in its native habitat on the
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 339
Hastern Mediterranean littoral, by spreading, weed-like,
over the sandhill.
On the headland running south to Coogee Bay, the flat
rock benches, lightly covered with drift sand, support a
dwarfed herbage. Plantago coronopus L. spreads a rosette
of leaves to shade its shallow roots, retain moisture and
secure a foothold. It is a doubtful member of our indi-
genous flora, and was first recorded for New South Wales
from this locality by Mr. Fred. Turner." Among the
Plantago, numerous varicolored patches of the diminutive
Polycarpon tetraphyllum Leoefl. are scattered, the associ-
ation of these two plants frequently occurring throughout
their world-wide distribution.
Two cespitose herbs Cyperus tenellus L., and Juncus
bufonius L., each with an extra Australian range, form
isolated mats on the moist ledges. Though the latter (an
annual) is capable of adaptation to a varied habitat, in
respect of moisture and drainage, it is unable to maintain
its isolation when brought into competition with other
herbage in stations with superior drainage, its luxuriance
also diminishing with a reduced water supply.
Two spiny fruited weeds were noted in the couch lawn
on the dune at the northern end of Coogee Bay, Soliva
sessilis Ruiz and Pav., and Hmex australis Steinh. The
former, a native of South America, was noted in the Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxiv, p. 646, by Messrs. Maiden and
Betche, as naturalised in Moore Park, from which it has
spread, chiefly in grassland, for a considerable distance
along the coast. Ina footnote to Hmex australis, Bentham,
(Fl, Austr. v, 263), says:—‘‘A common maritime plant in
South Africa differing slightly from the Mediterranean
species (EH. spinosa Campd.) etc.’’ Wright, in Polygonace,
incorporated in the Fl. Capensis, v, (1911) 481, also upholds
1 Proc. Linn, Soc. N. S. Wales, xxvi, p. 592.
340 A. A, HAMILTON, |
the South African and Australian forms as a distinct species.
Muschler, Man. Fl. Egypt i, (1912) 257, says:—‘‘ A small
genus of only one species distributed throughout the Medi-
terranean region, South Africa and Australia. Muschler’s z
species is E. spinosa (L.) Campd., and no reference is made
to Steinheil’s E. australis.
. On the headland south of Coogee Bay, several members
of the typical Port Jackson swamp vegetation are estab-
lished ina drainage basin. In the centre of the submerged
area the stoutly buttressed “‘tussocks”’ of Gahnia psitta-
corum Labill., the largest of our Sedges, offers a firm
resistance to the pressure of the floodwater, protecting the
weaker rooting herbage from its onrush and consolidating
the unstable soil. It is assisted in this work by several
shrubs, among which the pendulous branched Viminaria
denudata Sm., is prominent. In the Botany swamps the
Viminaria frequently forms large shrubberies which are
occasionally devastated by fire. The young growth, which
arisesin great profusion, is plentifully furnished with broadly
ovate leaves, but this juvenile foliage is not long main-
tained, the xerophytic conditions obtaining in the swamp
necessitating the relinquishment of the flattened leaf lamina
and the modification of its structure to the elongated
cylindrical petiole (phyllode) of the adult plant, which
occasionally reaches a length of nine inches.
Dillwynia fioribunda Sm., is neither so plentiful nor
communal as its larger neighbour and is less partial to the
aquatic zone. Its heathlike leaves are erect, the inner
whorl closely appressed to the stem and branches, and the
outer series imbricately arranged, their close investment.
affording a measure of protection against adverse xerophytic
influences. Leptospermum arachnoideum Sm, a low prickly
shrub with a divaricately branched habit, and a thicket
like growth, also favours a position somewhat removed
from the permanently submerged area.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 341
In the peaty soil on the edge of the basin, a slender
stemmed trailer, Oxylobium cordifolium Andr., has spread
an intricately woven canopy over the cyperaceous growth,
extending in a narrow ribbon-like formation for a consider-
able distance along the margin. At Little Bay, individual
plants of this species are plentiful in the shallow soil
trenches on the rocky hillside, but the environment is
unfavourable to luxuriant growth, and the plants rarely
cover an area greater than one to two feet in diameter,
It is endemic in New South Wales, and has an ascertained
coastal range from the southern side of Port Jackson to
Milton.
Three Ferns, each with a wide extra Australian range,
have formed small exclusive colonies in the partly sub-
merged area. Of these, Gleichenia dicarpa R. Br., has
bound its members by knitting their wiry stemmed fronds
into a tangled network above, and connecting them by
creeping rhizomes below the ground line. The rhizomes
of this fern are exceptionally sensitive to injury and rarely
survive disruption. <A similar connecting device is adopted
in a modified form by Histiopteris incisa (Thunb.) J. Sm.,
which does not resent removal to the same extent as the
Gleichenia. The third member of the group, Blechnum
serrulatum Rich., has an erect habit, the fronds rising
_ from a short, truncate, horizontal rhizome in plume-like
tufts.
- Of the smaller growths in the basin the weak stemmed
Boronia parvifiora Sm., straggles among the Sedges, the
plants, usually solitary, ranging between the flooded area
and the margin, and rarely venturing beyond the peaty soil
of the bog. Its frequent associate, the rosetted Goodenia
_ stelligera R. Br., is almost as strictly limited in its choice
of habitat, and the slender Schoenus apogon Roem. and
Schult., their occasional neighbour, may be placed in the
samecategory. Inthisstation Schcenus brevifolius R. Br.,
342 A. A. HAMILTON.
has arranged its colony in massed formation. When grow-
ing in the sandhill shrubbery, where the foothold is suffici-
ently stable to obviate the necessity for a protective
alliance, its tufts are smaller and disconnected.
Drosera binata Labill., is confined to the submerged area
where in the running water, its members are collected into
small clusters for mutual support, the plants growing in
the slack water on either side of the current retaining their
individuality. Selaginella uliginosa Spring., which in the
Botany district covers large tracts of the drier parts of the
swamps, and the sandy slopes on their margins, with a close
velvety carpet, is here represented by a few small mats in
the peaty soil on the margin.
Proceeding along the headland towards Maroubra Bay,
two diffuse undershrubs Trachymene ericoides Sieb., and
Styphelia pinifolia Spreng., and a third, Styphelia virgata
Labill., with a more erect habit, are occasional in the
shallow soil patches. The Native Fuchsia, Correa speciosa
Andr., avoids an isolated exposed position, usually remaining
at a distance from the escarpment in the shelter of the
open shrubbery, which provides a wind-break without
unduly hampering its movements or screening it from the
light. With the exception of Correa, all the genera in New
South Wales of the family Rutacez, are classed under
Choripetalee, and this genus is divided, C. alba, the shore-
line representative, with free petals, conforming to the
general floral arrangement, and C. speciosa, supported by
two congeners, adopting an adherent-petalled, tubular
corolla.
Numerous scanty-tufted plants of the Plume-grass,
Dichelachne crinita Hook. f., maintain an erect habit in
exposed positions on the hillside, the tall stems bending
before the storm, but resuming their upright attitude when
its force isexpended. Inadiminutive drainage soak within
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 343
a few yards of the verge of the ocean escarpment, a small
colony of the Reed Mace, Typha angustifolia L., is estab-
lished. The customary habitat of these plants is a sheltered
lagoon, or the shallow water of a creek, but no diminution
of vigour was apparent as a result of this change of environ-
ment.
At Mistral Point a sward of. Buffalo-grass stretches
across the hillside to the escarpment parapet. Its margin
is fringed by a dwarfed succulent form of the variable
Senecio lautus Sol., with short cylindrical leaves. Ina
swampy drainage channel Dampiera stricta R. Br., finds
the peaty soil favourable for development, and broadens its
leaf lamina. On the dry sandhills its leaves are reduced
to a narrow linear blade. Two closely allied species of
-Callistemon have drawn a distinct line of demarcation in
their boundaries, indicating their respective attitude
towards a swamp environment. C.linearis DC.,isrestricted
to the margin of the swamp and can only maintain a narrow
elongated leaf, its confrere C. lanceolatus DC., proceeding
into the centre of the area and supporting a broad leaf-blade.
Hriostemon lanceolatus Gaertn., on the sandhills main-
tains an ample foliage, which in the plants growing on the
sea-board is considerably reduced. The xerophytic Hpacris
microphylla R. Br., finds the crown of a dry sandstone hill
as suitable a habitat as one well within the confines of a —
swamp, and presents a similar facies in either situation.
Three species of the genus Poranthera are present on
the headland, P. corymbosa Brongn., and P. ericifolia
Rudge, choosing dry exposed positions, their relative, the
prostrate flaccid-leaved P. microphylla Brongn., creeping
under the rock ledges, or into the denser parts of the
shrubbery, in search of shade and moisture. P. ericifolia,
endemic in New South Wales, has a coastal range from
Newcastle to the southern Illawarra, P. corymbosa, with
344 A. A. HAMILTON.
a similar northerly boundary, extends to Victoria, and P.
microphylla is found in all the Australian States.
Two Oyperaceous plants with a limited distribution, |
Tricostularia pauciflora Benth., low and spreading, and
Cyathocheoete diandra Nees., a tall graceful herb, each with
a small representation, and numerous tufts of the Tall Oat-
grass, Anisopogon avenaceus R. Br., are scattered among
the frontal rock benches and ascend the hillside.
In a small swampy basin an association of aquatic herbs
is located. The succulent Spurrey, Spergularia rubra
Camb., which covers large tracts of the tide-flooded marshes
at Cook’s River, and the close-carpeted mud-creeper
Hydrocotyle asiatica L., occupy positions on its margin.
The tufted, slender, Triglochin striata Ruiz and Pav.,
ventures into deeper water, and its more robust congener
T. procera R. Br., finds in the centre of the basin a habitat
suited to its requirements. The three first named occupants
of the basin are cosmopolitan, but T. procera is confined to
Australia. A coastal form of the polymorphous Plantago,
varia R. Br., with succulent leaves and enlarged rootstock,
frequents the crevices on the escarpment flanking the
northern end of the beach at Maroubra Bay.
On the strand below, an exclusive colony of the semi-
aquatic Cotula coronopifolia L., occupies a level tract near
the drainage channel. Several isolated plants of the Varie-
gated Thistle, Silybum marianum Gaertn., are the sole
occupants of a wind-swept flat behind the dune embankment,
their long stout taproots, bared in extreme cases a foot
deep, supplying sufficient nourishment and support to enable
them to persist until the drift again sets in their direction.
The frontal slope of the embankment is dominated by the
Spinifex, which spreads over the ridges and into the wind-
blown channels, consolidating the: long stretch of uneven
slope between the crest of the embankment and the strand.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL AND TAXONOMIC NOTES, 345
-On this slope a number of Norfolk Island Pines have been
planted, the lowermost row on the strand at its base, all
of which are ina flourishing condition.
On the broken verge of the bank the usually solitary
plants of Euphorbia Sparmanni have, in several instances,
become confluent and cap the crown of a knoll or the crest
ofa ridge. In a shallow depression Sccevola suaveolens
has massed a carpet measuring 18 x 24 feet. The succulent
stemmed Plectranthus parviflorus Henck., frequently an
epiphyte on mossy rock benches or Fern and Orchid strewn
boulders in the deep shade of the forest, is exceptionally
robust on the exposed dune plateau where the sunlight is
unbroken. It also makes a sturdy growth in the soil
pockets on the ocean escarpment, displaying in a marked
degree its appreciation of this halophilous environment,
though it includes the dual disabilities of exposure and
extreme insolation.
On the southern end of the beach, in the shallow sluggish
seepage flowing across the strand from the swamp at the
rear of the dune, acolony of Carex pumila has been invaded
by the introduced Hydrocotyle wmbellata var. bonariensis.
On the strand the Carex is dominant, but as the channel
narrows and deepens and its salinity decreases on its inland
course, the Hydrocotyle assumes supremacy, closing up
its ranks and lengthening the stalks of its umbrella-like
leaves, holding the blade aloft in a horizontal position.
This formation presents such a complete barrier to the
entrance of light, that competition from the surrounding
aquatic herbage is effectively suppressed. A plant of
Kennedya rubicunda has ventured into the swamp, display-
ing exceptional plasticity in an entirely novel habitat.
Though its root system and the lower portion of its stem is
submerged, the emerged stem and branches have produced
a robust growth. which festoons a considerable area of a
shrubbery of Viminaria denudata.
| 7
y
. ‘
n ‘4
;
346 A. A. HAMILTON.
On the strand a few small tufts of Festuca littoralis are.
sprinkled, and immediately below the embankment a large
hummock 4x3 yards, has been raised and completely
clothed by this grass. On the sandy bank which curves
towards the headland south of the beach, an alien from
South Africa, Tetragonia nigrescens K. et Z. var. maritima
Sond., is established a few feet above high-water mark.?
It is a maritime member of the Fam, Aizoacez, and has
the heavy succulent limbs and foliage, and the low spreading
growth characteristic of the family, most of whose members
are residents of the beach, estuary, or salt-marsh, and
include the well known New Zealand Spinach. The wings
of the fruit calyx are composed of a felt-like material,
eminently fitted to act as a lifebuoy to the capsule, and
protect it from injury consequent on violent impact witha
reef or other solid obstruction, against which it is liable to
be flung by the waves. when journeying along the sea-board.
The new comer willbe a welcome addition to the dune flora .
in the capacity of a sandbinder.
On the headland running south to Long Bay, the shrubby
Notelcea longifolia Vent., which in suitable situations
reaches a height of ten to twelve feet, is barely two feet
high, and has exceptionally large leaves. Several grasses
are dotted on the hillside. The robust Stipa semibarbata
R. Br., its elongated plume-like panicle nodding with the
weight of the grain surmounted by a heavy awn; Danthonia
penicillata F.v.M., a widely diffused and variable species,
both edaphically and climatically adaptable; and Panicum
bicolor R. Br., a smaller tufted grass, less plentiful, and
with a more restricted range, are all present.
Goodenia ovata Sm. has formed a series of clumps on soil
deposits in the bed of the stream winding through the dune
from the foot hills to the strand at Long Bay. The stems.
1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, Vol. xitt, p. 247.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 347
and branches of the plants are interlocked for mutual pro-
teetion against dislodgment by flood waters. The bulk of
the ligneous vegetation has been removed from the com-
paratively flat stretch of dune at the rear of the strand,
two Banksias, B. cemula R. Br., and B. serrata L., repre-
senting the remnant of the arboreal growth.
These two species may be easily confused when growing
on the exposed headland, where they both approach the
shoreline, in places, to within a few feet of the escarpment.
and are reduced by exposure to low spreading shrubs. When
growing under normal conditions the habit of these plants
is a sufficient guide to their identity, B. cemula rarely
exceeding the dimensions of a large shrub, its stem furnished
with branches almost to the base, B. serrata attaining the
rank of a medium sized tree, with a clear trunk several
feet from the ground. Photographs of examples of both
species domiciled at no great distance apart on the dune
flat at Long Bay, showing their distinctive habit have been
incorporated by Mr. Maiden in his ‘‘ Forest Flora of New
South Wales,”’ iv, p.30,1909. B. serrata usually maintains
a large colony, covering in some localities, several acres of
ground, its confrere, less exclusive, usually assembling in
small groups or growing as individual specimens among the
shrubbery.
On the cleared area several herbaceous species with
subterraneous root systems of vegetative reproduction, too
deep to be destroyed by fires, which are of frequent occur-
rence, have seized the opportunity for colonisation, and
taken possession of the vacant space, either as segregated
assemblies or in association. Of these the cosmopolitan
Bracken-fern, Pteridium aquilinum (L) Kuhn., is the most
aggressive, extending over the greater part of the dune flat
and invading the Banksian arboretum, its greedy rhizomes
absorbing the small quantity of nutriment available in the
348 A. A. HAMILTON.
poor sandy soil, and starving out its less perfectly equipped
competitors, or smothering them with its spreading fronds,
The latter is of a tough consistence and requires little
moisture, the succulent rhizomes storing and regulating
the water supply.
The Blady-grass, Imperata arundinacea Oyr., is one of
the few plants associated with the Bracken, which the
latter is unable to suppress. Its rhizomatic system is but
little inferior to that of its larger confrere, and its flag,
though broad and flat, has a membraneous drought resistant
tissue, the elongated culms with the blade held vertically,
running up to the light through the interstices of the fern
_ fronds. Dianella revoluta is also capable of establishing
its colony within the confines of the Fernery, but does not
consort with the Bracken as freely as does the Blady-grass.
At the southern end of the beacha small colony of Thatch-
reed, Phragmites communis Trin., has obtained a precarious
footing in a drainage channel on the rock shelves at the
base of the escarpment, which stretches, in comparative
shelter for a considerable distance to the ocean headland.
In some of the reaches of Cook’s River, this reed lines the
banks with an exclusive formation, descending into the
stream shallows to a depth of a few feet, its stout, closely
interlocked rhizomes securing a foothold for the community
-and incidentally protecting the muddy river bank from
tidal erosion. Its climatic adaptability and vigorous growth,
are attested by a cosmopolitan distribution, and an excep-
tional capacity for excluding competitors.
The heath-like Micromyrtus microphylla Benth., covers
small patches of shallow, moist soil on the rocky hillside,
its close formation admitting only mossy growths, or other
diminutive shade loving plants. The Hop-bush, Dodonoea
triquetra, has, on the. headland, quickly responded to
exposure by reducing the size of its leaves, those on plants
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 349
on the verge of the escarpment measuring less than one-
third of the length of the leaves on bushes growing five
yardsinland. Kennedya monophylla Vent., scrambles over
the boulders and among the low spreading shrubs on the.
hillside. Preferably a trailer, it is compelled to climb in
search of light when plowing, 2 as occasionally happens, in
a dense shrubbery.
The shrubby Petrophila pulchella R. Br., with finely
dissected cylindrical foliage, suitable for this dry exposed
stationis well represented,and the prostrate Gompholobium
glabratum DC., a weak, wiry-stemmed undershrub, is
occasional on the hillside. 5
Nearing the ocean headland in an area of sandy to peaty
soil, from occasionally wet to permanently swampy, several
species find a more or less suitable habitat. Of these
Styphelia esquamata Spreng., is the most drought resistant,
frequently ascending to the dry crown of the hill. It avoids
shade but does not favour a hot climate. It extends south-
wards to Victoria, and is found on the higher slopes of the
Blue Mountains. Mirbelia reticulata Sm., usually aswamp
dweller, and normally prostrate, is here represented by a
few plants which have invaded a clumpof Banksia ericifolia,
and struggled upwards through its dense foliage to the light.
A solitary specimen of the green-flowered Callistemon
pinifolius DC., was noted on the hillside. This species
occasionally takes possession of a peaty basin among the
inland sandhills, but is better represented, though less
communal, on the Wianamatta Shale flats in the Clyde,
Granville, and Parramatta districts. Though edaphically
adaptable it has a limited range, extending northerly from
Port Jackson to the Hunter River, and west to the foot-
hills of the dividing range, ascending the Blue Mountains
to Glenbrook, and the southern highlands to Picton.
The aromatic leaved Melaleuca thymifolia Sm., does not
venture far from the swampy area, and Sprengelia incar-
350 A. A. HAMILTON.
nata Sm., a species with xerophytic, papery petalled flowers
and protective sheathing based leaves, is even more closely
confined to this habitat.
“ On the exposed hillside facing the ocean, a fire had
recently burned off the scrub, and several species were
making characteristically enlarged new growth (reversion
shoots). The increased size of the leaves of the young
growth of Ruelingia hermannicefolia Steetz., which have
retained their luxuriance until the plants have reached the
flowering stage, are in marked contrast to the harsh
scanty foliage of the older plants unscathed by the fire.
The new crop of Amperea spartioides Brongn., whose leaves
under normal conditions are reduced to scales, is amply
clothed with obovate leaves. Plants of Lasiopetalum
ferrugineum Sm., visited by the fire, have developed leaves
much broader and more cordate at the base than those on
the uninjured plants. [The Blue Mountain form of this
species, L. rubiginosum A. Cunn., reduced by Bentham, FI.
Austr. i, 263, to a var. of L. ferrugineum, maintains the
broad cordate leaf in the adult stage of growth. |
Some outlying plants of Conospermum ellipticum Sm.,
creep down the hillside towards the escarpment, but it is
much more plentiful afew miles further inland. It hasa
short coastal range from Port Jackson to the Illawarra,
and is.recorded from the Blue Mountains, but the latter
locality is somewhat doubtful.1 Two Opercularias, O.
diphylla Gaertn., with short stout branches and an erect
habit, and O. aspera Gaertn., usually a trailer but here
restricted to a divaricate tuft, were found associated in a
soil pocket.
On a small sand-patch at the base of the escarpment on
the southern headland of Botany Bay, Convolvulus soldan-
ella was noted climbing to a height of several feet through |
* Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xu, p. 407 (1915).
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 351
a bush of Styphelia Richei. The slender weedy Apium
leptophyllum F.v.M., is occasional on the slope of the hill.
Though confined chiefly to the tropics, both in Africa and
America, it extends as far south as Victoria on the Aus-
tralian coast. The scantily tufted Andropogon refractus
R. Br., has here shown a considerable degree of plasticity,
the paucity of its stool alone indicating dissatisfaction with
the harsh environment, an extreme change from the tropical
jungle in which it obtains its optimum growth.
In a swampy hollow on the headland facing the ocean, a
plant association occurs in which several species occupy
more or less strictly defined zones. On its border, in a
comparatively open shrubbery of Leptospermum leevigatum,
several plants of the flaccid leaved Solanum vescum F.v.M.,
a shade loving mesophyte, are established. This species
may be readily separated from its relative, S. aviculare
Forst., (with which it is united by Bentham, F}. Austr., iv,
47) by its sessile decurrent leaves and green globular berries. |
The leaves of S. aviculare taper into a petiole and are not
decurrent, the berries are ovoid and yellow. In this shady
grove the banks of the drainage channel supplying the
swamp are lined by the creeping (stoloniferous), Viola
hederacea Labill. |
In the open country the moist fringe of the swamp is
sparsely clothed by the prostrate Hpaltes australis Less.,
(whose presence is an indication of sour ill-drained land)
the limitation of its mat, and reduction of foliage as the
aquatic region is approached, denoting its disinclination for
further submergence. Entering the swamp a comparatively
level zone is met, occupied chiefly by rushes, in which the
close-tufted Restio complanatus R.Br., is well represented.
The Fringed Violet, Thysanotus junceus R.Br., is occas-
ional in this situation, but is better suited on the sandstone
hillsides. This species has a limited coastal range, the
302 ~ + A, A. HAMILTON.
Port Hacking district representing its southern boundary,
and it extends nortb into Queensland.
In the shallows of the submerged area, Goodenia panicu-
lata Sm., finds a congenial habitat, the basal leaves of the
plants drooping, and forming rosettes on the unstable mud
as the water recedes. In this zone the firm erect Rushes,
are replaced by the flaccid trailing Sedges, among which
Scirpus inundatus Poir., with its closely packed system of
ramifying stems and branches, is prominent. The Swamp-
millet, Isachne australis R. Br., trails over the smaller
growths, descending at intervals to root its stems among
the Sphagnum which carpets the pool. In close proximity
a trailing Composite, Enhydra fluctuans Lour., seeks the
support of the taller swamp growths to secure an aerial
position for flower production. It is a tropical species,
extending to India, and has not been noted south of Port
Hacking. Though recorded from several littoral stations it
is rarely collected owing to its choice of habitat, the infre-
quency of its occurrence, and its insignificant floral display.
The woolly Philydrum lanuginosum Bks., one of the
plants over which the Enhydra scrambles, inhabits the
deeper water of the swamp. This species also extends to
the tropics via the Malayan Archipelago, and persists as
far south as Victoria.
Beyond the headland on the dunes stretching south to
Cronulla, Acacia longifolia and its var. Sophorce, commingle
in a shallow valley on the embankment plateau. The latter
does not extend far inland, and displays a partiality for the
dune, rarely ascending the rocky escarpment or hillside.
The typical A. longifolia is less restricted in its inland
range, and frequents both dune and rocky headland. The
var. prostrata of Moore and Betche,? is also present on the
embankment, and is merely a wind-swept form of A. longi-
1 Handbook Flora of New South Wales, p. 170.
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 353
folia typica. In the centre of the depression, Cupaniopsis
anacardioides Radlk. is a shrub of four to six feet, but as
it retreats down the sheltered rearward slope of thé dune
embankment it increases in height, until on reaching the
flat at the base of the slope it has attained its normal
arboreal growth. |
On the rocky ledges of the escarpment on the headland
near Port Hacking, the exposure has again reduced it toa
shrub. The fragrant flowered Coast Mignonette, Stack-
housia spathulata Sieb., a prostrate succulent herb, creeps
out of the valley to the verge of the frontal embankment.
This species is doubtfully recorded by Bentham (FI. Austr.
i, 406) from the grasslands of the interior, but, as he sug-
gests, it has doubtless been confused with S. monogyna
Labill., which is common in grazing country throughout:
the State. It is not represented in the National Herbarium
from any station other than the coastal beaches..
On the rearward slope of the embankment in the shelter
of the arboretum of Cupaniopsis anacardioides, and Banksia
integrifolia, several shade loving species are established,
of which Vitis clematidea F.v.M., a tendril climber, and
Solanum pungetium R. Br., a trailer, are typical represen-
tatives. The introduced @nothera longifiora Jacq., has
found in the loose sandy soil a suitable habitat, and has
spread in close ranks along the unoccupied ridges.
On the headland south of Cronulla Beach the hardy
Monotoca scoparia R. Br. mingles sparsely with the shrubs
on the rocky hillside, and the herbaceous Goodenia hetero-
phylla Sm., sends up straggling stems in the open spaces.
The xerophytic Trachymene Stephensonii Turcz., does not
discard its leaves in this situation, to the same extent as
when growing in the shallow soil on rock benches in the
flat ill-drained country near Botany, the centre of its
activity.*
1 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1916, p. 219.
W—October 3, 1917.
In a shallow swampy basin Calamagrostis cemul lc
a weak grass witha feathery inflorescence, is pie wile
_ by side with the introduced cosmopolitan Fox-tail. grass, :
Polypogon monspeliensis Desf., a halophilous species which 2
favours the salt-marsh and estuary. Among the dense — .
growth in the centre of the swamp, the slender stemmed
Pultencea dentata Labill., runs up to the light. This species |
simulates its congener, P. incurvata A. Cunn., which fre-
quents a similar situation in the swamps further inland.
ll ea
. > ri co» i = ~
ee Se a ee ee te RT ;
aS aS ¥ ner § a gl 2 ; 7s : :
pe: On the rocky escarpment facing the ocean, where the
os headland commences to curve towards the entrance to
3 Port Hacking, an example of the rare Ficus Henneana
2 : Miq. was noted growing in a rock crevice, and sprawling — *
<3 outwards over the cliffs. Aninteresting noteon thisspecies
q is given by the Government Botanist, Mr. J. H. Maidenin PY
= his Forest Flora of New South Wales, ii, 100 (1905). F ae
a Explanation of Plates. 3 _
a Prate VIL. bee %
“4 Pi. Fig. 1. A wind-torn gapin the dune embankment, Deewhy Beach.
Ps Fig. 2. Festuca littoralis forming horizontal ridges on the sand
“y which has been removed from the gap by the wind and
thee deposited at the rear of the embankment.
a Puate VIII.
e Fig. 3. Festwea littoralis building a hummock of sand in the gap.
is Fig. 4. A colony of Festuca littoralis forming a series of miniature
: : mounds on the floor of the gap. : the
* Pruate IX. is
ig. 5. Trailing stems of Spinifea hirsutus creeping down the ee
slope from the top of the dune embankment to join ~
| Festuca littoralis, Deewhy Beach.
ig. 6. Trailing stems of Spinifea hirsutus binding the sand on
the frontal slope of the dune embankment, Maroubra _
Bay. | |
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. L1., 1917. Plate VII.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. L1., 1917. Plate VILL.
F. W. Carpenter, Photo. Fig. 3.
L. T, N, Hamilton, Photo. Fig. A,
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. L1., 1917. Plate LX.
F. W. Carpenter, Photo Fig 5
L. T, N, Hamilton, Photo. Fig. 6.
‘
* <a vs -
oge
KA wo,
ee
Pee
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LI., 1917. Plate X.
F. W. Carpenter, Photo. Fig. 7.
L. T. N, Hamilton, Photo. Fig. 8,
Plate XT.
~~
™
>
™
SN :
SS ory
is}
s E
iN oa
2)
qi
‘>
>
.&
Journal Royal Soc
Fig. 10,
F, W Carpenter, Photo.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LI., 1917, Plate XT1.
L. T. N, Hamilton, Photo. Fig. 12,
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LI, 1917. Plate XITI.
VT ti,
L. T. N. Bamilton, Photo. Fig. 13.
s :
= SSAA
We
EF, W, Carpenter, Photo. Fig. 14.
‘eo
*
TOPOGRAPHICAL, ECOLOGICAL, AND TAXONOMIC NOTES. 359
PLATE X.
Fig. 7. Festuca littoralis building a horizontal bank on the beach
at Deewhy.
Fig, 8. Hibbertia volubilis holding the sand on an exposed ridge,
Deewhy Beach.
. Puate XI.
Fig. 9. Solanum sodomeum retaining the crest of a hillock at
Maroubra Bay.
Fig. 10. Xerotes longifolia protecting the verge of the eroded
dune embankment, Maroubra Bay.
Puate XII.
Fig. 11. Correa alba exhibiting a flattened contour as a result of
exposure to the on-shore wind, Maroubra Bay.
Fig. 12. Leptospermum levigatum compressed horizontally by the
on-shore wind. Height at rear 12 feet. Deewhy —
Beach. .
PuiaTE XIII. ;
Fig. 13. Scevola suaveolens forming a carpet 18 feet by 24 feet
Maroubra Bay.
Fig. 14. Hydrocotyle umbellata var. bonariensis ascending from
the lagoon to the top of a dry sandhill, Deewhy Beach.
356 | EDNA D. SAYCE.
SOME DETERMINATIONS OF THE HHAT CONDUC-
TIVITY OF SELENIUM.
EHpna D. SAYCE, B.Sc.,
Demonstrator in Physics at the University of Sydney.
(Communicated by Professor O. U. VonwiLuer.)
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, October 3, 1917.]
It is well known that the electrical conductivity of
selenium can be varied over a wide range by suitable alter-
ations in the method of preparation, or in the temperature
and degree of illumination at the time of testing. If these
changes are due to variations in the number of free elec-
trons present in the substance, we should expect to find
corresponding changes in the thermal conductivity under
similar conditions. |
Some investigations on this point have been made by
Bellati and Lussana,! and by L. P. Sieg.2. In both cases
attention was concentrated mainly on the effect of illumin-
ation, and only relative measurements were made. Inthe
work which is to be described here, the influence of the
method of preparation, the age of the specimen, and the
temperature of testing have been investigated, all measure-
ments being made with the selenium in darkness.
The results obtained are such as might be expected from
a consideration of the values of the electrical conductivity
obtained by observers working with selenium cells. It is
found that the thermal conductivity varies over a wide
range, being affected by those conditions which influence
the electrical conductivity. Inall the cases which have
been examined, both thermal and electrical conductivities.
1 Gazz. Chim. Ital., 17, 391. * Phys. Rev., 6, p. 213, 1915.
DETERMINATIONS OF HEAT CONDUCTIVITY OF SELENIUM. 357
are changed in a similar manner, but the relative alteration
produced in the former is, in general, smaller than that
brought about in the latter property by the same cause.
Although the values of the conductivity have been
obtained throughout in absolute units, very little weight
should be attached to the actual figures given for the
crystalline form. For it appears probable that in any pre-
paration of crystalline selenium, spontaneous changes take
place for a long time after preparation, and, in addition,
the slight alteration of temperature which is necessary
before any measurement can be made, is able, under certain
conditions, to produce a considerable change in the con-
ductivity.
The results may be summarized briefly as follows :—
(1) The thermal conductivity of vitreous selenium at
25° C. was found to lie between 0°000293 and 0°000328.
(2) The conductivity of crystalline selenium at 25° C.
varied from 0°00070 to 0°00183. In general the conductivity
increased with the temperature of preparation, but.
diminished with age.
(3) Inall the cases examined, the temperature coefficient
was positive.
Method of Investigation.
The method used was that described by C. H. Lees.! The
selenium was tested in the form of a disc 6°5 cm. in
. diameter, and of the order of 0°5 cm. in thickness. All
temperatures were measured by means of copper-eureka
thermo-couples which were carefully calibrated at the
commencement of the work. A year later other similar
thermo-couples were substituted, and new calibration
readings taken. The series method of measuring thermo-
electromotive-forces employed by Lees was not used. Hach
+ Phil. Trans., A, 1898, p. 399.
.
>
-
*. e
358 EDNA D. SAYCE.
e.m.f. was measured independently by means of a Wolff
potentiometer, and the temperature calculated from tables
prepared from the calibration readings. The only other
alteration in the method was the substitution of a Weston
milliammeter and voltmeter for the wattmeter which Lees
used to measure the rate at which heat was supplied.
The discs were first prepared in the vitreous’ form by
‘ pouring molten selenium intoa hot iron mould. These were
transformed to the crystalline state by heating in an oil
oven to some chosen temperature. They were then ground
with fine emery and polished.
On account of the contraction which takes place when
changing from the vitreous to the crystalline form, some
difficulty was experienced owing to discs cracking during
heating. This was overcome by performing all operations
very slowly. The vitreous discs were gradually cooled
from the molten state, and the oven was so regulated that
the required temperature was only reached after seven
hours continuous heating. This temperature was main-
tained for one hour, and the disc was allowed to cool slowly
intheoven. By this means crystalline discs were prepared
at temperatures which range from 160° O. to 214° O. Some
specimens were also tested in the vitreous form.
If the bath in which the discs were tested were heated
by a suitable current in the bath heating coil, the conduc-
tivity could be measured at any temperature higher than
that of the room. An upper limit is, however, placed on
the temperature of testing by the fact that selenium is so
readily changed by heating even to comparatively low
temperatures. Thus the available range was only about
25°C. to 55°C. In order to obtain sufficiently steady tem-
perature conditions, it was found necessary to keep the
current in the heating coil. constant for approximately six
1 A. P. Saunders, Jour. Phys. Chem., Vol. 1v, p. 4238, 1900.
DETERMINATIONS OF HEAT CONDUCTIVITY OF SELENIUM. 359
hours before any reading could be taken. When this steady
temperature was reached, two sets of readings were taken,
separated by an interval of half an hour. Thus in Table I
we have, at every temperature, two values of the conduc-
tivity, each of these being calculated from the mean of a
number of readings.
Table I also shows the general order adopted for any disc.
The conductivity was measured first at room temperature,
then at several higher temperatures, and finally the read-
ings at room temperature were repeated. In most cases
this procedure has been repeated at intervals which extend
up to one year from the date of preparation. .
Sources of Error. :
The errors involved were necessarily large. They natur-
ally fall into two divisions, those due to the imperfections
of apparatus and method, and those due to such changes
in the selenium as were beyond control.
With the instruments used, the errors of the first class
should not have exceeded 1%, these probably being small
in comparison with the errors of the second class.
The latter appear to be due chiefly to heating effects, and
are most marked in the case of newly prepared crystalline
discs. ‘T'wo types of irregularity were of frequent occur-
rence :—
(i.) In many cases the first reading taken for any
erystalline disc at a temperature above that of the room
was abnormally high. |
(ii.) The conductivity at room temperature was almost
invariably increased after the measurements at higher
temperatures had been made, but the actual increase thus
produced varied greatly, even in the case of discs. which
had apparently been treated in exactly the same manner.
Results.
Kleven discs have been prepared, five vitreous and six
crystalline, the nature of the results obtained being illus-
trated in Tables I, II and V.
360 EDNA D. SAYCE.
Table I.—Conductivity of Vitreous Selenium.
Disc 2, prepared on 21 August, 1916.
Thickness of dise = 0°7523 c.m.
Temperature
Temperature -Heat supplied Thermal
ing. Date. of disc. eee (calories per sec.)| Conductivity.
(i) 22 Aug., 1916) 23-80 C.| 5:39 | 0-1724 | 0-000324
(11) | 23°92 5°46 | 0°1724 0-000319
(111) | 23 Aug., 1916) 33°69 4°93 0:1651 0:000345
(iv) 35°94 4-98 ()° 1650 0:000342
(v)) 24 Aug., 1916) 40-92 4°80 0:1655 0:000358
(v1) | 41°21 4°79 0:1655 0:000359
(vii)| 25 Aug., 1916; 24:17 5:03 0:1638 0:000333
(vill) ' 24°46 5:05 0:1638 0:000332
(ix)| 28 Aug., 1916) 57°15 4°49 0°1676 0:000385
(x) 57°48 4°45 0°1676 0:000389
(xi)| 29 Aug., 1916) 25°14 5:03 0:1638 0:000337
(x11) 25°17 5°00 0°1638 0:000339
Table I, which shows one complete set of measurements
for the vitreous disc 2, indicates the typical increase in
conductivity which accompanies increase in the tempera-
ture of testing. This feature is common to both vitreous |
and crystalline preparations, as is shown in Table IT.
Table II.—Thermal Conductivity of Crystalline Selenium.
Disc C, prepared at 180° C. on 15 June, 1916.
Thickness of dise = 0°5774 cm.
Electrical
Date, | TUPTRE | condactinty. |, Conauctivity
19 July, 1916) 26-90 C. 0:00150 1°55
20 July, 1916} 35°69 0:00152 3°76
I 21 July,1916; 46:01 0:00158 4°63
" )24July,1916| 26:37 0:00151 m2
25 July, 1916] 52°61 0:00159 4:56
26 July,1916; 27:05 0:00152 l-a8
15 Sept., 1916) 32°44 0:00104 0:94
TE 18 Sept., 1916) 41:10 0:00109 - 1°60
" 119Sept., 1916) 52°59 0:00116 2°43
20 Sept., 1916) 32°41 0:00104 0:96
dJuly, 1917) 28°48 © 0:00099
III 4 July, 1917} 56°46 0.00134
"| 5 July, 1917) 27°19 0:00111
6 July, 1917| 27°16 0-:00110
DETERMINATIONS OF HEAT CONDUCTIVITY OF SELENIUM. 361
The relation between the temperature of measurement
and the conductivity was found to be approximately linear.
If we express the conductivity (K) at any temperature t by
the equation
a Kos La + (t = 25) « |
where Kos is the conductivity of that specimen at 25° C.,
the values of « range from 0°006 to 0°009 for the vitreous
discs examined. For crystalline selenium @ varied from
0°003 to 0°010, the upper limit being generally approached
in the case of older discs.
In Table II are shown the summarized results for the
crystalline disc C, illustrating the decrease in conductivity
with the age of the specimen.
The values of the conductivity at 25° O. of all the vitreous
discs prepared are collected in Table III. In the first three
cases no special precautions were taken to remove impuri-
ties, but the fourth and fifth discs were prepared from
highly purified selenium.’
Table III.— Thermal Conductivity of Vitreous Selenrum.
Disc. Age of Dise. K5
1 7 years 0:000328
2 5 days 0:000325
2 (retested ) ] year 0-000329
3 10 days 0-000293
3 (retested) ] year 0:000300
4 10 days 0:000327
5 2 days 0:000312
These results suggest that the conductivity of vitreous
selenium is independent of the age of the disc, and is not
greatly affected by the presence of impurities. The varia-
tions which occur are possibly due to the existence of small
traces of crystalline selenium in the vitreous discs.
"Prepared by R. Threfall, Proc. Roy. Soc. A. Vol. 97, p. 167, 1907.
362 EDNA D. SAYCE.
The values of Kos obtained for crystalline selenium are
given in Table IV.
Table 1V.—Vhermal Conductivity of Crystalline Seleniwm.
Ba Ape ee: I. II. III.
D PID prepara Ss
tion. Age. Kg; Age. Kos Age. - Kos
Days. Days. Year.
A |160°C.) 11. | 0:00110] 164 | 0:00081 1 | 0:00070 |
By aho 16 | 0:00157 1 134 |0:00130 1 0:00097
C | 180 38 | 0°00149} 95 | 0:0099 1 | 0:00097
D | 192 28 | 000161] 148 | 0:00111 1 | 0:00120
E | 200 9 | 0-00168 7 156 | 0:00120 1 | .0-00TTO
1p e! 42 | 0:00183 1 | 0:00139
Two general tendencies are apparent, firstly the decrease
in conductivity with the age of the disc, and secondly the
increase in conductivity which accompanies an increase in
the temperature of preparation. Departures from these
general principles will be noted in the case of discs B and
D (III). In preparation the former was heated for a longer
period than any of the other discs, and, by accident, the
bath was kept at a temperature of 57° C. for twenty-four
hours shortly before the readings for D(III) were taken.
This appears to have produced some permanent change in
the substance, for when measured six weeks later the
value of Kegs for disc D was found to be 0°00119.
Table V has been included in order to illustrate what has
previously been said with respect to the accuracy of the
work. This disc, though apparently treated in exactly the
same manner as the others, fails to give a linear relation
between conductivity and temperature. The increase in
the conductivity at room temperature is also very much
larger than in the normal case shown in Table II.
The existence of such irregularities renders the numerical
values of the conductivity unreliable, but there appears to
be definite evidence that the thermal conductivity is
DETERMINATIONS OF HEAT CONDUCTIVITY OF SELENIUM. 363
affected by factors which influence the electrical conduc-
tivity, in the manner stated at the beginning of this paper.
Table V.—Thermal Conductivity of Crystalline Selenium.
| Disc D, prepared at 192° C. on 14 June, 1916.
Thickness of disc = 0°6749 c.m.
Date. minaret > | “Conductinay.
6 July, 1916| 26-64 C. 0-00162
T July, 1916| 34-22 0-00169
10 July, 1916) . 41-26 0:00168
12 July, 1916}. 27-11 0-00165
13 July, 1916} 51-99 0.00175
18 July, 1916) 25:77 0:00173
While the discs were in position for the thermal deter-
minations, a few measurements of the electrical conduc-
tivity were made, typical figures being shown in Table II.
The results may be summarised thus :—
(i) The temperature coefficient of the electrical conduc-
tivity is positive.
(ii) The conductivity of crystalline selenium is much
greater than that of the vitreous form; it increases
with the temperature of preparation, but decreases
with the age of the disc.
(iii) In many cases irregularities in the value of the
thermal conductivity are accompanied by correspond-
ing, but more marked, variations in electrical con-
ductivity. :
These results indicate a close, though probably complex,
relationship between the thermal and electrical conduc-
tivities, and are such as might be expected if the variations
in the latter were due to changes in the number of free
electrons present in the substance.
In conclusion, I wish to express my indebtedness to Pro-
fessor O. U. Vonwiller, under whose direction this work
was done, and to Mr. J. J. Forster B.Sc. for his assistance
in taking the early measurements.
NOTES on tax EARLY STAGE or DEVELOPMENT
oF Lysurus Gardneri (L. australiensis).
By J. BURTON CLELAND, M.D., and EDWIN OHEEL, Botanical
Assistant, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
With Plate XIV.
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, October 3, 1917.]
IN a paper published by this Society (Vol. xLrx, p. 204, 1915),
we recorded the distribution, and noted certain characters
of development of this species. In the following notes we
draw attention to certain internal structures that have
apparently not been observed previously.
In the very early stage of development there appears to
be a thin whitish membrane within the jelly-like egg or
volva, quite distinct from the substance of the egg itself.
This whitish membrane holds the receptacle in position.
For example, when the volva splits open, there is seen at
the base of the volva and within it, a definitely shaped cup
in which the base of the receptacle is fixed. At the base
of this white membranous cup, and consolidated with it,
are five lanceolate-shaped lobes which have held the arms
of the receptacle in position. When the plant reaches
maturity, it is evident that the five arms held in position
by this whitish inner membrane break away, the receptacle
thus liberated, giving a sudden spring like a jack-in-the-
box and rupturing the upper part of the volva. The recep-
tacle is thus quite free, and leaves the thin whitish mem-
branous cup and lobes adhering to the base of the dull
coloured jelly-like volva. ,
The gleba or spore-bearing mass is contained within the
five arms of the receptable, and when the latter elongates \
and is forced through the volva, the arms finally open out —
and thus liberate the slimy mass of greenish-brown gleba. ‘
re) or
ree
a.
x
—
Plate XTV.
l Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LTI., 1917.
1 Roya
Journa
ee *, << eels a
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 365
‘The specimen from which the accompanying plate was |
made, was collected at Kogarah, by Mr. J. Corkery, in | _
April, 1916.
We are indebted to Miss M. Flockton for the drawing.
hs sy AE
‘ay -
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.
a. Volva showing the membranous whitish cup and lobes in situ.
, 6. Membranous cup and lobes dissected.
| _¢. Volva opened out to show the arrangement of the membran-
| - ous cup and lobes. ; |
A FOSSIL ISOPOD BELONGING ‘TO THE FPRESH-
WATER GENUS PHREATOICUS.
By CHaAs. CHILTON, M.A., D.Sc., M.B., C.M., LL.D., F.L.S.,C.M.Z.S., ae
Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand.
(Communicated by R. J. TILLYARD, M.A., etc.)
[Read before the Royal Serials of N. 8. ee: October 3, 1917, |
2 CONTENTS.
. Introduction.
. Description of Specimens.
Diagnosis of Fossil Species.
Historical Account of the Phreatoicidea.
Other Fossil Isopoda.
Analogy with the Anaspidacea.
. List of Works referred to.
SO OUR WO
1, Introduction.
In May, 1917, Mr. R. J. Tillyard, who is investigating
the Mesozoic and Tertiary Insects of Queensland and New
South Wales, wrote to me saying that among the fossils
from the Wianamatta Shale of St. Peter’s Brickworks,
Newtown, Sydney, New South Wales, he had several speci-
366 CHAS. CHILTON.
mens of a Crustacean which he felt convinced belonged to
the genus Phreatoicus, and he very kindly offered to hand
over the specimens to me for examination. In his paper
describing the fossil insects, (1916, p. 11),* he had mentioned
the fossil Crustacean as ‘“‘a fine Peracarid Orustacean,”’
and in his MS. he had given it the provisional name of
Phreatoicus wianamattensis.
IT received the specimens on June 16th, and a careful
examination soon convinced me that Mr. Tillyard was per-
fectly correct in his identification, and that the specimens
all belonged to a single species of Phreatoicus closely
similar to existing Australian species, such as P. australis
Ohilton and P. shephardi Sayce. None of the specimens
is complete, and the head and first peraeopods are not
clearly represented in any of them, but several of the other
peraeopods are very distinct in some of the specimens and
so are the segments of the peraeon (with the exception of
the first) and of the pleon. The downward prolongation of
the segments of the pleon, which is so distinctive a char-
acter of Phreatoicus, is quite evident in most of the speci-
mens, and the conical terminal segment is clearly shown
in one. These points, with the evidence afforded by the
peraeopods, some of which are very perfectly preserved,
leave no doubt as to the correctness of the identification.
The stratigraphical features relating to the Wianamatta
Shales are given by Mr. B. Dunstan, Chief Government
Geologist of Queensland, in the introductionto Mr. Tilyard’s
paper, and he concludes his remarks by stating that—
‘The shales containing the fossil remains—insects, fishes, laby-
rinthodonts, coprolitic fragments and plants—belong to the
Wianamatta Shales, a series probably equivalent to the Upper
Clarence Series in Northern New South Wales, and the Darling
’ The references are given by the year of publication to the list at the
end of this paper.
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 367
Downs- Walloon Coal Series in Southern Queensland. This position
for the St. Peter’s fossil beds places the horizon in the Jurassic
and above the fossil bed at Ipswich, which is probably Upper
Triassic.” (1916, p. 10.)
Further information is given by Mr. Tillyard in his paper
under the ‘‘Summary of St. Peter’s Results’’ (1916, p. 43).
In forwarding the specimens Mr. Tillyard writes on May
31st, 1917:—
“The beds are usually classed as Trias-Jura, but evidence is
accumulating that will probably place them in the Upper Trias,
probably as the nearest Australian equivalent of the Rhetic.”
The species of Phreatoicus is represented in the speci-
mens sent to me by about ten impressions. Of these Mr.
Tillyard writes (June 5th, 1917):— .
“Most of the Crustacea appear to have been found in the actual
«Nodules’ of the ‘False Coal’ band formation, from which the
Fish, the Unios, and most of the insects were also derived. Some,
however, come from the paler unaltered shales with plane fracture-
surfaces. All the specimens are much carbonised, so you will have
to rely solely on outline drawings to illustrate the fossils.” In
addition to the specimens sent to me there are, Mr. Tillyard says,
“‘a, large number of less satisfactory specimens as well, some being
on large hand-specimens of rock of considerable weight.”
All the specimens are the property of Mr. B. Dunstan,
Chief Government Geologist of Queensland.
Of the specimens described below, the first three are from
impressions on dark coloured rock, the remainder are from
the paler unaltered shales.
I proceed to describe these impressions in detail, starting
with the most complete, i.e., in the order in which I first
examined them. The measurements given were made
direct from the specimens without reference to specimens
of the existing species, comparison with which was not
made till after I had examined all the fossil specimens.
368 CHAS. CHILTON.
2. Description of Specimens.
SPECIMEN 1, Fig. 1. (Block 237, larger impression.)
Fig 1. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 237a); X 5.
This impression is about 18 mm. in length, but the head
and one or two anterior segments of the peraeon are want-
ing, and so also is the terminal portion of the pleon. There
are indications of five peraeopoda, some of them being
remarkably perfect, and enabling the separate joints to be
determined with considerable certainty. These apparently
represent peraeopoda 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, that is to say, those
attached to the five posterior segments of the peraeon. Of
these, peraeopoda 3 and 4 are very distinct, and quite
similar. In each the basis is somewhat expanded; the
ischium moderately long; the merus broader, subtriangular
and produced at the antero-distal angle into a lobe extend-
ing fully half way along the carpus; the carpus appears to
be about as long as the propod, and of rather greater width;
the dactyl is about half as long as the propod and slightly
curved, being in both peraeopoda directed backwards.
Peraeopod 5 is about as long as either of the two preceding,
but evidently belongs to the posterior series of three, having
its dactyl facing forwards; the basal joint is about as broad
as that of peraeopod 4, and the other joints show a general
agreement, the merus, however, being not so much pro-
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 369
duced at the postero-distal angle. The 6th peraeopod is
slightly longer than the Sth, but shows quite the same
structure, though the more distal joints are rather obscure.
The 7th peraeopod is still less perfectly preserved, but is
evidently longer than the sixth, apparently reaching back-
wards as far as the posterior margin of the 4th segment of
the pleon; only the distal joints are represented; the merus
does not appear to be expanded.
Of the pleon, the first four segments can be made out,
particularly the downward prolongations of the pleural
portions, which are very distinct. Of these, the first is the
shortest or narrowest, and is not produced so far downwards
as the second, which is considerably broader than the first
and has its anterior margin rounded, somewhat as in the first
segment. The third segment appears about as long as the
second, and reaches downwards to about the same level,
both the anterior and posterior angles being rounded. The
impression of the 4th segment is less distinct, but it appears
to be about as long as the third, and produced a little
further downwards; its posterior margin shews a slight
concavity in the middle portion. The remaining segments
are absent. The upper portion of these pleon segments
cannot be made out with any certainty, but the distinctly
marked pleura, as described, are so characteristic of
Phreatoicus that they alone would be sufficient evidence
that the impression is actually that of a Phreatoicus, and
this conclusion is abundantly confirmed by the well pre-
served peraeopoda. The impressions of the segments of
the peraeon are by no means clear, but they appear to
represent the five posterior segments and to correspond to
the peraeopoda already described; the dorsal margin is
fairly distinct, so that the depth of the segments can be
measured with fair accuracy. The depth of the peraeon
appears to be rather greater in comparison with that of
X- October 3, 1917.
370 CHAS. CHILTON.
the pleon than in existing species, but this is probably
merely the result of compression, which would produce a
greater effect on the subcylindrical peraeon segments than -
on those of the pleon, since this is already considerably
flattened in the living animal.
The following measurements may be given in addition to
the description :—Total length of impression 18 mm., so that
the whole animal would have measured probably about
23mm. Length of peraeopods 3 and 4, 4°95 mm.; of 5, 4mm.;
of 6, 455 mm.; of 7, 5mm. Depth of peraeon segments
3 mm.; depth of pleon segments 5 mm. (? or more).
On the block that bears Specimen 1 there are also two
imperfect impressions, but they do not show any additional
details.
SPECIMEN 2, Fig. 2,a anda’. (Block 240, the larger
impression, with its counterpart on Block 241).
This specimen is considerably larger than specimen 1, the
total length of the impression being 23 mm. It shows
apparently the five or six posterior segments of the peraeon,
with portions of the corresponding peraeopoda, and the
first five pleon segments, the fifth being more or less
imperfect; the total length of this animal would therefore
probably have been about 30mm. The peraeopoda are less
distinctly shown than in specimen 1; but, as in that
specimen, the three posterior ones are directed backwards
and the anterior ones forwards. Of peraeopod 2 only one or
two of the basal joints are shown indistinctly. Peraeopod
3 shows portions of the basis and three other joints,
apparently merus, carpus and propod. Peraeopod 4 is
similar, but less distinct. Peraeopods 5 and 6 appear to be
overlapping, and are not distinct, though the broadened
basal joint is pretty clearly shown. Peraeopod 7 is more
distinct, and shows a structure apparently corresponding
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 371
Fig. 2. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 240 and 241; a, impression,
a', its counterpart. X 4.
with that of existing species, such as P. australis; the
basis is large and broad, the ischium long, merus of about
equal length and not broadened nor produced at the postero-
distal angle; the rest of the limb is not distinct, but the
whole reaches apparently as far back as the middle of the
Ath pleon segment. Of the pleon, the first five segments
can be made out with tolerable certainty, though the
division between the 4th and 5th is not clear. These
segments agree pretty closely with those already described
for specimen 1. The inferior margin of the first segment
372 CHAS. CHILTON.
is indistinct, but apparently it does not reach down so far
as that of the second segment. The terminal segment of
the pleon is absent. .
The depth of the peraeon segments is about 4 mm. and
the greatest depth of the pleon 7 mm.
SPECIMEN 3, Fig. 3, b and b’. (Block 240, the smaller
impression, with counterpart on portion of Block 241).
Fig. 3. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 240 and 241); b, impression, /
b', its counterpart. X 5. ;
This specimen is rather smaller than specimen 1, the
total length of the impression being13mm. It shows part
of the third segment of the peraeon and segments 4, 5, 6
‘and 7, and the first five segments of the pleon, so that the
whole animal would probably have a total length of about.
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 373
18mm. The segments of the peraeon that are represented
are very distinct, and have a depth of about 3 mm., while
the greatest depth of the pleon segments, which are also
pretty distinctly shown, is5 mm. The peraeopoda are not
very well preserved, but the portions of them that are
- present correspond with those already described for speci-
mens1 and 2; the three terminal joints of the 6th peraeopod
are very distinctly marked, and there are portions of the
7th peraeopod extending back about as far as the third
segment of the pleon, the extremity being imperfect. In
the pleon the first four segments are very well preserved»
showing the downward prolongation of the pleural portion
very distinctly; that of the second segment reaches further
downwards than the first, and is slightly narrower than
the third, which is about equal to the fourth. Of the fifth
only the anterior portion is present. The terminal portion
of the pleon is unfortunately missing in this specimen also.
‘SPECIMEN 4, Fig. 4. (Block 233).
Fig. 4. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 238). X 5.
On this block, which is brown in colour, much paler than
those bearing specimens 1, 2 and 3, the impression shows
approximately the same parts as those of other specimens,
that is, the posterior segments of the peraeon and the
anterior segments of the pleon; but here, apparently, the
le
~
>, ly
‘
ar
-
six posterior segments of the peraeon are represented, with
possibly also a portion of the first. Portions of corres-
ponding peraeopoda are present, but they are somewhat
confused, and scarcely show anything additional to what
has been already described in the other specimens. The
broad basal joints of peraeopoda 5 and 6 are, however,
distinct, and apparently these limbs had a close general
resemblance to those of the living P. australis. Asin other
specimens the depth of the peraeon segments is about 3 mm.,
while the greatest depth of the pleon is about 5 mm.
oe | CHAS. CHILTON.
The first five segments of the pleon are clearly indicated, |
especially the inferior margins of the pleural portions. The
surface bearing the sixth is depressed below that of the
others, and the impression on it is imperfect.
The total length of the part of the body preserved is.
16 mm., and, as only the head and part of the first peraeon
segment and the terminal segment of the pleon are wanting,
the animal was probably about the same size as specimen
3, i.e., measuring 18 or 19 mm. in length.
SPECIMEN 5, Fig. 5. (Block 236).
Fig. 5. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 236d). X 5.
Of this specimen only the posterior portion of the peraeon
is present, and that is considerably distorted, and too
imperfect to add any further information; but fortunately
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 375
. the whole of the pleon is present, and, although parts of it
are indistinct, the conical terminal segment is clearly
marked, and shows a regular projection at the posterior
end as indicated in the figure. This appears to have the
upper and lower sides nearly similar and evenly curved
into the general outline of the segment, so that the actual
projection is not marked off by a depression at its base, as
in P. australis and others of the existing species. It
appears to resemble most nearly the terminal segment of
P. tasmanice G. M. Thomson and P. spinosus G. W. Smith;
these two, however, being probably identical. The existence
of this terminal segment was not observed until I had
already become quite confident that the other impressions
were those of a Phreatoicus, and the possession of this
characteristic terminal portion of the pleon fully confirms
the correctness of that decision.
The segments 1, 2, 3, 4and 5 of the pleon are fairly
distinctly marked so far as their inferior margins are con-
cerned, and the general line of their dorsal surface is also
clear, though the upper lateral portion of the fourth and
fifth segments has been broken away. At the infero-
posterior angle of the fifth segment there is an indication
of an appendage which possibly represents the uropod, but
this is not distinct enough to make out anything of its
special structure.
The depth of the pleon segments in the specimen is
about 5 mm.; the peraeon segments are hardly sufficiently
marked to admit of accurate measurement.
SPECIMEN 6, Fig. 6. (Block 236).
In this impression the posterior and dorsal portions of:the-
pleon are absent, though the lower portions of segments 1,
2, 3 and 4 can be distinctly identified, and the whole ofjthe
peraeon and apparently the head are also present, although
much confused and difficult to make out.
376 CHAS. CHILTON. 3
= UF c eS ak ;
eae GCSE wwe \F hi
A ONT Des J tea :
aa 7
( ( :
ts Fig. 6. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 236a). X5.
(Counterpart of No. 235a.)
Of the head itself no definite structure can be ascer-
tained, but projecting in front of it there are indications
of an appendage which, in length and position, would cor-
respond with the lower antenna, although it is too indistinct
to show any details, except perhaps two or three segments
of the multi-articulate flagellum.
_ The peraeon segments are very indistinct, but they are -
apparently all present; and, in the second, the inferior ~
margin, projecting anteriorly into a subacute point, can be
made out, with below it apparently the epimeron or coxal
joint of the peraeopod.
SPECIMEN 7, Fig. 7. (Block 236).
Fig. 7. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 2366). X 5.
(Counterpart of No. 2350.) _
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. . 377
This specimen is also imperfect, but shows the four
anterior segments of the pleon, with the same structure as
in the other specimens. Two of the peraeopoda, apparently
the sixth and seventh, are fairly well preserved, especially
the terminal portion of the seventh, which shows the merus,
carpus and propod very distinctly, and of apparently the
same shape and proportions as in P. australis. )
SPECIMENS 8 and 9, Fig. 8. (Block 239).
| Mig (4) but y ;
We U aa [
| \ O \) a (
Fig. 8. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 239a). X 5.
These specimens are very imperfect, but show distinctly |
certain segments of the body, apparently the posterior
segments of the peraeon, with the basal joints of the
corresponding peraeopoda.
In specimen 8 (fig. 8) apparently the last four or five
segments of the peraeon are represented, with indications
of the first two segments of the pleon.
Specimen 9 shows two or three similar segments, but it
is impossible to say which they are. They look quite like
those shown in fig. 8, and I have therefore not given a
figure of them.
SPECIMEN 10, Fig. 9. (Block 239).
ai In this impression there is only a
\ very small portion preserved, which
by itself would be probably quite
unrecognisable, but which, con-
Fig. 9. Phreatoicus wiana- sidered in connection with the other
maittensis, (No. 239¢). X5. snecimens found near it, may per-
haps be taken to represent the fourth and fifth segment of
the pleon, with a portion of the sixth. |
B10 - : CHAS. CHILTON.
[In the foregoing detailed account I have dealt with all
the specimens which were first sent to me by Mr. Tillyard.
After the MS. of the whole paper had been completed and
forwarded to Mr, Tillyard for publication, he sent me
several other specimens; and, as some of the impressions
on these, especially those on Block 235, show additional
points, I give a brief account of them here. I am leaving
the rest of the paper in its original form, although, as will
be seen, one or two of the statements with regard to the
head, antenne and uropods will require slight modification,
in view of the fuller information now available with regard
to them.
Block 235, which had not been sent to me at first owing
to an oversight, is a particularly valuable one, as the
specimens on it not only confirm the statements already
made, but show additional points, especially with regard to
the uropods. On it there are impressions of four specimens,
with the terminal portion of a fifth, and in three out of the
five the terminal segment of the pleon and the uropods are
more or less distinctly marked. The following detailed
descriptions will be sufficient :— |
SPECIMEN 11, Fig. 10. (Block 235).
~
ae
LIE =
—_ 7 2 (CO ! wee
= ad ) Yan
Fig. 10. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 235a). X 5.
(Counterpart of No. 236a.)
This specimen shows the whole body, with the antenna
fairly well marked at the anterior end, the joints of the
5 \
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 379
peduncle are indicated and the flagellum shows distinctly.
Apparently all seven segments of the peraeon are present,
with the basal joints of some of the peraeopods, but the
head and first peraeon segment are not clear. All six
segments of the pleon are represented, showing the pleural
portions as in specimens already described, the terminal
segment having a broadly conical point as in Specimen 5.
Below it the uropods are distinctly seen, both the right
and left uropods being shown owing to compression, the
left apparently above the right, and there are indications
of the two branches of each uropod.
SPECIMEN 12, Fig. 11. (Block 235).
jn if (L ot
(
a hides. ly
ger N A se C/
Ge Gi
Fig. 11. Phreatoicus wianamattensis, (No. 235b). XB.
(Counterpart of No. 2368.)
This specimen shows clearly all the segments of the pleon,
including the terminal segment, which has the same shape
as in the other specimens. The first pleon segment is
distinct; it is not as deep as the second, and shows the
shape as already described in other specimens, perhaps
even more distinctly than in them. The basal joint of the
uropod is also clearly seen, and there are indications of the
two branches. 7
SPECIMEN 13, Fig. 12. (Block 235).
This specimen (near the margin of the block) shows clearly
the shape of the terminal segment, and belowit the peduncle
and the two branches of the uropod.
7
The other two speci-
380 CHAS. CHILTON.
a eae) mens on this block do
not add any further par-
ticulars to our informa-
Ns tion, though they are
Q / > undoubtedly impressions
a: on faa of Phreatoicus, and the
Ni parts that are clear are
quite similar to those
described for the other
Specimens.
Fig. 12. Phreatoicus wianamattensis,
(No. 235c). X 5.
SPECIMEN 14. (Block 238).
This block shows a small specimen, 10 mm. long, with
the pleon curved downwards, the only distinct part of which
is the terminal segment, and below it the uropod showing
basal joint and two branches, but apparently a good deal
flattened.
On Block 234 there are impressions of two specimens,
close together and somewhat confused. On one of them
the terminal segment of the pleon with the uropods can
be recognised, but the rock fracture is very uneven, and
it is impossible to make out clearly any details. The other —
specimen situated near it shows apparently the greater
part of the whole body with peraeopods, but not distinctly
enough to add further details to what is already known
from other specimens. : |
on
On Blocks 210 and 211 (counterpart) there are impress-
ions which seem to represent a dorsal view, showing about
11 or 12 segments, and on one side towards the posterior
end indications of the pleura of what. appear to be the
second and third pleon.segments.] - iow
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 381
3. Diagnosis of the Fossil Species.
It is so evident from the foregoing descriptions and figures
that we are dealing with a species of Phreatoicus that it
is unnecessary to attempt to give a reconstruction of the
animal. In place of doing so, I give in Fig. 13a, a repro-
duction of the figure of Phreatoicus australis published in
1891 in the Records of the Australian Museum, Vol. 1, pl.
23, fig.1. In the general figure the individual joints of the
peraeopoda are not quite accurately shown, and I therefore
also give (fig. 13b and c) from the same source, repro-
ductions of the figures of peraeopoda 3 and 7. If these
Phreatoicus australis Chilton, A °
a, general view, b, third peraeo- AM \
- pod, c, seventh peraeopod. 4 .
(Copied from the original figures by >
Jp \
a in Rec. Austr. Museum, Vol. 1,
Xx pls. 23 and 25, b and c reduced.) iy
382 CHAS. CHILTON.
are compared with the figures of the fossil specimens given
above, which have been drawn by my assistant, Miss
Herriott, as accurately as possible to represent the actual
impressions, it will, I think, also be evident that the fossil
Species comes near to P. australis itself, a species which
again is very similar in general appearance to P. capensis
from South Africa. |
It may, therefore, be classified and described as follows:—
Order ISOPODA Latreille 1817.
Tribe or Suborder PHREATOICIDEA Stebbing 1893.
Family Phreatoicidee Chilton 1891.
Genus Phreatoicus Chilton 1883.
Phreatoicus wianamattensis sp. nov.
Specific Diagnosis.—Similar in general appearance to P.
australis Chilton. Body apparently smooth and not sculp-
tured or tuberculated. Peraeon segments deeper than long,
but not more than two-thirds the depth of the pleon. All
the pleon segments with pleural portions much produced
downwards, that of the first reaching further down than
the last segment of the peraeor, but not so far as the second
pleon segment; segments 2, 3 and 4 about subequal in
length with depth gradually increasing posteriorly; fifth
Segment only slightly longer than the fourth; terminal
segment conical in side view and ending in a subacute point
with curving sides, the terminal process not being sharply
defined from the general outline of the segment.
Peraeopoda similar to those of P. australis; (the first
missing), second, third and fourth directed forwards, sub-
equal in length, with basal joints expanded, merus produced
at antero-distal angle about half-way along the carpus;
the fifth, sixth and seventh directed backwards, fifth about
as long as the fourth, sixth longer than the fifth, and seventh
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 383
still longer, reaching posteriorly to the hind margin of the
fourth pleon segment; basal joints of all rather widely
expanded, other joints longer than the corresponding ones
in anterior series; merus only slightly produced at postero-
distal angle. |
Total length of animal up to 30 mm.
Occurrence.—Wianamatta Shale of the St. Peter’s Brick-
works, Newtown, Sydney, New South Wales.
Remarks.—For this species I have pleasure in adopting
the specific name ‘‘wianamattensis’’? which Mr. Tillyard
had assigned to it in his MS. To Mr. Tillyard belongs the
credit of being the first to recognise that the fossils were
the remains of a Phreatoicus.
While the animal in general appears to come close to
P. australis, the terminal segment so far as it can be deter-
mined from the fossils appears to approach more nearly to
that of P. spinosus G. W. Smith, a species from Tasmania,
which is almost certainly identical with P. tasmanice G. M.
Thomson. In general appearance the fossil species also
comes very close to the South African species P. capensis
Barnard. |
4. Historical Account of the Phreatoicidea.
The Phreatoicidea form such a distinct and interesting
group of Isopoda that it is desirable to give the following
brief history of its members.
The first species, P. typicus, a blind one, was described
by myself (1883, p. 89) from the subterranean waters of the
Canterbury Plains, New Zealand. For it I established the
genus Phreatoicus, and after discussing its relationships to
- several of the main groups of the Isopoda I said (1883, p. 92):
“The precise place of Phreatoicus in any system of classification
cannot as yet be indicated with certainty, but one thing is made
clear by the discussion, viz., that Phreatoicus, possessing as it does
384 CHAS. CHILTON.
affinities to several distinct groups, must be of very considerable
antiquity.”
This was written in 1882, though not published till 1883;
1little thought then that in 1917 I should be able to describe
a fossil Phreatoicus from the Triassic of Australia.
In 1891 I described a species, P. australis, with eyes,
which had been obtained in surface waters at a height of
nearly 6,000 feet, on Mount Kosciusko, Australia, and
established the family Phreatoicidz for the reception of
‘the two species then known. In 1893 Stebbing placed the
family in a separate tribe Phreatoicidea (1893, p. 388).
In 1894 I gave fuller descriptions of these two species, |
and described a third species, P. assimilis, also blind, from
the underground waters of the Canterbury Plains. In-con-
nection with the origin of the subterranean species of
Phreatoicus, I expressed the opinion that species would
some day be found in the surface waters of New Zealand.
This prophecy was fulfilled by the discovery of P. kirkii in
1906.
In 1894, Mr. G. M. Thomson described a species, P.
tasmanice, from the Great Lake, Tasmania.
In 1896, Spencer and Hall established an allied genus,
Phreatoicopsis, for the species, P. terricola, found burrow-
ing in the banks of the upper Gellibrand River, Victoria,
Australia.
In 1900, Sayce described another blind species of Phre-
atoicus, P. shephardi, from a spring at a height of 2,000
feet in the Plenty Ranges, Victoria; in 1916 this species
was recorded from Barrington Tops (4,600 feet), New
South Wales, by myself and more fully described. In the
same year (1900) Sayce established another genus, Phre-
atoicoides, for the blind species, P. gracilis, from surface
runnels, Gippsland, Victoria. |
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 385
In 1902, he established another genus, Hypsimetopus, for
a blind species, H. intrusor, found in the burrows of the
land cray-fish, Hngceus, in Tasmania.
In 1906, I described a species, P. kirkii, with variety
dunedinensis, which though blind was found in surface
streams in southern parts of New Zealand.
In 1909, G. W. Smith recorded the existence of P. aus-
tralis from numerous localities in Tasmania, and described
another species, P. spinosus, from the Great Lake; this,
however is most probably identical with P. tasmanic G. M.
Thomson. Smith drew special attention to the importance
of the evidence supplied by Phreatoicus and other fresh-
water Crustacea of Australia for an Antarctic connection
between New Zealand, Southern Australia and South
America (1909 a, p. 69).
_ In1914,K.H. Barnard recorded the existence of'a species
of the genus in freshwater streams on Table Mountain,
South Africa, the species being named P. capensis, and
after referring to the statement made by Sayce in 1902 to
the effect that it would be interesting to know if any repre-
sentatives were found in South America, added:—‘*The
discovery of a species on Table Mountain, Soutb Africa, is
therefore of great interest, as being one more fact in support
of the existence of an ancient land-mass connecting the
southern continents (Gondwana land)”’ (1914, p. 233).
5. Other Fossil Isopoda.
The fossil Isopoda hitherto described are few in number,
and, as Calman (1909, p. 208) says, ‘‘The little that is
known of their morphology leaves their systematic position
in most cases doubtful and throws no light on the phylo-
genetic history of the group.’’ No paleeozoic forms are
known with any certainty; Oxyuropoda ligioides Carpenter
and Swain has been described from the Devonian of Ireland
Y—October 3, 1917.
386 CHAS. CHILTON.
and in general shape looks like a Ligia, but “‘its appearance
earlier than the primitive caridoid forms may, however,
justify some suspicion as to its affinities. Praearcturus
Woodward, from the Old Red Sandstone of Herefordshire,
has very slender claims to be admitted into this order, and
the same may be said of Amphipeltis Salter (Devonian of
Nova Scotia), and Arthropleura Jordan (Coal Measures).’”’
Undoubted Isopoda do, however, appear in Secondary Rocks.
Cyclosphceroma Woodward, from the Great Oolite and Pur-
beck and Archceoniscus Milne-Edwards from the Hnglish
Purbeck appear to belong to the Spheromide, and if so,
would indicate that that family was differentiated as far
back as the Jurassic Period. Eosphceroma Woodward from
Eocene and Miocene also appears to belong to the same
family. Palcega Woodward and Proidotea Racovitza and
Sevastos, resembling the existing Aga and Mesidotea
respectively, are known from Oligocene beds.
Urda Minster from the Jurassic of Solenhofen appears
to resemble the male of Gnathia.
The existence of Phreatoicus as a fossil in the Triassic
beds of Australia is therefore quite in harmony with the
little that is known of the fossil Isopoda and forms a most
important addition to their geological bistory.
6. Analogy with the Anaspidacea.
It is perhaps worth while calling attention to the fact
that in Tasmania species of Phreatoicus are found in the
same watersas the peculiar fresh-water shrimps Anaspides
tasmanice and Paranaspides lacustris. These shrimps
have been shown by Calman (1896) to be nearly related to
Palceocaris, Preeanaspides, etc., from the Permo-carbon-
iferous of Europe and North America, the whole forming a
group which Calman has named Syncarida. Another living
1 Calman, in Zittel’s Paleontology, Second Edition, p. 758.
A FOSSIL ISOPOD OF THE FRESHWATER GENUS PHREATOICUS. 387
member of this group, Koonunga, was found in fresh-water
- near Melbourne by Sayce in 1907, and was more fully
described by him in 1908. AIl these forms have been fully
investigated by G. W. Smith (1909 b), who had visited
Tasmania in 1907; as yet no fossils belonging to the group
have been recorded from Australia.
Anaspides, Paranaspides and Koonunga are the living
representatives of a primitive and -generalised group of
Crustacea, the Syncarida, and similarly the members of.
the Phreatoicidea, a primitive group of the Isopoda, have
continued to exist in the fresh waters of Australia, Tas-
mania, New Zealand and South Africa from early Secondary
times.
7. List of Works Referred to. ;
BARNARD, KeppeL H., 1914.—Contributions to the Crustacean
Fauna of South Africa: 2. Description of a New Species of
Phreatoicus (Isopoda) from South Africa. Annals South
African Museum, vol. x, pp. 231 — 240, pls. 23 and 24.
Caiman, W. T., 1896.—On the genus Anaspides and its affinities
with certain fossil Crustacea. Trans. Roy. Soc, Edinburgh,
vol. XXXVIII, pp. 787 — 802, pls. 1 and 2.
— 1909.—Crustacea in Ray Lankester’s Treatise on Zoology,
Part vii, Appendiculata, 3rd Fascicle, Crustacea. London.
CuiLTon, C., 1883.—Notes on, anda new Species of Subterranean
Crustacea. Trans. N.Z. Inst, vol xv, pp. 87 — 92, pl. 4.
—— 1891.—On a new and peculiar Fresh-water Isopod from
Mount Kosciusko. Rec. Aust. Museum, vol. 1, pp. 149 — 17],
pls. 23 — 26.
—— 1894.—The Subterranean Crustacea of New Zealand ; with
' some general remarks on the Fauna of Caves and Wells.
Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool., vol. v1, pp. 163 - 284, pls. 16 - 23.
—— 1906.—Description of a Species of Phreatoicws from the
surface waters of New Zealand. Trans. N. Z. Inst., vol.
XXXVIII, pp. 273 - 275.
388 CHAS. CHILTON.
Cuitton, C.,1916.—Some Amphipodaand Isopodafrom Barrington
Tops (4,600 ft. alt.), New South Wales. Proc. Roy. Soc.
New South Wales, vol. 1, pp. 83 — 98, with 22 text figures.
Dunstay, B., 1916.—Mesozoic and Tertiary Insects of Queensland
and New South Wales; Stratigraphical Features. Queens-
land Geological Survey; Publication, No. 253, pp. 1 — 10.
Saycge, O. A., 1900 a.—Phreatoicoides, a New Genus of Fresh-
water Isopoda. Proc. Roy. Soc, Victoria, vol. x11, pp. 122 —-
138, pls. 10 and 11.
— 1900 6.—Phreatoicus shephardi, a New Species of Fresh-
water Isopoda from Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc., Victoria,
vol. XI, pp. 25 — 28, pl. 3.
—— 1902.—A New Genus of Phreatoicide. Proc. Roy. Soc.,
Victoria, vol. xiv, pp. 218 - 224, pls. 18 and 19.
— 1907.—Description of a new remarkable Crustacean with
primitive Malacostracan Characters. Victorian Naturalist,
vol. xxiv, pp. 117 — 120. :
—— 1908.—On Koonunga cursor, a Soa Bel new type of
Malacostracous Crustaceans. Trans. Linn. Soc., 2nd ser.,
vol. x1, pp. 1 to 16, pls. 1 and 2
SmitH, GEOFFREY W., 1909a.—The fresh-water Crustacea of
Tasmania. Trans. Linn. Soc., 2nd Ser. Zool., x1, pp. 61 — 92,
pls. 12-18.
—— 19096.—On the Anaspidacea, living and fossil. Q.J.M.S.,.
vol, Lil, pp. 459 — 578, pls. 11 and 12, and 62 text-figures.
Spencer, B. and Hatt, T. 8., 1896.—Description of a new Genus.
of Terrestrial Isopoda allied to the Genus Phreatoicus. Proc.
Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. 1x, pp. 12 - 21, pls. 3 and 4.
STEBBING, T. R.R., 1893,—A History of Crustacea. London, 1893.
THomson, G. M., 1894.—On a New Species of Phreatoicus from
Tasmania, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 6, vol, x11I, pp.
249 — 3015 pl. TE:
TILLYARD, R. J., 1916.—Mesozoic and Tertiary Insects of Queens-
land and New South Wales:—Descriptions of the Fossil
Insects. Queensland Geological Survey; Publication No. 253,
pp. 11 — 60, with 6 text figures and 9 plates.
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 389
ACACIA SEEDLINGS, Part III.
By R. H. CAMBAGE, F.L.S.
With Plates XV to XIX.
{Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, November 7, 1917. ]
SYNOPSIS:
VITALITY OF SEED IN SEA-WATER.
LenetH oF Hypocoryu.
SEQUENCE IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF LEAVES.
SIMPLY-PINNATE LEAVES.
NuMBER OF PINNE ON ONE LEAF.
TRIPINNATE LEAVES.
DESCRIPTIONS OF SEEDLINGS.
Vitality of Seed in Sea-water.
In previous papers on Acacia Seedlings’ it was pointed
out that seeds of Acacia Farnesiana had germinated after
having been immersed in sea-water for 190 and 405 days
respectively. In order to further test the vitality of
seeds of this species, which were collected by Sir William
Cullen in Central Queensland in July 1914, another seed
was planted after having been in sea-water for 839 days.
Previous to being planted it was placed in boiling water,
and in 17 days the seedling appeared above the soil.
These experiments demonstrate the possibility of various
seeds retaining their powers of germination for a sufficient
length of time to be drifted many thousands of miles, pro-
vided they found suitable agents of transport.
A test was also made with seeds of Acacia penninervis
var. falciformis, and A. melanoxylon, collected at Jenolan
Caves, at an elevation of about 2,700 feet above sea-level.
? This Journal, Vol. xuix, p. 94; Vol. .L, p. 144.
390 R. H. CAMBAGE.
Two of each were planted after having been immersed in
sea-water for 133 days, and both of the former and one of
the latter germinated in from two to three weeks, and the
remaining one in eight weeks. The seeds were placed in
boiling water immediately before being planted.
Although these experiments show the great vitality of
certain seed in sea-water, they do not, of course, prove that.
the seeds secure transport. Nor does it follow that seeds
of all species which are transported find suitable homes
when cast ashore. It is well known that various species
of different genera, in their natural state, exercise the
greatest discrimination in the selection of soils and climate,
and that while the seeds of many species may germinate
when cast ashore, only certain species would establish
themselves without having care and attention in their
infancy. Bushels of seed from our typical mountain
HKucalyptus species might be scattered over the black-soil_
plains of the west, and the great bulk of it would probably
germinate, though it is most unlikely that a single tree
would become established as the result.
A. Farnesiana will grow in Australia on the sea-shore
or in the dry interior, and, as a result of its adaptability,
is very wide-spread throughout the tropics.
Considering the marvellous distribution of the world’s
plants, it seems imperative, when seeking for the solution
of the problem, that the investigation of all sources of
natural dispersal should be exhausted before it be assumed ‘
that certain portions of such distribution may be attributed |
to the agency of man. —
It was mentioned in Part I, (p. 24), that of four seeds of
A. Farnesiana from Boomarra, in tropical Queensland,
which were planted after having been in sea-water for
three months and afterwards placed in boiling water, two
immediately germinated. In Part II, (p. 145), it was —
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 391
recorded that the third seed germinated after having
remained in the soil for twenty-three months. The fourth
seed was left in the soil and watered regularly for three
years, then taken out and found to be quite hard and sound;
after having been placed in boiling water it was again
planted, with the result that the seedling appeared in
three weeks. :
Length of Hypocotyl.
The variation in the length of hypocotyl was referred to
in Part I, (p. 86), when the greatest length then noticed
was given as 5°55 cm. Recently a seedling was raised of
Acacia Baileyana whose hypocotyl] measured 10°5 cm.
Sequence in the Development of Leaves.
As previously pointed out, the great bulk of Acacia seed-
lings have only one simply-pinnate leaf and this is the first
leaf on the plant, the second leaf being usually pipinnate.
A few species have an opposite pair of simply-pinnate
leaves. In addition to those mentioned in previous lists
(Parts I and II), as having only one pinnate leaf, are the
following :—
A. verticillata Willd.? A. subecerulea Lindl.
A. montana Benth. (with an A. subulata Bonpl.
exception). A. cyclopis A. Cunn.
A. Chalkeri Maiden. A. polybotrya Benth.
Another species which has an opposite pair of pinnate
leaves is A. crassiuscula WendlL., (A. pycnophylla Benth.).
In the case of A. montana nine plants each produced one
pinnate leaf, while one seedling had an opposite pair, so
that it seems evident this species is still in something of a
transition stage. —
Out of about eighty species examined, only seven have
constantly produced an opposite pair of simply-pinnate >
? Also recorded by Sir John Lubbock. See Part I, p. 83 of these papers.
The name should be A. verticillata Willd. non Sieb.
392 R. H. CAMBAGE.
leaves. One of these is A. myrtifolia, in which case seeds
from Sydney and Adelaide were examined (Part II, p. 157).
Plants recently raised from seeds of this species, kindly
forwarded to me by Professor W. G. Woolnough, from
Mount Melville, Albany, Western Australia, have produced
an opposite pair of pinnate leaves, thus showing an interest-
ing constancy.
Simply-pinnate Leaves.
When speaking of simply-pinnate and bipinnate leaves in
Part I of this series, it was pointed out that a simply-
pinnate leaf had not so far been observed above the third
leaf on an Acacia seedling, nor at allon an Acacia sucker.’
Karly this year, however, Mr. J. J. Fletcher, B.Sc., found
several such leaves on specimens of A. suaveolens growing
at Woolwich, near Sydney, and which he kindly handed to
me. Others have since been found by me at La Perouse.
These simply-pinnate leaves were growing in pairs, one on
each side of the base of bipinnate leaves which had appeared
as reversion foliage, among the phyllodes at heights up to
four or five feet from the ground, and were apparently the
result of some pathological trouble around the growing-
point of the plants. Bipinnate leaves are common on
adventitious growths of phyllodineous Acacias.
In June of this year I found one example of a simply-
pinnate leaf on a sucker of Acacia Dorothea Maiden, at
Mount Victoria, and later, several were found on suckers
of this species, and of A. obtusata var. Hamiltoni Maiden,
at Leura. These discoveries go to suggest that extended
search may reveal more examples of both features among
various species.
Number of Pinne on one Leaf.
In Part I, (p. 90) it was mentioned that in a few species
the pinnee increase on some of the succeeding leaves to
several pairs. Theremark referred to phyllodineous Acacias.
1 This Journal, xurx, p. 90 (1915).
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 393
In Part II, (p. 158) A. myrtifolia is mentioned as some-
times having two pairs, and A. ameoena, linifolia and
buxifolia are so recorded (infra) in the present paper. A.
suaveolens and A. penninervis var. falciformis may have
two, A. neriifolia, A. accola, and A. implexa up to at least
three, A. rubida five, and A. melanoxylon seven pairs. Two
pairs of pinnee have recently been noticed in West Australian
examples of A. myrtifolia.
Tripinnate Leaves.
‘On one plant of A. buxifolia the sixth leaf had a third
‘pinna about °3 mm. below the terminal pair, and between
this pair the excurrent point of the petiole was clearly
visible before the leaf was pressed. There was no trace of:
even the rudiments of a pinna opposite the odd one, which
was so close to the terminal pair as to make the leaf appear
tripinnate. Had the petiole been produced into the rachis
of the central pinna, instead of the excurrent point, the
leaf would have been strictly tripinnate. (Fig. 1.)
Fig. 1. Acacia buxifolia. Showing an apparent tripinnate leaf. x 2.
394 R. H. CAMBAGE.
The same feature was noticed on the fourth and fifth
leaves of separate seedlings of A. spectabilis, but here the ; |
lower pinna was 1mm. below the terminal pair on the |
fourth leaf, and 3 mm. below in the case of the fifth leaf.
A similar case was found on a plant six feet high of A.
decurrens var. normalis, the lower pinna being 4 mm.
below the terminal pair. —
On a seedling of A. pyenantha the fourth leaf was appar-
ently tripinnate, but in this instance, while the excurrent
point was between the central and right-hand pinne, it
was the central and left-hand pinnee which from their
position looked like the terminal pair. The outer pair
were opposite at their bases, but the left-hand pinna was
the most robust of the three, and the right-hand one began
to wither off as soon as it was fully developed. (Hig. 2.)
Fig. 2. Acacia pycnantha. Showing an apparent tripinnate leaf. x2.
A strictly tripinnate leaf has, however, been found on a
sucker of A. Dorothea, at Leura. In this instance there is
no trace of any excurrent point at the base of the pinne, ae
’ ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 395
and the petiole continues straight on into the rachis of the
central pinna. Fig. 3.
Fig. 3. Acacia Dorothea. Showing a strictly tripinnate leaf. x 2.
Mr. 0. E. Preston records the presence of tripinnate
leaves on seedlings of Acacia leprosa.*
Descriptions of Seedlings.
UNINERVES—Racemose.
ACACIA LEIOPHYLLA, Benth. Seeds from Botanic Gardens,
Sydney, (J. H. Maiden). A Western Australian plant.
(Plate XV, Numbers 1 to 4).
Seeds greyish-brown, oblong-oval, depressed along the
middle on both sides, 5 to 5°5 mm. long, 2°5 mm. broad,
1 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, very pale green, 1°6 to 3 cm.
long, 1 to 1°7 mm. thick at base, ‘7 to 1 mm. at apex,
glabrous.
* «Peculiar Stages of Foliage in the Genus Acacia.’ Amer. Nat.,
XXXVI, p. 727 (1902).
396 R. H. CAMBAGE.
Cotyledons sessile, auricled, oblong, apex rounded, 6 to 7
mm. long, 2 to 2°5 mm. broad, remaining erect and falling
in about a week or ten days: outer or underside brown,
longitudinally wrinkled, upperside pale brown, glabrous.
Stem terete, brownish-green, glabrous. First internode
“2 mm.: second 1 to 2mm.: third 1 to2 mm.: fourth to
sixth about 2 to 3 mm.: seventh 3mm. tol cm.: eighth
oS mm. to 1°2 cm.
Leaves—Nos. 1 and 2. Abruptly pinnate, forming an
Opposite pair, with one generally larger than the other,
especially in the early stages, petiole usually slender but
in one case flattened to °5 mm. broad, and under pocket
lens showing a distinct. midrib with lamina on each side,
the feature extending ina less degree along the rachis,
from about 7 mm. to 1°1 cm. long, green, glabrous; leaflets
on the larger leaf three to four pairs, lanceolate, acuminate,
4 to 5 mm. long, 1°5 mm. broad, on the smaller leaf two to
three pairs, and slightly smaller, upperside green, under-
side paler, midrib distinct under pocket lens; rachis 5 to 7
mm. long, green, glabrous, excurrent; stipules reduced to
scales.
No. 3. Bipinnate, petiole 9 mm. to 1°6 cm. long, green,
slender, excurrent; leaflets three to four pairs, not always
Opposite; in one case the pinna was unequally pinnate;
stipules flat, about 1 mm. long.
Nos. 4 to 6. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole slender, that of
No. 6 sometimes showing a little vertical flattening, 1°6 to
3°2 cm. long, glabrous; leaflets four pairs, upperside green,
underside sometimes brownish-red;_ rachis glabrous,
excurrent.
Nos. 7 and 8. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 2 to 3°5 cm.
long, vertically flattened from 1 to 2 mm. broad, narrowed
towards the base, with a strong nerve running along or
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 397
close to the lower margin, the lamina showing reticulating
veins; leaflets four to five pairs.
No. 9. Hither abruptly bipinnate similar to No. 8, ora
lanceolate phyllode tapering towards the base, with a
distinct midrib and nerve-like margins.
_UNINERVES—Racemose. :
ACACIA FLOCKTONIZ, Maiden.! Seeds from Yerranderie,
New South Wales. Growing on Permo-Carboniferous
sandstone and shale soil. (Plate XV, Numbers 5 to 7.)
Seeds dull black, oval-oblong, 4 mm. long, 2°5 mm. broad,
1 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, very pale red, 1 to 2°5 cm. long,
‘5 to 1°5 mm. thick at base, °5 mm. thick at apex, glabrous.
Cotyledons sessile, slightly auricled, oblong, apex rounded,
4 to 5'5 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. broad, becoming revolute,
sometimes remaining until the phyllodes appear, outer or
underside greenish-yellow, sometimes reddish towards apex,
upper or innerside brown, becoming dark green, glabrous.
' Stem terete, glabrous. First internode °5 mm.; second
2mm. tol*lcm.; third 1°6to1°8 cm.; fourth 1°4 to 2°7 cm.;
fifth 2°6 to 3°2 cm.
Leaves—No. 1. Abruptly pinnate, petiole 3 to 5 mm. long,
green, glabrous; leaflets three pairs, oblong, acuminate, 4
to5 mm. long, 1 to 1°5 mm. broad, green on both sides,
midrib showing under pocket lens, more distinct on under-
side; rachis 4 mm. long, green, glabrous, excurrent.
No. 2. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 6 to 9 mm. long, green,
slender, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets three pairs; rachis
glabrous, excurrent.
No. 3. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 1°6 cm. long,
slender, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets four pairs; rachis up
to 1 cm. long; stipules 1 mm. long, fragile.
+ This Journal, xutx, p. 476, (1915).
398 R. H. CAMBAGE.
No. 4. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 1°8 cm. long,
sometimes veryslightly dilated, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets
up to five pairs; stipules as in No. 3.
No. 5 and upwards. Usually phyllodes with the midrib
running just below the centre of the lamina.
UNINERVES—Racemose.
ACACIA AMGNA, Wendl. Seeds from banks of Wollondilly
River, Burragorang. (Plate XVI, Numbers 1 to 3.)
Seeds black, oblong-oval to obovate, 4 to 5mm. long, 2
to 3 mm. broad, 1 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, at first creamy, becoming pink
to red, 1°6 to 2 cm. long, 1°5 to 1°8 mm. thick at base, about
‘7 mm. at apex, glabrous.
Cotyledous sessile, sagittate, oblong, apex rounded, 5 to
6 mm. long, 2°7 to 3 mm. broad, at first erect, becoming
horizontal, revolute and cylindrical, outer or underside
reddish-green to reddish, upperside pale green to brownish-
green, glabrous. eos
Stem terete, brownish-green, glabrous. First internode
“> mm.; second 2 mm. to 1 cm.; third 3 mm. to 2°2 cm.;
fourth 3 mm. to 1°5 cm.; fifth 4 mm. to 4°1 cm.; sixth 1 to
2°3 cm.; seventh 1°2 to 38 cm.; eighth 1°2 to 2°3 cm.
Leaves—No.1. Abruptly pinnate, petiole 3 to6mm. long,
reddish-green, glabrous; leaflets two to three pairs, oblong,
acuminate, often mucronate, 6 mm. long, 1°5 to 2°5 mm.
broad, midrib just discernible on upperside, more distinct
on underside, upperside greenish-red, becoming green,
underside red, glabrous; rachis 4 to 6 mm. long, glabrous,
excurrent; stipules flat, ovate, acuminate, 1 mm. long, with
central nerve. | 7
No. 2. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1°1 to 1°7 cm. long,
slender, brownish-green, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets three
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 399
to four pairs, the number not being constant on each pinna
of the same leaf; rachis 5 to 7 mm. long, glabrous, ex-
current.
No. 3. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1°4 to 1°8 cm. long,
sometimes channelled above, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets
four pairs, upperside green, underside paler or sometimes
reddish-green, the terminal pair being opposite, while the
remaining leaflets are sometimes alternate; rachis glabrous,
excurrent; stipules as in No. 1.
Nos. 4and 5. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1°3 to 2°5 cm.
long in No. 4, and 1°7 to 3'l cm. in No. 5, about ‘8 mm.
broad, with a strong nerve along the lower margin, dilated _
above, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets five to six pairs, the
basal pair usually small, the inner one the smaller, the
terminal pair often obliquely obovate; rachis up to 2 cm.
long, excurrent.
Nos. 6 and 7. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 2°1 to 3°3 cm.
long in No. 6, and 1°6 to 4°2 cm. in No. 7, 1 to 2mm. broad,
dilated as in Nos. 4 and 5, excurrent; leaflets six to seven
pairs, up to about L cm. long, the basal pair often less than
half that length; No. 7 may have two pairs of pinne;
stipules about 1°5 mm. long.
Nos. 8 to 10. These may be phyllodes with a fairly
central midrib and nerve-like margins, though not always
with any evidence of the glands which are a feature of
more mature phyllodes, or they may be abruptly bipinnate
with petioles up to eight pairs.
There is no constancy in the number of bipinnate leaves
which occur before the phellodes appear. In any case they
are few, aS compared with the numerous bipinnate leaves
on a seedling of A. rubida, a species with which this has
considerable affinity.
400 k. H. CAMBAGE.
UNINERVES—Racemosee.
ACACIA LINIFOLIA, Willd. Seeds from Cheltenham and
Waterfall, New South Wales, growing on Hawkesbury
Sandstone formation. (Plate XVII, Numbers 1 to 3.)
Seeds black, oblong-oval to obovate, edges thin, 5 to 6
mm. long, 3 mm. broad, 2 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, pale coloured below soil, reddish
above, 1 to 5°5 cm. long, 1°5 to 2° i mm, thick at base, ‘7 to
1 mm. at apex, glabrous.
Cotyledons sessile, auricled, oblong-oval, 6 to 7 mm. long,
3°) to4mm. broad, soon becoming revolute and cylindrical,
falling in about two or three weeks, outer or underside
pale pink, at first convex, sometimes with two or three
raised longitudinal lines and a few small glands, upperside
at first brownish-pink, becoming brownish-green, glabrous.
Stem terete, hirsute. First internode *5 to 1 mm.;
second 1 to4 mm.; third 2 mm. to 1°5cm.; fourth 2 mm.
to 2°4 cm.; fifth 3 mm. to 2°5 cm.; sixth 2 mm. to 1°5 cm.;
seventh 2to6mm. In some of the young plants the early
phyllodes become crowded, as many as thirty occurring in
the length of 1 cm.
Leaves—No. 1. Abruptly pinnate, and showing beyond
the edges of the cotyledons as soon as they are up, petiole
4 to 7 mm. long, green, pilose; leaflets four to seven pairs,
oblong, acuminate, 4 to 7 mm. long, 1°3 to 2°6 mm. broad,
the basal and terminal pairs often the smallest, the latter
being sometimes obovate, upperside green, underside at
first reddish, becoming pale green, midrib distinct on under-
side, secondary vein showing under pocket lens; rachis 1°3
to 1°7 cm. long, pilose, excurrent.
No. 2. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1 to 1°4 cm. long,
slender, green, pilose, excurrent; leaflets five to seven
pairs, oblong, acuminate; rachis 1 to 1°4 cm. long, green,
pilose, excurrent.
= ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 40]
No. 3. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1°2 to 1°8 cm. long,
green, sometimes brownish-green, pilose to hoary, excur-
rent; leaflets six to ten pairs, sometimes mucronate; rachis
1°4 to 2 cm. long, green, pilose, excurrent; stipules some-
times showing as minute scales.
Nos. 4and5. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 2 cm.
long in No. 4, and 2°5 cm. in No. 5, pilose to hoary, excur-
rent; leaflets seven to twelve pairs in No. 4, and up to
thirteen in No. 5, which, with No. 6 may sometimes have
two pairs of pinnee;* rachis green, pilose, excurrent.
Nos. 6and 7. Sometimes phyllodes or they may be
abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 3°1 cm. long, pilose to
hoary; leaflets up to fourteen pairs.
No. 8 and upwards. Phyllodes, varying in length from
about 1 to 3 cm., °4 to °6 mm. broad, on plants up to 1 foot
or 18 inches high.
In some cases the phyllodes are slender and weak, while
on other plants they are fairly stiff, with the midrib show-
ing under a pocket lens, and they taper into a straight or
a bent point, glabrous or with a few scattered hairs towards.
the bases of the first dozen or so.
UNINERVES—Racemose.
ACACIA BUXIFOLIA, A. Cunn. Seeds from Grattai near
Mudgee, (J. H. Maiden), and foot of Victoria Pass,
Mount Victoria, N.S. Wales. (Plate XVII, Numbers
4 to 6). :
Seeds black, oblong to oblong-oval, 4 to 5 mm. long, 3
mm. broad, 1°5 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, pale Poult 1°7 to 3 cm. long, 1 to
2°5 mm. thick at base, °6 to ‘9 mm. at apex, glabrous.
1 Several examples, on natural seedlings, were handed to me by Mr.
J.J. Fletcher, collected at Hunter’s Hill, near Sydney.
Z—November 7, 1917.
402 R. H. CAMBAGE.
Cotyledons sessile, slightly auricled, oblong, apex rounded,
6 mm. long, 3°5 mm. broad, soon becoming horizontal,
revolute, and cylindrical, soon falling, outer or underside
reddish to red, sometimes becoming’pale green, inner or
upperside pale red tored, becoming green, with distinct
midrib.
Stem terete, except in upper portion where affected by
decurrent leaf-stalks, glabrous. First internode °5 mm.;
second 2 to 6 mm.; third 2 mm. to 1°5 cm.; fourth 3 to 9
mm.; fifth 7 mm.tol°3cm.; sixth 5 mm. to1°9 cm.; seventh
5 mm. to 1°4 cm.; eighth 7 mm. to 1°5 cm.
Leaves—No. 1. Abruptly pinnate, showing at a very early
stage, petiole 5 to 7 mm. long, green to reddish-green,
glabrous; leaflets three pairs, oblong, acuminate, the ter-
minal pair often cuneate, about 7 mm. long, 2 mm. broad,
midrib and secondary vein fairly distinct, upperside green,
underside pale green or reddish; rachis 6 to 8 mm. long,
glabrous, excurrent; stipules reduced to scales.
No. 2. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole slender, up to 1°5 cm.
long, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets three pairs; often reddish
green on both sides; rachis glabrous, excurrent.
Nos. 3 and 4. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 7 mm. to 1°7
cm. long; leaflets three to five pairs, often mucronate,
margins sometimes red; rachis glabrous, excurrent.
Nos. 5 and 6. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 5 mm. to 1°9
cm.; terete or sometimes channelled above and showing
transit to the dilated petiole, often with a small marginal
gland, No. 6 being sometimes dilated above a strong nerve
along the lower margin,.excurrent; leaflets up to six pairs;
stipules reduced to scales about 1 mm. long. No. 6 may
have two pairs of pinnee.
Nos. 7 and 8. Sometimes phyllodes, or they may be
abruptly bipinnate, petiole 5 mm. to 1°5 cm. long, dilated
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 403
above the midrib to a width of 1 mm., or perhaps both above
and below toa total width of about 3 mm., and with a
small marginal gland, excurrent; leaflets up to six pairs.’
PLURINERVES—Nervose.
ACACIA EXCELSA, Benth., ‘“‘Ironwood.’’ Seeds from Geera,
Central Queensland (H. OC. Cullen), and Cobar, New
South Wales (Archdeacon F. E. Haviland). (Plate
XVIII, Numbers 1 to 3.)
Seeds from light to dark brown, irregularly oblong to
ovate and oval, 5 to 6 mm. long, 4 mm. broad, 1 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, pale green to reddish, up to 2°5
em. long, 2 mm. thick at base, 1 mm. at apex, glabrous.
Cotyledons sessile, auricled, ovate-oblong to oblong-oval;
somewhat fleshy, 7 to 8 mm. long, 4°2 to5 mm. broad, outer
or underside at first pale to yellowish-green, becoming
green, inner or upperside green, midrib sometimes distinct,
with a few lateral veins showing under pocket lens, becom-
ing horizontal in a few days, later folded down past the
middle, often remaining until the phyllodes appear.
Stem terete, varying from green to red, glabrous. First
internode °5 mm.; second 1 to3 mm.; third 2 to 7 mm.;
fourth 3 to 8 mm.; fifth 4 mm. to 1°5 cm.
Leaves—No. 1. Abruptly pinnate, petiole 3 to 7mm. long,
reddish-green, glabrous; leaflets two pairs, mm. to 1°1 cm.
long, 3 to 4 mm. broad, obovate-oblong to oblong-acuminate,
sometimes mucronate, midrib and secondary vein fairly
distinct, sometimes distinctly triplinerved, upperside green,
underside paler, petiolules often reddish; rachis 3 to 7 mm.
long, green, glabrous, excurrent; stipules reduced to scales.
No. 2. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 6 mm. to 1°5 cm. long,
green, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets two to three pairs, not
* See reference to an apparent tripinnate leaf on this species. (Supra).
404 R. H. CAMBAGE.
always opposite, oblong-acuminate to almost oval, 3 to 7
mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. broad, upperside green, underside
paler; rachis 3 to 6 mm, long, green, glabrous, excurrent ;
Stipules as in No. 1.
No. 3. Sometimes a phyllode, or abruptly vipinnate,
petiole 1°4 to 2°5 cm. long, vertically flattened and with a
strong nerve along or near the lower margin, with some-
times a second finer vein above, excurrent; leaflets two
to three pairs, lanceolate-acuminate to obliquely obovate.
Nos. 4 and 5. These may be triplinerved, mucronate
phyllodes narrowed at the base, or they may be abruptly
bipinnate; petiole up to 2°4 cm. long, vertically flattened
to 6 mm. broad, tapering towards the base; leaflets two to
three pairs, obliquely obovate.
The first and second phyllodes are usually triplinerved
with the central nerve most prominent, the third and fourth
show three fairly prominent nerves with a finer vein next
to, and on each side of the central and most prominent.
one; subsequent phyllodes often have up to seven nerves.
This is the first seedling described in this series where
the No. 3 leaf has been reduced to a phyllode. In one case
while No. 3 was a phyllode. No. 4 was bipinnate, though
this irregularity of sequence is not confined to A. excelsa.
This species may develop a phyllode before the stem is.
half an inch high.
JULIFLOR“—Tetramere.
ACACIA LINEARIS, Sims. Seeds from Lidcombe, and Wah-
roonga, near Sydney. Growing on Wianamatta Shale
formation, sometimes at its junction with Hawkesbury
Sandstone, and usually along a moist course; also from
Mosman, on Hawkesbury Sandstone formation. (Plate
XIX, Numbers 1 to 3.)
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 405
Seeds glossy black, oblong, 4 mm. long, 2 mm. broad, 1
mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, white or pale below soil, pale
green to reddish above, up to 1°8 cm. long, 1°2 to 2 mm.
thick at base, °5 to ‘°8 mm. thick at apex, glabrous.
Cotyledons sessile, slightly auricled or sagittate, oblong,
apex rounded, 6 mm. long, 2 mm. broad, outer or underside
pale green, with usually one or two raised lines, inner or
upperside green, glabrous, soon becoming horizontal and
revolute, and sometimes remaining until the advent of the
fifth leaf.
Stem terete, green, almost glabrous but with a few
scattered hairs. First internode ’5 mm.; second 3 to 5 mm.,;
third 3 mm. to 2°4 cm.; fourth 4 mm. to 1°6 cm.; fifth 4mm.
to 1°2 cm.; sixth 3 mm. to 1°3 cm.; seventh 6 mm. to 1°5
cm.; eighth 7 mm. to 2°3 cm.
Leaves—No.1. Abruptly pinnate, petiole 4 to 8 mm. long,
green, glabrous; leaflets three pairs, rarely four, oblong,
acuminate, 5 to 7 mm. long, 2°5 to 3 mm. broad, venation
indistinct, upperside green, underside paler; rachis 5 to 8
mm. long, green, glabrous, excurrent.
No. 2. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 2 cm. long,
slender, green, glabrous, excurrent; leaflets three to four
pairs; rachis up to 1 cm. long, excurrent.
No. 3. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 2°5 cm. long,
slender, excurrent; leaflets up to six pairs; rachis up to
2 cm. long.
No. 4. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 3°2 cm. long,
slightly dilated vertically, with a few scattered hairs; leaf-
lets up to eight pairs, up to 8 mm. long, the inner ones of
the basal pair usually much smaller in this and most of the
leaves, (Nos. 2 to 7); rachis sometimes with a few scattered
hairs; stipules 1 mm. long, flat, tapering to a point, and
showing a central nerve under pocket lens.
406 R. H. CAMBAGE.
*
No. 5. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1 to 3°7 cm. long, |
vertically flattened and showing midrib just below centre
of lamina, with a few scattered hairs, excurrent; leaflets.
up to eight pairs; rachis pilose, excurrent; stipules as in
No. 4. .
No.6. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to4 cm. long, similar
to that of No. 5; leaflets up to ten pairs; rachis pilose,
excurrent.
No. 7. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 5°8 cm. long,
vertically flattened to 1 mm. broad, with distinct midrib
just below centre of lamina, almost glabrous; leaflets up
to twelve pairs; rachis with a few scattered hairs; stipules
as in No. 4.
No. 8. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole up to 6°6 cm. long,
with a few scattered hairs, vertically flattened to 2°5 mm.
broad, with distinct midrib along centre; leaflets up to
twelve pairs. |
Nos. 9 and upwards. Usually phyllodes, No. 9 being
sometimes up to 12°5 cm. long, while No. 13 may be 17 cm.
long, and usually about 3, but sometimes 4mm. broad, with
a prominent midrib and sometimes one or two very indefinite
faint nerves on each side.
JULIFLORA—FEalcatee.
ACACIA AULACOCARPA, A. Cunn. Seeds from Cairns (John
Hill), and Biboohra (Miss L. Martin), Tropical Queens-
land. (Plate XVIII, Numbers 4 to 6).
Seeds glossy black, oblong to oblong-oval, 5 to 6 mm.
long, 3 mm. broad, 1°5 mm. thick.
Hypocotyl erect, terete, brownish-red, 1°6 to 3 cm. long, :
1°5 to 2 mm, thick at base, 1 mm. at apex, glabrous.
Cotyledons sessile, auricled, ovate-oblong to oblong-oval,
8 to 9mm. long, 3°5 to 4mm. broad, outer or underside
ll i
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 407
greenish-brown to pale red, smooth or with a raised line
along centre on which are sometimes one or two gland-like
formations, inner or upperside green, glabrous; soon becom-
ing horizontal, and in some cases remaining until the
-phyllodes appear.
Stem terete and pilose in lower portion, angular above,
where affected by decurrent leaf-stalks. First internode
> mm.; second 1 mm.; third3to5 mm.; fourth 3 to7 mm.;
fifth 6 mm. to 2 cm.
Leaves—No. 1. Abruptly pinnate, petiole 3 to 6 mm. long,
green, pilose, excurrent; leaflets three pairs, oblong,
acuminate, often mucronate, 5 to 9 mm. long, 2 to3 mm.
broad, midrib fairly distinct, secondary vein showing under
pocket lens, upperside green, underside paler, margins
ciliate; rachis 6 to 7 mm. long, pilose, excurrent; stipules
weak, flat at base, 1 mm. long.
No. 2. Usually bipinnate, but this species shows consider-
able instability in regard to the sequence of its bipinnate
leaves. In one instance the second leaf was simply-pinnate
with only one pair of leaflets. In several instances the
second leaf developed with only one pinna, but the presence
of the excurrent point of the petiole, at the base of the
rachis, indicated that the leaf was not a typical simply-
pionate leaf, though no evidence could be seen of even the
rudiments of the second pinna. In another leaf, each pinna
had three leaflets on one side of the rachis, while those on
the other side had fused into one abnormal leaflet, extend-
ing along the corresponding length of the rachis.
In normal cases the petiole is 4 to 8 mm. long, pilose to
hirsute, excurrent; leaflets two to three pairs, oblong
acuminate, margins ciliate, opposite leaflets often of
unequal size; rachis 7 mm.to1cm. long, pilose, excurrent.
No. 3. Bipinnate, petiole 7mm. to 2 cm. long, sometimes
slightly dilated, with gland on upper margin, hirsute,
408 R. H. CAMBAGE.
excurrent; leaflets two to four pairs, often irregular in
size and not always strictly opposite; rachis pilose,
excurrent; stipules as in No. 1.
No. 4. Sometimes a phyllode 3°5 cm. long, up to 6 mm.
broad; or it may be bipinnate, with petiole up to 2°3 cm.
jong, vertically flattened to 2 mm. broad towards the
middle, with the strong nerve or midrib along the lower
margin, and a gland on upper margin, pilose, excurrent;
leaflets three to six pairs, up to 8 mm. long, and 3 mm.
broad, margins ciliate; rachis pilose, excurrent.
Nos.5to10. Phyllodesso far as seen, falcate-lanceolate,
with gland near the base of upper margin; No. 5 having
one prominent nerve along centre of lamina, with numerous
fine veins on both sides and nerve-like margins; No. 6 and
upwards usually having two or more prominent nerves.
The ashy-grey or hoary appearance so common on mature
phyllodes of this species is absent from the early phyllodes,
- which are pale green.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
| PLATE XV.
Acacia leiophylla, Benth.
1. Cotyledons, and opposite pair of pinnate leaves, one developing
in advance of the other. From Western Australia, cultivated
in Botanic Gardens, Sydney, (J. H. Maiden).
2. Opposite pair of pinnate leaves and bipinnate leaves.
3. Bipinnate leaves and phyllodes.
4. Seeds.
Acacia Flocktonic, Maiden.
5, Cotyledons. Yarranderie.
or)
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes.
7. Pod and seeds.
aa Misodicdontec bad Acct bec hu Lileat iba the ia a A San anc sae
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. L1., 1917.
Ze
Gy,
OG dlidl,
yy 7 A Wee
an
vy
Acacia leiophylla (1 to 4); A. Flocktonic (5 to 7).
Natural Size.
Plate XV.
."
%
SAM NASA SASS
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LL, 1917. Plate XVI.
Acacia amena.
Two-thirds Natural Size.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. L1., 1917. Plate XVII.
Acacia lintfolia (1 to 3); A. buaifolia (4 to 6).
Three-fourths Natural Size.
~ rs < t ” ie =e
:* uh os ie 3 es ' : 2 on ys
.
’ Sem > OY Ge Oh eee es
oH
\ .
a
r
‘
‘ = t
‘.
~
ot
o>
5 —
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LI., 1917. Plate XVIII.
t
N
My
bli
WZ
f
Yy
iy
Zh
Acacia excelsa (1 to 3); A. aulacocarpa (4 to 6).
Slightly under Natural Size.
’ 5 1
;
a ne
7
;
i
Yereye aA tee Oe ONS Wee Wes
ne PG 6 aR ides a ee era me gS
>
&
s
2 Bn
: ;
: '
ret
; =
;
" 5
‘
“ ;
}
% .
,
SS & 7) 4
‘
.
V
ti he! = rae
7H) EW owl Pues 2 i, ae ee
shed ee oe Ee ac. kes APR os He:
a! LS Y , ’ ae , {hy M
i ¢ wal
’
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LI., 1917. Plate XTX.
Ea
i
Ore *
Ze
4
bor ae BAINES FEE piesa eS Ses _ SCE S|
Acacia linearis.
Two-thirds Natura] Size.
ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 409
Puate XVI. )
Acacia amena, Wendl.
. Cotyledons. Burragorang.
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes.
3. Pod and seeds.
bo
Purate XVII.
Acacia linifolia Willd.
. Cotyledons. Cheltenham near Sydney.
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes. Nodule on root.
3. Pod and seeds.
Acacia buxifolia, A. Cunn.
. Cotyledons. Grattai near Mudgee, (J. H. Maiden).
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes.
. Seeds.
Pirate XVIII.
Acacia excelsa, Benth.
. Cotyledons and pinnate leaf. Cobar, (Archdeacon Haviland).
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes.
. Seeds.
Acacia aulacocarpa, A. Cunn.
. Cotyledons and pinnate leaf. Biboohra, Tropical Queensland,
(Miss L. Martin).
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes.
. Pods and seeds.
Piuate XIX.
Acacia linearis, Sims.
. Cotyledons and pinnate leaf. Lidcombe.
. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes. Nodule on root.
. Pod and seeds. Wahroonga.
410 R. T. BAKER.
SOME IRONBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES.
By R. T. BAKER, F.L.S.
With Plates XX - XXIV.
Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, November 7, 1917.
THIS group of trees—the Ironbarks, is one of the best known |
in the Australian flora, and is especially famous for the
hardness, weight, strength and durability of its timber.
The number of species is rather limited, less than a dozen
being so far described.
Most of the other groups of Hucalypts grade into each
other, but the Ironbarks seem to be an isolated class, and
so form a well defined collection of forest trees, and com-
pared with the geographical range of the others, their
distribution may be said to be rather limited, being found
principally along the ranges and district of the middle
portion of the east coast of the Continent.
Most of the species are well defined and their timbers
very distinctive, and it is about this latter portion of the
tree that this: paper is more particularly concerned, for it
was discoveries made in classifying the woods that gave
rise to this research.
The timber of E. crebra, E. siderophloia, H. siderowylon,
gave no difficulty of determination, but it was not so when
dealing with what was generally passed as H. paniculata —
timber.
Under what has been commonly known as HE. paniculata
it was found that several distinct timbers occur, each
possessing characteristic physical properties, which bar
them from being regarded as one and the same timber,
especially technologically. This left no alternative but to
SOME IRONBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. Alt
separate them under distinct specific names, as allowing
such a variety of timbers to pass under one name would only
reflect on a scientific classification, certainly on an economic
one. Following up this clue it was found that the trees in
addition to having distinct timbers, differed also in variation
of fruits, leaves and bark.
_ The trouble seems to have started even from the first
knowledge of this group of trees; for some of the earliest.
Eucalyptologists bracketed together species which now are
regarded as quite distinct (nem. con.); thus Dr. Woolls,
1867, in a contribution to the Genus Kucalyptus, ‘‘Flora of
Australia,” p. 242, states :—EH. paniculata and EH. crebra—
-are mere varieties of the White Ironbark,—"‘I feel no
hesitation in uniting H. paniculata and E. crebra as one
species, although there is an occasional difference in the
quality of the wood.’’ To-day, with more data at our dis-
posal, every systematist regards these as quite distinct,
morphologically, xylologically and chemically. For the
‘* occasional difference in the quality of the wood’’ we would
now, from our increased knowledge, state distinct differ-
ences,
These statements necessarily do not carry too great a
weight in the light of modern research,—we having greater
facilities for investigation than obtained in Dr. Woolis’
time. H. crebra has a red timber and is never known as
**White Ironbark,”’ whilst E. paniculata as placed system-
atically in the past had various coloured woods ascribed to
it, and in this connection the following is of interest:—
“1. #. paniculata, varies in the colour of the wood from white
to red, and, therefore, is sometimes called ‘‘White,” and sometimes
‘*Red Ironbark,” whilst, on the Blue Mountains, the pale variety
has the name of “Brush Ironbark.” Although this tree appears
in the interior in a stunted form, it rises in the Counties of Cum-
berland and Camden to the “height of 120 feet, and the bark is
’
‘:
4G
412 Rk. T. BAKER,
smoother and more uniform than that of the allied species. The
wood of £. paniculata, especially in the pale variety, is very hard
and tough, and, according to. Sir Wm. Macarthur, is “the most
valuable of all Ironbarks,” being highly prized by wheelwrights for
shafts, spokes, and cogs, or for any purposes where strength and
durability are required.”—(Dr. Woolls, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,
1880-1, p. 503.)
Baron von Mueller in his Eucalyptographia, under H.
paniculata, states, that according to Dr. Woolls itis called
Red Ironbark on account of its reddish dark timber, and
himself states it is often darker than other kinds of ironbark
timber. |
Mr. Maiden, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. xiv, 1913,
“*Notes on Eucalypts,”’ p. 84, states:—
‘“‘Incidently I may say that H#. paniculata, Sm. is referred to as
Red Ironbark by Mueller in ‘‘Eucalyptographia” by a mistake on
the alleged authority of the late Revd. Dr. Woolls, who, in his
own copy of that work (in my possession) cancelled the word ‘red’
and inserted ‘white.’ The student of New South Wales Eucalypts
knows that to the vast majority of people Z. paniculata goes under |
the name of White or Grey Ironbark, while some people, noting
its pink or pale red colour (sometimes deeper in tint, but never as
deep a red as ZL. siderophloia,) use the name Red Ironbark, but,
compared with a true Red Ironbark the term is very misleading.”
Whilst cognisant of the opinions of some systematists
that allowances must be made for variation in timbers of
the species of this genus, yet my experience, after working
on the timbers for a quarter of a century, is, that Hucalyptus
timber variations are not great wherever grown, especially
colour of timbers, certainly not in a range of several colours. .
Of course, we may find a diseased tree occasionally, but
otherwise these parts and properties are very fairly con-
‘stant, and that the percentage of variation is low. Yor
instance, EH. globulus timber is world known, and it is the
SOME IRONBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 413
same in characters wherever grown. So with other species,
for instance, H. rostrata, and H. tereticornis have wide
geographical distribution, but their timbers practically
always preserve Specific characters, and the same remarks
apply to almost every other species.
In the group of ironbarks EH. crebra extends from the
coast on and over the mountain ranges and far beyond
them. The timber is always red in colour and so with H.
siderophloia, H. sideroxylon and H. melanophloia, but as
stated above, HE. paniculata, as previously systematically
placed, included, amongst other differences, four distinct
timbers, and from my own knowledge of such it is difficult to
admit that so wide a range of colours and qualities can
exist under one species. This confusion of timbers has
often called for a decision from me from merchants and
others, as to whether a consignment of wood was true to
‘name or not.
If four distinct woods are to be placed under the same
species name, then it will be the exception to the rule of
constancy that I have so far found to obtain in our timbers,
both hard and soft.
As I think that technology especially would be better
served if these timbers were specifically differentiated, it
is now proposed to make the following classification, taking
the white, grey or light chocolate coloured timber as the
type H. paniculata, then apart from other characters we
have remaining, a deep chocolate timber, a pink timber,.
and a deep red one, for which names are required, and it is
now proposed to give those specific rank.
1. HUCALYPTUS PANICULATA, Sm.
(White or Grey Ironbark.)
Historical.—Mr. Maiden in his Orit. Rev. Euc. has done
great service in helping to elucidate the ironbarks, especi-
ally this species, for in Vol. 11, Plate 57, fig. 8a, he depicts
-
i
=
, a
..
7
414 R. T. BAKER. "
Robert Brown’s specimen, collected at Port Jackson, and
although only in bud and flower yet distinctly shows it to —
be the White Ironbark as now generally understood, and
this of course must stand as the type E. paniculata.
All trees with this form of inflorescence have a white or
very pale coloured timber, and under the name White or
Grey Ironbark are now generally accepted as typical EH.
paniculata, (Woolls and Maiden both agreeing that this is
the colour of this timber) there is no alternative but to let
such nomenclature stand.
Maiden states, (Jour. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. XLV, p. 84),
‘‘H. paniculata is referred to by Mueller in Hucalypto-
graphia by mistake on the alleged authority of the late Dr.
Woolls, who in his own copy of that work (in my possession)
cancelled the word ‘red’ and inserted ‘ white.’”’
Description.—A large forest tree, with a grey or black
coloured, deeply furrowed, corky, thick bark, permeated
more or less with kino, except the inner portion which is
very close and compact almost as hard as the wood itself.
Probably it is this black coating of the bark that has given
_ ¥ise to the common name of ‘‘ Black Ironbark”? in some
localities such as Port Macquarie. Leaves practically all
lanceolate, the initial leaves broadly lanceolate, earlier
two or three inclined to ovate, marginal vein removed from
the edge, although in some cases quite close to it, venation
oblique, but more marked than in the normal leaves, which
have quite indistinct veins. Inflorescence paniculate. .
Operculum conical, either longer or shorter than the calyx,
which varies from pyriform to slightly hemispherical.
Fruits pyriform, urnshaped, or inclined to hemispherical,
the pyriform varies in length from 3 to 4 lines and under 3
lines in diameter, slightly less in the other forms; the rim
is flat, some forms have a half round ring below the outer
edge and valves deeply inserted, sometimes the valves are
SOME IRONBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 415
exserted. When the timber is white, the fruits have the
raised ring at the edge.
Timber.—The colour, the first feature to be taken into
account in determining this species, ranges from the very
palest to a light grey or light chocolate. When first cut
it is white, (and in some instances remains so), but on
exposure darkens to a grey or light chocolate.
The Black Ironbark of Port Macquarie often has a number
of black streaks and dark patches running through it, but
otherwise it is pale. It is straight in the grain, fairly
fissile for an ironbark, difficult to season, strong, heavy,
compact in texture, durable and suitable for all kinds of
heavy constructional and heavy carriage work.
Anatomical.—A very close compact timber, the fibres
appear in a cross section to be compressed into hexagonal
shapes, with thick walls, very small lumen filled with a
brown deposit. The pores are fairly numerous and
scattered irregularly amongst the other wood elements.
The vessels are nearly all filled with tyloses; a feature of
the radial and tangential sections is the numerous and
distinct perforations in the fibre walls. The wood paren-
-chyma is scarce and mostly in the neighbourhood of the
vessels, the cells are nearly always filled with a brown
deposit, as also are the cells of the ray parenchyma; the
rays are uniformly uniseriate. A few crystals were
detected.
2
Geographical Range.—Common along the coast district
of New South Wales, also vide Mr. Maiden’s localities,
(loc. cit.)
2. KUCALYPTUS FERGUSONI, Sp. nov.
(Bloodwood-bark Ironbark.)
Description.—A tall, fine typical specimen of an Iron-
bark, with a facies in the field of something approaching a
416 R. T. BAKER.
‘**Bloodwood,”’’ from the nature of the bark, which resembles
somewhat those species of Kucalypts. It is probably the
thinnest bark of all the ironbarks, and lacks the deep fur-
rows so common to the group, being friable and so very |
short in the fibre on the exterior half, but hard and com-
pact and deep red in colour for the remaining thickness,
there being almost an entire absence of kino. The early
leaves, Say two or three are at first rather broadly lanceo-
late, from 7 to 9 inches long and 21 to 3 inches broad, but
later leaves much smaller and less coriaceous than the
earlier ones, venation distinct, intramarginal vein removed
from the edge, lateral veins medium oblique. Normal
leaves lanceolate, falcate, varying in length and width, and
may be described in a general way as only medium size for
an ironbark, not thick; venation not at all distinct asa
rule, intramarginal vein removed from the edge, lateral
veins fairly oblique. Inflorescence paniculate-corymbose,
but when developed into the fruiting stage becoming
almost corymbose. Oalyx pyriform, ribbed. Operculum
conical, the rim of the calyx bulging beyond the base of it.
Fruits pear shaped on a long slender pedicel, strongly four
ribbed, contracted at the rather thin rim, valves deeply
inserted, 9 lines long and 4 lines wide.
Timber.—The colour is a deep red or reddish chocolate
when fresh cut, but rather inclined to become a lighter red
when aged. Itis hard, heavy, straight or interlocked in
the grain, which may be described as rather open, the
vessels being conspicuous in a longitudinal cut, and appear-
ing as whitish streaks. It planes and dresses well, and is
suitable for all kinds of heavy constructional works.
In its economics it is probably equal to the very best
of other ironbarks, such as EH. crebra, E. paniculata, E.
siderophloia.
Anatomical.—A close textured timber with specially
thick walled fibres having numerous apertures opening in
SOME IRUNBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 417
ovate, longitudinal slits, and which form a conspicuous
feature in a longitudinal section. These fibres are arranged
in regular radial rows of varying diameters. The vessels
are numerous with or without tyloses, but mostly with,
but some contain a deposit; the wood and crystal paren-
chyma is sparse, occurring mostly in the vicinity of the
vessels, with a few scattered amongst the fibres; ray
parenchyma numerous, with a reddish coloured amorphous
substance in the cells, which produce the dark lines in the
section given; they are nearly all one or two cells wide and
a few in height.
General—It is not easy to place this species in its
systematic sequence, as whilst the timber places it near
E. siderophloia, the bark, leaves and fruits especially
differentiate it from that species, as these features also
do from other described species of ironbarks, EH. crebra,
E. paniculata, EH. sideroxylon, EK. Caleyi, E.drepanophylla.
It might be placed between EH. siderophloia and the pink
ironbark of this paper, H. Nanglei.
Research has shown that the timber of this tree was
exhibited at the Paris International Hxhibition of 1862,
under the name of EH. crebra, but later this name was
changed on the specimen to E. paniculata.
Now that full botanical material, together with the
timber specimens has been investigated and a field know-
ledge of the tree obtained, characters have been brought
to light showing that it differs from all described species,
and is here given specific rank under the name of H. Fer-
gusoni, in honour of His Excellency Sir Ronald Munro
Ferguson, G.C.M.G., Governor General of Australia, who has
given the weight of his great forestry knowledge and
experience to the furtherance and advancement of forestry
in Australia.
Geographical Range.—Bulladelah and Wingello.
Aa—November 7, 1917.
418 R. T. BAKER.
3d. HUCALYPTUS NANGLEI, sp. nov.
(Pink Ironbark.)
Description.—An average forest tree with a very thick,
compact, deeply furrowed bark, containing large quantities
of kino. Leaves lanceolate, the early-growth leaves might
be described as broadly lanceolate, and of a thin texture;
veins finely prominent, and not very oblique; usual leaves
mostly straight, lanceolate, venation not at all prominent;
lateral veins oblique, and more so than in the earlier leaves;
intramarginal vein rather close tothe edge. Inflorescence
paniculate or axillary at the ends of the branchlets, but in
the fruiting stage, the leaves having fallen, the capsules
appear in quite a paniculate form. Buds under an inch
long, calyx pyriform; operculum conical. Fruits inclined
to pilular, constricted at the rather short pedicel or pyri-
form, more or less contracted at the rim, where it is more
or less flat or broad; in some instances very slightly ribbed
at the base or pedicel, valves not exserted, or just a little So.
Timber.—A very fine timber with a distinct clear pink
or red colour, and having the facies rather of HE. rostrata,
K. tereticornis, or E. propinqua, than that of an ironbark.
It may be described as close grained, heavy, hard, but does
not plane to so bony a face as ironbarks, having a tendency
to splinter up almost immediately after planing. It is not
so heavy as other ironbarks, probably being the lightest in
weight of any of them.
_ Anatomical.—A close textured wood made up mostly of
compact thick walled fibres of varying diameters, gener-
ally running in a radial direction, the perforations being
numerous but not so conspicuous as in the previous species.
The vessels are fairly numerous, with bordered pits on the
walls and mostly plugged with tyloses. The most con-
spicuous features of the wood are multiseriate bands of
wood parenchyma running in the direction of the annual
SOME IRONBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 419
rings; the ray parenchyma is mostly single or double cells
wide and more cells higher than in EH. Fergusoni, with a
deposit in most of them.
General.—The timber of this tree is quite distinct from
the White or Grey Ironbark of this paper, and the two
could not correctly be placed under one species, especially
in a public collection of timbers such as obtains in the
Technological Museum. No tradesman or timber expert
would pass them as one and the same wood, and it was
these particular differences that influenced me to separate
these trees as distinct. The bark is not so deeply furrowed
nor quite so thick as in most ironbarks, but has a fair
amount of kino scattered throughout its structure; the
inner layer is also thinner for so large a tree. It is also
easy of determination in herbarium material, and the whole
plant being coarser than EH. paniculata, and the fruits are
quite characteristic, the chief feature being the rim which
_ frequently flattens in pressed specimens.
It is difficult to trace references to this tree, but it is
just possible, that, owing to its paniculate inflorescence, it
may have been confounded with EK. paniculata, and perhaps
Dr. Woolls when first recording the colour of the wood of
EH. paniculata as Red may have had material of this species,
vide remarks by J. H. Maiden under EH. paniculata.
This species differs from its type EH. paniculata, princi-
pally in the physical properties of its timbers, such as colour
and texture, also in inflorescence, shape of fruits and nature
of bark, and the same remarks apply to other ironbarks,
In botanical sequence it may follow H. Fergusoni, although
the organs differ considerably from that species, as well as
from the other ironbarks.
This species is named after Mr. James Nangle, F.R.A.S.,
Superintendent of Technical Education, who was the first
to introduce here the standard sizes for tested timber
420 R. T, BAKER.
specimens, and to whom I have, for many years been much
indebted for his assistance in carrying out the timber tests _
for the Museum.
Geographical Range.—It has a wide range, preserving its
specific features fairly well throughout its distribution.
Localities at present known to me are Morisset, Stroud,
Bulladelah, Woy Woy, Lindfield, Nowra.
4, KUCALYPTUS BEYERI, sp. nov.
Syn. EH. paniculata var. angustifolia Woolls.
(Narrow-leaved Jronbark.)
. Description.—A tree with a tall giant stem, surmounted
with rather a straggling sparsely leaved head. Bark hard,
heavy, very thick, permeated with kino. Leaves lanceolate
throughout, those of the early stage very narrow lanceolate,
thin, almost membranous, average foliage leaf wider in
proportion to the length, not thick, the base tapering and
evenly balanced, oblique or rounded. Venation in some
cases well marked. Buds small, calyx tapering into a
proportionately long and slender pedicel; operculum conical.
Fruits pyriform, shining, pedicel slender, rim thin, valves
attached at the base below the rim, not exserted, 3 lines
long and 2 lines in diameter.
Timber.—A dark chocolate coloured timber, mostly
interlocked, heavy, very hard and having a great reputation
for durability; and so is one of the finest ironbarks of the
country. It could be used for all kinds of heavy construc-
tional works, suchas wharves, beams, posts, bridges, heavy
carriage and coach work. It is a valuable timber and not
easily confounded with any other yet described.
Anatomical.—A. cross section of this timber reveals an
unusually large number of pores for so hard and heavy a
timber, and shows a great variation in diameter. ‘'T'yloses
appears to be common to most of them. The fibres are
SOME IRONBARKS OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 421
closely packed, almost compressed, running mostly in radial
lines, very thick walled, with numerous perforations, ovate
in outline and at regular intervals in the long axis of this
element; the lumen containing a dark deposit as well as
the wood parenchyma, which is spare and scattered irregu-
larly amongst the wood elements, and in a few cells of
which crystals were detected. The rays are numerous and
two cells wide and a few in height, and most of the cells
contained a brown deposit.
General.—In general features such as leaves, buds, fruits
it very closely resembles E. crebra, and from herbarium
material alone might easily be mistaken for EH. crebra, but
the timber at once readily differentiates it from that
species. The chief differences from the type of E. panicu-.
lata are the shape and size of the fruits, shape of the leaves,
timber and bark. In botanical sequence it may be placed
aiter the type EH. paniculata.
This form was probably detected first by Dr. Woolls, for
Bentham, Fl. Aus., Vol. 11, p. 212, gives varietal rank to
it under H. paniculata var. angustifolia, Woolls. Dr.Woolls
mentions it in his article under Hucalypts, published
amongst others in book form under the title of ‘‘Flora of
Australia,’ p. 243, 1867, in these words;—‘“‘In the form
angustifolia the flowers are very small.’’ He again refers
to it in Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1880, p. 503, as only to be
distinguished from H. crebra by having its outer stamens
anantherous, although practical men easily distinguish
them by their wood and bark. Maiden, in his Crit. Rev.
EKuc. Vol. If, records this variety, p. 104, and figures a
flowering specimen, fig. 21, pl. 57.
The chief features are so distinct from the type H. panicu-
lata, that it is now proposed to raise it to specific rank
under the name of H. Beyeri, after Mr. George Beyer,
who for several years was Herbarium Assistant in the
422 R. T. BAKER.
Technological Museum, and in which capacity he did much
to help on the researches in economic botany, and still con-
tinues to do so in his office of chief clerk in that institution.
Geographical Range.—This tree seems rather restricted
in its geographical range, being so far only recorded see
Kingswood and St. Mary’s, New South Wales.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE XX.
Timbers of the species in colour.
1. Hucalyptus Fergusoni.
. Hucalyptus Nangler.
. Hucalyptus Beyerr.
Hm CO Lo
. 4, Eucalyptus paniculata.
Puate XXII.
Fruits of the species.
1. Hucalyptus Pergusont.
2. Hucalypius Nanglei.
3. Hucalyptus Beyerr.
4.4.4. Hucalyptus paniculata.
Puate XXII.
1. Cross section of timber of Hucalyptus Fergusoni.
PuaTe XXIII.
2. Radial section of timber of Hucalyptus Ferguson.
PLATE XXIV.
3. Tangential section of timber of Hucalyptus Lergusont.
I am indebted to Mr. T. C. Roughley of the Technological
Museum, for the sections and microphotographs of this paper.
‘ . PEE TENF
Plate XX
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LL., 1917.
oe a ae ae ee
\ ,
SRE
ae ee
; a ae we 3 ta 5h
CATE CoN Are WON Rei eee eee eS Soe
COLOUR AND TEXTURE OF IRONBARK TIMBER.
re
5
ee
i
Lae
Phad
*
1 3
ss,
X
, SS
f
i
: \ k
\
5 !
oom ft My en i
an re bib
f “4 " clan uf oa
mye
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LI, 1917. Plate XX1
FRuUITS OF SPECIES DESCRIBED IN PAPER “Some New South Wales Ironbarks,”’
. . -
; 3 ly q ‘et F
i 3 1 "
q - 44 . { 8
v
Phas
ea
x oe
,
x
-
4 4
A
oe ‘4
2
i
ies
&
ee
f
i}
Tey
. >
~ A .
: \
c oe
° sien insti a a on)
'
Hts : 7 : i i ¥ - r
Ties n : i { + sey wi
: F : Fan 1 r
4 } 4
' r Jk '
es Ny ea ae
wigs ee ert ae
tre i ee & ; PAGE. : ‘ ea
\ it
Plate XXTI.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LI., 1917.
t
the regular,
with varying
ing across jus
Runni
ber showing
pores
4
radial, compact arrangement of the fibres;
diameters; rays with a red substance
1m
f t
the cells
f late wood.
ion o
in
—Cross secti
1. Eucalyptus Ferguson
ing o
below the centre isa portion of ar
Journal Royal Societyof N.S.W.,Vol.LI.,1917. Plate XXIII.
2. Eucalyptus Fergusoni.—Radial section showing portions of numerous
rays; two large vessels, and masses of fibres. At the top left hand corner
is a crystal parenchyma, also at two or three other places.
Plate XXIV.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LI, 1917.
3. Eucalyptus Fergusoni.—Tangential section showing smallness of rays,
and masses of fibres; towards the left centre are crystal parenchyma. * 465.
‘ TWO BORA GROUNDS OF THE KAMILAROI TRIBE. 423
DESCRIPTION OF TWO BORA GROUNDS OF THE
KAMILAROI TRIBE.
By R. H. MATHEWS, L.S.,
Assoc. étran. Soc. d’ Anthrop. de Paris.
Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, November 7, 1917. .
Introduction.
The large territory originally occupied by the various
tribelets of the Kamilaroi community may be briefly indicated
as extending from Jerry’s Plains on the Hunter River,
northerly as far as Walgett, Mungindi and Boggabilla on
the Barwon River, taking in the basins of the Namoi and
Gwydir Rivers, and also reaching a short distance beyond
the Queensland boundary. Among the Kamilaroi the Bora
was a great educational system for the initiation of the
youths to the privileges and obligations of manhood; and
at the same time to inculcate the civil and moral laws of
the community. The proceedings involved were carried
out at a suitable place in the bush, where the necessary
clearing and marking had been done.
For some previous papers by me on subjects relating to
the aborigines, see the following:—‘‘ Bora held at Gunda-
bloui,’’ Vol. xxvuit of this Journal (1894), pages 98 to 129.
‘* Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribe at Tallwood,”’ Vol. 1x, N.S.,
(1896), Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria, pages
137 to 173. “Grammar and Vocabulary of the Kamilaroi
Language,”’ in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological
Institute, London, Vol. xxx, pages 259 to 283 (1903).
The Bora Ground at Terry-hie-hie.
There is a very old Bora ground of the Kamilaroi tribes
on Terry-hie-hie Station, in the Parish of the same name,
County of Courallie, New South Wales, respecting which
424 k. H. MATHEWS.
I have gained considerable information by personal inspec-
tion. I was told by station owners and other old white
men, who have resided in that district for many years,
that the Bora ground referred to had been used on several
different occasions by the Kamilaroi tribes throughout an
extensive area of surrounding country during a long period.
This is the ground referred to by Dr. John Fraser in his
prize essay, “‘The Aborigines of New South Wales,’ pub-
lished in this Journal in 1882, Vol. xvi, p. 216. He says,
““The great ancestral Bora ground of the Kamilaroi tribe
is at Terry-hie-hie.’’ Dr. Fraser repeats this statement in
another article under the same title, published by the
Government Printer in 1892, p. 19.
In 1901 I made a special journey from Moree to Terry-
hie-hie Station for the purpose of inspecting and reporting
upon the old Bora ground above referred to. At the station
I secured the services of two old Kamilaroi blackfellows,
who had been present at the last bora held at this place, and
who were able and willing to tell me everything I wanted
to know in regard to it. As near as I could gather by
enquiries, this ground had not been used for about fifteen
or twenty years previously.
The main camp of the aborigines assembled on that
occasion was on Terry-hie-hie Creek about three-quarters
of a mile down the creek from the Terry-hie-hie Homestead.
The boora or large ring was situated about eight chains
back from the left bank of the creek mentioned, and was
hidden from the view of the women and uninitiated by the
intervening timber. This ring was still in a good state of
preservation, and the mean of several measurements gave
a diameter of 103 feet, being practically a circle. The
boundary of the ring was defined by a raised bank of earth,
the average height of which was 12 or 15 inches, but had
probably been several inches higher when it was built and
TWO BORA GROUNDS OF THE KAMILAROI TRIBE. 495
in use. An opening about 5 feet wide was left in the
western boundary of the circle, from whicha path led away
westerly up a gentle slope through a forest of pine trees
for about eleven chains. Then a turn to left bearing W.
10° N. was made in the track, for the purpose of skirting
the end of a rocky ridge, for about four chains. Another
turn to the left was then made bearing W. 20°S. for about
nine and a half chains, to the goonaba or smaller ring. At
the time of my visit, there was not a vestige of the boundary
of the goonaba. For several acres around that place the
surface consisted of loose sand, and any marks made upon
it would have been levelled down by the trampling of sheep
and cattle for so many years.
My guides pointed out from memory the approximate
position of the goonaba, which would have given a diameter
of the circle about 50 or 60 feet. In digging into a slightly
raised place on the floor of the circle, I found the remains
of one of the warrengally or inverted stumps used in con-
nexion with the ceremonies. It was the lower or butt part
of a pine sapling, about 7 feet long, with portions of the
usual spreading roots still upon it. My native guides said
that at the last bora held there, the two warrengally which
had been erected were pulled up and buried in the loose
sandy soil, which was easily scooped out for the purpose.
My guides said that the other buried stump had evidently
been exposed by the trampling of stock passing over the
place, and was then consumed by bush fires, which occas-
ionally sweep through that district indry seasons. It may
be stated here that stumps of this character are mostly
pulled out of their positions and burnt, as the ground is
generally too hard for digging with the rude tools possessed
by the aborigines. At the place in question, however, the
sand was deep and afforded an easy way of disposing of the
stumps, after some of the projecting roots had been broken
426 k. H. MATHEWS.
off. It was owing to this burying in the dry sand that the
stump found by me was preserved from rotting away in so
long a time.
Let us go back to the boora or larger ring and again
start westerly along the path. Owing to the soil on each
hand being very sandy, there were no traces of the usual
raised earthen figures, or of the yowan patterns cut in the
surface of the ground, all of which had been erased by the
constant depasturing of stock. On nearing the end of the
rocky ridge already mentioned, my guides drew my atten-
tion to a number of gum trees which had been marked
with a tomahawk, but the devices had grown completely
off the bark of some, whilst others were so indefinite, that
I did not think them worth copying. On the end of the
ridge, the loose boulders and smaller stones had been care-
fully gathered off the pathway, and piled either in separate
heaps or around the butt of adjacent trees or stumps. This
was done to make the track smooth, so that it would not
hurt the feet of the men when walking along it toand from
the goonaba.
I noticed the boles or tall stumps of several large saplings
of ironbark and gum, the tops of which had been cut off at
heights varying from five to eight feet from the ground—
some being on one side of the path and some on the other.
One of these stumps was marked ina peculiar way. It —
was ironbark, about nine inches in diameter, and five feet
high, standing on the left side of the path, about twelve
chains from the larger ring. A mortise, two feet in length
and two inches and a half wide, was cut right through the
bole—the lower end of the mortise being about a foot and
a half from the ground. The plane of this narrow cleft
through the stump was parallel to the pathway. The
natives said that one of the gum trees near the track had
originally contained an imitation of an eaglehawk’s nest,
TWO BORA GROUNDS OF THE KAMILAROI TRIBE. 427
and another had marks as if struck by lightning. The total
distance between the two circles was twenty-four and a
half chains, but the pathway was not straight, as is usually
the case, owing to the slight detour to skirt the rough
rocky ground on the end of the ridge.
The Bora Ground at Kunopia.
A Bora was held on Kunopia Rur during the latter part
of 1891, for the purpose of initiating a number of young
men of the Kamilaroi tribe belonging to the surrounding
district. An entirely new site was selected, and the
necessary preparations made near Gnoura Gnoura Creek,
about two or three miles from Kunopia Homestead, in the
Parish of Bonanga, County of Benarba. I did not know of
this gathering till it was all over, but I visited the place
during the following year for the purpose of describing the
Bora ground and establishing its position on the Govern-
ment maps. At Kunopia Station I found ‘Billy Wight-
man’? and ‘‘ Jimmy Gular,’’ two of the principal old
Kamilaroi blacks who had charge of the ceremonies in 1891,
and they were very willing to give me all the assistance
they could.
The natives who had assembled to participate in the
ceremonies had taken up their quarters near the left bank
of Gnoura Gnoura Creek, from which they obtained water
for camp use. Contingents of Kamilaroi blacks came from
Willarie, Moogan, Gundabloui, Mungindi and other places.
Each contingent brought some youths who were ready for
initiation, making a total of between twenty and twenty-
five graduates, as near as I could gather from my guides.
About a quarter of a mile in a south-westerly direction
from the main camp, the necessary clearing and other pre-
parations were carried out. The boora or larger ring was
twenty-three yards in diameter, composed by heaping the
loose earth to a height of fourteen inches, with an opening
428 R. H. MATHEWS.
four feet wide in the western circumference. Thence a
straight narrow pathway, called thunburnga, was carefully
cleared through the forest in a westerly direction for four
hundred and sixty yards to the goonaba or smaller circle,
made inthe same manner asthe other. Inside the goonaba
there had originally been the usual inverted stumps, ‘var-
rengallee, one being box and the other sandalwood, but they
had been pulled out and burnt at the conclusion of the Bora
ceremonies. The path connecting the circles was formed
by scraping the top surface smooth, and piling the loose
soil alorg each side. During the ceremonies it was swept
and water put on it at each end where it entered the circles
—the soil being rather sandy. My native guides accom-
panied me all the time to explain details.
Starting along the pathway from the boora, at a distance
of sixty yards was the imitation of an arbour or “ play-
house’”’ of the bower-bird, called weeta in the Kamilaroi
language. It was at the base of a low, small bush close to
the right hand side. In the mythologic past, the weeta
was an eminent ‘‘medicine man’”’ among the Kamilaroi and
neighbouring tribes, ‘and his bower was always represented.
At 265 yards from the boora was a huge male figure
representing Baiamai, with his arms extended outwards,
formed of loose earth heaped to the height of two feet. The
length was 15 feet,and the measurement between the out-
stretched hands 12 feet 3 inches. The image was lying on
the back, parallel to the path, with the head towards the
goonaba. On the other side of the path opposite to Baiamai,
was his wife, Gunnanbeely, formed of loose earth heaped
1 foot 6 inches. The length of the body was 10 feet and
the width between the extended hands 8 feet. She was
also lying on the back, but instead of being parallel to the
1 See my “ Ethnological Notes on the Australian Aborigines,” (Sydney,
1905), pp. 179 - 181.
TWO BORA GROUNDS OF THE KAMILAROI TRIBE. 499
path like her consort, her body was at right angles to it, with
her feet towards the path. All the usual yowan patterns
and other devices imprinted on the turf, had been obliter-
ated by rain and dust storms. My guides said they com-
menced at the weeta’s arbour and extended close to the
goonaba.
About 25 yards beyond the two human figures was the
goomee, or heap of earth, on top of which Baiamai’s fire
was kept burning. Between Baiamai’s fire and the goonaba,
on the right hand side of the path, was a box tree, in which
an imitation of an eagle-hawk’s nest was built by the
natives. Steps were cut in the bark up to the nest, to
illustrate the Kamilaroi legend of climbing up to kill the
eagles and their young ones."
At another place, on the left of the path, was a box tree
about 50 feet high, with a spiral line cut in the bark round
and round the bole from the ground up toa height of
about 30 feet, to represent a tree struck by lightning. A
pole 19 feet long was laid horizontally through a fork of
this tree, with a small bark koolamin at each end to provide
water for Baiamai’s use during the ceremonies. This pole
had a spiral line cut in its bark the same as the tree, and
was supposed to have been carried there by the lightning.
Sometimes only one end of the pole has a koolamin for
water attached to it, while the other end is split as if
shattered by the lightning when placing it there.
A box tree on the right of the path had a snake 4 feet
6 inches cut into the bark; and at another place on the left
was a box tree with an iguana 6 feet long cut upon it.
I copied fourteen of the marked trees—eight growing on
the right and six on the left of the pathway, but those
+ See my “folk-Lore of the Australian Aborigines,”’-(Sydney, 1899),
pp. 11-14.
430 R. H. MATHEWS.
above described are the most important. Trees showing an
eagle’s nest, marks of lightning, a snake, and an iguana
are usually found on all Kamilaroi bora grounds.
From enquiries made at the Police Station at Kunopia I
learnt that the total number of natives of both sexes and
all ages, who had assembled at the camp on Gnoura Gnoura
Creek was about 250.
iy
In an article entitled ‘“‘Ground and Tree Drawings,”’ with
plate, I illustrated a large number of drawings by the
aborigines in different parts of New South Wales. In that
plate, figs. 18 and 19 portray the colossal images of Baiamai
and Gunnanbeely mentioned in the present paper; and figs.
7 to 16 show the markings on ten out of the fourteen trees
referred to.*
1 American Anthropologist, Vol. 1x, (1896), pp. 38, 44 and 45.
NOTE ON THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 431
NOTE ON THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN
BASIN.
By H. FE. PITTMAN, A.R.S.M.
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, November 7, 1917.]
[See paper by Dr. A. L. pu Tort, supra p. 135.]
I desire to briefly allude to several instances in which Dr.
du Toit, in his paper on “*The Problem of the Great Aus-
tralian Artesian Basin,’ has quoted from my writings,
and in which he has drawn misleading or inaccurate deduc-
tions therefrom.
1. In his introduction to his paper he makes the follow-
ing remarks:—
‘“‘A gainst such views (Professor Gregory’s views.—E.F.P.). Mr.
Pittman, the most uncompromising protagonist of the meteoric
theory, vigorously protested, claiming that all other geologists in
Australia were at one with him in favour of a purely meteoric
derivation of the water in the Great Basin. When in Australia
_in 1914 the author found that, so far from this being the case,
quite a number of the local geologists were perfectly ready to
admit that many aspects of the problem could better be explained
by the rival hypothesis.”
The actual statement made by me in reference to this
matter was as follows :—
‘The unanimous opinion of those geologists who have had oppor-
tunities for a careful study of the Great Australian Artesian Basin
is that the water which comes from the flowing wells is of meteoric
origin, and that hydraulic pressure is the primary cause of its
rising above the surface in bores. Amongst those who hold these
views are the Government Geologists of Queensland, New South
+ This Journal, 1, p. 135 (1917).
432 E. F. PITTMAN.
Wales, South Australia and West Australia, all of whom have
made a careful study of the subject in the field.”!
2. Under the heading “‘V. The Salinity of the Waters,”’
Dr. du Toit states :—
‘Gregory has laid stress upon the presence of small amounts of
boric acid in quite a large proportion of the New South Wales
waters, and this substance is probably more widely spread, only it
has not been looked for. He has regarded this radicle as pointing
towards a magmatic origin for the water, and certainly Pittman’s
contention (that its presence is not peculiar, because borates would
be contained in salts derived from sea water by evaporation) is
ineffective, because the Jurassic beds are admittedly of freshwater
origin.”
Anyone reading the above passage would be justified in
concluding that I had overlooked the fact that the Jurassic
beds were not of marine origin, but Dr. du Toit has com-
pletely ignored the following paragraph in my paper:
“The fact that the water-bearing beds of the Great Australian
Artesian Basin are everywhere overlain by the marine beds of the
— Rolling Downs Formation suggests a very much simpler, and a
very much more probable source for the ‘“‘trace” of boric acid in
the water than the one advanced by Professor Gregory. Jn all
probability a similar trace of boric acid would be found, if care-
fully looked for, in almost any water which percolates Mesozoic
or Tertiary rocks of marine origin.”?
3. Under the heading “VII. The absorption and trans-
mission of water,’’ Dr. du Toit makes the following remark:
“Pittman having admitted Gregory’s contention that the
Blythesdale Braystones will not be porous enough to transmit
large enough volumes of water underground, it now remains to
1 E. F. Pittman, ‘The Great Australian Artesian Basin and the source
of its Water,” 1914, p. 39.
2 E. F. Pittman, ‘“‘The Constitution and Porosity of the Intake Beds of
the Great Australian Artesian Basin,” 1915, p. 10.
NOTE ON THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN ARTESIAN BASIN. 433
submit the Jurassic sandstones to a critical examination as to their
capabilities in this direction.”
Dr. du Toit is completely mistaken, as no such “‘admis-
sion’’ was ever made by me.
The term Blythesdale Braystone was first adopted by
Dr. R. L. Jack, who described it (in 1895) asa very porous
marine sandstone forming the lowest bed of the Lower
Cretaceous Series (Rolling Downs Formation). But it has
recently been made clear that the lowest bed (A) of the
Lower Cretaceous Series has none of the characteristics
of a braystone, but is a Fontainebleau limestone, while the
uppermost bed (B) of the Jurassic Series is a freshwater,
and not a marine sandstone.
LOWER CRETACEOUS. JURASSIC.
Marine Series. Fresh-water Series.
ae a NS ae “~- cay
/ EAST.
The question, therefore, arises as to which rock, A or B,
Dr. R. L. Jack intended to designate by the name ‘‘Blythes-
dale Braystone’’? I have no doubt whatever that it was
B, because in the Geological Survey Office in Brisbane, in
the year 1896, I was shown some hand specimens of the
so-called Blythesdale Braystone, and they were similar in
lithological character to the rock forming the bed B. But,
Brp—November 7, 1917.
‘
: ss '
434 E. F. PITTMAN.
as stated above, this rock isa freshwater and not a marine
sandstone, and it belongs to the Jurassic and not to the
Lower Cretaceous Series.
In my earlier papers on artesian water I accepted as
correct Dr. Jack’s description of the character and position
of the Blythesdale Braystone, and stated that it was not
known to outcrop in the State of New South Wales. Subse-
quently, however, I had an opportunity of examining the
section between Blyth Oreek and Roma, and it became
evident that the name had been adopted under misappre-
hension, both in regard to the origin and the geological
horizon of the rock, and in 1914 I published a statement to
that effect, and added that, so far as it referred to the
lowest bed of the Lower Cretaceous Series, the term
‘*Blythesdale Braystone’’ wasSa misnomer. Againin 1915
I suggested’ that the name should be abandoned, as its
continued use could serve no good purpose, but could only
lead to confusion.
That it has led to confusion in Dr. du Toit’s case is very
evident in his paper.
In my latest papers it was stated that the lowest bed of
the Lower Cretaceous Series is not particularly porous,
but that bed was certainly not referred to as the “‘Blythes-
dale Braystones.’’
/
1 E. F. Pittman, “The Great Australian Artesian Basin and the source
of its water,” 1914, p. 13.
2 K. F. Pittman, “‘The composition and porosity of the intake beds of
the Great Australian Artesian Basin,” p. 11.
,
OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS IN SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 435
ON THE OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS IN SOME
AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS.
By R. T. BAKER, F.L.S.
[With Plates XXV-XXXIII.]
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 5, 1917.)
WHEN examining micro-sections of our timbers it was
noticed that crystals occurred rather frequently amongst
the wood elements. In certain species they were either
isolated or varied in number from a few to as many as over
forty in an individual parenchyma, and even masses of
deposits in particular cases.
Searching through publications at my disposal, no mention
could be found of this feature amongst Australian woods,
either in letter press or illustrations, and sol am moved to
‘record the specific instances of such occurrences which
have come under my notice.
Amongst works on timbers, S.J. Record, in his “‘'Hconomic
Woods of U.S.A.,”’ p. 20, states, that crystals occur in all
species of Quercus, though they are more commonly
abundant in live Oaks (evergreen) than in deciduous species.
In Juglans (Walnut), Hicoria, and Diospyros, crystals are
often quite conspicuous. Healso gives micro-photographs
of timber Hicoria pecan and Diospyros virginiana showing
crystals in situ, but in the latter instance not easy to detect,
and these were determined as calcium-oxalate. He also
mentions that these crystals are only slightly soluble in
the strongest acids.
Henry Kraemer, in his ‘“Applied and Economic Botany”’
1914, p. 187, figures crystals (diagrammatic) identical in
form to those found by me in Australian woods, but they
are from the bark of Glycyrrhiza.
436 R. T. BAKER.
Mr. H. G. Smith has recorded! calcium oxalate from the
bark of various Hucalypts, (10 species), obtained by break- |
ing the bark down, boiling and then recovering the crystals.
A very Jarge number of instances of the occurrence of
calcium oxalate crystals in the vegetable kingdom are
given by Solereder in his “Systematic Anatomy of Dico-
’ tyledons,”’ but the majority of these instances are in the
leaves, bark and root.
In the case of the leaves he almost invariably states that
this substance in its various crystalline forms is excreted,
meaning of course in the process of metabolism. But in
my opinion the word “‘deposited’’ would more correctly
describe the action, in any case at least in the secondary
wood if not the leaves. Again, this fixation of lime by the
oxalic acid seems to prove in the opinion of the author that
the latter is not deleterious to the plant any more than
manganese, but is specially formed by the tree for this.
particular function, in order to free the sulphur from the |
calcium sulphate for the formation of sulphuric acid so
essential in the construction of albuminous substances.
Various authors record that oxalate of lime is found in
several forms, viz.:—as ordinary solitary crystals, clustered
crystals, styloid-like crystals, raphides, small circular
crystals, and crystal sand.
From the result of this investigation it would appear,
that each of the above is restricted to a particular organ
of the plant, such as leaves, bark, root and timber, but in
the case of the latter only ordinary solitary crystals were
found, which seems to prove that this is the usual form for
wood structure. |
In the timbers examined to illustrate this paper, the
crystals were so numerous that sufficient definition was
1 This Society, 1905, Vol. xxx1x, pp. 23 to 82. .
OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS IN SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 437
obtained which made it possible to determine the crystal-
line system without any breaking down of the wood or any
preparation whatever, viz. plates or prisms of the mono-
clinic forms.
They occur with few exceptions in a specialised form of
ehambered wood parenchyma, with partitions dividing it
into cells. of about equal size containing as a rule an
individual crystal, but, in one case of ray parenchyma, as
many as four were found in a cell, viz :—Mallotus philip-
pinensis, Natural Order HKuphorbiacee.
The micro-sections of timber were prepared by long
immersion in strong hydrofluoric acid, which, however,
appears to have had no effect upon these crystals of calcium
oxalate, and this insolubility is no doubt further aided by
the protective property of the cell walls.
In the case of Strychnos arborea, N.O. Loganiacez, how-
ever, they were found in long pockets in great abundance,
giving the wood the appearance of having been marked with
chalk streaks on a longitudinal section, or as distinct white
spots on across section, as shown in Plates XXX, XXXI.
The hydrofluoric acid, however, appears to have had some
- effect on this material, or at least the greater part was lost
in the slide preparation. It is possible, however, that the
diameter of these sacs or pockets being so large the sub-
stance fellaway. Plate XXX shows this substance in situ
with numerous crystals amongst the matrix. [am indebted
to Mr. J. H. Maiden for this particular specimen of timber
upon which the research was made.
It is common amongst artisans to speak of a particular
wood as “‘having a grit,’’ two Australian woods being
notorious for this special physical property, viz :—Huca-
lyptus pilularis, ** Blackbutt,’ and Tristania conferta,
** Brush Box.’’ An examination of these showed them to
be more or less permeated in the vessels with silica rather
than with this substance.
438 R. T. BAKER.
Solereder mentions that in some instances a certain form
of crystal is characteristic of an entire Natural Order, yet
in other cases it serves to distinguish only genera and
species, but so far as my investigations have gone, this
does not seem to obtain in Australian woods, for a uniformity
appears to hold throughout, the variation being only in
size and number.
In order to give some idea of the character of the wood
in which these crystals occur, a short anatomical descrip-
tion of the texture of each species is given.
Twenty-two (22) orders were examined, and of these,
crystals were found to occur in the secondary wood of (15)
VIZ 3— | oe
Pittosporese. Sterculiacesee. Rutacez. Olacinez.
Meliacezee. Rhamneze. Sapindaceze. Anarcardiacez.
Leguminose. Saxifragese. Myrtacez. Hhbenacez.
Loganiacesze. Huphorbiacese. Casuarinee.
List of Species in which Crystals are found :—
_ 1. PITTOSPORUM UNDULATUM, Vent. N.O. Pittosporez.
The pores have a comparatively small diameter, and the
wood parenchyma is very limited. The rays are of the
heterogeneous type and have fairly thick walls; the un-
usually large. wall markings of the vessels are a distinct
feature of this species. The fibres are numerous, with few
exceedingly minute wall perforations. A crystalline deposit
of monoclinic crystals, plates or short prisms,—calcium
oxalate, was seen in some of the cells of the ray parenchyma
which have very delicate walls, otherwise the wood
elements were free of any deposit. 3
2. TARRIETIA ARGYRODENDRON, Benth. N.O.Sterculiacee.
The two main characteristics of the anatomy of this
timber are the disposition of the wood parenchyma and the
presence of a brown deposit in its cells as well as that of
Plate XXV.
x 45,
Pittosporum undulatum.—Radial section showing crystals in ray cells
on the extreme left.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LL., 1917.
Tarrietia argyrodendron.—Tangential section showing crystals at the
top and extreme right. <45.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LI., 1917. Plate XXV1.
Flindersia australis.— Radial section shewing vertical view of crystals
in middle of top ray, and other places. 45.
Flindersia australis.—Radial pected showing a conjugate crystal
parenchyma with a calcium oxalate crystal in each cell; to the left.
wood parenchyma, the remainder fibres. *100.
OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS IN SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBEBS. 439
therays. Itis not unlike some of the Grevilleas and Orites
excelsa in having fibres and parenchyma arranged in alter-
nating concentric bands. The fibres are thick-walled
leaving very little space for the lumen, and perforations.
appear to be almost entirely absent. The vessels are
rather large and mostly clear of tyloses, and around them
wood parenchyma occurs as well as in the position stated
above. The predominating rays belong to the multiseriate
class, and in a radial section are seen to be heterogeneous,
the outer row of cells containing monoclinic crystals, plates,
or short prisms of calcium oxalate.
3. BOSISTOA EUODIFORMIS, F.v.M. N.O. Rutacee.
A pale coloured, hard, close grained timber, which in a
cross section shows the fibres arranged in bands alternating
with wood parenchyma,—amongst which is found a special
form containing simple monoclinic crystals in the individual
cells. They are quite absent from the ray parenchyma.
4, VILLARESIA (CHARIESSA) MOOREI, Ruiz. N.O. Olacineze.
The features of this wood are quite specific in a trans-
verse section, for the fibres appear to stand alone, being
separated by compressed wood parenchyma, or a continua-
tion of the walls of the latter or surrounded by them. The
fibre walls are very thick, leaving a very small lumen, the
wall perforations being very numerous and run in the long
axis. The vessels are numerous and rather ‘free from
tyloses, but show some very fine examples of scalariform
apertures. The rays are mostly free from the ordinary
deposit, but a fair number of crystals were detected; the
multiseriate kind of ray predominates, which is occasionally
bounded by tracheid cells.
do. HLINDERSIA AUSTRALIS, R.Br. N.O. Meliacez.
An exceedingly close-textured wood, the very numerous
fibres having thick walls, leaving only a small space for the
440 kK. T. BAKER, °
lumen, the wall apertures being very few and very small,
ovate and longitudinal. The pores are not numerous, the
wood parenchyma running in lines between the solid mass
of fibres, and also around them. A few crystal wood
parenchyma were present. The vessels have very numer-
ous wall-pits, the partition walls of the cells belong to the
scalariform variety; some contain a brown deposit. The
rays are fairly numerous, varying from uniseriate to three
and four cells wide and several cells high.
6. HMMENOSPERMUM ALPHITONIOIDES, F.v.M.
N.O. Rhamnee.
This is not so uniformly structured as its congener
Alphitonia excelsa. The fibres are arranged in regular
radial rows, but of varying diameters, and have only a
medium thickness of wall, giving a comparatively large
lumen, the wall perforations being few. The vessels are
fairly numerous, but often two or three conjugate, the
walls being strong and full of perforations, but free from
tyloses. The wood parenchyma is exceptionally sparse,
whilst the rays are numerous and from one to several cells
wide and also in height; a few crystals were seen in the
latter.
7. RATONIA TENAX, Benth. N.O. Sapindacee.
This wood is of a uniform texture, the fibres being of
equal diameter, with walls of medium thickness, thus leav-
ing a fair sized lumen; the numerous wall perforations
running with the long axis of the fibres. The vessels are
rather small, but fairly numerous and scattered irregularly
throughout the other wood elements, and with an absence
of tyloses. The wood parenchyma is more limited than
that of most timber examined, and the few seen had their
cells filled with crystals. The ray parenchyma had in
almost every instance a deposit in the narrow horizontal
cells; vertical cells border these top and bottom. They
Plate XXV II.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol L1., 71917.
Acacia pendula.—Tangential section showing numerous wood paren-
chyma with crystals. x45.
_ OLLPOLD I ye rm,
cpa d Dee,
até er saath
—<G LEE ms
Saye
rer? PRES
ee
Hotes POR ge ee ORE
Acacia pendula.—Tangential section, with two highly magnified wood
parenchyma, with calcium oxalate crystals. <200.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol
Plate XXVIII.
REPL OL fe
3 4
5 o
EB es
™ for)
a S
> (o)
® E
mM
go
&0 a
S| E
OF} (o)
E a
} Sh
aa] Te)
i ay
: —
- mM
an
2 qe
16 SB
= a5
—
a” YD ©
Ke} 6 O45
Bw a8
= ea
pas Bt
~ A x
| @ i
Sess 3
a S8
S op Ss
eg Ores
sas Ss
= 4 Se)
218 "S on
as}
v=? tS Sa
3 8 ‘a
aS RO)
= 2 8
3 2s
Sg se
Sb £8
So 8 8
oa ‘S$
SS 4 Se
= ba
& a
ad 5)
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LI,1917. Plate XXTX.
Ratonia tenav.—Radial section; a crystal parenchyma is seen just
below the centre and low left from that. 49.
wae itaiae
ti Bhs
2.4344 ova
Pitinetrosdeos
: Di ok
Ehodosphera rhodanthema.—Radial section showing rays with
numerous crystals in the cells. *45.
‘ , c iss no
Cah ‘(Se Ehs q a? he ad AR cy
Oa 8 edo) ee “Syiag
in ae hae Wee ey ‘ ‘ P
ae © . o. wtaty
‘<
'
¥
,
ae
’
‘
SS
~~
\
~~
2276 | weg
OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS IN SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 44]
were, almost without exception, of the uniseriate form and
a few cells high.
8. RHODOSPHARA RHODANTHEMA, F.v.M.
N.O. Anacardiacee. ,
A very regularly constructed timber, the fibres running
in radial rows parallel tothe rays, having walls of medium
thickness with a lumen a third the diameter of this wood
element, the perforations were not distinctly discernible.
The only instance seen of septate fibres of the species
microsectioned. Parenchyma of the wood rare, but the
rays numerous, and these are especially interesting as
nearly all the cells contain the monoclinic crystals of cal-
cium oxalate, and in no other instance were they found to
be so numerous in the rays, except perhaps in Mallotus.
philippinensis. The vessels have rather thin walls—the
chief feature of these organs is the polygonal figures
surrounding the pits.
9. ACACIA PENDULA, A.Cunn. N.O. Leguminose.
A very dark almost black coloured timber, a feature due
very largely to the dark deposit in almost all the wood
elements. The vessels are large with thick walls anda
dark coloured deposit apparently of a similar nature to that
found in the fibres and certain wood parenchyma and the
rays. The wood parenchyma is very numerous and is either
clustered around the pores or running in lines amongst the
early and late growth, and in the majority of cases the cells
are filled with calcium oxalate crystals, in fact they are
more numerous in the wood parenchyma of this timber than
any other examined. In the rays the cells are filled witha
substance similar to that of the vessels.
10. WHINMANNIA LACHNOCARPA, F.v.M. N.O. Saxifragea.
The most characteristic sections in this connection are
the tangential and radial, the crystals being seen clearly in
449 R. T. BAKER
both, especially the former, as shown in the illustration.
The wood parenchyma, which is exceedingly narrow, except.
where the crystals occur, runs in single rows between the
rays separating two, three or more rows of thick-walled
fibres rather devoid of wall perforations and a very limited
lumen. The rays are multiseriate mostly, and filled with
a secretion similar to the narrow wood parenchyma cells.
The vessels are narrow with well-marked wall perforations;
no tyloses were detected.
11. KUCALYPTUS ALBENS, Mig. N.O. Myrtacee.
In a transverse section the pores seem to be most numer-
ous, disposed in rings alternating with solid rings of fibres,
the rays being very fine and numerous, wood parenchyma
is Sparse, but mostly the cells contain crystals; the vessels.
are nearly all plugged with tyloses, and the fibres forming
the bulk of the timber are very compact witha very narrow
lumen, and pits running longitudinally, the borders showing
better in the tangential wall. It is this predominence of
fibres that, no doubt, adds so considerably to the weight of
the timber.
12. EucaLyptus DawsonlI, R.T.B. N.O. Myrtacez.
An extremely hard, close, compact timber, the fibres pre-
dominating over all other wood elements, wood parenchyma.
is limited, and only a few crystals were seen in these cells.
13. HUCALYPTUS PILULARIS,Sm. N.O. Myrtacez.
This timber has the reputation amongst workmen of
having a grit. This is due however not to the presence of
calcium oxalate but silica, from a test made by Mr. H. G.
Smith, F.c.s.
14. EKUCALYPTUS POLYANTHEMA, Schau. N.O. Myrtacez.
A very compact wood, the fibres arranged in radial rows,
the lumen, like most red timbers, contains a deposit of that.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LT., 1917. Plate XXX.
Diospyros pentamera.—Radial section showing crystals in some of
the ray cells. 45.
3
Ae
att
Sy
wh
oe
Strychnos arborea.—Cross section showing crystals in the large wood
parenchyma pockets. *40.
® it
eo
‘ ) a.
i hgh oa ee wee Ai 1 K
ALR Se ey bor, BS os & ' t ‘
’ \ f
i
BS
7 a
ma!
5 oS
M
Se
a i. to. a aol
{
{
=.
.
yi
ES i” a yi
1 i 3
i
SS
Sis
N
oe
Journal Royal Scciety of N.S.W.,Vol. L1.,1917. Plate XXX.
Strychnos arborea.—Cross section, natural size. The white markings
are not pores but calcium oxalate cavities.
Strychnos arborea.—Tangential section showing wood parenchyma
(white streaks) filled with calcium oxalate.
* .
é A C
a
.
we
,
i
a
ue at
if
i oe
ei
ri eort L
yi
* :
te
'
;
a
ne
tn
=
v3
ah
OCCURRENCE OF CRYSTALS IN SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 443:
colour. The crystals are not very numerous, but occur in
both wood and ray parenchyma, especially the former, the
latter also contains a red deposit.
15. EUCALYPTUS «MELLIODORA, A.Cunn. N.O. Myrtacee.
The fibres may be classed as thick-walled, of a rather
uniform dimension, with a lumen about one-third of the
whole diameter. The perforations are numerous, opening
by longitudinal slits which are often bordered. The pores
are very numerous. The vessels have a rather delicate
system of tyloses, and like the wood parenchyma (which is
rather sparsely found), have no secretionary substance as
obtains in so many Kucalypts. The rays are small, numer-
ous, uniseriate, some of the cells have a yellowish secretion.
The radial wall perforations of the cells are unusually large,
round, and not of uniform diameter. The wood parenchyma.
is fairly well scattered amongst the wood elements, and in
several instances crystals were found.
16. EUCALYPTUS SPP. IRONBARKS.
Most of the species forming the Ironbark group of
Hucalypts contain calcium oxalate, more or less in the wood
parenchyma, being most numerous in EH. Fergusoni and
least in E. paniculata.
17. DIOSPYROS PENTAMERA, F.v.M. N.O. Ebenacez.
A characteristic timber, and one not easily confounded
with others, the fibres have fairly thick walls and small
Jumen, whilst the vessels also have unusually thick walls,
both the wood and ray parenchyma are very interesting, as
they contain in the cells three kinds of contents, crystals,
a brown substance, and a very small spherical green body
in malachite green.
18. STRYCHNOS ARBOREA, A.W. Hill. N.O. Loganiacez.
A close, hard grained timber, with irregularly packed
fibres, numerous broad raysand small pores. Wood paren-
444 R. T. BAKER. :
chyma is clustered around a very large one, in which is found
a great deposit of apparently fine substance, described in
the former part of this paper. See Plate XXX.
19. BRIDELIA EXALTATA, F.v.M. N.O. Euphorbiacez.
A fairly compact timber, the fibres of rather small
diameter, and pores also small. Crystals are fairly numer-
ous in the wood parenchyma.
i
20. MALLOTUS PHILIPPINENSIS, H'.v.M. N.O. Huphorbiacee.
A timber with quite an unusual structure, the wood
parenchyma being arranged in rows parallel to the rays and
fibres, the latter having an exceedingly small diameter.
The rays are of the multiseriate type, many of the larger
cells containing large crystals, in some cases smaller ones
were seen. It is the only instance in which a cell was
found to contain more than one crystal.
21. CASUARINA TORULOSA, Ait. N.O. Casuarinez.
A close, compact wood, the fibres nearly always contain-
ing a brown deposit, as well as the vessels, which are thick
walled. The large multiseriate rays are a distinguishing
feature of this and all the Casuarinas, except C. Cambagei.
The wood parenchyma is fairly numerous and extends in
parallel narrow lines to the early and late growth, and
appears to be of two kinds, one without and one witha
deposit—amorphous and crystalline.
22. CASUARINA GLAUCA, Sieb. N.O. Casuarineze.
Orystals are fairly numerous in the wood parenchyma
and of rather large size, and are seen in the transverse,
radial and tangential sections, a very unusual circumstance.
Plates,—Mlicro-sections.
Plate XXV. Pittosporum undulatum. Tarrietia argyrodendron.
» XAXVI. Flindersia australis.
» XAXVIT. Acacia pendula.
XXVIII. Weinmannia lachnocarpa.
5 XXIX. Ratonia tenax. Rhodosphaera rhodanthema.
‘,, NMXX. Diospyros pentamera. Strychnos arborea.
3 X%XXI. Strychnos arborea.
» XXXII. Mallotus philippinensis.
» AXXITT. Mallotus philippinensis.
Plate XXXTT.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. L1., 1917.
the ray
Mallotus philippinensis.—Cross section showing crystals in
cells.
x45,
howing heterogeneous ray
lon s
Radial sect
parenchyma with two or more crystals
inensis.—
Mallotus philipp
x 45,
dual cell.
ivi
d
In an 1n
\
La
a
. > *
;
3 , i
Plate XX XIII.
Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. L1., 1917.
x 45.
Mallotus philippinensis—Showing end view of rays with crystals.
‘
Bee
mel, .
“ be {ae |
F 0 eso “eF _ wry HUA @ Dy Pe ‘ b wats. *) my. 4
; Se ee Be Pat) GS SRS ee ee Dom Rie, vs
. 7 + - J
~ .
=
,
Aa ne
‘
{
J
;
3
\
ao eee
{
.
ait i
s
ae
ng
=
Ve ite
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 445
NOTES ON HUCALYPTUS (WITH DESCRIPTION
OF A NEW SPECIHS), No. V.
By J. H. MAIDEN, I.S.0., F.R.S., F.L.S.
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, December 5, 1917. |
The arrangement of the species in the first portion of the
paper is alphabetical.
1. EH. auBa Reinw. (including E. platyphylla F.v.M.) See
Crit. Rev.! iii, 91, 95, 97.
‘‘Lennard River, near Lukin’s old station buildings ;
Isdell, Charnley, Calder and Ord Rivers; Dillen’s Springs.
Tree of 40—50 feet, trunk to 25 feet, diam. 14 feet, bark
greyish to reddish, thin, decorticating in strips, leaving
the trunk and limbs smooth and cream-coloured; timber
pale, rather soft and very brittle; leaves often five inches
long by four inches broad; operculum double; filaments
white—A “Cabbage Gum”’ of the Lennard River—In moist
sandy loam overlying sandstone and quartzite.’’ (W. V.
Fitzgerald, MSS.). This supplements what has been hitherto.
recorded in regard tothe North West Australian tree.
2. H. cHSIA Benth. See Crit. Rev. iii, 31.
Through the kindness of Mr. W. ©. Grasby, I have
received specimens of this beautiful and little known
Kucalypt from Mr. C. A. Fauntleroy, Uberin Hill, “Sin a
gully of the granite hill,” Dowerin, W.A. (Mr. A. E. Arney
informed Mr. Grasby that the species also occurs about
seventy miles east of Katanning, but no specimens were
produced).
’ My “Critical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus.”
~'
7 ( a
446 J. H. MAIDEN.
Mr. Fauntleroy says “* The bark has a long grained fibre
and runs like Jarrah, and is not like Red Gum (EH. calo-
phylla) or Wandoo (E. redunca), which have a short brittle
grain. On the other hand the bark is composed of a number
of thin layers or flakes, hardly as thick as a threepenny
piece while green, and when dry are thinner still. The
lower wood is shedding a layer now, which splits into
narrow strips along the stem and breaks across at short
intervals, some pieces curling vertically, others horizont-
ally, but all curling. The*new bark on the lower section
is of a rich yeJlow-brown to orange-brown colour. The
mid section, which will not shed a layer this year, is
covered with a blue-grey bloom which rubs off on the hand
and exposes bark of a reddish colour. The bark of the
young wood and the top of the trees is red without the
bloom powder. Grows Mallee style, about 12 feet high.”
Specimens from Mr. Fauntleroy show it to have a smooth,
tough bark, which strips in long lengths. The smooth bark
has thin reddish-brown flakes, which fall off in succession.
Mr. Fauntleroy’s specimens have enabled me to draw up
the following additions to the description, and Miss Flockton
‘to usefully supplement the drawing of the species in Plate
94 (Crit. Rev.).
The foliage sub-glaucous, the inflorescence and fruits
very glaucous. Mature leaves,—veins very conspicuous.
Buds elongated pear-shaped, 2—3 cm. long, the tapering
calyx-tube about 1°5 cm., with the bluntly conoid operculum
about 1 cm. long. Four and five in an umbel.
Filaments pink, contrasting beautifully with the bright
yellow anthers. (The precise colour is Vieux Rose. See
Dauthenay’s “Répertoire des Couleurs,” vol. 1, pl. 144, fig.4).
Pedicels stout, terete, up to 4cm. long, fruits pendulous,
peduncles terete, curved; fruits truncate-ovate in shape,
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 447
3 cm. long by 2°5 cm. broad, striate, tapering somewhat
abruptly into the pedicel.
The affinity in anthers is with &. pyriformis, leptopoda,
and Oldfieldii (see Crit. Rev. vol. 2); the resemblance in
the fruits to those of E. leucoxylon ¥.v.M. var. macrocarpa
J. KE. Brown, (Crit. Rev. vol. ii, pl. 56, fig. 12) is considerable.
3. EH. CAMPASPE S. le Moore. : See Crit. Rev. ii, 203.
Iam indebted to Mr. R. 8S. Richardson, late Acting
Inspector-General of Forests of Western Australia for the
following account by District Ranger Ferguson of a little-
known species. It is sometimes known as ‘‘Salmon Gum,”’
but it must not be confused with EH. salmonophloia F.v.M.
““This tree is growing on a diorite hill near Coolgardie.
It is a young tree (20 years more orless). It has no trunk,
but the limbs appear to grow and spread from the ground
more like a very large Mallee. The bark is much the same
as Gimlet Gum (EH. salubris) but the wood is not twisted.
The wood is like the Salmon Gum (E. salmonophloia) in
colour, and the leaves are more like the Salmon Gum in
colour and growth. It is a late flowering tree and carries
large quantities of seed vessels. This tree stands about
40 feet and its branches spread and droop like a willow.
The thickest part of the tree is about eight inches in
diameter, and the limbs spread from the ground.”’
I still have been unable to obtain the juvenile foliage and
adventitious shoots (“‘suckers’’), but the seedlings are
petiolate and narrow-lanceolate.
4, H. CLELANDI Maiden. See Crit. Rev. ii, 189.
This Western Australian species has only previously been
recorded from Goongarrie, and also from 70 miles north of
Kurrawang, localities on the Kastern Goldfields close to
each other. Dr. F. Stoward has now sent it (No. 86) from
Bulla Bulling, about 20 miles west of Coolgardie, a locality
448 J. H. MAIDEN.
about 100 miles to the south-west from where it was
previously known.
5. E. conFLUENS (W.V.F.) Maiden, this Journal xix, 317.
The following is supplementary information from Mr.
Fitzgerald’s MSS.
‘Summits of Mounts Behn, Broome and House, O 92,
near the Synnott Range. Height about 30 feet, trunk to
15 feet, diameter to 1 foot. Bark persistent, white and
smooth, timber brownish-red to red, very hard and extremely
tough. Affinity (distant) to E. rudis Wndl.”’
6. EK. CONSIDENIANA Maiden. See Crit. Rev. i, 312.
Mr. W. H. Harvey, Yarram Yarram, Victoria. who calls
this tree ‘‘Prickly Messmate,’’ obligingly gives*me the
following information concerning its occurrence in that
State.
“*Tt is very scarce, is only found in small belts, chiefly in
the parishes of Willung and Carrajung. The tree thrives
best and creates a fine barrel or bole in volcanic soils or
chocolate loams when it attains a height of about 50 feet
in barrel and up to 3 feet in diameter. Called ‘‘ Prickly
Messmate’’ on account of the surface of the sapwood being
covered as arule with spikes or prickles. Hasa yellowish-
brown fibrous bark and the surface is smoother (less prickly
to the touch) than either Stringybark or Messmate. Wood
buff colour, fairly free from gum-veins and very durable.
Mr. J. Wills, Chief Clerk of Works, Alberton Shire, speaks
very highly of this timber and says that it gives as good
results as any timber in the district.” 3
7. EK. ERYTHRONEMA Turez. See Crit. Rev. iii, 24.
This has hitherto only been recorded with crimson (scar-
let in my work, probably in error) filaments, and it is one
of the showiest of the Western Australian species. Mr.
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 449
O. A. Fauntleroy of Dowerin in that State kindly sends,
through Mr. W. O. Grasby of the ‘‘Western Mail,’’ Perth,
Specimens with cream coloured filaments. He says ‘‘This
plant has varicoloured flowers, from red and pink to white.
It grows on dry country up to 12 feet in height. Thereare
two or three stems per plant.’’ This is an addition to the
list of species with filaments of more than one colour.
Mr. W. V. Fitzgerald says—‘‘A tree of 25 feet with a
very crooked trunk of 10 feet; diameter 1 foot; bark greyish
to white, smooth; timber reddish, rather brittle; filaments
yellow or scarlet.’”’ (MSS.) Perhaps by “‘yellow’’ cream-
coloured is meant; by “‘scarlet’’ probably crimson is meant.
8. E. FoRRESTIANA Diels. Compare Crit. Rev. iii, 35 and
Plate 95.
I have some specimens collected at Esperance in 1903
by Mr. Babington. The fruits are smaller and the wings
are thinner and proportionately wider than have been
described or figured. In Mr. Babington’s fruits the width
(excluding the wings) isabout 1cm., and the width (includ-
ing the wings) about 1°5 cm., leaving the width of each
wing at 2-3 mm.
9. HK. GIGANTEA Hook. f.
“‘T have repeatedly seen this species flowering profusely
when about 6 feet high, sometimes when not more than 3
feet, and on several occasions when it had reached a height
growth of between 2 and 3 feet. As this species rarely
suckers, it appeared to me that the early and profuse seed-
ing powers were a compensating characteristic of the
species.’’ (W.A.W.de Beuzeville, Forest Assessor, Forestry
Commission, Sydney).
In another letter Mr. de Beuzeville says:—‘‘ Regarding
your inquiry as to the state of the foliage of this species
when in the early flowering stage of two or three feet, I
Cc—December 5, 1917.
450 J. H. MAIDEN.
may say that you are quite right in your impression that
it flowers in a juvenile leaf stage. I have often seen the
flowers on these flowering saplings fully four inches broad
and about five inches long.’’ This therefore is to be added
to the list of tree-species which also flower in a shrubby
state, and also to the list of those that flower in a juvenile-
leaved stage.
10. E. HousEana (W.V.F.) Maiden. This Journal xix, 318.
The following is supplementary information from Mr.
Fitzgerald’s MSS. ‘‘Height 40-70 feet, trunk to 30 feet,
diameter 15-24 feet, bark persistent, white to greyish-
white, smooths; timber reddish, not very hard or tough...
Fruit not seen...Affinity with H. foecwnda Schauer.”’
From additional material collected by Mr. Fitzgerald,
the following additions to the description have been drawn
up:— 7
Juvenile leaves.—Slightly glaucous, equally. green on
both sides, slightly stem-clasping around a nearly terete
branchlet, oval to ovoid or broadly-lanceolate, tapering
into a blunt or rounded apex, up to 18 cm. (say 7 in.) long
by 8 cm. (say 34 in.) broad, secondary veins roughly parallel,
at an angle of about 60° with the midrib and with abundance
of fine anastomosing veins, the intramarginal vein well
removed from the edge.
Fruits.—Conoid to hemispherical, small, (rather more
than 5 mm. in diameter), nearly sessile, the short broad
pedicel continued into the calyx-tube, forming two or more
angles. Peduncle of 5 to 7 mm., also flattish and angular.
The fruit with a narrow rim, the tips of the capsule slightly
exsert and not adnate to the edge.
11. HK. LUEHMANNIANA F.v.M. See Crit. Rev. i, 290. ©
The following information from Mr. Andrew Murphy
extends the range of this species to the north. ‘There is
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 451
about an acre of it (in a long strip), at the Kariong Trig.
Station (807 feet), about four miles west of Woy Woy, and
north of the Hawkesbury River about eight miles. The
shrubs are about twelve feet high, with stems of two to
three inches in diameter.
12. EH. MACROCARPA Hook. See Crit. Rev. ii, 239.
The flowers of this rare species are amongst the very
largest and most beautiful of the genus. The species is
rarely seen in the bush (because of its inaccessibility from
the larger centres of population), and much more rarely in
cultivation, and inasmuch as there is variation in the colour
of the filaments which has not been satisfactorily defined,
the object of this note is to do something in this direction.
In Crit. Rev. ii, 241, I queried Mr. O. H. Sargents’s note
that the flowers were scarlet. This brought the following
comments from that valued correspondent :-—
‘‘T was in Perth recently, and. saw some cultivated
specimens of H. macrocarpa just coming into bloom. The
flowers were pale coloured. I took very careful note of
the tint and would describe it as pale carmine red with a
tendency to blue. I think, perhaps, crimson is the best
general description of the flower’s colour, but I cannot at all
agree to “‘rich’’ crimson, bright crimson I should say at the
utmost. Never have I seen a blossom of the species with
anything like the depth of colour that is found in the flowers
of E. ficifolia.”” (5/9/13).
‘Driving home to York from Quellington a week ago I
found one flower fully open on a shrub near that place. I
brought it home and carefully compared its colour with the
sample washes in Windsor and Newton’s *‘ Modern Water
Color Pigments,’’ (No. 43). Viewed from the side, the
wash marked “‘carmine’”’ is a perfect match for the colour
ofthe stamens. From above, looking through the anthers,
which are cream coloured, the mass of stamens perfectly
452 J. H. MAIDEN.
matches the wash marked ‘“‘scarlet madder”’ (alizarin). EI
then placed the branch bearing the flower beside a scarlet
geranium bush in full bloom, and going off ten yards or so
carefully noted the colour impression given by the flowers
of both plants. The Eucalyptus blossom was not sensibly
different from those of the geranium. Iasked my sisters
their opinion of the colour; they were a little doubtful, but
declared emphatically “it is not crimson.’’ They-agreed
with my conclusions as to matching the washes. In brief,
I have completely confirmed my original note that the
flowers are properly described as scarlet.’’ (29/3/13.)
On 17/9/13, I received from Mr. A.G. Hamilton a coloured
drawing of the flowers he had made when he was in Wes-
tern Australia. The colour is, according to Dauthenay,
‘‘Rép. de Couleurs,”’ ‘claret,’ see plate 167, figs. 1-4. (It
is only fair tosay that it is often difficult to reproduce very
bright colours in water colour.) |
That of the flowers blooming in the Sydney Botanic
Gardens, May, 1916, is ‘‘deep rose pink”’ of the same work,
see plate 120, fig.3. It is one of the species with ordinarily
coloured filaments, which may also have ‘‘white’’ flowers.
See Hooker’s note, foot of page 239.
Now as to the arrangement of the filaments in the mass.
Mr. Sargent writes me:—
‘‘The figure 1a of Plate 77 strikes me as giving a scarcely
correct impression of the flower. The blossom has always
struck me as being remarkably square-cut so to speak.
Stamens quite straight and all of precisely the same length,’’
and then comes a footnote by himself :—‘‘I mean by this
that the mass of stamens is straight-sided and flat-topped.
‘All of precisely the same length’ is not correct.”’
Mr. Sargent’s note is well borne out by Mr. Hamilton’s
drawing. It may not be clearly understood that» my
‘‘Critical Revision ’’ drawings are supplementary to those
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 453
of the “‘ Hucalyptographia.’’ If Mueller’s plate of a species
includes all the points, I have nothing to add to it, but Mr.
W. D. Campbell’s ‘“‘rich crimson’’ (p. 239) specimen (1a,
plate 77) seemed to possess a character which usefully
supplemented Mueller’s plate. I may mention that the
*‘rounded’’ appearance of the filaments as seen in fig. la
of Plate 77 (in contradistinction to the “‘square-cut’’ and
‘*straight-sided’’ arrangement) is also seen in the Botanic
Gardens, Sydney (cultivated) specimens, in two successive
years (May, 1916, 13th August, 1917, the latter date being
the date of the first throwing off of the operculum for 1917).
Therefore in this species the filaments may be either
““straight-cut’’ or “‘rounded”’ as depicted in the Crit. Rev.
drawing to which I have referred.
Itis also to be observed that on the filaments pushing off the
thick, almost fleshy operculum, the inside of the operculum
shows a partial “‘ perforation ’’ at the apex of the operculum,
running nearly about half way towards the apex. This
tunnel-like process represents a mould of the upper portion
of the style and also the stigma.
Mr. W. Catton Grasby, Perth, usefully supplements my
notes on the range of H. macrocarpa:—“‘ It is almost invari-
ably found on what we call sand-plains, that is the heath
country. I cannot say how far it extends, but I have
noticed it on the big sand plains between Wongan Hills and
Bolgart which is north of Toodyay, also on sand plains about
seventy miles east of Narrogin as well as east of York
where it was evidently first located by Drummond. As
you know, these sand plains generally occupy stretches of
forest country which occupy depressions. If we take the
word Guangan as an equivalent of what we call sand plain
Drummond’s meaning is perfectly clear.”’
13. HE. MICROTHECA F.v.M. See Crit. Rev. i, 53.
Mr. W. V. Fitzgerald (MSS.) speaks of the Kimberley
tree as ‘‘30—50 feet, trunk to 25 feet, diameter 1—2 feet,
454 J. H. MAIDEN.
branches often pendulous, bark persistent on stem and
branches, dark grey, rather thick, rough and longitudinally
fissured, often of a fibrous texture, timber red, hard and
tough.”’ |
This could also be taken as a description of the tree as
we usually find it in eastern Australia, but (op. cit., p. 53),
we have on the Murchison River, (limestone and vicinity
of fresh water), and also in tropical coastal Western Aus-
tralia, an undoubted white gum with a white-washed bark.
The environments which have brought about these changes.
have not yet been explained. Perhaps we have a second
species.
14. HK. MINIATA A. Cunn. See Crit. Rev. iii, 38.
‘fA tree of 50—100 feet high, trunk to 40 feet, diameter
to 3 feet; bark greyish to reddish, woolly-fibrous, rough
and persistent on the lower half of the trunk sometimes.
covering the whole of it; limbs always white and smooth;
timber red, very rough, hard,—flowers at a height of two
feet—an inhabitant of poor sandy soil.’’ (Fitzgerald MSS.)
The above notes refer to the tree as it occurs in North
West Australia.
15. E. Moornana(W.V.F.) Maiden. This Journal, xLVIt, 221.
The following is supplementary information from Mr.
Fitzgerald’s MSS.:—‘‘Height 30 feet, trunk 10 feet,
diameter 14 feet, bark smooth, white and persistent, timber
reddish, tough and moderately hard....In sandy soil over-
looking sandstone and quartzite. Occasionally the leaves.
are quite connate and the calyces concrete...Affinity to H.
pulverulenta Sims.”’
16. H. NAUDINIANA F.v.M. See Crit. Rev. ii, 79. .
Mr. HE. D. Merrill, Botanist, Bureau of Science, Manila,
P.I., draws my attention to the fact that Hugenia binacag
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 455
Elmer, (‘‘Leaflets Philippine Botany,”’ vol. 7, p. 2351, 1914),
and Eucalyptus binacag Hilmer (op. cit., vol. 8, p. 2776,
1915), Agusan Province, Mindanao, Philippines, are
synonyms of the above species. See also Merrill in “‘Philipp.
Journ. Science,’’ C. Botany, x, 3 May, 1915, 207.
17. BH. nivenNs Maiden. See Crit. Rev. xix, p. 272, and
Plate 81, figs. 9 and 10.
This imperfectly known and valuable forest species was
hitherto only known from the Southern Monaro and towards
the South Coast, N.S.W. A distinct addition to its range
is shown in specimens collected by Forest Overseer Matts-
son (communicated by Forester Gordon Burrows) from
Nundle, 38 miles east of Tamworth. It occurs on the
eastern fall of the Great Dividing Range, at an average
elevation of 2,300 feet above sea-level (Forest Assessor
Julius). Itsrange and abundance are being further inquired
into. It does not attain the enormous dimensions of the
Delegate trees, but it is still a tall tree, often 50 to 60 feet
to the first limb. Bark described as “whitish, woolly not
unlike that of our interior White Box in texture.’’ It is
locally known as “‘Scrub Box.’’ The timber is much
esteemed by saw-millers and reminds one of those of EH.
goniocalyx (Mountain Gum), H. microcorys (Tallow Wood),
and H. maculata (Spotted Gum). The leaves of the northern
tree also display those small tubercles irregularly distributed
along the margins of the leaves, and are notable if only
because they have sorarely been seen inthe genus. Their
occurrence on the southern trees hasalready beenreferred to,
18. E. OLDFIEL DIT F.v.M.
The specimen of Mallee from Burracoppin (Dr. J. B.
Cleland), referred to at Crit. Rev. ii, 235 and figures 7a
and 7b of Plate 75, is wrongly referred to HE. pyriformis
Turez. var. minor Maiden. It is rather to be referred to
456 J. H. MAIDEN.
EK, Oldfieldit with comparatively long, stout pedicels; the
rims are concave.
19. E. oLIGANTHA Schauer. See Crit. Rev. ii, 160.
‘“‘Between Table Top, Mountain and Artesian Range;
near Charnley River, West Kimberley, North Western
Australia. Tree of 40 feet; trunk to 15 feet; diameter to
1 foot; bark greyish, thin and smooth; timber reddish-
brown, hard, and very tough; foliage scanty; filaments
white; fruit campanulo-urceolate, under 4 lines long, rim
thin, valves 4, included. In appearance bears a close
resemblance to Sterculia decipiens W.V.F. On ferruginous
sandstone which partly overlies andesite.’’ (Fitzgerald
MSS.) These notes supplement our knowledge of a little-
known species.
20. E. SALIGNA Sm. var. PALLIDIVALVIS Baker and Smith.
See Crit. Rev. iii, 59.
A supplementary locality is Blackall Range, Q. (C. T.
White). It will probably prove to be widely diffused in
Queensland.
21. H. STaAIGERIANA F.v.M. See Orit. Rev. ii, 69.
‘‘Scented Ironbark.’’? We know so little about the +
restricted range of this especially valuable tree, that the
following notes by Mr. Ff. G. de V. Gipps will be useful: —
1. Between Wolfram Camp and Thornborough. 2. On the
Old Limestone Goldfield (between the Palmer and Mitchell
Rivers); both localities are in the Cairns District, Northern
Queensland.
22. EK. TETRAPTERA Turcz. See Crit. Rev. xxii, 33.
This species has flowered for the first time in the Sydney
Botanic Gardens. FElower-buds were first observed in
February 1915, but the first operculum was not thrown off
till 29th August, 1917. The following notes on the flowers
may be useful :— ;
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 457
Calyx Lincoln red, Nos. 1-2 Plate 88, top of calyx or
the inner flattish rim bronze yellow, Nos. 1-2 Plate 34.
Filaments deep cerise, shading from Nos. 1-3 Plate 123.
Colours taken from Rép. de Couleurs, Dauthenay.
The plants are stiff growing shrubs 4-5 feet high, with
the foliage strikingly Ficus like. The leaves are leathery
and the thickest I have seen in a Kucalypt. The midrib is
continued 5 mm. beyond the leaf forming a rigid sharp
mucro. Filaments tapering towards anthers. The wings
of the calyx-tube terminate in short teeth at the commis-
sure. The operculum is shallow and woody, and inside
shows the mould of the top of the style and of the stigma.
Exteriorly it shows cruciform raised ribs, and, in this
respect at least it shows affinity with H. erythrocorys.
23. H. TORQUATA Luehmann. See Crit. Rev. i, 109, 120.
Bulla Bulling, W.A., December, 1916 (F. Stoward).
Hitherto recorded only from the Coolgardie district and
also from Widgiemooltha and Norseman (both south of
- Coolgardie, on the Esperance road; see my note in “‘Journ.
W.A. Nat. Hist. Soc.” iii, Jan. 1911.) The new locality is
about 20 miles west of Coolgardie. It has flowered freely
in the Sydney Botanic Gardens during the last four years,
where a shrub of 3 feet 6 inches bears a profusion of palish
pink flowers somewhat concealed by the leaves. It isa
decided acquisition to horticulture.
The following is proposed as new:—
Ki. STOWARDI, n. sp.
Mallee vocatus ad 10’ altus. Foliis maturis coriaceis, nitentibus,
Janceolatis, paullo falcatis, ca 11 cm. longis, 3 cm. latis maxima
latitudine, longis petiolis2—3cm. Floribus teretibus pedunculis,
pedicellis ad 5 cm. Alabastris magnis, clavatis, calyce tubo oper-
culo minus dimidio equante, ca. 1:5 cm. longo, 5 costis promin-
entibus in pedicellem angustatis, costis operculi longi paullo
458 J. H. MAIDEN.
angustati obtusi numerosioribus minore profundis. Fructibus.
magnis conoideis, 3—5 costis prominentibus, margine truncata.
planata, lata orificio parvo.
‘A shrubby Mallee” with smooth bark.
Juvenile leaves not seen in their earliest stages, but broader,
and with the intramarginal vein more remote from the edge than
in the mature ones.
Mature leavés coriaceous, shining, of similar colour on both
sides, covered with fine black dots, with long petioles (say 2-3 cm.)
lanceolate, asymmetrical, slightly falcate, tapering gradually to an
apex consisting of a soft point, about 11 cm. (say 43 inches long)
and 3 cm. broad in its widest part.
Flowers with a terete peduncle of 2—2°5 cm., about seven in
the head, with flattened pedicels up to’5cm. The buds large,
clavate, the calyx-tube longer than a third of the operculum, about
1:5 cm. long, with five prominent ribs tapering into the pedicel, the
long slightly tapering blunt operculum with more numerous,
shallower ribs than those of the calyx-tube.
Filaments cream-coloured, sometimes with a purplish flush at
the base, tapering trigonous or tetragonous, ribbed, with numerous
glands, anthers large with parallel cells and large gland at back.
Fruits conoid, with three to five more prominent ribs and a
number of intermediate shallower ones, with a truncate, flattish,
slightly rounded, broad rim, with a small orifice; tips of the valves
sunk or scarcely flush with the orifice.
Kwelkan, on the Northam-Merriden line, a few miles
north of Kellerberrin, Western Australia (Dr. Frederick
Stoward, Government Botanist and Plant Pathologist, No.
150, April, May, 1917). The type.
The material is scanty, and it would appear that the
following specimen also belongs to this species. As this
material is also sparse it is desirable to describe it.
A shrub or ‘“‘small tree, the highest I have seen does not exceed
10 feet.” Bark of a smooth, dull grey. Branchlets round, more
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 459
or less glaucous, as also the petioles, young leaves and fruits, the
whole plant perhaps largely glaucous at certain seasons.
Juvenile leaves. Not seen.
Mature leaves. Very thick, coriaceous, dull to shiny, of an olive
green, and the same colour on both sides, lanceolate to ovate,
petiolate, the base ending rather abruptly in a petiole of 2 cm., the
lanceolate leaves mostly tapering into a fine point, about 10 cm.
(4 inches) long, or shorter, and about 2:5 cm. (14 inch) broad,
both surfaces entirely covered with innumerable fine black dots,
the midrib and secondary veins moderately prominent, the second-
ary veins spreading and roughly parallel, making an angle of
about 45° with the midrib, the intramarginal vein distinctly
removed from the edge.
Buds. Cylindroid, the blunt cylindrical operculum about twice
as long as the slightly ribbed calyx-tube, about 5 to 8 in the umbel,
on a decurved peduncle of 2°5 cm., each calyx-tube gradually
tapering into a pedicel of under 1 cm.
Flowers. “The bloom is evidently a large pale yellow.” (Vachell).
Anthers large, with parallel cells and large gland at back.
Fruits. Moderately large, conoid, flat-topped, rather gradually
tapering into a flattish pedicel, with two especially prominent
longitudinal ribs or wings running from the rim and causing an
expansion of the pedicel, together with a number of less prominent
ribs of which two are only secondary to the main ones, rim moder-
ately broad and flat, with four deltoid or acicular tips of the valves
distinctly protruding beyond the orifice and encased with the
whitish remains of the capsule-lining.
‘‘Baronrath,” via Kellerberrin, W.A. Flowers and ripe
fruit, September, 1903, nearly ripe fruit, December, 1903,
(F. Harvey Vachell).
“Grows on the sand-plains about here. I have only met
with a small group of them.’”’ Although I have made a
number of attempts to obtain additional material I have
460 J. H. MAIDEN.
been unsuccessful, and I trust that the present descriptions
will lead to its recovery.
Affinities.
1. With EH. erythronema Turcz. See Plate 93, Part xxii,
of my “Critical Revision of the Genus HKucalyptus.’’ The
leaves of H. erythronema are narrower, the pedicels longer,
the calyx-tubes not ribbed, the filaments pale and not
glandular, the opercula conical, the fruits smaller, more
flat-topped and less constricted at the orifice. The anthers
are not dissimilar, and it would appear that EH. Stowardi
and EK. erythronema are closest allied.
2. With HE. Forrestiana Diels. See Plate 95, Part xxii,
of my “Critical Revision of the Genus Hucalyptus.” In
EK. Forrestiana the peduncle is longer, the pedicels more
articulate, the anthers more rounded, the filaments less
grooved, though glandular. The opercula shorter, more
conoid, and less in diameter than the calyx-tube. The
fruits larger and more quadrangular, the ridges more pro-
nounced. |
3. With EH. occidentalis Endl. It appears to be closest
allied to this species, but the peduncle is flat in EH. occi-
dentalis and terete in E. Stowardi. In some forms of H.
occidentalis we have also glandular filaments. The buds of
E. occidentalis are more terete, i.e., less ribbed; the fruits
more urceolate and the valves more exsert, with a much
thinner rim.
4. With H. incrassata Labill. var. angulosa. Oompare
Plate 14, Part iv, of the ‘* Critical Revision of the Genus
Kucalyptus.’’ The foliage of var. angulosa is coarser, the
peduncle strap-shaped, the operculum shorter and it and —
the fruit more corrugate.
5. With HE. Pimpiniana Maiden. See Plate 72, Part xvi,
of the ‘‘Critical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus.”
Attention may be drawn to the imperfectly known HE.
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 46]
Pimpiniana to which it is also related, but less closely so.
The fruits of E. Pimpiniana are more ovoid and less ribbed.
E. AMYGDALINA Labill.
BE. RADIATA Sieber (Syn. H. AUSTRALIANA Baker and Smith).
EK. NUMEROSA Maiden.
Messrs. Baker and Smith (This Journal, xlix, 514, 1915),
supplementing an earlier paper in.“‘ Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas.’’
1912, state that EH. amygdalina Labill. is confined to Tas-
mania, and that the plant which has so long gone under
that name on the mainland is a new species, to which they
give the name EH. australiana. It is proverbially difficult
to prove a negative, but in the strict sense in which Messrs.
Baker and Smith interpret EH. amygdalina, I agree with
them that it has not been found on the mainland so far.
In view, however, of the fact that a number of species of
this and other genera occur both in Tasmania and the
mainland, a widely diffused Tasmanian species such as EH.
amygdalina should be looked for on the Victorian coast,
and in more elevated localities in both Victoria and New
South Wales.
E. RADIATA Sieber. ‘‘Narrow-leaved Peppermint.’’
Ido not, however, agree that the mainland species is
undescribed; it has, indeed, several synonyms.
The authors do not mention what their type of H. aus-
traliana is, *‘ the localities being too numerous to publish
here,”’ (p. 516), but we know precisely what is meant, for
at p. 514 they give a reference to their ‘‘ Research on the
Kucalypts,”’ p. 168, with a plate (as E. amygdalina), and
‘through the 1915 paper we have reference to its occurrence
at ‘‘Nerrigundah,, Yourie and neighbouring districts of
New South Wales,” Tanto, Moss Vale and Reedy Creek,
allin the same State, while I have received a specimen
from the authors from Batlow. .In addition, before and
462 J. H. MAIDEN.
since the reading of Messrs. Baker and Smith’s paper, I
have received copious additional material from the localities
they mention from correspondents and the Botanic Gardens
Collector. This widely diffused species is H. radiata Sieb.,
in other words, the mainland form attributed to E. amyg-
dalina Labill.
It was originally figured, as a line drawing, at Plate 7,
“*Mém. sur la Famille des Myrtacées”’ (A. P. de Candolle,
1842). :
In Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, 751 (1904), and Crit. Rev.
vi, 153 (1905), I said ‘‘E. radiata Sieb., appears to be nothing
more or less than a form of HE. amygdalina, very common
in New South Wales, and I see nothing distinctive enough
to warrant its being called a_variety.’’ I pointed out some
differences from the Tasmanian amygdalina, but did not
take the step, which I think Messrs. Baker and Smith have
rightly done, of separating the Tasmanian and Australian
trees. Plate 62, Part xvi of my ‘‘Forest Flora of New
South Wales,”’ labelled E. amygdalina, and drawn from a
Blue Mountains specimen, is H. radiata, and, excluding
the Tasmanian references, this Part gives a convenient
popular account of the species now under reference.
E. radiata has been known as a copious oil yielder for
many years. A Mr. Simmonds of Marulan sent it to me,
August, 1892, and informed me that he was distilling it,
while on the higher parts of the Blue Mountains and of the
southern tableland, everyone knows how the vicinity of
such trees markedly reeks with oil during rain, or on the
approach of a mountain mist. I dwell on the redolence of
oil in this species under the caption ‘‘A beautiful and health-
promoting tree’’ in my ‘“‘Forest Flora of N.S.W.”’ Part xvi,
p. 132. We did not, however, know the composition of the
oil until the publication of Messrs. Baker and Smith’s paper,
where they call it HE. australiana.
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 463
The authors (p. 514) recognise a broad-leaved form of
E. australiana, restricted to the Ovens district of Victoria.
Asa matter of fact E. radiata (australiana) varies in width
of leaf, thickness and glaucousness. I have broad-leaved
plants from both Victoria and New South Wales. Within
the limits the texture and venation vary according to
environment, age of plant, and part of tree from which the
leaves have been obtained.
The fruits (EH. australiana) are described as pilular to
turbinate, with ared rim. The fruits of H. radiata (aus-
traliana) vary in size and shape, (being nearly spherical to
pear-shaped), thickness of rim, shininess, length of peduncle
and pedicel. Variation in shape depends to some extent
on degree of ripeness and environment.
It is desirable to state the range of the species, and the
following statement, based on specimens in the National
Herbarium, Sydney, will be sufficiently comprehensive. It
will probably never be known precisely where Sieber
obtained his type, since no dated specimens or diary by
him are known. It was doubtless obtained either in ‘‘Argyle
County”’ or the Blue Mountains, both districts he is known
to have visited, and specimens of his type have been com-
pared, and precisely match specimens from both those
localities.
Victoria.—Mr. H. Hopkins in “‘Advance Australia,’’
October, 1909, says that it occurs from sea-level to 3,000
feet in Victoria. It is found on the Upper Yarra, Dayles-
ford, Mount Macedon, North and South Gippsland, and
away to the high tablelands, joining on to the high locali-
ties in New South Wales.
New South Wales.—It is extensively distributed in New
South Wales, being a denizen of rather cold localities. In
the south it is found on the tableland generally ascending
the mountains to Yarrangobilly, Tumbarumba, etc. (These
464 J. H. MAIDEN.
are but representative localities in this region). It occurs
at Wyndham, Burrinjuck, Mount Stromlo (Federal Terri-
tory), Nerrigundah, Yourie and between Cobargo and Tilba
Tilba, the Araluen-Braidwood district,Goulburn to Hill Top.
In the west it extends from Woodford to the highest part
of the Blue Mountains, including Mounts Wilson and Tomah,
Mount Blaxland to Rydal and again at Mullion Creek near
Orange, which appears to be the furthest in this direction.
It also connects by many localities with the Southern
Tableland, forming continuous areas or chains of localities.
Going north we have it in the Nundle district and in the
higher eastern slopes leading to and upon New Hngland
generally, extending as far north as Wilson’s Downfall,
which is no great distance from the Queensland border.
Chains of localities connecting west and north require to
be worked out.
Speaking more concisely, it occurs in Hastern Australia,
including both Victoria and New South Wales, being found
at no very great distance from the coast until a hundred
miles south of Sydney is reached, and then, going west and
north, it gradually ascends the tableland, chiefly of New
England, increasing the distance from the coast. It is hard
to believe that it will not be found about Stanthorpe or in
other Queensland localities on the Macpherson Range.
EK. NUMEROSA Maiden, “‘ River White Gum.”’
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, 752 (1904). Following are
synohyms:—
HE. AMYGDALINA Lab. var. radiata Benth. (B.F1., iii, 203) in
part, but not H. radiata Sieb.
E. NUMEROSA Maiden in Part xvii, p. 146 of my “Forest
Flora of N.S.W.”’ with Plate 66 (1905).
E. AMYGDALINA Labill. var. nwmerosa Maiden, “ Crit. Rev.
vi, 155, with fig. 1, plate 30 (1905).
NOTES ON EUCALYPTUS. 465
I did wrong in temporarily suppressing EH. numerosa;
it is adistinct species. This step originally arose through
accepting the view of Bentham (B. FI. iii, 203) that E.
radiata included the plant which we know as E. numerosa.
Use of botanical names for trade purposes.—Messrs.
Baker and Smith (p. 515) put in a plea for the use of
botanical names for commercial products, a view I have
actively supported for many years, but if this principle be
not very judiciously applied, instead of good resulting, the
divorce between the Kucalyptus nomenclature of botanists
and that of commercial men will be widened. In the case
of a Species name such as Hucalyptus globulus, and a very
large number, indeed the vast majority of species, there
are no differences of opinion as to validity; in other words,
the scientific name can be used for timber or oil or any
other branch of commercial nomenclature with perfect
safety. But the use of such a name as Eucalyptus aus-
traliana, which has not one, but many synonyms, is ona
different footing, and its use for trade purposes leads to the
very confusion we all desire to avoid. A firm receives this
name in perfectly good faith, indeed it may not have the
knowledge on which to form an independent opinion; oil is
supplied under that name toits numerous customers. The
name becomes involved in trade-transactions, and, having
once adopted it, a firm naturally becomes unwilling to
withdraw it. In other words, a non-botanist takes sides,
and he is actuated by one of the strongest of human motives,
pecuniary interest, and there is no doubt that, money being
at stake, the commercial name will be closely adhered to,
to an extent measured by the demand for the oil, irrespec-
tive of any evidence the dissentient botanist may adduce.
This unfortunate state of affairs, which may obstruct
endeavours to arrive at a settled nomenclature, is always
liable totake place in the case of acceptance of any botanical
Dp—December 5, 1917.
name for trade purposes before it has been thoroughly
466 J. H. MAIDEN.
tested. In other words, we shall probably find it necessary,
in future, to employ two lists, one the stereotyped list that
the stability of trade requires, and asecond list of equival-
ents according to the laws of botanical nomenclature. It
is not the fault of botanists that the nomenclature of
Kucalyptus cannot be stereotyped in 1917. A really
remarkable amount of work has been done in this direction,
particularly during the last twenty-five years, and while all
species will not be discovered and examined, even in a
century to come, I consider that it would be a feat of which
botanists might be proud, if they find themselves able to
secure a fairly stable nomenclature of species in this genus
in the course of a further twenty-five years.
CINEOL AS A SOLVENT 1N CRYOSCOPY. 467
CINEOL AS A SOLVENT IN CRYOSCOPY.
By CHARLES EK. FAWSITT and CHRISTIAN H. FISCHER.
[Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 5, 1917. ]
CINEOL is an important constituent of many Eucalyptus oils
and it is now easily procurable in a fairly pure condition.
Its composition is given by the formula C,H,,O. It was
thought that its value as a possible solvent for cryoscopic
determinations was worth investigation.
The cineol was obtained from Hudson’s Kumenthol Co.,
Sydney, where,we understand, it is obtained from eucalyptus
oil, which is richin cineol. The cineol is obtained from the
oil by freezing out this constituent. We distilled the cineol
and found that most of it came over at 175° - 176°C.
The freezing point of the distilled cineol was 0°1°C. The
figure usually given for the freezing point of cineol is —1°C.,
but this latter figure is too low.
Pure cineol is exceedingly hygroscopic, and owing to the
relatively small molecular weight of water, small amounts
of absorbed water depress the freezing point very much.
An addition of 0°2% of water was found to depress the
freezing point of cineol 0°54° C. ,
In order to test whether the distilled cineol had any
considerable amount of moisture in it, a current of air, dried
by sulphuric acid, was passed through the solution for three
quarters of an hour, when the freezing point rose to 0°2° C.
Some distilled cineol was next allowed to stand over sodium
for twenty-four hours and redistilled; its freezing point
was found to be 0°9° C.
Cineol as a Solvent in Cryoscopy.
For the first determinations given below, distilled cineol
of F.P. 0°1° C. was used. This contained a small quantity
468 C. E. FAWSITT AND C. H. FISCHER.
of water but was easier to work with than the purer cineok
of F.P. 0°9° O. used in the later determinations.
The use in cryoscopy of a solvent containing slight im-
purities is justified if the depressions of the freezing point
caused by additions of various solutes are the same as they
would have given with the purer solvent. Whether this is
so, is a matter for experiment in any particular case.
We have found that when benzene is used as a solute,
exactly the same results were obtained with the ordinary
and the dried cineol, and we believe that the influence of
this small quantity of moisture is negligible for its use in
the determinations given below. :
The usual apparatus with a Beckmann thermometer was.
used for these determinations, except that the stirrer was
fitted with a mercury seal, in order to exclude air with its.
attendant moisture. Without this, or other suitable con-
trivance for preventing moisture from entering, it is
impossible to obtain results that can be depended on.
After the freezing point had been registered in any par-
ticular determination, the tube containing the solvent and
solute was warmed up to nearly the room temperature (16°
— 23°C.) before refreezing to obtain another reading. This.
method gave better results than heating the semifrozen
liquid just sufficiently high to melt all solid.
In the following tables “‘K,’’ the cryoscopic constant, is.
the depression in the freezing point caused by dissolving
one gramme-molecule of the solute in 1000 grammes of
cineol. .
“K’’? is calculated from the formula
iin as even
TY aesx 1000
Where m = molecular weight of the solute.
/\ = depression of the freeziag point in degrees
centigrade. AM
_ CINEOL AS A SOLVENT IN CRYOSCOPY. 469
w = weight of solute used (in grammes).
W = weight of solvent used (in grammes).
The solutes used were Kahlbaum’s in the case of benzo-
phenone, nitrobenzene, bromobenzene, toluene, benzene,
butyl alcohol, and were used without further purification.
The chloroform used was Mercks’. The ethyl alcohol used
was Mercks’, and was distilled after being in contact with
quicklime for twenty-four hours. The ether was Kahlbaum’s
and was distilled after being in contact with sodium for
twenty-four hours.
TABLE IT.
Solute :—Benzophenone (O,H;),CO; m = 182.
Weight of solvent (cineol) = 14:258 grammes.
Percentage of :
si Deets to pales aX ie (Galea sigee))
0°1186 0°832 0:308 6°7
0-2026 1:421 0-532 6°8
0-2752 1°930 0:696 6°6
0:3870 2°714 1:044 AoW
| Average 6°75
TABLE II.
Solute :—Nitrobenzene, C,H;NO,.; m = 123.
Weight of cineol = 16:06.
w. pete of ix __ K. (calculated)
0-2054 1:279 0:655 6-4
0-2946 1834 0-953 6-4
0-5068 3°156 1:651 6-4
0:6572 4-092 2-176 6-6
Average 6°45
TABLE ITI.
Solute:—Bromobenzene, C,H,;Br; m = 157. W = 16:02.
Percentage of
oti anliee. man ss
0:197 Leo 0:54 6°9
0°3444 DehS 0:949 6:9
0-4872 3°04 1°317 6:8
0°6386 3°98 1-703 6°7
Average 6°8
470 OC. E. FAWSITT AND C. H. FISCHER.
TABLE IV.
Solute:—Toluene, C,H;,CH;; m = 92. W = 24:69.
Percentage of
she solute. A Ki
Oe 0-822 0-599 6-7
0-403 1°63 1-199 6°8
0:613 2°48 1°:814 6:7
0:849 3°44 2-08 6°7
Average 6:7.
TABLE V.
Solute :—Benzene, C,H,; m = 78. W = 20°31.
Percentage of
a solute. LN
0-1902 0:937 ~ 0°788 6°6
0:3452 70 1-428 6:6
0°5220 2°57 2°155 6°5
0:8422 4°15 3°428 6°4
TABLE VI.
Solute :—Chloroform; CHCl, ;°an'="119-4-" Wi aia
ae Percentage of A K.
solute.
0:22 1:146 0:639 6-7
0°4136 2°156 1:20 6-7
Average 6:7
TABLE VII.
Solute :—Ethyl ether, (C,H,;),0; m = 74. W = 18:27.
bh. Percentage of | x K.
solute.
0:12:92 O07 ()°624 6:5
0:2698 1477 1:275 6°4
0:4016 2°2 1°875 6°3
06210 34 2:875 6:3
0.94 5:15 4°255 6-1
CINEOL AS A SOLVENT IN CRYOSCOPY. 471
From these results the value of the constant (K) may be
taken as 6°7. This holds good for dilute solutions and for
unassociated solutes.
Cineol itself does not appear to show any abnormal
behavious in these experiments, and molecular weight
determinations of cineol (as solute) dissolved in benzene
(solvent), gave a normal result for the molecular weight of
cineol. The values of the constant “‘K ’’ for cineol in some
of the tables given above decrease with increasing concen-
tration of solute, but this is a peculiarity often noticed in
such freezing point experiments, and it may be taken that
the more correct value for the constant is that obtained
in the dilute solutions.
The molecular weight of substances containing the group
hydroxyl, would be expected to be abnormal (too large) in
solution in cineol, as this abnormal character of such
. solutes is noticed with other solvents. Vice versa, the
calculated values of “‘K”’ using the normal molecular
weights for alcohols should come out rather low.
TABLE VIII.
Solute :—Ethy] alcohol, C,H,O; m = 46. W = 16:90.
1. Percentages of in K.
: solute. i
0:1478 0°875 1-113 58
0°3834 2°27 2°645 5°4
0:6934 4°105 4°356 4°9
TABLE IX.
Solute:— Butyl alcohol, C,H,,0; m = 74. W = 18-02
a Percentages of BK K
solute.
0:132 0-732 0:60 6:1
0°398 2°21 1°744 5:8
0°691 DASHA 5:5
3°84
™"
From these results we conclude that these alcohols are
associated in solution in cineol. Comparing cineol with
other solvents, we find it is somewhat more difficult to —
carry out determinations with cineol as solvent, than with
benzene or water, but we believe that cineol will be found
a useful solvent in some cases.
472 Cc. E. FAWSITT AND C. H. FISCHER.
The latent heat of fusion for cineol is given by the formula
Hig Boal
kK x 1000
where L = latent heat of fusion of 1 gramme of cineol,
R = 1°985, and T = absolute temperature of melting point
of cineol = 274° C. The latent heat of cineol (1 gramme)
is therefore 22°2. |
Summary.
1. Cineol isa hygroscopic substance and the usual freez-
ing point given is too low. Cineol purified from dissolved
water was found to freeze at 0°9° C. . ;
2. The freezing point constant for normal solutes in
cineol as solvent is 6°7.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 473
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI, No. IV.
POLYPORUS, FOMES ann HEXAGONA.
By J. BURTON CLELAND, M.D., and EDWIN CHEEL, Botanical
Assistant, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, December 5, 1917.]
THROUGH the kind assistance of C. G. Lloyd of Cincinnati,
Ohio, most of the Australian polypores in our possession
have been accurately identified. In the present paper we
record our various collections. In doing so, we make use
of the excellent keys employed by Lloyd in the following
works :—‘Synopsis of the Genus Hexagona’ (Ohio, 1910),
‘Synopsis of the Stipitate Polyporoids’ (Ohio, 1912), ‘Synop-
sis of the Section Apus of the Genus Polyporus’ (Ohio, 1915)
and ‘Synopsis of the Genus Fomes’ (Ohio, 1915). In addition
to recording the plants we have handled, we have included
as wellallthe Australian species embraced in these works.
Australian mycologists should thus have available a work-
able scheme for the identification of most of our firmer
polypores. Those who have attempted to work out the
species from Cooke’s ‘Handbook of Australian Fungi,’ will
appreciate the value of Lloyd’s work.
We deal first with the Stipitate Polypores, then with
Fomes, Polyporus (Apus) and Hexagona.
I. STIPITATE SPECIES OF THE GENERA FOMES,
POLYPORUS AND POLYSTICTUS.
Sub-woody.—With woody fibrils but not perennial and
not having the pores in strata (except as to the first).
Pores in areas of growth indistinctly stratified. Fomes.
Pores not stratified.
474 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEKEL.
Spores coloured, mostly elliptical, with a strong
apiculus. Context coloured. Surface of most species
laccate.—Ganodermus.
Spores coloured, mostly globose, with none or a small
apiculus. Context coloured. Surface of most
species dull.—Amaurodermus.
Spores white. Context (except Section 11) pale or
white.—Lignosus.
Fleshy or coriaceous.
Stipe lateral. Spores white.—Petaloides.
Stipe branching and bearing several pileoli.-Merismus..
Stipe central or excentric (rarely lateral). Flesh
spongy, light. Spores white or coloured.—S pongiosus..
Spores coloured. Fleshy or coriaceous.—Pelloporus.
Spores white. Fleshy, soft, usually terrestrial, with
thick pilei.—Ovinus.
Spores white. Fleshy-pliant, coriaceous, usually with
thin pilei and epixylous.—Lentus.
Lentus with black stems.—Melanopus.
First Division—FOMBES (Stipitate).
Section 1. Lloyd records only one species, which is not.
Australian.
Second Division—GANODERMUS.
Section 2. Spores ‘smooth or but slightly rough.
1. PoLYPORUS (GANODERMUS) LUCIDUS, var. JAPONICUS Fries..
Syn. Fomes lucidus Fr., (Cooke, No. 673).
Cooke records Fomes lucidus for Queensland and Tas--
mania. As all our Australian specimens appear to be the
variety japonicus, we record this form only for Australia.
In September, 1911, specimens of a fungus were exhibited
at a meeting of the Linnean Society of New South Wales.
from Oatherine Hill coal-mine near Newcastle, N.S.W.,
under the name Fomes lucidus. One consists of a long
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 475.
black laccate stem 11 ins. in height and about in. long,
whose summit has become twisted and bent. The larger
specimen has about fifty concentric rings on the stem,
giving ita snake-like appearance. As the context resembles
in colour that of the specimens we are considering, we
think that this is probably an anomalous form which has
been unable to fruit. Probably each ring represents a
separate growth effort, dependent on access of moisture
and so not necessarily annual.
In May, 1915, and again in June, 1916, specimens of a
polypore were collected near the base of a decaying
Casuarina stump near Lisarow. Lloyd has kindly identified
these for us as Polyporus japonicus. He says:—‘‘Certainly
a form of P. lucidus with dark context colour and dark
surface. The Japanese plant which passes as Polyporus
japonicus in Japanese works differs from P. lucidus in this
way. Your specimen also departs in having a lateral stipe
in the same plane and in being tubercular deformed.’’? Our
specimens are fan-shaped, usually about 3 ins. in diameter
and with the upper surface dark brownish-black and rugose
and very dull laccate. The stipe is very short but shews a
dorso-lateral attachment. The context is a dark cinnamon
and the pore orifices a dullbrown. The spores were brown,
smooth and 11 < 5°d to 6°5p in size.
The National Collection has the following specimens:—
A very large fan-shaped one, 7 ins. long by 8 ins. wide,
with a stem 23 ins. long, and another smaller plant, Ather-
ton Scrub, North Queensland (R. Mitchell, August, 1911);
a fan-shaped specimen from EKumundi, Queensland (J. Staer,
1911); a finger-like form, Ingham, Herbert River, North
Queensland (Sid. W. Jackson, 1908).
2. POLYPORUS (GANODERMUS) AMBOINENSIS Fries.
Syn. Fomes amboinensis Fr. (Cooke, No. 672). Queens-
land. Var. gibbosus (Cooke, No. 672), Queensland.
476 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
3. POLYPORUS (GANODERMUS) FORNICATUS Fries.
Lloyd states that plants similar to this species but with
rougher spores occur in Australia.
Section 3. Spores distinctly rough.
4, POLYPORUS (GANODERMUS) OCHROLACCATUS Mont.
*' Pileus small but deep, attached by a short rudimentary,
dorsal stem. Crust pale, ochraceous, faintly laccate,
rugulose, zoned. Pores medium with white mouths, long,
not stratified but reaching the crust, very regular, arranged
in lines. Spores large, 16 x 32(?)u, with small apiculus,
distinctly rough.’’—Lloyd.
Lloyd has identified specimens for us collected at Port
Moresby, New Guinea, by A. E. Pratt.
Section 4. Anomalous section with a false stem. No
Australian species recorded.
Third Division—AMAURODERMUS.
Section 5. Polyporus. Spores smooth or but slightly
rough. Stem slender, usually mesopodal.
5. POLYPORUS (AMAURODERMUS) RUDIS Berk.
Syn. Fomes rudis Berk. (Cooke, No. 669).
This is a quaint species not uncommon in the Sydney
district but of no importance in forestry. It grows on the
ground and has an irregular cinnamon-brown stem, some-
times three inches long or more, and a dark brown irregu-
larly wrinkled cap up to three inches across.
Cooke records also A. rugosus (No. 671) for Victoria,
Queensland and New South Wales. Lloyd, in speaking of
A. rudis of Australia says:—‘‘ It is close (too close perhaps)
to rugosus of the Hast, but seems to be more rugulose, has
larger pores and spores (9—12 as against 6—8 or 8—10p),
and when mature retains its colour.’’ Such being Lloyd’s
opinion we refrain from including A. rugosus amongst
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. AT
Australian species until the identification of Australian
specimens is more certain. As regards Fomes pullatus
(Cooke No. 670), recorded from Victoria and Queensland,
Lloyd says:—‘‘This is a manuscript name that Berkely
gave to an old specimen from Hong Kong, but afterwards.
concluded that it was rudis of Australia and did not publish
it. Cooke afterwards dug it up and published it. Ido not
think the old specimen is rudis, but it was too poor to
publish.’’ In view of this, the Australian records are best
referred to A. rudis.
We have specimens of A. rudis from several sources,
which may be briefly described as follows :—
Lane Cove, Sydney (A. A. Hamilton), August 1901, at
base of a dead tree. Pileus convex, up to 3 ins. in diameter,
dark brown, in old specimens blackish, radiately plicato-
rugose and slightly so concentrically, tendency to umbili-
cation with central umbo. Stems central to excentric,
comparatively slender, irregular, up to 3 ins. long, finely
velutinate, dirty cinnamon becoming black. Pores dark
brown, becoming blackish. Context pale cinnamon. Spores.
11 to 12 x 8'5 to 10°3p, thick walled, brown, nearly smooth.
Penshurst, Sydney (H. Cheel), May 1910, at base of an
oldstump. Pileus irregular, convex, less rugose than the
preceding, dark brown, matt. Stems irregular, up to 44
ins. Pores pallid. Context same tint as the preceding.
Spores 11 x 8°5/-, smooth, brown. .
Linnean Society’s Garden, Sydney (J. J. Fletcher), Nov.
1907. Pileus dark brown, 6 ins. in diameter, knobbily
rugulose, slightly umbilicate. Hymenium flat, pores dark
brown (old). Stem 4% ins., irregular, moderately stout.
Spores 10°5 to 11 xX 9p.
Terrigal, N.S.W. (J. B. Cleland), June 1914. Description
when fresh:—Pileus dark brown, rugose, plane (convex
478 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
when dry). Orifices of pores pallid, turning reddish when
bruised. Tubes dark brown, at once turning black as do
the orifices when deeply pressed. Substance pallid, turn-
ing adeep brown. Stem dark brown, smooth, violet-tinted
pith. On the ground.
Near Lisarow in May 1915 a group of individuals of all
sizes were met with amongst grass and leaves near a stump.
When gathered, every part of the cap became blood-red on
the slightest bruising, the injured part later turning black.
The youngest plants showed a stalk with, for pileus, a small
‘bleeding’ knob. The cap was brown, knobby, velutinate
and zoned, some of the zones being reddish-purple, others
a dark blue grey, and others yellow-brown. The stem was
central to lateral, brown, velutinate and irregular. The
pores were soft, white, with rounded dissepiments. Spores
brown, apparently smooth, 9 x gy, 10°4 x 8°5/ or sometimes
subspherical 8°5p.
A specimen, collected at Hill Top in February 1911 had
an irregular stem about 7 ins. long, and a very thin cap.
We have another specimen from Mosman and one, gathered
by Mr. A. A. Hamilton, from Lilyvale (April, 1912). Also
one from Mount Wilson (June 1915), and one from Tuggerah
(October, 1914. Spores smooth, 10°4 to 12 x 8°5 to 10°44).
In addition to these adult forms, we have two ‘young
specimens from Lilyvale, N.S.W. (April, 1912), with knobby
flattened pilei, under $ in. across, and thick-walled pallid
pores. Spores 8°5 to 9 X 7°54, smooth. A still younger
form (stem 1 in., pileus + in.), resembling a thick-headed
nail in shape, was taken by one of us (J.B.C.) under trees
at Bulliin April 1914. It was woody with a brown convex
cap and very shallow white pores. Stem brown, slightly
hollow with a spongy centre. It was ‘adherent to a small
brown pea-sized body, containing cavities and enclosing a
white area like a bulb. .
’
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 479
Section 6. Polyporus. Spores distinctly rough. Stem
slender, usually mesopodal.
a. Stipe smooth, non-laccate surface. No Australian
Species recorded.
b. Stipe with a. smooth, laccate crust.
6. PoLYPORUS (AMAURODERMUS) LEPTOPUS, Persoon(?).
Cooke records Fomes nigripes (No. 668) for New South
Wales. Lloyd has been unable to find the type of Amauro-
dermus nigripes described by Fries from Brazil, and states
that the description of it reads much like A. leptopus, under
which heading we place it, though possibly the Australian
record belongs to neither.
LACCOCEPHALUM BASILAPILOIDES McAlpine and Tepper.
Lloyd suggests that the “‘stone-making fungus”’ described
by McAlpine and Tepper as Laccocephalum basilapiloides
is referable to this division. On examination of the type,
we find that it is closely allied to Polyporus tumulosus of
the Division Ovinus (which see).
Section 7. Polystictus. Plants with thin pilei and pore
layers. No Australian species recorded.
Fourth Division—LIGNOSUS
Section 8. Plants which form a sclerotium. Context
pale or isabelline. Spores probably white.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 9. Pilei unilateral and superimposed. Context
pale.
7. POLYPORUS (LIGNOSUS) SUPERPOSITUS Berk.
Under Fomes superpositus (No. 674) Cooke records this
species for New South Wales. We have not met with it
and it is evidently rare.
Section 10. Stipe mesopodal or pleuropodal. ,Context
white or pale. Spores white.
No Australian species recorded.
480 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Sectton 11. Context brown or gilvous. Spores white
(probably).
8. PoLyPorRus (LIGNOSUS) SCOPULOSUS Berk.
Cooke (No. 714) gives this species for Queensland.
Fifth Division—PETALOIDES.
Section 12. Carnosus. Fleshy, soft, thick species.
9. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) FUSCO-MACULATUS Bresadola.
Under P. glutinifer, Lloyd says that a single, sliced
Specimen exists at Kew which is probably the same as P.
fusco-maculatus. It was described by Cooke and was said
to have come from Mauritius, but Lloyd thinks it probably
~ came from Australia.
Section 13. Polyporus. Fleshy, thin species, colour white
or pale. Pores small.
10. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) ANNULATUS Junghuhn.
We have asmall pure white somewhat fan-shaped species,,
3 in. in diameter, with a very short stem expanded into a.
disc. It resembles Lloyd’s figure of P. annulatus. In
drying, it became a pale fawn with a darker edge. The
pores are small and dissepiments thin. The spores are
elongated, 7 to 8°D xX 3. Bulli Pass, April, 1914.
11. PoLyporus (PETALOIDES) RHIPIDIUM Berk.
This is a small white species, about + in. in diameter,
often found in numbers on the bark of living trees, Under
Favolus rhipidiuwm, this species is given by Cooke for Vic-
toria, Queensland and New South Wales. Lloyd considers
that P. diminutus, Massee, recorded for Australia, of which
the type is not preserved, is from the figure and description
founded on this species. P.nanus Massee, from Australia,.
is also P. rhipidium.
This species is common near Sydney on the trunks of
Kucalypts (we have frequently taken it from that of E.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 48]
piperita). The size is rarely larger than 4 in. and the ~
colour almost pure white when gathered. Spores 4°4 to 5°2
xX 2 to 2'5u, white. Sydney; Terrigal (June, 1914); The
Oaks (June, 1914); National Park (July, 1916). The follow-
ing specimens are in the National Herbarium, Sydney:—
Peakhurst (E. C., Dec., 1898); Bulli Pass (EK. O., March,
1907); Narrabeen (H. C., Nov., 1908); Bowral (HE. C., Aug.,
1908); Cook’s River (A. A. Hamilton, July, 1909); Nepean
River (W. Craigie, Oct., 1909); Lane Cove (A. A. H., Aug.,
1909); Helensburgh (W. C., Aug., 1909); Leura (A. A. H.,
Aug., 1908); Gladesville (Miss M. Flockton, May, 1900);
Cheltenham (A. A. H., May, 1910); Thornleigh(H.C., Aug.,
1910); Leura (T. Steel, Feb., 1911); Gosford (A. A. H.,
Aug., 1912); Lilyvale (A. A. A., April, 1912); Botanic
Gardens (EH. Bennett, June, 1913).
Section 14. Polyporus. Fleshy, thin species. Colour
white or pale. Pores large, favoloid.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 15. Polyporus. Thin, rigid. Colour pale rose or
reddish-brown. Not zonate or only faintly zonate.
12. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) RUBIDUS Berk.
Cooke (No. 640) records this species for Queensland and
New South Wales.
13. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) BRUNNEOLUS Berk.
Cooke (No. 743) records this species for Queensland.
14. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) PETALODES Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 613 bis) for Victoria.
Section 16. Polyporus. Thin, rigid. Strongly zonate,
with greyish zones.
15. PoLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) GALLO-PAVONIS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 756) for Queensland. Polyporus
subzonalis Cooke (No. 661) Lloyd says is a pale form of this.
Ere—December 5, 1917.
482 J. B. CLELAND AND E, CHEEL.
Section 17. Pileus yellowish-brown, gilvous. Hyphz
deep-yellow under the microscope.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 18. Grammocephalus group. Pileus marked with
raised lines.
16. PoLYPoRUsS (PETALOIDES) GRAMMOCEPHALUS Berk.
Lloyd states that P. muelleri Kalchbrenner, described
from Australia, is this species or a form of it. Oooke (No.
614) also places this fungus as a variety under P. grammo-
cephalus, recording it from New South Wales. Oooke gives
the typical form for Queensland and New Guinea and var.
Emerici for the same places. Lloyd in referring to P.
Emerici from India, says it is like the type of grammo-
cephalus but the pores are larger. Lloyd has identified for
us a specimen of P. grammocephalus from Mummulgum
Brush near Casino, Dec., 1916. He adds that the size of
the pores is variable.
17. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) PLATOTIS Berk.
Cooke (No. 615) says this is apparently only an abnormal
distorted condition of P. grammocephalus. Lloyd says that
from the colour, surface and pores it seems to be a thick
grammocephalus, “but is much too thick, and apparently
does not belong to the section,”’
18. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) FUSCO-LINEATUS Berk.
This is given by Oooke (No. 617) for Queensland. Lloyd
says it is an obese form of grammocephalus with larger
pores.
19. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) DORCADIDEUS Berk.
Oooke, (No. 616). Recorded for Queensland.
Section 19. Polyporus. Species dark coloured, almost
black at least when dry.
a. Seteefera.
20. PoLYPoRUs (PETALOIDES) MEGALOSPORUS Mont.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 483
O. G. Lloyd (Mycol. Notes, No. 48, 1917, p. 684) thus
describes a specimen forwarded by one of us :—‘ Pileus sub-
orbicular, 2—3 cm., laterally attached by a short stipe-like
base. Oolour pale alutaceous. Surface with patches of
brown branched hairs. Oontext and pore tissue pale alu-
taceous. Pores large, round or slightly elongated, about
+mm.indiameter. The pore mouths bear brown branched
setze. Spores 6 X 12y, cylindrical, elliptical, hyaline,
transparent, guttulate, smooth.’ Lloyd adds that the
species is usually much larger and of a darker colour. Our
_plants were obtained at Wingham Brush (January, 1917.
Spores by our measurements 8°5 to 10°4 x 5°5y).
b. Without setze.
21. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) OBNIGER Lloyd.
Lloyd (Mycol. Notes, No. 45, 1917, p. 632) thus describes
the specimen received from Dr. F. Stoward of Western
Australia:—‘Pileus (about 2 x 3 x 7 cm.) with a short
lateral stipe, thick, rigid. Surface smooth, black. Context
pale isabelline. Pores minute, round, with greyish cinere-
ous mouths (when dry), decurrent to base of stem. Cystidia
none. Spores not found.’
Section 20. Polyporus. Coloured context and_ spores.
Included under Ganodermus.
Section 21. Aberrant species forming ‘‘new genera.”’
22. POLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) POCULA Schweinitz.
Lloyd says this species occurs in Australia. Cooke
records P. cupuliformis (No. 590) for Victoria, which Lloyd
says is P. pocula.
Section 22. Polystictus. Pileus pale, usually spathulate
or flabelliform, thin. Pores in a thin layer, white or pale,
minute.
23. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) MUTABILIS Berk.
Cooke (No. 736) gives this species for Queensland.
484 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
24. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) OBOVATUS Junghuhn.
Cooke gives Polystictus Adami (No. 735) = Polyporus
dilatatus (sic) Berk. Lloyd points out that P. Adami and
P. dilatus are really P. obovatus, as is P. rasipes (Cooke,
No. 747).
25. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) STEREINUS Berk.
Cooke (No. 741) gives this species, which he says equals
P. cognatus Kalchb., for Queensland and New South Wales.
We have specimens, identified by Lloyd, from Mount Irvine
(June) and Mount Wilson (June—spores 4°8 to 5°6 x 2°5,);
also from Leura, June.
Section 23. Polystictus. Microporus. Lateral stem.
26. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) AFFINIS Nees.
Cooke (No. 740) records the species for Queensland and
New South Wales.
27. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) LUTEUS Nees.
Cooke (No. 737) gives this species for the same ‘two
States. Lloyd says it runs into P. affinis. Lloyd thinks
that P. porphyritis (Cooke, No. 734) is probably the same
as P. luteus. Cooke gives this form for Queensland. P.
carneo-niger (Cooke, No. 738) Lloyd says has the same
characters as P. luteus, except its black colour.
28. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) FLABELLIFORMIS Klotzsch.
Cooke (No. 733) records this for Victoria, New South
Wales and Queensland. Lloyd has identified specimens for
us from Mummulgum Brush near Casino (December, 1916). -
These were found growing in company with typical P. -
xanthopus, into which, as Lloyd has remarked to us, it
seems to run. We also have it from near Wauchope
(February, 1916).
Section 24. Polyporus (corresponding to Polystictus but
thicker) with colour and pores of the section Microporus.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 485
29. PoLYPORUS (PETALOIDES) SUBFULVUS Berk.
Lloyd has identified for us, at first with some doubt, three
collections. The localities of two of these are not noted,
the third was from Leura (June, 1916). The specimens are
in most part resupinate with a raised edge.
Section 25. Red Species.
30. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) SANGUINEUS Linn.
The common and beautiful vermilion-coloured leathery
fungiso frequently found throughout Australia on fallen
logs and sticks are referable to the species P. sanguineus
and P. cinnabarinus. They materially assist, by their
penetrating mycelium, in the decay of the substance on
which they grow; though this is usually worthless material,
occasionally useful timber is also attacked. In colour and
| general appearance these two species are identical, the
only difference being that the former is much thinner and
contracted with a short lateral stem-like base, whilst the
latter has generally a broad attachment. In the neigh-
bourhood of Sydney, typical instances of both forms may
be met with, though the latter is more common. Since P.
sanguineus is the tropical species and the other the tem-
perate one, the occurrence of both might be expected in
this area, the thinner form being met with in sheltered
areas, especially in swamps, where moisture is abundant.
So close is the resemblance between the two, that we
referred the question of their being merely varieties of one
species to C. G. Lloyd. In his reply he states that he con-
siders them entitled to separate names, although they are
really only the tropical and temperate forms of the same
species. Headds that herarely has difficulty in classifying
specimens from various parts of the world, except in the
case of occasional specimens from districts which may be
classed as between the tropics and the temperate regions.
——
486 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Compared with specimens kindly forwarded by Lloyd, we
have typical examples of P. sanguineus, growing on fallen
logs, from Laurieton, Tuggerah (spores 4°4 to 5°5 x 2°2y),
Terrigal and Berry (spores slightly curved, 5°2 to 6 x 2»).
Most of the specimens from the immediate neighbourhood
of Sydney approach more to the P. sanguineus type than
to P. cinnabarinus, but specimens collected at Wellington,
Bumberry and Forbes, in the dry west of this state, and at
Adelaide, are definitely P. cinnabarinus. We have also got
P. cinnabarinus at Kew (May) which is close to Laurieton
where we got P..sanguineus.
The following specimens of P. sanguineus are in the
National Herbarium, Sydney:—Atherton, Q. (E. Betche,
September, 1901); Humundi, Q. (J. Staer, September, 1912);
North Queensland (Rev. W. W. Watts, July, 1913); Lord
Howe Island (Rev. W. W. Watts, July, 1911); Russell Island,
Solomon Group (W. W. Froggatt); Naru Island, Ocean
Island Group (F. W.Steel, June, 1908); Funafuti (Mr. Finckh,
1898); New Hebrides (W. T. Quaife, May, 1903 and W. W.
Froggatt, July, 1913); Wahroonga (Staer, July, 1910), a
specimen sent to Lloyd, more thick and obese than usual.
Cooke (No. 746) records it for all the States.
These two species may be found almost at any time of
the year after sufficient rain on fallen logs.
31. POLYSTICTUS CINNABARINUS Jacquin.
This is the thicker vermilion species usually found in the
cooler parts of Australia. As it is without a stem, it does
not strictly belong here, but is so placed by Lloyd on
account of its affinity with P. sanguineus. Amongst over
flfty collections in the National Herbarium, Sydney, the
following localities are represented:—Sydney district,
Kahibah near Newcastle, Smoky Cape, Upper Hastings,
Bulli district, Hill Top, Nepean, Richmond, Blue Mountains,
Bathurst, Cobar, Nyngan, Brewarrina, Inverell, Hillgrove,
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI, 487
Pilliga, Kangaroo Valley, Wamberal, Burrenjuck, Mount
Jellore via Mittagong, Rockhampton (Q.), Adelaide (S.A.),
Western Australia. The hosts comprise :—Melaleuca
styphelioides, M. parviflora, nectarine, peachtree (dead
limbs), and dead Banksia (Sydney district); red box
(Nyngan); decayed ironbark (Conjola); and dead jarrah
(Bow River), W.A.
Section 26. Polystictus. White species.
No Australian species recorded.
Other species of Petaloides.
32. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) PENTZHEI Kalch.
This was unknown to Lloyd.
33. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) INTONSUS Berk.
Cooke, No. 742. The type from Tasmania does not exist
(Lloyd).
34. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) PEROXYDATUS Berk.
Cooke, No. 744. The type from New South Wales does
not exist (Lloyd).
35. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) LIBUM Berk.
Cooke, No. 745. Queensland, New South Wales. Lloyd
says the type is inadequate.
36. POLYSTICTUS (PETALOIDES) VERNICIFLUUS Berk.
Cooke, No. 790, Queensland, Tasmania. The type is
inadequate (Lloyd). :
Sixth Division—-MERISMUS.
Section 27. Spores globose, echinulate.
37. POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) BERKELEYI Fries.
‘Pilei imbricate, arising from a short, thick stem or root
stalk. Surface pale, dull, slightly tomentose and obscurely
zoned. Context 4 to1 in. thick, white. Spores globose,
8, distinctly echinulate.’—Lloyd.
488 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
We have found this large and handsome species, of which
Lloyd has identified specimens, growing near the base of
trunks in the Lisarow district in May 1915 and June 1916.
The caps are buffy to bright yellowish tan, velvety to
strigose, obscurely but definitely zoned, the growing edges
velvety and rolled over. The pores are rather irregular
and creamy white. The caps arise from an irregular base
as somewhat stipitate, superimposed brackets. The flesh >
is white, somewhat brownish under the crust; it is rather
juicy and the juice milky. Spores white, warty, 7+.
Section 28. Spores smooth, hyaline. Plants fleshy.
38. POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) FRONDOSUS FI. Dan.
Cooke (No. 618) records the species for Tasmania.
39. POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) ANTHRACOPHILUS Cooke.
Lloyd says that this species is only known from one or
two collections at Kew from Australia. Cooke, No. 622,
lists it for Victoria, Queensland and South West Australia.
40. PoLyPpoRUS (MERISMUS) MULTIPLEX Berk.
Lloyd says this fungus is known from a single specimen
at Kew from Mueller, Australia, a description of which
he believes was never formally published.
Section 29. Merismus—Polystictus. Thin plants having
the habits of the section Merismus.
41, PoLystictus (MERISMUS) RIDLEYI Massee.
Lloyd mentions that this is known from one collection at
Kew from Tasmania.
Section 30. Merismus caseosus.
42. POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) SULPHUREUS Fries.
Recorded by Oooke (No. 624) for Queensland and Tas-
mania.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 489
42a. PoLYPORUS (MERISMUS) SULPHUREUS var. WILSONIANUS
Lloyd.
Lloyd (Letter 53, 1914, Note 179) records P. Wilsonianus,
aform of P. sulphureus, from the Rev. James Wilson,
Victoria. He states it differs from typical P. sulphureus
in the very thin flesh, 1—2 mm. thick, and in the piriform
not globose spores.
43, PoLYPORUS (MERISMUS) RETIPORUS Cooke.
Cooke (No. 625) gives this species for Victoria and Queens-
land. Wakefield (Kew Bull., 1914, p. 157) says that speci-
mens in Kew Herbarium from Victoria labelled P. retiporus
are P. australiensis (which see, Sect. Apus, Polyporus). The
acceptance of this as an Australian species should therefore
be received with doubt. Lloyd saysit is like P. sulphureus,
but with larger pores and firmer context, and thinks it will
prove to be only a form of this species.
1144, POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) INTYBACEOUS Fries.
Cooke, No. 619. Not mentioned by Lloyd.
145, POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) SCABRIUSCULUS Fries.
Cooke (No. 621) records this for Australia. Lloyd says
no type exists.
146. POLYPORUS (MERISMUS) L&TUS Cooke.
Cooke (No. 623). Not mentioned by Lloyd. |
Section 31. Conglobatus carnosus. No Australian species
recorded.
Section 32. Conglobatus, Fomes. No Australian species
recorded.
Section 32a. Merismatoid.
47. POLYPORUS ROSETTUS Lloyd.
‘Submerismatoid. Proceeding froma hard, woody base,
it divides into a number of short, irregular lobes. Pores
1 Position under Section unknown.
490 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
small, round, irregular, white. Oontext very hard, white.
Surface fuliginous. Spores 5 xX 3y, hyaline, piriform.”
Described from Australian specimens by Lloyd (Mycol.
Notes, No. 43, 1916, p. 601).
Specimens have been identified for us by Lloyd. We
have found it growing as a large mass at the burnt base of
a dead tree at Katoomba in June, 1916 (spores 4°8 x 2°5 to
3°54). We have also specimens on burnt wood from Mount
Wilson in June, 1915 (spores 4 to 5 x 2°5 to 3°4y).
Seventh Division—SPONGIOSUS.
Section 33. Context pale or white. Spores white.
48. POLYPORUS (SPONGIOSUS) RUFESCENS Persoon.
Cooke (No. 600) records the species for Victoria, Queens-
land and Western Australia. P. biennis, recorded by Cooke
(No. 599) for Queensland, and P. proteiporus (No. 601) also
given by Cooke for the same State, are both, Lloyd states,
P. rufescens.
49. PoLyPORUS (SPONGIOSUS) HYSTRICULUS Cooke.
Cooke (No. 620) records this for Victoria. Known from
a single specimen at Kew (Lloyd).
Section 34. Context deeply coloured. Spores supposed
to be white.
50. PoLyPoRuS (SPONGIOSUS) SCHWEINITZII Fries.
This species is parasitic on the roots at the bases of tree
trunks, and is said to be a destructive parasite. It may be
readily recognised by its irregular cap, sometimes four or
more inches across, which is rugged and has a bright fer-
ruginous colour. The stem is sometimes very short, some-
times several inches long, rugged and irregular and dark
ferruginous brown. The pores are rather small, run down
on to the stem andare greyish-yellow. Often the caps of
several adjacent plants grow into each other.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 49},
Cooke (No. 597) gives this polypore for Queensland. Lloyd
says P. tabulceformis (Cooke, No. 598, Queensland) is the
same species. We have the following collections:—Grafton
(April, 1912); Lisarow (May, 1915); Terrigal (June, 1914);
Sydney; at base of living Angophora lanceolata, Sydney
(March); National Park (July); near Wauchope (February).
Spores spherical to oval, 3°5y, 5°2 X 3°Ov. Milson Island,
Hawkesbury River, specimens (April, 1915) have spores
irregularly spherical, 3°4 to 4°24, whilst those of the Lisarow
ones are7 X 5'2u. ‘The pores do not seem large and the
orifices are pallid greyish.
One of our specimens was sent to Lloyd who says:—*My
first impression was that it was not P. Schweinitzii, but.
on comparing it, I do not note any real difference. The
pores are smaller. It does not colour potash solution yellow
as does P. Schweinitzii, and the appearance of the pore
tissue is not the same under the microscope. Still 1 would
not know how to point out any real difference. It is the
first specimen I have from Australia. With us it is usually
in pine-woods.’
Section 35. Context deeply coloured. Spores coloured,
but often faintly.
51. POLYSTICTUS (SPONGIOSUS) TOMENTOSUS Fries.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 724) for Victoria and Queensland.
Bighth Division—PHULLOPORUS.
Section 36. Pelloporus Polyporus. Oontext fleshy, tough,
rather brittle, mostly more obese than the next section.
02. POLYPORUS (PELLOPORUS) LUTEO-NITIDUS Berk.
Recorded in Cooke (No. 725) for Queensland.
Section 37. Pelloporus Polystictus. Context thin, flexible.
53. POLYSTICTUS (PELLOPORUS) PERENNIS Linn.
Given by Cooke (No. 726) for Queensland.
499 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
54, POLYSTICTUS (PELLOPORUS) OBLECTANS Berk.
Lloyd considers that the Australian plant is specifically
distinct from P. cinnamoneus which it closely resembles,
but differs in having large pores and more erect fibrils on
the pileus. Cooke (No. 728) gives P. oblectans for Victoria,
Queensland, Western Australia and Tasmania. In view of
what Lloyd says, the record of P. cinnamoneus for ‘Aus-
tralia’ (Cooke, No. 727) had better be considered a mis-
identification for P. oblectans. Lloyd says that Fries con-
sidered P. bulbipes (Cooke, No. 729 = P. cladonia Berk.,
and P. perdurus Kalch.) to be P. oblectans. Cooke’s
record of P. parvulus (No. 730) for Victoria must also be
considered that of a synonym (Lloyd).
This small pliable (when fresh) cinnamon-coloured poly-
pore is common in the Sydney district in autumn, especially
in sandy soil (April). We make the spores pale brownish,
7 to 7°3 X 5°2p (Lloyd gives 8 X 54). We have it also from
the Blue Mountains (April) and Bumberry (Oct.); also from
Ararat, Victoria (H. J. Semmens, No. 5).
The following collections are in the National Herbarium,
Sydney:—Parramatta (H.C., March, 1908); Upper Lane
Cove (Miss P. Clarke, 1913); Cheltenham (H.C., and A. A.
Hamilton, Feb., 1911); Gladesville (Miss M. Flockton, Feb.,
1911); Cook’s River (A.A.H., June, 1908); Neutral Bay
(J.B.0., May, 1910); Hill Top (H.C., Feb., March); Lawson
(D. Wiles, 1912); Leura (A.A.H., March and T. Steel, Feb.);
Scarborough (A.A.H., May, 1913); Milson Island, Hawkes-
bury River (J.B.C., July, 1912).
Specimens obtained at Mount Lofty, South Australia, in
July 1914, by one of us, have slightly stouter stems than is
usual in New South Wales specimens, and some collected
by us in Western Australia have this character still more
pronounced and the pileus not so silky-lookintg.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 493
Ninth Division—OVIN US.
Section 38. With sclerotium.
| We propose to deal more fully withthe Australian species
in this section in a separate paper. |
55. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) MYLITT@ Cooke.
This Polyporus is the fruiting body of the well-known
‘Native Bread’ and has been rarely seen. The ‘Native
Bread’ itself is commoner and consists of a large rounded
mass of fungal hyphee often several pounds in weight. From
this buried mass, when favourable opportunities arise, the
fruiting bodies develop and appear above ground.
56. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) MINOR-MYLITT (Berk.)
A smaller form of ‘Native Bread,’ referred to by Berkeley
as ‘Mylitta minor,’ has fruiting bodies with dark brown
caps, very different in appearance from the white and ‘ yolk
of egg’ ones of the larger Mylitta. We propose to dis-
tinguish it as above by Berkeley’s name. Itis not uncom-
mon in New South Wales. .
57. POLYPORUS(OVINUS ?) BASILAPILOIDES McAlpine& Tepper.
The ‘stone-making fungus,’ described by McAlpine and
Tepper as ‘Laccocephalum basilapiloides,’ and from the
description doubtfully referred by Lloyd to the Division
Amaurodermus, is from an examination of the type made
by us certainly not an Amaurodermus, having elongated,
smooth, white spores. It is probably referable to Ovinus,
and from its false sclerotium to this section.
Section 39. Stipe usually mesopodal. Pores small.
58. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) OVINUS Schaeffer.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 583) for Victoria.
Section 40. Stipe central. Pores large.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 41. Stipe usually excentric or irregular. Pores
small.
494 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
59. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) CONFLUENS Albertini.
Cooke (No. 620) records the species for Queensland and
Lord Howe Island.
Section 42. Stipe excentric. Pores large.
60. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) PES-CAPR& Persoon.
Cooke (No. 584) records it for Victoria.
Section 43. Melanopus. Pores large.
61. PoLypoRus (OVINUS) SQUAMOSUS Fries.
Cooke (No. 603) records it for Queensland. Favolus
Boncheanus Klotsch (Cooke, No. 896, Queensland) is a
“small smoothish form of squamosus with uncoloured stipes’
—tLloyd.
A specimen growing on wood obtained by Miss P. Clarke
at Chatswood, in April, 1914, we are referring to this
species though uncertain about it. The edge of the pileus
is thin, irregular and reflexed. The surface is earthy-brown
and covered with small scurfy scales. The pores are
minute, very shallow, whitish and decurrent on to the
almost central dark brown tomentose stem. The whole
is somewhat flabelliform and slightly depressed, 23 ins.
broad and about the same in height.
Lloyd (Letter 53, 1914, Note 174) records a specimen
from J. Simmonds, Australia. It differed from Huropean
examples in having smaller, innate scales and in the stem
not being black.
61a. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) SQUAMOSUS var. LENTINOIDES
_ (P. lentinoides Hennings).
In March, 1914, one of us collected on burnt ground at
Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, N.S.W., a large stipitate
polypore 6 ins. in diameter, growing deeply and possibly
attached to an underground root. The pileus was slightly
convex, reddish tan and smooth. The flesh was thick (2
in.), white and rather soft and spongy. The pores, 2 in.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 495
deep, were lacerated, thin and pure white or slightly creamy.
There was a more or less central stipe 3 ins. long and 14
ins. thick, apparently whitish but covered with adherent
sandy dirt. From the base arose a slender secondary stem
bearing a small deformed pileus attached to the larger one;
the spores were elongated, white, 8°6 to10°4 x 3°8. Lloyd
has kindly identified this as Polyporus lentinoides Henn.,
originally from Brazil. He adds:—‘‘In reality only a scale-
less form of Polyporus squamosus with which it agrees in
all particulars excepting the scales. Practically the same
plant, but a little more fleshy, is known in Europe as
Polyporus Roskovii Fr.”’
62. PuLYPORUS (OVINUS) TUMULOSUS Cooke.
Given by Cooke (No. 586) for Queensland.
63. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) TASMANICUS Massee.
Known from one collection from Tasmania at Kew
{Lloyd). We have a specimen collected at Neutral Bay,
Sydney (March, 1915).
Section 44. Melanopus. Pores small.
64, POLYPORUS (OVINUS) HARTMANNI Cooke.
This is a thick, fleshy polypore with a rich somewhat
chestnut-brown, rather velvety cap, and a short thick stem
attached excentrically and not centrally, which is also dark
brown and velvety. It is found growing near the base of
trees, and appears to be parasitic and of some importance
from a forestry point of view.
Cooke (No. 585) gives this species for Queensland.
We obtained a clump of this species on the ground at
Bulli Pass, N.S.W., in April 1914. The largest were 3 ins.
in diameter with an excentric stipe. The pores were
minute and whitish. Our specimens agree exactly with
the description given by Lloyd, but the spores are 7 to 8°5
x 3d, whilst he gives them as 12 x 5u. Lloyd has kindly
confirmed their identification for us.
496 J. B, CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
We have also specimens from Gladesville (M. Flockton,
determined by Lloyd who gives the spore as elongated, 5 x
12, hyaline, smooth); Wamberal (H.C., April, 1912);
Jellore Creek, via Mittagong, on roots of Hucalyptus (H.C.,
April, 1916).
1165. POLYPORUS (OVINUS) MYELODES (P. myclodes, err. typ.)
Kalch.
Unknown to Lloyd. Cooke (No. 587) records it for
Queensland. |
Tenth Division—LBENTUS.
Section 45. Lentus. Pores small.
(a) White.
66. PoLyporus (LENTUS) TRICHOLOMA Montague.
Cooke (No. 592) gives this for Queensland. As regards
L. similis (Cooke, No. 593), Lloyd says the type is very
scanty, but is probably this species. Polyporus stipitarius
is L. tricholoma (Lloyd). He says that P. Armitii, referred
by Cooke to P. stipitarius, is surely not so if the figure in
*“Grevillea”’ is at all like it. No type of P. Armitii exists.
(b) Greyish or fuliginous brown.
67. POLYPORUS (LENTUS) BRUMALIS Pers.
Cooke (No. 589) gives this species for Queensland.
(ec) Colour yellow or reddish-brown.
68. POLYPORUS (LENTUS) VIRGATUS Berk.
We have specimens, identified by Lloyd, found on a fallen
trunk at Lisarow in June, 1916.
(d) Microporus. Thin, rigid, with minute white pores
ina very thin layer. Colour reddish-bay or sienna
brown.
69. PoLypoRus (LENTUS) XANTHOPUS Fries.
Cooke (No. 732) records this for Victoria, New South
Wales, Queensland and New Guinea. IL. cupreonitens isa
1 Position under Section unknown.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 497
synonym. Lloyd says that no type exists of P. quadrans
Berk. (Cooke, No. 731) which from the description seems
to be L. xanthopus. We have specimens of a variety of
L. xanthopus from Melville Island, Northern Territory (W.
S. Campbell, 1911) which possibly is L. quadrans. They
resemble a very short-stemmed L. xanthopus in all par-
ticulars, save that the pores are a dark fawn to cinnamon.
The margin of the pileus is pale, not brown as should be the
case with L. quadrans. |
We have typical forms from the Northern Territory (per
South Australian Museum); Eumundi, Q. (J. Staer, 1911);
Atherton near Cairns, Q.(H. Betche, 1901 and R. Mitchell,
1911); Kuranda near Cairns (A. J. Vogan, 1910); Barron
Falls, Q. (Mrs. Fraser, Sep., 1917); Rockhampton, Q. (D.
Dixon); between Cooktown and Oairns (W. Seymour); Mar-
shall Falls, Alstonville, N.S.W. (D. Tanner, Sep., 1911);
Mummulgum Brush near Casino (J.B.C., Dec., 1916, grow-
ing in company with Polystictus flabelliformis, both
identified by Lloyd); Port Moresby, New Guinea (Mr. Pratt,
1911); Russell Island, Solomons (W. W. Froggatt, 1909).
70. PoLYPORUS (LENTUS) ARCULARIUS Batsch.
This is a common species, found growing on fallen logs
and half-buried pieces of wood. Beyond assisting in dis-
integrating fallen timber, it is of no importance from a
forestry point of view. It has usually a yellow-brown cap,
up to 14 ins. in diameter, depressed in the centre and some-
times slightly scaly, the pores are large, and the stem is
central, slender, and coloured like the cap.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 591) for Victoria, New South
Walesand Queensland. Lloyd says that Favolus squamifer
Berk. (Cooke, No. 895) is close to, if not the same as, L.
arcularius. Polyporus alveolarius (Cooke, No. 594) Lloyd
says, from the figure, is L. arcularius. Of P. collybioides
Kalch., recorded for Australia, Lloyd says the type is in-
Fr—December 5, 1917. :
498 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
adequate, and Cooke says it is Synonymous with P. alveo-
larius (i.e. L. arcularius).
This species is fairly common round Sydney and the
Hawkesbury River district (records from January to March
and August to December). The largest specimen we have
measures 14 ins. across. In some, the scales of the pileus
are very dark, as is the stem. Spores white, elongated,
ends rather pointed, 7°2 to 8 xX 2to 3°4v. Also on living
trunks of Eucalyptus rostrata, Moree, January, 1917;
Narrabri, November (spores 8 < 5); Mount Irwin (Darnell-
Smith), January, 1915; Flinders Island, Bass Straits,
November, 1912.
The following collections are in the National Herbarium,
Sydney :—Helensburgh (A. A. Hamilton, October, 1913);
Penshurst, (EH. Cheel, February, 1908, January, 1911);
Botanic Gardens (HE. Cheel, December, 1907), on trunk of
Ligustrum sinensis; Randwick (R. Nichol, March, 1910);
Narrabeen (EH. Cheel, November, 1908); Schofields (H. Cheel,
December, 1908); Cook’s River (A. A. Hamilton, March,
1909); near Dubbo (J. B. Cleland, September, 1911); St.
Mary’s(A. A. Hamilton, August, 1910); Kogarah (H. Cheel,
‘October, 1909); Rookwood (Miss A. Spencer, July, 1910);
National Park (F. Hallman, November, 1908).
71. PoLyPoRUS (LENTUS) LENTUS Berk.
Cooke (No. 588) records this for Victoria.
Section 46. Lentus. Subgelatinous when fresh (tending
‘towards Laschia). No species recorded for Australia.
Section 47. Lentus. Aberrant species as to shape. In-
fundibuliform, gibbous or very minute. No species recorded
for Australia. |
Of Polyporus pisiformis Kalchbrenner, Australia,
(Cooke, No. 596, Victoria), Lloyd says:—‘* ‘Type’ is a little
‘incipient sessile undeveloped pad, about the size and appear-
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 499
ance of a wart. Should never have been named at all, and
most certainly should never have been put in the section
of Lentus of stipitate fungi where Cooke placed it.”’
Bleventh Division—MBULANOPUS.
Sectzon 48. Stipe pleuropodal or central, rarely lateral.
Pores minute.
72. PoLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) VARIUS Pers.
Lloyd has identified for us specimens from Mummulgum
Brush near Casino (December, 1918). These plants are
larger (2 ins. across) and stouter than our common P,
Pancheri. The cap is of a brownish tan and slightly stri-
ate, the pores are pallid whitish.
72a. POLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) VARIUS var. BLANCHETIANUS
Mont.
Lloyd considers this a small form of P. varius, and has
identified as P. Blanchetianus specimens from Miss M.
Flockton from Port Jackson.
72b. POLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) VARIUS var. PANCHERI
Patouillard.
Lloyd says that this and seven other ‘species’ might
easily be considered as forms of M. varius (Cooke, No. 608).
M. picipes (Cooke, No. 605) is a black form of M. varius
with a velvety stem. M. dictyopus (Cooke, No. 613) is the
typical smaller form of M. varius-picipes, usually known
as M. infernalis of Berkeley (Cooke, No. 607), to which
latter the Australian form, M. Pancheri, is referred at Kew.
Of Polyporus Strangeri Kalch., Lloyd says that the type is
unknown, but from the description it seems to be M. dic-
tyopus (i.e. M. Pancheri). M. elegans (Cooke, No. 609) is
another variety with such a constant smaller size that it
is generally held to be a good species (Lloyd). From these
remarks of Lloyd, it seems best, at present at any rate, to
consider all these Australian records as belonging to the
500 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
one species (or a variety of one species) and to refer them
to M. Pancheri (or M. varius var. Pancheri) pending tae
examination and comparison of further material.
This is a small species, occasionally with a cap as large
as 14 inches across, growing on the ground usually attached
to buried sticks or wood. Though some specimens are
white or pale coloured, the cap and stem are usually a dark
sooty brown, the former being somewhat striate, whilst
the pores are minute and white or pallid.
Our Australian specimens vary considerably amongst
themselves. The stipe, even in specimens taken together,
varies from about central to quite lateral. The other
points of difference affect more colonies than individuals.
The colour of the cap varies from almost black through a
dark greyish-brown to a lighter greyish-fawn, and is in one
specimen a dark chestnut. In several, the plants were at
first pure white, later becoming pale stony-brown. The
striations are more or less in evidence. The pores are
usually 5°2 to 8 X 2°5 to 3v, in the chestnut-coloured speci-
men being 3°5 to 5 X 24. Growing usually attached to
buried pieces of wood (in this resembling M. melanopus).
Sydney district, common (January, March to June); Bulli
(April); Hawkesbury River; Lisarow (June)—all in New
South Wales. Mount Lofty, S.A. In the National Her-
barium, Sydney, there are specimens from the following
localities:—Longueville, on dead stump (H.O., May, 1909);
Leura (A. A. Hamilton, March, 1910, and T. Steel, Feb.,
1911); Mosman (A.A.H., May, 1912); Hill Top (H.C., July,
1915); Gladesville (Miss M. Flockton, April, 1916).
73. PoLYPoRUS (MELANOPUS) MELANOPUS Schumann.
Cooke (No. 604) records this for Victoria and Queensland.
Section 49. Stipe pleuropodal or central. Pores medium.
No Australian species recorded.
x ‘
bo
>, YT t=
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 501
Section 50. Stiple pleuropodal or central. Pores large,
favoloid.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 51. Stipe lateral but the pileus is not spathulate.
Pores minute.
74. POLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) NEPHRIDIUS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 739) for Queensland.
Section 52. Stipe lateral but pileus not spathulate. Pores
medium or large.
75. POLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) PUSILLUS Fries.
Recorded by Cooke, under Favolus pusillus (No. 898) for
Tasmania.
Section 53. Petaloides. Stipe lateral. Pileus spathulate,
tapering to the stipe.
76. POLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) GUILFOYLEI Berk.
Originally described from Australia. Cooke (No. 611),
Queensland.
1177, POLYPORUS (MELANOPUS) GLABRATUS Kalchb.
Cooke (No. 610), Victoria. The type was unknown to
Lloyd. |
II. SYNOPSIS OF THE GENUS FOMES.
(According to C. G. Lloyd.)
First General Division, Pattipus. Context and pores pale, white,
isabelline or pale yellowish, pale rose or cinnamon. Spores
hyaline.
Section 54. Large. Context white, soft, friable.
ny 55. Large. Context white, hard.
os 56. Small. Context white or isabelline.
a 57. Context pale yellow.
a 58. Context isabelline, hard.
e, 59, Context isabelline, soft, punky.
1 Position under Section unknown.
502 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Section 60. Context pinkish cinnamon.
. 61. Context cinnamon.
* 62. Context pink or rose colour.
Second General Division, DEPALLENs.
Section 63. Pores darker than context, usually fading out in old
specimens.
Third General Division, AURANTIACUS. Context orange rufous.
Section 64. Spores hyaline (or very pale coloured).
- 65. Spores coloured.
Fourth General Division, BicoLoris.
Section 66. With bicoloured tissue, the pores a dark brown,.
the flesh a light buff. |
Fifth General Division, FuNaLis.
Section 67. Pileus with a thick pad of dense, brown hairs.
analagous to section Funalis in Polystictus.
Sixth General Division, Fuscus. Context some shade of brown,
Spores not truncate.
Section 68. Setz none. Spores hyaline.
is 69. Sete present. Spores hyaline.
. 70. Sete none. Spores coloured.
. 71. Setze present. Spores coloured.
Seventh General Division, GaNopEeRmMus. Context brown. Spores
truncate.
Section 72. Fomes-Ganodermus. Pores with thin walls.
35 73. Ponderosus-Fomes-Ganodermus. Pores with thick —
walls.
a 74. Stipitate Fomes of the Section Ganodermus.
First General Division—PALLIDUS. !
Context and pores pale, white, isabelline, or pale yellowish,
pale rose or cinnamon. Spores hyaline.
Section 54. Large. Context white, soft, friable.
No Australian species recorded.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 503
Section 55. Large. Oontext white, hard.
78. FOMES CONNATUS Fries.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 71) for Queensland.
79. FOMES ANNOSUS Fries.
Syn. Polyporus hypopolius Kalch., probably, (Cooke, No.
658); Fomes contrarius B. and O. (Cooke, No. 694).
Recorded by Cooke, under the above two synonyms, for
Queensland.
Section 56. Small. Context white or isabelline.
80. FomMES CLELANDII Lloyd, (Mycol. Notes, No. 40, Feb.
1916, p. 550).
‘**Pileus sessile, small, 1 to 2 cm. in diameter. Surface
black, regular, dull. Context isabelline. Pores minute
with white mouths. Cystidia none. Spores elliptical, 6
to 7 x 7 to 8$u, subhyaline, opaque, smooth. When this
was received it was referred with doubt (cfr. Note 297,
Letter 59) to Fomes scutellatus, an American species, with
which it exactly accords to the eye. We have since found
that the spores of Fomes scutellatus are entirely different,.
and hence must re-name the Australian plant.’’—Lloyd.
Tuggerah (J.B.C., October, 1914).
81. FomMES OX8TENSIS Berk.
*“Pileus small, dimidiate, usually less than 2 cm. in
diameter, $ cm. thick, white, hard. Surface smooth, even,
with no distinct crust. Context and pores white. Pores
small, round, regular. Spores obovate, truncate at base,
hyaline, smooth, 12 to 14 < 8p.’’—Lloyd.
This species is very closely allied to the common Aus-
tralian Polyporus ochroleucus found so frequently on fence-
rails. In America it is found in the same situations. Lloyd
has identified for us as this species, a specimen found at
Lisarow in August, 1916 (spores truncate, 10°4 to12 x 7
to 7°54). Except that the pores are smaller than our
504 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Specimens of P. ochroleucus, it very closely resembles
this species. ¢
Section 57. Context pale yellow.
82. FOMES PINICOLA Swartz.
Syn. Fomes marginatus Fr. (Cooke, No. 677)—Lloyd.
‘*Pileus applanate or ungulate. Surface with a thin
resinous crust, at first white, soon reddish, finally black.
Context pale yellow, punky, but hard. Pores minute,
round. Pore layers about acm. thick, pale yellow, harder
than the context. Spores 3$ to 4 x 7 to 104, obovate,
hyaline, smooth.’’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke as Fomes marginatus for Victoria
and New South Wales.
Section 58. Context colour isabelline. Context hard.
| 83. FoMES HEMITEPHRUS Berk.
*‘Pileus ungulate, with dull surface, becoming dark in
old specimens, with indistinct crust (orange colouration
under the crust). Context hard, woody, yellowish isabelline
colour. Pores minute, hard, with concolorous tissue.”’
—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 711) for Victoria. Lloyd records
a specimen (under Fomes martius), presumably from New
South Wales, forwarded by W. W. Froggatt. Lloyd has
identified several specimens for us. We have them from
the following localities: —Mount Wilson and Mount Irvine,
June, 1915 (applanate, about an inch thick, with a zonate
pileus and an orange shade under the crust); Kurrajong ©
Heights; Leura (A. A. Hamilton, September, 1912); Tug-
gerah Lakes (S. J. Johnston, April, 1910); Belmore Falls
(E.C., September, 1907); also from Russell Falls, Tasmania
(H.0., March, 1910).
Section 59. Context isabelline, soft, punky.
No Australian species recorded.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 505
Section 60. Context pinkish cinnamon.
84. FOMES SEMITOSTUS Berk.
Syn. Fomes tasmanicus Berk, probably (Cooke, No. 695).
Recorded by Cooke, as above, for Tasmania.
85. FOMES DOCHMIUS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 678) for Queensland.
86. FOMES CONCAVUS Cooke.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 679) for Queensland.
Section 61. Context cinnamon.
87. FOMES FERREUS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 713) for Queensland.
Section 62. Context pink or rose colour.
88. TRAMETES CARNEA Nees.
Recorded by Cooke as Fomes carneus (No. 717) for Vic-
toria, South Australia and Queensland.
89. TRAMETES FEEI Fries.
Syn. Polystictus Feei Fries., Epic. 476; Cooke, Handb. of
Australian Fungi, No. 768. ‘‘Pileus thin, pink colour,
applanate (10 to14x43cm.) Surface appressed, fibrillose,
with a zonate effect, glaucescent. Context thin, punky.
Pores minute, round.’’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke, as above, for all the States except
South Australia.
In identifying for one of us (J.B.C.) a specimen as Tra-
metes Feei, Lloyd says it “‘corresponds to the Brazilian
plant, although the specimen isan evident Fomes.”? This
example was over a foot wide and about 3 ins. from front
to back. We have collected a similar specimen at Mount
Wilson in June, 1915. |
90. TRAMETES LILACINO-GILVA Berk.
Syn. Polystictus lilacino-gilvus Berk., Ann. Sci. Nat. III,
324; Oooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 767. ‘‘Pileus
506 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
applanate, usually thin, rose or pink colour, with surface
Strongly rugose, fibrillose. Context concolorous, punky.
Pores medium round, concolorous. Spores oblong, hyaline,
smooth, 4x 8. It differs (from T. Feet) in having notably
larger pores and more strongly fibrillose surface.’’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke for all the States except New South
Wales, and South Australia. Of this common species we
have many specimens, viz:—Milson Island, Hawkesbury
River, (J.B.O., May, August); Terrigal (J.B.C., June, 1914)
identified by Lloyd; Hill Top, (J.B.C., October, 1913) spores
elongated, oblique, 7 to 8°3 x 3°54—when moist pileus dark
brown, radiately fibrous, then light brown, not definitely
zoned, edge rounded and fluffy white, pores purplish-pink
and pruinose with spores; Berry (J.B.C., October, 1913,
spores 7 X 2°54); National Park, (July, 1916); Taree District
(H. Lyne, March, 1917); Victoria (September, 1913)—shed
Spores somewhat twisted, 7 to 8°5 x 3°54; Mount Lofty, S.A.
(J.B.C., July, 1914). In the National Herbarium, Sydney,
there are specimens from the following localities :—Smoky
Cape (F. W. Raffills, October, 1905); Chatswood (F.O. Love-
grove, August, 1903); Hornsby (A. A. Hamilton, October,.
1909); Wahroonga (J. Staer, July, 1910); Lidcombe (A.
Spencer, June, 1910); Grose Vale (Miss Campbell, Sept..,.
1912, duplicates of this determined by Lloyd); Gooseberry
Island, near Dapto (H.C., April, 1912); Upper Lane Cove
River (Miss P. Clarke, 1912); Gulgong; near Adelaide
(J.B.C., 1898); Western Australia (J.B.C., February, 1908).
90a. TRAMETES LILACINO-GILVA var. STOWARDII Lloyd.
As T. Stowardii, Lloyd describes (Mycol. Notes, No. 48,
1917, p. 683) a form of T. lilacino-gilva with a strongly
rugose pileus. Habitat Western Australia.
90b. TRAMETES LILACINO-GILVA var, EUCALYPTI Kalch.
Syn. Polystictus eucalypti Kalch, Grev. Iv, 73; Cooke,
No. 769.
Recorded by Cooke for Victoria and Queensland.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 5OT
91. TRAMETES PLEBEIA Berk.
Syn. Polyporus plebius (Cooke, No. 664).
Recorded by Cooke for Queensland.
92. TRAMETES ROSEA Lloyd.
T. rosea Lloyd, Letter 59, 1914, Note 302.
Lloyd’s description of the specimen sent to him by one
of us (J.B.C.) —the locality from which it came has not.
been noted—is as follows:—‘Context punky, dry, pale sal-
mon (light ochraceous salmon). Pores white, medium
large, 4 mm. diameter, indistinctly stratified, forming
imperfect layers in the manner of Homes annosus. Spores
3 X 5 mic., hyaline, smooth.’ He adds:—‘The specimen
received from you is evidently imperfectly developed. It is.
largely resupinate with imperfectly developed pilei. It ©
agrees exactly with Trametes roseola as to context colour
but differs from all other species in this section in having
large pores. Its method of pore development is much like
that of Fomes annosus. This is unnamed, similar to /’omes
annosus in pore development only. Pores much larger,
about five times. Context colour and texture different.’
93. TRAMETES CUPREO-ROSEA Berk.
‘Pileus thin, rigid, attached by a reduced base (6 x 9 X
+ cm.); surface striate fibrillose, pale rosy colour (pale buff).
Context thin, hard. Pores medium to large, $ mm., round,
at length long, sinuate, deedaloid, 4 x 2 mm., rigid, with
thin walls. Tissue concolorous.’—Lloyd.
Lloyd (Letter 63, 1916, p. 8) has identified specimens from
Dr. Stoward of Western Australia.
Second General Division—DBPADLLENS.
Section 63. Pores darker than the context, usually paling
out in old specimens.
94. FOMES LIGNOSUS Klotzsch.
Syn. Polyporus lignosus Klotsch (Cooke, No. 662).
Recorded by Cooke for Victoria.
508 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL,
Third General Division—AURANTIACUS.
Section 64. Context orange rufous. ‘Spores hyaline (or
very pale coloured).
95. FOMES KERMES Berk.
Syn. Fomes pyrrhocreas Cooke.
Lloyd has seen at Kew, under the above synonym, speci-
mens from Australia.
Section 65. Context orange rufous. Spores coloured.
No Australian species recorded.
Fourth General Division—BICOLORIS.
Section 66. Pores dark brown. Flesh light buff.
No Australian species recorded.
Fifth General Division—FUNALIS.
Section 67. Pileus with a thick pad of dense, brown hairs,
analogous to section Funalis in Polystictus.
No Australian species recorded.
Sixth General Division—FUSCUS. :
Section 68. Context brown. Setze,none. Spores hyaline.
A—Context light brown.
96. FOMES INFLEXIBILIS Berk.
Syn. Polyporus recurvus Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 699) for Queensland.
97. FOMES EXOTEPHRUS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 693) for Queensland.
B—Medium or Large Species.
98. FOMES FOMENTARIUS Linn.
‘ Pileus ungulate, with a hard, smooth, greyish crust.
Context punky, dark brown (antique brown). Pores minute,
with glaucous, pruinose mouths. Pore tissue paler than
the context. Setee, none. Spores hyaline, large, oblong,
©) X 16 mic.’—Lloyd.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 509:
Recorded by Cooke (No. 695) for New South Wales. We
have never met with it.
99. FOMES CALIGINOSUS Berk.
Lloyd states that Fomes endapalus Berk (Cooke, No. 704),
recorded for Queensland and New South Wales, has been
identified as this species. The specimens from Australia
that he has seen seem to him however to differ from young
plants of F. caliginosus.
C—Small Species, 1—3 cm.
No Australian species recorded.
D—Plants dark purplish black. Context dark brown,
with a purplish shade.
No species recorded for Australia.
Section 69. Context brown. Setze present. Spores hyaline.
A—Oontext Light Brown.
100. FOMES POMACEUS Persoon.
‘Pileus half unguliform, but usually more inclined to
take a subresupinate form with the pileus imperfectly
developed. Surface at first fulvous, tomentose on the
margin, later cinerous; after wintering turns dark, but not
black as in Fomes igniarius. Oontext fulvous brown
(amber brown), intermediate between the colour of context
of Fomes igniarius and robustus. Pores minute, round,
annual layers 5—6 mm. _ Setze usually abundant, with
thickened bases, projecting 12—16 mm. Spores globose,
hyaline, 5 — 6v.’’—Lloyd.
Lloyd states this species attacks plum, cherry, and other
cultivated trees. He has identified a specimen from Wes-
tern Australia (Letter 63, November 1916, p. 8—Dr. F. W.
Stoward).
101. FoMES RoBUsTUS Karsten.
*Pileus ungulate, with a hard, rimose, black crust. Oon-
text light fulvous. ‘Rhei’ colour would be the best name
510 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
for it, being the colour of commercial rhubarb root. Pores
minute, with pore tissues concolorous. Spores globose,
hyaline, 7-8, guttulate when fresh. No setz found by
me. (Lam informed that sete have been found in a Swedish
specimen)’—Lloyd.
We have the following specimens:—A large sporophore,
7i ins. wide, 5 ins. broad and 3 ins. deep (Milson Island,
Hawkesbury River, on fallen EKucalyptus, 1912); two small
sporophores, the largest 2 ins. broad, on Leptospermum sp.
(Mount Irvine, June 1915, spores not seen and no sete
detected—the small size of the branches of this shrub prob-
ably accounts for the small size of the fruiting body); a
small sporophore growing on the small trunk of Leptosper-
mum flavescens (Wiseman’s Ferry, August 1915, a few
doubtful colourless spores seen, no setee detected); medium
sized sporophore on Casuarina sp. (Stockton, October 1915,
spores spherical, 74, 7°5 <x 74, some doubtful sete seen);
locality not noted (spores hyaline, 7°3 to 54, no setee seen);
large specimen, locality not noted; on dead Kunzea cori-
folia (Sydney, May, 1917); on dead Casuarina (Kendall,
May, 1917); Narrabri, November, 1916; on Angophora
lanceolata (Sydney, October, 1916, hyaline spores, 5°5 to
8); near Wauchope (February, 1917); Manly (November,
1916, spores 7 to 8z); on living Eucalyptus rostrata (Moree,
January, 1917); on Angophora lanceolata, (Hawkesbury
River, November, 1916); at base of living EH. rostrata
(Adelaide Parklands, April, 1917, spores 5°5 to 7°24); on
living Robinia pseudacacia (near Adelaide, April, 1917).
In identifying another specimen for us in which we had
found pale brownish, almost hyaline, subspherical spores
(8°5 x 7, 7 x 5°2-) and no sete, Lloyd adds:—‘ I did not find
spores, but from context, colour, and your spore notes,
“almost colourless,’’ I judge it is this species. You have
F. robustus typically in Australia, also a form with sete.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 511
I have always found the spores of F. robustus, however,
hyaline.’ As we have met with these faintly tinted spores
in other specimens, possibly another species is involved.
The following are in the National Collection, Sydney:—
NewSouth Wales—Peakhurst (W. Buckingham, June, 1899);
Penshurst, on Hucalyptus (H.C., July, 1907); Botany (L.
Abrahams, November, 1908); Narrabeen (E.C., November,
1908); Gladesville (Miss M. Flockton, April, 1910) identified
by O. G. Lloyd; Hornsby (A. A. Hamilton, October, 1909);
Grose Vale (Miss Campbell, September, 1912) duplicates
determined by Lloyd; Centennial Park, Sydney, (W. Forsyth
June, 1909); Botanic Gardens on Banksia ericifolia (R.
Bruce, June, 1910); Brewarrina (W.W. Froggatt, July,1914)
duplicates determined by Lloyd; Casino (D. J. McAuliffe,
October, 1914); Kangaroo Flat, Walcha (W. Oraigie, Sep-
tember, 1909); Narrandera on Eucalyptus rostrata (D. G.
Stead, September, 1913). Lloyd (Letter 53, 1914) records
@ specimen from W. W. Froggatt, Australia, found on
Needlewood (Hakea sp.).
Tasmania—Hobart on Hucalyptus viminalis(H.O., March,
1910).
Western Australia—On tea-tree (Dr. Tidswell, June,
1909).
102. FOMES SETULOSUS Petch..
*Pileus ungulate, with a smooth, brownish surface. Con-
text fulvous (tawny of Ridgway), hard, woody, the pore
tissue a.shade lighter than the context. Pores very minute
with brown mouths. Pore layers 2—3 mm. wide. Spores
globose, hyaline, 8». Setze very abundant, with thick bases
and abruptly contracted and slender points, projecting 12
— 14p.’—Lloyd. Lloyd adds that the context colour differs
from that of F. robustus which on Ridgway’s scale is
yellow ochre; also that the setz are very abundant, but in
F. robustus rare or none. He says further, that in Aus-
512 J. B, CLELAND AND E. CHEEL,
tralia there seems to be an intermediate plant close to F.
robustus. This probably refers to a specimen recorded by
him (Letter 53, 1914) from J. Simmonds, Australia, as F.
robustus var. setulosus. He has determined as /. setulosus
specimens from Miss M. Flockton, probabiy from Port
Jackson district. |
103. FOMES CONCHATUS Persoon.
‘Pileus usually thin, conchoid, with a sulcate, brown
surface. Oontext light brown. Pores minute, concolorous.
Setze numerous, slender, with bases slightly thickened, pro-
jecting 20-28 mic. Spores hyaline, globose, 43-5 mic.’
Lloyd. |
Recorded by Cooke (No. 680) for Queensland and Victoria.
We have specimens, found growing on a Casuarina stump
at Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, in March 1915, which
Lloyd has identified as this species, adding ‘ agrees in all
characters, though thicker than the usual Huropean col-
lections’; some specimens from this source havea blackish,
rimose crust like that of # rimosus. Another collection,
evidently the same species, found growing through the
bark of a Peppermint Gum (Eucalyptus piperita) in a more
or less Poria fashion with illdeveloped pilei, at Neutral
Bay, Sydney, in August, September and other months,
Lloyd states is ‘close to Homes conchatus of Hurope, that
is, Similar in context colour and microscopic details. The
coloured setze you will find in a section point to this species.
Polyporus gilvus has the same setz but the context colour
is not the same’; spores hyaline, 4°3 to 5 X 2 to 2°5y,
Other’specimens are from Milson Island (September, spores
5°5 X 2°54); Terrigal (June, 1914); Berry, on fallen trunk
(October, spores 5 X 3°5); locality not noted (spores 4°5
to 5 x 3°2 to 3°54); on dead Casuarina (The Oaks, June,
1914).
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 513
103a. FOMES CONCHATUS var. SALICINUS (F’. SALICINUS Bull).
‘Growing on willow, Fomes conchatus is usually sub-
resupinate, or witha thick, imperfect pileate development.
The context colour is also darker.’—Lloyd.
Recorded in Cooke (No. 691) for Queensland.
104. FOMES LINEATO-SCABER Berk.
Fomes lineato-scaber Berk. and Broome, Linn. Trans.,
ii, 59, t. 11, f. 1; Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 697.
*Pileus dimidiate, descending behind, rigid, brown (10c.m.
broad, 6c.m. long); margin pallid, frequently zoned, lineate
radiate, rough; hymenium rhubarb colour; pores punctiform,
dissepiments obtuse (3004 diam.). On trunks, Queensland.’
—Cooke.
In identifying a specimen sent to him, Lloyd says:—‘To
the eye, every feature, surface, context colour, pores, this
is so much like Trametes strigata that I thought it must
be a F’omes form of that species. The pores are stratified
and it has setze on the hymenium and belongs to Section 70
of the Fomes pamphlet. Trametes strigata has no sete as
far as I can find. When I observed the type of F’omes
lineato-scaber, which is in the British Museum, [ thought
it a Fomes form of Trametes strigata, but I find on exam-
ination that it agrees with this specimen that you send in
having setze on the hymenium. It is a true Homes with
stratified pores, but was omitted from my Fomes Synopsis
as I was under the impression that it was only a F’omes
form of Trametes strigata.” This specimen was collected
by one of us (J.B.C.) on Flinders Island, Bass Straits, in
November 1912. We have specimens from Milson Island,
Hawkesbury River, very like this but also indistinguishable
from examples of Polyporus gilvus, with which we place
them.
Ge@—December 5, 1917.
514 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
B—Oontext Dark Brown.
105. FOMES IGNIARIUS Linn.
‘Pileus ungulate (often resupinate or subresupinate), with
a hard, black, usually rimose crust. Context dark brown
(argus brown), hard, woody. Pores minute, with concolor-
ous tissue, and brown mouths. Pore layers 1 —2 mic. (?mm)
thick. Hyphze deeply coloured. Subhymenial layer
hyaline, cellular. Setz rare, with swollen bases, project-
ing 12-16 mic. Spores globose, hyaline, 5—6 mic., smooth.’
Recorded by Cooke (No. 687) for all the States. We have
not as yet encountered the species, and think it probable
that the plants so determined were /’. robustus or F’.
vrimosus. Lloyd has examined a doubtful specimen from
Australia.
106. FomES Rosinsonri# Murrill.
Syn. Homes squarrosus Wilson. Lloyd now considers F’.
squarrosus to be F’. Robinsonice. |
*Pileus ungulate, with a black, rough, rimose crust.
Context hard, dark brown (antique brown). Pores minute,
round, with concolorous mouths. Pore layers indistinct.
Setze few, slender. Spores hyaline, globose, 4 mic.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Lloyd from Victoria.
A small specimen, about 3 ins. broad, obtained at The
Oaks in June, 1914, is referred to this species, probably,
by Lloyd, who says its microscopic characters are the same,
but the context and texture appear a little different. In
our specimen, the spores were oval, colourless, 4°5 to 5°2
or 7 X 3°4 to 4°24; sete thick walled, acuminate, brown,
34 x Tp, 20 X, 8:54.
We have the following in addition:—On Angophora
lanceolata, Sydney; at base of Hucalyptus, near Hulah
Oreek, Narrabri, November, 1916.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 515
Section 71. Context brown. Setze none. Spores coloured.
A—Context Light Brown.
107. FOMES RIMOSUS Berk.
*Pileus unguliform, witha black, rimose surface, usually
very rough, no distinct crust. Context bright yellow-
brown (raw sienna). Pores minute, hard, annual layers 3
to 4mm. thick. Pore mouths concolorous, when young
velutinate to touch. Hyphee deep bright yellow. Setee
none. Spores globose, deeply coloured, 5 mic.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 688) on gum tree trunks for New
South Wales, Western Australia and Tasmania. Lloyd
records a specimen from Dr. EK. C. Stirling, Adelaide, ~
departing from the type in being narrow, ungulate and
with pores slightly larger,
We have the following specimens:—Jerilderie (Dr. Fer-
guson, October, 1913), spores yellow-brown, spherical or
somewhat triangular or oval, 5°2 to 6—identified by C. G.
Lloyd—another sporophore collected at the same time was
4 ins. in width; on Casuarina sp., Milson Island, Hawkes-
bury River, 33 ins. wide, 24 ins. deep, 14 ins. high (October
1915, spores oval to triangular, yellow-brown, 7 to 8 x 3°54);
Milson Island (J.B.C., August), spores yellow-brown, 5°2
to 6 X 3°44; on Casuarina sp., Baan Baa near Boggabri,
January, 1917; on Casuarina Luehmanni, Pilliga Scrub,
Narrabri, November, 1916; on Angophora lanceolata,
Hawkesbury River, November 1916, a huge sporophore,
73 ins. high xX 6 ins. x 5 ins. (spores brown, subspherical
to triangular, 6°5 to 7°5 x 5to 55); on Eucalyptus crebra
or EH. melanophloia, Narrabri, November, 1916 (approaching
the var. badius in the ‘pores being larger, spores yellow-
brown, 6°8 to 7°5 x 5p, identified by Lloyd).
107a. FOMES RIMOSUS var. NIAOULI (F. NIAOULI
Patouillard).
* Pileus unguliform, or thick, applanate, with dark brown
or black, matted, tomentose surface. Context colour dark
516 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
brown (Argus). Pores minute, with concolorous tissue and
darker brown velutinate mouths. Setz none. Spores
globose, 6 mic., deeply coloured.’—Lloyd.
In identifying a specimen for us, Lloyd says:—‘Fomes
Niaouli Pat. I doubt if really distinct from F. rimosus.
The spores in this specimen were brown, oval, 7 <X bu. No
setze were seen.
108. FOMES SCABER Berk.
Recorded for Tasmania (Berkeley) and Australia (Lloyd).
B—Context Dark Brown.
_ 109. FOMES PECTINATUS Klotzsch.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 701) for Queensland.
110. FOMES PULLUS Montague.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 696) for Queensland.
111. Fomrs TEPPERI Lloyd.
‘Pileus ungulate, with black, rimose surface. COontext
dark brown (russet). Pores large, long, seemingly not.
stratified. Setee,none. Subhymenial cells forming a thick
layer. Spores are many, subhyaline, 6 to 7p, globose; a
few are deeply coloured, of the same size and shape.’—Lloyd..
The name of this species suggests that the type came
from South Australia, where Mr. Tepper has collected for
©. G. Lloyd. We have specimens, identified by Lloyd,
collected at Baan Baa near Boggabri in New South Wales,.
in January, 1917, ona dead rough-barked tree Acacia (A.
Cheelii, confused with A. glaucescens). There were
numerous pale yellowish-brown oval to irregularly poly-
gonal spores, 8°5 X 6p, 7°8 X 6p, etc.
Section 72. Context brown (orange-brown in one species).
Setz present. Spores coloured.
A—Context Light Brown.
112. FomES yucATENSIS Murrill.
‘This is similar in every particular to FYomes rimosus,
excepting that it has setee.’—Lloyd. Lloyd has identified
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 517
for us as this species, a Fomes growing about twelve feet
up the trunk of a fine specimen of Eucalyptus saligna at
Lisarow in August, 1916. Spores distinctly brown-tinted,
6 to 7u; dark brown, pointed sete, 17 X 7v. This is evi-
dently a timber-destroying species of economic importance.
B—Context Dark Brown.
113. FomEs LINTEUS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 700) for Queensland. As Lloyd
says that he believes this species is only known from the
type at Kew from Nicaragua, this record seems very
doubtful.
Seventh General Division—GANODERMUS.
Section 73. Fomes—Ganodermus. |
A—Pores with Thin Walls. Spores Smooth or Punctate.
114. FOMES APPLANATUS Persoon.
Syn. Ganoderma applanatum Pat. in Bull. Soc. Myc.
Fr. 1889, p. 67; Wakefield, Kew Bull. (1915), 364.
*Pileus usually applanate, with a brown, rather soft crust
when fresh. Oontext colour dark brown (bay brown). Pores
minute, with brown tissue and white mouths. Spores
coloured, obovate, 6 x 10 mic., truncate at the base, with
smooth, punctate surface.’—Lloyd.
We have the following specimens:—Helensburgh, W.
Craigie, August, 1909, determined by Lloyd,andJ.B.C., (Oct.
1914, spores thick-walled, oval, finely warted, brown, 9°2
to 10 x 6 to 7+); Lisarow (J.B.C., April, 1915, and June,
1916); Thirroul (J.B.C., April); National Park, July, 1916;
Wingham, November, 1916; Mount Wilson, May, 1915;
Flinders Island, Bass Straits (J.B.C., November, 1912). We
have also a Series of small ungulate poorly developed sporo-
phores taken in October and November 1914, December
1915, and June 1916, from the base of a specimen of Ango-
phora lanceolata at Mosman, Sydney, which have very
518 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
short pores and very thick context—the young plants are
covered with a beautiful greyish-brown bloom—the spores.
are thick-walled, brown, smooth, 8°5 to 11 x 5°5 to TP3
Lilyvale and Mount Keira (A. A. Hamilton, June, 1910);
Upper Fern-tree Gully, Victoria (H.C., February, 1908);
Russell Falls, Tasmania (H.C., March, 1910); Adelaide, S.A.
(J.B.C., 1898); Mount Chincogan (T. McDonough, May,
1910).
114a. FOMES APPLANATUS var. LEUCOPH AUS (K. LEUCOPH AUS
Montague.)
A form of F. applanatus with a hard pale or white crust
(Lloyd). Lloyd has identified for us as this form, a speci-
men obtained ten feet up the trunk of a tree at Mount
Irvine in June, 1915.
114b. FOMES APPLANATUS Var. AUSTRALIS (I, AUSTRALIS Fries).
F. applanatus Cheel, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxv, (1900)
672.
A tropical form with thin context and long pores (Lloyd).
A specimen of this variety identified as /. australis by
Lloyd, is in the National Herbarium, Sydney; the pileus is
over 14 X 9 ins., and grew in the fork of the branches,
about four and a half feet from the ground, of an exotic
Acacia (A. horrida), which eventually died through its
attack. We have also the following specimens :—Mount
Wilson (J.B.C., June, 1915), and on Ligustrum lucidum,
Paddington (KH. Bennett, February, 1912).
114c. FOMES APPLANATUS var. OROFLAVUS (F'. OROFLAVUS
Wilson).
A tropical form with yellow pore mouths (Lloyd).
One of us (E.O.) collected a specimen of this plant at
Upper Fern-tree Gully, Victoria, in February, 1908, and
- there are also specimens in the National Herbarium, Sydney,
from Nauru Island (Ocean Island Group) collected by T. W.
Steel in June, 1908.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. . 519,
114d. FOMES APPLANATUS var. NIGRO-LACCATUS (F. NIGRO-
LACCATUS Cooke).
Tropical forms with a slight, black, resinous exudation
on the crust (Lloyd).
B-—Spores Rough.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 74. Ponderosus-Fomes-Ganodermus. Pores hard,
heavy, minute, with thick walls. Spores smooth or
punctate. |
No Australian species recorded.
Section 75. Stipitate Fomes of the Section Ganodermus.
No Australian species recorded.
III. POLYPORUS (SECTION APUS).
(Comprising Sessile Species of the Genus Polyporus.)
I. Context and pores white or pale when growing, spores hyaline.
Pileus with thin but distinct crust ... ». section 76
Pileus without distinct crust—
Flesh (dry) fragile, crumbly... a: sri, etek
Flesh hard, firm . Ss veh nae vf 78
Very thin ees a ; ayt tel ae,
White, turning reddish in ant de a OO
White, turning bluish in drying 3 81
Flesh dry, soft and cottony ye) Oe
Flesh dry, ight and spongy .... a 5] *O8
II. Context white or pale, pores coloured, spores hyaline.
Thin plants, pileus less than a cm. thick ¥ 84
Thick plants, ungulate ohh vik Bee ei 2G
Thin plants, with gelatinous pores ... 1 Se
III. Context and pores coloured, spore hyaline.
Context isabelline or yellow ... 8 87
Context orange-red, soft, spongy... ae 1 RSS
520 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Context vinaceous or purple... bi ... Section 89
Context olive... hie 3 - a 5 90
Context brown. Setz none... *. <a m 91
Context brown. Sete present ma Wa . 92
IV. Context and spores coloured. Spores not truncate.
Context pale (white?) or isabelline. Sete none ,, 93
Context yellow. Setz none... ee thie yh 94
Context brown. Setz none... Bie at 5 95
Context brown. Setz present eet Lf , 96
Context brown, light, spongy, fibrillose. Sete none ,, 97
V. Polyporus—Ganodermus. Context brown. Spores
coloured, truncate.
Context soft, spongy... Salt ie ier ee <
Context firm, not spongy ... a 23 ee
Polyporus—Amaurodermus ... = Te » we
First General Division—Context and pores white or pale
when growing, spores hyaline.
Section 76. Pileus with thin but distinct crust.
A—Flesh firm and fragile.
115. POLYPORUS BETULINUS Bull.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 654) for Queensland on beech.
116. POLYPORUS ALBELLUS Peck.
Syn. Polyporus chioneus Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi,
No. 635.
‘Pileus dimidiate, sessile, usually 14 to 2 ins. in diameter,
often imbricate, but rarely, if ever, subresupipate. Surface
smooth, with a very thin crust. Colour of surface usually
grayish or yellowish, sometimes white. Flesh drying white,
fragile. Pores small, round, drying slightly alutaceous.
Spores allantoid, 1 x 4to 5 mic., cylindrical, curved.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke under the above synonym for Victoria,
New South Wales, and Queensland.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 521
117. POLYPORUS PORTENTOSUS Berk.
Syn. Polyporus portentosus Berk., Hook. Journ. 1845;
Cooke, Hand. of Aust. Fungi, No. 655.
‘Pileus usually large, 3 — 4 inches in diameter, 2 — 3 inches
thick. Surface with a distinct, thin, pale yellowish crust.
Flesh pure white, fragile, chalky. Pores minute, pure
white.’—Lloyd.
Recorded in Cooke for all the States except Queensland.
Some at least of the Victorian records refer to P. australi-
ensis (which see).
We have a specimen of a decayed large white polypore
from Hill Top, found under a fallen log, which may be this
species. Of portion of a very large polypore collected by
one of us (J.B.C.) on Flinders Island, Bass Straits, in
November, 1912, Lloyd says:—‘‘I believe this specimen is
P. portentosus, though it is somewhat doubtful. I havea
plant from Geo. K. Hinsby, which agrees exactly with the
type at Kew. The tissue of the pores is white the same
as the context. In your specimen the pores are discoloured.
The cuticle of the type is thin but distinct. The surface
of your specimen is similar as to colour but does not have
a distinct cuticle. Spores allantoid, 1°5 < 7p» in your
specimen.” The pores in our specimen are in. deep. Our
measurements of the spores were 5 X 1°7p, elongated.
118. POLYPORUS TEPHRONOTUS Berk.
Polyphorus tephronotus Berk., Fl. Tasm., 11, 252, t. 182,
f. 5; Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 626, fig. 54.
Syn. Polyporus angustus Berk., Fl. Tasm. II, 253, t. 182,
f. 6—resupinate form (Lloyd); Cooke, Handb. of Aust.
Fungi, No. 632.
*Pileus dimidiate, thin5-6 mm. Surface smooth, with
a thin but distinct crust, slightly yellowish. Flesh white,
522 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
soft, brittle. Pores very minute, discoloured slightly, with
a waxy appearance. Spores not found (allantoid ?).’—Lloyd.
Recorded in Cooke for Tasmania. We have not met with
the species.
119. POLYPORUS PELLICULOSUS Berk.
Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 650.
Syn. Polyporus spiculifer, Cooke, (No. 651). A ‘“‘thin
form with the tomentum collected into very distinct
nodules.’’—(Lloyd).
Recorded for Queensland, Victoria and Tasmania.
. B—Flesh soft, spongy.
120. POLYPORUS EUCALYPTORUM Fries.
Polyporus eucalyptorum Fries in Lehmann’s Plantz
Preiss., Il, p. 185 (1846-47); Fries, Epicr., 462; Oooke,
Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 656; Baker, Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.S.W., xxiv (1899), 447; Cheel, ditto, xxxur, (1907), 203.
Syn. Polyporus hololeucus Kalchbrenner, Hedw. xv, 114
(Lloyd); Polyporus leucocreas Cooke (Loyd). Xylostroma
gigantea OCheel, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv (1910), 308
and 309, and Ann. Rep. Bot. Gdns., 1910 (1911), 11.
*Pileus ungulate (or thick, applanate), 3 to 5 inches in
diameter. Crust very soft, pale, at length dark, easily
Separating. Context very soft, white, spongy, crumbly,
fragile. Pores medium, round, white, fragile, 6 to 12 mm,
long. Spores abundant, 8 to 10 mic., many smaller, sub-
globose, with granular or guttulate contents.’—Lloyd.
Cooke records the species from Victoria and Western
Australia. Cheel and Baker loc. cit., have both recorded
it, the former for the Botanic Gardens, Sydney, and Hill
Top, the latter for Gerogery on Stringybark (Eucalyptus
capitellata). McAlpine (System. Arrang. of Aust. Fungi,
1895) adds South Australia to Cooke’s localities.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 523
We have examined a fine series of specimens in the
National Herbarium, Sydney and in our private collections
from the following localities, which are referable to this
species :—Pittwater, (A. Maclellan, September, 1907);
Nepean River, between Mulgoa and Norton’s Basin (W.
Oraigie, October, 1908); Botany, (L. Abrahams, November,
1909); Wamberal, (H. Oheel, April, 1911); Government.
Domain on Hucalyptus pilularis and E. resinifera (W.
Briggs, March, 1912 and H. Cheel, June, 1915); Botanic
Gardens, on H. tereticornis (HK. Cheel, April, 1916); Milson
Island, Hawkesbury River (J.B.C., June, 1912) on H. corym-
bosa; Tenterfield (J.B.C., August, 1917) on H. cinerea
F.v.M. var. nova-anglica, Maiden. We have also seen
specimens on Hucalypts in the Mount Lofty Range, South
Australia (pore mouths bright yellow). The spores of our
specimens measured 10 X 8°5p in one, and 8 to 9 X 6 to 7p,
elliptical and very pale yellow in the shed mass in another.
The flat sheets of sterile mycelium found in felled tree
trunks have been referred to as Xylostroma gigantea by
one of us (H.C., loc. cit.). The following specimens of this
nature are in the National Collection, Sydney:—From
Stringybark (Eucalyptus eugenioides), Walcha; from H.
Caleyi, Inverell District; from ‘Red Gum,’ Wilgo and
Cobargo; from ‘White Gum,’ Cross Roads near Sutton
Forest; from Parkes.
Section 77. Context and pores white or pale, flesh fragile,
crumbly.
121. POLYPORUS IMMACULATUS Berk.
Syn. P. verecundus Berk. and Curt., Cooke, Handb. of
Aust. Fungi, No. 629 (Lloyd).
Cooke records this species from Fiji. Lloyd states it
occurs in Australia (p. 303).
122. POLYPORUS CRETACEUS Berk.
Recorded by Lloyd for Tasmania.
a
524 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL,
Section 78. Context and pores white or pale. Flesh drying
hard, firm.
A—Surface anodern, or pubescent with projecting hyphae.
123. POLYPORUS FUMOSUS Pers.
Syns. Polyporus rhinocephalus Berk., Fl. Tasm. 11, 253,
t. 182, and Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 645 (type
appears to be P. fumosus—Lloyd); P. demissus Berk.,
Hook. Journ. 1845, 52, and Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi,
No. 644 (type appears to be P. fumosus—Lloyd).
*Pileus thin, smooth, with dull, soft surface. Context,
when dry, hard, firm, but brittle; white when fresh, darker
when dried. Pores small, round, irregular, white at first,
but becoming fuliginous, or dark, in drying. Spores 25 x
dS mic. Polyporus fumosus is quite a frequent plant, usually
on willow. It is the same, in fact as Polyporus salignus,
with small pores. When it is in its prime, and growing, it
is white; but on drying it turns more or less smoke coloured.
It is often confused with Polyporus adustus, and many
specimens in the museums are labelled as being Polyporus
fumosus. Dried specimens may be confused sometimes,
but the difference is marked in the fresh plant. Polyporus
adustus has deep, smoke coloured pores when growing;
Polyporus fumosus has white pores, turning smoky in
drying, but when dry rarely deep enough in colour to be
confused with Polyporus adustus. With Polyporus salignus,
however the case is different. It is the same plant as
Polyporus fumosus with larger pores. When growing white,
it is usually called Polyporus salignus. In drying or after
it turns ‘smoky’ it becomes Polyporus fumosus. When
fresh, Polyporus fumosus has a pleasant odour, as noted
by Persoon.’—Lloyd.
Under the two synonyms given above, Cooke records this
species respectively for Tasmania and Western Australia.
Specimens collected by one of us (J.B.C.) at Kurrajong
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 525
Heights (August, 1912), Lloyd states seem to be exactly
the same as the American plants. The spores of these
were 4°3 to 5 X 34. We have also specimens from Tug-
gerah (October, 1914). Another collection obtained on an
old Casuarina stump at Milson Island, Hawkesbury River,
in September, 1914, Lloyd also thinks is this species though
it is doubtful, as the pores do not turn ‘smoky’—the spores.
are 5°D to 7 X 2°95 to 3°5y.
124. POLYPORUS EPILEUCUS Fries.
This has been recorded by Cooke (No. 627) for Queens-
land, but from Lloyd’s description of the species, we doubt.
the identification.
B—Surface strigose with brown hairs.
No Australian plants recorded.
C—Spores large, hyaline, truncate, corresponding to Gano-
dermus spores.
125, POLYPORUS OCHROLEUCUS Berk.
Polyporus ochroleucus Berk., Hook. Journ. 1845, 53.
Syn. Trametes ochroleucus Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi,
No. 847; Wakefield, Kew Bull. 1915, 366; Homes com-
pressus Berk., Hook. Journ. 1845, and Cooke, Handb. of
Aust. Fungi, No. 709 (Lloyd).
*Pileus usually well formed, regular, ungulate (3 to 4 x
1$to2cm.). Surface with indistinct crust, smooth, or
more or less appressed, strigose, fibrillose, faint indications
of zones. Colour usually pale with a slight ochraceous.
tint, rarely decidedly yellowish. Context thin, hard; at
first pale, in old specimens becoming dark. Pores small,
4+ mm., regular, long, minute, rigid. Spores pecular, oblong,
truncate at base,8 x 16 mic., hyaline.’—Lloyd.
This species is very common, especially on fences and
fallen timber in Australia, and is doubtless, in many
instances, an active agent in their early rotting. We have
=
526 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
met with a telephone post being destroyed by its attack.
Systematic destruction of the fruiting bodies will probably
tend to diminish the incidence of attack. It is recorded by
Cooke for all the States except South Australia. Lloyd,
has received specimens from Mr. Tepper, probably from
Adelaide, and we have Adelaide examples in our collection.
Spores in our specimens 12 to 17 x 5'2 to 8°84. We have
specimens from Sydney (August and June), National Park
(July, August), Hawkesbury River (November), Berry
(October), Orange (October), The Oaks (June), Murwil-
lumbah (April), Narrabri (May and November), Mummul-
gum near Casino (December), near Wauchope (February)
—in New South Wales, and from Adelaide.
The following specimens are in the National Collection,
Sydney:—Bowral and Penshurst (H.C., 1907); Hillgrove
(Lewis, 1910); Scone (J.L.B., 1907); Muswellbrook (W. F.
Blakely, 1911); Botanic Gardens, Sydney (H. Bernard,
March, 1912, and J. Nichol, August, 1910); Hill Top (H.C.,
January 1911 and April 1914); La Perouse (A. A. Hamilton,
April, 1910); Thornleigh (J. Staer, August 1910); on Eueca-
lyptus sp., Lilyvale (A. A. Hamilton, April 1912); Jellore
‘Creek (E.C., April, 1912); Gladesville (Miss Flockton, April
1910); Leura (A.A.H., April 1908); Hornsby (A.A.H., Oct.
1909); Upper Fern-tree Gully, Victoria (H.C., February
1908); Willoughby (A. G. Hamilton); Bowral (R. Nichol,
March, 1898); Rookwood (A. G. Hamilton, June 1910).
D—Pileus a hollow globe, bearing the pores on upper side
of the interior. No Australian species recorded.
H—Trametes.
128. TRAMETES CUBENSIS Mont.
Recorded by Cooke as Polyporus Cubensis, (No. 663), for
Queensland.
Section 79. Very thin white plants.
No Australian species recorded.
’ €
&
: .
a
‘
- .
*
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. HA &
Section 80. White when fresh, but turning reddish in
drying or with reddish spots on the surface.
127. POLYPORUS FRAGILIS Fries.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 633) for Victoria.
Section 81. White when fresh, turning blue when touched.
128. POLYPORUS CASIUS Schrader.
Polyporus coesius Fries, Syst. Myc. I, p. 360; Massee,
Brit. Fung. Flora, I, p. 252.
‘Pileus sessile, white, turning blue at once when touched,
and drying greyish. Flesh soft, white, turning blue when
broken. Pores large, sinuate, with uneven edges. Spores
14 x 5y, rod-shape, straight, hyaline, smooth. This isa
frequent plant, usually on pine. It occurs more rarely on
frondose wood, and we have collected it on willow. It is
common in Hurope and America, and recorded in Africa.
There should be no trouble in telling Polyporus ccesius, for
it is the only species that turns blue when touched. The
dried specimens have a greyish-white cast by which BEN
- may be recognised.’—Lloyd.
Plants collected by one of us (J.B.C.) at Mount Wilson
in June, are stated by Lloyd to be exactly the same as dried
specimens of this species. No note was made at the time
as to whether the flesh turned blue on being bruised, though
we believe it did. Further specimens, also identified by
Lloyd, obtained on logs on the Blue Mountains on the follow-
ing June were quite white when gathered. On section
the flesh occasionally or in spots turned greyish-green. The
tubes slowly turned a bluish-grey-green. The flesh cut
soft like a cheese. There was no smell. The spores are
not straight, but slightly curved, 4°2 to5 x 1to1°5p; the
spores of typical P. coesius Lloyd gives as straight.
Section 82. Context very soft and cottony.
No Australian species recorded.
528 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Section 83. Context when dry, spongy and light.
A—Pores large, sinuate.
129. POLYPORUS BOREALIS Fries.
Cooke records this species (No. 652) for Victoria.
B—Pores small, round.
130. POLYPORUS PELLES Jarvis.
Lloyd records this for Queensland.
Second General Division.—Context white or pale, pores
coloured, spores hyaline.
Section 84. Thin plants, less than a cm. thick.
131. POLYPORUS ADUSTUS Willd.
Polyporus adustus Massee, Brit. Fung. Flora V, 2, 1, p.
249 ; Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 646.
Syn. Polyporus strumosus ? Cooke, Handb. of Aust.
Fungi (No. 657)—Lloyd.
From Lloyd’s remarks we gather that P. strwmosus,
recorded by Cooke for Victoria, is probably P. adustus.
Cooke records P. adustus, as such, for Victoria and Queens-
land.
132. POLYPORUS CAMPYLUS Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 637) for Tasmania.
Section 85. Thick, ungulate plants.
133. POLYPORUS AUSTRALIENSIS Wakefield.
Polyporus australiensis Wakefield, Kew Bull. (1914), 157.
The original description of this species is in Latin which
may be briefly translated as follows:—‘Pileus flesh-coloured,
sessile, thickened at the base, 5 to 10 cm. or more in
diameter, 1 to 2 cm. thick in the medial part gradually
increasing up to 3 cm. at the base; cuticle smooth, bright
orange or more or less of an orange colour tinged red; con-
text in dried specimens tough and contracted, somewhat
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 529
_ pallid. Pores flesh-coloured, contracted in dry specimens,
the mouths about 1 mm. diameter, 2 to 9 mm. long. Spores
not seen.’
The localities given are as follows:—Coomera River and
Toowoomba in Queensland, and Grampians in Victoria.
Specimens from the latter are in Kew Herbarium labelled
P. portentosus Berk.; Geographe Bay (in Herb. Kewas P.
stypticus Fr.); also a specimen from Victoria (without
specific locality) labelled P. retiporus Cook.
The author further states that itis ‘a very distinct species
near to P. sulphureus, and said to havea very strong odour
when fresh. It differs from P. portentosus, retiporus, and
stypticus, with which it was confused in the early records
quoted above, in the brilliant orange-yellow tints in pileus
and pores, and in the yellowish flesh. (Ridgway, tab. 111,
15b)..’
We have specimens of this species collected by one of us
(H#.C.) on a dead Eucalyptus stump, on the Nattai River
near Colo, via Hill Top, March, 1914. These specimens
were somewhat hoof-shaped, 8 X 12 cm. and 9 cm. thick,
the pores orange red coloured when fresh, the upper part or
surface of pileus being of a rich cream colour tinged with
ochre and orange red. Spores globose, smooth, transparent,
about 34 diam. In the National Herbarium collection
there is also a fine specimen collected at Albany, Western
Australia, by Mr. J. Staer (February 1911). When fresh,
the specimens had a very strong not unpleasant odour,
which is retained in the dried specimens in the herbarium
for a long period. The National Collection has also speci-
mens from Nowra (A.H.S. Lucas and A. A. Hamilton, 1916).
One of us has a Specimen from Malanganee, 25 miles west
of Casino, on astump, August, 1917. We have also received
from Mr. Brittlebank portion of a large growth found on a
post at Drouin, Gippsland, which from the context and the
Hu—December 5, 1917.
530 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
odour appears to belong to an immature plant of this species.
Lloyd (Letter No. 63, 1916) has identified Western Australian
specimens forwarded by Dr. Stoward.
Section 85. Thin plants, somewhat gelatinous when fresh.
134. POLYPORUS DICHROUS Fries.
*“Pileus thin, dimidiate, usually imbricate. Surface
smooth, white, no crust. Flesh white, thin, firm. Pores
small, dark purplish-brown, gelatinous. Spores allantoid,
4 to5 X 1°dp, hyaline, curved.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 647) for Victoria. We have
specimens identified by Lloyd obtained on a fallen pine log
{Callitris) near Forbes in August, 1915.
’ Third General Division—Context and pores coloured,
spores hyaline.
Section 86. Context isabelline or yellow.
135. POLYPURUS RUTILANS Pers. |
Recorded as P. nidulans (No. 638) by Cooke for Queensland
—a synonym, (Lloyd).
136. POLYPORUS ZONALIS Berk.
Polporus zonalis Berk., Ann. Nat. Hist. x, 375; Cooke,
Handb. Aust. Fungi, No. 660.
‘Pileus thin (4-6 mm.), rigid, drying hard, incurved.
Surface reddish-brown, with narrow, concentric, raised
zones, Context thin, hard, pale ochraceous. Pores minute,
3—4 mm. long; when old, brown, but my impression is that
they are orange when fresh. Spores abundant, globose,
4—5 mic., hyaline, smooth.’
This is a common species throughout the tropical world
—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke for Victoria and Queensland. Lloyd’s
Australian specimens from W. W. Froggatt indicate its
occurrence also in New South Wales.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 531
136a. POLYPORUS ZONALIS var. RIGIDUs Lev.
Polyporus rigidus in Lloyd’s Syn. of Genus Polyp. p. 337.
‘This is close to Polyporus zonalis, the same general
mature and surface. It differs from zonalis in having pale
pores, with only slightly ochraceous tissue when recent,
and never dark as they are in Polyporus zonalis. Spores
4 to 6h, are a shade larger, and the surface is not so
strongly zoned.’—Lloyd.
Specimens, collected at Katoomba in June, 1916, have
been identified by Lloyd. A few doubtful spores, sub-
spherical and $y in diameter, seen.
137. POLYPORUS SEMILACCATUS Berk.
* Pileus sessile, applanate, thin (4-8 mm.), rigid. Surface
smooth, brown, variegated with darker, imperfect zones or
blotches. Context firm but punky, dark isabelline (clay
colour). Pores minute (1—14 mm. long), darker than the
context, rigid. Spores not found.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 718) for Queensland as /omes
ecinereo-fuscus Curry, which species Lloyd states is dis-
coloured P. semilaccatus.
Lloyd has identified specimens for us collected at
Eumundi, Queensland, by J. Staer.
138. POLYPORUS ANEBUS Berk.
Polyporus anebus Berk., Hook. J., 1847, 504; Cooke,
Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 666.
*Pileus thin, 5°8 mm., rigid, sessile, imbricate. Surface
hard, smooth, brownish-yellow, no distinct crust. Flesh
pale yellow (cinnamon-buff), firm, dry, fissile. Pores minute,
2—3 mm. long, slightly darker than the flesh. Hyphee pale
yellow. Setz none. Spores subglobose, 3 to 4 mic., hyaline,
smooth.’
Recorded by Cooke from Queensland. |
We have specimens from Mount Wilson, collected in June
1915 which have been identified by Lloyd.
Daw J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
138a. POLYPORUS ANEBUS var. BICOLOR (P. bicolor Jungh.)
- Syn. Fomes oblinitus Berk., Cooke, Handb. of Aust.
Fungi, No. 715 (Lloyd).
Lloyd states that this is the same as P. anebus, except
that the pileus develops a reddish stain and sometimes the
surface is entirely dark reddish. Under the‘above synonym
Cooke records it for New South auc
Section 87. Context orange, red, soft, spongy.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 88. Context vinaceous or purple.
139. POLYPORUS DURUs Jungh.
Lloyd mentions that he has seen Australian specimens.
Recorded by Cooke as Polyporus cartilagineus (No. 659),
P. testudo (No. 665), and Fomes ponderosus, probably, Sai
707), all for Queensland.
140. POLYPORUS VINOSUS Berk.
‘Pileus thin, usually sessile, dimidiate, dark vinaceous
colour (dark livid purple). Surface smooth, concolorous.
Context thin, brittle, hard, more brown than the surface.
Pores minute, dark, concolorous with the surface. Spores
allantoid, 14 x 4 to 4, hyaline.’—Lloyd.
Lloyd has identified specimens for us collected at Port
Moresby, New Guinea, by A. H. Pratt.
Section 89. Context olive.
141. POLYPORUS SUPINUS Swartz.
‘Pileus dimidiate, imbricate, often resupinate behind
usually with a thin margin. Surface, when fresh, white,
dull; when young, minutely pubescent, soft to the touch;
when old often spotted with red spots behind. Context
dark olive (Dresden brown), hard, firm. Pores minute, 2—
4 mm. long, with isabelline tissue and adustus mouths.
Spores 4 x 8 mic., oblong, hyaline, smooth with sree
contents.’’—Lloyd. Ar
o
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 533
This species has not been recorded for Australia, but is
inserted on account of the following species.
142. POLYPORUS SUBOLIVACEUS Berk.
‘This has the same context colour and is quite close to
Polyporus supinus, and the old herbarium specimens can
hardly be told apart. Fresh specimens, however, appear
quite different. Polyporus subolivaceus is unicolorous,
with a uniform pileus, surface and context colour, while in
Polyporus supinus there is a strong contrast between the
context and surface colour.’—Lloyd.
One of us, J.B.C., collected plants at Thirroul, in April,
1909, which Lloyd has identified as this species, ‘a rare
plant heretofore only known to me from Brazil.’
Section 90. Context brown. Sete none.
No Australian species recorded. /
Section 91. Context brown. Sete present.
' 143. PoLyporus GILvus Schwein.
Polyporus gilvus, Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No. 641.
Syn. Fomes homalopilus (P. carneofulvus) Cooke, loc.
cit., No. 716; Fomes rubiginosus (P. Lawrencii) Cooke,
loc. cit., No. 702.
‘Pileus sessile, applanate, thin$ —14cm., often imbricate.
Surface brown, even, usually slightly rugulose. Context
hard, firm, of the growing plant often bright gilvous (yellow
ochre) varying to brown (cinnamon brown) when old.
Ordinarily the context is more brown than yellow. Pores
are small, round, 3—10 mm. long, with brown tissue and
mouths. Setz abundant, slender, sharp, projecting 12-16
mic. Spores hyaline 34 x 4—5 mic., smooth.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke for Queensland and Western Australia.
We have the following specimens:—Tuggerah (J.B.C.,
October, 1914), identified by Lloyd who adds:—‘ The flesh
534 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
of your plant is more ligneous than, not so brittle as, that
of our common American plant, but surely the same species”
—our specimens have acuminate, dark brown cystidia, 26
xX Sf and spores apparently yellow-brown and somewhat
irregular, 3°5 to5 X 2 to 2°54; Milson Island, Hawkesbury
River (J.B.C., November, 1914), cystidia present; Neutral
Bay; Dungog (J.B.O., November, 1916).
Specimens from the following localities are in the
National Herbarium, Sydney:—Smoky Cape near Trial Bay
(F. W. Raffills, 1905); Guy Fawkes (J. Staer, November,
1909); Tuggerah Lakes (April, 1915); Hornsby and Chats-
wood (A. A. Hamilton, August, 1913 and October, 1911);
Rookwood (A. Spencer, June, 1910); Penshurst (H.C., July,
1907); Thornleigh (J. Staer, August, 1910); Parramatta
(H.C., March, 1908); Neutral Bay (J.B.C., 1912); Middle
Harbour (A. A. Hamilton, October, 1909); Milson Island,
Hawkesbury River (H.C., July, 1912); Thirroul (H.C., April,
1910); Hill Top (K.C., April, 1914); Grose Vale (Miss
Campbell, Sep., 1912); Leura (A. A. Hamilton, Feb. 1911).
143a. POLYPORUS GILVUS var. SCRUPOSUS Fries.
Polyporus seruposus, Cooke, Handb. of Aust. Fungi, No.
642; P. isidioides (P. stenoloma), Cooke, Handb. of Aust.
Fungi, No. 643.
Perfectly smooth forms of Polyporus gilvus rarely occur,
but the form called Polyporus scruposus is excessively
rough, with little tubercles and granules. It was named
from the United States, but these rough forms are more
common and strongly marked in Africa than in the States.
As it grades into the type form in all degrees, it is difficult
to maintain even as a form.’—Lloyd.
Recorded by Cooke for all the States except South Aus-
tralia. Lloyd (Letter 63, 1916) also records it for Western
Australia. |
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 535
We have specimens of P. gilvus probably referable to this
form, from Sydney, on sawn log of firewood (J.B.C., Oct.,
1914); Narrabeen (J.B.C., December, 1915);. brown cystidia,
locality not known.
143b. POLYPORUS GILVUS var. INAM@NUS Montague.
Polyporus inamoenus, Lloyd, Syn. of the Genus Polyporus,
p. 348.
‘This is an indurated subfomes form of Polyporus gilvus.
Sometimes it shows distinct pore layers. Polyporus gilvus
takes this form more commonly in warm countries, but we
have specimens from California and Dakota.’—Lloyd.
Lloyd records this for Australia (H. Jarvis).
143c. POLYPORUS GILVUS var. LICNOIDES Mont.
Polyporus licnoides, Lloyd, Syn. of the Polyporus, p. 349.
‘This is the most pronounced, tropical form. It is thin
(type 2 mm.), more flaccid, and tends towards Polystictus.
In the most highly specialized ‘type’ form there are smooth,
reddish zones in the pileus, but they are present and absent
in the same collection.’—Lloyd.
We have specimens, identified by Lloyd, collected at the
Spit, Sydney, in July, 1916 (acuminate brown seta, 30 to 34
x 7 to 85); also on a fallen log near Hulah Creek, Nar-
rabri, in November, 1916.
144. POLYPORUS RADIATUS Sow.
*Pileus dimidiate, sessile, triquetrous, with thin margin.
Surface minutely velutinate, at length strongly rugulose,
radiate. Flesh hard, dry, yellowish-brown. Pores con-
colorous, small, about 4 cm. long, with mouths that glisten
silvery when turned to the light. Setze rare, short, thick.
Spores hyaline, 4—5 x 5-—6y.’—Lloyd.
Lloyd has referred, with doubt, a specimen collected by
one of us at the base of a Leptospermum bush on Milson
536 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Island, Hawkesbury River Manel BORE white, pear-
shaped, 3°6 to 4°2 X 2°5p).
145. POLYPORUS DRYADEUS Persoon.
*Pileus sessile, often large, a foot even in diameter, 2 to
3 inches thick. Surface with a thin but distinct crust,
brown. Context medium, soft, reddish-brown colour (Sudan
brown), witha sheen. Pores small, round, subconcolorous,
1 to2cm. long. Sete straight, rare, 8 x 40 mic. Spores
globose, smooth, hyaline or pale coloured, 7 to 8 mic.’—Lloyd.
One of us (J.B.C.) has collected this species growing
about ten feet up on the trunk of a Eucalypt in the Mount
Lofty Range, South Australia, in July 1914. Though it
has not been recorded for New South Wales, its description
is given here, as in other parts of the world it is a destructive
timber parasite. Lloyd, in identifying our specimen,
states:—‘This grew on Kucalypts and is the first specimen
known from Australia. It appears at first sight to the eye
a little different from the Kuropean plant, surface with a
pale more pronounced crust but microscopic features agree
exactly. There is an indication on the specimen of a
mycelial core, a feature only known on the related species
Polyporus corruscans of Hurope.’ The spores of our
specimen are oval, 8°5 to 8°8 x 6 to 7p.
Fourth General Division—Context and Spores coloured.
Spores not truncate.
Section 92. Context pale (white?) or isabelline. Setze none.
146. PoLyporus D1ELSII Hennings.
Lloyd says this is a very large species, only known from
a piece at Berlin, which came from Australia.
Section 93. Context yellow. Setze none. No Australian
Species recorded. ,
Section 94. Context brown, sete none.
A—Plants very minute.
No Australian species recorded.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 537
B—Pores large.
147. POLYPORUS DECIPIENS Berk.
Polyporus decipiens (Berk.), Lloyd, Apus Polyporus, p.
355, (1915) fig. 390; Letter 60, p. 4 (Note 34) 1915.
Syn. Hexagona decipiens Berk., Journ. Linn. Soc., Bot.
XII, p. 166 (1873); Cooke, Handb. No. 894; Trametes
decipiens Berk., Bres. MS.in Herb. Kew; Wakefield, Kew
Bull. (1915) 366. |
*Pileus sessile, dimidiate, triquetrous, unicolorous, dark
brown. Surface brown, hard, tomentose, rigid. Flesh
hard, firm, brown, descending into the pores. Pores rigid,
trametoid, 4 to 8 mm. long, round or elongated, large, 1 to
2mm. Setz none. Spores abundant, large, elliptical, 8 x
16 mic., deeply coloured.’—Lloyd.
We have the following specimens:—On trunk of living
tree, Peakhurst (H.C., July, 1901); on Acacia doratoxylon,
Mount Boppy; Casuarina, Western Line (L. Abrahams,
October, 1911); on log, Milson Island, Hawkesbury River
(J.B.C., July, 1912), identified by Lloyd as Hexagona
decipiens, who, in placing it under Polyporus points out
that no true Hexagona has coloured spores; on fallen log,
Kurrajong Heights (J.B.C., August, 1912); Wellington
(J.B.C., October, 1914)—spores brown, 15°5 to 19 x 6°5 to
Tor; locality not noted; Hornsby (W. F. Blakely, June,
1914), The Hornsby specimens were determined by Mr.
Lloyd. The specimens recorded by Miss Wakefield, were
collected at Moruya, and are stated to be well-marked by
the large, elliptical, brown spores, 15-20 x 7°5—9p,
We have also specimens from Bumberry, near Manildra,
September, spores brown, 15°5 to 17 x 85 to10°4. Mr. C,
Brittlebank has forwarded us Victorian specimens from the
Mallee, collected by J, Dickson on Casuarina Luehmanni,
in November, 1916, spores brown, 17 to 20 x 8 to 11p.
538 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
©—Pores small.
149. POLYPORUS SPADICEUS Berk.
As Fomes spadiceus, recorded by Cooke (No. 618) for
Queensland.
150. POLYPORUS PUBERTATIS Yasuda.
‘Pileus sessile (3 x 6 x14 cm.), unicolorous dark brown
(verona brown). Surface minutely pubescent, soft to touch..
Flesh concolorous, hard, slightly punky. Pores minute,
round, 3 to5 mm. long, with concolorous tissue and mouths.
Setz, none. Spores abundant, 3 X 5y, elliptical, pale
coloured.’—Lloyd. A Japanese species.
Lloyd has identified a specimen for us obtained on a
fallen log in Mummulgum Brush, near Casino, in December
1916—spores pallid brownish, 4 X 2°54; no sete.
Section 95. Context brown. Setz present.
A—Surface tomentose or hispid.
151. PoLYPORUS HISPIDUS Baglietto.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 648) for Queensland.
152. POLYPORUS CUTICULARIS Bulliard.
‘Pileus applanate, dimidiate, imbricate. Surface tomen-
tose with appressed, brown hairs, zonate when young.
Context varying from 3 to 10 mm. thick, hard, fibrillose,
ferruginous brown (Sudan brown). Pores small, varying in
size, angular or irregular, 5 X 8 mm. long, with concolorous.
tissue. Mouths often stuffed or overgrown, when fresh
strongly glancing. Sete very scanty, sometimes not found
at all, straight. Spores abundant, globose or subglobose,
deeply coloured, largest 7 x 7 to 84, many smaller, 4 to 5-
x 5 to 6u.’—Lloyd. Common on beech and maple logs in
America.
Lloyd has identified a specimen for us found growing on
a living trunk at Mummulgum, near Casino, in December,.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 539
1916—spores dark brown, oval, 5 to 6 X 3°dy; one brown
acuminate seta seen.
153. POLYPORUS CORRUSCANS Fr. (P. RHEADES Pers.).
‘Pileus sessile, dimidiate, subglobose or ungulate, often
imbricate. Surface tomentose, velutinate, with short, fine
brown hairs. There is at first developed a mycelial core,
hard, amorphous, grumous, dark brown. Flesh fibrillose,
ferruginous brown (Sudan brown). At first zonate, soft,
watery and spongy, at length dry, hard. Pores small,
round, about 1 cm. long, with tissue concolorous with the
context, when fresh the mouths silvery and glancing.
Hyphee deeply coloured. Setze scanty and rare, often not
found. Spores very abundant, globose or compressed
globose, 5—7 xX 6—Tp, deeply coloured, smooth,’—Lloyd.
Lloyd has identified specimens from W. W. Froggatt.
(Letter No. 63, Note 472, 1916), presumably from New
South Wales.
B—Surface smooth or at length smooth.
154. POLYPoRUS PATOUILLARDII Rick.
Polyporus Patouillardii Lloyd, Letter No. 56 (Note 253),
1915; Letter No. 58 (Note 268).1915; Synopsis, Sect. Apus
of the Genus Polyporus (1915) 365.
*Pileus sessile, applanate, 2 — 3 cm. thick. ‘Surface
smooth, brown, dull. Flesh brittle, hard, faintly zonate,
with a satiny lustre, dark brown (antique brown). Pores
small, round, 1—14 cm. deep, pale yellowish-brown, more
yellow than the context. Imbedded in the pore tissue
are thick, deeply coloured, rigid hyphe. Setz scattered,
thick, straight, projecting 20 mic. Spores abundant,
elliptical, 4 — 6 mic., pale colured.
Rev. Mr. Rick has named and distributed this from Brazil
(No, 25 as lineatoscaber) and we have specimens to cor-
respond, It has peculiar coloured flesh, with a lustre on
5! .
540 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
the order of Polyporus dryadeus. Many polypores have
what is called ‘glancing’ pore mouths, when the shade of
colour appears different according to the angle of the light.
This is the only species in which we have noted the same
effect on the context. The peculiar setz found in the pore
tissue are not found in the context, Other species of this
same genus (Oxyuris) have these setz in both context and
pore tissue. This plant from the American tropics is only
recently known from Brazil, but has lately reached me
from E. D, Merrill, Philippines, G. Yamada, Japan, and H.
Cheel, Australia,’—Lloyd.
In Lloyd’s Note 268, the following reference is made to
this specimen from Australia:—‘Polyporus Patouillardii,
sent by HK, Cheel, Australia, This is the first specimen
known from Australia, and its occurrence is of much interest.
Very recently, 1907, it was named from Brazil by Rick,
then we got specimens from Japan, G. Yamada, then from
Philippines, EH. D. Merrill, and now it comes from Australia.
(Compare Synopsis Polyporus, page 366, and Note 253,
Letter 56.) The Australian plant differs slightly from the
Brazilian plant, in fact enough to make a ‘new species’ if
one wants to multiply the species, but the difference can
only be noted on comparison, and of course, from one
specimen we cannot say it is constant. The context of
the Australian plant is coarser to the eye, and the micro-
scope shows the hyphe slightly thicker and of much deeper
colour. The different hyphz of the pore tissue are not in
evidence, and I find no setze. The spores are slightly
smaller, 3 x 5¥. These differences would ordinarily con-
stitute ‘a species,’ but I feel it is practically the same plant,
and it would only obscure the subject to propose one. The
history of Polyporus Patouillardii which has all developed |
in the last three years, is evidence of what little is known
relatively about foreign polypores.’
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 541
The specimen was obtained at Stanwell Park ace Stephens,
October, 1913).
Section 96. Context brown. Light, spongy, fibrillose.
Sete none.
155. POLYPORUS FRUTICUM Berk.
Recorded by Cooke (No. 649) for Queensland.
Fifth General Division—Polyporus—Ganodermus.: Context
brown; spores coloured, truncate.
Section 97. Context soit, spongy.
No Australian species recorded.
— Section 98. Context firm, not spongy.
A—Spores rough.
No Australian species recorded.
B—Spores smooth or slightly rough.
No Australian species recorded.
Section 99. Polyporus (Amaurodermus).
No Australian species recorded.
IV. HEXAGONA.
Section I.—Setosa. Surface clothed with dense branched hairs.
Section If.—Velutina. Surface with fine soft pubescence.
Section I1I— Ungulaformis (hoof-shaped). Thick, hard, and long
pores.
Section IV—Applanata. Pileus generally flattened and texture
usually softer.
Section V—Tenuis. Pileus very thin, with rather small shallow
pores.
Section VI—Pallida. Context white or pale ochraceous.
Section VII—Pseudofavola. Pileus more or less fleshy, tough.
Section I—Setosa. .
156. HEXAGONA APIARIA (Pers.), Lloyd.
Syn. H. Wightii Klotsch in Cooke’s Handb. Aust. Fungi,
No. 882; Baker, in Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., XXII, p. 238,
(1897).
542 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
The specimens recorded by Mr. Baker are from Lismore,
New South Wales, collected by Mr. Baeuerlen. We have
not examined these,
157. HEXAGONA CRINIGERA Fr.
Cheel, Reports, 1911 (1912), 12.
We have a solitary specimen of this species from Port
Moresby, collected by A. EK. Pratt in July, 1911.
Section II—Velutina.
No Australian species recorded.
Section ITI—Ungulaformis
158. HEXAGONA GUNNII Hook.
Hooker, Journ. Bot. Iv, p. 57; Cooke, Handb. Aust. Fungi
No. 887; Lloyd, Syn. Gen. Hexagona, p. 15 (1910); Cheel,
Reports, 1911 (1912) 12.
Lloyd has examined-the Australian specimens at Kew.
England, where there are several collections made in
Tasmania and Australia, In the National Herbarium,
Sydney, and in our private collections there are specimens
from the following localities:—Adelaide, South Australia
(J.B.O., 1898); Hobart, Tasmania, on Eucalyptus viminalis
Labill., (E.C., March, 1910); Conjola, on Blackbutt (W.
Heron, 1891); Cobar, (L. Abrahams, July, 1911); Parra-
matta, on Eucalyptus trunks (J.B.C., July, 1912), identified
by Lloyd.
Section IV—Applanata.
No Australian species recorded.
Section V--Tenuis.
159. HEXAGONA TENUIS Hook.
- Hooker in Kunth. Syn. 10; Cooke, Handb. Aust. Fungi
No. 891; Cheel, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., XXXII, p. 203, 1907’
Reports 1913 (1914) 17; Lloyd, Letter No. 19, 1908, and
Syn. Gen. Hexagona, p. 23, 1910.
This is a very common species, usually found on dead
‘branches. It hasa very wide range, having been recorded ©
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 543
by Cooke (l.c.) from Queensland, South Australia, North
Hast Australia and Cape York. Inthe National Herbarium
there are specimens from the following localities:—Hill
Top and Hazelbrook (J. H. Maiden, 1903 and 1906) on Coach-
wood (Ceratopetalum apetalum); Pittwater (A. Maclellan,
September, 1907); Helensburgh (W. Craigie, August, 1909);
Hornsby and Lilyvale (A. A, Hamilton, October, 1910);
Willoughby (A, G, Hamilton, July, 1910); Grose Vale, (Miss
Campbell, September, 1912, determined by Lloyd). We
have also specimens from Mount Wilson and from the
Hawkesbury River, both taken in June, The shed spores of
New South Wales plants are elongated, sausage-shaped,
granular, 13°8 to 15°S X Sy.
160. HEXAGONA TENUIS var. UMBRINELLA Fr.
Lloyd (Letter 63, 1916) has identified for us as H. wm-
brinella, specimens from Helensburgh (A. A. Hamilton,
October, 1913). He considers H. umbrinella as a form of
H, tenuis witha dark reddish-brown rugulose surface.
161. HEXAGONA TENUIS var. SUBTENUIS Berk.
Cooke, Handb. Aust. Fungi, No. 891; Baker, Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S.W., XXII, p. 238, 1897.
This, according to Lloyd (Syn. Gen. Hexagona, p. 26),
‘was originally named by Berkeley from India.’ The
Australian Specimens recorded under this name are very
probably intermediate forms between H. tenuis and H.
rigida. |
The following are probably thick forms of Hexagona
tenuis, and may be H. subtenuis of Berkeley. On silky
oak (Grevillea robusta) Hyde Park and Botanic Gardens
(OC. Robbie, A. Grant and E.C.); Leura (A. A. Hamilton,
August, 1910); Cronulla (J. Staer, July, 1910); Blackheath
(Rev. W. W. Watts, July, 1911); Tuggerah Lakes, N.S.W.,
and Eumundi, Q., (J. Staer, September, 1912); Milson
544 J. B, CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Island (J.B.0., July, 1912); Smoky Cape (F. W. Raffills,
October, 1905).
162. HEXAGONA RIGIDA Berk.
Berk., Journ. Linn. Soc. (Bot.) xvi, p. 54, 1878; Cooke,
Handb. Aust. Fungi, No. 887.
This was originally described by Berkeley from speci-
mens collected at Lord Howe Island.
In the National Herbarium, Sydney, there are specimens
from Lord Howe Island collected by Mr. J. H. Maiden in
April, 1898, and Rev. W. W. Watts in July, 1911, also
specimens received through the Curator of the Australian
Museum in 1897, which we feel sure belong to this species.
163. HEXAGONA SIMILIS Berk.
- Berk., Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot., v, p. 4, 1846; Cooke,
Hankb. Aust. Fungi, No. 893; Lloyd, Letters No. 38, p. 2,
and 60, p. 4, 1915, and Syn. Gen. Hexagona, p. 27, 1910.
We have specimens of this species from Helensburgh,
collected by A. A. Hamilton in October, 1913, and from
Cowan Oreek, Hornsby, on dead Casuarina, collected by
W. F. Blakely in June, 1915. Specimens of the latter
collection have been identified as this species by Lloyd.
Section ViI—FPallida.
No Australian species recorded.
Section VII—Pseudofavola.
No Australian species recorded. .
+ (164. HEXAGONA OLIVACEA,
Lloyd (Letter 53, p. 14, 1914) has identified a Specimen
from Dr. Stoward, Western Australia, as H. olivacea. We
do not find the species mentioned in his synopsis of the
genus Hexagona. |
Position under Section unknown.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 545
MERULIUS.
MERULIUS LACRYMANS Sch.
Specimens of this are recorded by Cooke in Handb. of
Australian Fungi, for Queensland and Western Australia.
We have no authentic specimens for this State so far,
although it may possibly be found here when the whole of
the specimens in our collections have been worked up.
MERULIUS UMBRINUS FY.
Specimens of this species have been identified by Lloyd,
collected at Wamberal by one of us (H.C.) in April, 1911,
Mr. Lloyd remarks, ‘The plant has the same coloration and
the same general nature as Merulius lacrymans, but
umbrinus is supposed to be a thinner species.’
V. LISTS OF AUSTRALIAN POLYPORES OF THE
GENERA FOMES, POLYPORUS AND HEXAGONA.
Compiled from Lloyd’s Works with additions from Cooke’s
Handbook of Australian Fungi.
(* indicates that Australian specimens have been seen or
identified by Lloyd. These numbers do not necessarily correspond
with those. given in the text.)
I.—STIPITATE POLYPORES.
1* Polyporus (Ganodermus) lucidus var. japonicus, N.S.W.
2 A 7" amboinensis
Ly 4) A fornicatus
4* F M3 ochrolaccatus, New Guinea
5* Polyporus (Amaurodermus) rudis, N.S.W. (Records of A.
rugosus probably refer to this.)
6 ES P leptopus ?
7* Polyporus (Lignosus) superpositus, N.S.W.
8 ‘ 4 scopulosus
9* Polyporus ( Petaloides) fusco-maculatus %
10 B 4 annulatus ? N.S. W.
Ii—December 5, 1917.
546
J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
11* Polyporus (Petaloides) rhipidium, N.S.W.
12
13
Sy
AQ*
39
9
rubidus, N.S.W.
brunneolus
petalodes
gallo-pavonis
grammocephalus, N.S.W.
( Petaloides ?) platotis
( Petalordes ) fusco-lineatus
99
99
dorcadideus
megalosporus, N.S.W.
obniger, N.S.W.
pocula
Polystictus ( Petaloides) mutabilis
39
obovatus
stereinus, N.S.W.
affinis, N.S.W.
luteus, N.S.W.
flabelliformis, N.S.W.
subfulvus, N.S.W.
sanguineus
connabarinus
Pentzker
intonsus
peroxydatus, N.S.W.
libum (type inadequate), N.S.W.
vernicifluus (type inadequate)
Polyporus (Merismus) Berkeleyr, N.S.W.
41* Polystictus ;
42 Polyporus
42a*
43
99
frondosus
anthracophilus
multiplea
fidleyr
sulphureus
i var. Wilsonianus
retiporus ?
intybaceus
scabriusculus
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 547
46 Polyporus (Merismus) letus
47 a . rosettus, N.S.W.
48* Polyporus (Spongiosus) rufescens
49* Rs A hystriculus
50* a $i Schiveinitzi1, N.S. W.
51 Polystictus rs tomentosus
52 Polyporus ( Pelleporus ) luteo-nitidus
53 Polystictus 1 perennis
54 es a oblectans, N.S.W.
55* Polyporus (Ovinus) mylitte, N.S.W.
56 Ee i minor-mylitte, N.S.W.
57 hs < ovinus
58 a x confluens
59 ‘ 5 ppes-capree
60* ms nS squamosus, N.S.W. ?
60a* a * ss var. lentinoides, N.S. W.
61 es “ tumulosus
62 35 (Ovinus ?) basilapiloides (Laccocephalum basila-
pilordes )
Ga" = (Ovinus) tasmanicus, N.S.W.
64* of - Hartmann, N.S.W.
65 Ae myclodes
66* Polyporus (Lentus) tricholoma
67 Es * brumalis
68* ee i virgatus, N.S.W.
69 me < santhopus, N.S. W.
70 - Bs arcularius, N.S. W.
re! 55 a lentus
72* Polyporus (Melanopus) varius, N.S.W.
iO a 6 Be ne var. Blanchetianus, N.S.W.
72b* a “4 f var. Pancheri, N.S.W.
73 s BY melanopus
74 Polystictus x nephridius
75 Polyporus a pusillus
76* 2A s Guilfoyler
77 is yi glabratus
548 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
II.—Fomes.
78 Fomes connatus
ay 5 annosus
80* ,, Clelandii, N.S.W.
81*- ,, Ohiensis, N,S.W.
82 » prnicola, N.S.W. ,
83* ,, hemitephrus, N.S.W.
84* ,, semitostus?
85 5, dochmius '
86* ,, concavus
Sh 55, ferneus
88 Trametes carnea
oor a Feei, N.S. W.
90% r lilacino-gilva, N.S.W.
[0a * » var. Stowardit
DObM es ue, ss » «=. 9:«=Ss CUcalypte
a He plebewa
92 ‘s rosea
93* % cupreo-rosea
94 FKomes lignosus
95* ,, kermes
96 » Iinflexrbilis
on » exotephrus
98 » fomentarius, N.S.W.
99 5, caliginosus (or endapalus ), N.S.W.
100* ,, pomaceus
101* 4,4, robustus,.N.S.W.
102* 4, ~~ setulosus
103* ,, conchatus, N.S.W.
TOSai 4h e var. saliconus
104* ,, <igniarius ? N.S.W.
105* ,, Robinsoniae (squarrosus), N.S.W.
106* lineato-scaber, N.S. W.
107* 4, rimosus, N.S. W.
1OKate 2, » var. Miaouli, N.S.W.
TOS Rs aus. scaber
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 549
109 fomes pectinatus
EEO » pullus
111* 34, Tepperii, N.S. W.
112* ., Yucatensis, N.S.W.
113 » linteus? N.S.W.
114* ,, applanatus, N.S.W.
ra" ., Fe var. lewcopheus
114b* ,, f ,, australis, N.S,W.
il4c* _,, * 5» , Oroflavus
i14d* ,, > » nigrolaccatus
The following in Cooke’s List are not referred to by Lloyd—
they are probably Porias.
115 Fomes obliquus Pers., N.S.W.
116 » luridus Kalk., N.S.W.
IlI.—Sercrion Apus oF THE GENUS PoLYPORUS.
117 Polyporus betulinus
118 i albellus, N.S.W.
£19* e portentosus, N.S.W.
120* S tephronotus, N.S.W.
OF pelliculosus
122* = eucalyptorum, N.S.W.
123 As emmaculatus
124* , cretaceus
125* a fumosus, N.S.W.
126 Ls eprileucus
127* 6 ochroleucus, N.S.W.
128 Trametes cubensis
129 Polyporus fragilis
130* cesius, N.S.W.
131 A: borealis
132* fe pelles
133 we adustus
134* 7 campylus
135* australrensis, N.S.W.
136* i dichrous, N.S.W.
550 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
137 Polyporus rutilans
138* 3 zonalis, N.S.W.
138a e ns var. rigidus, N.S.W.
139" - semilaccatus
140* He anebus, N.S.W.
140a * » var. bicolor, N.S.W. ‘
141* a durus
142* e vinosus, New Guinea
143* a, subolivaceus, N.S.W.
144* - gilvus, N.S.W.
144a* 5 5. var. scruposus, N.S.W.
144b* HF * » tnamenus
144c* ‘ Bs », lichnoides, N.S.W.
145* * radiatus, N.S.W.
146* Me dryadeus
147* _ Dielsii
148* 5 decipiens, N.S.W.
149 i spadiceus
150* a pubertatis, N.S.W.
151 5 hispidus
oe - cuticularis, N.S.W.
153* 54 corruscans (P. rheades )
154* - Patowillardu, N.S.W.
155* Bs Sruticum
The following species in Cooke’s Handbook are not referred to
by Lloyd :—
156 Polyporus corrivalis
157 - Gunnir
158 * argentatus
159 a fedatus
To these may be added :—
160 Polyporus strumosus (perhaps P. adustus)
161 aA ascoboloides (type destroyed)
IV .—HExXaGona.
162 Hexagona apiaria, N.S.W.
163 Me hirta
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 551
\
164* Hexagona Gunnii, N.S.W.
165 S sulcata var. durissima
£66* i tenuis, N.S.W..
166a - 3 i var. polygramma
166b* re A iN » umbrinella, N.S.W.
166c 5 % ms ,, subtenuis, N.S.W.
167 af rigida
168 o similis, N.S.W.
160% . olivacea
VI. COOKE’S LISTS OF CERTAIN AUSTRALIAN
POLYPORES CORRECTED IN THE LIGHT OF
LLOYD’S INVESTIGATIONS.
[In these lists, opposite the species recorded in Cooke, whose
number precedes each species, is given the correct identification
revealed by C. G. Lloyd’s researches. |
I —STIPITATE POLYPORES,
583 Polyporus ovinus = P. (Ovinus) ovinus
584 As pes-capree i pes-caproe
585 ‘xs Hartmanni a4 Hartmanni
586 tumulosus 3 tumulosus
587 , myelodes (myclodes) unknown (Lloyd)
588 i lentus = P. (Lentus) lentus
589 % brumalis 53 brumalis
590 ss cupuliformis = P. (Petalordes) pocula
591 bs arcularius = P. (Lentus) arcularius
592 i tricholoma 4 tricholoma
593 is similis ¥ tricholoma, probably
(type very scanty)
594 és alveolarius (collybioides) =P. (Lentus) arcularius
095 , stupitarius ; 5 tricholoma
596 e pistiformis. Type too young and indescribable
597 5 Schweinitzia = P. (Spongiosus) Schweinitzir
598 is tabuleeformis (spectabilis) ,, Schweinitzri
599 “ biennis ss rufescens
552 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
600 Polyporus rufescens 2 rufescens
601 * proteiporus 7 rufescens
602 - histriculus # histriculus
603 ie squamosus = P. (Ovinus) squamosus
604 + melanopus = P. (Melanopus) melanopus
605 63 picipes 4 varius, black form
606 - Strangert % dictyopus probably,
type unknown
607 3 infernalis i dictyopus, a form of
varius
608 - VAariUs - varius
609 < elegans cn elegans
. - var, nummularius
610 53 glabratus. Type unknown
611 i Guilfoyle. = P. (Melanopus) Guilfoyler
612 ‘4 Leprieurws Leprieurw. New
Guinea only.
613 +5 dictyopus 5 dictyopus, a form of
varius
613 (bis) ,, petaloides = P. ( Petaloides) petalodes
614 a grammocephalus ,, grammocephalus
* M var, Hmerict
a 2 5, Muellerr
615 3 platotts = P. (Section?) platotis
616 a dorcadideus = P. ( Petaloides) dorcadideus
617 i Susco-lineatus :; Susco-lineatus
618 x4 frondosus = P. (Merismus) frondosus
619 is entybaceus. Not mentioned by Lloyd
620 3 confluens = P. (Ovinus) confluens
621 scabriusculus. No type exists
622 \; anthracophilus = P. (Merismus) anthracophilus
623 A letus. Not mentioned by Lloyd
624 fs sulfureus = P. (Merismus) sulphureus
625 * retiporus a sulphureus var. reti-
porus ( P. retiporus ?)
and P. australiensis.
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 553
661 Polyporus subzonalis = P. ( Petaloides) gallopavonis pale form,
668 Fomes nigripes = P. (Amaurodermus ) leptopus probably, no
669
670
671
672
673
674
714
724
725
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
99
type exists
rudis . rudis
pullatus Type too poor for recognition
rugosus = P. (Amaurodermus) rudis probably, when
referring to Australian specimens
_amboinensis Probably not the true P. (Ganodermus )
amboinensis
M var. gibbosus
lucidus = P. (Ganodermus/) lucidus
superpositus = P. (Lignosus/ superpositus
scopulosus - scopulosus
Polystictus tomentosus = P. (Spongiosus ) tomentosus
luteonitidus = P. (Pelleporus) luteonitidus
perennis a perenntrs
cinnamoneus % oblectans, _prob-
ably, as referring to Australian specimens.
oblectans = P. (Pelleporus) oblectans
bulbipes (cladonia, perdurans) = P. (Pelleporus)
oblectans
parvulus = P. (Pelleporus) oblectans, probably,
as referring to Australian specimens
quadrans = P. (Lentus) zanthopus, probably, no
type exists
zanthopus (cupreo-nitens) = P, (Lentus) zanthopus
flabelliformis = P. (Petaloides) flabelliformis
porphyrites a luteus, probably
Adami (dilatatus) 63 obovatus
mutabilis 7 mutabilis
luteus He luteus
carneo-niger | ere carneo-niger
nephridius = P. (Melanopus) nephridius
afinis = P. (Petaloides) affinis
stereinus (cognatus) = P. ( Petaloides) stereinus
intonsus No type exists
a
, ?
554 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
743 Polystictus brunneolus = P. (Petaloides) brunneolus
744 5s peroxydatus No type exists
745 a libum Type inadequate
746 ss sanguineus = P. ( Petaloides) sanguineus
T47 a rasipes 5 obovatus
770 . cinnabarinus - cinnabarinus
790 , vernicifluus Type inadequate
895 Favolus squamifer = P. (Lentus) arcularius, probably.
896 », DBoucheanus = P.(Ovinus) squamosus var. Boucheanus
898 » pusillus = P. (Melanopus) pusillus
899 » vrhipidium = P. (Petaloides) rhipidium
1351 Mylitta australis = P. (Ovinus) mylitte
Il.— Fomes.
658 Polyporus hypopolius = fomes annosus, from the description.
662
664 i plebius = Trametes plebeia
re lagnosus 5 lugnosus
676 Fomes scansilis = Fomes australis, diseased form,
677 =, marginatus » prnicola
678 ,, dochmius » dochmius
679 ,, concavus 5» -concavus
680 ,, conchatus » conchatus
681 ,, australis » applanatus, var. australis
5 A var. arculatum
682 ,, chilensis = Fomes australis
683 ,, applanatus » applanatus
684 ,, orbiformis Type inadequate
685 ,, negrolaccatus = Fomes nigrolaccatus
686 ,, fomentarius 5 jomentarius
687 4, igniarius = Fomes igniarius. Australian references:
are probably to #. rimosus or I. robustus (J.B.C. and H.C.)
688 ,, rimosus = Fomes rimosus
689 ,, fulvus Original figure and description inadequate.
690 ,, grypheformis No type exists.
691 ,, salicinus = F. conchatus, var. salicinus
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 5d55
692 Fomes hemileucus As Polyporus, Lloyd says the description
was applied to three species, viz.
Trametes cubensis, Polyporus mo-
destus and P. valenzuelianus.
exotephrus = FF. exotephrus
contrarius Probably 2. annosus
tasmanicus Probably F. semitostus Type very poor
pullus = F. pullus
lineato-scaber = FI’. lineato-scaber
spadiceus = Polyporus spadiceus
inflexibilis (Polyporus recurvus) = FL. inflexibilis |
linteus ,, linteus
pectinatus » pectinatus
rubiginosus (Polyporus Laurencit) = Polyporus gilvus
Gourliet = Polystictus occidentalis Type very poor.
endapalus = I’, endapalus, possibly young /’, caliginosus
Curreyt = Trametes strigata
strigatus <5 » (4 J5.B.C and E.C.)
ponderosus = Polyporus durus, probably
annosus = Ff. annosus
compressus = Polyporus ochroleucus
connatus = I. connatus |
hemitephrus ,, hemitephrus
Pallisert % What species
ferreus = F, ferreus
scopulosus = Polyporus (Lignosus) scopulosus
oblinitus ij bicolor
fasciatus % What species
carneus = T'rametes carnea
cinereo-fuscus = Polyporus semilaccatus, discoloured.
homalopilus (Polyporus carneofulvus) = P. gilvus
incrassatus 5 reniformis = I, leucopheus —
obliquus Not referred to by Lloyd, probably a Poria.
luridus is i ee rae ” oe Uae
bistratosus Type a Poria
i
556 J. B. CLELAND AND E. CHEEL.
Il J.—Po.typorus (Apvus).
626 Polyporus tephronotus =. P. tephronotus
627
628 + corrivalis No reference by Lloyd
a eprileucus 5, epileucus
629 7 verecundus (Fiji) = P. immaculatus, probably
630 i semidigitaliformis Type too poor
631 a Gunni No reference by Lloyd
632 re angustus = P. tephronotus
633 . fragilis », fragilis
634 a stypticus ,, australiensis | vide Wakefield, Kew
Bull. (1914), 157]
635 BS chioneus », albellus
636 ‘ argentatus No reference by Lloyd
637 5 campylus = P. campylus
638 » nidulans », rutilans
639 95 fedatus No reference by Lloyd
640 re rubidus = P. rubidus
641 rf gilvus 5, gilvus .
642 - scruposus ,, scruposus, a form of P. gilvus
643 ‘ isidioides ( = P. stenoloma) = P. scruposus
644 ss demissus = P. fumosus, apparently
645 * rhinocephalus = P. fumosus
646 a adustus ,, adustus
647 . dichrous. 5, dichrous
648 e hispidus » Arsprdus
649 > fruticum »» fruticum
650 bs pelliculosus », pelliculosus
651 pi spiculifer “3 7m as a form
652 be borealis ,, borealis
653 : substuppeus The Australian specimens evidently
differ from the type.
654 ¥5 betulinus = P. betulinus .
655 4, portentosus ,, portentosus, some records probably
to P. australiensis
656 vi eucalyptorum = P. eucalyptorum
a
NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 55]
657 Polyporus strumosus = P. strumosus (perhaps P. adustus)
658
659
660
661
662
663
Tomes
hypopolius From the description, Pomes annosus
cartilagineus = P. durus
zonalis 4, zonalrs
subzonalis 5, gallo-pavonis, pale form (Stip-
itate Polypore)
lignosus = Homes lignosus
cubensis = Trametes cubensis
plebrus Bs plebera
testudo = P. durus
anebus ». anebus
ascoboloides Type destroyed
spadiceus = P. spadiceus
rubiginosus (Polyporus Laurencit) = P. gilvus
ponderosus = P. durus, probably
compressus 5, ochroleucus
oblinitus ,, bicolor
homalopilus (Polyporus carneofulvus) = P. gilvus.
Trametes (Polyporus) ochroleucus = P. ochroleucus
TV.—HExAGona.
Hexagona Wright = Hexagona apiarra
crinigera 4 hirta
durissuma rf sulcata var. durissima
Mueller sf rigida
sericea = Polystictus villosus
Gunnit = Hexagona Gunnir
rigida 5 rigida
umbrinella 5 tenuis, var. umbrinella
discolor (Favolus discolor) No type exists
tenuis = Hexagona tenuis
» var. subtenuis = Hexagona tenuis, var.
subtenurs
polygramma = Hexagona tenuis var. polygramma
sumilis Pa sumilis
decipiens = Polyporus decipiens
558 J. READ AND M. M. WILLIAMS.
A NOVEL APPLICATION OF BROMINE WATER IN
SYNTHETIC ORGANIO CHEMISTRY.
By JOHN READ, M.A., Ph.D., and MARGARET MARY
WILLIAMS, B.Sc.
[Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, December 5, 1917.]
BROMINE water is often used as a test for unsaturation in
the molecule of organic substances: decolourisation of the
reagent being taken to indicate the presence of the ethy-
lenic or the acetylenic linkage. In the former case, the
reaction has usually been assumed to yield solely a dibromo-
compound, in accordance with the subjoined general scheme:
RRiC: CReR3s + Bre = RRiCBr'COBrRoRs.
We have recently been able to show, however, that in
the simplest and best-known case of this kind, namely,
that of ethylene, the yield of the dibromide may under
suitable conditions fall quite low, the bulk of the product
being ethylene bromohydrin. In this instance the bromine
water is thus an efficient source, not only of bromine, but
also of hypobromous acid, and the two reactions represented
below take place concurrently:—
(1) HO : OHe as Bre = HeCBr ° OBrH:;
(2) H.C : CH, + HO’Br = H2OBr°CH2OH.
Of the total bromine used in a particular experiment,
37°5 per cent. was converted to ethylene dibromide, 54°4
per cent. was converted to ethylene bromohydrin, and the
remaining 8°1 per cent. was eliminated as hydrobromic acid, .
formed by a partial decomposition of the hypobromous acid
to hydrogen bromide and oxygen.*
From these figures it is clear that the relative percentage
amounts of ethylene converted to dibromide and bromo-
1 Trans. Chem. Soc., vol. 111 (1917), p. 240.
,
a we
BROMINE WATER IN SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 559
hydrin were 40°8 and 59°2, respectively. This yield of
ethylene bromohydrin is equal to the highest recorded as
obtainable by the action of a carefully prepared solution of
hypobromous acid upon ethylene.
In view of tbe laborious and unsatisfactory methods used
in the preparation of aqueous solutions of hypochlorous and
hypobromous acids and the consequent difficulty of obtain-
ing halogenohydrins directly from unsaturated substances,
it was considered of importance to ascertain whether the
readily accessible reagent bromine water could be utilised
as a source ‘of hypobromous acid in other reactions of a
similar type. ~
The second substance to be selected for investigation in
this connection was cinnamic acid. The result in this case
was even more striking than with ethylene. We have been
able to demonstrate that under suitable conditions cinnamic
acid reacts speedily and quantitatively with bromine water,
giving a yield of over 80 per cent. of the bromohydrin, 1.e.,
f£-phenyl-c-bromohydracrylic acid (commonly known as
phenyl-o-bromolactic acid). The other product of the reac-
tion is cinnamic acid dibromide:—
(1) CsHs°:CH: CH:COOH + HO-Br =
: CeHs°CHOH*CHBr’COOH;
(2) O.H;°CH: CH: COOH + Bre =
OsHs°CHBr’CHBr:COOH.
In order to obtain the maximum yield of the bromohydrin,
the cinnamic acid is subjected to vigorous mechanical
stirring in contact with about thirty times its weight of
ice-cold water, into which a slow current of air charged
with bromine vapour is introduced through a perforated
glass bulb.
Under these conditions absorption of the bromine takes
place rapidly at first, but slackens gradually towards the
end of the reaction. A very slight excess over the calcu-
560 J. READ AND M. M. WILLIAMS.
lated quantity of bromine is sufficient to produce a per-
manent yellow tinge in the liquid.
When the absorption is complete the undissolved cinnamic
acid dibromide is separated by filtration from the aqueous
liquid, which contains the phenyl-c-bromolactic acid in
solution. This substance is readily isolated by extraction
with ether, in which it is extremely soluble. The extracted
aqueous liquid upon evaporation yields nothing beyond a
further small quantity of cinnamic acid dibromide. No
bromostyrolene appears to be formed in the reaction.
The purification of phenyl-c-bromolactic acid appears to
have been effected in many cases by crystallisation from
chloroform, notwithstanding its ready solubility in the cold
solvent. The best results are obtained by crystallisation
from hot water or from hot benzene or toluene; the acid
may also be crystallised from hot ligroin, in which, how-
ever, it is only sparingly soluble. The pure acid dissolves
to a clear solution in warm water. A slight admixture of
cinnamic acid dibromide is sufficient to cause turbidity in
such solutions, due to the formation of bromostyrolene; the
latter substance may easily be removed by shaking the
liquid with light petroleum. It may also be noted that
phenyl-o-bromolactic acid separates readily from aqueous
solution, in the form ofa crystalline precipitate, upon the
addition of dilute sulphuric acid.
After one recrystallisation from hot toluene, the acid
prepared in the manner described above melted at 120°—
122°. Upon adding an equivalent amount of silver nitrate
solution to an aqueous solution of the acid, a rapid separa-
tion of the crystalline silver salt occurred; titration of the
washed and air-dried salt with standard ammonium thio-
cyanate solution indicated a silver content of 30°28 per
cent., the formula C»>HsO3;BrAg corresponding to 30°68 per
cent.
BROMINE WATER IN SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 561.
The processes involved in the above reaction are sum-
marised in the appended scheme :—
Bro + H'OH =— HBr + HO'Br
V. : Vv
C.;Hs*CHBr’ CHBr* COOH C.Hs°CHOH:CHBr’ COOH.
From this it is apparent that the production of every
molecule of bromohydrin involves the formation of a mole-
cule of hydrogen bromide. An excess of hydrobromic acid
in the aqueous solution, over the amount arrived at in this
way, will be due to decomposition of hypobromous acid into
hydrogen bromide and oxygen :—
HO: Br = HBr + O.
Any wastage of bromine occurring in this way may there-
fore be traced by estimating the amount of hydrobromic:
acid in the aqueous solution.
In a carefully conducted operation, 20 grams of cinnamic
acid yielded 6°55 grams of cinnamic acid dibromide and 27°1
grams of phenyl-c-bromolactic acid, CsHs;CHOH*OHBr’°
OOOH + H2O. It is thus evident that the relative per-.
centage amounts of cinnamic acid converted to dibromide .
and bromohydrin were 17°1 and 82°9, respectively.
The amount of bromine used in this operation was 21°3.
grams; from the data just quoted, the quantities utilised
in forming dibromide and bromohydrin were 3°40 and 16°49
grams, respectively. Consequently, the wastage of bromine
in the operation, due to the combined causes of decom-.
position of hypobromous acid and possible diffusion of
unaltered halogen, was only 6°6 per cent. This result
compares favourably with that obtained with ethylene, in
which case the loss of bromine was 8°1 per cent. In both:
cases, liowever, since a certain loss of the reaction-products
is unavoidable during the process of their isolation, the
actual wastage of bromine will be somewhat less than tbe
above figures indicate.
J3I—December 5, 1917.
562 J. READ AND M. M. WILLIAMS.
These results having been obtained by using a suspension
of cinnamic acid in water, it was next of interest to inves-
tigate the action of the reagent upon a neutral solution of
a soluble salt of the acid; for this purpose the cinnamic
acid was dissolved in the minimum amount of sodium
bicarbonate solution. Upon conducting the operation in
the manner described above, the bromine was absorbed
more rapidly than under the original conditions; and a
heavy oil, accompanied by a small amount of crystalline
material, separated from the solution. At the end of the
reaction, a little dilute sulphuric acid was added to the
liquid; the oil was extracted with light petroleum and
identified as 6-bromostyrolene; the accompanying insoluble
solid product proved to consist essentially of cinnamic acid
dibromide. A third product, namely, phenyl-c-bromolactic
acid, was extracted from the aqueous solution in the usual
way by means of ether.
In this way, 20 grams of cinnamic acid yielded 18°7 grams
of phenyl-o-bromolactic acid, 1°9 grams of cinnamic acid
dibromide, and 10°5 grams of @-bromostyrolene. Thus, the
relative percentage amounts of cinnamic acid converted to
bromohydrin, dibromide, and (-bromostyrolene were 52’°8,
4°6, and 42°6, respectively. The amount of bromine used
was 21°3 grams; and an examination of the above figures
shows that both the cinnamic acid and the bromine are
quantitatively accounted for.
The interesting result is thus revealed that by modifying
the conditions of the reaction.in this simple manner the
yield of bromohydrin falls from 82°9 to 52°8 per cent., the
yield of dibromide falls from 17°4 to 4'6 per cent., anda
new product, £-bromostyrolene, is formed to the extent of
42°6 per cent. The last named substance being evidently
derived by decomposition of the sodium salt of cinnamic
BROMINE WATER IN SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 563
acid dibromide, the complete series of reactions involved
may be summarised as follows:—
Bro + H‘OH 2” HBr + HO'Br
| Vv
O.-H;‘OHBr:CHBr:COONa O.H;‘CHOH:CHBr'COOH+NaBr
V
OsHs‘CH:COH Br+ NaBr+C0Os:.
Quite apart from the general interest of these results
the reaction which forms the main subject of this com-
munication is obviously of value as affording a greatly
improved method for the preparation of phenyl-c-bromo-
lactic acid. As faras can be ascertained, the only method
hitherto available for this purpose has involved the pro-
longed boiling of cinnamic acid dibromide with water;! as
is well known, this process is vitiated by the formation of
appreciable quantities of bromostyrolene and other by-
products.
Phenyl-e-bromolactic acid is of interest because of the
ease with which it is converted into phenylacetaldehyde, a
substance which, owing to its intense hyacinth odour, is
used to some extent in perfumery. The conversion is
brought about by treating the phenyl-c-bromolactic acid
successively with caustic alkali and dilute sulphuric acid:?
©.H;'CHOH* CHBr:‘COONa + NaOH =
OsHs‘CH'CH’COONa + NaBr-+ H20O.
\o/
CgHs';CH'CH'COOH = ©.H;'CHe CHO + OOdz.
\o/
It is apparent that the reaction described above facilitates
very considerably the preparation of phenylacetaldehyde
from cinnamic acid.
1 Glaser, Liebig’s Annalen, vol. 147, p. 84.
* Erlenmeyer and Lipp, Liebig’s Annalen, vol. 219, p. 182.
564 J. READ AND M. M. WILLIAMS.
In continuation of the work outlined in this paper, it is
proposed to investigate various other aspects of this method
of halogenohydrination. Some possible applications of the
reaction in synthetic and other organic chemical processes
are worthy of consideration, particularly, it would seem,
in connection with the preparation of synthetic drugs. The
use of ethylene bromohydrin in the novocaine synthesis is
a case in point; further, the grouping :C(OH)'O(NHR):,
so readily derived from the closely related halogenohydrin
grouping, :O(OH):C(X):, appears to possess a considerable
degree of physiological importance. In conclusion, it may
be remarked that the presence of so many ethylenic con-
stituents in the Australian natural essential oils lends an’
additional interest to the reaction.
ABSTRACT oF PROCEEDINGS |
ee er
4
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
Ropal Society of Sew South Wales.
MAY 2nd, 1917.
The Annual Meeting, being the three hundred and eighty-
eighth General Monthly Meeting of the Society, was held
at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, Sydney, at 8 p.m.
Mr. T. H.-HovuGuTon, President, in the Ohair.
Forty-nine members and one visitor were present.
The minutes of the General Monthly Meeting of the 6th
December, 1916, were read and confirmed.
The certificates of ten candidates for admission as ordin-
ary members were read: three for the second and seven
for the first time.
Mr. G. H. Hauiican and Professor O. U. VoNWILLER
were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. W. = Dun deputed to
preside at the Ballot Box.
The following gentlemen were nye electéd ordinary
eaners of the Society:—
IRwin Ormssy, Manufacturer, ‘Caleula,’ Allison Boaak
Randwick.
WILLIAM THOMAS WILLINGTON, Manufacturer, King
Street, Arncliffe.
GEORGE WRIGHT, Director, Farmer and Company, c/o
Farmer and Company, Sydney.
The Annual Financial Statement for the year ended 31st
March, 1917, was submitted to members, and, on the
iv, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
motion of the Honorary Treasurer, Dr. H. G. OHAPMAN,
was unanimously adopted :—
GENERAL ACCOUNT.
RECEIPTs. £° s:° dd)" 2 ieee
To Cash at Bank and on hand at Ist April, 1916 75.11
»» Subscriptions es <i es acs es 509 5 O
» Rents—
Offices... nor ee Best ... 288 10 O
Hall and Tageaey oe sie soe ‘aee, LOS? Ole
—_——— 396 15 6
», Sundry Receipts ... : as es <a 10. 7 @
», Government Subsidy for 1916 bisa 399 19 8
», Clarke Memorial Fund —
Amount received todate' .... © 220 0 O
£1611 18 2
PAYMENTS. un pd. By “Gey ene d.
By Salaries and Wages — ;
Office Salary and alc Fees won, 1Ot
1 ae
Assistant Librarian... me i | Otle ae
; Caretaker... desl tedghe bcl-goerle bem th ZOn ORS s¢
375 11 10
5 Printing, Stationery, Advertising, pias etc.— ‘tad nian
Stamps and Telegrams _.., Paral 35 9 3
' Office Sundries, Stationery, ete. seo 8 LOOT
Advertising ... hf ere et liga olapO mom
Printing a8 <i = ne a. ~ of 1950
: — 11516 3
5», Rates, Taxes and Services— %
Electric Light noe a ws ase, | OP eae
Gas |... Pears | ie spite’ fio f\ LSP Toes
Insurance... wae baie mate ms ge OD Oso
Rates ... ve iz, ae dss ws OD On,
Telephone <2... *sd, «sete poe bas &. 0; 10: 4 ae
159 12 1
» Printing and aia eee s Volume— (ou lo? 2 Ss
Printing, etc.. wikis siaaile deca cio’ a», 9800.5.-8
Book- binding Regs OO Pade aan | SO eS
——— 32011 6
>, Library—
Books and Periodicals“... ... ae “+ 106%.3° 9
», sundry Expenses—-
Bank Charges and Exchange _... woe OM Anges
_ Repairs are aa see iit) «eee edop ye Ons
Lantern Operator ... saree aa vee Oa Om
5
Sundries ows ore ane natn sae Ae ae 8
. 61. 18,, 1
. Carried forward _.... bent i Sas (1189 18 6
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Vv.
PAYMENTS—continued. £ 8s. ad. £ 8. d.
Brought forward i 336 1139 13 6
By Interest—
On Mortgage sia Be ETAL ‘teh 1151070
,, Clarke Memorial Fund—
Instalments to War Loantodate .....:.. 220 0 O
» Balance—
Credit Balance, Union Bank of Australia Ltd. 98 2 O
Less unpresented cheque ... see wei eee 9
6610 3
Credit Balance at Savings Bank of N.S.W. 70 0 0O
On Hand .. ae saa if ae 014 5. '
1387 4 8
ue RORUMCREZ
Compiled from the books and accounts of the Royal Society of New
South Wales and certified to be in accordance therewith.
HENRY G. CHAPMAN, m.v., Honorary Treasurer.
W. PERCIVAL MINELL, F.c.p.a.
: : Auditor.
Sypnry, 2lst Aprit, 1917.
BUILDING AND INVESTMENT FUND.
‘ Receirts. . __ Loe oo aM Ld:
‘To Loan on Mortgage owing to the Australasian Association,
‘Advancement of Science—
Balance as at 81st March, 1916... ... ... ss 2800 0 O
», General Fund— tae
Amount received to date... ate 5 des aaistenoe. Of 0
“£2415 0 0
PAYMENTS. 2 Ss: ds
By Interest—
- Amount paid to Australasian Association Advance-
ment of Science hs aoe ike ae a LL Ol +O
», Balance owing at this date ... Be on as 1. 2800? OO
£2415 O O
CLARKE MEMORIAL FUND.
BALANCE SHEET, 3lst Marca, 1917.
LIABILITIES. ocgh cde). Sesaae
Accumulation Fund—
Balance as at 3lst March, 1916 ee a3 606 6 9
vi. "ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
LIaBILITIES—continued. & s.dl (20 ane:
Brought forward ... 606 6 9%
Additions during the year—
Interest Savings Bank of N.S.W. (a 2 |.
a Government Savings Bank ... 610 4
5 Commonwealth Savings Bank 117 3
Pr War Loan « 18 Oe
33 15 6
£640 2 8
ASSETS. & 8... d. ae
Royal Society of New South Wales, General Fund
__ Amount invested in Commonwealth War Loan 400 0 0
Cash deposited in Savings Bank of N.S.W. cane, LOL DAZ
nn Government Savings Bank 43.12 7
ms Commonwealth Savings Bank... 39 15 6
———_ 240 2 3
£640 2 3
STATEMENT OF RECEIPTS AND Payments, 3lst Marcu, 1917.
REcEIPTS.
To Balance 3lst March, 1916—
Savings Bank of N.S.W. ...
Government Savings Bank
Commonwealth Savings Bank
», Interest to date—
Savings Bank of N.S.W.
Government Savings Bank
Commonwealth Savings Bank
War Loan
PAYMENTS.
By General Fund— | .
Amount Invested in War Loan
» Balance at this date—
Savings Bank of N.S.W.
Government Savings Bank .
Commonwealth Savings Bank
£ s. ds See
194 6 83
194 2 3
3718 3
— 426 6 9.
7 eee
610 4
tes
18 0 0
— ——, ae
£460 2 3
Bi Vie ae Gee
ves 220 0 O-
151 14 2
F 48 12 7
vm Oo, BG
— 240 2 3
£460 2 3
'
ath Ti 2.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Vil.
On the motion of Acting Professor L. A. CoTTon,
seconded by Mr. R. W. CHALLINOR, Mr. W. P. MINELL.
was elected Auditor for the current year.
A report on the state of the Society’s property and the
annual report of the Council were read as follows:—
ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COUNCIL FOR THE YEAR 1915-16.
(Ist May to 26th April).
‘The Council regrets to report that we have lost by death’
five ordinary members and one Honorary Member. Four
members have resigned, and four names were removed from
the roll owing to non-payment of subscriptions. On the
other hand, thirty-one ordinary members have been elected
during the year.
To day (25th April, 1917) the roll of members stands at.
316.
During the Society’s year there have been nine monthly
meetings and ten Oouncil meetings.
Two new Sections were established during the year,
namely:—Section of Agriculture and Section of Industry.
On the 13th March an informal meeting of members took
place to extend a welcome to Sir HRNEST SHACKLETON on
his return from Antarctica.
Two Popular Science Lectures were given, namely:—
July 20—‘ The Chemistry of Nitrogen and its Value for Food-
stuffs and Explosives,” by R. K. MuRPHY, Dr. Ing., Chem, Eng.
August 17—“ The Debt of Agriculture to Science,” by Prof.
R. D. Wart, M.A., B.Sc.
Fourteen papers were read at the monthly meetings, and
these, with a good number of exhibits, afforded much in-
struction and interest to members of the Society.
The President announced that the Council had awarded
the Clarke Memorial Medal to Major (Professor) Davin,
C.M.G., F.R.S., of the Sydney University.
ae
Vill. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
It was announced that the following members had died
during the recess:—Dr. J. F. FLASHMAN, Mr. W. G. Pyz,
Dr. EK. P. RAMSAY and the Rev. WILLIAM Scort.
The following donations were laid upon the table:—323
parts, 3 volumes, and 14 reports.
The President, Mr. T. H. HOUGHTON, then delivered his
Presidential Address.
On the motion of Dr. ROsEBy a hearty vote of thanks
was accorded to the retiring President for his valuable
address. ,
' Mr.T.H. Hovucuton briefly acknowledged the com pliment.
There being no other nominations, the President declared
the following gentlemen to be Officers and Council for the
coming year :— ee ae |
President:
J. B. CLELAND, ™.p., chm.
Vice-Presidents:
HENRY G. SMITH, res, «0 RB. GREIG-SMITH, D.Sc, |
©. HEDLEY, r...s. USSR AES OE are HOUGHTON, M. INST. C.E,
i ; . Hon. Treasurer:
H. G, CHAPMAN, mp.
Hon. Secretaries: <n et s
R. H. CAMBAGE, LS., F.LS. | J. H. MAIDEN, 1Ls.o., F.n.s.
Members of Council;
C. ANDERSON, M.a., D.Sc. y NANGLE, F.R.A:S.
E. C. ANDREWS, B.A., F.a.s. F. H. QUAIFH, w.a., M.D.
D. CARMENT, t.1.4., F.F.A. C. A. SUSSMILCH, r.a.s.
W. S. DUN, : H. D. WALSH, B.a.1., M. INST. C.E.
Prof. C. E. FAWSITT, pD.se., Ph.D. . | Prof. W.H. WARREN, LL.D., Wh. Se.
Mr. T. H. Hovucnton, the out-going President, then
installed Dr. J. B. CLELAND as President for the ensuing
year, and the latter briefly returned thanks.
JUNE 6th 1917.
The three hundred and eighty-ninth General Monthly
Meeting of the Royal Society of New South Wales was
held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, at 8 p.m.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 1X%
Dr. J. B. OLELAND, President in the Chair.
- Thirty-one members were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed.
The certificates of nine candidates for admission as.
ordinary members were read: seven for the second, and
two for the first time.
Mr. W. WELCH and Mr. H. OHEEL were appointed Scru-
tineers, and Dr. GreEIG-SmMITH deputed to preside at the
Ballot Box.
The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary
members of the Society:— -
RosBert Henry Bonn, Chief Brewer, Messrs. Toohey’s.
Limited, ‘ Tiro-Tiro,’ Middleton Street, Stanmore.
HRNEST BREAKWELL, B.A., B.Sc, Government Agros-
tologist, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
FREDERICK WILLIAM CARPENTER, M.A., Senior Science
Master, Sydney Grammar School, College Street,
Sydney. ; ;
ALFRED EDWARD HURSE, A.M.I.C.E., Civil Engineer,
‘Llanfair,’ Robert Street, Strathfield.
WILLIAM POOLE, B.E., Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., M.I.M.M., L.S., Oon-
sulting Engineer, 906 Culwulla Chambers, Castle-
reagh Street, Sydney.
SAMUEL EDWARD SIBLEY, Chemist, ‘Garnella,’ Blenheim.
Street, Randwick.
WILFRED JOsEPH SpRuSON, Consulting Engineer and
Patent Attorney, 91 Elizabeth Street, Sydney.
A letter was read from Mr. WILLIAM SCOTT, in which he
expressed thanks for the Society’s sympathy in the death
of his father, the late Rev. WILLIAM SCOTT.
Six volumes, one hundred and fifty-six parts, one calendar
and two reports were laid upon the table.
X. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS,
The President announced that certain scientific work on
the measurement of earth-tides was being carried out by:
the Rev. E. F. PIGOT S.J., at Cobar, and invited members,
who.felt so disposed, to contribute towards the necessary
expenses. | :
THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: -
1. “Notes on Acacia, No. 2,”’ by J. H. MAIDEN, F.R.S.
2. “‘Table to facilitate the location of the Cubic Parabola,”’
by C. J. MERFIELD, F.R.A.S. (Communicated by Mr. J.
NANGLE).
EXHIBITS:
1. Dr. H. G. CHAPMAN exhibited a sample of “‘ peptone’’
obtained from hen’s egg-white. This had been prepared to
replace Witte’s peptone in media used for growing micro-
organisms. Since the beginning of the war, bacteriologists
had been husbanding their stocks of Witte’s peptone, made
in Germany, as other brands of commercial peptone on this
market had not been satisfactory as substitutes for Witte’s
peptone. The “peptone” that he had made, was tested in
‘@ bouillon agar on which meningococci were sown. The
meningococci grew luxuriantly, when this agar was stroked
with serum. On subculture the meningococci grew on the
peptone agar alone. Streptococci could be readily culti-
vated on media containing this ‘‘ peptone.’’ The ‘‘ peptone’’
had been used with complete satisfaction in the Patho-
logical Department of the University of Sydney for routine
bacteriological investigations. Dr. CHAPMAN hoped that
other bacteriologists would use it in preference to German
peptone. The peptone had been prepared in the following
manner :—One hundred and fifty cubic centimetres of fresh
egg-white containing 15 gm. protein were stirred with 150
c.cm. 2% aqueous solution of sodium chloride. To this
mixture 300 c.cm. N/10 soda were added. The alkaline
liquid was warmed at 37° C. for 15 days in a sterilized flask
‘when the fluid no longer coagulated upon boiling it. The
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Xl.
liquor was heated in a digester at 6 atmos. pressure for one
- hour. It became turbid and dark brown in colour. The
precipitate which was not bulky, was removed by filtration
and the liquid was heated in a steam sterilizer on three
successive days. The brown solution of peptone contained
0°48% nitrogen corresponding to 3% peptone. The alka-
linity to phenol-phthalein was such that 100 c.cm. solution
required 4°0 c.cm. N/10 acid to abolish the pink colour of
the indicator. The solution had been used to make the
media.
2. Mr. R. T. BAKER exhibited a section of the North
American Redwood (Sequoia sempervirens) taken from a
tree grown at Reefton, New Zealand. It illustrates a
rapidity of growth of secondary wood that is perhaps a
world’s record, the diameter of the tree measuring 2 feet
104 inches, at the age of 27 years; the width of each annual
ring is about one inch.
3. Dr. J. B. OLELAND exhibited some beautiful coloured
drawings, remarkable for their almost microscopic exacti-
tude, of two Australian polyporoid fungi, kindly drawn by
Mr. H. BUTLER of Derby, England, from specimens sent to
him; also a series of watercolours of some of our larger
soft fungi prepared by Miss PHYLLIS CLARKE.
JULY 4th, 1917.
The three hundred and ninetieth General Monthly Meeting
of the Royal Society of New South Wales was held at the
Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, Sydney, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President, in the Chair.
Sixty members and four visitors were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed.
The certificates of four candidates for admission as
ordinary members were read: two for the second, and two
for the first time.
xil. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Acting Professor CoTToN and Mr. R. W. CHALLINOR were
appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. H.C. ANDREWS deputed to
preside at the Ballot Box. |
The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary
members of the Society:—
NORMAN CHARLES NasH, Analytical Chemist, ‘Tre-
leaven,’ Darling Street, Balmain Hast. |
DANSIE THOMAS SAWKINS, M.A., Trigonometrical Sur-
veyor, ‘Brymedura,’ Kissing Point Road, Turra-
murra.
Mrs. J. F. FLASHMAN wrote thanking the Society for
Sympathy in her recent bereavement.
Two -volumes, seventy-two parts, five reports and one
calendar, were laid upon the table.
THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ:
1. ‘‘The Problem of the Great Australian Artesian Basin,”
by ALEXANDER L. DU TOIT, D.Sc., F.R.S.S., (communicated
by J. E. Carne). | i
Remarks were made by Acting Professor CoTToN and
Mr. ANDREWS.
2. ‘Sydney Water Supply,’’ by T. W. KEELE, mM. Inst. c.E.
On the motion of Mr. J. H. CARDEW, seconded by Mr.
H. G. McKINNEY, it was decided to postpone the discussion
on Mr. KEELE’S paper until the Council had set apart an
evening for the purpose.
EXHIBITS:
1. Rev. Dr. RosEBy exhibited a chart of Southern Cir-
cumpolar Stars, and explained a simple method of finding
the ‘South Pole” star, Sigma Octantis.
In exhibiting the New Southern Circumpolar Map issued by
the N.S.W. Branch of the British Astronomical Association, Dr.
RoseBpy remarked on the very few people who have ever seen the
South Pole Star. Hardly one in ten thousand people in the
ah
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Xlll,
Northern Hemisphere has failed to see what is by pre-eminence
called “the North Star,” while hardly one in ten thousand here
has ever seen the corresponding South Star. No wonder: it is
barely visible to unassisted vision, Dr. Rosrsy then exhibited a
diagram (a copy of which is shown herewith) which showed how
the star might readily be found with any ordinary binocular glass.
Starting with the best known southern constellation, the Southern
Cross, you follow the line of its longer axis till on the opposite
side of the pole you encounter Achernar, a brilliant first magnitude
star. If you bisect this line between the uppermost star of the
Cross and Achernar, you will be very near the South Pole, about
34° above the horizon in the latitude of Sydney. Now, starting
from Achernar, and keeping throughout on'the line towards the
Cross, you meet the bright star, the brightest in the neighbourhood,
f Hydri. And now, heading directly towards the Cross, you
encounter the little triple asterism y,, thence an unnamed star,
and then + Octantis. The next star along this line is the pole
star, o Octantis, which you immediately recognise from two stars
near it, B and omicron Octantis, making what looks like the
acute bending of a “hoe.” The pole star and B are nearly equi-
distant from the pole, and in 1922 will be exactly so.
The Circumpolar Map exhibited, which for a special reason, was.
confined to the area within two degrees of the pole showed about
180 stars, The ordinary star atlases, including that of Sydney
Observatory, only show two or three stars within that area. But
this limited region had recently occupied the observation and
research of two great observatories—that of the Royal Observatory
at the Cape, and that of the Columbia Observatory of the United
States. The Cape Observatory catalogues 917 stars within the
area, and the Columbia Observatory (Washington). 829. The
map selects 180 of these, those within the range of ordinary tele-
scopes. The map itself is a reproduction by Mr. E. R. Morris of
an exquisite photograph by the Union Observatory of South Africa.
A unique feature of the Cape and Washington Catalogues is
that the stars are numbered in a new, and much more accurate
Kx—December 5, 1917.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
oy
(
_t---OD
p fe} ‘ ° RUX -
6
4
‘
oa
G 02 POLE
How :
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XV.
order than is usual. The Ascensions of Stars so close to the pole
became at length impossible of accurate measurement. The
observatories named resorted, in consequence, to the method of
rectangular co-ordinates, «and y, with the origin as the pole.
Thus, where the ordinary method hopelessly breaks down, the
places of the stars can yet be quite accurately fixed.
The effect of the precession of the Hqwinowes is very strikingly
shown on the map, which indicates the place of the pole in 1850
and in 1950, an interval of a hundred years. It will be seen how
great a change of apparent movement among the stars must result
from this perpetually changing centre.
The seven stars nearest to the pole, it was suggested as an aid
to the memory, might be designated “the Septentriones.” The
word, so familiar to us in Cesar’s Commentaries is not necessarily
hyperborean. The ‘seven plough-oxen” may without challenge
be transferred to Antarctica.
It may be mentioned that the two catalogues, of which the
local branch of the British Astronomical Association thus furnishes
a map, are the result of a research which has a very important
bearing on the interpretation of stellar photography—an exceed-
ingly minute and difficult branch of present-day astronomical
work—the inter-adjustment of overlapping plates being a study
of the first importance in fixing with precision the places of the
stars.
The map, it is hoped, may be an aid to accurate terrestrial survey.
The number of stars thus for the first time rendered available
cannot fail to be of service. The fixing exactly the place of the
pole has not seldom been a matter of some perplexity.
2. Mr. A. J. SACH, F.C.S., exhibited some interesting
samples of rubber from Malaysia, forwarded by Mr. COLIN
P. THANE. |
3. Mr. H. OC. ANDREWS exhibited a fine specimen of
molybdenite in quartz, from the Kitchener Lode, Khartoum,
North Queensland.
XVI. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
AUGUST 1st., 1917.
The three hundred and ninety-first General Monthly
Meeting of the Royal Society of New South Wales was
held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, Sydney,
at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President, in the Chair.
Forty members and six visitors were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed. ,
The certificates of two candidates for admission as
ordinary members were read for the second time.
Mr. A. D. OLLE and Mr. E. CuEen were appointed Scru-
tineers, and Professor FAwsITT deputed to preside at the
Ballot Box.
The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary
members of the Society:—
HERBERT TATE, Manufacturer, Bridge Road, Stanmore.
THOMAS IRWIN WALLAS, Bacteriologist, 175 Macquarie
street, Sydney.
It was announced that the Engineering Association of
New South Wales, tenants of this Society, had kindly placed
their library .at the disposal of members of the Royal
Society, for reference purposes.
Five volumes, one hundred and fifty-nine parts, and nine
reports were laid upon the table.
THE FOLLOWING PAPER WAS READ:
‘* On the Resin of the Outer Bark of Melaleuca uncinata,”’
by H. G. SMITH, F.C.S.
The following discussion then took place upon Mr. KEELE’S
paper, °“‘ The Sydney Water Supply’’:— |
Mr. J. H. CARDEW, M. Inst. c.E., apologised for the absence
of Mr. H. G. McKINNEY, who was prevented through illness
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XVil.
from being present, and he then spoke of the great neces-
sity for an adequate supply of water in a city such as
Sydney, and considered it was both safe and prudent to
adopt as high as a 4% rate of population increase. He
mentioned that the increase of manufacturing and the
extension of the sewerage schemes in all the outlying
suburbs of Sydney will largely increase the amount of water,
and it is a matter of experience that the demand per head
increases with the lapse of time, and the use of water
always induces its use more lavishly, even for objects which
are perfectly legitimate and which are not wasteful. The
proximity of our sea beaches, and the facilities for sea
bathing, no doubt to some extent, reduce our requirements.
He thought that the consumption rate of 63 gallons per
head, as proposed by Mr. KEELE for the year 1937, was too
low, and that a rate of at least 80 gallons per head should
be allowed, the consumption in the city of New York for
the next 25 years being estimated at 150 gallons per head.
He referred to the absence of available knowledge in regard
to the topography, physical characteristics, contours, rain-
fall, the run-off of the catchment area, and the amount of
‘water the catchment area can contribute, and said that
the author has been obliged to adopt a run-off of 447%, but
in all probability the higher parts of the catchment area
will contribute a greater rainfall and greater rate of run-off
than the author mentions. Under the circumstances it is
impossible to make any estimate of the amount of water
the catchment area can contribute, and the forecast made
by the author must be to a very large extent guess-work,
although in all probability it is a most conservative esti-
‘Iate that he has given us. The author bases his estimate
of the yield of the catchment area on a 44% run-off, which
compared with American catchments is very conservative.
The Croton watershed in New York gives 48%; Sudbury
46°3%, National 47°37%, the Upper Hudson 57%, and the
XVill. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Upper Mohawk 60%. It isa dangerous practice to rely
on the comparative yields of other catchments whose
physical characteristics would not bear comparison with
the one we have under review.
Mr. CARDEW believed the higher parts of the Sydney
catchment would give a larger rainfall and run-off than
adopted by the author. It issurely necessary that ascien-
tific exploration should be made of the whole of the Sydney
catchment area embracing the question of rainfall, evapor-
ation, porosity, volume of the streams, etc., to determine
the amount of water the surface contributes to the rivers,
and the amount of underground water contributed to the
rivers, of the water table, of the soil, the chemical examin-
ation of the water, filters, observations of storage in the
reservoirs, plan of reservoirs, bores, surveys with plans at
ten feet intervals, a delineation of the various drainage
areas on the catchment, geological survey, borings, and so
on. Consideration of the foregoing seems to point to a
higher percentage, as in the case of the Croton and Sudbury
water sheds of the New York water supply, which amounts
to about 50% of the rainfall. He mentioned with the pro-
posed tunnel scheme, the fire stream would reach a height
of 165 feet, which is greater than the City Council’s build-
ing limit, and consequently no fire engine would be required.
His computation showed that the tunnel from the Cataract
to Bankstown would have to be 9 feet 2 inches in diameter,
to give the necessary head to supply the branch tunnel from
Bankstown, which would be 6 feet in diameter and carried
to a point beyond Ryde, and would require a 24 inch main
delivering 4; million gallons per day thence to the Wah-
roonga elevated tank, and at the same time to supply the ~
outer branch. He estimated the cost of the main tunnel
and branches to be £4,033,000; the cost of the whole
scheme, embracing tunnels on the catchment with the
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. X1X-
necessary resumptions being estimated at about £7,000,000.
The estimate was based on the supposition that excavation
would be carried out by compressed air drills and explosives,
and would have concrete lining about 12 inches thick, but
if the tunnels were excavated by machinery, probably no
concrete lining would be necessary. If concrete lining
could be eliminated, a saving of £1,250,000 would be made
for that item alone.
The question of the porosity of the sandstone was dis-
cussed, and whether without concrete lining, it would allow
the escape of water by percolation under a pressure of 800
feet. He quoted the Burraga Dam as an instance where
the water, with a head of 60 feet, passed through the con-
crete to the outer face. By scrubbing cement into the
face of the inner side of the dam, a perfectly smooth glass-
like surface was given to the concrete, and the trouble
entirely disappeared. He regarded Mr. KEELE’S scheme
for the linking up of the dams by tunnels asa very excellent
one, and the connecting of the head waters of the Wollon-
dilly to Prospect, a far better and more practical scheme
than what is known as the Warragamba scheme.
He considered Mr. KEELE’s proposition to be of such great
value to the ratepayers of Sydney, that he urged the Society
to bring the paper under the notice of the Government, so
that the matter should be investigated. He concluded by
moving:—
“That considering the national importance of Mr. KEELE’s
paper, the Council of this Society should consider the question of
personally waiting upon the Acting Premier, and asking for a
Royal Commission of enquiry.”
Mr. C. W. SMITH, M. Inst. c.E., (a visitor) considered the
present source of water to be inadequate to meet the
requirements of increasing population, and he regarded Mr.
KEELE’S proposal as a most attractive one, and thought
‘Xk | ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS,
there would be no engineering difficulty in undertaking
the tunnel system. .
Mr. CORIN, M. Inst.C.E., M.LE.E, ete, (a visitor) raised the
question as to the possibility of the pressure on the walls
of the tunnel at the lower levels producing fissures through
which the water might find its way to pervious strata at
lower depth. Hestated that he had been recently engaged
on a scheme involving a tunnel between the Cataract and
Cordeaux Reservoirs, for utilising the combined waters to
produce electrical energy at a power station to be situated
at Broughton’s Pass, whereby an average of 16 million
units could be supplied for pumping purposes in Sydney at
‘a cost of 0°35d per unit. The use of these waters was not,
however, essential for cheap power, and he anticipated in
‘the future that, by developing the Shoalhaven River, and
later the Snowy River, and by turning to account the
energy now being wasted at the South Coast Coke Ovens,
in ten years time electrical energy would be supplied in
Sydney in bulk at from 0°2d to 0°25d per unit.
The figures in Mr. KEELE’S paper were based on sources
of power largely uneconomical. By substituting the lower
price of power for that mentioned by Mr. KEELE, the last
figure in Column “‘Y”’ for the year 1947, would, instead ofa
surplus of £125,560 in favour of Mr. KEELE’S scheme, be a
deficiency of £20,440, apart from the difference in the cost
of the capital charges, Column “‘L,’’ which would make the
comparison still more in favour of electric pumping.
He brought forward this aspect of the question as deserv-
ing close inquiry when the question of the cost of Mr.
KEELE’S scheme, versus pumping for future supply, might be
under consideration. But he did not for a moment desire
to detract from the value of Mr. KEELE’s proposals. On
‘the contrary, even if pumping were proved to be cheaper,
the advantages of the permanency of the work and its
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XX,
security from interference, the absolute purity of the water
and the pressure enabling fire-fighting to be carried on
under the best conditions through the Metropolitan area,
might be found to be well worth the additional cost.
Mr. E. STATHAM, m. Inst.c.m, considered the time was
opportune for bringing forward this question of water
supply. He mentioned that over fifty years ago, Mr. W. C.
BENNETT, then Hngineer for Roads and Bridges, had formed
the opinion that the Cataract and Cordeaux watersheds
was the best source for a gravitation supply for Sydney.
He considered the present canal insufficient to keep the
Prospect reservoir full. He favoured some use being made
of the head waters of George’s River, which was as worthy
of consideration as the Cordeaux. A dam of moderate
height would be sufficient to head up George’s River to
canal level, and it could be connected either by a cutting
-or a short length of tunnel, adding an appreciable amount
of storage either for Prospect or the scheme proposed by
Mr. KEELE. 4
Mr. J. M. SMAIL, . Inst. c.n,, remarked that in connection
with water supply, Sydney had suffered from want of
storage and want of money, and he considered that Mr.
KEELE had done a public duty in drawing attention, especi-
ally to the want of storage. 2
Mr. W. POOLE, B.E., Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., Said that it seemed to
be assumed that the cross section of the proposed tunnel
will be circular; as a matter of construction it would be
much easier to make it rectangular with a supporting arch
if necessary. The excavation would be easier carried out,
both for the blasting and removal. The floor would prob-
ably not require any further protection, and the walls would
probably need no more concrete than would be necessary
to form asmooth surface for the run of the water. With
respect to the question as to whether the rock would take
XX. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
the pressure, he had made one calculation in the matter
and at the deepest part the rock pressure is practically the
same as the hydraulic pressure; therefore, any great
strength of lining would he thought be quite unnecessary.
Mr. A. D. OLLE, F.C.s., seconded Mr. CARDEW’S motion,
which was carried. It wasarranged that Mr. KEELE would
be given an opportunity at a subsequent meeting to reply
to the discussion.
EXHIBIT:
His Honour Judge DOcKER exhibited an interesting set.
of stereoscopic views prepared from photographs he had
taken at the Cataract and Cordeaux Rivers.
SEPTEMBER. 5th, 1917.
The three hundred and ninety-second General Monthly
Meeting of the Royal Society of New South Wales was held
at the Society’s House, 5 Hlizabeth Street, Sydney, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President, in the Chair.
Thirty-one members and one visitor were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed.
The certificate of one candidate for admission as an
ordinary member was read for the first time.
Six volumes, seventy parts and seven reports were laid
upon the table.
The death was announced of Mr. EDMUND MILNE, who
was elected a member of the Society in 1916.
The President announced that on the 20th September,
Professor A. ANSTRUTHER LAWSON would deliver a popular
science lecture on ‘‘Heredity and the Laws of Mendel.”’
Mr. J. B. HENSON, Assoc. M. Inst.c.B., then contributed to |
the discussion on Mr. KEELE’s paper, “* The Sydney Water
Supply.’’ He said :—A supplementary supply of water for
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXJll.
the industries which are gradually growing about Botany
could, if found necessary in the future, be obtained from
the catchment of George’s River and its Southern tribu-
taries. This supply of second class water would take the
place of the high class. water for industrial purposes. The
establishment of the water supply from the Upper Nepean
catchment assisted in giving another impetus to the growth
of the Metropolis, and Mr. KEELE has clearly shown how
necessary it is that this‘ catchment, together with some
minor neighbouring catchments, should be exploited for
water to its fullest extent, and that this work is extremely
urgent. I cannot too strongly emphasise the importance
of immediate action in the matter of a comprehensive
investigation into the future requirements of the Metropolis,
and the development of a scheme for making liberal pro-
vision for satisfying them.
In view of the difficulties and expense attending the
supply of sufficient first class water to the Metropolitan
area, the question arises whether it would not be expedient
to consider the advisability of placing some limit on the ex-
pansion of the metropolis by encouraging decentralization.
The water of the Wollondilly is not as pure as that from
the Upper Nepean, and in Mr. KEELE’s scheme filtration is
suggested. This raises the question, whether in the develop-
ment of a scheme for amplifying the water supply, cheap
water can be provided for industrial purposes and the first
class water conserved—the quantity of which is limited—
for domestic and similar requirements. This does not
necessarily mean a double set of reticulation pipes through-
out the Metropolis, but restricted only to the areas which
are devoted mainly to industries requiring a large amount.
of cheap water—as in the Botany area previously referred
to—and to areas which should be set apart for the location
of factories.
XXIV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Mr. KEELE then replied to the discussion. Hesaid, lam
pleased that Mr. CARDEW agrees with me that a 4% per
annum cumulative increase in the population is not too
great in view of all the circumstances. In all the forecasts
which have previously been made, the rate of increase
in the population has always been too low. For instance,
the Royal Commission of 1902, estimated it at 24%. Mr.
L. A. B. WADE’S estimate in 1909, when reporting on the
Warragamba scheme, was 3°6%. The extraordinary in-
crease from that time to the present may be an abnormal
one, but it must be given due weight, extending as it. does
over a period of seven years. Even if it should prove in
the future that my estimate of 47% per annum is excessive,
I think it wiser to be prepared for it than to adopt a lower
rate.
With reference to the consumption of water per head of
the population, Mr. CARDEW takes a strong exception to
the figures I have chosen as being much too low, and he
also considers that the rate should be progressive and not
as I have shown. He thinks the amount of 63 gallons per
head per day will be largely exceeded by 1937, and that
the works should be designed for that capacity.
In reply to Mr. CaRDEw, I would say that I quite agree
‘with him in his argument, and were it reasonably possible
to make this provision, I think it should certainly be done.
We are, however, most unfortunately in thiS position, viz.,
that we must be content to *‘cut our coat according to our
cloth.’’? For at least seven years (indeed ten years would
be nearer the truth) we have been resting on our oars,
doing nothing to increase the storage, so that it will strain
our resources to the utmost to construct the necessary
works in the order I have shown during the next twenty
years, and even these will barely provide the storage
necessary to meet the demand for water, in addition to the q
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXV.
provision for reserve storage which I have advocated,
assuming that the consumption per head per day, does not
exceed the figures from year to year, as shown in my table
of costs. The question of what should be sufficient average
consumption per day is a very debateable one. It is quite
true, as my friend Mr. CARDEW has stated, that at New
York provision has been made for a consumption of 150
gallons per capita, per day (or rather 125 gallons according
to the British standard). He might have gone further, for
at Tacoma, Washington, the consumption is at a rate of
375 gallons per capita daily. At Buffalo, New York, popu-
lation 450,000, consumption 258 gallons; Cincinatti, popu-
lation 325,000, consumption 271 gallons; Pittsburg, popu-
lation 321,000, consumption 208 gallons; Chicago, popula-
tion 1,254,000, consumption 191 gallons per capita daily.
One reason for this lavish use no doubt is that water is
sold at a very low rate for public supplies. It is also well
known that waste accounts for much of it. There are
instances on record of a saving of from 30 to 50% being
made after proper investigation, by the institution of
metering, and by the use of waste water detectors. It is
largely owing to the very efficient manner in which a
check has been made upon waste, that our own Water Board
has been able to keep down the average daily rate of con-
sumption per capita. This, together with the absolute
necessity for economising which has so long been recognised
here, is the reason why our rate is so low as it is.
Mr. CaARDEW says that the increase of manufacturing
will largely increase the amount of water used, and that
the demand increases with the lapse of time. Concerning
this matter, some very interesting information can be gained
by referring to the Address of Sir JAMES MANSERGH to the
Institution of Civil Engineers, on the 6th November, 1900,
in which he stated that the consumption per capita daily
4 : | ' “a
XXVI. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
at Birmingham with 800,000 people was 24°56 gallons, of
which 15°29 gallons were supplied for domestic purposes,
and 9°27 gallons for trade and public purposes. At Man-
chester, with a population of 1,100,000 persons, the con-
sumption per capita daily was 29°5 gallons, of which 16°5
gallons were supplied for domestic, and 13 gallons for trade
purposes. At Liverpool, with 968,000 population, the con-
sumption per capita daily was 31°17 gallons, of which 17°89
gallons were supplied for domestic and 13°28 gallons for
trade purposes. At Glasgow, with a population of 1,000,000,
the consumption per capita daily was 54 gallons, of which
34 gallons were for domestic and 20 gallons for trade pur-
poses. At Dublin, with a population of 320,000, the con-
sumption per capita daily was 36 gallons, of which 29 were
for domestic and 7 for trade purposes. At Paris, with a
population of 2,600,000, the consumption per capita daily
was 46°86 gallons, of which 18°05 gallons were for domestic
purposes and 30°81 for trade purposes. At London, witha
population of 5,953,000, the consumption per capita daily
was 39 gallons, of which 27 gallons were for domestic and
8 gallons for trade purposes.
As our population is close upon one million, we need
hardly fear a great increase of water from prospective
manufacturing industries, seeing that the consumption
per capita daily on the list just quoted ranges from 7
gallons at Dublin, to 30°81 gallons at Paris for trade and
public purposes, the average being under 12 gallons per
head. With reference to the amount which should be
sufficient for domestic purposes, the following quotation
is from areport of a committee on water consumption,
published in the Journal of the American Water Works
Association, March 1915, after investigating the water
supply services of about 260 towns in the United States :—
** Domestic use: Our results seem to indicate that the
old standard of 100 gallons per capita, or even 50 gallons,
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, XXVIil.
which has been much used by engineers of late, can now
be replaced in most committees by an allowance of 25
gallons per capita daily for domestic use, and that half of
this amount is a possibility where meters are in general
use. But here tabulated statistics must not be applied
without judgment, for obviously it is unjust to compare a
mill town in Western Pennsylvania, having no lawns, few
sewers, and where poverty or economy reigns, with a
suburb of New York or Chicago, having wide lawns,
thorough sewage, and the elaborate plumbing of prosperous
homes.,”’
The consumption per head per day of the British towns,
for domestic purposes, only ranges from 15°29 gallons, at
Birmingham, to 34 gallons at Glasgow, the average being
23°26 gallons, used to indicate that about 25 gallons is
sufficient where meters are in use, and if to this be added
say 20 for purely trade purposes, and 15 gallons for public
purposes, it would bring the total up to 60 gallons per head
per day for all purposes, which, under the proposal formu-
lated by me, Sydney would have in 1925, 8 years hence,
rising to 71 gallons per head in 1947, 30 years hence. I
hope Mr. CaRDEW, after this explanation, will admit that
my estimate is not merely guesswork, and that it isa
reasonable one under our present conditions.
Mr. CARDEW refers to my statement that I had to rely
upon spot levels, on the catchment area, made by Mr.
Surveyor LEE with an aneroid barometer, for the purpose
of ascertaining whether the sites for dams upon the area
could be connected by tunnelling. I was not aware that
any further work had been done here until Mr. CoRIN
informed me at the last meeting that a very complete
hydrographic survey of the whole catchment area has,
during recent years, been carried out by the Works’
Department.
¥
.
XXVIil. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
There is no alternative for Sydney, but to look forward
to its future water supply being provided from storage
reservoirs, hence the necessity for jealously conserving
every square mile of the present catchment area, and if
possible making additions to it, as I have shown can be
done at the north and south ends to the extent of 140
square miles, making a total of 490 square miles of clean
gathering ground, from which it is possible to gravitate
the water in the city, an inestimable boon, as will be
discovered later when resort has to be made to the waters
from less favoured country, when filtration will be neces-
sary.
Mr. CARDEW criticises my proposal to convey the water
from the Cataract Reservoir to Sydney through pressure
tunnels, in which he differs from me in the size of the
tunnels, the method of excavation and lining, and the total
cost of the work. Ido not wonder at it, for the compu-
tations are, as he also found, very complex and difficult.
I may say, however, that I gave the whole matter a great
deal of study, and am still of opinion that my results will
ultimately be found to be not far out.
I may say that I recognised the loss of head which would
result by connecting several small rising mains with the
shafts at Ryde and Crown Street, and so made the branch
tunnels large enough to convey the whole supply of 75
millions each to Wahroonga and Waverley respectively. If
therefore, any difficulty should arise in the future, it would
only be necessary to extend the tunnels to Wahroonga and
Waverley, and convey the water up shafts at each place
to reticulate the whole supply from there instead of from
the lower levels at Ryde or Crown Street. This of course
would add to the cost, but not materially. With reference
to the question of excavating the tunnels, Mr. CARDEW
said ‘‘Mr. KEELE’S estimate is based on the excavation
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XX1X.
being carried out in the old-fashioned system, that is, by
compressed air drills and explosives and concrete lining,
but if the tunnels were excavated by machinery we should
have a perfect tube in the sandstone of the exact diameter
required, and supposing the rock to be free from fissures,
which at that depth might reasonably be expected, the
concrete lining could be eliminated, and a saving of one
and a quarter million pounds for the concrete lining alone
could be made without taking into account all the extra
excavation saved.’’ Mr. CARDEW proceeded to describe a
tunnel boring machine that was used in the Bondi Sewer
Tunnel which cut a perfectly true tube of smooth internal
surface, and this machine he said was intended for use in
the Channel Tunnel. ‘‘Owing to the incompetence of the
men who worked it, there were continued stoppages, first
one thing went wrong then another, and finally owing to
the delay incurred, the contractor ordered it off the job,
and the tunnel was excavated in the ordinary way.”’
Now this had been the experience everywhere in the
history of tunnelling, so far as I have been able to ascer-
tain. A similar machine was tried in the Nepean tunnel,
with almost exactly similar results. In the very excellent
description of the great work in connection with the New
York water supply by Mr. PRELINI, in Volume xevii.,
Hngineering, the pressure tunnels were excavated in the
ordinary way, and surely if mechanical science has devised
a macitine which would effect so great a saving as Mr.
CARDEW estimates, it would have been used, or at least
tried, in one of the most recent tunnels of considerable
length, viz., the Long Bay Outfall Sewer; but such was
not the case, the work being carried out in the old-fashioned
way, viz., by compressed air drilling and the use of
explosives.
Until a satisfactory machine has been invented to cut a
perfect tube through the sandstone rock, I think it will be
Li—December 5, 1917.
®
' f\ \
XXX. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS,
admitted to be the wiser course to pursue, in estimating
the cost of such works, to provide for the excavation being
done by compressed air drilling and explosives, and filling
the space between the diameter of the tunnel and the rock
all round with concrete, in a similar manner to the work
done recently at New York in their pressure tunnels. As
it is some years now since they were completed, and
brought into use, and we have not had any report of their
being defective in any way, we cannot, I think, do better
than profit by their experience.
The question of the resisting capacity of the Hawkesbury
sandstone, to the water in the tunnel under the pressure
it would be submitted to, due to the head at the Oataract
Reservoir, even though the tunnel be lined, was dealt with
both by Mr. Corin and Mr. CARDEW in a very interesting
way.
Mr. CoRIN was of opinion that the question whether such -
a pressure as 600lbs. per square inch could be resisted by
concrete without reinforcement, even if backed up by the
Hawkesbury Sandstone, under the considerable pressure of
the superincumbent mass of rock, would have to receive
careful consideration, supported, perhaps, by experiment.
Mr. CARDEW said his experience was that at a depth of
150 feet below rock surface, as a minimum the rock is as
compact as ordinary concrete, and except where fissures
are met with concrete lining would be unnecessary in a
tunnel excavated by machinery. He said the sandstone
rock always contains a large percentage of water, and if
there are not pits or cleavage planes at that depth, the
hydraulic grade of the water table in the sandstone would
be flat, so that the rock would not absorb much water from
the tunnel under pressure, or if it did absorb any, it would
soon become surcharged and cease to do so. He was of
opinion that, if provision were made for a thickness of con-
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXI.
crete to make the tunnel water tight, 7 inches would
‘suffice.
I quite agree with these gentlemen that it will be abso-
lutely necessary to make very careful inquiry into the
capacity of the Hawkesbury Sandstone to resist the pres-
‘sure it will be subjected to before adopting my proposal.
We know the Water Board of New York followed the
plan of locating their pressure tunnels at a depth not less
than 150 feet below the surface of the rock, the character
of which, however, has not been stated. On an average
the rock was found at about 50 feet below the ground
surface, this giving an average depth of 200 feet. This
depth was selected for the purpose of obtaining a thick,
‘solid bed above the tunnel, well able to resist the hydro-
static pressure.
Great care was taken to test the rock when crossing
the river Hudson. Many borings were made, and they
‘showed that in the middle of the river rock occurred at a
depth of not less than 800 feet. As many as 14 cross
sections of the river gorge were taken, requiring about
300 borings, and it was ultimately decided to cross the
Hudson at Stormking, where the river runs between two
mountains. Subsequent investigations at this place resulted
in the tunnel being located at a depth of 1100 feet below
the surface of the river at L.W., the hydrostatic pressure
in the tunnel being 750 square inches. Here the tunnel
was lined with 17 inches of concrete, but elsewhere it
was less, varying with the pressure, the least thickness
being about 9 inches. Very little timber was used in-the
tunnel while the excavation was being carried on, the
supports being of light steel trussing, which were allowed
to remain, and were buried in the concrete, in which pipes
were inserted at frequent intervals, and after allowing
about three months for the concrete to harden, grouting
XXXL. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
was forced through the pipes in order to fill any voids that
might occur between the concrete and the rock.
The cost of these pressure tunnels, which were 144 feet
in diameter, was onthe average 180 dollars (£36 18s. 9d.)
per 1 inch foot of completed tunnel. This price does not
include the engineering, real estate, nor administrative
expenses, which would increase the figures from 15 to 207%.
In estimating the cost of the work I propose, viz., for a
main tunnel, 7 feet 8 inches diameter and 27°3 miles in
length, branch tunnel to Crown-street, 5 feet 3 inches.
diameter and 11°55 miles in length, and a branch tunnel to
Ryde 5 feet 11 inches diameter and 8°3 miles in length. I
have provided for the works to be carried out under a
similar system to that adopted in New York, and the cost.
works out as follows :—
£ s. d.
Main Tunnel ae ve ». 16 9 7 per Tinta
Branch Tunnelto Crown-street 1217 7 ,,.,, ,,
Branch Tunnel to Ryde ... .. 13 14° 1) eee
These prices include the cost of shafts, and all other
expenses, including engineering.
Mr. CORIN supplied some very interesting information
with reference to the comparative cost of pumping and of
power supply in Sydney. He proposes to provide a power
station at Broughton’s Pass, by utilising the daily flow
(and in times of flood the overflow) from Cataract Reser-
voir and the Cordeaux Reservoir, combined by means of a
tunnel between them. Mr. CoRIN claims that the result
of supplying electrical energy in the manner he proposes,
would be that the pumping costs (column N) of my table
in 1947, instead of being £641 per day would be only £239
per day, resulting in a saving of over £400 per day,
£146,000 per annum, in which case, instead of the saving
of £125,500 per annum in 1947, shown by the last figures
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXill.
in column Y of my table, there would be a loss of £20,440
per annum, apart from the difference in capital charges
(column L), which would make the comparison still more
in favour of electric pumping.
This result arrived at by Mr. CoRIN would be rather
disconcerting if it could be seriously considered that an
arrangement of power stations such as he describes, which
would be liable to have its operations interfered with by
industrial strikes (which appear to have come to stay), and
also be subject to all the risks of interference that have
already been referred to in my paper, as well as depending
upon the daily flow to Sydney, which after passing through
the turbines continues to wend its course along the existing
canal, would be accepted by the citizens in preference to
the other power station at Broughton’s Pass, and to the
steady, reliable, uniform and continuous service to be per-
formed by the “‘ pressure tunnels,’’ thus enabling the present
system of pumping to be discontinued, while the daily supply
of water for the city is carried by an entirely independent
conduit, located in such a manner as to safeguard the water
from any possible interference of any kind whatsoever,
whether by accident or design. I, therefore, think the
question of supplying electrical energy for pumping purposes
in the manner described by Mr. CoRIN, should not be
allowed to interfere with the requirements of high pressure
water supply. The two schemes will never be found to
work either economically or harmoniously together. ‘‘One
cannot eat one’s cake and have it.’’ I notice that Mr.
CORIN, in some remarks he has recently contributed,
recognises the truth of this adage, for he says—‘‘The use
of Cataract and Cordeaux water at Broughton’s Pass
necessarily could not be considered if Mr. KEELE’S scheme
is carried out, aS the head would be required for providing
the whole of Sydney with high pressure water supply, and
thus would not be available for power.”
XXXIV. ABSTRACV OF PROCEEDINGS, .
From Mr. STATHAM’S statement it is evident that to Mr.
BENNETT belongs the credit of originating the idea for
obtaining a water supply for Sydney from the Upper Nepean.
But the difficulties in the way were very considerable, -
there were few maps obtainable, and the country south
and west of Appin was quite unexplored, and little was
known of it except from timber getters. The information
supplied by Mr. STATHAM with reference to the possibility
of storing a considerable amount of water at the head of
George’s River is well worthy of investigation.
I agree with Mr. POOLE that a circular tunnel would be
rather inconvenient, and probably more costly to excavate
than a rectangular one, to be subsequently arched and
inverted. This is a matter for consideration when the
design comes to be dealt with. I adopted the circular
section merely for convenience in calculating the discharges.
of the various tunnels under review.
In conclusion, I would like to impress upon all concerned
the necessity of dealing promptly with this question of
improving the Water Supply of Sydney. An investigation
such as was proposed by Mr. CARDEW, and approved of by
the members of this Society, should be commenced without
any further delay.
From my point of view, after a very close study of the
rainfall question extending over many years, I am of opinion
that we are in a period of declining rainfall, which com-
menced in 1894, and has continued to the present time
with an occasional year above the average. We may have
a very few years more above the average, but I feel certain
that from 1921 to at least 1931 the decline will be more
severe and continuous than anything we have yet experi- —
enced. We should therefore endeavour to be prepared
for it.
*
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, ° XXXV.
THE FOLLOWING PAPER WAS READ:
** Notes on Acacia, No. 3, extra tropical Western Australia,
(with a description of a new species),’’ by J. H.
MAIDEN, I.S.0., F.R.S.
Dr. F. H. QUAIFE then showed lantern slides of a natural
tree-graft on portions of a tree of Angophora lanceolata,
growing at Killara, the main fusion of the two large limbs
being about three feet three inches long.
Remarks were made by Mr. MAIDEN, His Honour Judge
Docker, Mr. A. B. HECTOR and the President.
Dr. QUAIFE also showed lantern slides of miniature earth
pillars, from one to four inches high, formed by rain on a
sand-heap at Killara, the top of the pillars being protected
by small pieces of ironstone. These resembled, on a small
scale, the large pillars of 40 to 50 feet high in Colorado,
U.S.A., referred to in the ““Encyclopedia Britannica,” 11th
edition.
OCTOBER 3rd, 1917.
The three hundred and ninety-third General Monthly
Meeting of the Royal Society of New South Wales was.
held at the Society’s House, 5 Hlizabeth Street, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President, in the Chair.
Thirty-four members were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed.
The certificates of three candidates for admission as
ordinary members were read: one for the second and two
for the first time.
Mrs. E. MILNE wrote thanking the Society for sympathy
in her recent bereavement.
Forty-five parts, four reports and one map were laid
upon the table.
; #
XXXV1. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ:
1. ‘‘Azurite Orystals from Mineral Hill, near Condobolin,
N.S.W.,’’ by C. ANDERSON, M.A., D.Sc.
2. ‘‘Notes on Topographical, Ecological and Taxonomic
Ocean Shoreline Vegetation of the Port Jackson Dis-
trict,’’ by A. A. HAMILTON.
Remarks were made by Mr. HALLIGAN and Mr. HEDLEY.
3. ‘‘Some Determinations of the Heat Conductivity of
Selenium,’’ by Hpna D. Sayck, B.Sc. (Communicated
by Acting Professor O. U. VONWILLER).
4. ‘*Notes on the early Stages of Development of Lysurus
Gardneri (L. australiensis),’’ by J. B. CLELAND, M.D.,
and HDWIN CHEEL.
5. SSA fossil Isopod belonging to the Fresh-water genus
Phreatoicus,’’ by CHARLES CHILTON, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S.,
etc. (Communicated by R. J. TILLYARD).
NOVEMBER 7th, 1917.
The three hundred and ninety-fourth General Monthly
Meeting of the Royal Society of New South Wales was
held at the Society’s House, 5 Hlizabeth Street, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President, in the Chair.
Thirty-five members and one visitor were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed.
The certificates of two candidates for admission as
ordinary members were read for the second time.
Mr. A. D. OLLE and Mr. A. A. HAMILTON were appointed
Scrutineers, and Mr. J. NANGLE deputed to preside at the
Ballot Box.
The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary
members of the Society :—
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXVIl.
AUGUSTUS WILLIAM GALBRAITH, Civil Hngineer, Cock-
atoo Island, Sydney.
RICHARD FORD JENKINS, Hngineer for Boring, Irriga-
tion Commission, 6 Union Street, Mosman.
ARCHIBALD LANG McLEAn, Doctor of Medicine, ‘Gart-
fern,’ North Road, Abbotsford.
The President announced the death of Mr. W. A. Dixon,
F.C.S., and of Mr. S. L. BENsuSAN (in Hngland) a former
member of this Society.
It was also announced that Dr. EF. Guy GRIFFITHS had
gone on Active Service, and that Dr. T. FIASCHI had returned
from the front.
One hundred and seventy parts, four volumes, five reports
and one calendar were laid upon the table.
An interesting lecturette was delivered by Judge H. B.
DOCKER, M.A., on “‘Some Rocks of Scientific Interest,”’
illustrated by lantern slides. The subject included ex-
amples of the following:—*‘ Weathering: of protected Rocks
and Clays,”’ ‘* Rocks carved by Waves,”’ ‘* Nature’s imita-
tive Sculptures,” “‘Weathering of Trachytes,”’ ‘‘ Weathering
of Granites and Basaltic Columns.”’
THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ:
1. “‘ Acacia Seedlings, Part III.,” by R. H. CAMBAGE, F.L.S.
2. ““On some New South Wales Ironbarks,” by R.- T.
BAKER, F.L.S.
Remarks were made by Mr. J. H. MAIDEN and Mr. E.
CHEEL.
3. ‘Description of two Bora Grounds of the Kamilaroi
Tribe,”’ by R. H. MaTHeEws, L.s.
Remarks were made by Judge DOCKER.
4. “Note on the Great Australian Artesian Basin,’’ by -
H. F. PITTMAN, A.R.S.M.
6
XXXVI111. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
EXHIBIT.
Mr. A. J. SACH exhibited an original specimen of auri-
ferous quartz from Mount Morgan, and handed in an
interesting account of the early history of this famous.
Queensland mine.
DECEMBER 5ru, 1917.
Tne three hundred and ninety-fifth General Monthly
Meeting of the Royal Society of New South Wales was.
held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, at 8 p.m.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President, in the Chair.
Thirty-eight members and four visitors were present.
The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
confirmed. :
The certificate of OLYDE DouGLAS GILLIES, M.Se. Assistant.
Lecturer in Biology, The University, Brepane, was read
for the first time.
°
The President announced that Professor R. THRELFALLJ,,.
F.R.S., a former President and Vice-President of this.
Society, had received the honor of knighthood, having been
created a Knight of the British Hmpire. ;
Ninety-one parts, two reports and one calendar were laid:
upon the table.
THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ:
1. “‘On the Occurrence of Crystals in some Australian
Timbers,’’ by R. T. BAKER, F.L.S.
Remarks were made by Mr. R. W. CHALLINOR.
2. ‘‘Notes on HKucalyptus (with a description of a new
species), No. IV.,”’ by J. H. MAIDEN, F.R.S.
Remarks were made by Messrs. A. B. HkEotTor, A. A.
HAMILTON and R. T. BAKER. |
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXIX.
3. ‘‘ Cineol as a solvent in Oryoscopy,’’ by CO. H. Fawsirr
and CHRISTIAN HISCHER.
4. ‘Notes on Australian Fungi, No. IV.” by J. B. CLELAND,
M.D, Chm., and HDWIN OCHEEL.
5. ‘A novel application of Bromine Water in synthetic
Organic Chemistry,’ by J. READ, u.a.,Pn.p, and MAR-
GARET MARY WILLIAMS, B.s-.
Remarks were made by Mr. H. G. SMITH.
EXHIBIT.
Crystals in situ under the microscope, also lantern slides,
by R. T. BAKER, F.L.S.
r us
Wek rut
> 5) ie
tie
GEOLOGICAL SECTION.
ABSTRACY
PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION.
=<
Monthly Meeting, 7th May, 1977.
Mr. J. EH. CARNE, in the Chair.
Hight members were present.
Mr. J. H. CARNE and Mr. W. 8S. DUN, were proposed and
elected as Chairman and Honorary Secretary respectively.
. EXHIBITS:
1. Mr. J. EH. CARNE exhibited molybdenite from Yetholme.
2. From the Mining Museum :—(a) Phosphate rock from
the Wellington Caves. (b) Section of the Southern end of
the Bulli Seam at Wongawilli. (c) Chabazite from Emma-
ville. (d) Stibnite from Taylor’s Arm. (e) Spar from
Belubula. (f) Molybdenite from Flinders Island.
3. Mr. H. C. ANDREWS exhibited Wollastonite from
Yetholme, and Devonian quartzites with Rhynchonella
pleurodon. Among the exhibits were some fine examples
of contact metamorphism from Yetholme. These consisted
of radiating masses of wollastonite with pyroxene and
granular garnet, and nodules of wollastonite with nuclei of
granular calcite in beds of altered volcanic ash and clay-
stone. He exhibited also a large block of Upper Devonian
quartzite, containing Spirifer disjuncta and Rhynchonella
pleurodon, obtained from the sediments enclosing the con-
tact minerals mentioned above. The latter appear to have
been formed by the action of vapours, derived from an
intrusive granite, on the Devonian sediments. (b) Molyb-
denite and garnet from Whipstick. (c) Molybdenite from
xliv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Cooper’s Mine, Bolivia. (d) Molybdenite in garnet rock,
Attunga.
4. Dr, OC. ANDERSON, exhibited (a) Chabazite, twinned
rhombohedra, 6 miles west of Emmaville. (b) Zinc blende,
Baker’s Mine. (c) Obsidianite, Stannifer. (d) Opals from
Mount Stuart, Central:Australia. | ,
5. Mr. Simpson, exhibited (a) Fluor apatite wood from
Dunalkyn, W.A. (b) Titaniferous limerock, Yallingup Caves,
Western Australia.
6. Acting Professor CoTToNn exhibited calcite crystals,
Excelsior.
7. W.S. Dun exhibited (a) Fasciculate Cyathophyllum
from Taree, Carboniferous. (b) Collection of opalised shells
from Stuart Range, of Cretaceous Age.
Monthly Meeting, 11th July, 1917.
Mr. J. HE. CARNE, in the Chair.
Hleven members and six visitors were present.
EXHIBITS:
1. Messrs. J. EH. CARNE and EH. C. ANDREWS exhibited (a)
Molybdenite in white quartz from the Kitchener Mine,
Khartoum, 11 miles from Almaden, North Queensland, pre-
sented to the Mining Museum by Messrs. LAURENCE and
LAURENCE; also photographs illustrating the mine workings
and treatment plant. (b) Zinc blende with fine crystalline
contours from Baker’s Mine, Deepwater. (c) Hxamples of
elvans carrying scheelite from Kootingal, three and a half
miles from the railway. (d) Specimens of sphene-hornblende
granite.
2. From the Mining and Geological Museum, (a)Amethyst ~
quartz from the South Coast. (b) Quartz crystals with
secondary hair-like growths of quartz from Dutchman’s
Lode, Torrington. (c) Stibnite from Burragine Mine,
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xlv.
Taylor’s Arm, presented by Mr. D. H. MatruEws. (d)
Orystallised molybdenite from Cooper’s Pipe, seven miles.
S.E. of Bolivia. (e) Pyrites showing perlitic tracery.
3. Mr. C. A. SUSSMILCH exhibited a series of intrusive
tuffs from the Devonian of Copeland.
4, Acting Professor Cotton exhibited (a) Photographs
of aboriginal carvings at Kuringai Chase. (b) Specimens
of Encrinurus from the Silurian of Lewis Ponds; the sedi-
ments containing the specimens have been much affected
by stresses. |
5. Dr. C. ANDERSON exhibited specimens of crystallised
calcite from the Belubula Caves.
6. Mr. W. R. BRowNE exhibited (a) Glossopteris and
Gangamopteris, the Newcastle Coal Measures, Pokolbin.
(b) Series of fossils from Gosforth. (c) Notes on the suc-
cession of sediments in the Hudson Peak district. <A
discussion followed.
Monthly Meeting, 11th September, 1917.
Mr. J. EH. CARNEin the Chair.
Hight members were present.
EXHIBITS :
1. From the Mining and Geological Museum, (a) Opalised
belemnites from Stuart Range, and potch opal. (b) Gold-
bearing andesite from Oparara, New Zealand, and pyritised
_ Marine Miocene fossils from the same locality.
Mr. OC. A. SUSSMILCH gave some notes on the geology of
the Seaham district. A discussion followed.
Monthly Meeting, 11th October, 1917.
Mr. J. H. CARNE in the Chair.
Nine members were present.
Mm—December 5, 1917.
xivi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
EXHIBITS:
1. Mr. W. R. BROWNE exhibited sections of schist from
Victor Harbour, S.A.
2. Mr. W.S. Dun exhibited specimens of Actinocrinoids |
from the Silurian of Wellington, collected by A. MATHIESON.
3. Dr.O. ANDERSON exhibited (a)Concretionary chromite,
Barraba. (b) Obromiferous film on chromite, Barraba.
(ce) Colourless fluorite, the Gulf. (d) Scheelite including
felspar, Kootingal. (e) Colourless sapphire rendered pale :
pink by radium action (WATKIN Brown).
SECTION OF INDUSTRY.
Ailyr | 7
Vi *
7%
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xlix.
ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS
see rion OF INDUSTRY.
IOC —__—_———_—
March 12th, 1917.
Mr. LOxLEY Mereeitr in the Chair.
Mr. T. L. G. Law, of Messrs. Pearson, Law and Co.,
Melbourne, read an instructive paper upon Industrial
Efficiency. A comprehensive report will be found in the
“Australian Manufacturer,’ for March 24th, 1917. The
writer showed that lack of efficient management was at the
root of the continual trouble between employer and em-
ployee, and, if the co-operation of the worker was desired,
more good feeling between the two would be necessary.
Improvement of methods must start from the management, |
and when, as a result, the output is increased, the worker
should benefit. Strikes generally start in badly managed
establishments, where force is used instead of knowledge.
The only way to ensure permanent industrial peace is to
investigate every. trade scientifically, .and find out how
much work can be done by the average man without injury
to health. Then the wages and conditions which will
induce him to do a full day’s work should be determined
and adopted. It is necessary to offer inducements to bring
out the worker’s best constructive ability. Costing systems
are essential to discover where waste is occurring. Mr.
LAw proceeded to explain the methods he had successfully
adopted in his factory, by which he had increased the
average output per man, the wages of the workers, and the
profits of the firm.
I. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
The discussion was participated in by Messrs. Bracu,.
THOS, POOLE, CHURCHILL TUCKER, J. HENDERSON, A. B.
HEcTOR, the Chairman, and Dr. GREIG-SMITH, the Hon. Sec.
May 14th, 1917.
Mr. LoxL&eY Mercer in the Chair.
A letter was read from the Hon. Secretaries of the Society
announcing that a resolution had been passed by the Council
and forwarded to the Warden of the University. It ranas.
follows :—‘‘In view of the great importance of the funda-
mental sciences of Physics and Chemistry, the Royal
Society asks that,in the matriculation examinations, special
encouragement may be given by the Senate of the Uni-
versity to students to take up the study of these subjects,,
and also suggests that, if possible, an entrance scholarship:
be granted for science at matriculation.”’
Mr. W. T. WILLINGTON was nominated as chairman of the
Section for the coming year, and was unanimously elected.
It was proposed that Dr. GREIG-SMITH be Hon. Sec. He
was duly elected.
A discussion upon Industrial Efficiency was opened by
Mr. JAMES HENDERSON and contributed to by Messrs.
WALLACE NELSON, THOS. POOLE, A. H. STEPHEN, JAMES.
NANGLE, S. H. SmirH, G. L. Hupson, HDWARD STEDMAN,,
JAMES STEDMAN, A. B. Hector. Dr. R. K. MURPHY, the
Chairman and Hon. Secretary.
It was decided to form a committee to consider the future
conduct of the Section, the committee to report to the
Section. The following gentlemen were duly proposed,
seconded, and elected as members of this special com-
mittee:—Messrs. LoxLEy MrGe@iTT, J. NANGLE, 8S. H. SMITH,
A. B. Hector, S. EH. Stptey, R. T. BAKER, Dr. R. K.
MURPHY with the Chairman and Hon. Secretary.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. li.
June 11th, 1917.
Mr. W. T. WILLINGTON, Chairman, in the Chair.
Prof. C. EK. FawsItT gave a lecture upon “* Pure Foods,’”
illustrated by means of lantern slides.
The lecturer pointed out the necessity for a Pure Foods.
Act, and discussed the working of the Pure Food and Drugs.
Act (1908) of New South Wales. It was pointed out that.
difficulties were met with in framing the regulations deal-
ing with certain foods and drugs. The reference in a
regulation to substances with which a food or drug shall
not be adulterated, is apt to suggest to some minds ways.
and means for adulteration which might otherwise have
never been thought of.
Sometimes a food or drug is purchased mainly on account.
of one particular compound (e.g. vanilla for its vanillin con-
tent). It may then appear advisable to stipulate by regu-
lation what the percentage of the principal ingredient (only):
shall be. When this is done, it may be possible for an
unscrupulous man to use an inferior product, but make the
percentage of the principal constituent come up to the
required amount by addition of an artificially prepared
(synthetic) compound. This is not permitted, but there is.
a difficulty for the analyst, in most of such cases, in show-.
ing any difference between the compound of natural origin
and the compound prepared synthetically.
There are probably good grounds for refusing to permit.
the addition of these synthetic substances, for there is a
possibility that some of the minor substances, although not.
specified as to amount (or even by name) are of importance.
in some cases, and that there isa certain balance between
the chief constituent and the minor constituents in the
good natural article which renders it more beneficial, when
used as a food or drug, than a poorer natural article forti-
fied by the addition of an important constituent.
i. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
The addition of certain preservatives, in limited amounts,
to certain foods is permitted by the regulations, and this
permission is justified by results. The general principle
must be adhered to that the amount of preservative added
shall, even if repeatedly introduced with the food into the
human body, be without apparent bad effects. Further,
addition of preservative should not be permitted where its
presence is not absolutely necessary. It is possible in
some cases, that addition of a preservative is resorted to
not only to preserve good food, but with the intention of
making altered and decomposed food more palatable. This
possibility makes one hesitate about ELC pao use of
such ‘“‘preservatives”’ at all.
Permission to use colouring matter in certain icon is
granted, provided the colouring matters have been proved
to be harmless, and provided they are not to be used so as
to deceive or mislead the purchaser as to the quality of Be
article purchased.
The Special Committee appointed to consider the future
conduct of the Section reported as follows :—‘* That the
future work of the Section will have to be. confined =
educational work upon the following lines :—
(a) To urge publication of brief but pointed guides of what
| is being done in this State to provide education, both
general and technical.
(b) The preparation and reading by members and others,
also publication, of papers relating to applied science
in industrial operations, to co-operation and efficiency
systems. | rte
({c) Arrangement of lectures and demonetrat i on all
matters relating to applied science.’
- It was proposed by Mr. A. D. OLLE and seconded by] Mr.
G. I. Hupson, ‘“‘ that the special committee be appointed a.
iil
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. liil.
general committee for the remainder of the year.’’ This
was agreed to.
LD Diy WI
Mr. W. T. WILLINGTON in the Chair.
The Chairman intimated that gentlemen who were not
members of the Society could obtain from the Hon. Sec.,
sectional cards at 10/6, which would enable them to vote
in the Section.
Mr. THOS. POOLE read a paper upon “ Kfficiency Methods
and Scientific Management in Practice,”’
After explaining the necessity for.a greater productivity
‘in our industries, the writer proceeded to describe several
improvements he had effected in the clerical department
‘over which he had control. These brought about a con-
‘siderable saving of time, and were accomplished with the
<0-operation of the employees. Other efficiency methods
were described.
A discussion was entered into by Messrs. WALLACE
Netson, A. B. Hector, ENNEVER and the Chairman. __
September 10th, 1917.
| Mr. W. T.. WILLINGTON in the Chair.
Mr. LoXLEY Mucoirr read a paper upon “ The Treatment
of the Byproducts of the Meat Industry,’ in which he
described the processes by which the residual matters of -
the meat industry were utilised. These included every
thing except butcher’s meat, sheep skins, and cattle hides.
He mentioned the treatment of clean bones, sinews, oleo
oils, neatsfoot oil, horn, gelatine and glue, but dealt speci-
ally with the production of tallow and fertiliser.
Questions were asked by Dr. MurpHy, Mr. A. B. HEcTOR,
‘the Chairman and Hon. Sec.
liv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
October 8th, 1917.
Mr. W. T. WILLINGTON in the Chair.
Dr. H, G. CHAPMAN gave a lecture upon ‘*The Cold Trans-
port of Milk and the Preservation of Infants’ Lives.’’ This.
was illustrated by exhibits, experiments and lantern slides.
After demonstrating the substances ina pint of cow’s
milk, the lecturer proceeded to consider the changes which
they might undergo through the activity of bacteria. The
acid curdling and the sweet curdling were thus dealt with,
and this led to the consideration of the dirt contained in it.
By means of cultures on gelatine plates, Dr. CHAPMAN
showed the relative number of bacteria found in Sydney ©
milk when brought from the country, and when supplied by
Suburban dairymen. The immensely greater number in
country milk caused the lecturer to emphasise the need for
cooling country milk previous to its long journey to the
city. He concluded, by showing, from mortality tables that.
the chief cause of the deaths of infants between the ages
of 3 and 6 months was from diseases of the alimentary tract,.
which are generally brought about by bad milk. The milk
of the city companies should be continually examined by a
competent bacteriologist.
A discussion was contributed by Drs. CLELAND and WARD--
LAW, Messrs. L. Mzcerrt, A. D. OLLE, A. E. STEPHEN,
S. E. Sintey, G. I. Hupson, IRWIN ORMsBy, the Chairman
and the Hon. Sec.
November 12th 1917.
Mr. W. T. WILLINGTON in the Chair.
Mr. A. B. H&cTOR gave an address upon “ Brains and
Business,”’ in which he briefly described the general struc--
ture of the human body, tracing the relation between the
digestive, the nervous systems, the various senses and the
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. lv.
brain. Business aptitude is largely a matter of educating
various senses, so as to make the brain more alert in noting
fine differences, not only in material things, but also in,
what might be called the psychological aspect, in studying
the traits and characteristics of mankind. The special
training of the senses becomes of paramount importance
in special businesses, such as the sense of touch to the cloth
merchant, the sense of taste to the tea taster, the sense
of smell to the perfumer, etc.
The main point that the lecturer desired to bring forth,.
was the fact that in our physical body, we had ideal struc-
tures which could be utilised for giving a new point of view
to the inventive mind—e.g., a student of wireless telegraphy
would do well tostudy the structure of the ear. A student.
of telephony would do well to study the arrangement of
the nerves in seeking for economical means of wiring his
instruments, and an ardent student of engineering would do.
well to study the whole body for economical means of con-
verting energy into work, and the business man, seeking
for better means of organisation and development of his.
business, could hardly do better than study the organisation
of the human body, with its marvellous system of checks.
and counter checks in the inhibitory system. He also
emphasised that there was no better training for the busi-
ness man than an intelligent study of some of the leading
sciences, as after all business, like science, was but.
organised common sense.
Messrs. A. D. OLLE, A. TURNBULL and the Hon. Secretary,
joined in the discussion.
December 10th, 1017.
Mr. W, T. WILLINGTON in the Chair.
Dr. GEORGE HARKER gave a lecture upon “The Right
Way to Burn Coal,’’ with lantern illustrations. An exten-
\vi,. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
sive report of the lecture will be found in the ‘‘Australasian
Manufacturer,” for January 19th, 1918.
After referring to the work of the late Mr. T. U. WALTON
in the direction of studying the economy of fuel utilisation,
the lecturer proceeded to show that coal had been derived
from the cellulose and resins of former plants. The pro-
portions of the remains of these conferred certain properties
upon the coal for the production of gas or of heat. When
used as fuel, coal should be sold upon its calorific value as
determined by a simple apparatus, such as Thomson’s bomb.
Coal is one of the few substances that a manufacturer buys
without a guarantee as to its value.
The energy obtained from coal is but a fraction of the
theoretical amount; the ordinary steam engine utilises 1/11
while the gas engine uses 1/5 of the energy of the fuel.
Possibly the cheapest source of power now available is
Mond producer gas, which is derived from bituminous and
low grade coals. | .
Kconomy in the use of coal can only be secured by insti-
tuting a strict: chemical control over the combustion. ~A
pound of coal requires 12 pounds of air for its complete
combustion, and while an excess of air is unavoidable, the
excess should be kept as low as possible. This can be done
by testing the composition of the chimney gases, for which
cheap, simple and reliable carbon dioxide recorders are
available. These give a continuous record of the carbon
dioxide in the gases, and tell if the coal is being burnt to
the best advantage. The use of coal dust as a fuel, as well
as the surface combustion of gaseous fuel, was explained at
some length.
A discussion was contributed by Drs. GUTHRIE and
MourpuHy, Messrs. F. W. STEEL, B. J. SMART, VICARS, A. B;
HeEcTOR, S.:E. SIBLEY and the Chairman,
SECTION OF AGRICULTURE.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ix
ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SECTION or AGRICULTURE.
——_— —--—<>—____——-
First Meeting, May 7th, 1917.
Dr. J. B. CLELAND, President of the Society, in the Chair.
In reply to representations made, the Under Secretary
for Agriculture wrote that farmers were not inclined to
cultivate Barleys extensively, but that the Department
was doing all it could to encourage its extended growth.
The Under Secretary for Agriculture also wrote in reply
that the Government had decided to guarantee a first pay-
ment of 3/- per bushel for 1917 wheat at country stations,
and a further advance to 4/- per bushel f.o.b.
Mr. H. W. Potts, Principal of Hawkesbury Agricultural
College, was elected Chairman of the Section.
PAPERS READ.
1. Dr. JOHN MARDEN read a paper with regard to the
lack of potash fertilisers in Australia since the Huropean
supplies were cut off. Several likely Australian sources of
potash were referred to. Dr. MARDEN, Mr. A. E. STEPHEN
and the Hon. Sec. were appointed a sub-committee to con-
sider the question.
2. Mr. W. W. FROGGATT gave a descriptive and lucid
lecturette on the Sheep Fly Pest, which had accounted for
the death of millions of sheep during the past year. He
traced the pest to the evolution of a long and wrinkled wool
type of sheep which harboured the parasite. He advocated
poisoned baits as the most efficient means of eradication.
Ix. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
Second Meeting, June 5th, 1917.
Mr. H. W. Potts, Chairman, in the Chair.
PAPER READ:
Mr. A. EH. STEPHEN read a very comprehensive paper
upon the various’ sources of potash available in Australia.
He discussed the use of the mineral silicates and alunites,
the possibility of potash deposits being found in the neigh-
bourhood of certain saline lakes in South Australia; the
kelp industry at Southport, Tasmania, and the potash
obtainable as by-products in the sugar, woolsvaaae and
cement industries.
EXHIBITS:
Mr. B. CHEEL, exhibited tubers of Solanum Commersoni
and S. maglia, both of which are said to be blight-immune
potatoes.
Third Meeting, July 3rd, 1917.
Mr. F. B. GUTHRIE in the Chair.
Mr, S. T. D. SyMons wrote that the matter of introducing
legislation to deal with the sheep-fly pest was receiving
consideration.
Mr. G. LigHtTroot, Acting Secretary of the Advisory
Council of Science and Industry, wrote that a Special Com-
mittee was investigating the production of potassium
sulphate from alunite.
Mr. EH. BREAKWELL and Mr. G. WRIGHT were appointed
Hon. Secs. of the Section in succession to Dr. GREIG-SMITH,
to whom a hearty vote of thanks was accorded.
Mr. F. B. GuTHRIE, Dr. GREIG-SMITH, Mr. DARNELL
SmitH, Mr. HE. OHEEL, and Mr. A. HK. STEPHEN, were ap-
pointed members of the Committee.
EXHIBITS:
Mr. A. A. HAMILTON exhibited the Sensitive Plant,
Mimosa pudica, and suggested utilising its. leguminous
properties as a soil renovator.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ]xi.
Mr. EH. OHEEL exhibited four different varieties of Cana-
valias, and suggested that the common coastal form C-
obtusifolia might be used as a green manure and also as
food for animals.
Fourth Meeting, September 11th, 1917.
Mr. H. W. Potts in the Chair.
PAPERS:
1. Professor R. D. Watt delivered a lecture on the
Rothamsted Experiment Station and its work; the valuable
work that this Station has done and is still doing was
graphically illustrated. Amongst the principal points
emphasised were (1) the effects of complete mineral
manures added to nitrogenous fertilisers, as against mineral
manures alone, (2) the value of different rotations including
clovers, and (3) the value of nitrogenous fertilisers on
pastures in increasing both the bulk and variety of the
grasses.
2. Mr: Hi. N. WARD, Superintendent, Botanic Gardens,
addressed the meeting on General Horticulture. Mr. WarD
traced the development of horticulture from the Louis XIV
or Versailles period to the present day. He entered a plea
for a scientific stimulation of this important branch of
agricultural science. Much could be done by the establish-
ment of a School of Horticulture.
Lifth Meeting, October 9th, 1917.
Mr. H. W. Potts in the Chair.
A discussion took place on the paper on General Horti-
culture, read at the previous meeting. A sub-committee
consisting of the Hon. Secs., Messrs. WARD, CHEEL, STEPHEN
and HAMILTON was appointed to investigate the best means
by which horticulture could be stimulated.
Nu—December 5, 1917.
Dr. PETRIE read a paper on “‘Our present knowledge of
hydrocyanic acid in plants.’’ The lecturer illustrated by
sketches the synthesis and breaking down of the various
glucosides in certain plants. The amygdalin compound as
the warm foundation for most glucosides, was clearly
described. The action of oils, ferments, enzymes and pro-
teids on glucosides, and the manner in which bydrocyanic
acid may be liberated, were explained. The economic
importance attached to the subject was emphasised.
lxil. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS.
PAPERS.
EXHIBITS:
Mr. DALTON exhibited a Fly-trap, and also records by Mr.
NEWMAN, Entomologist of West Australia, illustrating the
efficient manner in which the fruit fly can be detected by
means of this trap.
Mr. A. A. HAMILTON exhibited a specimen of the bitter
water melon (Citrullus vulgaris) from Wilcannia, pointing
out that owing to its hardy nature, it may prove a useful
fodder plant in the interior.
Sixth Meeting, November 13th, 1917.
Dr. CLELAND, President of Royal Society in the Chair.
An expression of sympathy for Mr. F. B. GUTHRIE in the
death of his son was passed.
PAPERS :
Mr. KH. CHEEL read a paper on oil-yielding plants. The
chemistry of the vegetable oils was dealt with. The
economic importance attached to the oils which are used
in food industries and for many technical purposes as soap
and candle making, fuel etc., was pointed out. The follow-
ing oils were emphasized as being worthy of exploitation
in Australia:—Pea-nut oil, Soy-bean oil, Cotton-seed oil
and Olive oil.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xiii.
Seventh Meeting, December 11th, 1917.
Mr. H. W. Ports in the Chair.
| PAPERS:
Mr. H. W. Ports, Chairman of the Section, delivered a
lecture on Agricultural HKducation in America. The lecture
was illustrated with a particularly fine series of lantern
slides depicting the wonderful development of the technical
arts and agricultural science in America. Particular
emphasis was laid on the handsome manner in which agri-
cultural science is endowed in the States. Mr. Ports
stated that agriculture and the teachers of agriculture
were almost worshipped in America.
Mr. Ports stated that he returned to Australia after a
tour of the globe, convinced that here we have the richest
agricultural country in the world. The pity of it is that
up to date we have not risen to our opportunities.
EXHIBITS:
Mr. H. CHEEL exhibited three distinct kinds of beans
recently introduced, viz., (1) Kratok Bean, an evergreen
creeping fodder plant; (2) Rabaul Bean, similar to Kratok
but splashed with reddish marks; (3) a bean (Phaseolus
vulgaris) from a German ship captured by the Portuguese.
Three excursions were held during the year, viz., Hawkes-
bury Agricultural College (twice), and chen Stud
Poultry Farm.
SECTION OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND
KINDRED SCIENCES,
————o—
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. lxvii.
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SECTION OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND KINDRED SCIENCES.
=
Abstract of the work of the Section for the year 1917,
the third year of its existence.
The work of this Section was very much curtailed this
year owing to the fact that the Honorary Secretary, Dr.
GuY GRIFFITHS, left on active service in August, and no
member was immediately available to take up his duties.
The following office-bearers were elected for 1917 :—
Chairman—Dr. CECIL PURSER.
Hon. Secretary—Dr. Guy GRIFFITHS.
Recommendation Committee—Drs. J. B. CLELAND and
C. SAVILL WILLIS, and Mr. ALGERNON PEAKE.
During the year two meetings were held and papers
read, as follows :—
12th June, 1917.
‘*The Disposal of the Dead by Cremation,’’ by Dr. W.G.
ARMSTRONG. (See “The Medical Journal of Australia,’’
Vol. 11, No. 4, 1917, p: 70).
10th July, 1917.
‘*The Teaching of Sex Hygiene,”’ by Dr. C. S. WILLIS.
ae:
Sage Sy re! ©
om) *
ety
COMI SOE
a
ieee co
oP
INDEX.
conspersa. &5, 89, 109, ‘119, 120, 121
coriacea 78, 95, 119, 120, 121, 268
Cowleana sae ts: weort2 1
craspedocarpa... 249, 250
crassiuscula ... ae e391
curvicarpa 114, 116, 119, 120, 121
Cuthbertsoni ... ee a
cyclopis Bee WoO
cyperophylla .. 121, 254, 255
decurrens var. normalis ... B94
delibrata, A. Cunn. 80, 89, 90,
95,110, 111, 118, 119, 121, 122
PAGE PAGE
A Acacia delibrata F.v.M.. ... 84
Abstract of Proceedings i-—xxxix. deltoidea 78, 118, 120
Acacia, Notes on, No. II. Trop- dentifera ae is 245
ical Western Australia. By dictyophleba 121, 250
J. H. Maiden wy: Wile x: difficilis i ee A 121.
Notes on, No. III. Extra- dilatata aan won HEB
tropical Western Australia. dineura... ss hOBs ‘119, 120, 121
_ By J. H. Maiden ... 288, xxxv. dimidiata . 98, 119, 120, 121
Seedlings, Part III. By R. H. discolor LG
Cambage ... Sh: ... 3889 doratoxylon 102, 105, 106; 121, 267
Acacia accola ... aie ... 893 Dorothea : 1. = 92, 394
aciphylla BaF 88 ® 261 drepanocarpa 102, 119, 120, 121
acradenia ibe so FACTS ALG Drewiana Be E273
acuminata 108, 105, 263. 264, duriuscula 271, 272
265, 266, 268 elata ... ae Beaed Wl,
var. glaucescens ... ... 268 ephedroides 2a 258, 259, 260
estivalis ass ... 244 estrophiolata ... Sepa!
amend... 393, 398, 409 euphleba 249, 250
anceps ... aw bai — 243 excelsa . ; .. 403, 409
aneura ... 120, 249, 251 Farnesiana 99, 119, 120, 121,
arida 80, 119, 260 389, 390
Armitii ee 84, 119 jfilifolia .. : 257, 260, 261
aulacocarpa 111, 119, 406, 409 °Pitzgeraldi ... ate .. 238
Baileyana ... 391 flavescens ay ae LOZ
Beauverdiana ... 267, 268, 271 Flocktonie ... Aa MOOT
Bidwillt 107,111, 117, 119,120, 121 frumentacea ,.. ah etal
bivenosa 73,78, 103,118, 120, galioides ae a r21
121, 247, 248 genistoides 939, 240, 241
Blakelyi ae 246, 247, 248 Gilesiana' a “ie eee
bossiwoides ... aan PETG glabrescens... a 2S
brachystachya. ... f 26 glaucescens ... a SSG
buzxifolia 393, 401, 409 glaucoptera ... eS 276
Bynoeana ... 76; 118, 119, 121 gonocarpa 88, 100, 113, 114,
calamifolia ... Bes .. 245 119, 120, 121
calamiformis ... we See ZOn var. lastocalyx ts 100
Cambageti: ... ey. 21 gonoclada... 85, 121
camptoclada ... woh ... 105 Grasbyt ... 251, 253
Chalkeri ai <-. Boot Gregorit ... FG, V8; WO 2
Cheelir .. ae Aa ... O16 Hammondi 94, 95, 98, 119, 121, 124
Chisholmi Re 249 Hemsleyi 87, 90, 119, 120, 123
hemignosta 79, 99, 102 ,119, 120, 121
heteroneura 240, 272, 273
hippuroides 77, 100, 1:8, 119, 121
holosericea 98,108,118, 119, 120,121
horrida.. bi 518
minus chan 119, 120, 121
idiomorpha ... es . 248
implesa.... ; 393
impressa 102, 103, 118, 119, 120, 121
inequiloba 239, 240
gulifera .. 81, 90
juniperina we O25
lycopodifolia 77, 102, 108, 118, sentis 99, 100, 102, 119, 122
119, 122 sericata 79, 102, 119, 120, 122:
var. glabrescens ,.. BPA le 3} sessiliceps 121
lysiphlea 108, 119, 120, 122, 250 setulifera 78, ‘118, 120, 122
megalantha Ayla sibirica.. 121
melanoaylon 389, 393 signata 108, 263, 265, 266, 267, 268.
microneura ugee Sims ... . 118, 119, 120, 122
minutifolia 121 spathulata ; 77, 118 119, 122
montana . 391 spectabilis . 394.
multilineata 249 sphacelata 239:
myrtifolia 306, 392, 393 spherostachya 105, ‘119, 120, 122
nertifolia . 898 spodiosperma, ... . 244
nigricans . 274 stenophylla «7 495
notabilis ye eal stereophylla oie . 267
obtusata var. Hamiltoni a O02 stigmatophylla 79, 119, 120, 122
Oldfieldir 2638, 264. 265, 266 stipulosa ... LOO, 119, 120, 122
oligoneura 109, 110, 118, 119, ; stipuligera 103, 119, 120
120, 122 Stowardi .. 269°
oncinophylla .. 118, 114, 121, 260 strongylophylla 242, 243
Oswaldi ; oe O21 suaveolens 321, 392, 393.
pachycarpa 93, 94, 120, 121 subcerulea ne 391
pachyphloia 116, 119, 120, 122 suberosa 99, 102, 103, 119, 120, 122:
pallida 100, 102, 119, 120, 122 subulata . 391
palustris 252, 253, 254 Sutherlandi "2 ehZd
patens .» 10, 118, Aone 2 Tanumbiriense si dk.
pendula 441, 444 Tarculensis . 273
penninervis var. falciformis 389.393 eer 121.
phlebocarpa es 121 torulosa : 89, 90
pityoides aylZt trachycarpa Nit 119, 120, 122:
plectocarpa A. Cunn., 85, 87, translucens 78, 102, 105, 119,
90, 93, 94, 95, 98,119, 120, 122, 123 120, 122, 250
plectocarpa F.v.M.
lex,
95 Tratmaniana ve.
PAGE PAGE:
Acacia Jutsoni ... ww. 262, 263 | Acacia polybotrya ars . 391
Keller: .. .. LOZ, 119, 120, 121 polystachya Pe
Kempeana ; 121 prelongata von oe
Kimberleyensis 84, 112, 114, 119, Praini... 238, 239, 240
120, 122 proxima 104, 119, 121
lasiocalyx 268, 264, 265, 266, pruinosa ss RUE
267, 268 ptychophylla 12
latescens . 121 pycnantha -. B94.
latifolia 121 pycnophylla —.. ... . 245, 391
letophylla 395, 408 pyrifolia 77, 118, 120, 122, 243, 249-
leprosa ... wee O90 var. Morrisoni, var. nov. ... 248
leptocarpa 90, 91 quadrimarginea 272, 273.
leptoneura .« 261 quadrisulcata ... . 273
leptophleba aul ramulosa 256
leucosperma 245 Rendle 241, 243
limbata.. 109, ‘119, 120, 122 resinomarginea a 263
linarioides 108, 119, 120, 122, 249 retinervis , 119, 120, 122
linearis.. 404, 409 retivenia - 100, 119, 120, 122:
lineolata 273 rostellifera 243
linifolia 393, 4°0, 409 rubida ... 393, 399
linophylla 256 salicina 119, 120, 122, 245, 246-
longifolia : 316, 352 var. varians.. set
longiphyllodinea 254, 255 scirpifolia : : 245
Luehmanni 108, 119, 120, 122, 243 sclerosperma 100, 119, 120, 122, 245
257, 259, 263.
)x xi,
PAGE
Acacia tumida 98, 108, 118, 119,
120, 122
Tysoni ... . 244
ulicina ... ae ira
umbellata 116, 121
undulifolia . 105
verticillata : ool
Wickhami 79, 100, 118, 119,
120, 122
zanthina . 241
xerophylla ‘ ... 288
ziphiophylla 105, ‘119, 120, 122
zylocarpa 80, 119, 120. 122, 260
var. planifolia 80, 119
Actinotus Helianthi PSS
minor . 815
Aiga Be . 886
Agriculture Section, Abstract
of Proceedings elvan.
Committee... eas asus Wilges
Alphitonia excelsa . 440
Alyssum maritimum 338
Amaurodermus ... 476, 479
Ammophila arundinacea . 835
Amperes spartioides . 200
Amphipeltis 386
Anaspides 386, 387
tasmanie . ... 386
Anderson, C., Azurite crystals
from Mineral Hill, near
Condobolin, New South
Wales OFH, XXXVI.
Andrews, E.C., Molybdenite in
quartz me Seve
Andropogon refractus » Bol
Angophora cordifolia wee B20
lanceolata 491, 510, 514, 515,
517, xxxv.
Anisopogon avenaceus we 844
Annual Meeting +e bey reitie
Report of Council ... oe Nai.
Apium leptophyllum _... Bian oriy |
prostratum a ee 384
Araucaria excelsa 323
Aucheoniscus ... 385
Artesian Basin, The Prgpien
of the Great Australian 135, xii.
Geology of .. 143
Physiography of lee
Early Tertiary history of ... 192
Closing history of yee CS)
Artesian waters, Temperature of 151
Salinity of se a
- Gases of 167
Rising of eel
PAGE
Artesian waters, Absorption and
transmission of 181
Volcanism and ayer of ... 194
Arthropleura J. . 886
Aster subulatus ... we. O20
Atriplex patulum aa ... 838
Auditor, election of ... vil.
Australian Artesian Basin, The
problem of the Great. By
A. L. du Toit Me tepee-< ite
Note on the Great. By EH. F.
Pittman 431
Azurite crystals from Mineral
Hill; near Condobolin, New
South Wales. By C. An-
derson Py 0.0.5) fel
B
Baker, R. T., Some ironbarks of
New South Wales 410, xxxvi.
On the occurrence of crystals
in some Australian timbers
435, XXXVIIl.
Sequoia sempervirens .. xi.
Crystals in timber XXxix.
Banksia emula ... 2. BAT
ericifolia 289, 305, 309, ali, Boo
marginata oe hOD
serrata .. 289, 319, 347
Backea crenulata . ole
Bavuvera rubioides... paarssd ba
Billardiera scandens . 316
Blechnum serrulatumn eR OwL
Bora grounds of the K amilaroi
tribe, Description of two.
By R. H. Mathews 4238, xxxvii.
Boronia floribunda . 821
hybrid.. . d2l
parviflora ie OO
serrulata Seo:
Bosistoa euodiformis .. 439
Bossiea scolopendria ye HOE
Bramia indica 307, 308
Breynia oblongifolia 299, 300
Briedelia exaltata 4d.
Bromine water in synthetic
organic chemistry. A novel
application of. By J. Read
and M. M. Williams . 558
Cc
Cesia parviflora ... ... 3820
Cakile maritima ... 886
Calamagrostis emula 1 B54
Callicoma serratifolia . 828
)xxii.
| PAGE
Callistemon lanceolatus... we 843
linearis... Var, ve «= LD, 8408
pinifolius He wee we 349
Calycothrix tetragona ... ... 320
Cambage, R. H., Acacia Seed-
lings, Part IIT. 389, XxXvi.
Canavalia obtusifolia ... i) xls
Carex pumila 308, 310, 323, 327, 345
Cassytha melantha a ... 313
Casuarina Cambagei ... /... 444
distyla ... aes ... 820, 330
Luehmanni... .aa! BED, O37
suberosa ae ... 289 330
torulosa De BA wee 444
Caustis pentandra BS: .. 324
Ceratopetalum apetalum w. 543
gummiferum ... 329
Chapman, H.G., Cold transport
of milk es «tiie
Preparation of peptone sea)
Cheel, E., Oil-bearing plants ... lxii.
and J. Burton Cleland, Notes
on the early stage of devel-
opment of Lysurus Gardneri
(L. australiensis) ...864, xxxvVi.
Notes on Australian Fungi,
No. [V., Polyporus, Fomes
and Hexagona-. ...473, xxxix.
Chilton, C., A fossil Isopod be-
longing to the fresh-water
genus Phreatoicus 365, xxxvi.
Chloanthes Stechadis ... .. 826
Cineolas a solvent in cryoscopy
467, XXX1X.
Citrullus vulgaris aa ose oh e
Cladium junceum eh ... 338
Clarke Memorial Medal oe wali
Cleland, J. B., illustrations of
fungi Xl.
J. Burton and Edwin Cheel,
Notes on the early stage of
development of Lysurus
Gardneri (L. austriliensis)
“ 364, xxXXVl.
Notes on Australian Fungi,
No. IV., Polyporus, Fomes
. and Hexagona A473, XXxix.
Clematis glycinoides ... ... 803
Clerodrendron tomentosum aes)
Commelina cyanea = 2 208
Conospermum ellipticum ... 350
Convolvulus cairicus ... 304
soldanella is Hee 295, 350
Correa aiba ou a 29d 5 ote
speciosa 343
Cotula coronopifolia 310, 344, 300
PAGE
Cotula reptans ... ie ... 310
Cryoscopy, Cineol a3 a solvent
in. By C. E. Fawsitt and
C. Fischer .. on .. 467
Cryptandra amara oa . B84
ericifolia ae fi .. dol
Cryptostemma calendulaceum ... 337
Cupantopsis anacardioides .. 308
Cyathochete diandra ... ... B44
Cyclospheroma ... ar ... 386
Cynodon dactylon - ... 288, 301
Cyperus polystachyus ... . B24
rotundus ie ie ... 827
tenellus... “as ia ... 339
D
Dampiera stricta nee .» B43
Danthonia penicillata ... .. 346
Darwinia fascicularis ... ... 330
Dianella revoluta .. oO, 348
Dichelachne crinita m .. B42
Dillwynia floribunda ... ... 840
Diospyros pentamera ... 443, 444
virginiana bh 435
Docker, His Honour Judge, ‘
photographs = ARRAS
Rocks of Scientific Intercst xxxvii.
Dodonea triquetra ... 9816, 348
Drosera binata ... Pi ... B42
E
Echinopogon ovatus 5 we B24
Eleocarpus reticulatus ... ... 330
Elcodendron australe ... in eee
Emez australis ... Sa ... 339
spinosa .. . 340
Emmenospermum alphitonioides: 44.0
Enhydra fluctuans wae 1. 803
Eospheroma sas te ... 386
Epacris crassifolia wa .. 833
longiflora a ae ee B20
microphylla... ees .. 843
Epultes australis 9 store poo
Eriostemon busxifolius ... 3813, 314
Crowei ... nae wat wee B20
hispidulus oe ae ... d14
lanceolatus ... at w. 843
obovalis ae ea ... 314
scaber ... va’ om 1. B14
Erythrina indica.. 327
Eucalyptus, Notes on, (with
description of a new species)
No. V. By J. H. Maiden
445, XXXvili.
Eucalyptus alba ... Abe . 445
albens ... es Sh w. 442
]xxlil.
PAGE
Eucalyptus amygdalina... 461, 462
var. numerosa 464
var. radiata . 464
australiana 461
Beyert ... “420, 421, 422
binacag... . 455
cesia ara 445
Caleyt ... San 417, 523
calophylla “f . 446
campaspe " se we 447
capitellata sae 4
cinerea var, nova-anglica . 523
Clelandi ia bs wee 447
confluens ; .. 448
Consideniana ... aes ... 448
corymbosa . 289, 309, 326, 523
crebra 410, 411, 413, 417, 421, 515
Dawsoni . 442
drepanophytla... een) Ales,
erythrocorys ... 457
erythronema 448, 460
eugenioides... ante wee O28
Fergusoni 415, 417, 419, 422, 443
ficifolia... . 451
fecunda . 450
Forrestiana ... 449, 460
gigantea we 449
gontocalyx ... 455
Houseana ... 450
incrassata var. ‘angulosa . 460
leptopoda w. 447
leucoxylon var. macrocarpa wee 447
Luehmanniana .-. 450
macrocarpa .. 451
maculata ... 455
melanophloia .. 413, 515
melliodora vee 443
microvorys we 455
microtheca we. 408
miniata . 454:
Mooreana 454:
Nanglei... “AlT, 418, 422
Naudiniana 454
nitens ... ... 455
numerosa 461, 464
occidentalis ... 460
Oldfieldi 447, 455
oligantha 456
paniculata 410, “Ad1, 412, 413,
417, 419, 421, 422, 443
var. angustifolia 420, 421
pellita .. 38 PAS)
pilularis ‘437, 442, 523
Pimpiniana 460, 461
prperita 481, 512
platyphylla es », 445
PAGE
Eucalyptus polyanthema 1. 442
propinqua .. 419
pyriformis . 447
var. minor . vee 400
radiata (australiana) 461, 462, 463
redunca Prin . 446.
resinifera we §O29,s523
rostrata "418, 418, 510, 511
rudis é . 448
saligna an O17
var. pallidivalvis ... 456
salmonophloia... . 447
salubris .. 447
siderophloia ‘410, 412, 417
sideroxylon 410, 413, 417
Staigeriana ... 456
Stowardr ... 457, 460
tereticornis 413, 418, 523
tetraptera . 456
torquata ... 457
viminalis 511 542
virgata... = ea eATE
var. obtusiflora . 326
Eugenia binacag... » 454
cyanocarpa . 328
Smith ... 298
Euphorbia Sparmanni ... . 845
Eustrephus latitolius ay 49)
Exhibits—
Angophora lanceolata ..XXXV.
uriferous quartz ae XXxViii,
Cordeaux and Cataract Rivers,
Photographs of . Xxili
Earth pillars ... ae ... XXXV.
Illustrations of fungi ... Aen Sob
Molybdenite in quartz XV
oe of peptone an Xs
Rocks . ia XXXVii
Rubber _ : XV.
Sequoia sempervirens sale
ie
Favolus Boucheanus 494,
pusillus 501
rhipidium 480
squamifer 497
Fawsitt, C. E. and Chmenian EE
Fischer, Cineol as a solvent
in eryoscopy ...467, xxxix.
Pure foods... ae li.
Festuca littoralis 291, 292, 294,
317, 346, 354, 355
Ficus Henneana ... . 354
rubiginosa a caene
Fischer, Christian He 2G E.
Fawsitt and, Cineol as a
solvent in cryoscopy 467, xxxix.
Flindersia australis 439, 44:4:
Ixxiv.
PAGE PAGE
Financial Statement ... iv. | Homes recurvus .., ... 508
Froggatt, W. W., Sheep fly pest lix. rimosus a 512, 514, 515
Homes, List of Australian Poly- var. Niaouli at . 515,
pores of genus... .. 548 Robinsonie ... ... 514
_Fomes amboinensis Be OATS robustus ae 509, 511, 514
var. gibbosus ... aT var. setulosus oe oe OE
annosus ae oss, 0B, "907 rubiginosus... oF ... 588
applanatus ... a ekg yudis .. ide iz :.. 416
var. australis ae i S18 salicinus ae ava ... O18
var. leucopheus .... 18 scaber ... she sinh vse GRD
var. nigro-laccatus ... Pe ag) scutellatus oe eh ... 003
var. oroflavus a ks semitostus by? at 505
australis state as OLS setulosus #65 i ripe i 2!
caliginosus... a s2' 309 squarrosus ath ; .. 014
carneus... of ne 505 superpositus ... Bet ... 479
cinereo-fuscus ... “aa Sao uk tasmanicus .... ay ... 005
Olelandit oe, ak 125038 Teppert... owe MY BEG
compressus bess a2 .. 525 Yucatensis .. 516
concavus ae a . 505 | Fossil Isopod belonging to the
conchatus sk AS neg fresh-water genus Phrea-
var. salicinus ae .. 513 toicus. By Chas. Chilton
connatus whe af: au 603 365, XxXvi.
contrarius ae ae ... 503
dochmius Be ee ... 505 G
endopalus Bc a .. 509 | Gahnia psittacorum : . 340
exotephrus tas a ... 508 | Ganodermus, see Polyporus
ferreus ... ay, ie: ... 505 (Ganodermus) ae See |
fomentarius... ... 508 | Ganoderma applanatum 1. OE
hemitephrus ... er .. 504 | Geitonoplesium cymosum .. 829
homalopilus ... ak ... 5383 | Geological Section,. Abstract of
igniarius as .. 509, 514 proceedings Bs xliii.
inflexibilis a cee ... 008 | Gleichenia circinata ... 881, 3383
kermes ... ae ie ... 008 dicarpa... Me . 841
leucopheus .... ss . 518 | Glochidion Ferdinandi sah 1. 328
lignosus Ce gi ... 507 | Glumifere ook ee .. 298
lineato-scaber ... de ... 5138 | Gnathia ... OM:
linteus ... ie Rie ... 517 | Gompholobium glabratwm we. 849
lucidus... sie ite ... 474 | Goodenia bellidifolia ... 3 ED
luridus... se ner Wee BS) heterophylla ... “Re SSeS
margimatus ... Bee ... 004 ovata ... ae on RAG
martius aA oo ... 504 stellugera wa we w. SAI
Niaoulr cy, .. 615, 516 | Grevillea punicea a ma) 33
nigripes sa we 1 ATO robusta... sae a eas
-nigro-laccatus ... tee we AID
oblinitus woe nee ... DOA EH
obliquus bs we ... 549 | Hemodorum planifolium . 335
ochroleucus... aa Ape oS) peretifolium ... 335
ohiensis a me ... 503 | Hamilton, A. A., Topographical,
oroflavus an es 2 O18 ecological, and taxonomic
pectinatus ne oe ... 516 notes on the ocean shore-
pinicola a. ts ... 504 line vegetation of the Port
pomaceus ee ki Pe fade Jackson district ...287, xxxvi.
ponderosus... oa ... 032 | Hakea dactyloides , .. 8830
pullatus Wes iG BRAT 7. pubescens an ee ... 334
pullus ... rg a 2 olG pugioniformis ... Sake ot ee
pyrrhocreas ... si ... 008 SeNACeM ws Ls ec .. Odt
Ixxv.
PAGE
-Hakea sp.. cont
5 al G., Right way 46 burn 4
oal . v.
Hector, A. BR Brains and busi-
ness . e imves
_Hemigenia “purpurea 314
Hexagona apiaria 545
crinigera 541
Gunn... 542
olivacea 542
rigida ., 544
similis ... 544
tenuis 542
var. ebenuis 543
var. umbrinella 543
umbrinella 543
Wight “iets 543
Hibbertia diffusa 295
fasciculata 326
linearis ... 820
volubilis 295, 395
Hibiscus diversifolius .. 828
trionum -- 300
_Hicoria pecan . 435
Histiopteris incisa 341
Houghton, T. H., Presidential
Address... ae 1
Hybrid Boronia . B21
Hydrocotyle hirta 239
umbellata 316
var. bonariensis 345, 355
vulgaris : th . 824
_Hypocheris radicata ... 3800
Hypolena fastigiata 1. 804
Hypsimetopus wntrusor ... . 885
r
Imperata arundinacea ... 306, 848
Industry Section, Abstract of
proceedings xl vii.
Committee : :
Ipomea palmata 304
Ironbarks of New South Wales,
Some. By R. T. Baker ... 410
Isachne australis ie OL
Isopogon anemonifolius... . 333
aneithifolius ... 338
os
Juncus bufonius .., vee O09
effusus ... ... 306
Kawilaroi Tribe, Description of
two bora grounds of the.
By R. H. Mathews . 423
PAGE
Keele, T. W., Sydney Water
Supply ae susie auk
Discussion iiae PR Vy RIL
Kennedya sb sGe at One,
rubicunda ..804, 8306, 310, 345
Koonunga . 387
Kunopia, bora ground at AK
Kunzea capitata .. vee 820
corifolia 33u, 510
L
Laccocephalum basilapiloides 479,493
Lambertia formosa 315
Lantana Cammara . 823
Lasiopetalum ferrugineum ... 800
rubiginosum ABOU
Law, ‘Il’. L. G., Industrial Effici-
ency . x Xe
Lentus cupreonitens .., 496
quadruns .. 497
vanthopus : : . 496
Lepidium hyssopifolium . 300
Lepidosperma concavum .. 422
flecuosum se, BOO
Neesw ... .. 388
viscidum 3 pao al
Leptospermum arachnoidewm . 340
jlavescens 510
ele es 289, 307, 309, 351, 355
sp. ‘ se . 510
Lepyr odia | scarvosa vee O24
Tngia é sea, SOO
Ligustrum lucidum OLS
sinensis 498
List of Australian Polypores of
the Genera, Fomes, Poly-
porus and Hexagona 545
Lobelia anceps 309, 322, 332, a3h
Location of the cubic parabola,
Tables to facilitate the. 7
C. J. Merfield 125
Lysurus australiensis . 364
Gardnert (L. aitstralionsis).
Notes on the early stage of
development of. By Je
Burton Cleland and Edwin
Cheel 364
M
Macrozamia spiralis - 326
Maiden, J. H., Notes on Nese,
No. II, Tropical Western
Australia meet
Notes on Acacia, No. III,
Extra-tropical Western
Australia .. 2388, XXXV.
]xxvi.
PAGE
Maiden, J. H., Notes on Euca-
lyptus (with description of a
new species) No.V 445, xxxviii.
Mallotus philippinensis 4387, 441, 444
Maps, Contours of artesian basin 140
Isopotentials of artesian
waters aon Son septO2
Salinity of artesian waters... 161
Sydney Water Supply 5 28
Temperature of artesian
waters , bee
Marden, J., Potash fertilisers lix.
Mathews. R. H., Description of
two bora rounds of the
Kamilaroi tribe ...428, xxxvii.
Marsdenia suaveolens ... . 811
Meeting annual.. he ttl
general "viii, x1, XV1, Xxil.
Meggitt, Loxley, Treatment of
the meat industry... Bees
Melaleuca armillaris 333, 334
hypericifolia 333, 334
leucadendron var. albida 289,
324, 338
nodosa ... 311, 333
parviflora Sos 487
Smithii... 289, 324, 338
styphelioides ... ae . 487
thymifolia .. 349
Melanopus see Polyporus (Mel-
anopus) ... . 499
dictyopus a SOE sao
elegans . ae ch .. 499
infernalis ae wee seg ZED)
Melanopus picipes ae . 499
Members, Election of iii, ix, xii,
XV, XXXVil.
List of.. eG)
Merfield, C. =f Tables to facilit-
ate the aemisienn of the cubic
parabola ... Son 125, x.
Merulius lacrymans sce . O45
umbrinus ane 545
Mesembryanthemum equilaterale
Mesidotea.. BS eet ... 386
Micrantheum ericoides Ve weet ood
Micromyrtus microphylla .. 348
Mimosa pudica . ole wate lee
Mimulus repens ... on ve. 308
Mirbelia reticulata oie .. B49
Monotoca elliptica ae ... 299
scoparia a siete se B08
Mylitta minor... wat ... 493
Myoporum insulare 3H . 317
tenuifolium var. acuminatum 317
PAGE
N
Notelea longifolia oe . 346
ovata x. 299
Notes on the early stage of
development of Lysurus
Gardneri (L. australiensis).
By J. Burton Cleland and
Edwin Cheel Sy ... 304
O
Obituary te J, FB, 4
Oliver, D. a 8
Pye, WiasGe aes oie soma RM
Ramsay, E. P .. nil oang tel
Scott, W. Rev. 6
Tebbutt, J... as ih eae
Webb, W. H... nae ey:
Cnothera longiflora .... we 803
Officers, Election of ... ode WES
List of... oles lip . (vii)
Olax stricta re ats w. 315
Olearia dentata ... an wee 828
Opercularia aspera in nnn ee
diphylla = ee «. 300
Orites excelsa_.... ans
Osteospermum moniliferum w. 338
Oxalis corniculata fs, . 302
Oxylobium cordifolium ... .. 341
Oxyuropoda ligioides... vee B80:
P
Panicum bicolor... ae ... 346
marginatum ... aon eee B22
parviflorum ... sipie ... 834
strictum at ok wee OLS
Paranaspides ... sing vee OO
lacustris af ins ... 386
Patersonia sericea an ... 320
var. longifolia sae ... 3820
Pelargonium australe... re
Persoonia lanceolata ‘ 325
Petrie, J. M., Hy Ore acid
in plants Be 2 «a0; RIG,
Petrophila pulchella ... vee BAD
Phaseolus vulgaris ise lxiii.
Phebalium squamulosum we B21
Philotheca australis a .» 315
Philydrum lanuginosum we BOD
Phragmites communis ... .. 348
Phreatoicus, A fossil isopod
belonging to the fresh-
water genus. By C.Chilton 365
Phreatoicus assimilis ... 384
australis 866, 371, 375, 377, 382, 384
capensis en . 385
~00—December 5, 1917.
lxxviil. e
PAGE PAGE
Phreatoicus gracilis... ... 884 | Polyporus on oo we. 586
kirkii “ihe 384, 385 durus ; ue OOo
var. dunedinensis ... O80 epileucus os O20
shephardi . 366 eucalyptorum ... .. 522
spinosus 375, 383 fragilis ... 527
tasmanie 375, 383 fumosus .. 524
terricola . 384 fruticum we O41
typicus .. ... 883 gilvus 518, 533
wianamattensis 366, 382, 383 var. inamenus we. DBD
Phyllota phylicoides . 815 var. lichnodes wee 53D
Pimelea linifolia... we . 320 var. scruposus .. 584
Pittman, E. F., Note on the glutinifer ,.. 480
Great Australian artesian hispidus ... 538
basin .. 431, xxxvi. hololeucus .. 522
Pittosporum revolutum ... 327, 328 hypopolius ... 503
undulatum , 438 immaculatus ... ... 523
Plantago coronopus . 839 isidioides 1. 584
varia i? ; . 844 japonicus we 405
Plectranthus parviflorus we 845 Lawrencu woe Od
Poa cespitosa Be we B24 lentinoides 494, 495
Podocarpus spinulosus ... 315, 318 leucocreas we. O22
tetrapyhllum ... .. 8389 licnoides ... O80
Polygala myrtifolia . 323 lignosus ... 507
Polyporus tephronotus 21 lineatoscaber .. 589
Polypogon monspeliensis ... B54 muelleria .. 482
Polypores, List of Australian... 545 ochroleucus 503, 525
Cooke’s lists corrected in ight nanus ... ... 480
of Lloyd’s investigations... 551 Pancheri ... 499
Polyporus adustus 524, 528 Patowllardy ... A DOD
albellus... 520 elles ... 528
alveolarius 497, 498 pelliculosus : fe ae2
anebus ... x ... O31 pisiformis ... 498
var. bicolor ... 532 plebius... DOF
angustus 521 portentosus 521, 529
Armiti ... 496 protevporus ... 490
australiensis 521, 528 pubertatis ... 0388
betulinus pce Au) radiatus .. 5385
bicolor .. 5382 Tecurvus ... 508
biennis ... 490 retiporus ... 529
borealis 528 rhinocephalus ... we 524
cesius .. 527 rheades... ... 589
campylus : 528 rigidus .., ... Odl
carneo-fulvus ... 533 rosettus ... 489
cartilagineus ... 532 Roskovui .. 495
collybioides 497 rutilans .. 580
corruscans 539 salignus . 524
cretaceus 523 scruposus 535
cubensis 526 semilaccatus ae OBL
cuticularis 538 spadiceus .. 538
cupuliformis 483 spiculifer Be 4
decipiens 537 squamosus .. 495
demissus 525 stenoloma .. 034
dichrous 530 stipitarius .. 496
Dielsvi ... 546 Strangeri .. 499
dilatatus 484 strumosus .. 428
dimimutus 480 stypticus . 529
Ixxviil,
PAGE
Polyporus subolivaceus... 533
subzonalis a .. 481
supinus aee wis se Op OO
tabuleformis ... 491
tephronotus 521
testudo... 532
verecundus 523
VINOSUS... .. 5382
Wilsonianus .. 489
zonalis 530, 5381
var. rigidus... . 5381
Polyporus (Amaurodermus)
basilapiloides .. 479
leptopus . 479
nigripes 1. 479
rudis 2) 476, 477
Polyporus ( Ganodermus )
amboinensis .. . ATS
fornicatus vee ATS
lucidus var. japonicus . ATA
ochrolaccatus ... 476
7UGOSUS by me . 476
Polyporus (Lentus, ) aponore is ... 497
brumalis . 496
lentus é . 498
tricholoma. ... . 496
virgatus . 496
canthopus : ... 496
Polyporus (Lignosus) scopulosus 480
superpositus 479
Polyporus (Melanopus) glabratus 501
Guilfoyler ... . 501
melanopus ... .. 500
nephridiwus ... 2 o0l
pusilius 9 O0l
VATUUS wali x 99
var. Blanchetianus . 499
var. Pancheri . 499
Polyporus (Merismus)
anthracophilus .. 488
Berkeley . 487
Srondosus . 488
intybaceous ... .. 489
letus . 489 |
multiplex . 488
retiporus .. 489 |
Ridleyt .. 488 |
scabriusculus . 489 |
sulphureus var. Wilsonianus 489
Polyporus (Ovinus) basa 493 |
confluens . 494
Hartmann... . 494
minor-mylitte . 495
myelodes . 493
my litte . 493
OvinuUs . 493
PAGE
Polyporus (Ovinus) pes-capre... 494
squamosus ... . 494
squamosus var. lentinoides 494
tasmanicus . . 495
tumulosus 47 9, 495
Polyporus (Pelloporus)
luteo-nitidus . 491
oblectans . 492
perennis 491
Polyporus (Petaloides) scat 4.80
brunneolus ... . 481
dorcadideus... .. 482
Jusco-lineatus . 482
Jusco-maculatus . 480
gallo-pavonis ... 481
granvmocephalus . 482
megalosporus . 482
obniger .. 483
petalodes .. 481
platotis . 482
pocula . 483
rhipidium .. 480
rubidus Are oi .. 481
Polyporus (Spongiosus) heystrien 4.90
rufescens . 490
Schweinitzw 490, 491
tomentosus .. 491
Polystictus Adami ee 484
bulbipes we 492
carneo-niger we 484
cinnabarinus .. 485, 486
cinnamoneus we. 492
cladonia ... 492
cognatus .. 484
dilatus'... . 484
eucalypt .. 506
Feer ... 905
lilacino- gilvus... ... 505
obovatus -. 484
perdurus .. 492
rasupes .. . 484
zanthopus 484
Polystictus (Pelloporus) oblectans 492
perennis . 491
Polystictus (Petaloides) ‘afinis... 484,
flabelliformis 484, 497
intonsus .» 487
libum . 487
luteus we 484
mutabilis ... 483
obovatus wee 484
Pentzhei ‘ ... 487
peroxydatus ., .. 487
sanguineus ... we 485
stereinus ... 485
subfulvus . 485
lxxix.
PAGE
Polystictus (Petaloides)
vernicifluus .. . 487
Polystictus (Spongiosus)
tomentosus ... aon
Pomaz umbellata ; . 326
Poole, T. Efficiency methods... . lit.
Poranthera corymbosa .. 343
ericifolia 343
microphylla 343, 344
Potts, H. W. Agricultura!
education in America _ . 1 xiii.
Prenanaspides ... . 386
Prearcturus ois .. 386
Proidotea .. 386
Pteridiwm aquilinum . 847
Public Health and Kindred
Sciences Section, Abstract
of proceedings xvii.
Pultenea dentata . 304
elliptica .. dld5
wncurvata . d04
Q
Quaife, F. H., eters lanceo-
bate <i.
XXXV.
Earth pillars... XXXV.
‘ Rapanea variabilis ... 329
Ratonia tenax . 440, 444
Read, John and Margaret Mary
Williams, A novel applica-
tion of bromine water in
synthetic organic chemistry
558, xxXxix.
Report of Council i Wil.
Restio complanatus . 351
fastigiatus . 331
Rhagodia Billardiers 301, 323
Rhodosphera rhodanthema 341, 444
Rhynchonella pleurodon Wee ile
Ricinocarpus pinifolws ... . 325
Robinia pseudacacia .. 510
Roseby, Rev. Dr., Chart of cir-
cumpolar stars ta SENT,
Rottbelia compressa . 322
Ruelingia hermannicefolia 320, 350
Rumez acetostella . 325
Crispus... ne Oat
pulcher sae at
scutatus oul
=)
Sach, A. J., Auriferous quartz
XXXVIil.
Rubber ae aes RV.
PAGE
Salsola kali te 3038
Samolus repens 309, 310, 322,
' 332, 334
Sayce, Edna D: Some deter-
minations of the heat con-
ductivity of Selenium 356, xxxvi.
Scevola hispida .. 316
suaveolens 345, 355
Schenus apogon.. , 341
brevifolius . 341
tenwuissima : wrsoal
‘Scirpus cernuus .. 308, 334
inundatus i 352
nodosus ¥ 304, 309, 325
Seedlings Acacia, Part III. B <
R. H. Cambage . 389
Seeds, Vitality of Acacia . 389
Selenium, Some determinations
of the heat ‘conductivity of
By E. D. Sayce .. 806
Selliera radicans tex OLO
Senecio lautus .. 848
spathulatus . 318
Sequoia sempervirens Meek.
Silybum marianum . 344
Smilax glycyphylla 311
Solanum aviculare 351
Commersont bx.
pungetium ws. B00
sodomewm 300, 355
vescwum . we ODL
Some determinations of the heat
conductivity of selenium.
By Edna D. Sayce . 356
Spergularia rubra 344
Spinifex hirsutus .., 291, 354
Sporobolus indicus 324
virginicus 302, 305
Sprengelia incarnata w. 349
Stackhousia monogyna ... we 803
spathulata .. d03
Stenotaphrum americanum . 301
Stephania hernandifolia . 298
Stephen, A. E., Sources of pots
ash in Australia Sax
Sterculia decipiens ... 456
Stipa semrbarbata ee .. 846
Strychnos arborea 437, 443, 444
Stypandra wmbellata . 319
Styphelia errcoides .. 825
esquamata .. 349
humifusa . 807
microphylla . 320
pinifolia « 342
Richer ... 309, 351
triflora... . 3380
Ixxx.
PAGE PAGE
Styphelia tubiflora ay ... 325 | Typha angustifolia ... wee 343
virgata... sho oe we B42
viridis . , ... 884 U
Sydney Water Supply... 209 | Urda noe .. 386
Syncarida : .. 887 | Use of botanical names for
trade purposes _... -. 465
r
Teniopteris Daintreei ... ... 145 V
Tarrietia argyrodendron 438, 444 | Velleia lyrata ... ... 819, 820
Terry-hie-hie, Bora ground at 423 | Villaresia (Chariessa) Moorei... 439
Tetragonia expansa ... ... 8381 | Viminaria denudata ... 340, 345
nigrescens var. maritima ... 846 | Viola hederacea ... a "Soe
Themeda Forskali var. imberbis 306 | Vitality of Acacia seeds in sea-
Thysanotus junceus _... ie tool water or ees 3: 389
Trachymene Billardieri var. Vitis Baudiniana su .. 827
crassifolia ... ae .. 321 clematidea ... ae . 853
ericoides i as .. 842 hypoglauca ... 327
linearis at 8 ... 825 | Voleanism, Relation between,
Stephensonii ... wel ... 38538 and the artesian supply ... 194
Trametes carnea... ae ... 505
cubensis Ane aD ... 526 Ww
cupreo-rosea ... ... °... 526 | Water supply, Sydney 209, xi, xxii.
Peet Se ah ... 005 | Wedelia biflora ... 806, 333
lilacino-gilva ... A ...» 505 | Weinmannia lachnocarpa 441, 444
var. eucalypti... a ... 506 | Westringia rosmariniformis ... 307
var. Stoward... et ... 506 | Wikstremia indica aif ... 300:
ochroleucus ... Ds ... 525 | Williams, Margaret Mary, John
plebeia ... Bias oe 28507 Read and, A novel applica-
yosea ... as wa ... 507 tion of Bromine water in
roseola ... ie sed ... 507 synthetic organic chemistry
strigata ay 3 ... 513 s 558, xxxix.
Tricostulania pauciflora ... 344
Triglochin procera bhi ... 344 ms
striata ... is te ... 844 | Xanthosia pilosa Js ie O16
Tristania conferta ot ... 487 | Xerotes glauca ... 5 311
Toit, A. L. du, The problem of longifolia ... 294, 855:
the Great Australian Ar- Xylostroma gigantea ... 522, 523
tesian Basin : 135
Topographical, ecological and Z
taxonomic notes on the Zieria levigata ... ae w. A256
ocean shore-line vegetation revoluta : ae ... 825
of the Port Jackson District 287 | Zoysia pungens 302, 305, 309, 332, 337
A OCHECK-LIST OF THE MARINE FAUNA OF NEW
SOUTH WALES.
PART I.
PREFACE BY CHARLES HEDLEY, F.L.S.
[Supplement to Journal of the Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LI., 1917. ]
In the absence of complete monographs, check lists
are the most serviceable aids to investigators. The needs
of the last generation of students were met by a useful
_ eatalogue of the Marine Fauna of Sydney Harbour by
Mr. T. Whitelegge. This was published as a prize essay
by our Society twenty-eight years ago. Since then,
steady progress in zoology has increased the total of
known species by from a quarter to a half in various
groups. Application of the rules of nomenclature and
the proposal of new generic names have changed the
names of the original series past recognition.
Therefore a new catalogue is required by those en-
gaged in the study of local fauna. This the Council of
the Royal Society of New South Wales have undertaken
to provide ‘by instalments as means and materials permit.
In this production Professor Haswell, Dr. S. J. Johnston,
Mr. T. Whitelegge and other zoologists have kindly agreed
to assist the writer.
It is considered convenient to expand the gseographic
limits to agree with State boundaries, to include both
vertebrata and invertebrata, and to leave the fluviatile
fauna for another occasion. Thus arranged, it is hoped
that the forthcoming catalogue may prepare the way for
a zoological survey of New South Wales.
The present section on the Mollusea is presented first
because the manuscript happened to be ready when the
opportunity for printing occurred.
1
M 2 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Study of the sea shells of this coast was commenced —
in 1770 by that favourite pupil of Linné, the accomplish-
ed conchologist Solander. Collecting was pursued in
early colonial days by many able and enthusiastic resi-
dent naturalists such as Humphrey, Macleay, Paterson,
Stutchbury, King, Strange and Maegillivray, while visit-
ors like Péron, Lesson, Quoy, Gaimard and Stimpson did
excellent work.
The first consecutive account of the marine mollusea
of New South Wales was given by George French Angas.
He based it on a collection gathered by himself during a
residence of several years in Sydney, and subsequently ©
identified in London by the aid of metropolitan special-
ists, museums and libraries. Under the title of ‘‘A List
of Species of Marine Mollusca found in Port Jackson Har-
bour, New South Wales, and on the adjacent Coasts, with
Notes on their Habits, &c.’’, it was issued in two parts
in 1867 by the Zoological Society of London. About four
hundred and fifty species were included.
On this foundation, Dr. J. C. Cox of Sydner compiled
in 1868, ‘‘A list of species of Marine Mollusca found in
Port Jackson Harbour and on the adjacent coasts.’’ To
the catalogue of Angas, he added about twenty names
previously overlooked or subsequently discovered.
Though privately printed, it was extensively circulated
and has been quoted by von Martens and others as Cox’s
Exchange List.
In a first supplement (Proc. Zool. Soe. 1871, pp. 87-
101) Angas added 108 species, and in a second (op. eit.
1877, pp. 178-194) he gave 186 more, thus raising the
mollusean fauna known at that time to a total of 746
species.
Combining the dispoueens of the Challenger Expedi-
tion with the work of Angas, Mr. T. Whitelegge in 1889
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 3
enumerated 802 marine mollusea in his list of Port Jack-
son invertebrata. No later list appeared. The present
eatalogue increases this to a total of above twelve hun-
dred. The list has also been purified by formally dis-
charging a number of species erroneously attributed to
this fauna. Noteworthy among these is a block of At-
lantie species which, by a mistake of Sir John Murray,
was included in the Challenger series of 410 fathoms off
Sydney. It is a moderate estimate to suppose that future
research will recognise two thousand species of mollusca
from the waters of this State. The time is at hand when
local observers may ascend from enumeration and nomen-
elature to a study of habits and structure.
I am much indebted to Mr. T. Iredale for advice on
nomenclature, and for notes on preoccupied names, such
as Bulla australis and Purpura neglecta.
Sub-Kingdom MOLLUSOA.
Class PELECYPODA. (1—819).
Order PRIONODESMACHA. (1-101)
Family NUCULIDA.
PRONUCULA Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p. 290.
1—decorosa Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., 1902, p. 290,
eo.
2—hedleyi Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc, Roy. Soe.,
Viet., xvu., 1904, p. 237: Nucula minuta Ten.-
Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876 (1877), p.
156; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p.
291, £. 40.
NUCULA Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H., Paris, 1799, p. 87.
3—consobrina Adams and Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1863, p. 427; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii,
1201600 0) Soa ae Lo
4 obliqua Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi. (i.), 1819, p.
ao Chenu, Man, Conch.,. i1,,1862, p.. 179, £. 897;
Hedley, Eb tio .N3S.W., xxvii, 19138, p. 263,. pl.
16, f. 46; = N. simplex Adams, 1856, — anti-
podum Hanley, 1860, — N. dilecta Smith, 1891,
= N. tenisoni Pritchard, 1896.
o—pusilla Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 177, pl.
26, Tf. 26.
6—umbonata Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1891, p. 443,
pl. 35, f. 24. .
Angas erred (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 932) in report-
ing the New Zealand N. strangei from New South Wales.
Family NUCULANID.
NUCULANA Link, Rostock Samml. iii., 1807, p. 155.
7— crassa Hinds, Nucula, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1848, p.
99; Hanley, Thes.. Conch., iui, 1860, p. 120, pl.
228, f.. 69.
8—dohrni Hanley, Leda, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1861, p.
242; L. hanleyi Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1873, p.
shee oll 40, oe
9—fortis Hedley, Leda, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi, 1907,
Dr oO2. ple GOs tm. wn oe
10—inopinata Smith, Leda, Chall. Zool., xiii, 1885, p.
236, pl. 19, f. 9. Not L. mopinata Cossmann,
1908.
11—miliacea Hedley, Leda, Mem. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1902, p. 295, f. 483; Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p.
42
M 4 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
12—pala Hedley, Leda, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
Sol pl wGO: atl
13—ramsayi Smith, Leda, Chall. Zool., xiii., p. 241,
pl 2043:
POROLEDA, Tate, Proc. Roy. Soc., N.S.W., xxvii, 1894,
p. 186.
14—ensicula Angas, Leda, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p.
177, pl. 26, f. 27. = Leda lefroyi, Beddome, 1881.
15—spathula Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
HS tolyeresh, 16, Jk dks),
SAREPTA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., v., 1860, p.
303. |
16—obolella Tate, Leda, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A., viii.,
1886, p. 129, pl. 5, f. 3; S. tellinaeformis, Hedley,
Ree. Austr. Mus., iv., 1901, p. 26, f. 8.
Family ARCID AL.
CUCULLAEA, Lamarck, Syst. An., 1801, p. 116.
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 5
17—concamera Bruguiere, Arca, Encyl. Meth,
vers i, 1789, p. 102; Adams Genera, 1857, pl.
125, f. 5; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p.
201.
LIMOPSIS, Sasso, Giorn. Ligust. Scien., i., 1827, p. 476.
18—brazieri Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 21, pl.
1, f. 34.
19—erectus Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
H0Gepr 224) pl, 38, 4. 14, 15.
20—loringi Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1873, p. 183, pl.
Zima: darazier ek. .5.N:S:;W.,.vi.,1881, p. 789.
21—tenisoni Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soec., Tasm.,
leit p. 60>. knybassi, Smith; Chall, Zool, x11,
S85) p:, 206, pl..18, £.,.6,
CYRILLA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (38), v., 1860,
p. 478.
22—dalli Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p. 296,
f. 44.
LISSARCA, Smith, Phil. Trans. elxviii., 1879, p. 185.
23—picta Hedley, Austrosarepta, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxiv,
S99 p. 430.8 fo o2oand: xxxai., 1908, p. 472,
Montacuta variegata Brazier nom. nud. P.L.S.
NiS: W., xix; 1894, p: 179.
ARCA, Linne, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 693.
24—afra Gmelin Syst. Nat., xi., 1791, p. 3308; Lamy,
Journ. de Conch., lv., 1907, p. 100; A. seulptilis,
Reeve Conch. Icon., i., 1844, pl. 17, f. 118.
25—botanica Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 680,
plvbk ft. 33, 34; 35.
26—fasciata Reeve, Conch. Icon., ii., 1844, pl. 15, f.
99-- Smith, Chall. Zool.; xui., 1885, p. 260.
27—ventricosa Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 38;
Philippi Abbild Beschr., ii., 1847, p. 211, pl. 3,
f.4,5. A. zebra, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvii,
902)» p., 17.
28—metella, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 681,
pheoltin SOs (,
29—strabo Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
Cony Deion tbo. 20...
30—trapezia, Deshayes, Mag. Zool., 1840, p. 21; A.
lischkei, Hedley P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p.
203, pl. Det 29; 34: Journ: Roy.’Soed N.S.W,,
wai ONG peoO, ht. 14:
rt a
,
Angas (Proc. Zool. Soe. 1867, p. 931) erroneously re-
cords Barbatia pusilla from Sydney. Smith (Chall. Zool.
Xlll., p. 266) erroneously records A. gubernaculum from
Sydney.
BATHYARCA, Kobelt, Conch. Cab., ms., vili., pt. 2,
Arca, 1891, p. 214.
3l—perversidens Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
1902, p. 298, ff 45.
GLYCYMERIS, da Costa, Brit. Conch., 1778, p. 168.
32—australis, Quoy & Gaim. Pectunculus Zool. As-
trolabe iii., 1834, p. 469, pl. 77, f. 7-9; — holo-
sericus Reeve, 1843, = grayanus Dunker 1856;
= kenyoniana Brazier 1898.
32a—australis flammeus, Reeve, Conch. Icon., i1., 1843,
pl. 2, f. 7; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv.) 2OGR yep
498.
33—gealei Angas, Pectunculus, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1873,
je deste (Ole PAUL ais Sy
33—tenuicostatus Reeve, Pectunculus, Conch. Icon.,
i, 1848, pl. 6, f. 35; Lamy, Journ. de Conch., lix.,
L9t2, pi 0d, Dlg oie oe
Smith (Chall. Zool., xiii., p. 251) erroneously recorded
Pectunculus striatularis from Sydney. |
Family PHILOBRYID/A.
CRATIS, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p. 698.
-35—progressa Hedley, op. cit., p. 698, pl. 79, f. 21-28.
PHILOBRYA, Carpenter, Smithson. Miscel. Coll, x.,
1872, Index, p. 21.
36—inornata Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p.
207, pl. 19, f. 40-43.
37—parallelogramma Hedley, op. cit., xxx., 1906, p..
544, pl. 32, f. 14-16.
38—pectinata Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902,
p. 299, f. 46. |
39—tatei Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., iv., 1901, p. 24,
sie oH
NOTOMYTILUS, Hedley, Austral. Antarctic Exped. Moll.,.
1916. 90.220,
40—crenatuliferus Tate, Myrina, Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Axi xy., 1892) Woda) pleted, tle |
41—ruber, Hedley, Philippiella, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix.,
1904, p. 207, pl. x., f. 4447.
M 6 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 7
ADACNARCA, Pelseneer, Zool. Belgica Exped., 1903,
Moll., p. 24.
42-squamea Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p.
Aor ehe 9,
Family PINNIDA.
PINNA, Linne Syst. Nat., x., 1758, ROG
43—-menkei Reeve (as of aaa Nov. 1858) Conch.
feom., xis June 1858,.pl. 18, 4. 34:
Family PERNIDA.
ISOGNOMON, Solander, Cat. Portland Museum, 1786,
peo:
44—cumingii Reeve, Perna, Conch. Icon., xi., 1858,
ple det. 3:
FORAMELINA, Hedley, Biol. Results Endeavour, i..,
1914, p. 70.
45—exempla Hedley. op. cit. 9p: 1; pl: it, 12.
Family PTERIIDA.
PIEersé, Scopoli, Intr. Hist.. Nat., 1777, p. 397.
46—lata Gray, Avicula, in Eyre Journ. Discov. Austr.
peetor p45, 0h 6, fh. smith, ‘Alert, Zool.
1884, p. 112.
47—maura Reeve, Avicula, Conch. Icon., x., 1857,
[0 sa ot ar Rt 8
48—pulchella Reeve, Avicula, Conch. Icon., x., 1857,
pL 6, 1.22; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 930.
PINCTADA, Bolten, Mus., Bolt., 1798, p. 166.
49 vulgaris Schumacher, Perlamater, Essai, 1917,
p. 108, pl. 20, f. 8; Jameson, Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1901, p. 384; M. fimbriata, Angas, Proce. Zool.
Soe., 1867, p. 930.
MALLEUS, Lamarck, Mem. Soc., N.H., Paris, 1799, p.
82.
50—albus Lamarck, An. s. vert., 1819, p. 144; Chenu,
Man. Conch., i1., 1862, f. 815.
51—legumen Reeve, Conch. Icon., xi., 1858, pl. 1, f.
2
Family VULSELLIDA.
VULSELLA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 156.
52—vulsella Linne, Mya, Syst. Nat. x., 1758, p. 671;
Smith, Proc, Malac.Soe:,\1x., 1914) pr 307, pl. 11.
M 8 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Family OSTREID.
OSTREA, Linne, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 696.
53—angasi Sowerby (emend), Conch. Icon., xviii,
187i, pl Laie
54cucullata Born, Index Mus. Caes. Vind. 1778, p.
100; Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xviii., 1871, pl. 16,
f. 84; — mordax, Gould, 1850, — glomerata;
Gould, 1850, = subtrigona, Sowerby, 1871.
5d—virescens Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 911,
pl. 44, f. 18;.
Angas (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 934) erroneously re-
ported O. cireumsuta Gould from Botany Bay.
Family TRIGONIIDA.
NEOTRIGONIA, Cossmann, Ann. Paleont., vii, 1912
Da iole
56—margaritacea, Lamarck, Trigonia, Ann. Mus.,
iv., 1804, p. 355, pl. ‘67, f. 2; Angas, Proc. Zool.
Soe., 1877, p. 193; = antarctica, Peron, 1807,
= pectinata, Lamarck, 1819, — nobilis, Adams,
1854.
56a—margaritacea acuticostata McCoy, Geol. Mag.
lii., 1866, p. 481, f. 1; Chapman & Gabriel, Proc.
Roy. Soc. Viet., xxvi., 1914, p: 305, pk (2Gynee
13; = reticulata, Ten. Woods, PA:s Nisa
1878, p> 125.
56b—margaritacea lamarckii Gray, Ann. Nat. Hist.,
i, 1888, p. 482; Chenu, Illustr. Conch., 1845, pl.
iL
57—strangei Adams, Trigonia, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1852
(18542 9 Lol Get.
Family PECTINID_®.
PECTEN, Muller, Zool. Dan. Prod., 1776, p. 161.
58—medius Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 163;
Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p. 303; P.
fumatus, Reeve, Conch. Icon., viii., 1852, pl. 7,
ity ey
CHLAMYS, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 161.
59—aktinos Petterd, Proce. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1886, D.
acon) ©. bednalli Hedley, P.L.8.N:8.W., xo
495, pl. 25; 10=u3.
60—antiaustralis Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A., viii,
1886, p. 106, rl. 9, f. 7; Hedley, Biol. Results En-
deavour, 1., 1911, p. .96.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 9
61—asperrimus Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p.
174; Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 15, f. 1; Angas,
Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 193; Ostrea matonii,
Donovan, 1825, — P. australis, Sowerby 1847.
62—-bifrons Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 164;
Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 15, f. 5; Hedley, Biol.
Results Endeavour, ii., 1914, p. 73.
63—blandus Reeve, Conch. Icon., viii., 1853, pl. 34,
f. 162; Tapparone Canefri, Zool. Magenta, 1873,
p. 203.
64—-challengeri Smith, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1891, p. 445,
pl Sant. 25,
65—hedleyi Dautzenberg, Journ. de Conch., xlix.,
1901, p. 348 for C. fenestrata, Hedley (not
Horves)) ie ilas NSIWe, xxv.,, LIO0) pr 730; pl
48, f. 17-19.
66—lividus Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 178;
Ostrea tegula Wood, Index, Test. 1828, p. 206,
suppl. pl. 2, f. 3; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
p. 933; P. foliaceus, Quoy & Gaim., Zool. As-
trolabe ili., 1835, p. 445, pl. 76, f. 4-6.
AMUSIUM, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 165.
67—japonicum Gmelin, Ostrea, Syst. Nat., xiii., 1791,
p. 3317; P. balloti, Bernardi, Journ. de Conch.,
ie Sol p46 ,0pl, Lk - Angas.s Proce; Zool.
BOCs bs ( fp. £193:
68—thetidis Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p.
304, f. 49; Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1906, p. 223, pl.
DOM, 30.9,
CYCLOPECTEN, Verrill, Trans. Connect. Acad. x.,
£995 p. 70.
69—favus Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p.
305, f. 50; — nepeanensis, Pritchard & Gatliff,
1904.
70—obliquus, Hedley, op. cit., p. 306, f. 51.
Family SPONDYLID AH.
SPONDYLUS, Linne Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 690.
71—tenellus, Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1856, pl. 18, f.
67; Fulton, Journ of Conch., xiv., 1915, p. 354.
PLICATULA, Lamarck, Syst. Nat., 1801, p. 132.
72—australis Lamarek, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 185;
Hanley, Cat. Ree. Shells 1856, p. 288, pl. 24, f.
44,
rv
="
M 10 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WAEES.
Family DIMYIDA.
DIMYA, Rouault, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, (2),
1848, p. 471.
73—corrugata Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902,
Dp. oUF hora,
Family LIMIDA.
LIMA, Bruguiere, Encyel. Meth. Tabl. vers, 1797, pl.
206.
74—angulata Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1843, p. 86,
pl. 22, f. 39, 40; Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885,,
p: 289.
75—australis Smith, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1891, p. 444, pl.
oo, leah,
76—bassii Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876,
p. 112; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 201,
Di Ot 28.
77—multicostata Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1843, p.
85, pl. 22, f. 38; Smith, Chall. Zool., xin 579835,
p. 288.
78—orientalis Adams & Reeve, Zool. Samarang,
1850, p. 75, pl. 11, f. 38; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe ,
1871, p. 101.
79—strangei Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xviii. 1872, pl.
3, f. 15; Radula bullata. Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe.,.
1867, D. O30.
80—sydneyensis Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904,
p. 200, L. brunnea, Hedley (not Cooke, 1886), op.
eit. xxvi., 1901, .p. 2%, pli 2, To
LIMEA, Bronn. Ital, Tert, N831, wo. The.
81—murrayi Smith, Proce. Foow, Soc., 1891, p. 444, pl.’
soe tf) 20°" Te, acclinis, Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus.
vi., 1905, p. 46, f. 10.
Family ANOMIID Aj,
MONIA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1849 (1850), p. 121.
82—ione Gray, Proc, Zool., Soc., 1849, p. 123; Reeve,.
Conch... leon,; xi;,) 1859,. ply2 aie:
ANOMIA, Linné Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 700.
83—walteri Hector, Trans, N.Z. Inst., xxvii., 1895, p.
292; Suter, Man. N.Z. Moll, 1913, p. 844, pl. 57,
£1. 10;
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M ll
Family MYTILIDZ.
MYTILUS, Linne, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 704.
84—_planulatus Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p.
125; M. dunkeri, Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1897,
Di, On yl 7.
BRACHYODONTES, Swainson, Malac., 1840, p. 3854,
emend. Herrmannsen, 1846.
~ §5—hirsutus Lamarck, Mytilus, An. s. vert., vi., 1819,
p. 120; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1857, pl. 3, f. 8;
Smith, Chall. Zool. xiii., 1885, p. 273.
MODIOLUS, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H. Paris, 1799, p.
87.
86—albicostus Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 111;
Delessert Recueil, 1841, pl. 13, f. 8.
87—arborescens Dillwyn, Mytilus, Descrip. Cat. 1,
1817, p. 306; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1857, pl.
Go. a0. — M pictus, amarck, 1319.
88—australis Gray in King Survey Austr., 11., 1827,
p. 477; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1857, pl. 5, f. 21.
89—confusus Angas, Perna, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p.
alee ta oo:
90—glaberrimus Dunker, Volsella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1856 (May, 1857), p. 363; Reeve, Conch. Icon.,
me Oct. Ion, pl. o, t. 48.
91—lineus Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1906, p. 300,
pl. 56, f. 23-5.
MUSCULUS, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 156.
92barbatus Reeve, Lithodomus, Conch. Icon., x.,
fo5S.pl. a, £27; Smith, Chall’ Zool.’ xii., 1885,
p. 278.
93—cumingianus Reeve, Modiola, Conch. Icon., x.,
ie be we OU; Anoas. Proc, Zool, Soc., 187i,
pe Or:
94—cuneatus Gould, Proce. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist.,
Vili aw pe jo; outhn, Chall, Zool. xiii., 188;
Be 208) DIEVIG, fT:
95—recens Tate, Arcoperna, Proce. Malac. Soe., ii,
1897, p. 182, figs ; Hedley, Proc. L.S.N.S.W., xxv.,
1900, p. 496. |
96—scapha Vereo, Arcoperna, Trans. Roy. Soe. S8.A.,
Moot, 10S p.196; pl. 12, f. 1-5: Chapman &
Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soe. Viet. xxvi., 1914, p. 307,
pl27, = iG. |
M 12 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8. WALES.
7
97—splendidus Dunker, Volsella, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1856
(1857) p. 365; Reeve, Lithodomus, Conch. Icon.,
x., 1858, pl. 5, £. 31; Hedley, PLAN Siyyaeeee
T1902 <p. 706, plot tenes
98—subtortus Dunker, Modiolarea, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1856 (1857), p. 365; Reeve, Modiola, Conch.
Ieon., x., 1858, pl. 10, f. 57; Angas, Proce. Zool.
soe., 1867, p27930:
99—varicosus Gould, Modiola, Proe. Boston Soe. Nat.
Hist., viil., 1861, p. 37; Smith, Zool. Alert, 1884,
p- 109, plata. Me
DACRYDIUM Torrell, Fauna Moll. Spitzb. i, 1859, p.
138.
100—fabale Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 199,
pl. 10, f. 39.
SEPTIFER, Recluz, Rev. Zool., 1848, p. 275. ;
101—hbilocularis Linné, Mytilus, Syst. Nat., x., 1758,
p. 705; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1857, pl. 9, f.
40; Angas Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 192, as M.
kraussi.
Order ANOMALODESMACEA (102-142).
Family LATERNULID.
LATERNULA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 155.
102—creccina Reeve, Anatina, Conch. Icon., xiv., 1860,
pl. 2, f. 12; ? attenuata, Reeve, op. cit., pl. 3, f.
16; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 918.
103—prolongata ‘Reeve, Andtina, Conch. Idon., xiv.,
1863, errata, Pl. 4, f. 28; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
1867, p. 914.
Family PERIPLOMATIDA.
PERIPLOMA, Schumacher, Essai Nouv. Syst., 1817, p.
15;
104—micans Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., iv., 1901, p. 25,
to” fe
COCHLODESMA, Couthouy, Boston Journ. Nat. Hist.,
1, 2839 ps 00!
105—angasi Crosse & Fischer, Periploma, Journ. de
Conch., xii., 1864, p. 349, and xili., 1865, p. 427,
pl. 11, £1; Brazier, | P.InS.N.S5W 30 ee
D. oad.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 13
Family THRACIIDAL.
-THRACIA, Blainville, Dict. Se. Nat., xxxii., 1824, p. 347.
106—anatinoides Reeve, Conch Icon., xii., 1859, pl. 3,
ee es
107—angasiana Smith, Journ. earn Soe. Zool., 1876,
060 spl, 30. #. 23.
108—brazieri Sowerby, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1883 (1884),
p. 465, nom. mut. for jacksonensis, Sowerby, op.
Cike, Oe.oU, pl... 15.9:
109—jacksoniana Smith, Journ. Linn. Soe. Zool., xii.,
1876, pool, pl. 30, £. 24.
110—modesta Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 908,
pl. 44, f. 3.
THRACIOPSIS, Tate & May, Trans.. Roy. Soe. S.A,
xxiv, 1900, p:, 103.
111—angustata Angas, Alicia, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1867,
p. 908, pl. 44, f. 1; ? Thracia cultrata Gould, Proc.
Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., viii., 1861, p. 23; Hedley,.
PalomNts. WwW. xxxvul, 19113) p.. 266.
112—arenosa Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 197,
pl Oy £4 26-7.
113—elegantula Angas, Alicia, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867,
we906, Pl. 44. f..2.
114—speciosa Angas, Thracia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869,
po 46,.pl. 2, 0. 12.
Family MYOCHAMID.
MYOCHAMA, Stutchbury, Zool. Journ., v., 1830, p. 96.
115—anomioides Stutchbury, op. cit., p. 97, suppl., pl.
42, f. 1-4; Smith, Chall. Zool. xiii., 1885, p. 63.
116—strangei Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1850, p. 23,.
pies; &. 2.
MYODORA, Gray (emend.), Ann. Nat. Hist., 1840, p.
306.
117—albida Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1875.
(1876), p. 160; Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1907, p. 301; M. corrugata, Verco, Trans. Roy.
Dee oA ex, 1596, 0,229 pl. 8-1.
118—australica Reeve, Thracia, Conch. Icon., xii., 1859,
pies tala Somat, Chall, Zool, sit. 1885, ps 67.
119—brevis Sowerby, Pandora, Append. Stutch. Cat.
(cir. 1829), p. 3, £. 2; Smith, Proc. Zool Soc., 1880,
p. 580.
| 7
La =
‘
M 14 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
120—crassa Stutchbury, Anatina, Zool. Journ., v., 1830,
p, 100, pl. isuppl) 43) te a
121—ovalis, Stutchbury, Anatina, Zool. Journ., v., 1830,
p. 100, pl. suppl. 48, f. 7-8.
122—ovata Reeve, Conch. Icon., 11., 1844, pl. 1, f£. 4.
123—pandoriformis Stutchbury, Zool. Journ., v., 1830,
p. 99, pl. suppl. 48, f. 3-4; Smith, Chall. Zool.,
Mi,, MSS5, 0. oe
Family CLEIDOTHAERIDA.
CLEIDOTHAERUS, Stutchbury, Zool. Journ., v., 1830,
De 97.
124—albidus Lamarck, Chama. An. s. vert., vi., 1819,
p. 96; Chenu, Llustr. Conchyl., 1845, pl. 1; Han-
cock, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (2), xi., 1853, p. 106,
pls. 3-4; — C. chamoides, Stutchbury, 1830;
= C. crassa, Tate, 1884.
Family CLAVAGELLIDA.
DACOSTA, Gray, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1858, p. 315.
125—australis Sowerby Clavagella, Append. Stutch-
bury Cat. (cir. 1829), pl. 1, £° 2: Wieyomm ae
Journ. Conch., iii., 1868, Suppl. p. 5 = C. elon-
gata, Broderip, 1835.
HUMPHREYIA, Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), i, July
1858, p. 16. |
126—coxi Brazier, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1872, p. 22
tg).
127—-strangei Adams, Aspergillum, Proe. Zool. Soce.,
1852 (1854), p. 91, pl. 15, & 5; Sumth eee
Soc, 1x5, 1900) pe 25. sala
Family VERTICORDITDA.
VERTICORDIA, Sowerby, Min. Conch., 1844, p. 639.
128—australiensis Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 167,
pl. 25, f. 6; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907,
pD. 30a, pl. 50, 1, o8—a0:
129—ericia Hedley, Biolog. Results Endeavour, 1., 1911,
p: 1.96, spl. Hts Mien.
130—setosa Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 303.
V. rhomboides, Hedley (not Tate 1887). Trans.
N.Z. Inst. xxxvii., 1905 (1906), p. 72 pee.
£135, 14.
131—vadosa Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 303,
pl. 56, f. 34-37.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 15
LYONSIELLA, Sars, Remark. Forms Life, 1872, p. 25.
132—quadrata Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
302, pl. 56, f. 31-83.
Family POROMY ACID A.
POROMYA, Forbes, Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1844, p. 103.
133—undosa Hedley and Petterd, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1906, p. 224, pl. 38, f. 16-17.
134—illevis, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvii., 1913, p.
265; Ectorisma granulata, ‘Tate, Trans. Roy.
Soe. SHeAuIst., ve, 1892, De 2K, vl. Me rah oe
Smith (Proc. Malac sna , 1894, p. 60) has eeontgaaly
recorded Poromya oer Seguenza from this coast.
Family CUSPIDARIIDA.
CUSPIDARIA, Nardo, Revue Zool., 1840, p. 30.
135—alveata Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., Wie, LIOT paao2,
pl: 66, ft. 6.
Reever dast ‘Smith, Neera, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p.
ate ple 9) fF: 2.
137—brazieri Smith, Nera, Chall. Zool.,. xiii, 1885,
elke plo, Si. 3.
138—dorsirecta Verco, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.A., xxxil.,
teens, oe ph lt) 9 10.
139—exarata Vereo, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.A., xxxil., 1908,
Delo pe, 220i Ge ke
140—latesulcata Ten. Woods, Newra, P.L.S.N.S.W., 1
iris p. 123° Hedley, P.LS.N'S.W. xxvi, 190L
p20. pl: 2, £. 11-13.
141—tasmanica Ten. Woods, Neera, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 27; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
mexyl OO 9. i 2cke rt... 20).
142—truncata Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p.
ATT? in 211,
Smith (Proc. Malace. Soce., 1., 1894, p. 60) has erroneously
recorded Cuspidaria teres J ae ‘from this coast. Angas
(Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 914) wrongly cited Neera
rugata, Adams.
Order TELEODESMACEA (143-319).
Family CRASSATELLITIDA.
CRASSATELLITES, Kruger, Arch. neust. Entd. Urweldt.,
li., 1823, p. 466.
7
M 16 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8. WALES.
143—discus Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 300,
pl. 56, f. 26, 27.
144—fulvidus Angas, Crassatella, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1871,
p: 207 pl ieee
145—kingicola Lamarck, Crassatella, Ann. Mus., v.,
1804, p. 408; Lamy, Journ. de Conch., lxii., 1917,
pl. vi, fig. 1; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xiv., 1900,
p. 749, = suleata, Lamarck, 1804, = C. lamarcki, ~
Deshayes. :
145a—kingicola corbuloides Reeve, Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1842, p. 45; Conch. Icon., 1., 1848, pl. 11., fig. 9.
146—scabriliratus Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902,
p. 314, f. 54.
147—-securiformis Hedley, op. cit., p. 312, f. 53.
CUNA, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p. 314.
148—atkinsoni Ten. Woods, Kellia, Proce. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1876 (1877), p.. 158; Tates i Silas
P.LS.N‘S.W., xxvi., 1901, p. 435, spl 2
149—concentrica Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902,
p. 315, f. 55, not C. concentrica, Bartsch, 1915.
150—delta Tate & May, Carditella, Trans. Roy. Soe.
S.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 102; Hedley, Rec. Austr.
Mus: ive 190i) - p25 oh oe
151—particula Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902,
Dp. 8163 f. 56; :
152--pisum Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1903, p. 476,
plo. ey 26502.
HEMIDONAX, Morch, Mal. Blatt, xvu., 1870, p. 121.
153—australiensis Reeve, Cardium. Conch. Icon., ii,
1844, pl. 5, f. 24; Donax pictus, Tryon, Am.
Journ. Coneh., i., 1870, p. 23, pl. eee
Family CARDITID A.
CARDITELLA, Smith, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1881, p. 42.
154—angasi Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 217, pl.
19, £249.
155—elegantula Tate & May, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901,
p. 463, f. 14.
CARDITA, Bruguiére, Ency. Meth., vers. (2), 1792, p.
401. .
156—calyculata, Linn. Chama, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p.
692; C. exeavata Desh., Proce. Zool. Soe., 1852 —
(1854), p. 100, pl. xvii., fig. 1, 2, 3; Lamy, Bull.
Mus. Hist., 1916, p. 119.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY, M 17
VENERICARDIA, Lamarck, Syst. An. s. vert., 1801, p.
123. \
157—amabilis Deshayes, Cardita, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1852,
pads plelge t. 8, O° Anaags Prog Zool, Soc.,
PETE *p. £00,
158—beddomei Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 211,
Deo t..o- medley, Pls NSW... xxv., 1900,
p. 499.
159—calva Tate, Cardita, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., ix.,
| 1887, p. 189, pl. 20, f. 14; Gatliff & Gabriel, Proce.
Roy. soe. Vicf., xxv., 1912, p: 173; C. dilecta,
Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p. 41.
160—cavatica Hedley, Cardita, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
LIOZ ep. SL8; «f...58.
161—raouli Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1872, p. 613, pl.
42, f. 12; Hedley, Biol. Results Endeavour, ii.,
1914, p. 73.
Family CONDYLOCARDIIDAK.
CONDYLOCARDIA, Bernard, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., ii,
1396.2 ps E95.
162—ovata Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 539,
pieolsa, of-6,
163—pectinata Tate & May, Carditella, Trans. Roy.
Soc., S.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 103; Hedley & May,
Ree. Austr. Mus., vii., 1908, p. 125, pl. 25, f. 43,
44, 45.
164—porrecta Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxi., 1906, p.
475, pl. 38, f. 24; Hedley & May, Ree. Austr.
Miusevar., L908.-p. 125, pl: 25, £541,742.
165—projecta Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p.
a, 4.5 4.
166—trifoliata Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxi., 1906, p.
1d, pl. 31, ©. : 2-23;
Family CHAMIDA.
CHAMA, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 691.
167—fibula Reeve, Conch. Icon., iv., 1846, pl. 5, f. 27;
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 682.
From Sydney, Angas (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 295, and
1871, p. 100) erroneously cited C. spimosa, Broderip, and
C. reflexa, Reeve.
2
M 18 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Family LUCINIDA,
CODAKTA, Scopoli, Intr. Hist. Nat., 1777, p. 398.
168—bella Conrad, Lucina, Journ. Acad. Sci. Philad.,
vil., 1834, p. 254; L. fibula, Angas, Proce. Zool.
Soc., 1877, p. 192; — L. divergens Philippi, 1850,
—= L. munda, Adams, 1856.
169—pisidium Dunker, Lucina, Malak. Blatt., vi., 1860,
p. 227; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., XXXIX,, 1914, p.
699, vl. 12 i Domo.
170—quadrata Angas, Lucina, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 176, pl: 26, f. 24.
171—rugifera Reeve, Lucina, Conch. Icon., vi., 1850,
pl. 1, f. 1; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 926.
172—simplex Reeve, Lucina, Conch. Icon., vi., 1850, pl.
3, f. 11; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 926.
LUCINA, Bruguiére, Ency. Meth. Tabl. vers., 1797, pl* 284.
173—induta Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 363,
pl. 66, f. 11, 12.
LUCINIDA, D’Orbigny, Voy. Amer. Merid., 1847, p. 588.
174—assimilis Angas, Loripes, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867,
p. 910, pl. 44, f. 8; L. jacksoniensis, Smith, Chall.
Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 185, pl. 13, f. 11.
175—hilaira Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli. 1917, p. 683,
(lk Bin Ge Sich ais)
176—ramsayi Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii, 1885, p. 174,
pl. 18, f. 2; Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., viii., 1912,
Ds laa: :
Cooke (Ann. Mag. N.H. (5), xviii., 1886, p. 99), erron-
eously cites from Port Jackson, Lucina globosa, Forskal.
Vide Lynge, D. Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk, Shrifter 7,
tava L909 Sap, yo.
MYRTAEA, Turton, Dithyr, Brit., 1822, p. 1383. .
177—botanica Hedley, 1918 (nom. mut.), Tellina bra-
zieri, Sowerby, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1883, p. 31, pl.
7, f. 2, not Tellina brazieri, Sowerby, 1869.
DIVARICELLA, von Martens, Beitr. Meersf. Mauritius,
1880, p. 321.
Hee a Adams & Angas, Lucina, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1863, 426, pl. 37, f. 20; Smith, Chall. Rep.,
mall. 1885, pt ,
CORBIS, Cartas ent Anim., ii., 1817, p. 480.
179—despecta Hedley, Chione, P.US.N.S.W., xxix,
1904, p. 193, pl. 10, f. 35-8.
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 19
Family DIPLODONTIDZ. —
DIPLODONTA, Bronn, Ital. Tertiar, geb., 1831, p. ix.
180—adamsi Angas, Mysia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
910, pl. 44, f. 9.-
181—jacksoniensis Angas, Mysia, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867,
p. GLO pl. 44, £. 10. |
182—globulosa Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1855, p. 226;
Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 927.
183—zelandica Gray in Yate, New Zealand, 1835,
append. p. 809; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix.,
1904, p. 196.
Family CYRENELLID.
JOANNISIELLA, Dall, Nautilius, ix., 1895, p. 78.
184—-sphaericula Deshayes, Cyrenella, Proce. Zool. Soe., -
1854 (1855), p. 840; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx.,
1906, p. 544, pl. 32, f. 18-21.
Family THY ASIRIDA.
THYASIRA, Lamarck, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p: 492.
185—albigena Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
363, pl. 66, f. 4-5.
186—flexuosa Montagu, Tellina, Test. Britt., 1803, p.
12; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1895, p. 725.
Family LEPTONIDJS.
ERYCINA, Lamarck, Ann. du Mus., vii., 1806, p. 53.
187—acupuncta Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902,
pa.o2l, f. 60.
188—helmsi Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p. 701,
pl. 80, f. 37-9.
BORNIA, Philippi, Moll. utr. Sicil., i., 1886, p. 13.
189—filosa Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvii., 1902, p. 7, pl.
2) f. 15-17.
190—lepida, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 5438,
B32, dh 223)
191—radiata Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p. 48,
f, 12.
NEOLEPTON, Monterosato, Atti. Acad. Palermo, 1875,
p.. 12.
192—novacambrica Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915,
(OL, Spl 19end.. 29-32:
M 20 MARINE FAUNA, N..S. WALES.
KELLYA, Turton, emend, Dithyra Brit., 1822, p. 56.
193—adamsi Angas, Lepton, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
910) pl. 44,7 ee
194—jacksoniana Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 105,
pl 7, in FE.
195—solida Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 176, pl.
26; b. Zo.
196—suborbicularis Montagu, Mya, Test. Brit., 1804,
p. 39, pl. 26, f. 6; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx.,
1906, p. 548; K. rotunda, Angas, Proe. Zool.
Soe., 1867, p. 927. :
ROCHEFORTIA, Velain (Compt. Rend., lxxxiii., 1876,
p. 285, nom. nud.), Archiv. Zool. Exper., vi.,
180% pe haz. |
197—angasi Smith, Montacuta, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885,
p. 204, pl. 12, f. 2.
198—anomala Angas, Mysella, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 170) pl. 26,98. 22.
199—concentrica Gould, Lepton, Proce. Bost. Soe., Nat.
Hist:, “vain: 1861, p. 38; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
xxix, L9T5,. pe TOO ieee
200—donaciformis Angas, Mysella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1878, p. 8638, pl. 54, f. 18; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
XXvii.;.1902, p. 7; pl. 1, £. 10-14.
201—lactea Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1902, p. 320,
tO)
202—-subacuminata Smith, Tellimya, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
SOL p442. placa, ek. 22.
LASAEA, Brown, lll. Conch. Gt. Britain, 1827, Explan.
pl: 20M tan lie:
203—australis Lamarck, Cyclas, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 560; Hedley, P.L:S.N.S.W., xxxix, 19foe
702, and Mollusea Austral. Antarctic Exped.,
1916, p. 33, pl. 4, f. 45, 46.
CORIAREUS, Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 301.
204—-vitreus Hedley, op. cit. pl. 56, f. 28, 30.
205—semiradiatus Tate, Montacuta, Trans. Roy. Soc
S.A., xi, 1889, p. 63, pl. °40; ci 29) eed
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 542, pl. 31, f. 1, 2.-
MYLITTA, D’Orb. & Recluz, Journ. de Conch., i., 1850,
p. 288.
206—tasmanica Ten. Woods, Pythina, Proc. Roy. Soc.
Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 162; Tate, Trans. Roy.
Soe. S.A. ix., 1887,%p. 98; pl. D, f. 12; Brazier,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xviil., 1894, p. 433.
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 21
Family KELUIELLID A.
CYAMIOMACTRA, Bernard, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1897,
jena) a
207—balaustina Gould,, Kellia, Proce. Bost. Soc. Nat.
ict vite rsol. psa CG. mitida, iedley,
EARS INES. <xxits: P9089 477. pl. 9, £:-19,
AQ ane xxexix., UTILS: p) GOO pl 17, 1: 2. 3.
208—communis Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p.
541, pl. 31, f. 11-13.
209—mactroides Tate & May, Cyamium, Trans. Roy.
Soe) sek... xxiv. 1900;, p.: 102. . Hedley,
PES N.S: We, xxx!,@1906, p. 541, pl. 31, £. 9, 10.
Family GALEOMMATIDA.
SOLECARDIA, Conrad, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad.,
iv., 1849, p. 155.
210—cryptozoica Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p.
684, pl. 51, f. 40.
211—-strangei Deshayes, Scintilla, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1855
(1856), p. 181; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviil.,
tsp. 260, pls Lo, tf, 17-19,
From Sydney, Angas (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 928)
erroneously recorded Scintilla anomala, Deshayes.
Family CARDITDA.
CARDIUM, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 678.
212—bechei Reeve, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 25; Dun-
ker, Index Moll. Mar. Jap., 1882, p. 212, pl. 15,
member 3 redltey, F:lis:N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p.
195. :
213—cygnorum Deshayes, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1854, p.
ae eedley, Fol S.No: We, xi., 1917, p. 686, pl:
ant. AA
214—flavum Linné Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 680; C. rugo-
sum Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1819, p. 19; Reeve,
Conch. Icon., ii., 1845, pl. 14, f. 68; Angas, Proc.
Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 192.
215—levigatum Linné Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 680;
Hanley, Ips. Linn. Conch., 1855, p. 51, pl. 1, f. 8;
C. papyraceum, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867,
Dal2or é
216—multispinosum Sowerby, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1840;
p. 106; Reeve, Conch. Icon., i1., 1844, pl. 2, f.
10; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 192.
M 22 : MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
217—pulchellum Gray in Dieffenbach, New Zealand,
11, 1843, p. 252; Reeve, Conch. Icon., ii1., 1844,
pl. 8, f. 42; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc.; 1867, p. 925.
218—rackettii Donovan, Nat. Repository, iv., 1826, p.
124; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 685.
219—setosum Redfield, Ann. N.Y. Lyceum, iv., 1846,
p. 168, pl. 11, f. 1; Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885,
De Las,
Smith (Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 159) has erroneously
reported C. tenuicostatum from Sydney.
Family VENERID.
DOSINIA, Scopoli, Intr. Hist. Nat., 1777, p. 399.
220—circinaria Deshayes, Cat. Conchif. Brit. Mus., 1853,
p. 9; Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 150, pl. 1,
£2.
221—crocea Deshayes, Cat. Conchif. Brit. Mus., 1853,
p. 8; Roemer, Monog, 1862, p. 71, pl. xiu., f. 4;
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 688.
222—puella Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 909, pl. 44,
f. 4.
. 223—scabriuscula Philippi, Cytherea, Abbild. Beschr.,
ii., 1847, p. 229, pl. 6, f. 2; Angas, Proc Hook
Soc., 1867, p. 928.
224—sculpta Hanley, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1845, p. 11;
Reeve, Conch. Icon., vi., 1850, pl. 9, f. 52; Angas,
Proce. Zool: Soe., 1867, p.,923. 8
SUNETTA, Link, Beschr. Rostock Sammlung, 1807, p.
; 148.
225—truncata, Reeve, Meroe, Conch. Icon., xiv., 1864,
pl. 2, f. 3.; S. adeline, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1867, p. 909, pl, a4, #5.
LIOCONCHA, Morch, Cat. Yoldi, 11., 1853, p. 26.
226—angasi Smith, Circe. Chall. Zool., xii., 1885, p.
148, pl. 2, f. 4. |
Sowerby has (Thes. Conch., ii, 1851, p. 643) erron-
eously recorded Cytherea fastigiata from Sydney. |
GAFRARIUM, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 176.
227—quoyi Hanley, Cytherea, Recent Shells, 1844, p.
11, bis, footnote, pl. 15, f..025;9 Hemi
P.L.S.N.S.W., xli.,. 1917, p. 688. |
Smith (Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 141) has erroneously
reported Circe scripta, Linn. from Sydney.
- MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 23
MACROCALLISTA, Meek, Pal. Upper Missouri, 1876,
pk 79,
228—disrupta Sowerby, Cytherea, Thes. Conch., i..,
HeS,0 Paitor pla l63,.t. 208, 209. Smith,..Chall.
ZAG pale, lsea,>p.teoy pl. iy fs 4.
229—kingii Gray, Cytherea, King’s Survey, i., 1827,
p. 474; Reeve, Dione, Conch. Icon., xiv., 1863, pl.
9, f. 36; C. lamarckii, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv.,
1900, p. 498.
PITARIA, Romer, Krit. Unters, 1857, p. 15; Emend, Dall.
Trans. Wagner Inst., iii., 1903, p. 1264.
230—sophiae Angas, Cytherea, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 176, pl. 26, f. 23; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix.,
1915, p. 700.
Pitaria citrina was by Deshayes (Cat. Conchif. Brit.
Mus., 1853, p. 72) erroneously cited from Sydney.
ANTIGONA, Schumacher, Essai Nouv. Syst., 1817, p. 51.
231—chemnitzii Hanley, Venus, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1844
(1845), p. 160; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiv., 1863,
jal) aes
232—laqueata Sowerby, Venus, Thes. Conch., ii., 1853,
p. 706, pl. 153, f. 15; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1867, p. 920.
233—lamellaris Schumacher, Essai, 1817, p. 155, pl. 14,
f, 1; Brazier; P.L.S.N:S-W., ix., 1884p. 799.
234 gallinula Lamarck, Venus, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 592; Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 10, f. 1;
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 191.
235—lagopus Lamarck, Venus, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p.
591. Hedley, P.U.S.N.S.W., -xxvil., 1903, p. 596;
C. australis, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 921.
236—marica Linné, Venus, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 685 ;
Reeve, Conch. Tcon., SHV 1863, pl. 22, f. 104a
{not 104 and ¢).
237—scabra Hanley, Venus, sees Zool. Soe., 1844
(1845), p. 161; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiv., 1863,
lee 2 ae ee
238—striatissima Sowerby, Venus, Thes. Conch., ii.,
1853, p. 718, pl. 157, f. 103-5.
CLAUSINELLA, Gray, List British Mollusca, 1851, p. 12.
7
239—placida Philippi, Venus, Abbild. Beschr,, i., 1844,
p. 128, pl. 2, f. 2; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 1902, p. 322; — roborata, Hanley, 1845.
Reeve (Conch. Icon., xiv., 1863, Venus, sp. 112) erron-
eously reported V. isabellina, from Sydney.
BASSINA, Jukes-Brown, Proce. Malac. Soe., xi., 1914, p.
81.
240—calophylla Philippi, Venus, Wiegmann’s Archiy.,
1., 1836, p. 229, pl. 8, f 2; Smith) ChalZeges
Mite, OSes
241—disjecta Perry, Venus, Conchology, 1811, pl. 58,
f. 8: V. lamellata, Lamarck, 1818.
242—jacksoni Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 123,
[Ole ope os
243—paucilamellata Dunker, Mercenaria, Novit. Conch.,
i.,. 1858,: p. 52, pl. 16, £,.. 10-124). 2raeee
P.L.S.N.S.W., v., 1880, p. 486; — alatus Reeve,
1863; — Callista victorie, Ten. Woods.
GOMPHINA, Morch, Yoldi Cat. ii., 1853, p. 9.
244 fulgida Hedley, sp. nov. Distinguished from G. un-
dulosa Lamarck by form and by wider spaced
and more jagged color lines. Thes. Conch., ii,
1853, pl. 158, 145. :
CLEMENTIA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 184.
245—crassiplica Lamarck, Lutraria, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 471; C. strangei, Deshayes, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1853 (1854), p. 17; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W ge
1894, p. 483.
246—papyracea Gray, Venus, Ann. philos. n. ser., ix.,
1845, p. 1387; Deshayes, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1853
(1854), p. 171, pl. 21, f. 1;. V. hyalina, yee
Abbild. Beschr., iii, 1849, p. 83, pl. 10, £ 6;
= V. moretonensis, Deshayes, 1854. |
MARCIA, H. & A. Adams, Gen. Ree. Moll., ii, 1857, p.
423.
247—nitida Quoy & Gaim., Venus, Astrolabe Zool., 111.,
1835, p. 529, pl 84, f../ 13) 145 Sledions
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 194; — fumigata,
Sowerby, 1853, = levigata, Sowerby, 1853.
248—scalarina Lamarck, Venus, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 599; Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 10, f. 12.
M 24 MARINE FAUNA, N.S. WALES.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 25
PAPHIA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 175.
249—inflata Deshayes, Tapes, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1853, p.
8, pl. 19, f. 8; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
923.
250—semirugata Philippi, [Venus,, Zeit. Malak., iv.,
1847, p. 88; Abbild. Beschr., iii., 1848, p. 76, pl.
7, f. 4; Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 115.
251—textilis Gmelin, Venus, Syst. Nat., xiii, 1791, p.
3280.
252—turgida Lamarck, Venus, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p.
aoD); Phentter,,Conch. Cab.;: xx; 1870, pi 222) pl.
aout, ti; |
VENERUPIS, Lamarck, An. s. vert., 1818, p. 506.
293—crenata Lamarck, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p. 508;
Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 5, 1, 2. Smith, Zool.
Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 97,
254 _fabagella, Deshayes, Tapes, Cat. Conchif. Brit.
Mus., 1853, p. 182; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiv.,
1864, pl. 13, f. 66; Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885,
p. 116; Jukes-Browne, Proc. Malae. Soc., xi.,
1914p, 93:
255—galactites Lamarck, Venus, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 599; Pfeiffer, Conch. Cab., ele 1870, D. 994.
ply 3s. tf. Geet Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p.
192.
256—mitis Deshayes, Proc. Zool. Soec., 1853 (1854),
53; Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xix., 1874, pl. 4, f. ye
Angas, Proc. Zool. So«., 1867, Dp: 924,
Family PETRICOLIDA.
PETRICOLA, Lamarck, Syst. An. s. vert., 1801, p. 121.
257—rubiginosa Adams & Angas, Naranio, Proc. Zool.
DOC aeisns. pw 420. pl. sth. ~ 1: Brazier,
PEE SUNS. W4 xix, 1895) p" 699:
Family GLAUCONOMYIDA.
GLAUCONOMYA, Bronn, Leth. Geogn., 1838, p. 807.
258—angulata Reeve, Glauconome, Conch. Icon., ii,
1844, pl. 1., f. 5; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1867,
. p.) 924.
Family TELLINIDA.
TELLINA, Linne, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 674.
259—albinella Lamarck, Tellina, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 524; var. rosea, Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvii.,
1867, pl. PAE ie 15b ; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1871,
Dp. 100.
M 26 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
260—astula Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 691, pl.
52, f. 42, 43.
261—brazieri Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1869, pl. 55,
beole:
_ 262—inequivalvis Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1867,
pl.26, £7 13oe
263—semitorta Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1867, pl.
Oot ay Die
264—tenuilirata Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1867, pl.
39, f. 219; Smith, Chall. Zool., xtii., 1885, p. 106.
265—unifasciata Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1867, pl.
29, f. 156; Lynge, D. Kgl. Danske Vidensk. Setsk.
Skrifter, vi., 1909, p. 202.
From Sydney, Tellina perna was erroneously reported
by Brazier (P.L.8.N.S.W., 1., 1878, p. 142), and T. tica-
onica by Angas (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 919).
STRIGILLA, Turton, Dithyr. Brit., 1822, p. 117.
266—euronia Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii, 1908, p.
473, pl. 9, f. 22, 23.
MACOMA, Leach, Ross Voyage, Append. ii., 1819, p. bxii.
Dp.
267—lilium Hanley, Tellina, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1844, p.
147, & Thes. Conch., i1., 1846, p. 303, pl. 58, f.
85; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 919.
268—tortuosa Sowerby, Tellina, Conch. Icon., xvii.,.
1867, pl. 39, f. 224.
269—tristis Deshayes, Tellina, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1854
(1855), p. 361; ? Thes. Conch., 1., 1846, pl. 64, f.
299, as of deltoidalis. |
270—semifossilis Sowerby, Tellina, Conch. Icon., xvii.,
1867, pl. 41, f. 287; ? M. rudis, Bertin, 18738 = M.
mariz, Ten. Woods, 1875, — T. modesta, Tate,
1891.
271—-semiplana Sowerby, Tellina, Conch. Iecon., xvii.,
1867, pl. 39, f. 222; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,.
p. 919:
From New South Wales, Angas (Proe. Zool. Soe., 1867,
918) has erroneously recorded Tellina deltoidalis
Lamarck.
ARCOPAGIA, Brown, Illustr. Conch. Great Brit., 1827,
Hxplam. pl) 16;)4.-8:
272striatula Lamarck, Tellina, An. s. vert., v., 1818,.
p. 529; Hanley, Thes. Conch., i., 1846, p. 255,
pl. 61, f. 175; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., iv., 1886,
p. 430.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 27
273—subelliptica Sowerby, Tellina, Conch. Icon., xvii,
1867, pl. 39, f. 220; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
p. 918. ,
PSEUDARCOPAGIA, Bertin, Nouv. Arch. Museum (2),
i., 1878, p. 264. ©
274—-botanica Hedley, n. sp. Tellina decussata Angas
(net Lamarck), Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 191.
Smaller but proportionately longer, more com-
pressed and more delicately sculptured than P.
victories Gatliff and Gabriel.
Tellina suleata (— Arcopagia remies, Linn.) was er-
roneously reported by Lamarck (An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 029) from Port Jackson.
Family SEMELID.
THEORA, Adams, Ann. Nat. Hist., xiii., 1864, p. 206.
275—lata Hinds, Nera, Proce. Zool. Soe., 18438, p. 79s
Lamy, Journ. de Gonch., desc, ORs (1914), p 5 ue
T. fragilis Hedley, P.LS.NS.W., XXVL, 1902, p
706, pl. 34, f. 4, 5, 6.
276—pura Angas, Newra, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 20,
pkiw, £30; Lamy, Jdurn. de Conch., |xi., 1914,
p. 263.
ABRA, Lamarck, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p. 492.
277—elliptica Sowerby, Tellina, Conch. Icon., xvii.,
1867, pl. 39, f. 223;-Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884,
pee ple. Fis C.
278—simplex Sowerby, Tellina, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1867,
pl. 41, f. 240; Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884,
De 99:
Angas erred in recording (Proce. oor SOGes LRT 70.
191), Semele scabra Hanley from Sydney.
Family GARIDZ.
GARI, Schumacher, Essai Nouv. Syst., 1817, p. 44.
279—anomala Deshayes, Psammobia, Proce. Zool. Soce.,
1854 (1855), p. 820; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x.,
ap te neo smith Chall) Zool.,*ximi., 1885,
Doo |
280—lessoni Blainville, Psammobia, Dict. Se. Nat.,
‘xlii., 1826, p. 480; Reeve, Conch. Ieon., x., 1856,
ply 2%. Se tbledley, Pilns.N.SiW., xxix., , 1904,
p. 196.
281—livida Lamarck, Psammobia, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 515; Dautzenberg & Fischer, Journ. de Conch,,
lxi., 1914, p. 224: pl. 7, £. 4, 5)-65 °° Zomaiee
Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 5, f. 9; Angas, Proe.
Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 917; = radiata, Phillipi, 1845,
— tellineformis, Reeve, 1857; — puella, Des-
hayes, 1854.
282—modesta Deshayes, Psammobia, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1854 (1855), p. 319; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x.,
1857, pl. 1, f. 3; Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii, 1885,
Dav Go:
283—_togata Deshayes, Psammobia, Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1854 (1855), p. 318; Reeve, Conch. Icon., -x.,
1856, pl. 2, f. 14; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1867,
Jon. whee
Psammobia marmorea and palmula were erroneously
recorded (Proc. Zool. Soec., 1854, pp. 324, 325) by Des-
hayes as from Sydney. ,
SOLETELLINA, Blainville, Dict. Sci. Nat., xxxii., 1824,
p. 300.
284—hbiradiata Wood, General Conch., 1815, p. 135, pl.
33, f. 1; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 918.
285—florida Gould, Proe. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., ii.,
1850, p. 254, & U.S. Expl. Exped., Moll., xii., 1852,
p. 403, f. 513; S. donacioides Reeve, Conch. Icon.,
xe Sie splice ale
ASAPHIS, Modeer, K. Vet. Ac. Nya Handl., xiv., 1793,
De Ii6.3
286—contraria Deshayes, Psammobia, Cat. Moll. Re-
union, 1863,'p. 11, pl. 1, £: 20, 28-5 soiediew
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1901, p. 731, pl. 48, f. 4-8.
Family DONACIDA.
DONAX, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 682.
287—brazieri Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1891, p. 491, pl.
40, f. 10.
288—deltoides Lamarck, An. 8S. Vert., v., 1818, p. 547;
Reeve, Conch. Icon., viii., 1854, pl. 1, f. 4; Hedley,
Journ. Roy. Soe. N.S. Wales, xlix., 1915, p. 38,
f. 5; = D. epidermia, Lamarck, 1818.
289—faba Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xiii, 1791, p. 3264;
Roemer, Conch. Cab., x., 1869, p. 88, pl. 2, f.
12-17; D. radians, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soce., 1877,
1p. 291,
M 28 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8. WALES.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 29
290—veruinus Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvill., 19138, p.
274, for nitida Reeve, Conch. Icon., vili., 1854,
pl. 6, f. 84, not nitida Lamk., 1806.
From Port Stephens, Bertin has erroneously recorded
(Nouv. Archiv. Mus. (2), iv., 1881, p. 82) Donax denti-
eulatus. See also Lamy, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1914,
p. 338.
Family SOLENID4.
SOLEN Linné Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 672.
291—-sloanii Hanley, Cat. Recent Shells, 1842, p. 12, pl.
tithes smith, “Chall. Zool, xii) 88a. pi 78:
CULTELLUS, Schumacher, Essai Nouv. Syst., 1817, p. 48.
292—-cultellus Linné, Solen, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 673;
Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xix., 1874, pl. 6, f. 23; C.
australis, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 912.
Family MACTRIDA.
MACTRA, Linne Syst. Nat., xii., 1767, p. 1125.
293—contraria Reeve, Conch. Icon., viii., 1854, pl. 17,
f. 86; Deshayes, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1854 (1855),
p. 62; Smith, Proce. Malac. Soe., xi., 1914, p. 141.
294—eximia Reeve (as of Deshayes, June, 1854), Conch.
feom:, viu., April; 1854. pl) 8, f. 3h
295—jacksoniensis Smith, Chall. Zool., xiii., 1885, p. 62,
pkao, tx 9. | ;
296—ovalina Lamarck, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p. 477;
Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 3, f. 7; Smith, Proe.
Malac. Soc., xi., 1914, p. 145.
297—parkesiana Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvii. 1902, p.
See eh ik. OO,
298—pusilla Adams, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1855, p. 226;
Smit semua Zool, xit,, 1885, p..60,. pl. 5, £. 8.
Angas erroneously recorded (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
-916) Trigonella luzonica from Botany Bay.
SPISULA, Gray, Mag. Nat. Hist., i., 1837, p. 372.
299—trigonella Lamarck, Mactra, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 479; Lamy, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1914, p. 245;
M. parva, Smith, Proc. Malae. Soc., xi., 1914, p.
146.
ANATINA Schumacher, Essai, Nouv. Syst., 1817, p. 42.
300—meridionalis Tate, Raeta, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A,
xi, 1889) p. 61, pl. 11, f. 3; Hedley, PLSN.SW.,
xy, L900, p. 497, pl. 25; f. 5-9,
bs "
M 30 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
LUTRARIA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. Nat. Hist., Paris, 1799,
p. 85.
301—rhynchena Jonas, Zeit. f. malak., i., 1844, p. 34;
Reeve, Conch. Icon., viil., 1854, pl. 3, £. 16; L.
dissimilis, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 917.
STANDELLA, Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (2), xi., 1853,
p. 42.
aera. Gmelin, Mactra, Syst. Nat., xiii., 1791,
3261; M. egyptica Reeve, Conch. Teon., Viil.,
1854, vl. 20,7 ti LL.
ZENATIA, Gray, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (2), xi., 1853;
p. 43.
303—victorie Pritchard & Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
xvi., 1903, p. 92, pl. 15, f. 8; Hedley, P.LAS.N.S.W.,
xxix., 1904, p. 197.
From Botany Bay, Angas (Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p.
917) erroneously reported Zenatia acinaces.
Family AMPHIDESMATIDA.
AMPHIDESMA, Lamarck, An. s. vert., v., 1818, p. 489.
304—angusta Reeve, Mesodesma, Conch. Icon., viii,
1854, pl. 1, f. 3; M. elongata, Deshayes, Proce.
Zool. Soc., 1854 (1855), p. 3837; Hedley,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 692, pl. 46, f. 4.
305—cuneata Lamarck, Crassatella, An. s. vert., V.,
1818, p. 843; M. obtusa, Crosse & Fischer, Journ.
de Conch., xiii., 1865, p. 428, pl. 11, f. 4; Angas,
Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 920; Lamy, Journ. de
Coneh., 1xii., 1914, p. 31, pl 1, ieee:
Brazier has noted (Journ. of Conch., 11., 1879, p. 198)
that Mesodesma nitida does not occur at Sydney, as
stated by Deshayes (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1854, p. 338).
Schmeltz has erroneously ane el (Cat. Mus. Godeff.,
v., 1874, p. 166) Paphia striata from Sydney. ~
ERVILIA, Turton, Conch. Ins. Brit., 1822, p. 56.
306—bisculpta Gould, Proc. Boston Nat. Hist., viii.,
1861, p. 28; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxi., 1906, \
p. 479, pl. 36, f. 8; E. australis, Angas, Proc
Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 178, pla 26ers :
Family MY ACID.
CRYPTOMYA, Conrad, Philad. Acad. Nat. Sci., iv., 1848,
Dp. 121.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M. 3l
307—elliptica Adams, Sphenia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1850
(1851), p. 88; Hedley, P.LS.N.S.W., xxxviii.,
1918, p. 275, pl. 17, f. 40-44.
TURQUETIA, Velain, Archiv. Zool. Exper., vi., 1877, p.
- 134. . 7
308—intesra Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
364, pl. 66, f. 7-10.
Family CORBULIDA.
CORBULA, Bruguiére, Ency. Meth., 1797, Tabl. vers. pl.
230:
309—smithiana Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., iv., 1879 (1880),
p. 388; C. venusta, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871,
pe20 ply 1 t..29- Co-coxt, Pilsbry,, Proc..Acad.
Nate, och, Ehilad.. 1897, p. 303, ple 9, tf. 1-3.
310—tunicata Hinds, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1843, p. 55;
Reeve, Conch. Icon., ii., 1844, pl. 1, f. 5; Smith,
Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 103.
Corbula nasuta and C. zelandica were erroneously re-
corded from Sydney by Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
p13.
Family SAXICAVIDA.
SAXICAVA, Bellevue, Journ. Phys., liv., 1802, p. 5.
311—australis Lamarck, Corbula, An. s. vert., v., 1818,
p. 495; Blainville, Man. Malac., 1827, pl. 78, f. 3;
Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 913.
31la—australis angasii Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1865,
p. 648; Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xx., 1875, pl. 2,
ar Y lig
PANOPE, Menard, Mem. Nouv. Genre Coq. Biv., 1807,
p. 31.
312—australis Sowerby, Genera Shells, 1833, pl. 40,
f.. N2.
313 —angusta Hedley, P.LS.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
705, pl. 80, f. 40-42.
Family PHOLADIDA.
PHOLAS, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 669.
314—australasie Sowerby, Thes. Conch., ii., 1849, p.
488, pl. 106, f. 73; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii.,
1908, p. 473.
315—obturamentum Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., ii., 1893,
p. 99, pl. 14, f. 1-3.
Angas erroneously records (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p.
99) Barnea similis from Sydney Harbour.
M 32 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
MARTESIA, Blainville, Man. Malac., 1825, p. 632.
316—striata Linné Pholas, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 669;
Sowerby, Thés. Conch., ii., 1849, p. 494, pl. 104,
f. 40-42; Hedley, Rep. Austr. Assoc., viii., 1901,
p. 249.
JOUANNETIA, Desmoulins, Bull. Linn. Soe. Bordeaux,
l1., 1828, p. 244.
317—cumingii Sowerby, Triumphalia, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
1849 (1850), p. 161; Chenu, Man. Coneh., ii,
1862, p. 7, f. 38; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe, form
jos 10
Family TEREDIDZ.
NAUSITORIA, Wright, Trans. Linn. Soc., xxiy., 1864,
p. 452.
318—edax Hedley, Teredo, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894,
p. 501, pl. 32; T. bruguiéri (in part) Gatliff &
Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxviii, 1915, p. -
118. |
319—saulii Wright, Trans. Linn. Soc., xxv., 1866, p.
567, a 65, f. 9-15; Hedley, PLSNS.W, x Xa,
1898, _ 94, f. 7- 9,
Class CEPHALOPODA. eee
Order TETRABRANCHIATA.
Stranded Nautilus pompilius have been recorded from
Coff’s Harbour by Angas,—Proe. Zool. Soe., 1877, p.
178; from the Bellinger River and Coogee by Brazier,
P.L.S.N.S.W., ii., 1877, p. 148; from Curl Curl Lagoon by
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xvii., 1894, p. 239; and from Two-
fold Bay by Cox, Nautilus, xi., 1897, p. 48.
Stranded Nautilus macromphalus were recorded from
Coff’s Harbour by Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 178.
Order DIBRANCHIATA.
Family SPIRULIDA.
SPIRULA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H., Paris, 1799, p. 80.
320—spirula Linné, Nautilus, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p.
710; Huxley & Pelseneer, Chall. Zool., Pt.
Ixxxill., 1895, p. 1-32, pl. 1-6; S. prototypos, Peron
Voy. Terr. Aust., Atlas 1804, pl. xxx., fig. 4.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY, M 33
‘ Family SEPITDA.
‘SEPIA, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 658.
321—apama Gray, Cat. Cephalod., 1849, p. 103; McCoy,
Prod. Zool. Vict., Dec. xix., 1888, pl. 188-190.
322—braggi Verco, Trans. Roy. Soe. §.A., xxxi., 1907,
p. 213, pl. 27, f. 6; Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vii.,
1908, p. 134; Chapman, Vict. Nat., xxix., 1912,
Dp, 26, Pla:
323—cultrata Hoyle, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), xvi.,
1885, p. 198, and Chall. Zool., xvi., 1887, p. 133,
pl 20.-
324—mestus Gray, Cat. Cephalop., 1849, p. 108; Hoyle,
Chall. Zool., xvi., 1887, p. 123, text fig.
227 angon Gray, Cat. Cephalop., 1849, p. 104; ; Hoyle,
Chall. Zool., xvi., 1887, p. 21.
Family LOLIGINID. |
SEPIOTEUTHIS, Blainville, Diet, Se. Nat., ‘XXxiL, 1824,
Dy UTD;
326—australis Quoy & Gaimard, Zool. Astrolabe, ii.,
teas, p.ehe play hon!
LOLIGO, Schneider, Samml. Vern. Abth., 1784, p. 110..
327—australis Gray, Cat. Cephalop., 1849, p. 71; Hoyle,
Chall. Zool., xvi., 1887, p. 220.
Family SEPIADARIID &.
'SEPIOLOIDEA, D’Orbigny, Hist. Ceph., 1839, p. 240.
- 328—lineolata Quoy, & Gaimard, Sepiola, Zool. Astro-
labe, i1., 1833, p. 82, pl. 5, £78, 13,”
| Family SEPIOLID 2.
EUPRYMNA, Steenstrup, Overs. K. Dansk. Vid. Selsk.
Fohr., 1887, p. 66.
329--stenodactyla. Grant, Sepiola, ne, Zool. Soe., 1.,
1833, p. 84, pl. 11. : Joubin, Mem. Soe. Zool. France,
xy 1902, wo, ¢. 8,9; Hoyle Bull. Mus. Comp.
Aue xint., 1904, p. 24, f.-B, GC, D.
fushigi? OMMAS TREPHID AH,
-DOSIDICUS, Steenstrup, Overs. K. Dansk. Vid. Selsk.
Fohr., Sars pel. bi
3
M 34 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
330—gigas D’Orbigny, Ommastrephes, Voy. Amer.
Merid., 1835, p. 50, pl. 4; Berry, Bull. Bureau
Fish. U.S.A., xxx., 1912, p. 301, pl. 48, 49.
NOTODARUS, Pfeffer, Cephalop. Plankton Exped. Hum-
boldt-Stift, 1912, p. 228.
331—gouldi McCoy, Ommastrephes, Prod. Zool. Vict.,
1880, p. 227, pls. 169-170; Berry, Endeavour Bio-
logical Results (in the press).
Family ONYCHOTEUTHID.
ONYCHOTEUTHIS, Lichtenstein, Isis, 1818, p. 1591.
332—rutilus Gould, Am. Expl. Exped., Moll., xi., 1852,
p. 482%9pl. 50,4) 95.
GALITEUTHIS, Joubin, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool. (8), vi.,
1898, p. 279. :
333—suhmii Hoyle, Taonius, Narr. Chall. Exped., 1885,
p. 472, f. 173-4; Chun, Wiss. Erg. Valdivia,
Xvili., Cephalopoda, 1910, p. 382, pl. lix.
Family POLYPODID.
POLYPUS, Schneider, Samml. verm. Ah., 1784, p. 116.
334—australis Hoyle, Octopus, Chall. Zool., xvi., 1886,
p. 88, pl. 3, f. 45; Massy, Cephalopoda Terra-
Nova Exped., 1916, p. 149, £ 9, 10.
335—Ccyaneus Gray, Octopus, Cat. Cephalop, 1849, p.
15; Hoyle, Chall. Zool., xvi., 1886, p. 12.
336—duplex Hoyle, Octopus, Chall. Zool., xvi., 1886,
p. 90, pl. 7; °£. %.
337—maculosus Hoyle, Octopus, Proc. Roy. Phys. Soe.
Edinb., vii., 1883, p. 319, pl. 6; Smith, Alert
Zool., 1884, p. 36, pl. 4, f. C.; Saville Kent, Great
Barrier Reef, 1893, p. 362, pl. 13, f. 3; O. pictus,
Brock (not Verrill), Zeit. wiss. Zool. xxxvi.,
1882, p. 603, pl. 37, f. 3.
338—robustus Brock, Octopus, Nachr. Ges. Gotting,
1887, p. 317.
339—tetricus Gould, Octopus, Am. Expl. Exped., xi.,
1852, Moll., p. 474, pl. 47, f. 588; O. boseii
var. pallida Hoyle, Chall. Zool., xvi., 1886, p. 81,
pi, 2:
4
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 35
Family ARGONAUTIDA.
ARGONAUTA, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 708.
’
340—grandiformis Perry, Conchology, 1811, pl. 42, f.
4; Dall, Bull Mus. Comp. Zool., xliii., 1906, p. 227.
341—nodosa Solander, Portland Cat. 1786, p. 96 for
Rumphius Rareit, Amb., pl. xviii., f. 1; Prince,
P.L.S.N.S.W., x., 1886, p. 448.
Argonauta crassicosta (=A. hians Solander, fide Dall,
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xliii., 1906, p. 229), Blainville,
Dict. Sei. Nat., xlii., 1826, p. 213, is apparently recorded
from Port Jackson by Oken, Isis, No. 9, 1823, p. 459, pl.
16, figs. 1-2.
Class AMPHINEURA. (342 - 372).
Order POLYPLACOPHORA.
Family LEPIDOPLEURIDA.
LEPIDOPLEURUS, Risso, Hist. Nat. Europe merid., iv
1826, p. 267.
gs rer Hedley & Hull, Rec. Austr. ‘Mus., vile, £909;
260 spl. 113) S.A! 2.
See Pilsbry, Nautilus, vii., 1894, p. 139.
343—srayi Adams & Angas, Microplax, Proce. Zool.
Soc., 1864, p. 194, 1865, pl. 11, f. 16; Pilsbry,
Man. Conch., xiv., p.'21, pl. .6, £: 9, 10,.11.
Family ISCHNOCHITONIDAs.
CALLOCHITON, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 126.
344—platessa Gould, Chiton, Proc. Boston. Soe. Nat.
Hist., ii, 1846, p. 143, and U.S. Expl. Exped.,
li., 1852, p. 320, pl. 28, f. 434.
From N.S. Wales, Reeve has erroneously recorded
(Conch. Tcon., iv., 1847, ‘Chiton, pl. 22, f. 148) a Peruvian
species Chiton dieffenbachii.
ISCHNOCHITON, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 126.
345—australis Sowerby, Chiton, Mag. Nat. Hist., 1v.,
1840, p. 290; Reeve Conch. Icon., iv., 1847, pl. 2,
f. 10.
M 36 MARINE FAUNA, ‘N. 8S. WALES.
346—crispus Reeve, Chiton, Conch. Icon., iv., 1847, pl.
19, £120; Pilsbry, Proe. Ac. Nat. Sei. ‘Philadel,
1894, Dp. 72.
347—fruticosus Gould, Chiton, Proc. Boston Soe. Nat.
Hist.,: 1846, p. 142, and USS. Expl. Exped.,
Kil, 1859, Moll., Dp. 319, pl. 28, f. 428.
348—lentiginosus Sowerby, Chiton, Mag. Nat. Hist.,
iv., 1840, p. 293; Reeve. Conch. Icon., iv., 1847,
pl. 24, f. 165; Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.,
Philadel., 1894, p. 73.
349—proteus Reeve, Chiton, Conch. Icon., iv., 1847, pl.
8, f. 11; C. divergens, Reeve, op. cit. pl. 18, f. 44.
350—smaragdinus Angas, Lophyrus, Proe. Zool. Soe., —
1867, p. 115, pl. 13, f. 28; var. picturatus, Pilsbry,
Proc. Ac. Nat. Sei., Philad., 1894, p. 72.
Angas has erroneously recorded (Proe. Zool. Soce.,
1867, p. 222) Ischnochiton ustulatus, from Watson’s Bay.
CALLISTOCHITON, Dall, U.S. Nat. Museum, 1881 (1882),
283.
- abi antiqnite Reeve, Chiton, Conch. Icon., iv., 1847,
Di 25, ct U6o),
Family MOPALIIDJ.
PLAXIPHORA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, pp. 65 & 169.
302—albida, Blainville, Chiton, Dict. Sci. Nat., xxxi.,
1825, p. 547; Iredale, P. Malac. Soe., ix., p. 98;
PER petholata, ’ Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 224.
353—paeteliana Thiele, Zool. Chun., 1909, heft. 56, p.
26, pls (33/4) 34-36.
Iredale indicates (P. Malac. Soc., ix., 1910, p. 93) that
Plaxiphora egregia was erroneously credited to New-
eastle, N.S. Wales, by H. Adams, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1866,
p. “445, whereas it is a native of New Zealand.
Family CRYPTOCONCHID A,
ACANTHOCHITONA, Gray, London Medical Repository,
xVe 182135, 234, |
354—costata Adams & Angas, Acanthochites, Proce.
Zool. Soe., 1864, p. 194; Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert,
| 1884, p. 83, pl. 6, f. F.
355—coxi Pilsbry, Acanthochites, Prot sAvad: Philad..,
1894, p. 80, pl. 3, f. 21, 26, pl. 4, f. 34.
_MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. | | M 37
_ 356—granostriata Pilsbry, Acanthochites, Proc. Acad.
Philad., 1894, p. 81, pl. 2, f. 1-6, pl. 4, f. 37.
357—maughani Torr & Ashby, Acanthochites, Trans.
hoy s0cy 6 As. xxi. 1898, qo. 208s prety i 54
Hedley & Hull, Ree. Austr. Mus., vii., 1909, p.
265, pl. 74, f. 24-27.
358—retrojecta Pilsbry, Acanthochites, Proc. Acad.
Philad., 1894, p. 78, pl. 2, f. 12-14.
359—variabilis Adams & Angas, Hanleya, Proc. Zool.
Soe., 1864, p. 194; Hedley & Hull, Rec. Austr.
Mus., vii., 1909, p. 266; Thiele, Zoologia, xxi1,
1910, p. 72, pl. 7, £. 9-10.
360—wilsoni Sykes, Acanthochites, Proc. Malac. Soc.,
i., 1896, p. 92, pl. 6, f. 2; Hedley & Hull, Ree.
Austr. Mus., vii., 1909, p. 265; Torr, Trans. Roy.
boc. S.A., xxxvi., 1912, p. 162.
Iredale (Proc. Malac. Soc., ix., 1910, p. 101) eliminated
Acanthochites carinatus from the Australian fauna as
being identical with the European A. discrepans.
From Watson’s Bay, Angas (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
224) has incorrectly cited Acanthocites scutiger.
CRYPTOPLAX, Blainville, Dict. Sci. Nat., xii., 1818, p.
124. |
361—striatus Lamarck, Chitonellus, An. s. vert., vi,
1819, p. 317; Pilsbry, Proce. Malac. Soce., iv., 1901,
Boas Ol. Lob, 20-23. |
Family CHITONIDA.
RHYSSOPLAX, Thiele, Das Gebiss Schnecken, ii., 1893,
p. 368. | |
362—coxi Pilsbry, Chiton, Proc. Acad. Philad., 1894,
p. 85; Hedley & Hull, Rec. Austr. Mus., vii., 1909,
p. 262, pl. 73, f. 83-5; C. bellulus Thiele, Zoologica,
heft. 56, 1910, p. 93, pl. 10, f. 5-8.
363—jugosus Gould, Chiton, Proce. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., 11., 1846, p. 142, and Am. Expl. Exped.,
‘xu,.1852, Moll., -p. 317, pl. 28,f: 430.
364—limans Sykes, Chiton, Proce. Malac. Soce., ii., 1896,
p. 93; C. muricatus, Adams, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1852 (1854), p, 91, pl. 16, f. 6.
365—translucens Hedley & Hull, Ree. Austr. Mus., vii.,
1909, p. 263, pl. 74, f. 14-18.
M 38 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
-366—vauclusensis Hedley & Hull, op. cit., p. 261, pl.
74, f. 19-23.
SYPHAROCHITON, Thiele, Geb iss Schnecken, ii., 1893,
p. 365.
_367—pellis-serpentis Quoy & Gaimard, Chiton, Zool.
Astrolabe, iii., 1835, p. 381, pl. 74, f. 17-22 .
Pilsbry, Proe. Acad. Philad., 1894, p. 85.
TONICIA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, pp. 65, 168.
368—carpenteri Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 116,
pl. 13,1730:
Tapparone Canefri has erroneously recorded (Zool.
Magenta, 1873, p. 181) Acanthopleura peruviana as from
Sydney.
LIOLOPHURA, Pilsbry, Nautilus, vi., 1903, p. 105.
_ 369—gaimardi Blainville, Chiton, Dict. Sci. Nat., xxxvi.,
1825, p. 546; Nierstrasse, Notes Leyden Museum,
xxv, 1905; D. 154, pl. 10, f. 20; 21.
LORICA, H. & A. Adams, Ann. Nat. Hist. (2), ix., 1852,
p. 355.
370—volvox Reeve, Chiton, Conch. Icon., iv., 1847, pl.
Vi... ous Hull, P.LS.NS.W., XXXV., 1910, D. 655,
pl. 1h, es
LORICELLA, Pilsbry, Man. Conch. xvi., 1903, p. 238.
371—angasi H. Adams, Lorica, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1864,
p. 198; Thiele, Zoologica, heft. 56, 1910, p. 88,
pl. 9, f. 22-25.
ONITHOCHITON, Gray, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1847, pp. 65,
169. |
372—quercinus Gould, Chiton, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., i1., 1846, p. 142, and U.S. Expl. Exped.,
xil., 1852, Moll., p. 312, pl. 28, f. 487; Iredale,
Proe. Malac. Soc., ix., 1910, p. 104.
Dr. J. Thiele has described (Zool. Chun, 1909, heft. 56,
p. 99, pl. 10, f. 60-61) Onithochiton scholvini as from New
South Wales, but really it belongs to West Australia. A
Pitcairn Island species, Onithochiton lyellii, has been er-
roneously quoted by Nierstrasse (Notes from Leyden
Museum, xxv., 1905, p. 156) as from Sydney.
_ MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 39
Class GASTEROPODA. (878 - 1201).
Order DIOTOCARDIA. (373 — 488)
Family PLEUROTOMARITID At.
SCISSURELLA, D’Orbigny, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat., Paris,
1823, p. 340.
373—australis Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
329, f. 63.
Scissurella crispata has been ab eos recorded from
N.S. Wales by Smith (Proc. Malac. Soe., 1, 1894, p. 60).
SCHISMOPE, Jeffreys, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, XViL., 1856,
p. 321.
374—atkinsoni Ten. Woods, Scissurella, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1876 (1877), p. 149; S. carinata, Watson,
Gnas Zools xv. 1886, p. 119, pl.’ 8, f. 6 (net
S. ecarinata, A. Adams, 1862). |
375—beddomei Petterd, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884, p.
139; Tate & May, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901, p.
407, pl. 24, f. 24.
Family FISSURELLIDA.
SCUTUS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii., 1810, p. 58.
376—antipodes Montfort, op. cit., Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
MP Gai: rhe, Dik 4h te hy Oye.
TUGALIA, Gray (emend.), Dieffenbach’s New Zealand,
ii., 1843, p. 240.
377—parmophoidea, Quoy & Gaimard, Emarginula,
Zool. Astrolabe, ii., 1834, p.. 325, pl..68, f. 15, 16;
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 697, pl.- 52,
RAG. :
HEMITOMA, Swainson, Malac., 1840, p. 356.
378—aspera Gould, Emarginula, Proce. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., i, 1846, p. 154; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
wee, lo 108, pl. 11, f,.4, and xh. LO,
p. 699, pl. 46, f. 6; E. radiata, Gould, op. cit., vii.,
Sod, p14,
EMARGINULA, Lamarck, Syst. An. s. vert., 1801, p. 69.
379—bajula Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 1913, p.
276, for EK. dilecta Hedley (not Adams), op. cit.,
Meee OK DO pl) Xxx tO, as.
M 40 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8. WALES.
380—candida Adams, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1851 (1852), p
85; Thes. Conch., iii., 1863, p. 213, pl. 246, f. 45,
46; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 189.
381—superba Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1906; p. 216, pl. 37, £.-7, 8.
MEGATEBENNUS, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xii., 1890,
: p. 182. ;
382—concatenatus Crosse & Fischer, Fissurella, Journ.
de Conch., xii., 1864, p. 348, and xili., 1865, p.
41, pl. 3, f. 1-3; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867,
p. 218.
383—javanicensis Lamarck, Fissurella, An., s. vert.,
vi., 1822, p. 14; Delessert, Recueil, 1841, pl. 24,
f. 8; F. seutella Angas, Proc. Zool, Soc., 1867,
p, 219)
LUCAPINELLA, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xii., 1890, p. 179.
384—nigrita Sowerby, Fissurella, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1834 (1835), p. 127; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli.,
1917, p. 706, pl. 47, f. 10; Not F. nigrita, Jay,
1839.
DIODORA, Gray, London Medical Repository, xv., 1821,
p. 383.
-385—lineata Sowerby, Fissurella, Conch. Tll., 1835,
7, pl. 78, f. 68; Hedley, P.LS.NS.W., XXV., 1900,
p: 95, pl. Be. vi,
386—watsoni Brazier, Glyphis, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894,
p. 177, pl. 14, £. 15.
ZEIDORA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), v., 1860, p.
301.
387—loddere Tate & May, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.A., xxiv.,
1900, p. 101; Z. tasmanica Hedley, P.L.S.N.S. W.,
xxv., 1900, p. 93, text fig.
PUNCTURELLA, Lowe, Zool. Journ., iii, 1827, p. 77.
388—demissa Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., v., 1904, p.
93, f. 19, and vi:, 1907, p. 289, pl. 54, £. 3-5.
389—harrissoni Beddome, Cemori, Proce. Roy. Soc. :
Tasm., 1882 (1883), p. 168; P. henniana, Bra- |
zier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p. 177, pl. 14, f. 14. |
390—kesteveni Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,- xxv., 1900, p.
499, pl. 25, f. 15-17.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 41
Family HALIOTIDA.
HALIOTIS, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 779.
391—brazieri, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869, p. 45, pl.
2a ae ls
392—cocoradiatum Reeve, Conch. Icon., iii., 1846, pl.
18, f. 46; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867, a 218.
393—hargravesi, Cox, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1869, . 49, pl.
26, f. 4; Hedley, PAR SINGS Gece 1906, p. 520.
394—nzevosum Martyn, Univ. Conch., 1784, vl. 63 ;
Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 218.
In error, Brazier has recorded (P.L.S.N.S8.W., ii., 1877,
142, p. 370), Haliotis parva from Sydney.
Family STOMATID As.
STOMATELLA, Lamarck, An. S. vert., vi., 1819, p. 209.
395—imbricata Lamarck, Encycl. Meth., 1816, p. 10,
pl. 450, f. 2 and An: s. vert., vi, 1819, p..209;
Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 218.
GENA, Gray, Proc. Zool, Soc., 1847, p. 146.
396—strigosa Adams, Proce. Zool, Soc., 1850, p. 37;
Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xii., 1890, p. 39, pl. 35,
f. 31, 32; Hedley, P.LS.N.S.W, xlig, LOL; yp:
03, pl. 47, fi-kk.
Angas incorrectly referred (Proce. Zool. Soc. 1865, p.
183), Gena auricula, Lamarck to Port Jackson.
ROYA, Iredale, Proce. Malae. Soe., x., 1912, p. 218.
397-nutata Hedley, Capulus, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii.,
£3, p- 467, pl. 9, t. 15; 16.
Family TROCHIDA.
CLANCULUS, Méntfort, Conch. Syst., i1., 1810, p. 190.
398—albugo Watson, Trochus, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886,
Dato, pls.6,1. 9:
399—aloysii Ten. Woods, Proce. Zool. Soc., Tasm., 1875,
p. 155; Pilsbry Man. Coneh.,’ xi:.; 1889; p. 59, pl:
14, f. 20-23; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917,
p. (00.
400—clangulus Wood, Trochus, Index Test. suppl.,
1828, pl. 5, f. 31; Brazier, Journ. of Conch., vi.,
1889, p. 74.
.
M 42 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8. WALES.
401—floridus Philippi, Trochus, Zeit. Malak., vi., 1849,
p. 156 and Conch. Cab., n.s., ii., 1851, p. 243, pl.
36, f., 15; C. gibbosus, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soce.,
1867, p. 215. | |
402—maugeri Wood, Trochus, Index Test. suppl., 1828,
p. 220, pl. 5, f. 27a; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc.,.
1867, p. 214.
403—omalomphalus Adams, Proe. Zool. Soe. 1851
(1853), p. 162; Fischer, Coq. Viv., 1877, p. 235,
pl. Si fee
404—plebejus Philippi, Trochus, Zeit Malak., viii., 1851,
p. 41 and Conch. Cab. n.s., ii., 1855, p. 326, pl.
46, f. 10; Pritchard & Gatliff, Proce. Roy., Soe.
Viet. xiv.,, 1902. sp.22)
405—undatus Lamarck, Monodonta, Encycl. Meth.
vers, 1816, p. 10, pl. 447, f. 3; Chenu, Man.
.Conch., i., 1859, p. 357, f. 2648; Angas, Proce.
Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 138.
406—undatoides Ten. Woods, Clanculus, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
iv, 18%9,. Yr 22... 4CP 87. itd
Gould (Proe. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., viii, 1861, p.-14),.
erroneously assigned Clanculus jucundus to Sydney.
Angas (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 214), erroneously
cited C. clanguloides from Watson’s Bay.
Tapparone Canefri (Zool. Magenta, 1873, p. 161, pl. 1,.
f. 11), erroneously ascribed C. variegatus to Sydney.
Perry (Arcana, 1810, pl. 2, f. 4), erroneously quoted
Trochus apiaria from Botany Bay. In his Conchology,.
1811, pl. 47, f. 3, this name is changed to T. altus Perry,
which is referred by Fischer to Trochus conus, Gmelin.
EURYTROCHUS, Fischer, Coq. Viv., Trochus, 1880, p.
417.
407—strangei Adams, Monodonta, ,Proe. Zool. Soe.,.
_1851 (1853),.. p. 177; Hedley, P-US.N.S°We
xxxix., 1915, p. 709, pl. 81, f. 45; G. dacostana,.
Preston, Proce. Malac. Soe., viii., 1909, p. 377.
CANTHARIDUS, Montfort, Syst. Conch., 1i., 1810, p. 251.
408—eximius Perry, Bulimus, Conchology, 1811, pl.
30, f. 2; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxui., 1908, p.
465. J
409—fasciatus Menke, Phasianella, Synop. Meth. Moll, :
1830, p. 141; Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xi., 1889, |
p. 135, pl. 40, £. 28-83. |
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 43
410—lineolaris Gould Cantharidus, Proc. Boston. Soc.
Nat. Hist., viii., 1861, p. 14; Bankivia picturata
Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 75, pl. 6, f. C.;.
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908, p. 466.
Angas erroneously reported (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
216), Elenchus leucostigma, Menke from Port Jackson.
MONODONTA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H., Paris, 1799,.
p. 74.
411—concamerata Wood, Trochus, Index Test., suppl.,
1828, pl. 6, f. 35; Trochus striolatus, Quoy &
Gaimard, Zool. Astrolabe, i1., 1834, p. 253, pl.
63, f. 18-22; T. fuligineus, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886,
p. 67, pl. 4, f., dt,
oo Dillwyn, Trochus, Descrip. Cat., 11., 1817,
809 ; Hedley, P.L.S.NS.W., eli, 1917, D. 700,.
f 47, f. 12; — M. zebra, Menke, 1828; ee
taeniatus, Quoy & Gaimard, 1834; = T. multi-
earinata, Chenu, 1859.
412a—obtusa porcata, A. Adams, Labio, Proc. Zool. Soc.
1851 (1853), p. 177; Trochus extenuatus, EST
Coq. Viv., 1878, p. 330, pl. 103, fig. 1.
CANTHARIDELLA, Pilsbry, Manual Conch., xi., 1889,
p. 197. ee
ae Adams & Angas, Gibbula, Proc. Zool.
Soc., 1864, p. 36; Fischer, Coq. Viv., STs” p.
283, ‘pl. 90, 1h ep |
414—1iberiana Crosse, Trochus, Journ. de Conch., xi.
HOUT rook, pl laf. 2 "Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1867, Dp: 215.
CALLIOTROCHUS, Fischer, Coq. Viv., Trochus, 1880,
p. 418.
415—coxi Angas, Gibbula, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1867, p.
115, pl. 13; £264) Fischer; Coq.’ Viv.) 1879, p.
59, pl. 105, 4,3.
416—tasmanicus Petterd, Journ. of Conch., ii, 1879,
p. 103; Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xi. 1889, p. 237,
pl 405. £20:
In error, Angas (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 217), listed
Gibbula sulcosa from New South Wales; vide Hedley,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908, p. 478.
M 44 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES.
FOSSARINA, Adams & Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1863,
p. 423.
417—patula Adams & Angas, op. cit., p. 425, pl. 37,
f. 9,10; F. brazieri Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871,
p. 18, pl. 1, f. 24; Kesteven, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 1902, p. 318.
MONILEA, Swainson, Malacology, 1840, p. 352.
418—angulata Adams, Margarita, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1851 (1853), p. 190; T. prodictus, Fischer, Coq.
Viv., 1879, p. 395, pl. 118, f. 1; M. apicina Gould,
Proce. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., viii, 1861, p. 14:
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxili., 1908, p. 464.
419—lentiginosa Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1851 (1853),
p. 188; Fischer, Coq. Viv., 1878, p. 317, pl. 100,
fy walls |
420—oleacea Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1906, ‘p20, pl Br ak, Ae
421—-vitiliginea, Menke, Trochus, Moll. Nov. Holl. Spm,,.
1843, p. 18; Philippi, Conch. Cab., n.s., 11., 1851,
p. 176, pl. 28, f. 2; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv.,
1886, p. 72.
MINOLIA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), vi., 1860,
p. 336. IHAHTHS
422—arata Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,:- 1903, p.
333, f. 65.
423—bellula Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869, p. 48, pl.
2, f. 11; T. dianthus, Fischer, 1879.
424—philippensis, Watson, Trochus, Jour. Linn. Soc.,
) xv., 1881, p. 92 and Chall. Zool. xv., 1886, p. 73,
, pl. 6, f. 10.
425—pulcherrima Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869, p. 48,
pl Qt, 10.
426—rosulenta, Watson, Solarium, Chall. Zool. xv.,
1886, p. 136, pl. 8, f. 12; Hedley, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 1903, p. 3382.
CALLIOSTOMA, Swainson, Malacology, 1840, p. 351. —
427—armillatum Wood, Trochus, Index, Test, suppl.,
1828, pl. 9, f. 5. Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 188.
428—comptum Adams, Ziziphinus, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
1854 (1855), p. 38; C. purpureocinctum Hedley,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p. 35, text fig., and
xxxvit., 1913s peaZ7o-
\
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. — *M 45
- 429—decoratum Phillipi, Trochus, Zeit. Malac., i
1846, p. 102 and Conch. Cab., ns., 11, 1851, p.
50- plonisijnd. lis dledley, -P:L.8.NiW., xxvi.,
SOD pb:
430—speciosum Adams, Ziziphinus, Proc. Zool. Soc..,
1854 (1855), p. 38; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiv.,
1863, pl. 2, f. 9; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 188, .
ASTELE, Swainson, Proc. Roy. Soc., VD. herds
1854, p. 38.
431—scitulus Adams, Ziziphinus, Proce. Tisiet Soe., 1854
(1855), p. 38; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiv., 1863,.
pl. 6, f. 44; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, D. 215.
SOLARIELLOPSIS, Schepman, Siboga, Exped. Zool.,
xlixa., 1908, pp. 53 and 452. |
432 elyptus Watson, Trochus, Journ. Linn. Soce., xiv.,
Lo, p. 694; Chalk Zool, » xv... 1886, D.
(ay pl. Gant. Be Hedley, P.LS.N.S.W., —
1915, p. 709.
BASILLISA, Watson, Journ. Linn. Soce., xiv., 1879, p. 593.
433—radialis, Tate var. bilix, Hedley, Ree. ‘Austr. Mus.,
vi., 1905, p. 48, f. 13; Verco, Trans. Roy. Soe.
8.A.,- xxx., 1906, p. 218, pl. 10, f. .1-3.. |
EUCHELUS, Philippi, Zeit. Malac., iv., 1847, p. 20.
434—hbaccatus Menke, Monodonta, Moll. Nov. Holl.
Spm., 1843, p. 14; Philippi, Conch. Cab., ns., ii.,
1851, p. 173, pl. 27, f. 18; Angas, Proe. Zool.
PeOOC keOr, Peale. ..
435—scabriusculus Adams & Angas, Proe. Zook Soe.,
1867; p. 215 Fischer, , Cog... Viv.,, 1879, p. 374.
-pl. 114, ies “2, :
TALLORBIS, G. & H. Nevill, Journ. _Asiat. wht. Pngalh
XXxvill., 1869, p. 159.
436—ampullus Tate, Euchelus, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A...
XVil., 1893, p. 197, pl. 1, f. 5; Hedley, PIs
NS.W., >. OD. 1915, p. 709. i
Family TURBINID AS.
PHASIANELLA, Lamarck, Ann. Mus., iv., 1804, i "995,
- 437—perdix Wood, Index Test. satipl 1828, “p: 48, pl.
6, f. 46; E. ventricosa, Angas, Proc, Zool. Soe.,
1867, Dee cl2.
aa
:
‘
™ 46 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
438—rosea Angas, Eutropia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
114, pl. 13, f. 24.
439—virgo ‘Angas, Eutropia, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867, P.
1N5,, play toe
From Port Jackson, Angas has erroneously cited
(Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 213), Phasianella kochii Phi-
lippi.
From are Gould (Proc. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist.,
viil., 1861, 18), mis-reported Elenchus exiguus, vide
Hedley, PLSNSW., Xxxvill., 1918, p. 278.
TURBO, Linné Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p.°761.
440—exquisitus Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 175,
pl. 26, f. 18; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1902,
p: (01 ph gat. “7.
441—militaris Reeve, Conch. Icon., iv., 1848, pl. 9, f.
40; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviil., 1913, p. 282.
441a—petholatus, Linné, Syst. Nat. x., 1758, p. 762;
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 188.
442—-stamineus Martyn, Limax, Univ. Conch., 1784, f.
71; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 127.
443—undulatus Martyn, Limax, Univ. Conch., 1784, f.
29; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xviil., 1893, p. 112.
In error, Angas (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 96) recorded
Turbo imperialis from Watson’s Bay. Brazier has also
recorded (P.L.S.N.8S.W., iv., 1880, p. 429) T. squamosus
from the North Head.
ASTRZEA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt, 1798, p. 79.
444-fimbriata Lamarck, Trochus, An. s. vert., vil,
1822, p. 12; Kesteven, P.US.N.S.W., xxvii,
1902, p. 2, text fig. |
445—tentoriiformis Jonas, Trochus, Zeit. Malak., i1.,
1845, p. 66; Kesteven, P.L.S.N.S.W., XXVil., 1902,
p. 3, fig.; = T. sirius, Gould, 1849,
Family LIOTIIDA.
CCALLOMPHALA, Adams & Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1864, p. 35.
446—lucida Adams & Angas, op. cit,. p. 35; Hedley,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxiv., 1899, p. 434, f. 5.
447—brazieri Angas, Ethalia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p39, Did, £.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 47
TEINOSTOMA, H. & A. Adams, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1853
(i855), p.. 183.
448—-starkeye Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxiv., 1899, p.
438, f. 4.
CIRSONELLA, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1877, p. 38.
449—-weldii Ten. Woods, Cyclostrema, Proc. Zool. Soc.
Tasm. 1876 (Feb. 27, 1877), p. 147; C. australis
Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877 (June 1, 1877), p.
38, pl. 5, f. 16; Tate & May, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi.,
MOOI pe BOT, st. |S:
BROOKULA, Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soc., x., 1912, p. 219.
450—angeli Ten. Woods, Rissoa, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
1876 (1877), p. 153; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv.,
1900, p. 508, pl. 25, f. 14.
451—crebrisculpta Tate, Cyclostrema, Trans. Roy. Soc.
Se, ae. 1899) 9. 219) pli, £5,
LISSOTESTA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1914
(1915), p. 442.
452—charopa Tate, Cyclostrema, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A.,
xxiii. 1899) p. 217, pl 7, £2; Hedley, P.L:S.-
N.S.W., xxv., 1901, p. 722.
453—inscripta Tate, Cyclostrema, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A.,
xxii. 1899, p. 216, pl. 7, f. 3; Hedley, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 1908, p. 337, f. 67.
454—micra Ten. Woods, Cyclostrema, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1876 (1877), p. 147; Tate & May,
EA EESANGS. Vs, XXVIL. BOOT. S07; pl 27, f. Ot.
455—porcellana Tate & May, Cyclostrema, Trans. Roy.
Soc. 8.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 101, and P.L.S.N.S.W.,
xxvl1,, 1901, p. 397, pl. 27, £. 93; Hedley, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 3388.
LIOTELLA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1914 (1915),
p. 422; Pondorbis, Bartsch, 1915.
456—annulata Ten. Woods, Liotia, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1877 (1878), p. 121; Tryon, Man. Conch.,
x., 1888, p. 111, pl. 36, f. 20; Hedley, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 1903, p. 336.
457—capitata Hedley, Liotia, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1907, p. 357, pl. 67, f. 13-14.
458—compacta Petterd, Liotia, Journ. of Conch., iv.,
1884, p. 135; Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A., xxiii.,
1899, p. 225, pl. 6, f. 7; Hedley, Ree. Austr.
Mus., vi., 1905, p. 42.
M 48 MARINE FAUNA, ‘N. 8S. WALES
459—disjuneta Hedley, Liotia, Mem. Austr. -Mus., iv.,
1903, p. 336, f. 66.
460—johnstoni. Beddome, ‘Cyclostrema,- Prov: Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1882 (1883), p. 168; Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe.
S.A., xxiii, 1899, p. 215, pl. 3 f. qT.
461—pulcherrima Brazier, Homalogyra, P.LS.N.S.W.,
xix., 1894, p. 175, pl. 14, f. 13.
LODDERIA, Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A, ‘xxiil,
215.
462—loddere Petterd, Liotia, - Journ.
of Conch., iv.,
1884, p. 135; Hedley, P. L.S.N.S.W., xxiii. 1899,
0. 802, text fig.
463—minima Ten. Woods, Liotia, Trans. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
‘xiv., 1877) (13878)... pase Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
XXV., 1900, p. 94, pl. 3, f. 143!
LIOTIA, Gray, Proce. Zool. Soe
1899, p.
, 1847, p. 145.
464—micans Adams, Cyclostrema, Proc. Zool. Soe
1850, p. 44; L. speciosa Angas, Proe. Zool Soc.,
1871, Dp. 19, lee) hae2o.
465—alazon Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus. vi., 1905, p. 49,
f. 14.
Angas erroneously cited (Proe: -Zool. Soe., 1871, p. 96)
Liotia clathrata, Reeve, from Sydney.
LIOTINA, Fischer, Man. Conch., 1885. p. ga.
466—botanica Hedley, ‘Liotia, P.LS.NS.W.,
1915, p.-710, pl. 81, -f. 46-48.
-467—tasmanica Ten. Woods, Juiotia, Proe. Roy. “Soe.
Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 153; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
xx... 1895, p. 465, text: fig.
- ‘Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
XExIe,,
and: var. scalaris,
1v,, 1903, p. 336. |
CHARISMA, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W,, XKEX. 1915, p. 711.
468—compacta Hedley, op. cit., p.. 712; pl. 81, £. 49.
_ 469—latebrosa Hedley, . Liotia, PLSNS.W, aay
1907, p. 493; pl. 16, f ai
Family ORBITESTELLIDA, |
_ORBITESTELLA, Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soe, penne rb Lih
- A. D..32M.
470 _—bastowi Gatlift, Ciyclostemay Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
xix, 906, p: 3, pl. i, fig: 8210.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY, M 49
Family NERITIDA.
NERITA, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 776.
471—albicilla Linné, op. cit., p. 778; Martens Conch.
Cape eteades S89. 2°25) lee Sei LF
472—melanotragus Smith, Zool. Alert, 1884, p. 69;
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S8.W., xxv., 1900, p. 500, and xli.,
HOI. peetOO. pl 48, f£, 13.14.
473—plicata Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 779; Mar-
roms Comen. Cab, (2), Pt. xis, £889, 63, pl.
10, f. 6-10.
474—polita Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 778; N.
rumphii, Angas, Proe. Zool. Soec., 1877, p. 188;
Martens, op. cit., p. 72, pl. 3, f. 10-26.
THEODOXIS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii., 1810, p. 350.
475—souverbianus Gassies, Neritina, Act. Soe. Linn.
Bordeaux, xxiv. 1861, p. 309, pl. 8, f.-7; N.
pulcherrima, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p.
no ole’ 1S. fae,
Family LEPETID 2.
COCCULINA, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum, 1881, p. 402.
476—tasmanica Pilsbry, Acmea, Nautilus, vill., 1895,
p. 128; C. meridionalis Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 1908, p. 381, fig. 64.
COCCULINELLA, Thiele, Conch. Cab. (2), xi. 1909, p.
ak,
477—coercita Hedley, Coceulina, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi,
TOT. Wa-2O9. pl,_54.f; 1, 2.
LEPETA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1847, p. 168.
478—alta Smith, Proce. Malac. Soc., 1., 1894, p. 59, pl. 7,
1 rel ee
Family PHENACOLEPIDAS.
PHENACOLEPAS, Pilsbry, Nautilus, v., 1891, p: 88.
479—cinnamomea Gould, Patella, Proc. Boston. Soc.
Nat. Hist., v., 1846, p. 151; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
mie Noy p. FOr, pl. 43, tT. 17-19:
Family ACMEID AX.
' PATELLOIDA, Quoy & Gaimard, Zool. Astrolabe, iii.,
1834, p. 349.
M 50 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
480—alticostata Angas, Patella, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1865,
p. 56, pl. 2,.f. 11; Hedley, P.LS.N:S, Wise
904, p. 189; Iredale, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1914, p.
670.
481—-mixta Reeve, Patella, Conch. Icon., viii., 1855, pl.
39, f. 129; Hedley, P.L.S.N.8,.W., xxxdmeeeee
Del koe
482—mufria Hedley, Acmea, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix.,
19L5, p. Tis. plsi he
483—petterdi Ten. Woods, Acmea, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasmania, 1876 (1877), p. 155; Tectura septi-
formis, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 220.
484—subundulata Angas, Acmea, Proc. Zool. Soce., 1865,
p. 155, and 1867, p. 220.
Angas reported (Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 189) in error,
Tectura conoidea from Port Jackson.
Family PATELLIDA.
PATELLA, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 780.
485—perplexa Pilsbry, Aemz#a, Man. Conch., xiii., 1891,
p. 50, pl. 36, f. 69-71; A. octoradiata, Hedley,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 188. Not Patella
octoradiata, Gmelin, 1791.
486—squamifera Reeve, Conch. Icon., vili., 1855, pl. 32,
f. 94; P. aculeata Reeve, op. cit., f. 90, not Pa-
tella aculeata, Gmelin, 1791; Hedley, Austral- .
Antarctic Exped. Mollusea, 1916, p. 43, fig. 2.
Angas erroneously identified (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
221), Patella pentagona Born as from Port Jackson.
CELLANA, Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869, p. 273.
487—illibrata Verco, Helcioniscus, Trans. Roy. Soe.
S.A., xxx., 1906, p. 205, pl. 10, f. 6-14.
488—variegata Blainville, Patella,. Dict. Sci. Nat.,
XxXxviil, 1825, p. 10; Hedley, P-L:S Sioa
.Xxxix., 1915, p. 714; P. tramoserica, Chemnitz.
Conch. Cab.,. xi, 1795, pl. 197: f) 2p ee
Order MONOTOCARDIA (489-1201). —
Suborder TASNIOGLOSSA (489-753).
Family LITTORINIDA#.
MELARHAPHE, Menke, Synopsis Meth. Moll., 1828, p.
45.
MOLLUSCA.—-HEDLEY. VE
489—acutispira Smith, Littorina, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1891,
p. 487, pl. 40, f. 3.
490—infans Smith, Littorina, op. cit., p. 488, pl. 40, f. 4.
491—luteola Quoy & Gaim., Littorina, Zool. Astrolabe,
11., 1833, p. 477, pl. 33, f. 4-7; L. filosa var. sub-
cingulata, Nevill Handlist Moll. India Museum,
1884, p. 149; Hedley, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.,
xine, UGihe, .. 39, t.3.
492—_-undulata Gray, Littorina, Zool. Coll. Beechey’s
. Voy., 1839, p. 140; Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1857,
pets, £ 67; Angas, Proc: Zool: '‘Soc., 1877, p. 187,
493—unifasciata Gray, Littorina, Append. King’s In-
tertrop. Australia, 11., 1826, p. 483; L. mauri-
tiana, Reeve, Conch. Icon., x., 1857, pl. 17, f£. 100.
TECTARIUS, Valenciennes in Humboldt Voy. Zool., 1
1833, pp: 271.
494_pyramidalis Quoy & Gaim., Littorina, Zool. Astro-
labe, 11., 1833, p. 482, pl. 33, f. 12-15; Hedley,
Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlix., 1915, p. 35, f. 4.
BEMBICIUM, Philippi, Zeit. Malak., 1846, p. 129.
495—melanostoma Gmelin, Trochus, Syst. Nat., xiil.,
1791, p. 3581; Crosse, Journ.” de Conch., xit.,
S64) pec 229, ph olds f.: 1,
Family FOSSARIDA.
FOSSARUS, Philippi, Archiv. Naturgsch., i., 1841, p. 42.
496—sydneyensis Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900, Ds
ee Pig 0] eo tes a bs
Family PLANAXIDA.
HINEA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soce., 1847, p. 138.
497—brasiliana Lamarck, Buccinum, An. s. vert., vii.,
1822, p. 272; Kiener, Coq. Viv., 1834, p. 70, pl.
eke ao - kledley iP. SN S.W.:, xxix. 1904.p.
186, — P. mollis, Sowerby, 1828.
Family RISSOIDAL.
HAURAKIA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvi., 1914
(1915), p. 449.
498—descrepans Tate & May, Rissoa, Trans. Roy. Soe.
S.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 99. R. incompleta, Hedley,
Epis NSW... xxxii., 1908; p. 468/-plox.,, £: 36.
M52 ~ MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
499—profundior Hedley, Rissoa, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1907, p. 358, pl. 67, f. 15.
500—filocincta Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1906, 9. 217s plee3 meee
MERELINA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1914 (1915),
D: 449,
501—australie Frauenfeld, Cingula, Novara Exped.
Moll., 1867, p. 14, pl. i, f. 28; R. ochroleuca
Brazier, P.L.S.N.8.W., xix., 1894, p. 174, pl. 14,
f. 12 (mot 11); Kesteven, P-GS.N'S: Wi xa
1906, p. 427.
502—cheilostoma Ten. Woods, Rissoa, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1876 (Feb., 1877), p. 152; A. elegans
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., Aug., 1877, p. 174, pl.
26, f. 15.
503—gracilis Angas, Alvania, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877,
p. 174, pl. 26, f. 16; R. devecta, Tate, Trans. Roy.
oc. S.A. pexi,, W899) pone
504—novarensis Frauenfeld, Alvania, Novara Moll.,
1867, p.-11, pl. 2; f. 16; Hedley, PL: Sas
xox Kd 1907, DD: 494.
505—strangei Brazier, Rissoa, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894,
Dp. 173. pk 14 edal (not 2h).
LIRONOBA, Iredale, Trans. NPA Inst., xlvii., 1914 (1915),
p. 400.
506—agnewi Ten. Woods, Rison, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
L876 (AUST) sap: 152; May, op. .cit., 1902, p7 aes
£10 wiledlexg P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, Dp. 184,
_507—imbrex Hedley, Rissoa, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908,
p. 469, pl. 10, f. 33.
508—pretornatilis Hedley, Alvania, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
viii., 1912, p. 189, pl. 41, f. 16.
ATTENUATA, Hedley, 1918, gen. nov., type Rissoa in-
tegella, Hedley. :
509—integella Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 185,.
Diao 20:
510—minutula Tate & May, Scalaria, Trans. Roy. Soc. |
S.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 95; Hedley, Rec. Austr
Mus., vi., 1905, p. 52, f. 19; Rissoina elongata
nom. nud., Henn, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxi., 1897, p. 500.
ESTEA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii, 1914 (1915),
p. 451. r
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 53
511—bicolor Petterd, Rissoa, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884,
p. 187; Gatliff & Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,
xy Ila pp. 69, pl. BRP Gb:
512—flammea Frauenfeld, Sabanzea, Novara Exped.
Moll., 1867, p. 12, pl. 2, f. 22; Hedley, Endeavour
Zool. results, 1i1., 1911, p. 105.
513—fravenfeldi Frauenfeld, Rissoa, Novara Exped.
Molle IS675 ps 10; ple 2) f 13:
514—incidata Frauenfeld, Sabanza, Novara Exped.
Mol: 21867, ‘pi-12.. ply’ 25 4.1.19;
515—olivacea Frauenfeld, Alvania, Novara Exped.
Nol ASovenp. ddh ol, 2) ce 14. |
516—praeda Hedley, Rissoa, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908,
pyt68. pl. 10; £135:
517—pulvilla Hedley, Rissoa, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906,
. pe o20, ply 32, i. 25:
518—pyramidata Hedley, Scrobs, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
ive 1903) ps BOS, T. VE.
519—salebrosa Frauenfeld, Rissoa, Novara Exped. Moll.
eon. p, Ll pl. 2) 2415.
ANABATHRON, Frauenfeld, Novara Exped. Moll., 1867,
pe 13.
520—contabulatum Frauenfeld, op. cit., p. 13, pl. 2, f.
20a.
520a—contabulatum lene, nom. nov. for Frauenfeld, op.
eit., fig. 20b.
521—emblematicum Hedley, Rissoa, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx.,
KI0G. sp: 526, .plia2, £. 24.
EPIGRUS, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 355.
522—hbadius Petterd, Rissoa, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884,
p. 1388; R. verconis, Tate, T.R.S8.8.A., xx1i., 1899,
p. 233; Id. Gatliff & Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
maven 68, pl, Vill., fig. 3.
523—cylindraceus Ten. Woods, Rissoina, P.L.S8.N.S.W.,
li., 1877 (1878), p. 266; Hedley, Mem. Austr.
Mis, 1yv., £903) p. 356, fig. --; BK. ischna, Tate,
T.R.S.S.A., xxiil., p. 233; R. simsoni, Tate & May,
iy Sok, xxiv, 1900, p, 100:
524—dissimilis, Watson, Eulima, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886,
eae, ple ot, f.. 5.
525—protractus Hedley, P.L.8S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p.
185, pl. 8, £. 8-11.
AMPHITHALAMUS, Carpenter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.
(3) -RV 0k O6D,! or kok.
526—jacksoni, Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1895, p. 695;
R. badia, Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 612,
pl. 46, f. 3. |
527—petterdi Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1895, p. 697;
Tate & May, op. cit., xxvi., 1901, pl. 26, 1. 7a,
528—scrobiculator Watson, Rissoa, Chall. Zool., xv.,
1886, p. 611, pl. 46, £. 4.
NOTOSETIA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1914
(1915), p. 452. |
529—atropurpurea Frauenfeld, Setia, Novara Exped.
Moll.; 1867, "p. 413, pl. 1s; £9205
530—nitens Frauenfeld, Setia, Novara Exped. Moll.,
SOT MOA orale 2, tee,
531—procincta Hedley, Rissoa, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxlii.,
1908, p. 469, pl. 10, f. 34.
LA; VILITORINA, Pfeffer, Jahr. Anst. Hamburg, iii.,
1886, 7p. Sik,
532—marie Ten. Woods, Rissoa, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm.,
1875 (1877), p. 147; Tryon, Man. Conch., ix., 1887,
p. 354, pl. 71, £9; Hedley, P,L:S:.N.S Wiens
LOOG pato2 th:
E. A. Smith erroneously records (Proc. Malac., 1., 1894,
p. 60) Rissoa deliciosa, Jeffreys, from 410 fath. off Sydney.
RISSOINA, D’Orbigny, Voy. Amer. Merid., 1840, p. 52.
533—cretacea Ten. Woods, P.L.S.N.S.W., 11., 1878, p.
265; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 353,
iis TAG.
534—elegantula Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1880, p. 417,
pl. 40, #10; Henn, P.L.S.N.S. W..,. x. 189 7a
500. |
535—fasciata Adams, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1851 (1853), p.
264; R. smithi, Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867,
p. 114, pl. 13, f. 21; and R. cincta, Angas, op.
eit., p. 114, pl. 13, f. 22; R. hanleyi, Schwartz,
Monog. Rissoina, 1860, p. 64, pl. 4, f. 28; R.
flexuosa, Gould, Proce. Soc. Nat. Hist., vii., 1861,
p. 400.
536—variegata Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 113,
OME LER ears ES) | |
M 54 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES,
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 55
RISSOLINA, Gould, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vii.,
1861, p. 401.
o3/—angasi Pease, Rissoina, Am. Journ. Conch., vii.,
1872, p. 20; R. turricula Angas (not Pease, 1860),
Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 114; pl. 13, f. 20.
538—crassa Angas, Rissoina, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p.
epee lower, 1G,
RISSOPSIS, Garrett, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1873,
Dp. 228.
539—maccoyi Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1876
(1877), p. 154; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900,
pe.oUD-- pls 26. ts 11.
STIVA, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 192.
540—ferruginea Hedley, op. cit., p. 192, pl. 9, f. 23-5.
DIALA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), viii. 1861,
p. 242.
541—lauta Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), x., 1862,
Paes bledley. (Pins NioaW., xxxyiin., Oise ip.
2865 pl. 18; {2 .08.
542—monile Adams, Alaba, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), x.,
1so2, ~. 296; Hedley, POLES N2S2 W 3) Gocx., 1906,
D. 523, pl. 33 Ee EAE
543—phasianella Angas, Alaba, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
[OS is ee lee duaeracwel gor
544—translucida Hedley, F.L.8-N.S8.W :,) xx, lb Q06,- 40:
OZ eles Jon ka OD:
OBTORTIO, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., ili., 1899, p. 412.
545—lutosus Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1916, p. 716,
pe ght, a3:
CITHNA, Adams, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1863, p. 113.
546—angulata Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
Zoe ple. tf. 16.
Family ASSEMANIIDA.
ASSEMANIA, Fleming, Hist. Brit. Anim., 1828, p. 275.
547—pagodella Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvii., 1903, p.
ROR G03, pl. 29°" £. 6. |
548—tasmanica Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm.,
1875 (1876), ‘p. 79: Hedley, PES NiStw.,, 3oux:
HOG; py 527, Vl. 39, f. ‘27—29:
Family HYDROBIIDA.
TATEA, Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1878
(STO) p.. 12:
M 56 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
549—paradisiaca Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei., Philad.,
1897, ‘p. 360, pl. 9.9% 9) 10:
550—rufilabris Adams, Diala, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.
(3), x., 1862, p. 298; Smith, J. Linn. Soe. Zool.,
xvi,, 1881 p. 268; pl. 7, eae
POTAMOPYRGUS, Stimpson, Am. Journ. Conch., i., 1865,
p. 93.
501-—_ruppie Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., viii., 1912, p.
140, pl. 41, f. 17.
Family LITIOPIDA.
LITIOPA, Rang, Ann. Sci. Nat., xvi., 1829, p. 303.
552—limnophysa Melvill & Standen, Journ. of Conch.,
vill., 1896, p. 305, pl. 9, f. 72; L. melanostoma,
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908, p. 462, pl.
Ons al, Bil,
Family TRUNCATELLIDA.
ACMEA, Hartmann Neue Alpina, i., 1821, p. 204.
503—valida Pfeiffer, Truneatella, Zeit. Malak., 1846,
p. 182; Smith, Monog. Christmas Isl., 1900, p.
59, pl. 8, £. 21, 22; T. brazieri Cox, Monog aumere
Land Shells, 1868, p. 93, pl. 15, f. 12.
Family HIPPONICIDA.
HIPPONIX, Defrance, Bull. Soc. Philom., 1819, p. 8.
554—foliacea Quoy & Gaimard, Zool. Astrolabe, ii1.,
1835, p. 439, pl. 72, f. 41-45.
CHEILEA, Modeer, K. Vetensk. Akad nya Handl., xiv.,
1793, p. 110.
dd0—equestris porosa, Reeve, Calyptrea, Conch. Icon.,
x1, 1858, pl. 5, f. 20.
Amalthea coxi Sowerby, Proc. Malaec. Soe., viii., 1908,
p. 17, pl. 1, f. 9-11, from Port Stephens, is a Cirripede,
probably Acasta elans.
Family CALYPTRAIDA.
SIGAPATELLA, Lesson, Zool. Coquille, ii., 1830, p. 389.
556—calyptreformis Lamarck, Trochus, An. s. vert.,
vii., 1822, p. 12; Crepidula tomentosa Quoy &
Gaim., Zool. Astrolabe, ii., 1835, p. 419, pl. 72,
f. 1-5; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 1913, p.
288.
557—hedleyi Smith, Terra Nova Exped. Zool., ii., 1915, ©
p. 84, pl. 1, f. 23-5.
.
.
|
MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY. M 57
CREPIDULA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H. Paris, 1799, p.
78.
558—aculeata Gmelin, Patella, Syst. Nat., xiii, 1791,
p. 3693; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 458.
599—immersa Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1865, p. 57, pl.
7 spas ioe A
Angas erroneously recorded (Proce. Zool., 1867, p. 211)
Galerus pellucidus from Sydney.
Family CAPULIDA.
CAPULUS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii, 1810, p. 55.
560—devotus Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 190,
plo, 4: 15-16:
561—-violaceus Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 114,
pls. ob. 23.
Family CERITHIID.
CERITHIUM, Brugiere, Encycl. Meth. vers (1), 1789, p.
xy: :
562—morus Lamarck, var. carbonarium Sowerby (not
Pimippr). Coneh. licon,,xv.,. 1865, pl. 9, f. 9;
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 186; Smith,
Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 65.
ATAXOCERITHIUM, Tate, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.,
MK EL SO4e Dp. 79)
563—serotinum Adams, Cerithium, Thes. Conch., ii..
1855, p. 861, pl. 180, f. 102; C. rhodostoma Angas, .
Proc; Zool. Soc., 1871, p:' 95.
BITTIUM, Gray, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 154.
564—cylindricum Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p.
a0 pe 39, f. 5.
565—fuscocapitulum Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr.
Ringe vie Vo, 217, pl. 38, £. 10, TL.
566—granarium Kiener, Cerithium, Coq. Viv., 1842, p.
Zoe. NS, io \Hiedley, P.LaS.N.S.W.5 xxxix.,
os, EUS. pl WT, .1.- 6.
567—icarus Bayle, Cerithium, Journ. de Conch., xxviii.,
- 1880, p. 249; B. furvum Watson, Chall. Zool.,
Ry 1SSo, pr O56, pl. 38,. f..5; B. variegatum Bra-
mere P.1.S:NS:W., xix., 1894, p: 172; pl’ 14, £. 9.
7"
PYRAZUS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii., 1810, p. 458.
568—anguliferus Sowerby, Lampania, Conch. Icon.,
xv., 1866, pl. 1, f. 4; Brazier, PLS Wa
1880, p. 388.
569—australis Quoy & Gaim., Zool. Astrolabe, iii., 1834,
pe LS ltl, oop ake
570—herculeus Martyn, Clava, Univ. Conch., i., 1784,
pl. 18; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906p p232e
and Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlix., 1915, p. 47,
femelle
CERITHIOPSIS, Forbes & Hanley, Brit. Moll., ii., 1853,
De don.
571—angasi Semper, Cat. Mus. Godeffroy, v., 1874, p.
108; C. clathrata Angas (not Adams), Proce. Zool.
Soc., 1871, p. bo, plid, i az
572—cacuminatus Hedley & Petterd, Ree. Austr. Mus.,
vil, 1906; p. 218, plo si, tee
573—cessicus Hedley, P.L.8.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 529,
for C. minimum Ten. Woods (preoce.), and xxv.,
OI, fon (eek iy 210:
SHEILA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), vi, 1861, p.
131.
574—albosutura Ten. Woods, Cerithiopsis, Proce. Roy.
Soe. Tasm., 1876 (Feb., 1877), p. 140; C. purpurea
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., June, 1877, p. 36, pl. 5,
f. 7; Smith, Ann. Natal Museum, 1., 1906, p. 44.
575—crocea Angas, Cerithiopsis, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1871,
p. 16, pl. 1, f. 18; Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soe..
Tasmi, hS77,osseo:
576—halligani Hedley, Cerithiopsis, Rec. Austr. Mus.,.
vice 1905, 51 eet. BEG.
577—turritelliformis Angas, Bittium, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1877, p. 174, pl. 26, f. 14; S. attenuata Hedley;
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900; p.-Si, player
M 58 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES.
Family TRIPHORIDAL.
“"TRIPHORA, Blainville, Dict. Sci. Nat., lv., 1828, p. 344.
578—albovittata Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvii., 1903, p.
609, pl. 32, f. 26-27.
579—ampulla Hedley, op. cit., p. 615, pl. 33, f. 38-39. *
580—angasi Crosse & Fischer, Journ. de Conch., Xu, q
1865, p. 46, pl. 1, f. 12, 13; Hedley, op. cit., p. 610.
581—cinerea Hedley, op. cit., p. 612, pl. 33, f. 36-87.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 59
582—fasciata Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1878
(1879), p. 34; Hedley, op. cit., p. 615, pl. 33,
f. 40-41.
583—granifera Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p. 178,
piptee O and xxv. 1903. p.,.610; pl, 3d,- i.
28-29.
584—innotabilis Hedley, op. cit., p. 608, pl. 32, f. 23-25.
585—kesteveni Hedley op. cit., p. 618, pl. 33, f. 45.
586—labiata Adams, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1851 (1854), p.
279; Hedley, op. cit., p. 617, pl. 33, f. 42-44.
587—maculosa Hedley, op. cit., p. 614, pl. 32, £. 32-33.
588—nigrofusca Adams, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1851 (1854),
p. 278; Hedley, op. cit., p. 611, pl. 33, f. 34-85.
589—nocturna Hedley, op. cit., p. 618, pl. 32, f. 30-31.
590—tasmanica Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
hS7o.4(1876),p:- 28; Hedley, op. ‘cit; sp° 612, ‘pl.
Bey. OD
Family TURRITELLID At.
TURRITELLA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H. Paris, 1799,
p. 74.
591—-crenulata Donald, Proc. Malac. Soe., iv., 1900,
Pier, Dk toy 2,
592—curialis Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
sone pbb 1, t,19;
593—gunnii Reeve, Conch. Icon., v., 1849, pl. 9, f. 45;
Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 185; T. philip-
pensis, Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 479,
ple..30,°f: 6.
594—opulenta Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
297, pl. 34. £.. 9.
595—parva Angas, Toreula, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p.
1G4,. pl. 26, 5-47.
596—scitula Donald (as var. of T. quadrata), Proce.
Malae. Soc., iv., 1900, p. 54, pl. 5, f. 9.
597—sinuata Reeve, Conch. Icon., v., 1849, pl. 11, f. 62.
598—smithiana Donald, Proc. Malae. Soe., iv., 1900, p.
Dee TL, Dy. Ea Ve
599—sophie Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., viii., 1883, p. 227;
T. incisa. T. Wds., 1877.
M 60 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
600—subsquamosa Dunker, Mal. Blatt., xviii., 1871,
152; T. lamellosa Watson, wet "Zool., Ev 1886,
p. 474, pl. -29>sr, Or
Smith observes (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. on xv., [Sto ae
370) that T. ineisa, Reeve, Conch. Icon., v., 1849, pl. 11,
f. 55, is erroneously cited from Sydney.
Family CHCIDA.
CAICUM, Fleming, Edinb. Encyel., vii., 1824, p. 67.
601—amputatum Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xviii., 1894, p.
504, text fig.
602—lilianum Hedley, P-LAS.N.S.W., xvii oes
603. pl ZO kai
STREBLOCERAS, Carpenter, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1858, p.
440.
603—cygnicollis Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p.
189, pl. 8, £ 12-14.
Family TRICHOTROPIDA.
CROSSEA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), xv., 1865,
Dp. 323.
604—-carinata Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
345, f. 71.
605—concinna Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 911, pl.
44, f. 14.
606—labiata Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1875
(1876), p. 151; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900,
p. 900; pl. 26" fas:
607—naticoides Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p
290, pl. 54, f. 6-7.
LIPPISTES, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii., 1810, p. 126.
608—torcularis Ten. Woods, Cingulina, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
ii., 1878, p. 268; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., iv.,
ISO jo ay te. PA,
609—zodiacus Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxii., 1907, p.
502, pl: US aso:
SIRIUS, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900, p. 88.
610—badius Ten. Woods, P.L.S.N.S.W., ii., 1878, p. 264;
Hedley, op. cit., xxv., 1900, p. 88, pl. 3, f. 8.
COUTHOUYIA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), v., 1860,
p. 410.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 61
611—racilis Brazier, Vanikoro, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix.,
1894, p. 169, pl. 14, f. 4; Hedley, op. cit., xxv.,
108 p. D06y ply. 26,.4, 13.
: Family VERMETID.
VERMICULARIA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H. Paris, 1799,
Dio:
612—nodosa Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 292,
|G) Oe ae tse
613—sipho Lamarck, Serpula, An. Ss. _ vert., Wee lisilicn
262; V. arenarius Quoy & Gaimard, aasiane
Zool, He eSa4s Die 2Soy Dl Od k. 8-10; Hedley,
P.L.S.NS.W., 5:4 dllles 1903, p. 602.
614—-waitel Hediey, Vermetus, Mem’ Austr. Mus., iv.,
oS. 0. O40, f. (2:
Angas has cited, probably erroneously (Proc. Zool.
Soc., 1867, p. 211), a tropical species, Bivona quoyi, H.
& A. Adams, from Port Jackson.
STEPHOPOMA, Morch, Journ. de Conch., viii, 1860, p.
42.
615—+tricuspe Morch, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1866, p. 150, pl.
oko b- weedleys Heel SeNS.W., XXXVill., 1913,
p. 294, pl. 19, f. 72-74.
SILIQUARIA, Bruguiere, Encycl. Meth. vers 1, 1789,
Pp. “XV.
616—weldii Ten. Woods, Tenagodes, Proc. Roy. Soc.
Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 144; Tryon, Man. Conch.,
viil., 1886, joe sie ple 58, if 28 Hedley, Rec.
Austr. Mus., Ville, 1905, p. 49,
MAGILINA, Velain, ese Zoole Hixper., vic, Lert, p. LOG:
617—caperata Tate & May, Thylacodes, Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. A., xxiv., 1900, p. 94, and P.L.S.N.S.W.,
ape tig pl Joh 14-9 op, elt:, xxvil..
1902, Dp. 19, figs. ; Op: cit. xxii); 19089p.) 457,
pl. 10, f. 37-8.
Family JANTHINIDA.
JANTHINA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 75.
618—capreolata Montrouzier, Journ. de Conch., vii.,
1859, p. 3/5, and. viii., 1860, p. 114, pl. 2, £. 4.
619—globosa Swainson, Zool. Illustr., ii., 1821, pl. 85;
J. prolongata Blainville, Dict. Sci. Nat., 1822,
p. 155, and Man. Malac., pl. 37, bis f. 1.
; wr
ys
620—umbilicata D’Orbigny, Voy. Amer. Merid., 1841,
p. 414; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xi., 1858, pl. 5, f. 22.
621—-violacea Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 75 for Knorr
(2)),: pl. 30,ei. 2, Be Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
Dp. 20 ele ‘penicephala, Peron Voy. Terr. Austr.,
Atlas, 1804, pl. xxx., fig. 4.
-RRECLUGZIA, Petit, Journ. ab Conch., iv., 1863, p. 117.
* 622—lutea Bennett, Narr. Whaling Voy., ii., 1840, p
298; R. hargravesi Cox, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1870,
Dp. 172, ple Gs sie, «8 Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xviil.,
1894, p. 536.
Family STRUTHIOLARIIDA.
STRUTHIOLARIA, Lamarck, Encycl. Meth. vers, 1816,
Expl. Plate 431, f. 1. ,
623—scutulata Martyn, Buccinum, Univ. Conch., 1784,
pl. 55; Watson. Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 414.
4EMIRA, H. & A. Adams, Gen. Ree. Moll., 1853, p. 110.
624—australis Sowerby, Eburna, Conch. Illustr., 1841,
f. 5; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 222.
M 62 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Family MERRITDA.
MERRIA, Gray, Zool. Beechey’s Voy., 1839, p. 187; Narica
D’Orbigny, Moll. Cuba, 11., 1842, p. 39; Vanikoro.
(rejected as vernacular), Quoy & Gaimard, As-
trolabe Zool., ii., 1832, p. 239.
625—orbignyana Recluz, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1848 (1844),
p. 140; and Mag. de Zool., 1845, p. 30, pl. 124,
ie ee
626—sigaretiformis Potiez & Michaud, Velutina, Gal.
de Douai, 1838, p. 508, pl. 35, f. 21-22; Hedley,
Ree. Austr. Mus., viiil, 1912, ip. 142, pl. 42,
f. 21-22.
Angas has erroneously reported (Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867,
p. 212) Vanikoro granulata, Recluz, and V. quoyana,
Adams, from Sydney.
Whitelegge has erroneously reported (Journ. Roy. Soe.
N.S. Wales, xxiii, 1889, p. 259) Vanikoro cuvieriana
‘Recluz and V. gaimardi, Adams, from Sydney.
NARICAVA, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvii., 1913, p. 294.
627—angasi Adams, Adeorbis, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1863,
p. 424, pl. 37, f. 11, 12. ;
MOLLUSCA—HEDLFY. M 63
628—angulata Hedley, Adeorbis, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
19052 ps 50;-£.) 15,
From 410 fathoms off Sydney, Smith has erroneously
recorded (Proc. Malac., i., 1894, p. 60) Seguenzia carinata
Jeffreys.
Family XENOPHORIDZ.
XENOPHORA, Fischer, Mus. Demidoff, iii., 1807, p. 213.
629—tatei Harris, Brit. Mus. Cat. Tert. Moll. Austr.,
1) 1897, p. 204, pl. 7, f. 7; Hedley, Mem. Austr.
Mus. tv. 1903, p. 357.
Family STROMBIDA.
STROMBUS, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 742.
630—campbellii Griffiths & Pidgeon, Anim. Kingdom.,
mee UGS. yo.) GOO ipl.) 25, a) 6; Hedley,
ELSES, Wo) xox, 1908, p. 459;
631—elegans Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1842, p. 30, pl.
7, f. 48, 48; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 185.
632—luhuanus ‘Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 744; Sow-
erby, Thes. Conch., i., 1842, p. 29, pl. 7, £. 54;
Hedley, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlviii., 1915,
p.-28.
633—urceus Linné, Syst. Nat. x., 1758, p. 745; Sowerby,
Thes. Conch., 1., 1842, pl. 7, f. 45, as of S. muta-
bilis; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 188.
Angas erroneously recorded (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p.
186) Pterocera scorpio, Linn, from the Bottle and Glass
Rocks.
Family PTEROTRACHEID~-.
FIROLOIDA, Lesueur, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad.,
evoNG 1, OO.
634—desmaresti Lesueur, op. cit., p. 39, pl. 2, f. 1; Hed-
ley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 402.
CARINARIA, Lamarck, Syst. Anim. s. vert., 1801, p. 98.
635—australis Quoy & Gaim. Astrolabe Zool., 11., 1833,
p. 394, pl. 29, f. 9, 13; Hedley & Petterd, Rec.
Austr. Mus., vi., 1906, p. 223.
PTEROSOMA, Lesson, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, iii.,
1827, p. 414.
636—planum Lesson, op. cit., p. 414, pl. 10, f. A.; Hed-
ley, Proce. Malac. Soe., 1., 1895, p. 333, f. 1-4;
Crosse, Journ. de Conch., xliv., 1896, p. 212.
M 64 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Family ATLANTIDA.
OXYGYRUS, Benson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vi., 1837,
p. 316. .
637—keraudrenii Lesueur, Journ. de Phys, lxxxy., 1817,
p. 391, pl. 2; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907;
p. 299:
ATLANTA, Lesueur, Journ. de Phys., lxxxv., 1817, p. 390.
Atlas, Blainville, Dic. Sci. Nat., xxxi., 1824, p.
271.
638—inflata Eydoux & Souleyet, Bonite Zool., 11., 1852,
p. 378, pl. 19, f. 21-28; Hedley, Mem. Austr.
Mus., iv., 1908, p. 402.
639—rosea Eydoux & Souleyet, op. cit., p. 377, pl. 19,
f. 16-20.
640—turriculata D’Orbigny, Voy. Amer. Merid., v.,
1836, (oni Toy ple ZO si oes
Family EPITONIIDA.
EPITONIUM, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 91.
641—aculeatum Sowerby, Scalaria, Thes. Conch., i.,
1844, p. 86, bis. pl. 32, f. 85-37; Watson, Chall.
Zool., xv., 1886, p. 189.
642—australe Lamarck, Scalaria, An. s. vert., vi., 1822,
p. 228; Kiener, Cog. Viv., 18389, p16) 3 pies
f. 17; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1867, p. 200.
643—bellicosum Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
360; (plstor ens: .
644—distinctum Smith, Seala, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1891,
p. 441... pl.35, (hq:
645—granosum Quoy & Gaimard, Turritella, Zool. As-
trolabe, lii., 1834, p. d38, pl. 55, 29=30—uee
ballinensis, Smith, Ann. Mag. N.H. (6), vii., 1891,
p. 1389; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901, p. 701,
Di. o4, i 2s
646—hyalinum Sowerby, Scalaria, Thes. Coneh., 1.,
1844, p. 85, bis. pl. 32, f. 21-22; Angas, Proce.
Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 188.
647—jukesianum Forbes, Scalaria, Voy. Rattlesnake,
append. 11.,°1852, p: 383, pls exmeuae
648—levifoliatum var. Murdoch & Suter, Trans. N.Z.
Inst., xxxvili., 1906, p. 296, pl. 25, f. 35, 836; Hed-
ley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 290.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY, M 65
649—morchi Angas, Scala, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 15,
pl. 1, f. 7; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
p. 364.
650—perplexum Pease, Am. Journ. Conch., i11., 1867,
p. 228; Martens & Langkavel, Donum Bismarck-
fannie ew ep. 24. \ pl. 1 £19. Whitelegge,
Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xxili., 1889, p. 261.
651—philippinarum Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1844, p.
86, bis. pl. 32, f. 1-8; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
HS67. pet 99.
652—pyramidale Sowerby, Scalaria, Thes. -Conch., 1.,
1844, p. 85, bis. pl. 32, f. 4; Whitelegge, Jour.
Roy. See. N.S. W., xxii., 1889, p. 261.
- 658—tenellum Hutton, Sealaria, P.L.S.N.S.W., ix., 1885,
p. 948; S. lineolata, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
Ds 299.
654 translucidum Gatliff, Scala, Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
xix., 1906, p. 2, pl. 1, f. 3, 4; Hedley, Ree. Austr.
Miws*, vase 1907 ,. p:<290;
655—turrisphari Hedley, Scala, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
ngs) p52, 1. 18:
656—unilaterale von Martens, Sealaria, Valdivia Exp.
Moll., 1903, p. 118, pl. 4, f. 11; Bavay, Journ. de
Conch: key W9PS. pi 294, phe 10) £4) 12:
Whitelegge erroneously recorded (Journ. Roy. Soe.
N.S.W., xxiii., 1889, p. 261) Scalaria bicarinata, Sowerby,
from 18 fath. off Ball’s Head.
Angas erroneously recorded (Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p.
183) Seala clathrus, Linné, from Port Stephens and
Broken Bay; also (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 199) Scala
sealaris Linné from Port Jackson.
Family CYMATIIDA.
CHARONIA, Gistel, Naturg. Thier, 1848, p. 170.
657—lampas euclia Hedley, Endeavour Biolog. Results,
He 1914p. 65, pl. 8, f. 1.
658—rubicunda Perry, Septa, Conchology, 1811, pl. 14,
f. 4. ! |
659—pumilo Hedley, Lotorium, Mem. Austr. Mus. iv.,
as, P..o00% £. 08.
AUSTROTRITON, Cossmann, Essai Pal. Comp., v., 1903,
| pol.
* A. bassi Angas, Triton, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869, p. 45, pl.
2,f.19. (As this occurs at Corner Inlet, it will probably reach
our southern border.)
5
M 66 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
660—parkinsonius Perry, Septa, Conchology, 1811, pl.
14; f. 1; Tritonium fusiforme Angas, Proc. Zool.
Soc., 1867, p. 188.
CYMATIUM, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 129.
661—caudatum Gmelin, Murex, Syst. Nat. xiii. 1791,
p. 3535; Reeve, Conch. Icon., 11., 1844, pl. 3, f. 8;
Angas Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 179.
662—exaratum Reeve, Triton, Conch. Icon. i1., 1844,
pl. 18, f. 50; Angas, Proc. Zoel., Socen tears
188.
663—gemmatum Reeve, Triton, Conch. Icon., ii., 1844,
pl. 15, f. 60a-; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe;-1877, pe
179.
664—labiosum Wood, Murex, Index, Test. suppl., 1828,
p. 5, f. 18; Iredale, Proce. Malac. Soc., ax seaea
p. 73; T. strangei, Adams & Angas, Proe. Zool.
Soc., 1864, p. 35.
665—parthenopeum von Salis, Murex, Reis. Neap.,
1793, p. 370, pl. 7%, f. 1; Hedley, Pax Sica
OO0bG I 0s (Sh
666—sinense Reeve, Triton, Conch Icon., 11., 1844, pl. 6,
f. 18; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.., xxvi., 19012 pale
667—spengleri Perry, Septa, 1811, pl. 14, f. 3. Watson,
Chall. Zool., xvi,,1886, pi2893:
Angas has erroneously reported (Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1867, p. 189) T. doliarium Lamarck, from N. S. Wales,
also (op. cit. p. 188) T. boltenianum from Long Bay, |
Sydney. 7
FUSITRITON, Cossmann, Essai Pal Comp., v., 1908,
Os Othe
668—kampylum Watson, Nassaria, Chall’? Zool., xv.,
1886, p. 405, pl. 14, f. 12; Hedley & Petterd, Ree.
Austr. Mus., vi., 1906, p. 219.
669—retiolus Hedley, Argobuccinum, Biol. Results, En-
deavour, 11, 1944, 99:73) pl. 1 eer
EUGYRINA, Dall, Smithson, Miscell. Coll., xlvii., 1904,
p. 132; Mayena Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soc.,. mie
1917, p. 324.
670-—australasia Perry, Biplex, Conchology, 1811, pl.
4, f. 2, 4; Smith, Proc. Malaec. Soe. xi., 1915, p.
283; R. leucostoma, Lk. |
MOLLUSCA.—-HEDLEY, M 67
GYRINEUM, Link. Beschr. Rostock. Samml., 1807, p.
123.
671—pusillum Broderip, Ranella, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1832, p. 194; Reeve, Conch. Icon., 11., 1844, pl. 8,
f. 44; Whitelegge, Journ. Roy. Soc. N. 8S. Wales,
xxili., 1889, p.-247. 3 ,
BURSA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 128.
672—bufo Bolten, Tritonium, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 128;
inedleymdourm oF (Conch) xv. 1916 cp. 42: B.
hiams.Aneas, Proc, Zool, ‘Soc., 1877, .». 179.
673—granifera Lamarck, Ranella, Eneycl. Meth., 1816,
pl. 414, f. 4; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 180.
674—mammata Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 128; B.
venustula, Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 180.
Family CASSIDID A. -
PHALIUM, Link, Rostock Samml.,, iii, 1807, p. 112.
675—areola Linné, Buccinum, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p.
136; Kiener, Coq. Viv., 18385, p. 24, pl. 10, £19;
Brazier, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1872, p. 837.
676—coronulatum Sowerby, Cassis, Tank. Cat., 1825,
append. p. xx.; Reeve, Conch. Icon., v., 1848, pl.
12, £. 31> Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1872; p. 838.
677—labiatum Perry, Conchology, 1811, pl. 34, f. 1;
C. achatina, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 196.
678—pila Reeve, Cassis, Conch. Icon., v., 1848, pl. 9,
f. 21; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 407.
679—sophia Brazier, Cassis, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1872, p.
Sey 3 a! aa ok Al
680—stadiale Hedley, Biol. Results Endeavour, ii,
Seto p: 72, pl. 10, 14
681—thomsoni Brazier, Cassis, P.L.S.N.S.W., i., 1875,
p. 8; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 341,
pk 30); 2.23:
682—torquatum Reeve, Cassis, Conch. Icon., v., 1848,
pe i f7'- Bramer, Proc. Zool: Soe!, 1872, pu -838:
Angas has erroneously recorded (Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1877, p. 183), Semicassis paucirugis from Twofold Bay,
‘CASSIS, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 28.
683—nana Ten. Woods, P.L.S.N.S.W., iv., 1879, p. 108;
Hedley, op. cit., xxiv., 1899, p. 484, f. 6.
M 68 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Family TONNIDZ.
TONNA, Brunnich, Zool. Fund., 1772, p. 248.
684—perdix Linné, Buccinum, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p.
734; Reeve, Conch. Icon., v., 1849, pl. 6, £. 9;
Macgillivrayia pelagica, Macgillivray Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (2), it, 1848, p. 31; Fischer, Journ.
de ‘Conch. x1., 1863, p. 147.-pl, 6, i
685—variegata Lamarck, Dolium, An. s. vert., viii.,
1822, p. 261; Kiener, Cog. Viv.; 48385, p) 9s pl2
f. 3; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 197.
FICUS, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 148.
686—communis Bolten, op. cit., p. 148; Hedley, P.L.S.-
N.S.W., xxxiil., 1908, p. 461.
>
Family NATICIDA.
NATICA, Scopoli, Intr. Hist. Nat., 1777, p. 392.
687—alapapilionis Bolten, Cochlis, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p.
146; Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1855, pl. 14, f. 60;
Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 182.
688—euzona Recluz, Proc. Zool. Soc., 18438 (1844), p.
204, and Journ. de Conch., i., 1850, p. 381, pl. 14,
689—gualteriana Recluz, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1843, p. 208;
Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1855, pl. 25, f. 114; N.
marochiensis, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
197; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvill., 1913; pr 29G:
690—sagittata, Menke, Spm. Moll. Nov. Holl., 1848, p.
10; Philippi, Conch. Cab. n.s., 11., 1852, eee
pl. 15, f. 14; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p.
433.
691—-subcostata Ten. Woods, P.L.S.N.S.W., ii, 1878,
p. 263; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., iv., 1901, p. 22,
circ
Angas erroneously identified (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,. .
p. 183), N. colliei from the Parramatta River and record-
ed N. areolata Recluz in place of N. euzona.
POLINICES, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii, 1810, p. 222.
692—aulacoglossa Pilsbry & Vanatta, Proc. Acad. Nat.. J
Sei. Philad.,, lv.; 1908; p.' 598; pl. 29; fl Sezer
Hedley. P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvili., 1918, p. 300.
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 69
693—conicus Lamarck, Natica, An. s. vert., vi., 1822,
p. 198; Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1855, pl. 12, f. 48.
694ephebus Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
720, pl. 82, £. 62, 63.
695—filosus Reeve, Natica, Conch. Icon., ix., 1855, pl.
mee. BA
696—incei Philippi, Natica, Proce. Zool Soc., 1851 (July,
1853), p. 233; Conch. Cab. ns., 11, 1853, p. 142,
pie oe yo-wbrazier PG. S:N.S3Weiwiay, 1883; p.
225.
697—melastoma Swainson, Natica, Zool. Illustr., 1st
ser, 822, pl. 79.
698—plumbeus Lamarck, An. s. vert., vi., 1822, p. 198;
N. strangei, Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1855, pl.
I RORinn Pyatee &
FRIGINATICA, Hedley, Moll. Australasian Antarctic Ex-
pede. 1916.) p.7 ol
699—beddomei Johnston, Natica, Proce. Roy. Soc.,
Tasm., 1884 (1885), p. 222; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W..,
pairs. 1895, )p. 692:
SINUM, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 14.
700—coarctatum Reeve, Sigaretus, Conch. Icon., xv.,
1864, pl.4, f. 17;’ Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 188.
701—nitidum Reeve, Sigaretus, Conch. Icon.. xv., 1864,
pl. 4, f. 20; Angas, Proce. Zool Soe., 1867, p. 198.
702—planulatum Recluz, Conch. Illustr., May, 18438, p.
21, pl. 3, f. 4; planum Philippi, Abbild., 1, July,
1844, p. 146, pl. 1, f. 7.
703—umbilicatum Quoy & Gaimard, Natica, Astrolabe
Zool., 1., 1833, p. 234, pl. 66, f. 22-23; Angas,
Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 199.
PELLILITORINA, Pfeffer, Jahrb. Hamburg Wiss. An-
stal., 11i., 1886, p. 77; Larinopsis, Gatliff & Gab-
riel, 1916.
704—-morchi Adams & Angas, Amauropsis, Proc. Zool.
moc...o6d,, py 423: Hedley, PL.S.N.S.W., xxXvi.,
1902, p. 700, pl. 34, f. 19-20.
Family LAMELLARITDA.
705—Marseniopsis sp., Lamellaria indica, Angas, Proce.
Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 199.
M 70 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S, WALES.
Family CYPRAEID A.
_CYPRABA, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 718.
706—angustata comptoni Gray, Voy. Fly, ii., 1847, p.
396, pl. 1, f: 3; Henn, P.L.S.N.S.W,, = 1896,
10: 520.
706a—angustata piperata Gray, Zool. Journ., i., 1825,
p. 498; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 206.
707—annulus Linné Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 128; Bra-
zier, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1872, . 83.
708—arabica Linné, op. oie 0 718: Brazier, op. cit.,
p. 83.
709—armenaiaca Verco, Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., xxxvi.,
1912, p. 213, pl. 10, £. 1-3; C. umbilicata, Sowerby
Tank. Cat., 1825, p. xxx, not C. umbilieata, Dill-
wyn, Index. Hist. Conch. Lister, 1823, p. 32; Ire-
dale, Proc. Malac. Soc., xii., 1916, p. 9a:
710—asellus Linné, op. cit., p. 722; Brazier, op. cit.,
Da OZ:
711—caputserpentis Linné, op. cit., p. 720; Brazier, op.
eit., p. 83.
71la—caputserpentis caputanguis Philippi, Zeit. Ma-
lak., 1849, p. 24; Henn, P.L:S.N.S.W., xx iegGs
[Os OVAUS
-712—carneola Linné, op. cit., p. 719; Brazier, op. cit.,
p. &2.
7138—caurica Linné, op. cit., p. 723; Brazier, op. cit.,
p. 8d.
714 clandestina Linné, Syst. Nat., xii., 1767, p. 1177;
Brazier, op. cit. p. 84.
715—erosa Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 723; Brazier,
OD. Cli... Dacca:
716—errones Linné, op. cit., p. 723; Brazier, op. cit.,
D...3o.
ine os) cruenta Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xii., 1791,
. 3420; Brazier, op. cit., p. 85.
717—felina Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xii, BA Ble 0. 3412; Bra-
zier, op. cit., p.. 82.
718—fimbriata Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xii., 1791, p. 3420;
Brazier,..op..cit., p. .82.
718a—fimbriata, riotata Gill, eam ies N. Yorke gas
| 1858, p. 255, pl. 9, £1- , C. macula Brazier, Proc.
Zool. Soe., 1872, p: 82.
s
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 71
ee hie Linné, op. cit., P. 724; Brazier, op. cit.,
84.
720—helvola Linné, op. cit., p. 724; Henn, P.L.S.N.S.W.
x S96) Dp! 520.
721—hirundo Linné, op. cit., p. 722; Henn, op. cit., p.
520:
722—isabella Linné, op. cit., p. 722; Brazier, op. cit.,
p. 82.
723—limacina Lamarck, Ann. Mus., xvi., 1810, p. 101;
Brazier, op. cit., p. 86.
724—lutea Gronov, Zoophyl., 1781, pl. 19, f. 17; Henn,
op. ecit., p. 520.
725—lynx Linné, op. cit., p. 721; Brazier, op. cit., p.
83.
726—wmiliaris Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xiii., 1791, p. 3420;
Brazier, op. cit., p. 85.
727—moneta Linné, op. cit., p. 723; Henn, op. cit., p.
520.
728—poraria Linné, op. cit., p. 724; Brazier, op. cit.,
p. 84.
729—punctata Linné, Syst. Nat., xii, 1767, p. 548;
Brazier, Journ. of Conch., i1., 1879, p. 195.
730—tabescens Dillwyn, Syst. Cat., 1., 1817, p. 463;
Brazier, op. cit., p. 83.
731—scurra Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xui., 1791, p. 3409;
Brazier, op. cit., p. 83.
732—subviridis Reeve, Conch. Icon., i1., 1845, pl. 12,
f. 48; Brazier, op. cit., p. 84.
733—vitellus Linné, op. cit., p. 721; Cambage, P.L.S.
INES We alt, AQT, p71 192;
734—xanthodon Sowerby. Conch. Illustr., 1832, p. 9,
f. 18; Brazier, op. cit., p. 84.
Lea erroneously recorded (P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1895, p.
708) ©. mauritiana as from Long Bay, Sydney.
TRIVIA, Broderip, Penny Cyclopedia, viii., 1837, p.
256.
735—australis Lamarck, Cypraea, An. s. vert., vii,
1822, p. 404; Quoy & Gaim. Astrolabe Zool., 11
1834, p. 48, pl. f. 19-26.
736—caelatura nom nov. for avellanoides Hedley not
McCoy, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 293, pl. 55,
fed] -18:;
M 72 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
737—globosa Sowerby, Conch. Illustr., 1832, p. 12, f.
34; Shaw, Proce. Malac. Soce., viii., 1909, p. 310.
738—insecta Mighels, Cypraea, Proc. Boston Soe. Nat.
Hist., 11., 1845, p. 24; Brazier, op. cit., p. 86.
739—oryza Lamarck, Cypraea, Ann. Mus., xvi., 1810,
p. 104; Shaw, Proc. Malac. Soe., viii., 1909, p.
308; Smith, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), x., 1892,
Dp. 129:
740—staphylaea Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 725;
Brazier, op. cit., p. 86.
Angas erroneously reported (Proce. Zool. Soe., 1871,
p. 94) T. eandidula from the Bottle and Glass Rocks;
vide Brazier, P.IAS.N.S.W., vii., 1882, p. 120.
ERATO, Risso, Hist. Nat. Europe Merid., iv., 1826, p. 240.
741—lachryma Sowerby, Conch. Illustr., 1837, p. 17,
f. 48; Smith, Proc. Malae. Soc., ix., 1910) peer
E. denticulata, Pritchard & Gatliff, 1901.
742—-sulcifera Sowerby, Conch. Ilustr., 1837} “pare
f. 46; E. corrugata, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1874,
19% 182,
Angas erroneously reported (Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p.
182) EK. angistoma from outside Svdney Heads.
OVULA, Bruguiére, Eneyel. Meth. vers (1), 1789, p. xv
743—brevis Sowerby, Species Conch., 1830, p. 5, f. 26,
27; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1871, Dp. Gas
744—bulla Adams & Reeve, Samarang Zool., 1850,
2S pl. G6. fo eAnieas. Proe. Zool. Soe., 1871, p. 04,
745—dentata Adams & Reeve, Samarang Zool., 1850,
p. 21, pl. 6, f. 4
746—ovum Linné, Bulla, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 725;
Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i1., 1849, p. 467, pl. 99, f.
1, 2; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 186.
747—punctata Duclos, Mag. Zool., 1830, p. 7, pl. 7, f.
1; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 186.
748—pyriformis Sowerby, Zool. Journ., iv., 1828, p. 151,
Thes. Conch., ii., 1849, p. 470, pl. 101, f. 72, 73.
749—volva Linné, Bulla, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 725;
Sowerby, Thes. Conch., ii., 1849, p. 482, pl. 99,
f. 6-8; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 186.
RADIUS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii., 1810, p. 626.
750—angasi Reeve, Ovulum, Conch. Icon., xv., 1865,
pl. 10, f. 43; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 207.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 73
751—hordaceus Lamarck, Ovula, An. s. vert., vii., 1822,
p. 369; Chenu, Man. Conch., i., 1859, p. 272, f.
1778; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 207.
752—philippinarum Sowerby, Ovula, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1848, p. 136, and Thes. Conch., 11., 1849, p. 481,
plyt00, £57, 38; Angas, Proc, Zool. Soc., 1877,
joie listen |
PEDICULARIA, Swainson, Malacology, 1840, p. 245.
753—stylasteris, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
p. 342, f. 69, 70.
Sub-Order STENOGLOSSA (754-989).
Family VOLUTID.
SCAPHELLA, Swainson, Zool. Illustr., ii., 1832, pl. 87.
754—-moslemica Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., viil., 1912,
periton pl, 43; 1, 29,30.
7o5d5—undulata Lamarck, Voluta, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat.,
me ovt p. 157, pl l2) £ £-° Vs angasi, Brazier,
Proc. Koy. Soc. Tasm., 1876, p. 170.
756—zebra Leach, Voluta, Zool. Miscell., 1., 1814, p.
oles 02, ff 1: Aneas, Proc, Zool’ Soc., 1871, -p:
88
CYMBIOLA, Swainson, Zool. Illustr., ii1., 1832, pl. 33.
757—maenifica Perry, Conchology, Voluta, 1811, pl. 18,
fo.
758—marmorata Swainson, Voluta, Exot. Conch., 1821,
pl*f. :
759—punctata Swainson, Voluta, Zool. Illustr. (1. ser.),
1323, pl. 161: Cox, Proe, Zdol:, Soc., 1871,. p.. 324,
pl. 34, f. 6.
ERICUSA, H. & A. Adams, Genera Rec. Moll., i1., 1858,
i kd.
760—papillosa kenyoniana Brazier, Voluta, P.L.S.N.S.W.
mou L695, 9.119; Verco, Trans, Roy. soc. S.A5
xxxvi., 1912, p. 228, pl. 14, f. 1-3.
761—sowerbyi Kiener, Voluta, Coq. Viv., 1839, p. 47,
pl. 1; V. fusiformis Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1871,
p. 88; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p. 724.
LIVONIA, Gray, Brit. Mus. Cat. Volut., 1855, p. 8.
762—mamilla Sowerby, Voluta, Thes. Conch., 1, 1844,
Bp 201, pl 41,4.. 57, 58.
7
763—roadnightz McCoy, Voluta, Ann. Mag. Nat.
| Hist., 1881 (5), viil., p. 88, pl. 7.
LYRIA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1847, p. 141.
764—deliciosa Montrouzier, Voluta, Journ. de Conch.,
vil.; 1859; p: 375; vii., 1860, p. 121 pr 2 ee
xiv., 1866, p. 355; V. brazieri, Smith, Proce. Malac.,
Soe., vi, L904 "pains: tie:
765—pattersonia Perry, Voluta, Conchology, 1811, pl.
17, f. 1;-L. nucleus, Petterd, Journ. of Conch., ii.,
1879, p. 344.
Family OLIVIDAL.
OLIVA, Bruguiére, Encycl. Meth. vers, i1., 1789, p. xv.
766—sericea miniacea Bolten, aoe Bolt., 1798, prea
M 74 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES.
for Martini Conch. Cab., iii., 1777, vl. 45, f. 476,
477; O. erythrostoma, Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe.,
1877, p. 180.
OLIVELLA, Swainson, Zool. lien a ii., 1831, pl As:
767—exquisita Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 13, pl.
| ee
768—leucozona Adams & Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1863,
p. 422, pli 3%, £23. |
768a—leucozona brazieri Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p..172, pl, 26, £.-6;
769—nympha Adams & Angas, Proe. Zool. Soce., 1863,
p. 422; Marrat, Thes. Conch., iv., 1871, p. 37, bis,
pl. 350, f. 426.
~770—triticea Duclos, Monog. Oliva, 1835, pl. 1, f. 5, 6;
O. pardalis, Adams & Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1868, p. 422, gpl. 37, f: 3.
ANCILLA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, 1799,
p70:
771—cingulata Sowerby, Ancillaria, Spec. Conch.,
1830, p. 6. plist B30 .on- Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
OOS 1913, Pp. 301.
Amalda angasi, Cox, nom. nud. Exchange List,
1868, p. 6.
772—edithe Pritchard & Gatliff, Proce. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
xi., 1899, p. 181, pl. 20, f. 5; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.
xli., 1917, Dp. 709,
773-oblonga Sowerby, Ancillaria, Spec. Conch., 1830,
ope hf: 38); Hedley,) Mem: ‘Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
Dp. 364. .
-
‘ :
~~ ‘
Pe
- . MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. © M 75
Angas has misreported A. marginata from Sydney
(Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 192).
Family MARGINELLID Ad.
MARGINELLA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N. H. Paris, 1799,
p. 70.
774—agapeta Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 266,
elt, aie 9,
775—angasi Crosse, Journ. de Conch., xvii., 1870, p.
304; Hedley, P.LS.N.S.W., xxxix, 1915, p. 726,
pl 82, f. 66; M. minima, Petterd;. Journ. of
Conch., iv., 1884, p. 144; M. simsoni, Tate & May,
Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 92; M. shore-
hami, Pritchard & Gatliff, Proce. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
mee I ps 179. Ol 20, £2.
776—brazieri Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1891, p. 440, pl.
34, f.14. .
777—carinata Smith, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1891, p. 440, pl.
ast 13:
778—cratericula Tate & May, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.A.,
menye, L900) 9p. 91"and P..S:N.S.W., xxvi., 1901,
p. 363, pl. 26, f. 74; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv:, 1903, -p. -869.
779—geminata Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1912,
p. 145, pl. 42, f. 28.
780—inconspicua Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1846, p.
Soe pla io. O07 bledley, PelsS.Nis. Wi) xxxix.,
1915, p-*726, pl. 82, f. 64.
781—johnstoni Petterd, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884,
p. 143. |
782—kemblensis Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
Dp. suo, £. 88.
783—malina Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p. 725,
pl. 82, £. 65.
784—_mayli Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., xxiv., 1900, p.
pam: BSNS. Wil xxv, 19015 'p.'362pl. xxvii.,
| bot: xxvir., 1902) p. 19.
785—multiplicata Tate & May, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A.,
xxiv., 1900, p. 91, and P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901,
W, oo, pl. 201. 84:
786—muscaria Lamarck, An. s. vert., vii., 1822, p. 359;
Chenu, Illustr. Conch., 1850, pl. 2, f. 3; Angas,
Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 196.
M 76 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8. WALES.
787—mustellina Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 14,
pl. 1, f.5; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 709,
DEAD0 si eeale
788—nympha Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p. 168,
ple 1a iA.
789—ochracea, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1871, p. 14, pl.
1, f. 6; M. metcalfei; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1877, p. 173, pl. 26, f. 9; Smith, Journ. of Malac.,
ki. L904 y payee
790—olivella Reeve, Conch. Icon., xv., 1865, pl. 25, f.
140.
791—infelix Jousseaume, Rev. Mag. Zool. (3), iii,
1875, p. 238; procella May, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
OUD ps Staple eke aD,
792—ovulum Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i1., 1846, p. 401,
pl. 78, f. 188; Angas, Proc. Zook Soe.) 186iem
196; May, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1915, p. 82.
793—pumilio Tate & May, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901,
p. 363, pl. 26, f. 79; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 1903) 3p. 368.
794 -stilla Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 367,
Us
795—strangei, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 172,
pl. 26, f. 8; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., > xxvii., 1902,
Dp. TS texta nie.
796—subbulbosa Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.A., i, 1878,
p. 86; Hedley, P.LS.N.S.W., xxvugeeon2
18, text fig.
797—translucida Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1846, p.
376, pl. 75, £. 62, 63; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S. W., xxxi
1915.99. 72, spl wS2rk sow
798—turbinata Sowerby, Thes. Conch., i., 1846, p. 385,
pl. 75, f. 70, 71; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886,
p: 260)
799—victorie Gatliff & Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
xxi, 1908, p. 365, pl. 21, f. 5;’ Medley sFiaee
N.8. W., xxxix., 1915, p. 726.
800—whani Pritchard & Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict.,
xili., 1900, p. 137, pl. 21, f. 5, 6; Hedley, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 369.
Reeve erroneously recorded (vide P.L.S.N.S.W.,
Xxxvili., 1918, p. 303) M. attenuata from Sydney. Bra-
zier misidentified (P.L.S.N.S.W, xviii., 1894, p. 305) Mar-
| al
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 77
ginella pulchella Kiener, from Sydney. And M. kem-
blensis taken by the Challenger in 25 fathoms off Sydney
was by Angas (Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 182) mistaken
for M. rufula, Gaskoin.
Family CANCELLARID A.
CANCELLARIA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N.H. Paris, 1799,
Ox ihc.
801—antiquata Hinds, Sulphur Zool., 1844, p. 43, pl.
12, £. 17, 18; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 186.
802—australis Sowerby, Conch. Jllustr., 1832, f. 23; C.
undulata Sowerby, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1848, p. 136;
iedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 1913; p. 304.
803—costifera Sowerby, Conch. Illustr., 1832, f. 31;
Angas, Proe. Zool, Soe., 1877, p. 186.
804—-exigua Smith, Proce. Zea Soc., 1891, p. 439, pl.
522 a
To New South Wales, its author erroneously attrib-
utes Cancellaria levigata, Sowerby, Thes. Conch., ii
1849, p. 448.
ADMETE, Moller, Naturhist. Tidskr., iv., 1842, p. 88.
Saeco scobina Hedley & Petterd, Ree. Austr. Mus.,
Retevo pe 222, pl. a6, 122v1,, 1907, p. 360.
Boe ict iediey, Ree. Austr. Mus., wi, 1907, p. 299,
pinvode & 10:
Family TEREBRIDA.
TEREBRA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, 1799,
B.» Gk
807—hbicolor Angas, Acus, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
diebupl. 1S. 12.1,
808—brazieri Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 16, pl.
tk Ls, bo.
809—fictilis Hinds, Thes. Conch., 1., 1844, p. 183, pl.
45, f. 109, 110; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900,
p. 509, pl. 26, f. 14; A. assimilis, Angas, Proce.
LGou 20¢., \8hh.pi 111, pl. 13, £. 8.
810—lauretane Ten. Woods, P.L.S.N.S.W., ii, 1877
(1878), p. 262; Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr.
Maus., ty.,11906, p: 222, pl. 37, £. 9.
M 78 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
811—marmorata Deshayes, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1859, p.
279; Reeve,. Conch. Ieon., xii., 1860, pl. 19, 1.590%
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 185.
1834, p. 62;
812—triseriata Gray, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
Thes. Conch., i., 1844, p. 171, pl. 45, f. 119; Dall,
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xliii., 1908, p. 248: T.
prelonga, Deshayes, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1859, p. 315
P.L.S.N.8.W., tv., 1679een.
813—venila Ten. Woods,
23, pl. 4, #. 2; Tryon, Man. Conch., vie aeeaeee
Zileri, ak. 86:
1908, p. 125.
DUPLICARIA Dall, Nautilus, xxii.,
814ballina Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
729, pl. 84, f. 86.
815—vallesia Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., viii., 1912, p
147, pl. 48, £..31, and: P.L.S.NiS Wie
TOMS vos OO.
Angas has erroneously recorded (Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877,
p. 185) Acus spectabilis Hinds from the Redbank
XXX
River.
PARVITEREBRA, Pilsbry, Proce. Acad. N. Sei. Philad
1904, p. 5.
Soe., 1875, p.
816—brazieri Angas, Euryta, Proc. Zool. Soe
390, pl. 45, £. 5; Mangelia harrissoni, Ten. Woods,
Proce, Roy..Soe.; 1877, p.. 890:
817—trilineata Adams & Angas, Euryta, Proce. Zool.
Soe, 1863, p, 418) pl. 3,19 lee
Family CONIDAL.
CONUS, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 712
i, 1884) ‘p, G2,euom
818—angasi Tryon, Man. Conch., v1,
19, f. 99; C. sydneyensis, Sowerby, Thes. Conch.,
v., 1887, p. 260, pl. 510, f. 694; C. metealfei Angas
(not Reeve, 1843), Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 178,
pl 26; Eon
819—aplustre Reeve, Conch., Icon., i, 1848, pl. 30, f.
170; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvii., 1913, p. 308;
187O eps
‘CC, cookiu, Brazier, Proc; ‘Zool sect
109.
* -20-—capitaneus Linné, Syst. Nat. x. 1758, p. 713;
Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1, 1843, Dl. ‘aid f. 54; Hed-
ley, P.LS.NS.W., xxvi, 1902, Di: 631; Voluta
zonaria Martyn, Univ. Coneh., 1787, pl. 1297
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. , M 79
821—coronatus Gmelin, Syst. Nat., xi., 1791, p. 3389;
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917, p. 709; C. mini-
mus Sowerby, Thes. Conch., iii., 1853, pl. 189,
fe 4 DO
822—cyanostoma Adams, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1853 (1854),
peeliG-: Hedley, Pal.S.N.S.W,¢xxxvi.,21913, p.
309; ©. innotabilis, Smith, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1891,
pest, pl-A0s-fa ct.
823—maculosus Sowerby, Thes. Conch., iii., 1859, p
31, pl. 199, £. 296; C. jukesii, Reeve, Conch.
leon, 1, suppl, 1848, pl. 2, £..278;,.C...rossiteri
Brazier, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1870, p. 109. |
824rutilus Menke, Spm. Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p.
Zio. smith Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p:
Jo. pls... 8.
Angas has erroneously recorded (Proc. Zool. Soce.,
1867, p. 205) Conus grayi from Middle Harbour.
Family TURRIDZ,.
A detailed account of Australian Turride, now in pre-
paration is anticipated by a declaration of the following
new generic names :—
AUSTRODRILLIA, Hedley, 1918, type, Pleurotoma
angasi Crosse, 1863.
EPIDEIRA, Hedley, 1918, type, Clavatula striata,
Gray, 1827.
ETREMA, Hedley, 1918, type, Glyphostoma aliciae
Melv. Stand, 1895.
EXOMILUS, Hedley, 1918, type, Mangelia lutaria
Hedley, 1907.
GURALEUS, Hedley, 1918, type, Mangelia picta
Ad. & Ang., 1864.
HEMIDAPHNH, Hedley, 1918, type, Pleurotoma, sou-
verbiei, Smith, 1882.
INQUISITOR, Hedley, 1918, type, Pleurotoma sterr-
ha Watson, 1881.
MACTEOLA, Hedley, 1918, type, Purpura anomala,
‘Angas, 1877.
NEPOTILLA, Hedley, 1918, type, Daphnella bath-
entoma Verco, 1909.
SCABRELLA, Hedley, 1918, type, Daphnella versi-
vestita Hedley, 1912.
M 80 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
COLUMBARIUM, von Martens, Conch. Mittheil. Bd., i1.,
1881, pe 105
825—pagodoides Watson, Fusus, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886,
pe 297, spl." 14 Mae
LEUCOSYRINX, Dall, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xvi..,
1S89 or (oe
826—casearia Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1906; p.. 220) ple oie tee
827—recta Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
Siol0y iin Be).
BATHYTOMA, Harris & Burrows, Eocene and Olig.
Paris Basim,; 1891, p71 1a:
828—agnatum Hedley & Petterd, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
vil, 1906, p. 2205 ples (eas woe
829—biconicum Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
De SOO oon : |
APATURRIS, Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soe., xii., 1917, p.
B29).
830—brazieri Smith, Mitromorpha, Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1G91, p. 487, pl: 40,2) 2.
S31_sareintla Hedley, Bathytoma, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
, 1908, pa Oa, te 2k.
aunarnae Hedley, 1918.
832—brazieri Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soc,
LST Lp. 1S) ee ee 2A
833—flavescens Angas, Mangelia, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877,
DO plskoneh., aly
834—kingensis Petterd, Daphnella, Journ. of Conch.,
li, 1879, p. 102; var. emina Hedley, Ree. Austr.
Mus., vi., 1905, p. 53, f. 20; M. schoutenensis May,
Proce. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1910 (1911), p. 393, pl.
se ea)
835—letourneuxianus Crosse & Fischer, Pleurotoma,
Journ. de Conch., xi., 1865, p.425;ph ae
836—mitralis Adams & Angas, Bela, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1863, p. 420, 1867, p. 202; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
Kxxvi., 1913-.p. 4310) pl. doe
837—pictus Adams & Angas, Mangilia, Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1863 (1864), p. 419, pl. 37, f. 7; M. vincentina,
Crosse & Fischer, Journ. de Conch., xiii., 1865,
De 422,01: H, f. 6; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
pe Ws5:
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY,. M 81
838—tasmanicus Ten. Woods, Cythara, Proc. Roy. Soc.,
Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 145; M. jacksonensis An-
gas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 37, pl. 5, £. 10.
PSEUDORHAPHITOMA, Boettger, Nachr. Maiak. Gesell.
Xxvil., 1895, p. 56.
839—alticostatum Sowerby, Mangilia, Proc. Malac.
moc., 1, 1896, p. 31, pl. 3, f° 16; Hedley, P.L:S.
INES Wo, exw 1901; .p) 1h.
840—granulosissimum Ten. Woods, Clathurella, Proc.
Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1878 (1879), p. 37; Tate & May,
RaetesoN Se Ws, mei. O01, i pig. 20,qepls (24,
f. 84; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
393.
841—_tenuiliratum Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
SMe ly. pl Wt? 18:
EXOMILUS, Hedley, 1918.
842—lutarius Hediey, Mangelia, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
ROOT 1.296; ple, 54 f. 11,12.
843—pentagonalis Verco, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.A., xx.,
1916, p. 222, pl. 7, f. 2; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
wae LOOT, Dp. 298.
AUSTRODRILLIA, Hedley, 1918.
844angasi Crosse, Pleurotoma, Journ. de Conch., xi.,
iebor 0. Si) plat, £5:
845—beraudiana Crosse, Pleurotoma, Journ. de Conch.,
Mel ooo, Poe, wl. l) £. 6
846—nenia Hedley, Drillia, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
m9O3.-p, 367, ft. LOL:
847—woodsi Beddome, Drillia, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
1882 (1883), p. 167; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
ive. 1903. p: 388.
INQUISITOR, Hedley, 1918.
848—coxi, Angas, Drillia, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 113,
peels t, to; D)spadix; Watson, Chall. Zool, xv.,
1886, .p: 310; pl-26) f..'6.
849—metcalfei Angas, Drillia, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867,
po ata? pl: 13, £2.16. ,
850—multiliratus Smith, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4),
xix., 1877, p. 469; Hedley, Mem. ‘Austr. Mus., iv.,
190357389, £1208.
851—-suavis Smith, Drillia, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6),
ii., 1888, p. 305; D. prosuavis Hedley, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 1908, p. 389, f. 102; Sykes, Proce.
_ Malae. Soe., vi., 1904, p. 180.
M 82 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
852—tricarinatus, Ten. Woods Drillia, P.L.S.N.S.W., ii.,
1878, p. 265; Hedley Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
p. 389, f. 104.
EUCITHARA, Fischer, Man. Conch., 1883, p. 593.
853—compta Adams & Angas, Cithara, Proce. Zool.
Soc., 1863, p. 419, pl. 37, f. 5.
PSEUDODAPHNELLA, Boettger, Nachr. Malak. Gesell.
xxvii., 1895, p. 58.
854—modesta Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877,
D.1d0) Ded; fo,
855—pustulata Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1877, p. 38, plod, 4. 14
856—rufozonata Angas, Clathurella, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1877, pGs8,.pl. Othe La:
EPIDEIRA, Hedley, 1918.
857—striata Gray, Clavatula, Append. King Survey, ii.,
1827, p. 485; P. oweni, Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1., 1845, .
pl. Sei 70! |
858—xanthophaes Watson. Chall. Rep. xv., 1886, p. 282,
Olle 2A ate 1
MACTEOLA, Hedley, 1918. )
859—anomala Angas, Purpura, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877,
p: 34,7 ples, a alk .
ETREMA, Hedley, 1918.
860—alliterata Hedley, Glyphostoma, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
KXKxIX., [QLD (28, DlyS2.siemp Omron
861—bicolor Angas, Clathurella, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1871,
p. 18, pl..1, £ 20; Hedley, PluS.NISAVeS xa
1915, p. 729, pl, 82. t. GUSeik
862—nassoides Reeve, Pleurotoma, Conch. Ieon., i.,
1845, pl. 29, f. 259; C. zonulata Angas, Proe. Zool.
S0G., 1867,.ip. 43) gol 13, de. sie sae
ASTHENOTOMA, Harris and Burrows, Eoce. and Oligo.,
Paris Basin, 1891, p. 113.
863—cognata Smith, Pleurotoma, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.
(4), xix., 1877, p. 490;.. Hedley, Pins iss
xxxvill., 1908, p. 487, pl. 10, bis. f. 2.
864—dilecta Hedley, Drillia, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
9033p. SBS HU EO,
865—subtilinea, Hedley, 1918, for Pleurotoma violacea,
Angas (not Hinds), Proe. Zool. Soe., 1871, p. 92.
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 83
PARACLATHURELLA, Boettger, Nach. Malak. Gesell.,
MMVII. £895, p)/06.
866—hbilineata Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
STA, pe Spl. ly &; 23;
DAPHNELLA, Hinds, Sulphur Zool., 1844, p. 25.
867—aculeola Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
W280 Pl Sort. OS).
868—boholensis Reeve, Pleurotoma, Conch. I¢on., 1,
Weta. wlakos f-112.
869—hbotanica Hedley, nom, nov., 1918, Pleurotoma fra-
gilis, Reeve, Conch. Icon., i1., 1845, pl. 21, f. 179,
not Deshayes, 1834.
870—edwini Brazier, Pleurotoma, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix.,
1894, p. 168, pl. 14, f. 3.
HEMIDAPHNE, Hedley, 1918.
870a—souverbiei Smith, Pleurotoma, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (5), x., 1882, p. 300; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
munis 1908. p: 488) pl. vind, fig.9!
NEPOTILLA, Hedley, 1918.
871—bathentoma Verco, Daphnella, Trans. Roy. Soe.
Soa xin, 1909 p; 1326, pl. 28, £2 3:
872_excavata Gatlitt, Daphnella, Prot Roy. Soe. Viet.,
pi 906. ps1, vl. 1, f. 1-2:
SCABRELLA, Hedley, 1918.
873—albocincta Angas, Clathurella, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
fom... 18; pl. Lit, 22.
874—brenchleyi Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
SMO. ice pla, 1, N2)
875—hayesiana Angas, Clathurella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
Selsey ti Ap a EY LT:
876—sculptilis Angas, Clathurella, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
Romie pe Weoley? 1.9)
877—versivestita, Hedley, Daphnella, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
Tae ey ASS ple 4507033)
878—vestalis Hedley, Daphnella, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
£903, p. 390; £..105.
VEPRECULA, Melvill, Proc. Malae. Soe., xii., 1917, pp.
141-188.
879—vepratica Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
384, £. 97. ;
M 84 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
MANGILIA, Auctorum. Unclassified.
880—hilum Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908, p. 471,
pl. 9, f. 17.
881—spica Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 297,
pl. 55, f. 20.
882—hoylei Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1891, p. 439,
pl. 34, f. 9.
883—challengeri Smith, op. cit. p. 438, pl. 34, f. 7.
884—crossei Smith, op. cit., p. 439, pl. 34, f. 8.
885—watsoni Smith, op. cit., p. 439, pl. 34, f. 10.
885-I—fastosa Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
295, Pl, 590, tale:
Adams and Angas (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1863, p. 420) have
erroneously reported from Port Jackson, Clathurella re-
ticosta ( =— purpurea Blainville) vide P.L.S.N.S.W.,
xxxii., 1906, p. 459. From Middle Harbour Angas (Proce.
Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 203), misidentified Daphnella limne-
formis. He also erred in reporting (Proe. Zool. Soe., 1865,
p. 160) Pleurotoma lallemantiana from Port Jackson. Also
in error, he recorded (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 92) Pleur-
otoma violacea from Broken Bay. Further he was mis-
taken (Proe. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 202) in reporting Drillia
radula from Port Jackson. Again, Drillia emula does
not occur in New South Wales, as he supposed (Proce.
Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 86).
Family FASCIOLARITD.
FASCIOLARIA, Lamarck, Mem. Soc. N. Hist. Paris, 1799,
On (hee |
886—australasia Perry, Pyrula, Conchology, 1811, pl.
54, f. 4. Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
Bie:
886a—australasia bakeri Gatliff & Gabriel, Vict. Nat.
xxix, 1912, p. 47, pl. 3, lower figures.
886b—australasia coronata Lamarck, An. s. vert., vil.,
1822, p. 120; Kiener, Coq. Viv., 1840, pl. 9, f. 1.
LATIROFUSUS, Cossmann, Ann. Soc. Roy. Malac. Belg.,
xxivs' 1889, gosi digo,
887—spiceri Ten. Woods, Fusus, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
1876 (1877), p. 137; L. nigrofuseus Tate, Trans.
Roy. Soe. §.A., xiv., 1891, p. 258, ply2e tea
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 85
VERCONELLA, Iredale, Proce. Malac. Soc., x1., 1914, p.
1¥5
888—maxima Tryon, Siphonalia, Man. Conch., iii., 1881,
p. 135, pl. 54, f. 8355; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 1908, p. 374, pl. 38.
FUSINUS, Rafinesque, Anal. Nat., 1815, p. 145.
| 889—novehollandie Reeve, Fusus, Conch. Icon., iv.,
1848, pl. 18, £. 70; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877,
pe k7 9:
890—turrispictus Martyn, Buccinum, Univ. Conch.,
1786, f. 90; Fusus laticostatus, Angas, Proce. Zool.
Soc., 1877, p. 179; = F. variegatus, Perry, 1811,
= F. oblitus, Reeve, 1847.
' 891—-waitei Hedley, Fusus, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
Bapotio,o ply 3%
A. Adams has erroneously reported (Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1854, p. 316) Latirus strangei from Sydney.
Family MITRIDZ.
MITRA, Martyn, Univ. Conch., 1784, Expl. to pl. 19.
892—-acromialis Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
730, pl. 84, f. 85.
- 893—carbonaria Swainson, Bligh Cat. Append., 1822,
Dos Hedley, P.L.S.NS.W., Kats Noes pe +0)
and XXXViii., 1913, p:..d12.
894—-cookii ee Thes. Conch., iv., 1874, p. 7, pl.
304, f. 228; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvili., 1913,
p. 314.
-895— glabra Swainson, Exot. Conch., i., 1821, pl. 24;
Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1871, p. 89.
896—legrandi Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1875
(1876), p. 140; Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., 1i1.,
1900, s 29 text fey and PUAS., NiS/Wiexxxvink
1943. 314.
agents Smith, Proc. Zool. Soec., 1891, p. 440, pl.
ae, &. 12.
898—nodostaminea Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., viii., 1912,
pao pl, 43. £35.
899—pacifica Reeve, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1845, p. 52; Sow-
erby, Thes. Conch., iv., 1874, p. 27, vl. 370, £. 388;
Brazier, P.LS.NS.W., iv., 1880, p.. 429.
M 86 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
900—rhodia Reeve, Conch. Icon., ii., 1845, pl. 28, f. 225;
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xl, 1917, p:” 7a
fy Soy NG
901—-solida Reeve, Conch. Icon., ii., 1844, pl. 3, f. 18;
Forbes, Voy. Rattlesnake, i1., 1852, p. 365.
902—strangei Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 110, pl.
13, f. 4.
903—volucra Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p. 730,.
pl. 84, f. 84.
Angas (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 89) erroneously quot-
ed Mitra variabilis Reeve from Sydney.
MICROVOLUTA, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 34;
? Paradmete, Strebel, 1908.
904—australis Angas, op. cit., p. 35, pl. 5, f. 2; Hedley,.
Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1908, p. 371.
Family BUCCINDZA.
CADUCIFER, Dall, Smithson. Miscell. Coll., xlviii., 1904,.
pl. 136.
905—antiquata Hinds, Triton, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1844,
p. 21; T. coxi, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1872, p.
22, pl. 4>-f. 9; Hedley, PAUS.N.S.W-xn ee
p. 508. ,
COMINELLA, H. & A. Adams, Genera. Ree. Moll., i,
i853, ype LG:
906—alveolata Kiener, Buecinum, Coq. Viv., 1834, p.
al, pl. 10, f. 34; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877;
Det:
907—filicea Crosse & Fischer, Journ. de Coneh., xii.,
1864, p. 346, and xiii., 1865, p. 49, pl. 3, fo Day ite
Angas has erroneously recorded (Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867,
p. 189) C. adelaidensis from Middle Harbour. C. costata
was erroneously recorded by Schmeltz (fide Brazier,.
P.L.S.N.S.W., iv.,-1880, p. 390) from Sydney.
NODOPELAGIA, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1914, p.
Gals
908—brazieri Angas, Peristernia, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877,.
Deo LEL pol 26 in. ws
CYLLENE, Griffiths & Pidgeon, Mollusea, 1833, p. 597,
pl. 41.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 87
909—delicatula Sowerby, Pisania, Journ. of Malac.,
Mii eo Ol pl. 9 ft Eedley, PlsS.N-5.W.,
xxv, 1913, p, 316.
910—lactea Adams & Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1863, p.
422; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901, p. 19, pl.
Dat. KO;
Sowerby erroneously recorded (vide Hedley, P.L.S.-
N.S.W., xxxviii., 1918, p. 316) Phos terebra from Sydney.
EUTHRIA, Gray, Fig. Moll. Anim., iv., 1850, p. 67.
911—tabida Hedley, Phos., P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904,
wa. NOM? pl. Sh Hf. “1S:
Family FUSIDA.
FUSUS, Helbling, Abh. Privatges. Bohmen., iv., 1779, p-
~All 6.
912—brazieri Angas, Triton, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1869, p-
426.) 2,. f. 3.
913—schoutanicus May, Pisania, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm.,
1910 (1911), p. 389, pl. 14, f. 14.
MACULOTRITON, Dall. Smithson. Miscell. Coll., xlvii.,
1904, p. 136.
914—australis Pease, Cantharns, Am. Journ. Conch.,
vil., 1872, p. 21; Tryon, Man. Conch., iii., 1881, p.
160, pl. 78, £. 269; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli.,
ioriep. 111, pl 50; 528-30.
915—bracteatus Hinds, Triton, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1844,
p. 21; Clathurella waterhousex, Brazier, P.L.S.-
N.S.W., xxi., 1896, p. 345; Hedley, op. cit., xxiv.,
1399, 434, f. 7; xxx 1906, pp. 529.
916—gracilis Sowerby, Phos, Thes. Conch., iii., 1859, p.
pie we 222.76 307 tredley, P.las.N.SW., xxxix.,
Pip Vas. pla 64, ck, 19.
917—unicolor Angas, Cantharus, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867,
peeerOy pls Vs teeZ.
Angas erroneously recorded Cantharus assimilis Reeve
from Sydney (vide P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxi., 1908, p. 459).
FASCINUS, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 375.
918—typicus Hedley, op. cit., p. 376, f. 91.
Nassaria curta Gould, from Port Jackson, cannot now
Be Fecosuised (P1u.5.N.S.W., xxxviu., 1913, p. 317).
M 88 MARINE FAUNA, N.S. WALES.
Family NASSARIIDA.
NASSARIUS, Froriep in Dumeril, Zool. Analyt., 1806,
p. 167; Iredale, Proe. Malac. Soc., xi, 19iG pa
919—burchardi Philippi, Buccinum, Abbild. Beschr.,
l., 1849, p. 69> pl. Ziel
920—coronatus Bruguiére, Buccinum, Encyel. Meth.,
vers. (1), 1789, p. 277; Reeve, Conch. Icon., viii.,
1853, pl. 3, f. 20; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., iv., 1880,
Dp. 428.
Dole ipeaco tes Hedley, Arcularia, Ree. ‘AEE Mus.,
1907, p. 309) pl. Giggle
ooo aed aletes Lamarck, Buecinum, Anim. s. vert.,
. vil., 1822, p. 271; Eneyel. Meth., ver., 1816, pl.
394, f. 4; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 180.
923—jonasi Dunker, Buccinum, Zeit. Malak., iii., 1846,
p. 171; Philippi, Abbild. Beschr., 1849, iii., p. 66,
pl. 2, f. 10; Hedley, Journ. Roy. Soc., N.S.W.,
xlix., 1915, p. 52, f. 16; Nassa labecula, Adams,
Proce. Zool. Soc., 1851 (1852), p. 98. -
oe en ee Quoy & Gaim., Bueccinum, Astrolabe
Zool., ii., 1833, p. 450, pl. 32, 132233.
9o5-“apartineps Hedley, Arcularia, P. L.S.N.S OW) aoe
1915, p. 738, and xli., 1917, p. 712, pl. 49, £. 20.
926—pauperus Gould, Nassa, Proe. Boston Nat. Hist.
Soce., iii., 1850, p. 155, and U.S. Expl. Exped., xii.,
p. 262, ply IS Sd soa0),
‘927—-pauperatus Lamarck, Bueccinum, Anim. s. vert.,
vii., 1822, p. 278; Quoy & Gaim., Astrolabe Zool.,
li., 1833, p. 439, pl. 32, f: 5-7; Angas, Proe. Zool:
Soe, 1867, p. 190:
928—peritrema Ten. Woods, Nassa, P.L.S.N.S.W.. iv
1880, p.°21; pl. 4, fF. 5.
929—semigranosus Dunker, Buccinum, Zeitschr. Malak.,
li., 1846, p. 170; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W. =xexiaer
190, pt feo, Leone el oF
929a—semigranosus nigellus Reeve, Conch. Icon., viii.,
1854, pl. 26, £. 173.
930—spiratus Adams, Nassa, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1851
(1852), p. 106; Reeve, Conch. Jeon., yi ieas
pl. 2, f. 18; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1877) pa
Nassa decussata was erroneously recorded by A.
Adams from Brisbane Water (Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 89
xxxvill., 1918, p. 317). Frauenfeld erroneously re-
corded (Novara Zool., 1867, Moll., p. 5) Nassa inter-
media from Sydney. Nassa reposta was described by
Gould (Proce. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., viii., 1860, p. 323)
from Sydney. The type is lost, and the species unrecog-
nisable. Angas erroneously recorded (Proc. Zool. Soe.,
1867, p. 190) Nassa rufocincta and N. jacksoniana from
New South Wales.
Family PYRENIDA.
PYRENE, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 134.
931—acleonta Duclos, Columbella, Monogr., 1840, pl.
it. 3) 4: Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W:, xxxvii,, 1913,
CimevAle
932—alizone Melvill & Standen, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1901,
p. 402, pl. 21, f. 5; Hedley, op. cit., p. 321.
933—australis Gaskoin, Columbella, Proc. Zool. Soc.,
1851 (1852), p. 5; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xi., 1858,
Columbella, pl. 15, f. 78.
934—hbabylonica Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907,
Peasas, pleco67, £::16.
935—beddomei Petterd, Terebra, Journ. of Conch.,
1884, p. 142; C. attenuata, Angas (not eae
Proce. Zool. Soc., ST? p. 14, ple iy iy 4
936—filmere Sowerby, Columbella, Proce. Malac. Soe.,
iv., 1900;°p. 3,°pl 1) f. 8° Hedley) P.ES.N'S-W..,
mummies LOLS. p. dL9,
937—intexta oe Columbella, Proe. Zool. Soe.,
1851 (1852), p. 7; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xi, 1858,
PLAAW7 9 tet °88:
938—leucostoma Gaskoin, Columbella, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
1851 (1852), p. 4; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xi., 1859,
pl is4¢ £.. 220.
939—lincolnensis Reeve, Columbella, Conch. Icon., x1,
1859, pl. 29, f. 184; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867,
me 195,
940—peroniana Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 1918, p
318; C. bicinecta, Angas (not Gould), Proc. Zool.
See, lost, p. 12pls 1, Ff. 3.
941—-puella Sowerby, Columbella, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1844,
pew. Reeve, Conch.’ Icon., xi, 1858,"pl. 18; 65"
Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 235.
M 90 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
942—pulla Gaskoin, Columbella, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1851
(1852), p. 6; Reeve, Conch. Icon., xi., 1858, pl. 19,.
f. 106; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 195.
943—semiconvexa Lamarck, Buccinum, An. s. vert., vii.,
1822, p. 272; Kiener, Cog. Viv., 1834, p. 49, pl.
18, f. 60; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 194.
944tayloriana Reeve, Columbella, Conch. Icon., xi.,
1859, pl. 35, f. 225; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviil.,
1913, p. 320; C. albomaculata, Angas, Proc. Zool.
poe., 1867,.0, LA pls, ioe:
'945—tylere Griffiths & Pidgeon, Columbella, Anim.
Kingdom, xil., 1834, p. 596, pl. 37, f. 1; Angas,
Proe. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 181.
946—versicolor Sowerby, Columbella, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
18382, p. 119; and Thes. Conch., 1., 1844, p. 117,
bis pl. 37, f. 41; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1867, p.
194; var. atladona Duclos, Hist. Nat. Coa. Unive
1835, ple Pte
PSEUDAMYCLA, Pace, Proc. Malac. Soce., v., 1902, p. 255.
947—dermestoidea Lamarck, Buccinum, An. s. vert.,.
vli., 1822, p. 275; Kiener, Coq. Viv., 1834, p. 52,.
pl. D5, t 100: Pace, op. eit., p. 235, fig: C. lineata,
Brazier, 1877.
ZESOPUS, Gould, Proc. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., vu., 1860,.
p. 383.
948—australis Angas, Trunecaria, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
Dp. 172, ol 26r ao,
948a—cassandra Hedley, Daphnella, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix...
1904, p. 187, pl. 8) .; 87.
948b—pallidulus Hedley, Mitromorpha, P.L.S.N.S.W..,.
xxx, 1906,) ip.) 534,, pl. 32,14 26:
949—plurisulcatus Reeve, Columbella, Conch. Icon., xi.,.
1859, pl. 36, f. 283; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxii.,
1908, p. 457; AX. filosa, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc...
V86/7) qo: Talib poles: BE. Ge
ZAFRA, Adams, Ann. Nat. Hist. (3), vi., 1860, p. 331.
950—atkinsoni Ten. Woods, Mangelia, Proc. Roy. Soc.
Tasm., 1876 (1877), p. 141; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,.
xxxix., 1915, p. 744, pl. 83, f. 72.
950a—atkinsoni speciosa Angas, Columbella, Proe. Zool.
Soc., L8i7, wo. dopneols pas eee:
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 91
951—avicennia Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
(42.-pl. 8a)f, 68; 69:
952—fulgida Reeve, Columbella, Conch. Icon., xi., 1859,
pl. 28, £. 178; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviil., 1918,
p. 325; C. interrupta, Angas, 1865; C. angasi, Bra-
zier, 1871.
953—lurida Hedley, Pyrene, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxii., 1907,
PecowO, Sale Wey, eit 9.
(954—-smithi Angas, Columbella, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
p. 172, pl: 26, f. 7; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix..,.
Mt. (4c, Dl. G83,20 28d.
RETIZAFRA, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvill., 1913, p-
326. —
955—plexa Hedley, Columbella, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi.,.
1901, p.. 702, f. 25.
Family MURICID AS.
MUREX, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 746.
956—acanthopterus Lamarck, Encyel. Meth., vers., 1816,
pl. 417, f. 2; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 186.
957—angasi Crosse, Typhis, Journ. de Conch., xi., 1863,.
mr eo, pl..L. f; 2,
958—brazieri Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 171, pl.
26, £) 3. |
959—damicornis Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
Did1oct, 92.
960—denudatus Perry, Triplex, Conchology, 1811, pl.
7, f. 2; M. palmiferus, Angas, Proe. Zool. Soc.,
1867, p. 186.
‘961—-patagiatus Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., viii., 1912.
p. 151, pl. 43; £.'36.
Angas has erroneously recorded (Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877,.
p. 179) Murex cervicornis as from off Montagu Island.
TROPHON, Montfort, Syst. Conch., ii., 1810, p. 482.
962—carduelis Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 167,
pel, fT:
963—columnarius Hedley & May, Ree. Austr. Mus., vii.,
S963) p. 12h, pli 24, £. 22.
964—goldsteini Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm.,
1875 (1876), p. 136; Verco Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A.,
miewoyo, p2.971,--pl. 1,4: 4 5;.:dedlier, PinSe
Mow. xxvii. 1902, p. 18.
M 92 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
965—laminatus Petterd, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884, p.
1386; Tate & May, P.D.S.N.S.W.) xxv oo
352, pl. 23, f. 3; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
19035 p: 379.
966—licinus Hedley & Petterd, Murex, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
wi,, 1906, 2p: 21 9) plea erat. |
967—petterdi Crosse, Journ. de Conch., xviii., 1870, p.
303, and xix., 1871, p. 324, pl. 12, f. 2; Hedley,
PoL.S.N OS. W 4 xxxwail LoS gene
968—rudolphi Brazier, Peristernia, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix.,
1894, p. 166, pl. 14, f. 1.
969—simplex Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
Bolle) Say
970—stimuleus Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
7Noe joie Sys ais IG):
CRASPEDOTRITON, Dall, Smithson. Miscell. Coll., xlvii.,
1904, p. 119. 3
971—speciosus Angas, Triton, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1871,
p. 13, pl.1, £. 7; Hedley, .P.L.S.N.SIW cea
1913, p. 32.
ASPELLA, Morch, Mal. Blatt., xxiv., 1877, p. 24.
972—anceps Lamarck, Ranella, An. s. vert., vii., 1822,
p. 154; Kiener, Coq. Viv., 1842, p. 36, pl 4 f 2;
Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 180. —
973—undata Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi, 1907, p.
294, pl. 55, f. 15.
LATAXIENA, Jousseaume, Bull. Soe. Zool., vii., 1883,
p. 183.
974—imbricata Smith, Fusus, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool.,
xii, 1876, p. 540, pl. 30; £3 3:
TYPHIS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., 11., 1810, p. 614.
975—phillipensis Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 162,
pl. 10, f. 4; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
D..a02.
976—syringianus Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
p: 381 n, 94
XYMENE, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1914 (1915),
p. 471.
977—contracta Reeve, Buccinum, Conch. Icon., ii,
—©-1846, pl. 8, £538. :
\
MOLLUSCA——HEDLEY. M 93
978—hanleyi Angas, Trophon, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867,
Palliepl 13, £1. Medley, PjS.N.S:W.,. xl, 1917,
p. (12, pl. 49,. £. 21-24.
Family THAIDID&.
THAIS, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 54.
979—ambustulata Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., viii., 1912,
poe to2, pl. 44. £37.
980—succincta Martyn, Buccinum, Univ. Conch., 1784,
pl. 45; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 533,
pled. f. 31, 32, and Journ. Roy, Sec! N.S. W.,
xlix., 1915, p. 57, f. 19; Kesteven, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
ex 02. p So8,) pili 29% £0178:
Brazier has erroneously reported (P.L.S.N.S.W., v.,
1880, p. 481) Polytropa striata from Sydney. Angas has
erroneously reported (Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 191) Pur-
pura amygdala from Sydney.
AGNEWIA, Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1877
(1878), p. 29
981—pseudamye dala Hedley, Purpura, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
myn LOO3) p..099iplt-29,'f. 455:
982—tritoniformis Blainville, Purpura, Nouv. Ann. Mus.,
hS32, pg, 221° pl. 10, f. 10; Kesteven, PL.S.-
Ns.w. RVI, 1902, p. 533-8, pl 295 tee 27:
Adamsia typica, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p.
192; ? Cheletropis huxleyi, Forbes Voy. Rattle-
snake -i1., 1892, p. 385,-pl. 3, f. 9.
LEPSIELLA, Iredale, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1914
(1915), p. 474.
983—botanica nom. nov. for neglecta Angas, Purpura,
Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 110, pe 13, £. 3; Kest-
even, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1902, p. 714, pl. 36, f. 2;
ne P. neglecta, Michelotti, Nat. Verh. Holland,
apl..d, sect. 2, p. 219, 1847, fide T. Iredale.
ood. vitiosd propinqua Ten. Woods, Purpura, Proc. Roy.
Soe. Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 135); Hedley, P.L.S.-
Mon. <sxvnn 1913) p. 380" and xxxix,, 1915) p-
746, pl. 85, f. 88.
PROVEXILLUM, nom. nov. for Vexilla Swainson, Malac.,
1840, p. 300, not Vexillum, Bolten, Mus. Bolt.,
1798, p. 138.
M 94 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
985—vexillum Gmelin, Strombus, Syst. Nat., xuii., 1791,
p. 3520; Reeve, Conch. Icon., ili., Buecinum, 1846,
pk 210; f. hoe Hedley, P.LS.NS.W., XXV1., 1902,
Dp: 631.
RAPANA, Schumacher, Nouv. Syst., 1817, p. 214.
986—nodosa Adams, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1853 (1854), p
98; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 1918, p. 331,
pl, 197 t.. 30)
CORALLIOPHILA, H. & A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., i
1853; p.. bd.
987—lischkeana Dunker, Rapana, Index, Moll. Mar.
Jap. 1882, p.' 43; pl. 1,1 ly 20 pl Tai
Purpura sertata, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
1903,) Dp. 382.51. .00,000.
DRUPA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 55.
988—chaidea Duclos, Purpura, Ann. Sci. Nat., xxvi.,
1832, p. 106, vl. 1, f. 4; Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe.,
1867, Pp. 191.
989—marginalba Blainville, Purpura, Nouv. Ann. Mus.
(3), i, 1832; p. 219, pl 10, £. 6; Kiener) Coq
Purpura, 1835, p% 24) ply 5; tet ike
Angas ‘has incorrectly recorded (Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877,
p. 180) Ricinula adelaidensis from Jervis Bay.
Sub-Order PULMONATA (990-1003) .
Family ELLOBIIDA.
Pea Sa Swainson, Proe. Roy. Soc., V.D. Land,
, 1855, p. 44.
$00 “aduattim bgeer Cassidula, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1854,
(1855), . Hedley, P.LS.NS.W., xxx,, 1906,
pilosn, a se £30;
MARINULA, King, Zool. Journ., yv., 1835, p. 348.
991—-xanthostoma Adams, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1854 (1855),
p. 35; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1902, p. 704,
pl. 34, f. 18; Connolly, Ann. S. Afric. Mus., xiii.,
1915," Pp.) 16,
PHYTIA, Gray, London Medical pea se xv., 1821,
p. 231.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 95
992—-ornata Ferussac, Auricula, Tab. Syst., 1821, p.
103; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviil., 1913, p. 334,
and xli., 1917, p. 714, pl. 50, f. 26, 27; A. australis,
Quoy & Gaim., Astrolabe Zool., ii., 1833; p. 169,
pl. 18, f. 34, 38.
993—sulcata Adams, Laimodonta, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1854
(1855), p. 34; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 1913,
Deoos, pl. 19. fa86.
Angas recorded, perhaps erroneously (Proe. Zool. Soe.,
1867, p. 231) Ophicardelus quoyi from Port Jackson.
PLECOTREMA, H. & A. Adams, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1853
(1854), p. 120.
N.S.W.,. xvill., 1894, D. 423, f.
LEUCONOPSIS, Hutton, Trans. N.Z. Init.,
(1884), p. 213.
995—inermis Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1901, p. 722,
pl. 48, f. 15.
Family ONCHIDIIDZ.
ONCIS, Plate, Zool. Jahrb., vii., Anat., 1894, p. 164.
996—-chameleon Brazier, Onchidium, P.L.S.N.S.W., 3
1886, p. 729.
Family AMPHIBOLID A.
SALINATOR, Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900, p. 511.
997—fragilis Lamarck, Ampullaria, An. s. vert., vi.,
1822, p. 179; Quoy & Gaim., Astrolabe Zool., u
1833, p. 201, p. 15, f. 10-16.
Family SIPHONARITDA.
SIPHONARIA, Sowerby, Genera Shells, 1824, fase. xxi.
998—bifurcata Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1856, pl. 5,
ee.
ix., 1856, pl. 1, f. 2;
999—scabra Reeve, Conch. Icon.,
bedlicey, PALS.Nis.W., xii; 1917, p. 715, pl. 50;
£32,
1000—virgulata Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix., 1915, p.
imeape oo, fF, 96S 97, 98.
1001—zebra Reeve, Conch. Icon., ix., 1856, pl. 5, f. 21.
a. 1883
M 96 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES,
From New South Wales, Angas has erroneously re-
corded (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 232) S. atra, cochleari-
formis, denticulata and funiculata.
KERGUELENTIA, Mabille & Rochefort, Miss. Scient. Cap.
Horn, 1889,.p.3o 24.
1002—stowe Verco, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., xxx., 1906,
p: 223, pl. 8, £, 3-8:
GADINIA, Gray, Philos. Mag., lxili., 1824, p. 274.
1003—conica Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 115, pl.
18, f. 27; Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soe., ix., 1910, p.
78. .
Sub-Order OPISTHOBRANOHIA (1004-1161).
Family ACTEONIDZ.
ACTEON, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii, 1810, p. 314.
1004—austrinus Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 628,
a 47, f. 2; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
| » Oo.
nos. stosent Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 535,
pl. 33, £42: )
PUPA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, 110.
1006—affinis ‘Adams, Solidula, ee Zool. Soe., 1854
(1855), p. 61; Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p-
630, pl. 41, f iL.
1007—coccinata Reeve, Tornatella, Proe. Zool. Soc.,
1842, p. 60; Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., iv., 1879 (1880),
p. 429.
1008—nivea Angas, Buccinulus, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1871,
De 19 pl. Wega
LEUCOTINA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), v., 1860,
p. 406.
1009—ameena Adams, Monoptygma, Proce. Zool. Soc.,
1851 (1853), p. 223; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii.,
ISB ron Sia
1010—australis Angas, Agatha, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1871,
D: Ld, Dive tee
1011—concinna Adams, Monoptygma, Thes. Conch., i
1854, p. 819, pl. 172, f. 34; Dall & Bartsch, Proce.
Nat. Museum, xxx., 1906, p. 329. pl 19) Eee
Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvili., 1913, p. 336.
- MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY, M 97
1012—micra Pritchard & Gatliff, Turbonilla, Proc. Roy.
Soe. Vict., xiii, 1900, p. 184, pl. 21, f. 1; Hedley,
PSN SW yi sexix., 1904, p.. 187)
1013—pura Adams, Monoptygma, Thes. Conch., 11., 1854,
poe te20) pk Sky 2, ff: 23+ ‘Hedley; “PALS:N:S: W.,
xxxyil., 1913, p. 335; L. esther, Angas.
1014—-speciosa Adams, Monoptygma, Thes. Conch., i1.,
1854, p. 818, pl. 172, f. 24-25.
1015—sinuata Angas, Myonia, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p.
ae lve, to KS:
CINGULINA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), vi., 1860,
p. 414.
1016—diaphana Verco, Trans. Roy. Soe., S.A., xxx., 1906,
pena. ple 4.4. 11.
1017—circinata Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist (3), vi.,
1860, p. 414; Dall & Bartsch, Proc. Nat. Mus.,
xxx., 1906, p. 359, pl. 33, f. 6; C. brazieri, Angas,
Proc. Zool. Soec., 1877, pl. 5, f. 5, p. 35; ? Chem-
nitzia circumdata, Gould, Proc. Boston. Soe. Nat.,
vil., 1861, p. 401; Terebra hhedleyi, Smith, P.L.S.-
N:S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 211.
1018—spina Crosse & Fischer, Turritella, Journ. de
Conch., xiul., 1864, p. 347, and xiii., 1865, p. 44,
pl. 3, f. 18-14; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soec., 1871, p.
91; Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1890, p. 278.
MATHILDA, Semper, Journ. de Conch., xiii., 1865, p. 330.
1019—decorata Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
aoe, 1, 19.
1020—rose Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1901, p. 721, pl.
48, f. 13-14.
oes Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc.,' 1871, p. 15,
pik t. 8,
Family PYRAMIDELLIDA.
SYRNOLA, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), v., 1860,
p. 405.
1022—aurantiaca Angas, Styloptygma, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
rep LIZ plea f. 14,
1023—hbifasciata Ten. Woods, Obeliscus, Proc. Roy. Soe.,
Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 145; O. juecundus, Angas,
Pree. Zool. Soe., 1877, p.,173, pl. 26, £ 10.
M 98 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
1024—-macrocephala Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
D. o62) £.u8p.
1025—manifesta Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., viii, 1912, |
p. 143, pl..42) £42394) |
1026—tincta Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 15, pl. 1,
fe uel
OSCILLA, Adams, Proe. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 310.
1027—tasmanica Ten. Woods, Parthenia, Proce. Roy. Soc.,
Tasmania, 1876 (Feb., 1877), p.. 34: O. ligata,
Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, Aug. paiiaeee
26 et sel
MYXA, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 362.
1028—exesa Hedley, op. cit., p. 363, f. 86.
ODOSTOMIA, Fleming, Edinb. Encyel., vii., 1813, p. 76.
1029—angasi Tryon, Man. Conch., viii., 1886, p. 362, pl.
79, f. 68; O. lactea, Angas (not Dunker, preoc.),
Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 112, plpiletaaeee
1030—australis Angas, Agatha, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871,
| OMe cS iemey Ob een) Kanye geese),
1031—henni Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p. 171,
pl. 14, f. 8; P. perspectiva Hedley, P.L.S.N.8.W.,
xxvii.) 1902... OL pl. songs so
1032—ignava Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxiii., 1908, p. 470,
pl. 40) 632:
1033—indistincta Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p.
AA, pla ae 7:
1034—levis Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 112, pl. 13,
ifs JNO)
1035—nugatoria Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
DB? 303.0. OT.
1036—opaca Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p. 524,
pl 33, £. 41,
1037—pascoei Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 112, pl.
13, f. 12; O. kreffti, Angas, op. cit., f. 13; Hed-
ley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xli, 1917, p. 716, pli 46;aheee
1038—portseaensis Gatliff & Gabriel, Turbonilla, Proce.
Roy. Soc., Vict., xxiv., 1911, p. 188, plo 4G
1039—simplex Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p. 15, pl.
ie ee cage 03
1040—suprasculpta Ten. Woods, Rissoina, Proe. Roy.
Soc., Vict., xiv., 1877 (1878), p. 57; Tate & May,
P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1901, p. 383, pl. 26, f. 68.
MOLLUSCA.—HEDLEY. M 99
STYLOPSIS, Adams, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), v., 1860,
p. 406.
1041—pulchellus De Folin, Les Fonds de la Mer, 1., 1870,
peo, pl. 24, £..2.
TIBERIA, Monterosato, Atti Acc. Palermo, 1875, p. 5.
1042—nitidula Adams, Syrnola, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
1860 (38), oo ag 330 ; ee & Petterd, Rec.
Austr. Mus., 1906, ZG le comtre ley,
1043—pusilla Peek Gacasis. Dall & Bartsch, Proc. Nat.
Muscam -xxx., 1906..p; 325, pl. 26; £2 8:
TURBONILLA, Beco, Hist. Nat. Eur. Merid., 1826, p. 224.
1044—beddomei Petterd, Chemnitzia, J ourn. of Conch.,
iv., 1884, p. 186; T. scalarina, Brazier, P.L.S.-
N.S.W., xix. 1894, p> 170, pl. 14,.£. 5; Gathit &
Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., xxiv., 1911, p. 195.
1045—brevis Pritchard & Gatlift, Proce. Roy. Soe., Viet:
mat L900, p. 135, pl..21, £. 4.
1046—consanguinea: Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc, Soup:
alee 35, £7 1%.
1047—constricta Smith, op. cit., p. 441, pl. 35, f. 8.
1048—fischeri Smith, op. cit., p. 441, pl. 35, f. 16.
1049—fusca Adams, Chemnitzia, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1853
(1855), p. 181; T. festiva, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soce.,
1877, p. 35, pl. 5, f. 4; T. admiranda, Tate & May,
rans. Roy: Soc), S.A, xxiv., 1900, p: 98.
1050—hofmani Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 183;
Tryon, Man. Conch., vili., p. 334, pl. 76, f. 41;
T. nitida, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 112,
ple lak! 9:
1051—mariz Ten. Woods, Proce. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1875
(1876), p. 144; Tryon, Man. Conch., viii., 1886, p.
334, pl. 76, f. 42; Whitelegge, Journ. Roy. Soc.,
NS W.,' xxiii, 1889, p. 263.
1052—-scalpidens Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 489,
pl. 32, f. 1; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
p. 362, f. 84.
1053—varicifera Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc., 8.A., xxu., 1898,
p. 85, pl. 4, bis f. 7; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus.,
vi., 1905, p. 42.
Family STROMBIFORMID&.
EULIMA, Risso, Hist. Nat. Eur. Merid., 1826, p. 123.
1054—articulata Sowerby, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1834, p. 8,
and Coneh. Illustr., f. 12; Mort, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
mma. AIOS, p. 312.
M 100 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
1055—coxi Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1899,
Dp. 2508/0. Tienes
1056—fricata Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p. 290,
pl. 55, £. 14.
1057—mucronata Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xv., 1866, pl.
6./f. 49: }
1058—munita Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 358,
if (8a
1059—proxima Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xv., 1866, pl. 6,
f. 48; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvin., 1913p 2em
MELANELLA, Bowdich, Element Conchology, 1822, p. 27.
1060—commensalis Tate, Eulima, Trans. Roy. Soce., S.A.,
xxl, 1898, p. 82, pl. 4, bis f. 2; Hedley, Mem.
Austr: Mus; ‘iv., 1905, "p..359:
1061—petterdi Beddome, Eulima, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm.,
1882 (1883), p. 168; HE. indiscreta, Tate, Trans.
Roy. Soec., S.A., xxil., 1898, p. 82, pl. 4, bis £. 3.
STROMBIFORMIS, Da Costa, Brit. Conchology, 1778, p-
107; Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soc., xi, 1915, p. 292;
1062—aciculus Gould, Stilifer, Proce. Boston. Soc. Nat.
Hist., ii., 1849, p. 83; E. vitrea, Adams, Thes.
Conch., 11., 1854, p. 799, pl. 169,.f. 35; Angas,
Proce. Zool. Soec., 1867, p. 201.
1063—acutissimus Sowerby, Leiostraca, Conch. Icon.,
xv., 1866, pl. 2, f. 10; L. lesbia, Angas, Proc. Zool.
Soc., 1871, p. 16, pl. 1, f. 14; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
Xxkvill.,, L913, \p. 295:
1064—inustus Hedley, Leiostraca, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx.,.
1906, p.-520,. ph n33, £43
1065—loddere Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
360, £. 82.
1066—perexiguus Tate & May, Rissoa, Trans. Roy. Soc.,
S.A., xxiv., 1900, p. 100, and P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi.,
1901, p. 394, pl. 2dicf, 15.
PSEUDORISSOINA, Tate & May, Trans. Roy. Soc., 8.A.,
xxv OO, ae oe:
1067—elegans Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p. 51,
Topline
1068—exigua Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
SO, At Sa,
CHILEUTOMIA, Tate & Cossmann, Journ. Roy. Soc.,
N.SiW.,) sexi.; 1898, py 40att ,
MOLLUSGA.—-HEDLEY, M 101
1069—anceps Hedley, Menon, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900,
moe 0 andra0b, pl. 3, 2. .0,16,; 7.
STILIFER, Broderip, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1832, p. 60.
1070—brazieri Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 173, pl.
2Gset, AZ,
1071—lodderz Petterd, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884, p.
140; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxv., 1900, p. 92, text
fig. ; §. erotaphis, Watson, Chall. Zool., .xv.,
1886, p.. 525, pl. 37, f. 10 (mot E. margimata, as
indicated P.L.S.N.S8.W., xxvi., 1901, p. 381).
1072—petterdi Tate & May, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A., xxiv.,
HoD0) po. 96; Hedley, P.L.S.N:S.W:, xxv., 1901, p:
eR aes
Apicalia guentheri, Angas, was erroneously ascribed
to New South Wales, vide P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxviii., 19138,
P2906.
EULIMELLA, Forbes, Ann. Nat. Hist., xiv., 1846, p. 412.
1073—anabathron Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxx., 1906, p.
we pl 3a, t. 39, 40:
1074—-moniliformis Hedley & Musson, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
mya, 1891 p.. 247, pl. 19, f.. 1-3.
1075—pulchra Brazier, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1894, p. 170,
pieme tO) amd xoxvil,, 1902)ip. 18.
1076—turrita Petterd, Aclis, Journ. of Conch., iv., 1884,
p. 140. Tate S& May, P.S.N'S.W., xxvi-, 1901; p.
384, pl. 25, f. 38; Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi.,
1905, p. 42.
Family ARCHITECTONICIDA.
ARCHITECTONICA, Bolten, Mus. Bolt., 1798, p. 78.
1077—atkinsoni Smith, Solarium, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1891,
pal, “ph 35, £.-19.
1078—layardi Adams, Philippia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1854,
pial Aneas, Proc. Zool Soc., 1871,.p: 92:
1079—lutea Lamarck, Solarium, An. s. vert., vii., 1822,
p. 5;>Kiener, Coq. Viv..,: ae Dos plod ae
Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 201.
1080—maxima, Philippi, Solarium, Zeit Malak., v., Uses,
p. 170; and Conch. Cab., ii., 1853, p. 6, pl. 1, f. 2, 3.
1081—perspectiva Linné, tecene Syst. Nat., xe. 1758,
p. 757; Hanley, Thes. Conch., sb eee Ko ass D. 298, pl.
253, f. 36-38; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 184.
M 102 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES,
1082—reevei Hanley, Solarium, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1862,
p. 204, and Thes. Conch., ili., 1863, p. 234, pl. 250,
f. 9-10.
HELIACUS, D’Orbigny, Moll. Cuba, ii., 1841, p. 68.
10838—crenellus Linné, Turbo, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 759;
S. chemnitzi, Kiener Coq. Viv., 1839, p. 12, pl. 4,
f. 8; T. infundibuliformis, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soce.,
e 1877, p. 184.
1084—foveolatus Tate, Torinia, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A.,
eve LOVS a. 191, le ib f. 13; Hedley, P.IL.S8.-
NS.W., XXV., 1900, 1 93.
1085—stamineus Gincan: Toei: Syst. Nat., xa yo
p. 3575; Hanley, Thes. Conch., ii1., 1863, p. 242,
pl. 254, f. 95-7; Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1871,
js Bes
DISCOHELIX, Dunker, Palxontographia, i., 1847, p. 182.
1086—meridionalis Hedley, Omalaxis, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iv., 1903, p. 351, f. 74; Iredale, Proc. Malae. Soe:
Ix. LOMA, pe. 250.
Family TORNATINIDAD.
RETUSA, Brown, Illustr. Conch. Gt. Brit., 1827, Expl.,
‘Ol, Be.
1087—apicina Gould, Tornatina, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., vii., 1859, p. 189; T: brenchleyi, Angas, Prog
Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 40, pl. 5, £. 20; Us -awenaeimes
Watson, Chall. Zool. xv., 1886, p. 658, pl. 49, f.
5; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxvili., 1913, p. 337.
1088—exserta Hedley, Tornatina, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv
19085 ols pk lOS:
1089—hofmani Angas, Tornatina, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1877,
D. OO, Duo twos
CYLICHNINA, Monterosato, Nom. Gen. spec. medit., 1884,
p. 148.
1090—atkinsoni Ten. Woods, Cylichna, Proc. Roy. Soe.
Tasm., 1876 (1877), p. 156: 1902) ps 11 3Sseae
1091—iredaleana Hedley, Retusa, PLSNS.W. XXXIX.,
1915.9!) To2,. pl yori a: 94.
Angas erroneously reported (Proc. Zool. Soe., 1867, p.'
226) Tornatina fusiformis from Port Jackson.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 103
RHIZORUS, Montfort, Conch. Syst., ii., 1810, p. 338.
1092—rostratus Adams, Bulla, Thes. Conch., 11., 1850, p.
596, pl. 125, f. 154; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus.,
iy., 1903, p. 394, £. 109.
1093—tragula Hedley, Volvula, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
1903p. 395, £., 110.
Family RINGICULIDA.
RINGICULA, Deshayes, An. s. vert. (2), viil., 1838, p. 323.
1094—denticulata Gould, Proe. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist.,
vil., 1860, p. 325; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxxix.,
HOt pa ioo, pl. Sar £95.
1095—doliaris Gould, op. ecit., p. 324; Watson, Chall.
Fool, xv., 1886, p:-634, pl.47, £. 8.
Angas erroneously recorded (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1871, p.
98) R. arctata, R. caron and R. exserta from Sydney.
PUGNUS, Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., ii., 1896, p. 106.
1096—parvus Hedley, op. cit., p. 106, pl. 23, f. 1; May,
Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1910, p. 311; Oliver, Trans.
N.Z. Inst., xlvu., 1914 (1915), p. 542.
Family SCAPHANDRIDA.
CYLICHNELLA, Gabb., Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Philad.,
Mei, Dp. 20.
1097—arachis Quoy & Gaimard, Bulla, Astrolabe Zool.,
eieao, Dp. ool, pl. 26, tf. 28-30.
Toa el ooamns ’ Angas, Cylichna, Proc. Zool Soe, Asi
peso pl. 26, t. 19;
1099—ordinaria Smith, Cylichna, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1891,
peteaZ, pless, £. 21.
1100—protumida Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
pease, t, b12.
1101—tenuis Hedley, Cylichna, Ree. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905,
ped, t7 22.
1102—thetidis Hedley, Cylichna, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv.,
rota. ooo, te Lit.
Smith has erroneously recorded (Proce. Malae. Soe., 1.,
1894, p. 60) Seaphander gracilis Watson from 410 fath-
—oms off Sydney.
Family AKERIDZ.
BULLARIA, Rafinesque, Anal. Nat., 1815, p. 142; Bulla,
fume Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 725, not Bulla,
Linné, op. cit., p. 427.
M 104 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES.
1103—ampulla Linné, Bulla, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 727;
(?) Watson, Chall. Zool., xv., 1886, p. 637.
1104—botanica Hedley, 1918, nom. mut. for B. australis,
Gray, Ann. Philos.,. xxv., 1825, p.” 408) Sites
australis, Ferussac, Dict. Class. Nat. Hist., iii.,
1822, p. 575; Brazier, P.L.S.N.8. W.)°x = 16seneue
89
1105—incommoda Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1891, p. 442,
Pik 3d, t. 203
1106—punctulata A. Adams, Bulla, Thes. Conch., ii.,
1850, p. 604; B. ovula, Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvi.,
1868, pl. 2, f. 5; B.-solida, Sowerby, op. eit., pl. 4,
fe Oe las magdelus, Angas, Proce. Zool. Soe., 1867,
Dp. 297 « B. angasi, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xv., 1893,
Dp. 347, pl. 36, 4 32,33.
CYLINDROBULLA, Fischer, Journ de Conch., v., 1856,
1 2
1107—fischeri Adams & Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1864,
p37; Hedley, P..S.N.S.W., xxyi., 1908, qoueGuee
pl 29,0 Se 9:
AKERA, Muller, Zool. Dan. Prod., 1776, p. xxix.
1108—soluta Gmelin, Bulla, Syst. Nat., xiii., 1791, p.
3434; Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xv., 1893, p. 378, pl.
42, f. 18.
HAMINGA, Turton & Kingston, Natural History ee
seein 1830; Iredale, Proc. Malac. Soc., xi., 1914,
Dp. 172.
1109—brevis Quoy & Gaim, Bulla, Astrolabe Zool., i
1833, p. 358, pl. 26, f. 36, 37; Angas, Procwoan
Soc., 1867, p. 227. :
1110—crocata Pease, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1860, p. 19; Sow-
erby,. Conch. Icon., xvi., 1868;.pl. 5, 1. 295) 2a
Proc. Zool. Socy ASii,, p. dca:
1111—cuticulifera Smith, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist (4),
S72, ps. 00, and ‘Alert, Zool., 1884, p. Sis is 6
i le,
1112—tenera Adams, Bulla, Thes. Conch., ii., 1850, p
588, pl. 124, f. 108; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soe eiaiies
p. 98:
Family APLUSTRIDAL.
APLUSTRUM, Schumacher, Essai Nouv. Syst., 1817, p.
63.
MOLLUSCA—-HEDLEY. M 105
1113—brazieri Angas, Diaphana, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877,
Eeucompiee26; 520; Hedley, F.iiS.N Ss W., xxvil.,
V802, pb, pl. 3, £! 36:
HYDATINA, Schumacher, Essai. Nouv. Syst., 1817, p. 57.
1114—einctoria Perry, Conchology, 1811, pl. 40, f. 1; EL.
albocincta, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1877, p. 189.
1115—circulata Martyn, Bulla, Univ. Conch., 1784, pl. 95.
1116—exigua Hedley, Ree. Austr. Mus., vii., 1912, p.
158; pl. 45, f. 46.
1117—physis Linné, Bulla, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 727;
sowerby, Thes: Conch., 11., 1850, p. 565, pl. 120,
f. ‘9-11.
BULLINULA, Swainson, Malacology, 1840, p. 360.
1118—ziczac Muhlfeldt, Voluta, Ges. Nat. Fr. Berlin,
vii, 1818,.p..5; B. lineata, Brazier, P.L.S.N:8.W..,
mer sso," p, 92:
MICROMELO, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xv., 18938, p. 391.
1119—guamensis Quoy & Gaim., Bullea, Zool. Uranie
@eblyse.,L825,0p. 416; pl. 66;-£).10;, 11) 12 .oenn,
Polo Ns. W., «xs 1896; p20.
Family PHILINIDZ.
PHILINE, Ascanius, K. Vet. Ac. Handl., xxxii., 1772, p.
gol.
1120—angasi Crosse & Fischer, Bullea, Journ. de Conch.,
<i. [865, pp. 38, pli 2, 1.83 Medley, Ree. Austr.
Mus., viii., 1912, p. 159, pl. 44, f. 42, 43.
1121—oscitans Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
pole, pl Gi, fT.
1122—+tteres Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p. 398,
fo pel 3.
1123—trapezia Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxvi., 1902, p. 704,
pl. 34, f. 22-24.
Family CAVOLINIDA.
CAVOLINA, Abilgaard, Skr. Nat. Selsk., i., 1796, p. 175;
Sykes, Proc. Malaec. Soe., vii., 1906, p. 5.
1124 cibbosa D’Orbigny, Voy. Am. Merid., v., 1836, p.
apt 5, £.°16, 20; Pelseneer, Chall.) Zool., xxii,
1888, <p. 82.:
M 106 MARINE FAUNA, N. 8S. WALES.
1125—-globulosa Gray, Cat. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1850, p. 8;
Pelseneer, op. cit., p. 81.
1126—inflexa Lesueur, Hyalea, Nouv. Bull. Soe. Philom.,
i1., 1818, pl. 5, f. 3; Pelseneer, op. ¢ituagmeem
1127—longirostris Blainville, Hyalea, Dict. Sci. Nat.,
xxli., 1821, p. 81; Pelseneer, op. cit., p. 79.
1128—strangulata Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, p.
299, pl. 54,'f. 18; ? C. ‘couthouy1; DallSnaieaee
Miscell. Coll., 1., 1908, p. 502; Tesch, Das Tierreich,.
1913, p. 44.
1129—telemus Linné, Monoculus, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p.
635; C. tridentata, Pelseneer, op. cit., p. 83.
1130—uncinata D’Orbigny, Voy. Am. Merid., v., 1836,
p. 93, pl. 5, f. 11, 15; Pelseneer, op. cit) apseaas
DIACRIA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 203.
1131—quadridentata Blainville, Hyalea, a Sei. Nat...
xxli., 1821, p. 81; Pelseneer, op. cit., fhe:
1132—trispinosa Blainville, op. cit., p. 82; Belsencer, op.
Cit, 109 fo,
SPIRATELLA, Blainville, Dict. Sci. Nat., ix., 1817, p. 407.
1133—bulimoides D’Orbigny, Atlanta, Voy. Am. Merid.,
v., 1836; p. 179, pl. 12, f. 36-38: Pelsemeerieope
Cits, p. 30. .
1134— inflata D’Orbigny, op. cit., p. 17, pl. 2, f. 16, 17;
Pelseneer, op. cit., p. 17.
1135—lesueuri D’Orbigny, op. cit., p. 177, pl. 20, f. 12-
15; Pelseneer, op. cit., p. 24.
1136—retroversa Fleming, Mem. Wern. Nat. Hist. Soc.,
iv., 1823, p. 498, pl. 15, f. 2; Vayssiere, Results:
Camp. Scient. Monaco, Fase., xlvii., 1915, p. 142,
pl. 8, f. 150-160; L. trochiformis, Hedley, Mem.
Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, 95,299:
CLIO, Linné, Syst. Nat., xii., 1767, p. 1094.
1137—pyramidatus Linné, op. cit.; Pelseneer, op. cit.,
p. 63. ¥
CRESEIS, Rang, Ann. Sci. Nat., xiii., 1828, p. 302.
1138—acicula Rang, op. cit., p. 318, pl. 17, f. 6; Pel-
seneer, op. cit., p. 51.
1139—virgula Rang, ‘op. Git.,."D. 3 16, ee 17, {f. 2; Pel
seneer, op. cit., p. 48.
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY. M 107
HYALOCYLIS, Fol., Arch. Zool. Exper., iv., 1875, p. 177.
1140 striata Rang, Creseis, op. cit., p. 315, pl. 15; f. 7;
Pelseneer, op. cit., p. 54.
STYLIOLA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 203.
1141—-subula Quoy & Gaim., Gisbdere Ann. Sci. Nat.
Het wS2if, p, 233, pl. 8D, f. 123
VAGINELLA, Daudin, Bull. Soc. Philom., 1800, p. 145.
1142—urceolaris Morch, Cuvieria, Cat. Conch. Kierulf,
1850, p. 32, pl. 1, f. 8; Vayssiere, Results Camp.
Scient. Monaco, Fasc. xlvii., 1915, pl. 2, f. 32 bis;
Cuvierina columella, Brazier, Cat. Marine Shells:
Aastealia i. 13892. p. 32.
Family DORIDIIDZ.
CHELIDONURA, Adams, Thes. Conch., ii., 1850, p. 561.
1143—adamsi Angas, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 116, pl.
iS yesiomae
Family OXYN@IDA.
OXYNG, Rafinesque, Anal. Nat., 1819, p. 143.
1144—delicatula G. & H. Nevill, Journ. Asiat. Soc.,
mexyl, LS69, p. 67, pl. 13, 2 5; Angas, Proce. Zool.
Soe., 1877, p. 190.
Family TETHYDZ.
TETHYS, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 653.
1145—angasi Sowerby, Aplysia, Conch. Icon., xvii., 1869,
ple Ge f. 35,
1146—excavata Sowerby, op. cit., pl. 3, f. 8.
1147—hyalina Sowerby, op. cit., pl. 4, f. 13.
1148—norfolkensis Sowerby, op. cit., pl. 10, f. 42; Hed-
ieee roe NS.) xxx), 1906. py 536, pl. 33) &
33, 34. |
1149—sowerbyi Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xvi., 1896, p. 101,
plas. 207 21.
1150—sydneyensis ‘Sowerby, Oe Cll Wile (eke ole
NOTARCHUS, Cuvier, Regn. Anim., i1., a Ds cue:
1151—glaucus Cheeseman, Aclesia, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1878,
pect, pl. is, f 4: Hedley, P:L:S.N.S.W., xxv,
1900, p. 97, pl. 4.
M 108 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
DOLABELLA, Lamarck, Syst. An. s. vert., 1801, p. 62.
1152—scapula Martyn, Lepas, Univ. Conch., 1786, pl.
99; Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867, p. 22h
DOLABRIFERA, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1847, p. 162.
1153—brazieri Sowerby, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1870, p. 250;
Hedley; P.L.S.N.S.W., xli., 1917; p. Tit; = ieee
f. 25; D. jacksoniensis, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xvi.,
1896, p. 120, pl. 44, f. 38-41.
Family NOTOBRANCHAEID JS.
NOTOBRANCH GA, Pelseneer, Bull. Sci. Nord. (2),
: 1886, p. 224.
1154—inopinata Pelseneer, Chall. Jools xix, 1887, 3p
AQ ple Our
Family CLIONIDAL.
CLIONE, Pallas, Spic. Zool., x., 1774, p. 28.
1155—longicaudata Souleyet, Bonite Toul. , 185258
286, Moll; pl. 14, £. 17-21. |
Family PLEUROBRANCHAEID A8.
PLEUROBRANCHUS, Cuvier, Ann. Hist. Nat., v., 1804,
Dp: 2to:
1156—angasi Smith, Alert Zool., 1884, p. 88, pl. 6, f. K.
1157—maculatus Quoy & Gaimard, Pleurobranchidium,
Astrolabe Zool. ii., 1838, p. 301, pl. 22, f. 11, 14.
1158—punctatus Quoy & Gaim., op. cit., p. 299, pl. 22,
f. 15-19.
OSCANIUS, Gray, Proc. Zool., Soc., 1847, p. 163.
1159—hilli Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xix., 1896, p. 127, pl. 7.
EUSENELOPS, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xvi., 1896, p. 228.
1160—luniceps Cuvier, Pleurobranchus, Regn. Anim.
Eds nii., 1830, p. 59, pl. 14, toh (2.
P.LS.NS.W., xxi; 1896, p, iG; Pace, Pr 0c. i
Soc, iv., 1901, p, 2022 4, fig.
Family UMBRACULIDA.
UMBRACULUM, Schumacher, Essai Nouv. Test., 1817,
p. 59. er
1161—umbella Martyn, Lepas, Univ. Conch., 1786, pl
102; O. indica, Angas, Proe. Zool. Soe., 1867, p. 228.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 109
Suborder NUDIBRANCHIATA (1162-1201).
Family AKOLIDIADAL.
CORYPHELLA, Gray, Fig. Moll. Anim., iv., 1850, p. 109.
1162—foulisi Angas, Aolis, Journ. de Conch., xu., 1864,
p64, pl, Git. 3.
1163—macleayi Angas, op. cit., p. 65, pl. 6, f. 4.
Ajolis cacaotica, Stimpson (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philad., vii., 1856, p. 388) has not again been recognised.
RIZZOLIA, Trinchese, Rend. Acad. Bologna, 1877, p. 62.
1164—australis Bergh, Chall. Zool., x., 1884, p. 27, pl. 9,
feed 25:
FLABELLINA, Cuvier, Regn. Anim., 1849, 3 Ed., Expl.
tor pl. 30; bis. f. 2.
1165—ianthina Angas, op. cit., p. 66, pl. 6, f. 6.
1166—newcombi Angas, op. cit., p. 68, pl. 6, f. 8.
iie7—ormata Angas, op. cit., p. 67, pl. 6, f. 7.
FIONA, Alder & Hancock, in Forbes and Hanley, Brit.
} Moll., 1853, p. x. footnote.
1168—marina Forskal, Limax, Descr. Anim., 1775, p. 99;
Basedow & Hedley, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.A., xxix.,
1905, p. 186.
GLAUCILLA, Bergh, Dansk. Vidensk. Selsk. Skrift. (5),
vu., 1867, p. 105.
1169—atlantica Forster, Glaucus, Voy. Resolution, 1777,
p. 49; Basedow & Hedley, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.A.,
xxix), 1905, p. 136,
JANUS, Verany, Rev. Zool., 1844, p. 302.
1170—sanguineus Angas, op. cit., p. 63, pl. 6, f. 5; Base-
dow & Hedley, op. cit., p. 137.
DOTO, Oken, Lehrb. Naturg., iii., 1815, p. 278.
1171—australis Angas, Melibea, op. cit., p. 62, pl. 6, f. 2.
° Family BORNELLID.
BORNELLA, Gray, Fig. Moll. Anim., iv., 1850, p. 107.
1172—adamsi Gray, op. cit., p. 107, pl. 196, f. 6; B. her-
manne Aneas, op. cit:, p. Gl; ph'6, f11.
M 110 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Family PLEUROPHYLLIDIADA.
PLEUROPHYLLIDIA, Meckel, Archiv. Anat. & Physiol,
Vin., VS2Z3.0e) L9G.
1173—eygnea Bergh, Malak. Blatt., xxiii., 1876, p. 9,
pl. 1, f. 1-7; Basedow & Hedley, op. cit., p. 138,
pL LOY A 2:
Family DORIDIDA.
HEXABRANCHUS, Ehrenberg, Symb. Phys. Anim., 1831.
1174—flammulatus Quoy & Gaim., Doris, Zool. Astrolabe,
i, 1833, p. 257, pl. 17, f. 6-10; Basedow & Hed-
Leys OD. wCit. py lao:
ASTERONOTUS, Ehrenberg, Sym. Phys. Anim., 1831.
1175—mabilla Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p. 249,
pl. 28, £, 1=4.
HYPSELODORIS, Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Philad.,
Vil, 18a.) 388:
1176—obscura Stimpson, loc. cit., p. 388; Goniodoris
erossel, Angas, Journ. de Conch., xii., 1864, p. 54,
Pipo, eile
CHROMODORIS, Alder & Hancock, Monogr. Brit. Nud.
Moll., Pt. vi., 1854.
1177—bennetti Angas, Goniodoris, Journ. de Conch., xii.,
1864, p. ol, pl 4 te 10;
1178—erinacea Crosse, Goniodoris, Op. cit.,, Diy ot aia
£5,
1179—daphne Angas, op. cit., .p. 54, pl. 5, f. 3.
1180—festiva Angas, op. cit., p. 53, pl. 4, f. 12.
1181—loringi Angas, op. cit., p. 52, pl. 4, f. 11.
1182—runcinata Bergh, Reis. Arch. Philipp., i1., 1877,
p. 479-81, pl. 51, f. 32-33.
11838—splendida Angas, op. cit., p. 55, pl. 5, f. 2.
1184—-verrucosa Crosse, op. cit., p. 56, pl. 5, f. 4.
CASELLA, H. & A. Adams, Gen. Ree. Moll., ii., 1858, p. 57.
1185—atromarginata Cuvier, Doris, Ann. Mus., iv., 1804,
p. 478, pl. 2, f. 6; Bergh, Siboga Opisthobranchiata,
1905, p. 162, pl. 2, f. 8; Basedow & Hedley, Trans.
Roy. Soc. 8.A., xxix., 1905, p. 142.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 111
CERATOSOMA, Adams & Reeve, Samarang Zool., 1848,
p. 67.
1186—brevicaudatum Abraham, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.
(4), xviil., 1876, p. 142, pl. 8, f. 6; Basedow &
iediey,) Trang, Roy... Soc. S:Acycxxix, 1905, p.
148, pl. 1.
Family DORIOPSID.
DORIOPSIS, Pease, Proce. Zool. Soc., 1860, p. 32.
1187—aurea Quoy & Gaim., Doris, Astrolabe Zool., u,
1833, p. 265, pl. 19, f. 4-7; Basedow & Hedley,
Op: ett, ps -l45) ple 7, £4
1188—australiensis Abraham, Proc. Zool. Soe., 1877, p.
ZA pl oo, &. 25, 26,
1189—australis Angas, Actinodoris, Journ. de Conch.,
mie lor, p. 49, pl. 4, fie. 8:
1190—carneola Angas, Doris, op. cit., p. 48, pl. 4, f. 7;
Basedow & Hedley, op. cit., p. 157, pl. 6, f. 1, 2.
1191—denisoni Angas, op. cit., p. 45, pl. 4, f. 2.
1192—nodulosa Angas, op. cit., p. 48, pl. 4, f. 6.
1193—pantherina Angas, op. cit., p. 47, pl. 4, f. 5.
1194—-violacea Quoy & Gaim., Doris, Astrolabe Zool.,
i., 1838, p. 264, pl. 19, f. 1-8.
Family POLYCERIIDA.
TRIOPA, Johnston, Ann. Nat. Hist., 1. 1838, p. 123.
1195—yatesi Angas, op. cit., p. 60, pl. 5, f. 8.
PALIO, Gray, Guide Brit. Mus., 1857, p. 213.
1196—cooki Angas, Polycera, op. cit., p. 58, pl. 5, f. 6.
ANGASIELLA, Crosse, Journ. de Conch., xii., 1864, p. 50.
1197—edwardsi Angas, op. cit., p. 49, pl. 4, f. 9.
PLACAMOPHERUS, Leuckart in Ruppel Reise Nord
Afrika, 1828, p. 17.
1198—imperialis Angas, op. cit., p. 59, pl. 5, f. 7.
Family ELYSIID&.
ELYSIA, Risso, Journ. de Phys., lxxxvii., 1818, p. 376.
1199—australis Quoy & Gaim., Actwon, Astrolabe Zool.,
11., 1833, p. 317, pl. 24, f. 18-20; E. coogeensis,
Angas, op. cit., p. 69, pl. 6, f..9.
M 112 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Nudibranchs of Uncertain Position.
1200—Doris arbutus Angas, op. cit., p. 47, pl. 4, f. 4.
1201—Doris chrysoderma, Angas, op. cit., p. 46, pl. 4, f. 3.
Doris obtusa Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei.
Philad., vi, 1855;._p. 389:
This species has not been figured, the type is lost, and
it may therefore be discarded as unrecognisable.
Doris excavata Stimpson, op. cit., p. 389, ditto.
Class SCAPHOPODA (1202 — 1208).
DENTALIUM, Linné, Syst. Nat., x., 1758, p. 785.
1202—erectum Sowerby, Thes. Conch., 111.,:1860, P- 99,
Tle. Aa ite De
1203—lubricatum Sowerby, op. cit., p. 97, pl. 225, f. 56;
Vereo, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A. xxxv., [9S oe 210,
pl. 26, £74.
1204—-platyceras Sharp & Pilsbry, Man. Conch., XVil.,
1898, p. 126, pl. 22, f. 58-60.
1205—thetidis Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903, p.
2) ook, te Od,
1206—virgula Hedley, op. cit., p. 328, f. 62; May, Proc.
Roy. ‘Soc, Tasm., 195)... 79:
HK. A. Smith has erroneously recorded (Proc. Malae Soc.,
1, 1894, p. 60) D. capillosum, Jeff., D. ensiculus, Jeff.,
and D. panormitanum, Chenu, from 410 fathoms off Syd-
ney. | :
CADULUS, Philippi, Moll. Sicil., ii., 1844, p. 208.
1207—acuminatus Tate, Proc. Roy. Soe. 8.A., ix., 1887,
p. 194; Verco, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.A., xxvili., 1904,
p. 1388, pl. 26, £. 1-6:
1208—spretus Tate & May, Trans. Roy. Soe. S.A., Xxiys
1900, p. 102; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1903,
p. 328.
- Smith has erroneously recorded (Proce. Malac. Soe., if
1894, p. 60) Cadulus propinquus, Sars, from 410 fathoms
~ off Sydney.
MOLLUSCA— HEDLEY. M 113
Sub-Kingdom BRACHIOPODA.
Family LINGULIDZ.
LINGULA, Bruguiére, Eneycl. Meth. vers., 1789, Expl.,
pl. 200.
1—rostrum Shaw, Mytilus, Nat. Miscell., ix., 1797,
peialo-tledley, .P.L.S.N.5.W.;, xl. 917, p 694
Family CRANIIDA.
CRANIA, Retzius, Schrift. Ges. Fr. Berlin, i1., 1781, p. 66.
2—-suessi Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiil., 1862, pl. 1, f. 2.
Family RHYNCHONELLID.
CRYPTOPORA, Jeffreys, Nature, Dec., 1869, p. 136.
3—brazierl Crane, Atretia, Trans. Linn. Soce., iv.,
1887, p. 175, pl. 25, f. 16-17; Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W.,
mext., 1906, p:.467, pl. 36, £. 1, 2.
AETHEIA, Thomson, Geolog. Mag., Sept., 1915, p. 389.
4_-colurnus Hedley, Hemithyris, Ree. Austr. Mus.,
meee, p44, i: 1, 8.
Family TEREBRATULIDA.
TEREBRATULINA, D’Orbigny, Compt. Rend. Aecad.,
xxv., 1847, p. 268.
5—cancellata Koch, Conch. Cab., vii., 1848, p. 35, pl.
ao, ).,; f. L1-13.
6—radula Hedley, P.L.S.N.S.W., xxix., 1904, p. 209,
pl. 10, f. 48-50.
LYOTHYRELLA, Thomson, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlviii., 1916,
p. 44; Jackson, Geolog. Mag. ns. (6), v., 1918,
Deyto:
7—fulva Blochman, Lyothrina, Zool. Anz., xxx., 1906,
p. 698, and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1918, p. 112,
pls) 10, 12.
Family TEREBRATELLIDA.
MEGERLINA, Deslongchamps, Bull. Soe. Linn. Nor-
mand. (2), viil.,. 1884, p. 159.
8—lamarckiana Davidson, Kraussia, Proce. Zool. Soe.,
1852 (1854), p. 80, pl. 14, f. 22, 23; Gatliff & Ga-
piel Viet. “Nat., xxx., 1914p. 2130 ©
7
M 114 MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
CAMPAGES, Hedley, Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 1905, p. 43.
§—furcifera Hedley, op. cit., p. 43, f. 5, 6; Thomson,
Geol. Mag., Nov., 1916, p. 500.
10—jaffeensis Blochman, Magasella, Trans. Roy. Soe.
S.A., xxxiv., 1910, p. 92, pl. 27, £. 6-9; Hedley;
Endeavour Biolog. Result., 1911, p. 114, pl. 20,
f. 41-42.
MAGELLANIA, Bayle, Journ. de Conch., xxviii., 1880,
p. 240.
11—flavescens Lamarck, Terebratula, An. s. vert., vi.,
1819, p. 246; Davidson, Trans. Linn. Soe., iv.,
1886, p. 41, pl. 7, f. 6-9.
MAGADINA, Thomson, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlviii., 1915, p.
ooo.
12—cumingii Davidson, Terebratella, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (2), ix., 1852, p. 368, and Trans. Linn. Soe.
(2), iv., Zool., 1887, p. 97, pl 17, tf 2aeaz
FRENULINA, Dall, Proc. U.S. Museum, xvii., 1894, p. 724.
13—pulchella Sowerby, Terebratula, Thes. Conch., 1..
1844, p. 360, pl. 71, f. 105-7; Brazier, Journ. of
Conch., vi., 1889, p. 82.
14-sanguinolenta Gmelin, Anomia, Syst. Nat., xiii,
1791, p. 3347; Davidson, Trans. Linn. Soce., iv.,
Zool., 1887, p. 108, pl. 20, f. 1-8.
ALDINGIA, Thomson, Geol. Mag., Nov., 1916, p. 501.
15—willemoesi Davidson, Megerlia, Trans. Linn. Soe.
Zool. (2), iv., 1887, p. 111, pl 19; 1:32am
In error, Terebratula pisum has been recorded by
Sowerby (Thes. Conch., i., 1844, p. 345) from Sydney;
Liothyris uva by Davidson (Chall. Zool., i., 1880, p. 31)
from Twofold Bay; and Megerlia truncata by Dall (Am.
Journ. Conch., vi., 1871, p. 130) from Sydney.
New Names are proposed in this publication as follows:
Generic :—Attenuata, Austrodrillia, Epideira, Etrema,
Exomilus, Guraleus, Inquisitor, Hemidaphne, Macteola,
Nepotilla, Provexillum, Scabrella.
Specific:—Anabathron contabulatum lene, Pseudareo-
pagia botanica, Asthenotoma subtilinea, Bullaria botanica,
Daphnella botanica, Gomphina fulgida, Trivia caelatura,
Lepsiella botanica, Myrtaea botanica.
i a
Acanthochitona!
Aclesia ..
Acmea...
Acmea_.
Acteon
Acus
Adacnarca
Adeorbis
Admete
ZEtheia
Aisopus
Agnewla
Akera
Aldingia
wea,” ...
Amalthea
Amauropsis
Amphidesma
Amphithalamus
Amusium
Anabathron
Anatina
Aneilla...
Ancillaria
Angasiella
Anomia
Antigona
Apaturris
Aplustrum
Aplysia
Arca ba
Architectonica
Arcopagia
Arcoperna
Argonauta
Asaphis
Aspella
Aspergillum
Assemania
Astrea
Astele ...
Asteronotus
Asthenotoma ...
Ataxocerithium
Attenuata
Atlanta
Auricula
Austrotriton ...
Austrodrillia .
MOLLUSCA—-HEDLEY.
INDEX TO GENERA.
Austrosarepta
Avicula
Barbaia
Barnea...
Bassina
| Basilissa
Bathyarca
Bathytoma
Bembicium
Bittium
| Bornia...
| Bornella Ee
Brachyodontes
Brookula
Bulla
Bullaria
Bullinula
| Bursa ...
Caducifer
Cadulus
Ceecum...
Callistochiton. a
Calliostoma
| Calliotrochus ...
| Callochiton
Callomphala .
Calyptrea
| Campages
Cancellaria
Cantharidella...
Cantharidus ...
Cantharus
Capulus
Cardita
Carditella
| Cardium
Carinaria
Casella...
| Cassidula
| Cassis .
Cavolina
Cellana
Ceratosoma
Cerithiopsis
Cerithium
Chama...
Charisma
Charonia
M 115
M 116
Cheilea
Cheletropis
Chelidonura ...
Chileutomia
Chiton...
Chlamys
Choriplax
Chromodoris ...
Cingulina
Cithna
Circe
Cirsonella
Clanculus
Clathurella
Clausinella
Clavagella
Clavatula
Cleidotherus ...
’ Clementia
Clio
Clione ...
Cocculina
Cocculinella ke
Cochlodesma ...
Codakia
Columbarium...
Columbella
Cominella
Condylocardia
Conus ...
Coralliophila mw
Corbis ...
Corbula
Coriareus
Coryphella
Couthouyia
Crania...
C raspedotriton ;
Crassatella
Crassatellites...
Cratis ...
Crepidula
Creseis...
Crossea
Cryptomya
Cryptopora
Cryptoplax
Cucullea
Cultellus
Cuna
Cuspidaria
Cuvieria
Cyamiomactra
Cyclas ...
Cyclopecten
Cyclostrema ...
MARINE FAUNA, N. S. WALES.
Cylichna
Cylichnella
Cylichnina
Cyliodrobulla
Cyllene
Cymatium
Cymbiola
Cyprea
Cyrenella
Cyrilla...
Cytherea
Dacosta
Dacrydium
Daphnella
Dentalium
Diacria
Diala
Dimya ..
Diodora
Diplodonta
Discohelix
Divaricella
Dolabella
Dolabrifera
Dolium
Doriopsis
Doris
Donax ...
Dosidicus
Dosinia
Doto
Drillia...
Drupa ...
Duphearia
Ectorisma
Elysia ..
Emarginula ...
Epideira
Epigrus
Epitonium
Erato ..
Ericusa
Ervilia ..
Lrycina
Estea °
Etbalia
Etrema
EKucithara
Euchelus
EKugyrina
Eulima
Eulimella
EKuprymna
Eurytrochus “
Euselenops
Euryta
Euthria
Eutropia
Exomilus
Fascinus
Fasciolaria
Ficus
Fiona ...
Firoloida
Fissurella
Flabellina
Foramelina
Yossarina
Fossarus
Frenulina
Friginatica
Fusinus
Fusitriton ...
Fusus ... co
Gadinia ies
Gafrarium ...
Galerus ele
Galiteuthis ..,
Garl oss
Gena ...
Gibbula
Glauconomya..,
Glaucilla
Glycymeris
Gomphina
Guraleug
Gyrineum
Haliotis
Hamincea
Haurakia
Helcioniscus ...
Heliacus
Hemidonax
Hemidaphne ...
Hemitoma
Hexabranchus
Hinea ...
Hipponix
Homalogyyra ...
Humphreyia ...
Hyalea
Hyalocylis
Hydatina
Hypselodoris im
Inquisitor
Ischnochiton as
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY.
Isognomon
Janthina
Janus ...
Joannisiella
Jouannetia-
Kellya...
Kerguelenia *
Kraussina
Lamellaria
Larinopsis ;..
Levilitorina
Lasea ...
Lataxiena
Laternula
Latirofusus
Leda
Leiostraca
Lepeta... 00.
Lepidopleurus
Lepsiella
Lepton
Leuconopsis
Leucotina
Leucosyrinx ...
Lima
Limea ...
Limopsis
Lingula
Lioconcha
Liolophura
Liothyrina
Lironoba
Lippistes
Liotella
Liotia ...
Liotina
Lissarca
Lissotesta
Lithodomus
Litiopa...
Littorina
Livonia
Lodderia
Loligo ...
Lorica ...
Loricella
Loripes
Lucapinella
Lucina...
Lucinida
Lutraria
Lyonsiella
| Lyria ...
\
M 118 MARINE FAUNA, N.S. WALES.
PAGE PaGE
Lyothyrella ... de .. M113 | Nassarius ... H+ 1. a oe
Nassa . Ne i ee
Macgillivrayia cer Ss 168.) Naticare ot A es) ae
Macoma ee lo .-- 9» 26 | Nausitoria ms oot so
Macrocallista ... sed fy 2B | Nesran.:, i ate gn
Macteola », 82 | Neolepton _... i on ge
Mactra... = », 29 | Nepotilla » 83
Maculotriton ... a ... 9», 87 | Neotrigonia ae
Magadina _... ass .. yl14 | Nerita ... ‘ ise wasps ee
Magellania_... Rie ... 5 l14 | Neritina oS ete an age
Magilina . act ... y, 6L | Nodopelagia ... ee 4) ap eee
Malleus cn; ch, Oe | Notarchusa: ee. “a ee |)
Mangilia ; ,, 84 | Notobranchea ak one
Marcia .. cas a 3 », 24 | Notodarus ae Bes sco. aearelee
Margarita... a .. 9, 44° | Notomytilus ... fo ee
Marginella_... a 0 43°75 | Notosetia ae 3a >,
Marinula » 94-| Nucula .. ; oe ied
Martesia » 32 | Nuculana nee a wen. oe ee
Marseniopsis ... b, Sto
Mathilda ue oe ... 59 97 | Obeliscus =P ae Lae ay tee
Megatebennus ie ... 3, 40 | Obtortio be ig, ie) pete
Megerlina see 59118 | Odostomia pe co ae
Melanella is hi NCO Ova Ss. pions ce ai ghee
Melarhaphe .. 4, 00 | Olivella see Sih can | geen
Mercenaria ... ths LO N24 \ Omalaxis( sh ¥ es
Merelina its ioe Ao2 i Onebidiam: 2s we ou ee
Meroe... a ae ee eee! jaOmois 4 bitte Sh BADE eis
Merria... », 62 | Onithochiton ... ie ae
Mesodesma $05 ..» 99 80 | Onychoteuthis A coe
Micromelo ... ae ... 3105 | Ophicardelus ... re tens sae
Microvoluta ... ra .. 5s 86 | Orbitestella ... ide Perper: |<)
Minolia iF om wee g9 44 | Oscanius ip he wae, dante
Mitra ... is 1s, Jo, 8b), Oscilla: ... a ri wot fae ea
Mitromorpha .... : i. 3h 3.280) | Ostreaize at is ai ae
Modiolus aie ahs ae 1L | Ovala ... UG. oe Sic aa ee
Modiolarca », 12 | Oxygyrus ae ste sinc
Monia ... os », 10 | Oxynoe so a8 wae” oot
Monoptygma .., », 96
Monilea a: és wien yg 4a bo Palio: eae: ns it PAPE
Monodonta _... roe ... 5, 43 | Panope ne) SCE te
Montacuta ... st “oy, 20°) Pandara aa wo 7
Musculus »» Ll | Paphia... A 2 pe vac, soso
Murex ..., » 91 | Paraclathurella aes Lat ee
Mylitta », 20 | Parthenia ae is cea ee
Myochama a ie - ,, 18 | Parviterebra ... aan MBit
Myodora rxY as Ue ecole. ade tte a: lg ee
Myrina ae Sele ww. yy 6} Patelloida ©. oe ame
Myrtza ie ts ... 5, 18 | Pecten... 43 we von, eee
Mysia .. fds rep ... 5, 19 | Pectunculus ... = a Ae
Mysella aes ge ... 5 20 | Pedicularia ... ee oon a
Mytilus aA, Es we 1 LP) Pellthitorina, 22 a5 a ae
Myonia “he sas ... 5 97 | Perlamater p :
Myxa ... ide i. ..» », 98 | Periploma
Peristernia
Naranio is sue 4 25 | Perna
Naricava in ve a y 62 Petricota
Phasianella
Phalium :
Phenacolepas ...
Philine
Philippia
Philippiella
Philobrya
Pholas ...
Phytia...
Pinctada
Pinna ...
Pisania
Pitaria... ar
Placamopherus
Plaxiphora
Plecotrema
Pleurobranchus
Pleurophyllidia
Pleurotoma
Plicatula
Polinices
Polypus
Poroleda
Poromya
Provexillum ...
Potamopyrgus
Pronuncula
Psammobia
Pseudarcopagia
Pseudamycla ...
Pseudodaphnella
Pseudorraphitoma
Pseudorissoina
Pteria ...
Pterocera
Pterosoma
Pugnus
Puncturella
Pupa
Purpura
Pyrazus
Pyrene...
Pythina
Radius... hs
Radula... oe
Reta ..
Ranella
Rapana
Recluzia
Retizafra
Retusa...
Rhizorus ee
Rhodostoma ...
Rhyssoplax
Ringicula
MOLLUSCA—HEDLEY.
PAGE
.. M 45
ater (SGRMOR
Rissoa ...
Rissoina
Rissolina
Rissopsis
Rizzolia
Rochefortia
Roya
Salinator
Sarepta
Saxicava
Scabrella
Scaphella
Sealaria
Schismope
Scintilla
Scissurella
Scutus ...
Seila
Sepia
Sepioloidea
| Sepioteuthis ...
| Septifer
| Serpula
Sigapatella
| Sigaretus
| Siliquaria
Sinum ...
Siphonaria
Sirius ...
| Solariellopsis ei
Solarium
Solecardia
Solen
Soletellina
Solidula
| Spheenia
Spiratella
Spirula
| Spisula
| Spondylus
Standella
Stephopoma ..
Stilifer...
Stiva ..:
Stomatella
Strebloceras ...
Strigilla
Strombiformis
| Strombus
- Struthiolaria ...
Styliola
Stylopsis
Sunetta
Sypharochiton.
Syrnola
M 120
Tallorbis
Tapes ...
Tatea ...
Tectarius
Teinostoma
Tellimya
Tellina...
Tenagodes
Terebra
‘eyes bearer
Teredo
Tethys...
Thais ...
Theodoxis
Theora...
Thracia
' Thraciopsis
Thvasira
Thylacodes
Tiberia
Tonicia
Tonna ...
Torinia
Tornatina
Trigonia
Triopa...
Triphora
Triton...
Trivia ...
Trochus
Trophon
Truncaria
Truncatella
(Supplement to the Journal of the Royal Society
New South Wales, Vol. LI.)
MARINE FAUNA, N.S. WALES,
PAGE
. M45
jae
9) OO
oil
ry ll
a0)
Pe 5)
» 6l
srt
L138
aoe
Od
», 93
5 49
ee
» 13
Tugalia
Turbo.
Turbonilla
Turquetia
Turritella
Typhis ..
Umbraculum ...
Vaginella
Vanikoro
Venus...
Venericardia ...
Venerupis
Veprecula
Verconella
- Vermetus
Vermicularia...
Verticordia
Vexillum
Volsella
Voluta...
Volvula
Vulsella
Xenophora
Xymene
Zatra
Zemira...
Zenatia
Zeidora
Ziziphinus
Spdneyp :
F, W. Waits, PRinTER, 344 Kent STREET.
1918,
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES
3 9088 01308 4462
Pereeesejude
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11